Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

"You'll never make me leave
I wear this on my sleeve
Give me a reason to believe

So give me all your poison
and give me all your pills
and give me all your
hopeless hearts that make me ill you're running after something that you'll never kill
if this is what you want, then fire at will."
Thank You For The Venom-My Chemical Romance

“Will you hold him still? How the fuck do you expect me…”

“Shut the fuck up and get on with it! We don’t have all night!”

“Shut your goddamn trap and help me or I’ll shove you out into the daylight…”

“You didn’t chain him tight enough! Do you want him to escape?”

“The tubing! How the hell do you plan for the poison to get to his veins if you KEEP PINCHING OFF THE TUBING with the chains?”

“GENTLEMEN! IF YOU PLEASE!” My bellow surprises all three of the vamps who are trying…trying, mind you...to chain me to a wooden St. Andrew’s cross. The chains are digging deeper and deeper into my skin as these three losers fight over just how tight they need to chain me in order to keep me from escaping. “Must I poison myself?” I watch these three idiot’s expressions slowly turn from stunned silence to anger to rage at my smart mouthed comments. But why would they be surprised at anything I say? I’m known for my dry wit and unending sarcasm, as well as for my charm and handsome face. In fact, any vamp that has been alive for the last 900 years or so knows who I am the second they enter the room I’m in.

You see…everyone knows me, as well they should. Because I’m not only famous—I’m infamous.

I’m Damian Lavelli—and I’m their worst nightmare. Theirs…and yours.

“I could do a better job with my eyes closed! Which torture school did you flunk out of before the Council took pity on you and gave you a job?” I can’t help myself (as usual)—I must throw in a parting shot. “Your makers should hang their heads in shame because all of you SUCK…”

The ring leader of this group of pathetic misfits throws a right-handed punch into my stomach, making me at once gasp for air. But I keep smirking through the pain, causing not only one but three jaw-breaking punches that connect in short succession. I feel a trickle of blood start down the right side of my face, the corner of my mouth broken open by a ring on the thug’s middle finger. I see another arch of a fist towards my face, which is suddenly stopped by another thug.

“Dude…” DUDE? Whatever happened to the eloquent language of my youth? What’s this “dude” shit? Are we all cowboys now? “…cut it the fuck out! We were only to set him up and go! You never can stop yourself once you start, and if you kill him…”

“Yeah, DUDE…” I shake my head back as far as I can in an attempt to shake the hair out of my eyes. “…listen to your little friend here. Do you REALLY want the Council to know you can’t even follow basic instructions? I mean, really…” my cold eyes lock on to the thug in front of me, hidden meanings becoming suddenly all too clear in my gaze. “…do you want me to have to visit you in the future, to set things straight?”

Out of the corner of my eye, I see the third thug slowly turning the dial on a large box. The metal-lined box holds the poison which, set to enter my system in slow, evenly timed drops will be delivered by the tubing that runs from the box into my side. The second thug lets go of my aggressor, who is still staring at me in shock. I know he is wondering just how in the fuck would I make a threat against him, even as I am being strapped down and filled by the instrument of my doom.

Obviously, he thinks I can be killed. What an asswipe!

This is the third time in my life that the self-absorbed, inferior, and miserable excuse of a Council has tried to kill me (or at the very least—tried to punish me severely). And here I am! Still alive and kicking (well, not exactly KICKING at the moment) and refusing to back down. Why, you ask? Because I refuse to let them win, of course!

What fun would that be?

As the instruments of my demise taunt me a few more times and then slowly make their way to the door, they leave me to comprehend the meaning of life and death. Or should I say…MY life and (as those goons and Council believe I will soon face) my impending death. And since it seems that (as I feel another slow drop of poison enter my veins) I will be facing that impending death sooner than later—I might as well share with you the story of my life.

Chapter Text

Still here, friend? I CAN call you friend, right? I mean…I’m letting you in on some of my deepest, darkest secrets, am I not? That’s what you’re here for—the secrets that make me who I am, which I’ve kept to myself for so many centuries. You’re probably wondering how I became such a pompous, rude, obnoxious ass…or were you simply wondering if I will escape before the poison finishes me off?

This may turn out to be the shortest narrative in history. Stick around and find out!

I must say, this entire experience has made me realize one thing—my life story, my ENTIRE life story—has never been told before. What a surprise, especially with my ego, huh?

As I feel the first sting of acid hit my vein, I gasp in pain. Fuck! I’ve forgotten just how bad this shit stings! I try to move my arms and legs again before realizing my folly—the more I struggle, the tighter the chains become. Therefore, I must devise another plan to escape. But in the meantime, I shall start my tale…

I was born in Genoa, a port city in Italy. I recently discovered that the name of the city is said to have come from a two-headed monster named ‘Giano.’ And here I thought the only monster in Genoa was my mother!

Her name was Countess Lucrecia Maria Lavelli. I was her third born child who—according to the midwife that helped bring me into the world—would become famous one day. Little did they know how close to the truth her prediction really was…

My mother was bitch to the core. No, that’s not true. To be a bitch, you care about SOMETHING, at least yourself. The only time I ever saw my mother show any form of caring about ANYTHING was when her father died, and she found out she was listed in his will. Believe me—when the will was read and my mother didn’t receive a single penny from my grandfather, she showed her true nature. She hired a couple of thugs to kill my aunt (who inherited my grandfather’s estate and his millions), paid a judge to write a new will claiming HER the next in line to inherit, and stood at my aunt’s casket with crocodile tears clinging to her face. She never gave a shit about her father or her sister, she simply wanted wealth and prestige. She showed the same contempt to my father in secret; when he bothered to pay attention to her, she always pretended to be docile and sweet. But even he knew it was all an act—her only loves were money and cock.

My mother kept an entire stable of lovers—young, handsome and always hard. My father was away often, either running his many businesses or attending the king at court. Mother paid spies handsomely to keep her informed of my father’s whereabouts. She never cared if her children or servants saw her fucking some stud in her marriage bed, but hell if she was going to get caught by her husband! That, I overheard her tell my sister one spring day when I was six years old, would simply never do! But of course…she had the family name to think about, right? But why bother? The entire village knew she was a whore…everyone but my father, that is…

On my eighth birthday, my older sister Elena made me a birthday cake. I was so excited! I wanted to share the news with everyone! See, I was a lonely child. My first-born brother Alberto was the heir to the family fortune (whatever would be left after mother squandered most of it, that is!) as well as the family business, so he shadowed father on his daily business rounds beginning at the tender age of six. Father insisted that Alberto learn the family business early, since he expect to send him off to military school when he became 13 (a tradition of the aristocracy in my village) so he would have a duel occupation. This technique of schooling would make Alberto very valuable to whatever king was on the throne when Alberto took over the family business.

My sister Elena spent most of her time either in the care of a tutor (she was the first girl in our family to learn to read and write) or at a ‘finishing school’ in the village. It was the place where ‘young ladies’ were taught music, deportment and the skills needed to run a large family. I dearly wanted to learn how to play the violin or the pianoforte, but my mother refused, always with a sneer on her face. “For the last time, Damian! Music learning is for LADIES! What are you, a girl?”

My sister was sweet, kind hearted…everything my mother was not. When we did manage to spend any real time together, she secretly taught me the very same music lessons she was being taught at that hoity-toity school in the village. After a year, I could master the pianoforte, and I was becoming a decent violin player.

By my eighth birthday, my mother had given birth to seven children—two sets of twins followed me in the birth order. Neither set of twins looked like my parents, and each set looked different from each other—making everyone snicker when they saw our family together. By this time, my mother’s ‘appetite for cock’ (her words, not mine) was out of control—even my father was beginning to catch on. But she never slowed down her fucking, nor did she try to hide what she was doing anymore. My father simply started staying away from home more and more—and there were rumors that he had bought another house, which he filled with young, pretty girls from a neighboring village.

My mother became more and more distant from her children over time, treating them as if we were simply a bother to her, something that she could easily ignore as you would obnoxious flies on a summer’s day. She had plenty of nannies and wet nurses to care for us children, so why should she care if any of us became sick or missed her? She was totally apathetic to us all. But me? I was an entirely different case altogether.

Lucrecia Maria Lavelli hated my guts…and she went out of her way to prove it, every single chance she had.

I never understood why she hated me. She never explained herself, to me. Elena and Alberto would give me sad glances when mother would push me away, as if to say they were sorry. Why should they be sorry? They were not physically shoved out of the way when mother walked by them, or slapped when they tried to talk to her. She simply ignored them. But me? She physically and verbally lashed out at me every chance she had. Her insults would ring through my brain every single night I laid my head down on my pillow, my body sore from the pushes and punches she gave me during the day. The older I got, the worse the abuse became—what started out as simple slaps and orders to go away, turned into kicks and punches every time we were in the same room. I never knew when she would verbally lash out, her words harsher than her physical abuse. I was a disappointment, a rogue, a devil. I should’ve never been born, should’ve been aborted, should be killed, abandoned—she constantly told me I made her sick simply by seeing my face.

My main reaction to all of this? Confusion, of course. I was her child, and even though I knew from a young age that she preferred the hard bodies she rode every day to her own son, her desire to push me away made me want to be with her more and more all the time. I WANTED to hear from her that I was important, that I mattered…that I was loved. I craved love like the drowning crave air. I wanted to feel her arms around me so badly, I wanted to hear she was proud of me.

I would’ve died for a kind word from her. I loved her as much as I grew to hate her later in life.

Anyways…where was I? Oh yes!

On the morning of my eighth birthday, my nanny woke me earlier than usual. When I complained that it was my special day and that I wanted to spend it sleeping in, she told me to stop complaining and hurry up out of bed. When I pouted she informed me that Elena had arrived the night before from school to start my special day with my favorite custard cake. I smiled as I threw back my covers, my mother’s cold voice booming down the hall as she walked past my room towards hers. “Get your lazy ass out of bed, Damian! I raised you better than to lay around all day!”

Regardless of my mother’s words, I wanted to run to her and share my good news. A cake! The last time I ate custard cake was almost two years ago, at a picnic in the village.

I ran down the hall and skidded to a halt just inside mother’s room. Before I could call out to mother that there was birthday cake in the kitchen, I noticed a man standing at the foot of my mother’s bed. My mother was nowhere to be seen.

As soon as the young man noticed me, he took a few steps towards me, his head cocked to the side as if examining me carefully. I once again looked around the room, my gaze landing everywhere but at the blonde standing in front of me. The young man (somewhere around 18 or 19 years old) walked slowly towards me until he was close enough that I could smell brandy on his breath. While he did not seem extremely intoxicated, his lazy smile and lax demeanor made me realize that he was not completely sober, either.

“You just missed your mother. She decided to visit a friend in the village.” I knew what he was referring to—my mother had no friends. What he really was saying was that mother had set out to select some more young studs for the upcoming week, hoping to find someone she had yet to sleep with. Considering her track record? That task would be close to impossible…

“Oh! Ah…ok” I stutter out, immediately turning back towards the doorway. I was anxious to get to my cake…and get away from the young blonde. But before I can make it to the doorway, he reached around me and grabbed the door, slamming it shut and locking it quickly. I try to push his arm out of the way to get to the lock but, in a move that proved his recent military training, he easily flipped me around and slammed me backwards into the wall. I began to struggle and call out, but he quickly placed a hand over my mouth, his entire body pushing forward to keep me pinned against the wall.

“Is that any way for a Lavelli to behave?” he chides me, his free hand softly stroking the side of my neck and left arm. “You must be Damian. Your mother has told me all about you!” His tone made me stop struggling for a moment, a look of what can only be labeled as confusion covering my face. Why in the hell would my mother be talking to one of her lovers about me, when she obviously hated me so badly?

Easily reading my expression, the blonde laughed. “Oh yes, little Lord…your mother had LOTS to say about you!!!” His hand pushed harder against my mouth as his other hand slowly traveled from the side of my neck down the front of my throat. The blonde then moved back a half-step so his hand began a slow path across my chest, pausing at a nipple.

As his nails dug a brief path across my nipple, it became erect instantly. The blonde leaned forward slightly, his tongue following the very path his hand just made on my body. I felt a quick stab of pain as he bit my nipple through my night shirt before pulling back again. “Your mother told me that you like boys, little Lord.” My eyes widened in shock, which made the blonde throw back his head, his laughter filling the room. “I told her that you were too young to know the ways of the world, but she laughed and said that seeing her with young men tightened your pants.” The blonde’s fingertips continue their path down my body to the waistband of my sleep pants. “I wonder…if I touched you, little Lord…” The blonde smirked as he slid a finger under the waistband of my pants, my breathing becoming labored and strained. “…would you fight me, or simply…”

Slender fingers reach in with a boldness that caused my heart to race, my cock tingling at the first ghost-like touch. I began to panic—I pushed against the arm that pinned my upper body to the wall, causing the blonde’s hand to clench my mouth so tight I feared my lips would crack at the corners. I attempted to kick the blonde’s leg with my foot, to no avail. My molester was much stronger than I, so much so that there was little I could do to dislodge him.

The hand in my sleep pants slides in even further, and seconds later my cock is engulfed in a large hand. I was a young boy—it only took a few seconds for my cock to become fully erect.

“Ah, she was right!” The blonde smirked at me once again as I attempted to shake my head against his words. “Oh, don’t try to deny it, little Lord! When I was around your age, my uncle attempted to touch me, the same way I am touching you.” I feel the blonde’s hand slowly begin to slide up and down my cock, only pausing to collect in the palm of his hand the pre-come that had pooled at the head of my cock. “I didn’t even get half-hard! I was repulsed that a man wanted to touch my cock!” The blonde began to pump my cock faster, his words becoming more breathless as I began to gasp for air. “I knew, even at that young age, that I LOVED tits! I did everything I could to touch every pair I got near. Hell…” I couldn’t help myself—I began quietly moaning in rhythm with the pace of his hand. It felt so fucking good! “…I even grabbed my mother’s tits when I got a chance! And you?” The blonde pressed his body forward even closer, his hand a blur on my cock, my balls beginning to tighten. The blonde leaned his head forward until he was whispering in my ear. “Moaning as I stroke your cock! Maybe you’d like this, too…”

The hand over my mouth is suddenly jerked away, quickly replaced by the blonde’s lips. He moves his free hand downward until it reaches my nipple, squeezing and scratching it sharply until I make a pained noise deep in my throat. The blonde then moves his hand to the other nipple, treating it the same way as his tongue pushes its way down into my mouth. I instinctively push my lower body forward when I feel the blonde’s cock pushing against my hip.

I feel the room begin to spin as the hand on my cock twists sharply on an upward stroke. My balls begin to draw up against my body as I begin to come, the liquid shooting out and landing on the blonde’s hand and forearm. I hear him make a triumphant noise deep in his chest as his kiss deepens, our teeth clashing together briefly. I feel the hand on my cock begin to slow down, to drawl out the pleasure I’m feeling. Instinctively I know that my rapist wants me to enjoy my first orgasm as much as possible. He wants me to look back at my first sexual experience with a guy and see it as a pleasant experience, instead of what it really is…rape.

I whimper when my cock becomes oversensitive, and the blonde slowly pulls his hand out of my pants, his lips still on mine. It takes me a moment to realize that the blonde has pulled his entire body away from mine, except for his lips. My very next thoughts are full of surprise and…embarrassment.

I’m no longer being held down, I’m returning the blonde’s kiss with as much passion as he is kissing me with, I was just made to come by a male and I…enjoyed it!

Do I really prefer boys? Am I…gay?

I feel his tongue lick my bottom lip as he backs away from me, brown eyes locking onto mine as the smirk returns to his lips. Before I can form words or think to scream, come covered fingertip briefly rest on my bottom lip before they are swiftly shoved into my mouth. I struggle at the press of four fingertips against the back of my tongue, the taste of my come bitter.

“That’s it, little Lord. Enjoy your first taste of come.” His eyes twinkle as he begins to slowly thrust his fingers in and out of my mouth. “If you’re a good boy, I’ll make sure you get plenty…”

“That’s NOT going to happen, Thomas!” I see the blonde’s shoulders freeze, his expression morphing from one of vicious delight to fear in mere seconds. Thomas (a name that will haunt my every moment for the rest of my natural and unnatural life) quickly pulls his fingers from my mouth, the motion causing my teeth to instantly ache. I feel his body move away from mine, my body instantly becoming chilled as I turn my attention to an open door directly across from us.

In the doorway of the room stands my mother…and father.

“Get the fuck away from my son, you pervert!” My father lunges at Thomas, a dagger in his hand. I hear Thomas gasp in pain as the dagger is lodged in his chest, the event blocked from my view due to my mother stepping into my line of vision. Her open palm slaps my face repeatedly from side to side as her cold voice reaches my ears.

“DAMIAN! You sick, demented little fag! I KNEW you liked dick, the way you looked at every male you passed gave you away! YOU’RE GOING TO BURN IN HELL!”

“Mother, PLEASE!” My head snapped back and forth under the force of my mother’s hand, until my father’s face appeared behind my mother’s shoulder.

“Lucrecia! Stop it!” My father grabs at my mother’s arms but she jerks away from him, her voice rising higher and higher. “I TOLD you! I told you he is a faggot! You refused to believe me, and now my favorite piece of ass is dead! I WANT HIM OUT OF THE HOUSE! I WANT HIM DEAD!!!!” My mother glares at me one more time before turning on her heel, stepping around my father and storming out of the room.

My father stares at me for a silent moment before his fist connects first with my jaw, then my stomach. Tears fill my eyes as I hear Tommy take his last breath, my father’s fists continuing to slam into my body. I hear my father yell for a slave as my body slowly slides down the wall, to land in a heap at my father’s feet.

As darkness finally takes me under I hear my father growl out to the slave in the doorway “Get the carriage! Dump this faggot off at the monastery and then return and take out the trash …”

Chapter Text

The next thing I remember, one of our servants is yanking me out of my father’s carriage by my wrist. As my body hits the ground I hear a voice quietly ask “What do we have here, my son?” My body has landed at the feet of a tall, muscular monk with long flowing grey hair and black robes (think of him as a modern day Gandalf from Lord of the Rings, with a body more along the lines of Dwayne Johnson, Jean-Claude Van Damme or Vin Diesel.)

“This here’s Damian Lavelli, Father.” My vision swims as the servant and the monk roughly grab my arms and yank me to my feet. “His parents have thrown him out for liking men. I was ordered to bring him to you.”

“Well, young man, that’s quite a sin!” It may be that the extreme pain running through my body is playing tricks on my hearing—I swear that the monk speaking to me is trying his hardest not to chuckle. “I’m sure Monsignor will want to see him straight away. Help me take him in, will you?”

In front of us looms a bleak looking building made of dark stone. Men in long black robes are silently moving around the building, carrying out a variety of tasks. As we move past them, their eyes move over my body as if taking inventory…

My father’s servant and the monk practically drag me through the monastery’s front doors. From what little I can see of the interior, there is little difference to distinguish it from the exterior—dark walls, with the only decoration consisting of wooden crosses of different sizes lining the walls. The closest neighbor to the monastery is around three miles away, which gives it an almost eerie feeling of seclusion and silence.

As silent as the grave.

That is the saying that my mind keeps repeating, a mantra against fear, loneliness, pain, sadness. I want my sister, I want my brother. I want my birthday cake. I want that boy to be alive again. I want my parents to show up at the front door, laughing and joking, saying that this is all a game. I want to go home.

Silent as the grave.

I am roughly shoved onto a wooden straight back chair in the corner of the entry hall before the monk makes his exit, commenting over his shoulder “I will tell the Monsignor he is here” as he leaves. Silence shortly surrounds us as I struggle to keep my tears from falling.

I startle as a hand slaps down hard on my arm. The servant (looming over me, a leer on his face) snickers “You’re in for it now, boy! That fuck boy of the Misses’ brought you down a peg or two, didn’t e’! You think that hand job was bad, wait ‘til the monks get their slimy dicks in your tight little bum! This place is the most perverted monastery in Italy!” I hear laughter from outside the entrance and look up as three monks move into the doorway, smirks on their faces. Chills shoot down my spine as I hear the servant’s echoing laughter as one of the monks looks longingly at me, the same way a thirsty man would look at a well on a hot summer’s day.

My 8-year-old mind is scrambling to look for another reason for the look, for the attention. Am I simply seeing things, allowing my fear to cloud my judgement? Could there be something else going on here, something that I am missing? I mean…I AM in a house of God, right? I should be safe here, correct? Or is the servant telling me the truth? Unfortunately, I am about to find out…

The monk suddenly returns with a gleeful smirk on his face. As he easily slings me over his left shoulder, he grunts to the servant “Tell your master that Monsignor will remove his sins for a tribute of 200 gold coins a year. His sins…” (here the monk pauses for emphasis) “…and the sins of the rest of the Lavelli clan.”

Looking back on it now as an adult, I know that this seemingly innocent phrase is actually a veiled threat. The monk’s demand for money is for my lodgings, my food, as well as the chore of raising an 8-year-old boy to adulthood. But there is more to it than that, sweeties! No, the threat is that, should my father refuse to pay the “tribute,” the Monsignor would make sure that the king was aware of the goings on within the Lavelli family. And I mean ALL of it—infidelity, murders, intrigue…even a rumor (that I heard after I left the monastery) that my father was involved in a plot to overthrow the king.

Well played, Monsignor…well played, indeed!

I hear the servant mumble some nonsense about how he is sure that my father will gladly make a payment soon. The monk mumbles back “See that he does” as he carries me from the room, down several long dark hallways (the entire time in which I try desperately to not throw up on the backs of his thighs) with me staring upside down at dark walls and wooden floors until he stops in front of a red door. I hear him knock as he attempts to shift me on his shoulder, no doubt trying to find a more comfortable hold on me.

“Come in.”

The light from dozens of candles practically blinds me. As my eyes slowly adjust to the light, the words that instantly comes to mind as I attempt to take in my surroundings is “sinfully decadent.”

The walls are stained a deep red, the very color of blood. A thick red and black Oriental carpet covers the floor. Matching tapestries hang on the walls. Heavy wooden furniture, identical to the splendor of the home I have left behind, gives the impression that you are in the midst of royalty.

Come to think about it…I guess I was! At this time in history, religious men in Italy were second only to the King and God himself…if he even exists, that is…

“Drop him, Father Adrian.”

The breath leaves my small body as I am once again dropped face first to the floor. Why have I become no better than luggage? I come from nobility; I should not be treated like this! What is wrong with these people?

In front of my eyes are two black leather boots, highly polished and topped with white robes lined in fur. I grunt out as I instantly feel something hard land across the center of my back.

“On your knees, boy!” Father Adrian orders. “Keep your eyes down, your back straight!” My dazed brain fails to respond immediately to the order. I feel another sharp smack crisscrossing the first hit. A hand then swiftly tightens around my slim upper arm, yanking me up off the floor to face the man in front of me as if I were a rag doll. “UP!” I grunt again as I feel fingers tighten in my shoulder length hair. “You will learn to follow orders quickly and without complaint!” The hand in my hair then yanks my head back sharply, tears immediately filling my eyes. Through my tears, I cannot help but stare into the face of this monster for the first time.

Monsignor Bianchi smiles down at me with the same bemused angelic expression worn by cherubs in church frescoes throughout Italy. However, his angelic smile was contradictory to the coldness found within his eyes. Bianchi’s eyes were coal black, uncaring. Staring down at me as he was, he gave me the same glare that a tiger gives seconds before it devours its prey. I felt a shiver travel down my spine, knowing that I may be standing in a monastery, but I was staring into the very eyes of the devil himself.

Monsignor Bianchi visited my family home every spring on his yearly pilgrimage to court. My mother would demand that my siblings and I stay in our rooms, in the care of our nannies and out of sight. The last thing she wanted to present to the Monsignor was a gaggle of snot nosed kids.

Monsignor’s free hand slashes downward, connecting with my face with enough force to remove the rest of the air from my lungs. Even though I saw the hand approaching my face, I could not turn my face away, the fingers twisting in my long hair ensuring my pacification.

I try to focus on the words that Father Adrian is saying to me, but my ears won’t stop ringing long enough. Even my own mother never hit me that hard!

Monsignor realizes after a few minutes that I am no longer paying attention. An evil grin crosses his face as he raises his hand in a “stop” pose. “Father Adrian, thank you for informing our new arrival of the rules.” I rock back on my knees as the fingers in my hair loosen and move away. “Now Damian, I want you to recite the rules that you were just taught.”

Panic overtakes me. Rules? What rules? Did I hear any rules? I hear Father Adrian softly snicker next to me as I glance from him to the Monsignor. What do I do now? What is going to happen to me?

Monsignor Bianchi sighs his displeasure. “I should have known we would have problems with you, right from the start!” Monsignor and Father exchange an amused glance, and I hear Father Adrian laugh. “I bet he is too busy thinking about what is under your robe, Monsignor!”

Monsignor shoots Father Adrian a look of mock horror as my face turns red with embarrassment. “Father! I’m sure the boy isn’t THAT far deranged with sin!” As my head spins with pain, I watch Monsignor smirk with delight as an evil idea begins to take form. “Bring him along.”

Father grabs my arm and practically drags me out into the hallway. We follow Monsignor through a double set of doors to a path that leads to a small barn at the back of the property. Suddenly a bell begins to ring from a small shed next to the monastery. As we pass them, monks lay down their gardening tools or their baskets. Many bow to Monsignor as he passes them, while boys of all ages simply look down at the ground in respect.

Monsignor takes the arm of a young friar, pulling him forward so he can whisper a few words in his ear. The friar’s eyes connect with mine instantly, and a slight smirk raises his lips. Monsignor then taps his fingers on the friar’s arm, sending him into immediate action. The friar bellows out “Inside, boys! Report to Father Angelus IMMEDIATELY!” as he falls into line behind us.

Father pulls me through the double barn doors, which are then immediately closed behind us. I expected to see horses, farm equipment, stalls—typical barn ‘stuff.’ Oh no, not this barn! Ok, so there WAS hay, but that is as far as ‘typical’ could take you!

There was a long wooden table, a wooden X in the corner, a bedstead with a lumpy hay-stuffed mattress on top. Each had leather straps attached to them. Out of the corner of my eye, I could see different size paddles and buggy whips hanging against one wall.

Monsignor grabs my hair in a tight grip as Father finally releases my arm. My head is pulled back sharply so I am once again looking into Monsignor’s dark eyes. “Damian, we are going to play a little game with you.” He drags me to the wooden X in the corner, pushes me forward until my nose scrapes the wood. Monsignor steps behind me, close enough to my trembling body that I can feel the fur of his robes brushing against my skin.

I begin to scream as multiple hands rip my clothes from my body. The friar instantly appears next to me, his hand reaching down until it clamps tightly across my mouth. Once I am naked, the friar continues to muffle my screams as Father Adrian straps my arms and legs to the cross with rope.

Monsignor hands the friar a long, thick piece of cloth with a large knot in the middle. The friar pushes the knot into my mouth and laughs at my reaction. It tastes rancid, proof that I am not the only boy that has suffered at the hands of these devils. The remainder of the cloth is wound tightly around the bottom half of my head and then tied in the back.

Once rendered defenseless, Monsignor moves forward to stand on the other side of the friar, who is now softly running his fingertips over my bare arm and shoulder. “Damian, I would like to present friar Antony. He has been with us for three years now. One more year and he will move into the rank of Father.” The Monsignor introduces me to the friar with the same tone as if he were introducing a king to a courtier at a social.

Are all these people mad?

I try to scream once again but little sound makes it past the cloth. The friar leans down until his lips brush my ear. “No one can hear you, Damian. And even if they could, no one would come to your rescue. You see, no one cares about you anymore. You belong to us-not your family, nor even God. No one wants you. No one cares. You are ours to do with as we please." I feel a hand grab the base of my cock and squeeze tightly before letting go of me. "And we look forward to breaking you..."

Chapter Text

I can’t help but think of how memories are similar to moving pictures…I mean, DVDs. To me, remembering the past is the same thing as watching an old black and white movie. Truthfully? I would rather not have to watch certain such movies again…

I’m sure I do not need to tell you that my first day at the monastery ended with my introduction to rape and abuse. It was Monsignor Bianchi who introduced me to adulthood (at least, the sexual side of it) before allowing friar Antony and Father Adrian to ‘beat the rules’ into me with both flogger and whip.

Monsignor Bianchi stood close to my right side throughout my physical abuse, smirking while slowly stroking his cock, low moans escaping him from time to time. I tried to keep my eyes closed, even as my face was smashed repeatedly into the wooden cross in front of me. I felt the blood slowly trickle from my nose, felt splinters enter my face and body. Each slap of leather on my bare back and legs split open my flesh even further, while trickles of blood ran down my back to my feet.

I am sure my 8-year-old mind was horrified, stunned, even numb as the horrors of the day were played out on my body—but my adult mind, looking back on the day? All I can remember is fear. Fear that I would never see my siblings again. Fear that these men would never stop their ceaseless abuse. But most of all? The majority of my thoughts were of my mother, and how upset I was to lose her.

[Now, I know that you must be thinking that I have lost my mind to say such a thing! I mean, isn’t it BECAUSE of my mother that I was in that situation in the first place??? If she had been a faithful wife, Thomas would never have been in our home, would never have touched me. True, I might have come out as gay somewhere along the line, who knows? But I would not have had to suffer my first sexual encounter with a man as a rape at such an young age!

Now, I can only speak for myself when I say that, in my entire life, if there is only one thing that I know to be an honest to God fact—is that any child who (for whatever reason(s)) is denied their mother…they long for her more than anyone else in their entire life. Money, power, love…you can have the fastest car, the best lover, the most delicious foods in the world…and you will, inevitably still long for a mother’s touch.]

“Again, Damian! Repeat the rules.” I open my mouth to speak, but only manage to whimper. The sounds of pain escaping my lips causes Monsignor to moan loudly, his body shivering as he nears orgasm. “I SAID…” an especially hard slash of the whip on my left thigh makes me cry out once more “…Repeat the rules, Damian!” One more lash and I cannot take it any longer. My entire body locks up as I scream at the top of my voice. When my voice becomes hoarse, reduced down to near nothing, I hear the Monsignor shove the friar out of his way seconds before I feel hot semen land on my bleeding thighs and calves, the pain too much for me to bear. As I pass out, I hear the chuckles behind me. Father Adrian’s pleased voice is the last thing I hear as he loudly claims, “This boy’s a keeper! He breaks so beautifully…”

While I am unconscious, the friar and Father Adrian release my bindings, allowing my body to fall to the foot of the St. Andrew’s cross. I am not sure if they did it on purpose or not, but when I awaken some time later, I am on laying on my back. Bits of dirt and straw dried within the blood and cum stuck to my cuts, and I was already feeling the early onset of a fever starting. Great! Was I now going to die in this filthy barn, alone on the dirt floor?

“Roll over.”

Through the twilight gloom in the barn, I hear a gruff voice seconds before a candle glow can be seen at the other end of the barn. The glow seems to grow as the candle—and whomever is carrying it—make their way towards me. I shiver with cold and fright as the gruff voice barks out the order again, this time with less patience and more anger.

“Roll the FUCK over right now! I’ll not be wasting my time on a lazy, lay-about piece of shit that can’t follow orders! Do you want another whipping?”

My limbs refusing to work properly. I manage to make it onto my side before I feel the heel of a boot plant itself into my lower back, the pressure increasing as I am kicked onto my front side. Friends, I cannot correctly express the amount of pain that suddenly wracks my body, the gasps of air that leave my lungs and stir the dirt under my nose. I try to lift my head, try to speak but I end up simply giving in.

I want my mother.

The thoughts invade again—Why doesn’t she care? Why doesn’t she come get me? Will I ever see her again? Will she EVER love ME???

Once again I pass out.

[Now, I know what you are thinking, darlings. You are asking yourself, “Self? Why is Damian wasting so much time talking about this very point in his life? I mean, yeah, what happened WAS horrible, but it was SO long ago! What bearing could it possibly have with the rest of his story?!” Well my friend, hang in there, you may be surprised what the answer is.

I do realize that every single moment of my youth formed and developed me, in ways in which I may never, ever be completely aware. But it was those moments WITHOUT my parents (especially my mother) that have had the most impact on me. My lifelong longing for love, acceptance, attention, and support came from their pathetic lack of parental support and love. And if you add in what I have described in the paragraphs above? Well…I guess you can see where this is leading, can’t you, dear reader?

What??? Do I hear the cry of “Bullshit!” echoing through the airwaves? Well darlings—all I can reply to that is HANG IN FOR A BUMPY RIDE! I will let you make up your mind if my childhood has an impact on what you are about to read from here on out, or not. I’m DYING to hear your opinion!]

When I slowly open my eyes, I realize I am lying face down on a smelly old cot in a small room. Spider webs cling to my hands as I try to wiggle my cold fingers. Will I ever feel warm again? The light from the candelabra next to the cot sends slowly moving shadows across the wall, but sends no heat out into the cold room.

I can hear the sounds of two voices arguing loudly from the other side of the wall closest to my head. Every inch of my uncovered body hurts, each competing with the headache that is pounding directly behind my left eye.

Suddenly a third voice rises above the first two, a voice so sharp and clear, but set within a sinister tone that sends a shiver down my spine.

“Why should you care if I take him with me? His father has already paid you in full for his yearly bed and board! Anything you make above that will simply be a bonus to the monastery!”

I hear Father Adrian laugh harshly in response. “That simply is NOT the point! You are not taking into consideration the revenue his labor will bring to the monastery! Once he is broken into hard labor, he will double, if not triple, the original amount! And…” the Father lowers his voice, as if the rest of his statement is a secret to be hidden from the angels in heaven. “…after another go round or two with the Monsignor, he’ll be ready to sell each evening to the highest bidder…”

I feel my stomach sink at the thought, even as the bile rises in my throat. They would sell me?...

“…to ruin him? Destroy that young body along with his mind? And you call yourself a man of God!” I hear the sounds of a scuffle followed by the friar yelling “Sirs, please remember where you are! You are in a house of God, a holy house…”

“Maybe it is YOU who should remember where YOU live, and stop defiling God’s house! Now…” a loud crash makes me jump, tears suddenly filling my eyes. “…I’m taking him home, and you will never get a penny from me!” A few seconds tick by before I hear the door handle rattle behind me as the knob is turned, and the voice that was just screaming in my defense only a moment ago? Is now gasping in shock as I feel cold eyes take in my naked backside.

A minute goes by. And then another. And then another. Should I try to roll over? Raise my head and attempt to look over my shoulder? Or should I stay still, not sure if the person behind me is friend or foe?

Before I can make up my mind what to do, I hear the tip-tap of high heeled boots on the bare ground. I can’t help it—I sigh when I feel a sheet being thrown over my body. Warmth! The very possibility makes me tremble with delight. But even as I do, I hear the same dark, sinister voice say in a silky smooth whisper “Don’t let your guard down just yet, little one! You have no idea what I may have in store for you…”

Chapter Text

After a bit of thinking it over, I realize that my memories of recovery from that horrible day at the monastery are vague at best. I mean, I remember being jolted over rough roads through a moonlit night, and while I am sure my recovery was long and painful, I have seemed to block out this section of my young life.

My next memory is of my sitting up in that bed, surrounded by thick blankets and soft pillows. Even though my back is slightly stiff, I no longer feel any pain, and only a lingering fear of the unknown.

Since this is my first chance to get a good look at my surroundings, I now take my time to take it all in.

The bed canopy is made of heavy, expensive brocades in shades of burgundy and cream, heavy ropes made from woven satin tying the panels back at the corners of the bed. Small statues fill the corners of the room, which is large enough to contain not one, but two fireplaces. The walls are covered with thick tapestries, their pictures showing mortals and Gods going about their daily business with their slaves in attendance. What little wall space there is which is uncovered have been stained a light purple color. Where am I? I mean, purple is usually the color which is reserved only for royalty. How does a boy like me suddenly go from living with a Countess, to then being an orphan in a monastery, to living in a room fit for a palace?

My attention is drawn to the door, which slowly opens to reveal a maid carrying a large tray of food. What sweet aroma! My stomach began to growl immediately, the sound of it so loud that the maid laughs in spite of herself. As she places the tray on a small marble table near the bed, she comments, “Don’t worry, my Lord! There is plenty here to feed a growing boy such as yourself! There now…can you walk to the table, sir?” Can I? I am not sure, even as I slowly scoot myself to the side of the bed in an attempt to stand. The maid walks to my side, her hand out just in case I need steadying. But to my surprise, I manage to stand without issue, and make my slow way to the table unaided.

As I eat, I watch the maid strip my bed and then begin the process of replacing the dirty sheets and blankets with clean ones. Without thinking, I blurt out “Please…what is your name?”

With a kind chuckle, the maid answers “My name is Maria, my Lord. I have been lucky enough to work here for ten years now as a maid to my Master. I found out this morning that you are to be my charge, and I will be your personal maid and governess.”

“Master?” I blurt out. “Where am I? And whom is your Master, please?”

“So polite!” Maria smiles, her eyes twinkling. “I see that whomever raised you, taught you manners! That’s a good thing, since you now live with royalty, little Lord. My Master is the Viscount de Parma.”

I feel my throat close on the bite of venison that I am trying to swallow, my face becoming warm and sweaty as I start to choke. De Parma? This cannot be! The de Parma family are the archenemy of my family! From early memory, I can remember (in those rare moments that my father was actually home long enough to have dinner with us) his ranting and raving about the de Parma family, and how they were constantly trying to thwart any plans my father had to get closer to the king. I clearly remember one dinner where, after my father managed to drink almost an entire bottle wine before dinner, was drunkenly screaming at my brother “NEVER trust a de Parma! They will stab you and leave you to bleed to death, just as sure as the day is long!”

And now? According to Maria…I am living with them.

Fuck my young life!

Maria runs to my side, her hand thumping my back until I spit the piece of venison back onto my plate. “Are you alright, sir? Should I call for the physician?” I shake my head yes, then no, in a frantic attempt to communicate. What I really want to say in my panic is “No, its ok. I just found out I am living with the enemy, so I guess I should expect from now on to be stabbed in my sleep…”

The sound of the door opening once again causes both Maria and I to turn in unison. Seconds later, Maria is kneeling on the floor, her head bowed, eyes on the floor. Gracefully, her hands then clasp in front of her and gently land on her lap. Looking at her presentation, I cannot help but wonder if I should take on the same pose?

The very sight in front of me astounds me. A very tall man (in today’s terms, I guess you would say that he was willowy, and about 6’ 3” or so) gracefully enters the room, his expression one of both curiosity and reserve. He has shoulder length hair, tied back with a ribbon in the fashion of the day, no wig on his head. This is a surprise, since most members of royalty would NEVER be seen without a wig, even when lounging in the privacy of their home. The man’s clothing is obviously expensive, tailor-made to catch the eye with silver threads and velvet trim. Even my mother, who prided herself with wearing only the most expensive cloth and up-to-the-minute styles, has never dressed this well.

The man walks over to me without a second glance at Maria. “Leave us” he commands, his cold, sinister tone the very same that has haunted my dreams since I was brought here. Maria nods once before gracefully standing. She then shoots me a small smile and a wink as she makes her way to the door, leaving me alone with the man who rescued me…to what end?

“Are you a Lavelli?” The man asks his tone still flat and cold.

“Y…yes, sir! My name is Damian Lavelli, sir.” I throw my napkin down on the table next to my tray and attempt to stand in deference to this man’s station, but his hand grips my arm lightly before I can manage to do so. I feel his eyes bore into my soul as he stares down at me for a moment, before gracefully sitting down in the chair across from me. “No, it isn’t.” The man’s nostrils flare as he makes this simple statement, giving me all indication that my last name is the last thing he would every want to hear. The thought makes me unconsciously shift in my chair, the motion startling him out of any thoughts that might be flashing through his mind. The last thing I want to do is anger this man, who has the power to end my life with one swipe of his hand. I have to keep reminding my 8-year-old mind that, after all…he DID rescue me…

With a shake of his head, the man declares “From this moment on, you will call yourself Damian de Parma. You are my ward, my son. You are now the only son of Viscount Marious de Parma.”

I bow my head in acknowledgement of this statement, but I blurt out “Sir, thank you very much for rescuing me, and taking care of me while I healed! But…”

“But?” That small, simple word is spoken in a sharp tone, a tone that says he is not used to being questioned by anyone, ever.

“Sir…I DO have a family, parents! Please sir, may I…”

The Viscount’s back stiffens as he cuts in “DAMIAN! You may have once been a part of the Lavelli family, but they no longer claim you as theirs.” My eyes immediately fill with tears as I try to choke back a cry of despair. “When I first brought you here, I sent one of my men to your parents, to tell them of your fate. They spurned you, stating that they never want to see you again.” I watch as tears slowly leak onto my folded hands.

Friends, this moment is a HUGE turning point in my life.

Random thoughts start to invade my mind, in a space of only a minute or so. My first thought is, of course, “I want my mother,” but surprisingly, my next thought is “of course they don’t want me, they never wanted me.” At this thought, the only thing that I can say is that it felt as if a door closed to my heart, the slam echoing through my mind and subconscious. Now, I am not saying that I would never look back at my youth, or my mother and father, without feeling that childhood yearning or pain, but…in front of me is a man who obviously values strength of character and lack of emotion, so…that is what I will show him, from now on. I will put my heart in a box and turn away from my past, as best I can.

I clear my throat and wipe my tears on my napkin as I ask “Sir? How may I address you?”

The Viscount takes a few seconds to think before replying in a cool voice. “You may address me as father. Everyone else will either address you as Sir Damian or My Lord.” My new father then waves his hand dismissively, but his expression is still one of pride. “This is one of our many residences, there are 11 in total. We also have a wing in the palace to ourselves when we are in residence to the king.” A WING? Most courtiers are given a small suite of rooms, sometimes only one room, depending on the season of the year and availability. My new father chuckles softly as he takes in my amazed reaction to his statement, commenting in response “Face it, son. I am second in line to take the crown, if something should happen to my cousin the king. I am of royal blood and therefore…so are you.”

THREE WEEKS LATER
It takes me a few weeks to gain my footing in this new world my new father has given me. Even though my parents were of ‘rank’ in the confusing and sometimes odd world of the court, they actually now rank below me. This is an odd thought, even all these years later. Here they threw me away, and now on those rare occasions when I pass my father in the hallways of the palace, HE is now forced to bow to ME! This is a fact that never fails to amuse my new father, whenever he is there to witness it.

I have met the king and queen twice now, and both times they have treated me with kindness. Especially the queen, who both times called out to her ladies as I arrive to “see what type of sweets” there may be around to give to me. Both times that I was lucky to speak to their majesties, I tried my best to be polite and respectful. My new father seems to be proud of me, giving me rare smiles after my visits with the royal couple.

My new father? Well…let’s just say that I now understand what my biological father really meant when he spoke of the Viscount. The reputation that the de Parma family had gained as a cruel, manipulative clan is well earned. The man that sits across the dinner table from me most evenings is the same man that was known for heartless dealings in the court. I have heard him discuss measures to ‘eliminate’ the poor to save the kingdom money in the same, easily uncaring tone that he uses with his slaves…and that is the man in a good mood! He has the perfectly acquired and carefully cultivated personality of the aristocracy, who only care for the pleasures of the world. It is ironic that I ended up living with someone who had a colder personality than my own mother!

The Viscount’s attitude towards myself, you may ask? It is hard to put into words. He is never truly cruel or uncaring, but at the same time, he is not ‘warm and fuzzy,’ to use modern terms. I am simply there. The next generation of his family, a chance to carry on the de Parma family. I am simply a tutor to teach to be just as Avant guard as he is.

Let us just say…I became an excellent pupil. I have proven this throughout my adulthood, but especially in the period when I met my Tommy Joe, much later on in my story.

Now, you may be asking if the Viscount had a wife, someone to be a real mother to me. The answer to this question is no but…my father did have a secret, live-in lover. He was a man named of Vincent.

The world saw Vincent as just another slave, someone to carry out my father’s orders and be his valet. However…Vincent’s actual job was to warm my father’s bed. I found this out by mistake one evening when, sleepy and confused by the layout of the palace, I entered my father’s room by mistake late one evening.

A young brunette male was lying naked in my father’s bed, covered only with a sheet. I had two immediate reactions to this revelation. First, confusion at finding another man in my father’s bed, and second…an instant erection.

The young man turned his head on the pillow and, noticing my growing erection (and my instant shame), smiles at me while asking “Looking for your room, honey? It’s the next one down the hall.” Just then, my father enters the room through the door I just entered, his expression changing into one of happiness as he looks from myself to the young man in his bed. Without hesitation, my father says, “I see you met my son. This is Damian, and Damian…this is Vincent.” My father approaches Vincent’s side of the bed; his hand reaching out to brush the hair out of Vincent’s face and tuck it behind his ear. My father then turns toward me, his voice uncharacteristically playful as he says, “Think of him as…” Vincent blushes as my father leans down to plant a soft kiss on Vincent’s cheek “…your new mother.”

I place both my hands over my growing erection and bow once, replying in a soft voice “It is a pleasure to meet you, mother.” I then nod to both of them, saying softly “I wish you both a good night” and turn towards the door, retreating to their mingled response of good night.

Now, dear friends, here is yet another major turning point in my life. Yes, my father’s lover was introduced to me as “my mother.” To some, this would seem ridiculous or unseemly, but to me? It did not seem a bit unnatural at all. I think to myself now, if I DID have any thoughts about it, they would be “Yea! Someone to love me!” instead of “What the hell is going on here?!”

Sure, I had a ‘sexual’ reaction to finding another man in my father’s bed. I was 8 years old at the time, for God’s sake! But I won’t lie. After returning to my room, I laid there in bed, imagining my father touching that handsome young man as I touched myself in the dark. As I came all over my stomach and hand, my thoughts shifted to Thomas, imagining it was his hand stroking me to finish the act.

Later in my life (and yes, to those who know that I am referring to my beloved Mikey) I will meet another whom I will call (even for a short amount of time) the title mother. But that relationship happened at a time where love and lust combine in a unique way. Much, much more on this later.

The addition of Vincent to my tale is a positive one, to be sure. He took me under his wing (since my father was often busy tending to matters for the king) and oversaw my education, formal and otherwise. Vincent made sure that I took riding lessons, had lessons in decorum and courtly manners, and oversaw the creation of my expensive wardrobe. Vincent was an “acceptable substitute” on my father’s arm at court—in modern terms, that meant that everyone knew they were a gay couple, and it was accepted, but no one ‘spoke about it.’ The Italian court in this point in history was almost as ‘gay’ as the French court would become known to be years later. Besides, with my family’s direct connection to the current king and queen—who in their right (or wrong) mind would dare make a comment, anyhow?!

The next seven years were some of the very best years of my life. And yes, I mean my ENTIRE LIFE! Remember, I’ve been around for a long time now. So that will give you an idea of how happy I was during the time that I lived with my father and his beautiful Vincent.

Vincent never raised his voice to me, never even seemed displeased by my occasional pranks and mistakes. My father, on the other, while never cruel or physically violent, let me know his displeasure. I was rambunctious and full of life, constantly getting into trouble without trying. Even the queen commented one day in my presence “That Damian! One day, his reputation for life will precede him, and all will know the truth about him! He is a rascal, to be sure!” When I heard this, I cemented her words into truth by placing one foot forward and bowing as low as I could in her direction, one arm behind my back and the other waving the hat I was wearing in a wide arc. I heard the queen chuckle before she leaned down and pinched my cheek, saying in an affectionate tone, “You little scamp!” I once again stood upright, replaced my hat on my head and nodded, my soon-to-be-trademark smirk on my face as I comment “Good day to you, my Lady” as I turn and leave the room.

Chapter Text

I feel vibrations—subtle at first, then growing stronger as the seconds elapse. They feel like the whisper of wings gliding through air. Not pure white angel’s wings, the type that humans are familiar with from their stories and tales of the bible. No, these wings are black, thicker and rough around the edges. Black vibrations, black shadows following close behind. I cannot smother the sudden smirk that flashes back to better (or worse) times in my past. But then again, even the best memories are better with just a hint of darkness at their core. I close my eyes to enjoy the very thrill of his arrival through all my senses.

The door to my room of death opens and a light breeze touches my skin for the briefest moment. With my eyes still closed, I try to contain the sigh filling my chest but I cannot manage it. The smell of leather, cologne, heat and sex enters my nostrils, each competing for my attention. “Well, as I live and breathe! Or…” Another slight sting of pain rockets through my body. “…NOT breathe! How are you, darling?” I hear the steady clicking of heeled boots and the soft sounds of leather as he walks towards me.

“Napping, Dam? Not interested in my visit?”

I slowly open my eyes, taking in the sight of the beautiful man standing in front of me. “Caro mio! Of COURSE I wish to see you! But since you are such a paragon of beauty, your perfection reaches me, even with my eyes closed!”

“Still full of charming bullshit!” My smirk widens even more as Adam continues his way to my side, his hands placed firmly on his hips. “And…I wouldn’t want it any other way!”

I feel warmth begin to fill the cold corners of my being. For once, it has nothing to do with the slow spreading poison flowing through my system. “It is I that am charmed by your visit, Caro mio. It isn’t every day that the leader of the most revered and worshiped Werepire Council in the world finds time to visit a lowlife criminal such as myself!” I purse my lips to blow Adam a brief kiss, a slow wink following seconds later as I hear my darling ask “Oh Damian! What in the hell am I going to do with you?” My response? With a saucy tone of voice I retort, “Oh Adam, if only I wasn’t chained, I would show you…”

Thoughts vie with memories as I watch Adam’s handsome face first smile, then frown in response to my smart assed comment. I once again see the fear that was in Adam’s eyes when I turned him, the rage that I saw in those very same eyes after I accidentally killed his and Tommy’s pups. In my mind’s eye, I see those same eyes that smiled at me when the two of us finally made peace and the deep sadness the day that the Council decided my poisonous fate. Adam and I have been through so many emotions together, just the two of us. I swear, with the exception of my precious Tommy Joe, no one on this planet or beyond has ever made me experience life and death through so many emotions.

I remember lying in bed facing Tommy Joe, waking to feel both Tommy’s and Adam’s arms circling my chest and waist. The thrill of making love with the two of them in my cabin in the Dark Realm. Those occasional nights I spent smoking marijuana and eating ice cream with those two at the mansion while watching Monty Python and Mel Brooks movies. The three of us playing card games and talking late into the night about everything and nothing at all. But most of all, I will remember the words of love and affection that I never thought I’d hear from either of them, considering how horrible I treated both of them along the way. I cherished each word as it was spoken, and I carry each word on my heart, till my dying day.

I am going to miss both of them very, very much.

“Damian! Didn’t you hear a thing I just said?” I give a slight shake of my head to clear the cobwebs, or at least I try to. “I tried to convince the Council to let you go!” My almost silent snort of disbelief causes Adam’s brows to raise in surprise. “Please! Don’t make me kill you…”

I struggle within my chains to move even a second closer to him. “Caro mio, YOU are not the one killing me! The nobles of the Council made their decision! They did not trust you to let me walk on this! Truthfully, if I was them, neither would I…” Adam’s famous temper begins to shine through his motions, his hands fisting tightly, nostrils flaring. “Fucking STOP IT, DAM! It was you who pulled off that favor for Mikey, it was YOU that ended up saving the Council!” I feel a sharp pain in my chest when I hear Mikey’s name. I have not seen her in so fucking long…“If it wasn’t for you, that goddamn Council would have ceased to exist…” Chains rattle again as anger quickly takes me over. “NO, ADAM! The Council would still exist, but YOUR LEADERSHIP OF IT WOULD HAVE CEASED! If it were only those strutting peacocks, I would NEVER have lifted a fucking finger! NO! I did it for Mikey, Tommy Joe…but mostly for you and for Devlin.” The thought of my son makes tears fill my eyes. “I…love you all, you know that! I just…wanted to do the…right thing for once…”

Adam’s hand reaches out and gently brushes away the tears that start to make their slow way down my cheeks. “I know baby, I know. And we love you too. WE ALONE know why you did what you did. But YOU need to step forward and tell…”

I can’t help it; I have to condemn my soul even further into hell with my next words. I cannot let my darlings get involved in the mess I made. “I can’t…”

Adam’s fingers stop their slow trail down my face, his fingers reaching out to clench my chin tightly, raising my head until our eyes meet. I feel the heat of his gaze as he says “Per favore non lasciarmi, Damian. No matter what.” I stare deep into those beautiful eyes; feel their heat for another few seconds before answering, my tone as dead as my heart.

“Ine ne sono gia andato, amare.”

A moment goes by, then another. A deep sigh suddenly escapes Adam as he leans in to place a soft kiss to my lips. I would love to deepen the kiss, draw it out, make it last. But I’m afraid that the poison in my veins will transmit to him through our kiss, so I let it end naturally when Adam finally pulls away.

Irony finally hits me. This is the second time (first Tommy, now Adam) that my beloveds must walk away while I am left behind to my fate. And both times I accepted my fate, without pause, without hesitation. The damned must be punished after all, right?

Right?

With a sad smile, Adam turns and slowly walks to the door, his steps much less vibrant and purposefully then when he arrived. As soon as his hand reaches out to turn the door knob, I call out in spite of myself “Adam? Could you...” When I hesitate, he turns towards me again, his tears catching the light from the chandelier above me. “Could you…please tell Devlin how proud I am of him? And tell him how much I love him?” Adam’s throat works a few times but all he can do is nod once. I try to smile but fail. “And could you please…” My voice then catches on a sob “…send my love to Tommy and Mikey, too? Tell them I…”

For a brief second I feel the full weight of the secret I’m carrying. I cannot give in, cannot lay this burden down because if I do, the very family I love will cease to exist. I cannot take their identity away, cannot take my son’s future away. I just can’t. “…I love them, as much as I love you.”

Adam’s voice seems to have finally failed him. He nods again, blows a kiss my way, and then hurries out the door.

The last thing I hear is the sound of his clothes ripping as he shifts before running through the woods back to the mansion, to those who love both of us with all their hearts. I hope he knows that he is taking my heart with him.

I take a few ragged breaths as I try to center myself once again. The only way that I can deal with this acid running through my veins is to try to block out the pain the best I can. That will be impossible if I allow my thoughts to run amok. So…on with the show…

Chapter Text

During my first seven years with my father and Vincent, I learned a lot about myself. Well to be honest, I should say that I learned more about the ways of the world and my place in it.

My position in the royal family ensured my favor with those who ranked below us. Everywhere I went outside the King’s castle or my family estates, there were calls of ‘My Lord!’ as eager peasants waved and sent me warm smiles. But even I, who was constantly good naturedly chided for pride by Vincent, knew that the true driving force behind the endearing calls and waves was money. Father always said that the ‘rabble’ were only looking for a handout instead of working for their living, but it was Vincent’s voice in my ears that I heard instead. “Never fail to make a friend or ally.” So, I distributed coins to the crowd as they parted in front of me like the sea driven by a heavy wind. Who knows? Maybe someday I might need a few of these individuals to carry out a task or two for me. One can never be too careful…

And the aristocracy? The upper class at this time in history was anything but noble! Most preferred stabbing you in the back instead of meeting you eye to eye with a shred of truth. True, there were some wonderful individuals whose names I still recall, but for the most part, the aristocracy was a den of liars, thieves, and murderers. Highly entertaining for a young boy being raised in a court setting! No wonder my father became jaded—because over time, so did I.

When I came to live with my father and Vincent, I was but a humble boy. By the time I was 15, I was a veritable snob! No matter how many hours that I spent with Vincent, listening to his lessons on kindness, fairness and the like, my worldly lessons only served to bring out the negative aspects of my growing personality. My father noticed these changes over time and, much to Vincent’s chagrin, encouraged each and every one of them!

The first indulgence I was taught was clothing. The first time I was brought before the king and queen, I was wearing a white shirt that caused the queen to squeal in shock. “Marious! Where did you find such a HORRID material for that boy to wear?” As my father hastily explained to the queen that it was the only shirt in my size that the household staff could find, I heard snickers from those surrounding the royal dais. I subconsciously reach my right hand to the cuff of my left sleeve, feeling the soft cotton material slide through my fingertips. I watched my father give the queen a small bow as he promised to have more suitable clothing made for me as soon as possible. I couldn’t help but think to myself that the clothes that I was wearing were made of the same material I had always worn my entire life. Why change now?

The queen then offered me treats, a large smile on her face. I returned her smile and thanked her, bowing as I was taught by my father. Before I know it, I am being whisked back to my suite, my father’s hand on my arm propelling me forward as fast as my little legs could carry me.

“Father?” I wait for a response, but when I do not receive one, I press on. “What did the queen mean about my shirt? It’s clean, and very soft…” My father grits out “You look like a stable boy. I should’ve waited…” it is only then that I notice that my father’s cheeks are flushed dark red.

I finally understand. I embarrassed him. It must be my fault…

Now, I know now it was not my fault. But I wanted so much to impress him, to never be a failure to him, the way I always was to my…

As soon as we reach my room father bellows out “Maria! Fetch the royal Sarto! My son needs clothing IMMEDIATELY!” I faintly hear Maria respond from the other room as father reaches under my chin, lifting my head until our eyes meet. “Damian, from this moment on you will be dressed only in the very best leather, damasks, velvet, satin and lace. If I find you in anything else…” father’s fingers tighten for a brief moment “…you will regret it, understood?” I nod the best I can and father lets go of my chin just as the Sarto enters, a measuring tape around his neck and three assistants all trying to look more important than the other. I spend the next three hours being measured over and over for my new clothes, while two of the assistants are already cutting material and preparing to sew pieces together as fast as they can.

Leather pants, hose of the finest silks, high heeled shoes with buckles that gleamed in the light. Shirts made of the finest damask or velvet in the winter, lightweight satins with lace cravats even fancier than the king owned for summer. And the jewelry! Diamonds, rubies, sapphires, emeralds…all made into broaches, stick pins, hair clips (I always wore my hair pinned back from my face once it became longer than my shoulders) rings, necklaces! For every occasion, every holiday…hell, every new outfit, my father would present me with new jewelry.

Since that day so long ago, I have tried my very best to uphold the expectations of my family lineage. It wasn’t until the last nine decades or so that you could occasionally find me in a pair of expensive jeans, but then again, I would always be wearing a designer shirt and the most expensive footwear around. So you see, in my own way, I continue to make my father proud, even from his grave…

Vincent had an array of fine clothes and a few jewels of his own. The difference? Those outfits were only worn for fancy occasions. Vincent’s everyday clothing were simple slacks and shirts made of cotton—the exact material that I was wearing when I was first presented to the queen. As much as my father loved Vincent, he wanted to make sure that his son dressed better than the one he loved—who was a servant in the eyes of the court. Eventually this gave me the impression that I was above everyone—even my own adopted mother. What a bastard I was becoming!

If my love of clothing was the beginning of my long, slow descent into decadence, what happened next certainly didn’t help!

My father had purchased a black horse named Midnight. He was named not only for the color of his coat, but for his personality. No one, not even my father, could ride him for longer than a moment or two. By the time Midnight had been in the royal stables for a month, he had managed to injure over twenty men, breaking many bones and egos along the way. At my fifteenth birthday dinner my father announced to Vincent and I that he was going to sell Midnight. “He broke another groom’s arm this morning. The horse is a menace! I’ll sell him for horse meat before I’m through!”

Without thinking I started “Father…” I did not need to look up from my plate to feel father’s disapproving gaze. “NO, Damian! My mind is made up! If I find out you’ve been down to the stables before that brute is removed…” I glance at Vincent, who widens his eyes and nods slightly, as if to say “Go on, say it!” I lower my gaze once again and humbly answer “Yes, father. I will heed your words.” Vincent then motions to a servant, who steps forward with my birthday cake in hand. “Now darling…” Vincent addresses my father, his tone soft and loving “…is this any way to celebrate our son’s fifteenth birthday?”

Later that night, as I lie in bed, I can feel a pull towards the stables. The pull (I have no other word for it) is so strong that before I know it, I am dressed and wandering through the corridors of the castle. Guards and servants nod as I pass, and a sentry opens the door of the castle for me as I approach. Two armed guards then follow me down the short walk to the stables, both holding torches to light the way. Even though there is a full moon, I have been at the castle enough to know the way blindfolded. But being royalty meant guards following your every step, so you get used to it after a while. Hell, some them were really fucking cute! And what’s wrong with a little eye candy following your every step, right?

When we arrive at the stables, I raise a hand to stop the guards outside the doorway. Why spook the poor horses more than necessary? The last thing I need is Midnight freaking out before I even get near his stall. The stables are dark, the only light shining is from the full moon through each open window, allowing the cool nighttime breezes to stir the straw bales sitting near every doorway.

As I approach the end of the middle aisle leading directly to Midnight’s stall, I hear a soft feminine voice whisper in my ear “His right rear hoof.” I turn in a tight circle, looking to find the owner of the voice. I see no one. Hyperaware now, I take the last few steps that will take me to the doorway to Midnight’s stall.

“He’s hurt. His right rear hoof. It’s cracked.” Once again, I turn around, my motions causing Midnight to make a startled whinny.

“Who are you? Where are you?” I hear a high-pitched short giggle directly in my right ear.

“Does it really matter, my Lord? Will you waste time looking for me, or will you put that poor creature out of his misery? No one can get close to him to help him. But you, Lord?” Once again, the soft giggle. “You can charm the leaves from the trees. Help him, I beg you…”

Huffing in frustration, I yell out the guards at the entrance to the stables. “You, out there! One of you come here. Bring a lantern. I need your help.” Without thinking I slowly open Midnight’s stall door, softly saying “Midnight, I want to help you. Please let me.” Midnight stands still, staring at me until we notice the guard slowly approaching down the aisle. “Stop where you are. I have to get him on a lead first…”

As I reach out through the open stall door to pull the lead straps off the wall, I hear the guard whisper “My Lord? I…” I hear the hesitation in his voice “…know your father…” Without turning around, I spit out “Fuck my father! This poor animal is in pain, and I won’t let him spend one more night in agony! Now, stay still and raise the lantern high until I can get the lead on him…” I hear the guard mumble his apologizes behind me as I say to Midnight. “It’s okay, boy. I’m just going to cross tie you…” I am surprised when Midnight stand stock still, his breath whooshing out over my arm as I clip the leads to each side of his halter. Once I realize Midnight hasn’t moved, I awkwardly stroke his nose a few times. “Good boy! Just a minute more…”

I slowly make my way to each side of Midnight’s stall, clipping the leads to anchors in the stall walls. Once he is cross tied, I slowly walk out of the stall and return with a few carrots. Midnight still pulls back a little, even as he accepts the tokens of friendship that I give him. “I’m…not very familiar with how to do this, boy. But my name is Damian.” I hear that sly giggle once again, this time ringing with the sound of happiness. I smile as I stroke Midnight’s neck, watching as he finishes the last carrot. “Alright, boy. Now for the part you won’t like…”

I motion to the guard, who brings the light closer behind us. I firmly command “Lift, Midnight!” as I reach down and gently pull up on Midnight’s hoof.

I am appalled at the sight that greets me.

Midnight’s hoof is cracked clean through on the inside, to the point that it is causing him to walk at an odd angle. There is a sharp stone which has pushed its way deep into the same side of his hoof, puss leaking from the wound. No wonder the poor thing acts out the way he does!

Anger takes over me. How can my father simply send this magnificent animal to the butcher? My mind flashes back to my short time at the monastery, all the pain and rejection I was made to feel by others. I instantly vow to myself that this horse isn’t going anywhere, he's staying with me!

I turn back to the guard still standing on the other side of the stall door, the lantern held high. With a commanding voice made of ice I bark out “Go wake that lazy stable boy! Set him to bring me a bowl of warm water and several soft cloths! And tell him I need the hoof pick and materials to make a poultice. And plenty of clean strips of sheeting! GO!” The guard turns and runs off, scared by my tone. I rub my hand gently over Midnight’s side as I release his foot, mumbling “SOMEBODY’S has to take charge, huh boy?” As Midnight nickers in return to my comment, I hear that female voice comment in my ear “Precisely!”

I spent the rest of the night removing the stone from Midnight’s hoof, gently cleaning the infected area and then securing a poultice to his entire foot the best I can. After fighting me while I removed the stone. Midnight stood still through the rest of the process. I know he understood that I was trying my best to make him well again. Finally, somewhere around dawn, I asked the yawning stable boy to set up a straw bed for me outside Midnight’s stall door. After checking on the horse one more time, I laid down on the bed of straw, finally drifting off into a dreamless sleep.

“WHAT IN FUCK’S NAME ARE YOU DOING OUT HERE, DAMIAN!?”

I feel the soft kiss of a horse’s muzzle on my cheek before I force my eyes open. Before me stands not only my father but the King himself, the look on his face as bemused as the furious scowl on my father’s face brands my skin with his rage. I try to put my clothes to rights as I stutter out “Uhhh…good morrow, My gracious King! And good…”

“Shut it, Damian! I TOLD you last night to stay away from this brute, and this morning I find him nuzzling you as if you’re best of friends?” Something in my father’s tone suddenly sets me off, King or no King standing in our company. “Father, please! I worked on his hoof; the poor thing is in pain…”

“I said SHUT THE FUCK UP, DAMIAN! YOU DISOBEYED ME! I do not care what the hell is wrong with him, I TOLD YOU TO LEAVE HIM ALONE! He goes to the butcher this morning…” I feel my face flame as I spring upright, my hands closing in fists. I then notice out of the corner of my eye two things; Midnight’s nostrils flare and he makes noises of dislike towards my father, while the King is carefully watching both Midnight and my reactions, a slow smile starting to cover his face. The King then loudly clears his throat as he turns towards my father, his hand making a slashing motion to effectively shut my father up mid-sentence.

“Now Marious! Look at the way that horse adores your boy!” Now turning towards me, the King smiles indulgently to me as he orders his attendants “Move that straw out of the way. I want to take a closer look at this magnificent creature!” A few moments later, the King and I are standing in the stall with Midnight, who somehow knows to be on his very best behavior. “You see, Majesty.” I take the wrappings and poultice off of Midnight’s foot as gently as possible. “There was a very sharp stone deep in his hoof. It took quite a while to remove it, the poor thing was in so much pain and there was so much puss.” The King moves forward to inspect the proffered hoof. “I realize that the hoof has broken down, but I can’t call for the blacksmith until the infection is gone…” The King raises his hand to stop the words rambling out of my mouth. “Damian, you have indeed done a good service for this poor creature.” The King rubs his hand down Midnight’s side as he makes his way out of the stall. As I begin to rewrap the bandages around the poultice again, I freeze as I hear the King command my father “Marious, forget our morning ride. We are going back to the castle, so I may purchase this beautiful steed from you.” I feel tears suddenly prickle my eyes as I hear my father’s dulcet tone respond “Yes, your Majesty.”

Once Midnight was fed, watered and as comfortable as possible, I slowly head back to my room to clean up and change my clothes. Exhaustion wars with sadness as I realize that I will never have a chance to ride Midnight, nor spend any time with him from now on. In a very short time, I became quite fond of that beautiful creature, and I felt we had a chance to bond once he finished healing. Now I will never have a chance…

“My Lord Damian! Where have you been?” Maria grabs my arm the moment I cross my threshold, propelling me quickly towards a large pitcher of rosewater and towels set up on the table by my bed. “The King’s steward just left in a huff! He has been looking for you for an hour!” Maria turns towards my closet, yanking out an expensive leather and silk outfit and throwing it on the bed. “The King and Queen are expecting you in the throne room immediately!” I feel a shocked look cross my face as I quickly wash, Maria leaving the room with an insistent “HURRY!” escaping her lips.

Ten minutes later, I am kneeling in front of the King and Queen in the crowded royal throne room, my father’s eyes burning holes in my forehead from his place next to the King. “Rise, Damian.” I slowly gather myself, gracefully rising to face both sovereigns, a smile I do not feel crossing my lips. “I apologize for making you wait, Majesties.” My eyes wander to my Queen dressed in lilac colored silk, her expression one of pure amusement. “Its of no importance, love.” At the endearment, my right eyebrow raises before I can stop it. “The King has a gift for you, Damian.”

My eyes wander over to my King. My father sneers at me in anger for a moment before schooling his face into a gentle smile, which he directs towards our Majesties. “That’s it” I think to myself. “I’ve lost another father. He hates me.”

“Damian.” The King’s voice catches my attention, taking me away from my thoughts of doom. “I do indeed have a gift for you. Come closer, son.” I feel the icy gaze from my father as I move forward, stopping to kneel in front of the King on the top step of the dais. The King drones on for a moment, telling the crowd about my efforts to save Midnight. “…and that’s why I have purchased him from your father. To gift him to you, Damian.”

WHAT? Did I hear that properly? I give my head a small shake as the Queen laughs at me, her tone full of joy. I turn back to the King, my voice shaking as I ask “I…I’m sorry, sir. Did you say…” The King throws back his head and laughs heartily. “Yes, Damian. Midnight belongs to you, along with a fine collection of tack for when he is healed and you are ready to ride him. I will send the blacksmith to see him tomorrow for an assessment. Only the best for your horse, young man! It’s the least I can do for a fellow horseman who loves his animal as much as you do!” As I stumble forward to the King’s feet, stumbling over words of thanks, the King waves away my words with a wave of his hand, which instantly brings me to my feet.

“Damian, that’s not all.” With a confirming glance at the Queen (who nods in agreement), the King bellows out to the crowded throne room, to ensure everyone hears his next words. “From hence forward, you are now your Majesties’ Favorite.” Speechless, I bow first to the King then Queen, as the crowd pushes close around me trying to gauge my father’s reaction to the news.

Chapter Text

Still with me friend? Or have I managed to put you asleep with my words?

Surprise! Even though most people would hardly believe it, I can be good sometimes, believe it or not. I started out as a good kid, trying my hardest to get my parents to notice and love me. And I managed to capture the love of my dear Vincent. But I can’t help it that other influences stepped in and led me astray. (That’s my story and I’m sticking to it!)

Being the court favorite instantly turned my life upside down. I had no idea what to expect. How was this to impact my relationship with my family and the court in general?

From the royal throne room, I am immediately led away by the Queen’s chamberlain to an apartment of rooms directly across from the royal couple’s apartment. My father’s apartment suite is a few doors down the hall. This meant that, by ‘castle standards,’ I now rank above my father.

As if reading my mind, the chamberlain gives me a small smile and a nod. “Yes, your thinking is correct, sir. There has never been a ‘court favorite’ before, in the entire history of the Italian court. Oh…” the chamberlain smirks as he swung open the door to my new apartment “…many have tried, to be sure. The ‘closer to the King’s body’ and all that.” As I enter the room behind him, I notice that there is no furniture anywhere to be seen. Is this a joke? Was I sent here by accident?

The chamberlain then turns towards me, his arm making a sweeping motion towards the dust in the corners, peeling paint and the lack of furnishings. “You are to choose the pieces for your rooms, of course. The Queen wants you to be comfortable as soon as possible, so I will take you to the market in town tomorrow morning to make your purchases. You may stay in your current room, and I will be by to collect you at eight tomorrow morning.” I thank the chamberlain, who chuckles as he passes me on his way through the door once again. “You may thank me once we have your rooms in order. The Queen expects you to host a gathering for the new Spanish Ambassador in your apartment on Friday evening. The royal couple will surely be here as well.”

“But it’s Monday!” Anxiety churns my stomach before rushing up my throat. Before I can stop my mouth, I blurt out “Chamberlain?” With a turn of his feet that is vaguely reminiscent of a dance step, the chamberlain turns back towards me, his left eyebrow reaching up to hide in the curly hair flopped across his forehead. “Yes, my Lord?”

“Uhhh…HOW do I…BE…the court favorite?” My hands make fluttery movements, my eyes practically bugging out of my face as I try to somehow express my anxiety to the young man in front of me.

With a cocky smile and a slight bow, the chamberlain saucily answers “That, my young Lord...” He backs out of the doorway slowly until he is standing in the hall, his hand coming to rest on the door to the apartment “…that is for YOU to figure out. See you in the morning, my Lord.” The door to my apartment quietly closes, and I am left standing in my new dusty suite of rooms, all alone.

With a sigh, I wander through the rooms of my new apartment, trying to gage how much furniture I will need to purchase. By court standards, the apartment was tiny, but it was the first place that I could call mine.

The apartment consists of a large drawing room with two fire places, a dining room that I imagine can seat a party of fourteen or sixteen people, four rooms that can either be used as bedrooms or for some other purpose such as a study, and two privies, one larger than the other. In the larger privy, there is a fireplace, a bathtub and several large closets for my clothing. A cabinet stands in the corner in the room, which I’m sure was put there to hold my toiletry set as well as soaps and oils.

As I come to the end of the hallway, I see a small room with an old rug hanging as a makeshift doorway. As I push the rug aside, I see an old cot in the corner, smelly with age and dust. There is also a small closet in the corner, and a wash bowl and basin set sitting on the floor. Servant’s quarters? In such a small apartment? I will have to ask the chamberlain in the morning.

As I make my way out of the apartment, my anxiety ramps even higher as I close the door tightly behind me. As excited as I am to move into my own apartment, I suddenly realize that now I have to face my father and Vincent at the dinner table this evening. I am beginning to wonder if this new adventure of mine will be worth it, if I have to lose a second family to make it happen.

It turns out my fears were for nothing, at least temporarily. The only person sitting at the dining table when I arrive is Vincent, his hands primly crossed in his lap as he waits for me to join him. As I approach, he stands up and takes me into his arms. “Just look at you! The King gives you a stallion then makes you his favorite! And at only fifteen years of age!” As he pulls back a little, I notice tears slowly making their way down Vincent’s face. “My little boy is all grown up and leaving us!”

I hug Vincent again tightly before stepping back, my hand gesturing towards the table. “Please, Mama. The food will get cold! Let’s eat and then you can cry all over me, I promise!” Vincent gives my shoulder a gentle squeeze then sits down in my father’s seat, giving me my first clue that father will not be joining us this evening.

Before I can say anything, Vincent comments “Your father sent a footman to tell me that he will be attending on the King this evening.” When I nod quietly in agreement, Vincent is quick to try and reassure me that everything will be alright. “Regardless of how gruff and grumbling your father can be, Damian, he loves you.” The blank stare that I continue to direct towards my plate gives Vincent no quarter, so he continues in a more confident voice. “Your father loves you and is PROUD of you, Damian! Remember that honey! No matter what…” Vincent grabs my arm tightly, shaking me a few times “…happens from here on out.” When the only response that Vincent receives is a slight nod of my head, my eyes still on my plate, he sighs dramatically. “Alright, enough of this! Let’s eat!”

The rest of the meal is full of conversation about my new apartment, as well as my plans for the dinner that I will be hosting. “Mama, I admit I don’t know what to do! I’ve never hosted…” Vincent’s chuckles stop my words in my throat, an eyebrow arching in confusion. “My dear boy! Do you honestly think that I will allow you to suffer the details alone?” I continue to stare in wonder at the only real mother I’ve ever had. “I will make sure that your first foray into society is a raving success!”

The rest of the evening sped by in a blur of plans and tears. Before I know it, I am somewhat rudely awakened by my mother. “Damian, wake up! You’ve overslept!” I start to grumble out a complaint as my mother yanks the coverlet off of me in a swift motion. “The chamberlain is waiting in the hallway for you!”

After yanking on my clothing, I grab a handful of bread off of the breakfast sideboard. “I’m not sure when I will be home, Mother. Please wish me well!” I feel a gentle kiss touch my cheek as I move past Vincent towards the door. The chamberlain is tapping his foot impatiently as I gruffly mumble “Alright, let’s do this.”

The only way to explain the chaos that is our town market is to compare it to Cheapside in London. Sellers stand near ramshackle tables, screaming out to passersby. Pickpockets and starving children reach towards you, grabbing at your hair and clothing every chance they get. Dogs run through the crowd barking and nipping at the King’s guards who try to keep peace in all the melee.

As we carefully pick our way through the crowd I yell “By the way, chamberlain. What is your name?”

“Antonio Graveteli, sir.” I see Antonio push two beggars out of our path as he exclaims “Ah, here we are! This booth is owned by a master craftsman that the King admires. Let’s see what furniture he has in stock, sir.”

An hour later my head is spinning with details of furniture. We stop next at a rug dealer, choosing the finest rugs available. We then stop at the milliners and the tailor shop. When we finish with each dealer, Antonio ends the exchange with “Make sure you deliver to me first thing tomorrow morning! The room needs to be finished by the following day!”

“Antonio, who will clean my rooms?” Antonio shoves a drunk out of our way before replying “The castle scullery maids are doing so right this minute. It will be cleaned before the deliveries arrive tomorrow. And sir? Do you have a servant that you want to place in the spare bedroom?”

My mind briefly wanders to Maria, realization hitting me that she was owned by my father. “I, uh…no, Antonio. Is there someone you can recommend?” I hear a grunt of frustration from Antonio as two small children slam into him. “I shall think on it, sir.”

As I enter the castle two hours later my thoughts are scattered. Without noticing where I am going I stumble directly into someone. My mumbled apologies are drowned out by a harsh voice commenting drily “Watch it Damian! I raised you better than to act like a clumsy stable boy! I see your time as a de Parma hasn’t improved your manners any.”

I step back, my gaze turning to disdain as I raise my head. “Countess” I respond. My flat tone gives nothing away—I could be speaking to a lowly servant. Unfortunately, I’m stuck here in a castle hallway, speaking to my mother, who suddenly has enough common sense to realize that she is addressing a superior as she bows, hatred in her eyes.

“I hear you are now the court favorite. I’m sure the Monsignor at the monastery taught you the skills needed to ‘access’ the position. Our King does like them young and pliable. You should be grateful to us for throwing you away…” A bitter taste fills my mouth, causing me to spit at the hem of my mother’s silk dress. “You won’t be so high and mighty when the King hears of this conversation, madam. A good day to you…” It takes everything in me to turn away and walk calmly down the hall.

Friday morning starts with a rush of nerves. I had briefly spoken to my father the night before. His response to my inquiries were all the same—“You should know, you’re the favorite.” After a few moments I turned and headed back to my room in my father’s suite, Vincent reaching out to touch my arm in sympathy as I pass by.

Two castle maids loaded down with my clothing follow me to my new apartment. Once inside I spot a young handsome man standing in the hallway outside my room. “Hello sir. My name is Angelo. I’m to be your new servant, if you like me, that is.”

I give the young man a quick look over while responding “Then help the maids gather and bring the rest of my clothing, Angelo.” My mother choses this exact moment to breeze into the room, taking my arm in a tight grip. “Oh darling! I’m here to help with all the last-minute details!” She gasps and gawks at the burgundy wallpaper, the miniature statues on the fireplace mantel, the fancy furniture throughout my new apartment. “Thank you so much, Mother! I’m positively dizzy with all the arrangements! I want everything perfect for tonight!”

At exactly 7 pm, the King and Queen enter my living room to find a room full of foreign dignitaries and many high-ranking courtiers. My father was missing from the small crowd around me, but then again, that was really not a surprise. I bow low before the royal couple, my voice full of warmth and joy as I loudly comment “Your majesties! It is an honor to have you visit my humble home! I hope you enjoy this evening’s festivities! May we sit down to dine?” The Queen places her hand on my arm, squeezing tightly as she comments “My darling Damian! I look forward to your first evening hosting. I’m sure the King and I will be pleased with your efforts.” I nod to both of them as I lead them through the small crowd, yelling out “Dinner is served, everyone! Please join us in the dining room!”

As I am pushing in the Queen’s chair I hear a commotion at my front door. After excusing myself and stopping to tell Angelo to serve the first course, I move into the front room to see what the commotion is. An armed guard is forcefully holding Vincent against the door frame. I cringe when I hear Vincent trying to explain that I am his son and that he was invited to the dinner party. Vincent is wearing his best clothes and jewels. The guard laughs out “You’re but a servant and you’re invited to a party with the King!? You scum are not on the guest list!” I make my way over to the guard’s side, quietly telling him that Vincent is my Mother and she is indeed invited to dinner. Before the guard responds I hear the King behind me bellow out “What is this?” I bow low before explaining the situation to the King. With a quick glance at Vincent, the King laughs out loud. “Damian! Simply because your Mother is a servant does not mean that he is invited to royal events! A servant knows his place. Obviously, this servant does not. I’ve raised you above all this.” I try to argue once more but the King turns on his heel and walks back into the dining room, barking over his shoulder “Take that servant back where he belongs.” I reach out my arms towards Vincent as I watch the guard drag Vincent down the hall and throw him into my father’s apartments.

Now dear reader, I’m sure that you have wondered where my path to the dark side started. Those who have heard at least part of my story know that I was already a monster when I turned my beloved Tommy Joe into a vampire. But I’m sure most would be surprised to find that I consider this moment in time to be the point where the needle started to tip to the dark side.

I stand stunned in the hallway as my Father steps out of his apartment, his face full of rage. “Damian! How dare you hurt your Mother this way!”

“Father, please let me explain!” I run down the hall at full speed, skidding to a halt in front of the man that took me into his home, into his life.

“No. There’s nothing you can say to make this right. I brought you into my home, made you my son. You disrespected your Mother and I. I disown you.”

I collapse to my knees in front of my Father, my fingers clinging to his velvet pants. “Please Father! I love and respect both of you! I didn’t ask to be made the favorite! I AM YOUR SON! I LOVE YOU! PLEASE don’t send me out of your life! PLEASE!!!”

I will never forget the hatred that filled my Father’s eyes in this moment. The material of my Father’s pants is pulled from my grasp as he turns his back on me, leaving me kneeling in my expensive clothes in the middle of a dirty hallway. “Leave my sight, Damian Lavelli. You are never to speak to Vincent again. Never address me in any way ever again. You are dead to us.”

Time seems to move slower as I drag myself up from the floor, dirt covering my knees and hands. My father strides through his apartment door, slamming it in my face.

I spend the rest of the evening moving on autopilot, trying to choke back tears. I receive compliment after compliment on my apartment’s décor, my choice of food for the dinner party, my clothing. Each word falls on deaf ears. Oh, I did my very best to appear demure and appreciative of the honeyed words dripping from everyone’s mouth. It seems that everyone is doing their very best to make the royal favorite their best friend. In the middle of the evening the King meets my eyes with a smirk, his amusement making rage rush through my body. How dare he laugh at my pain? I make a silent vow to not only meet the court’s expectations of my new status, but to excel in every way. It is in this moment that I feel the darkness enter my soul for the first time.

Dessert is brought in by an array of circus performers and magicians. As I watch the Queen laugh in delight as a bouquet of flowers are presented to her by a magician, I feel my heart sink to my feet. I have lost everything that ever mattered to me. What will happen to me now that I have been disowned? Who will love me now? Am I destined to spend the rest of my life alone?

The voice I heard in the stables whispers in my ear once again. “No, my love. Your adventures have just begun.”

Chapter Text

“I get back up when I fall
Rip the paint from the wall
When I win, I’ma run and take the money,
Try to put me in a box
Make me something I’m not
Don’t give a fuck ‘cause I’m gonna take back
My superpower”
Superpower--Adam Lambert

I have to admit my mother was right. It took an entire six months for it to happen, but the King finally made me his courtesan. Of course, my being the court favorite was always for show. The Queen knew of the King’s desire for pretty young boys, but she loved the King enough to look the other way. The Queen loved and adored me so much that I became a pet to her, someone to admire and preen over. I learned to bake and I would constantly bring her tempting treats. She lavished me with not only the finest materials for new suits of clothing, but she gifted me with her most valuable gift of all—her time. I spent many an afternoon drinking teas from around the world with the Queen, or riding through the nearby countryside by her side.

My manners became highly polished. There was no one else at court who could outdo me when it came to laying on the bullshit! I bowed lower and showed submission better than even my ex-father, who was a pro! I made the person who was the recipient of my attention feel as if there were no one else in the world but the two of us. I complimented and flirted with the best of them.

My ego grew out of control. Where once I was kind to the peasants and ‘underlings’ that I encountered each day, I began to treat them as if they were dirt under my feet with only a few exceptions—my servant Angelo, Antonio the chamberlain, and Maria, the de Parma maid. But even with Maria, my kindness had strings attached—I gave her plenty of coin to sneak letters to my beloved Vincent behind my ex-father’s back.

People flocked to me night and day. My apartment became the most visited room in the castle, outside the throne room, of course! Lavish parties were attended by courtiers and visiting royalty, as well as the King and Queen, naturally.

Vincent gave me sad looks whenever he saw me. Marious refused to let him speak to me on pain of death, and he meant it. I would nod and smile as I passed him, but I would never try to engage Vincent in direct conversation. I had my own ways to let him know I still loved him dearly.

Marious was another story. He froze me out every chance he got, besmirched my name to the court and even tried to convince the King to throw me out on my ear penniless. Little did my ex-father know what the King really had in store for me.

The night the King first took me to bed was the first night of the Advent season. I had spent the day visiting the local market, trying to find the most extravagant and expensive gifts I could find for the King and Queen. As I was wrapping up my shopping excursion for the day, a peasant approached me, his face flushed from cold. After slipping a few coins into his hand, I opened the sealed note, my eyebrows raising when I notice the King's handwriting.

“Darling Damian. I intend to visit you this evening after dinner. I will be alone. Have your servant find other lodgings for the night, and have him plan to stay away until late tomorrow morning. I look forward to spending time with you this evening.”

Oh fuck! Am I reading more into this letter than I should? What could the King possibly want with me all alone? To play cards and drink wine? Possibly…

I rush back to my rooms and call out to Angelo to draw me a bath and lay out my best clothes. I find that I’m shaking badly by the time I try to dry off. I bark out orders for Angelo to send to the kitchen for pastries and fruit, as well as plenty of wine. It would be easier for the King to find me charming if he is drunk off his ass…

After a final once over of the apartment I place some coins in Angelo’s palm. “Have some fun. I am no longer in need of your services until tomorrow midmorning. I hope you can find someplace decent in the castle to sleep tonight.” Angelo gives me a look of confusion as he replies “I will sleep in the servant’s hall tonight, Master. If you have need of me, send someone for me there.” With a quick smile and a nod Angelo left me to await my fate.

Two hours later the door to my apartment opens, and I sink to my knees, eyes on the floor. I notice that the King is simply dressed—for him, that means he is wearing velvet and ermine instead of more expensive chinchilla. Cool fingers reach under my chin to raise my head and body until I am face to face with the King, a position few ever achieve besides the Queen. As I look into the King’s eyes, I cannot help remembering the look of amusement and cruelty that I saw the day the King threw Vincent out of my apartment.

“My beautiful Damian.” I look down in time to see the King take my smaller hand in his. “Please join me on the sofa, hum?” As if I could say no! The King sits close to my side, his arm brushing mine. “I could demand you give your body to me but I am not that kind of man. Instead I’m here to offer you the position of my courtesan. You will be the only love of my life, save the Queen herself” My voice shakes as I respond “But your Majesty…the Queen…"

“…knows all about my offer. We love each other dearly but there are some things that she cannot do for me that only you, my love, can. There is no shame in being mine.” The King brushes back a few stray hairs that have fallen into my eyes. “The Queen told me herself that she will love you even more for loving me, Tesoro. We both adore you so!” My voice shakes, tears filling my eyes as I choke out “My King…I…my time at the…monastery…” I feel soft fingers caress my cheek as the King softly answers “Mio prezioso, I would NEVER treat you like those monsters did at the monastery! No, Tesoro, for you only love and affection! I will never allow ANYONE to hurt you in such a way again, even me!” Before I know what is happening, the King picks me up in his strong arms and places me in his lap, his arms surrounding me in a tight hug. “I swear to you, amore mio, you will only find happiness within these two arms.”

What does one say to that???

I mean yeah, in this day and age one would find what the King is proposing sickening and full on rape-minded. The King of Italy has just proposed having sex with a sixteen-year-old boy! But you need to keep in mind the timeframe in which I am telling my story. Back in those days, it was common for couples to marry at fourteen. Romances between those of my age and older men/women were also commonplace. Life expectancy was much shorter, with the average death rate being mid-forties and early fifties or below. It was rare to find someone older than that. Many gained their legacies from their father during their mid-teen years or younger. So, as you can see, life moved at a much faster pace than today, where the majority of relationships are happening later in life.

Being with the King meant security, the thing I had been lacking since Marious threw me out of his life. I was unconsciously looking for a father replacement—and who better suited than the King of Italy!

With tears still flowing from my eyes, I look the King directly in the face. The King takes my tears to mean that I am turning him down. He tries once again. “Bambino, listen to me, hum?” I nod once. “If you give me tonight, I promise you that I will abide by your decision in the morning. If I hurt you in anyway, you can ask me to leave. I will, and I will never ask you again. What do you say?”

Once again I nod, words failing me. Before I can think, the King has lowered his lips to mine, gently caressing my lips with his own. The soft kiss draws me in. After a while his lips become firmer, the kiss becomes more passionate. Otherwise the King has not moved. I pull back, gasping for air.

“Your Majesty!” Before I can finish my thought, the King gasps out “Matteo, Tesoro. Call me Matteo.”

“Mmmmatteo! Per favore! I…” I wiggle away from the King’s lap when I feel his erection press into my inner thigh. “…can we just lay next to each other? Your cock…” Matteo instantly picks me up and lays me gently on my bed. “I’m so sorry, amore. I will do you one better! How about I get undressed and lay down next to you? Maybe if you keep your clothes on, you will feel like the one in control. You may touch me anywhere you like without worry. How does this sound to you, hummm?”

At home, when Thomas touched me and then later at the monastery, everyone took from me. They took my innocence and my consent from me. In this moment, Matteo is offering me something that I’ve never had before—choice. Choice to touch instead of be touched, choice to say no if I am not comfortable. Choice to walk away without judgement if I change my mind. Even though the concept is foreign to me, I reply “Yes, Matteo.”

I watch Matteo slowly remove his clothing, throwing them on a chair in the corner as if they were nothing more than rags. I have a slight moment of panic when he lies down naked next to me, the left side of his body touching my right side from shoulder to foot. “Take your time, mio prezioso. Touch me, kiss me, do as you will. I will not move. I want you to feel totally in control at all times.”

My lean body feels almost anorexic next to the King’s large, muscular frame. I gingerly reach out until I feel my fingertips softly brush down the side of Matteo’s face. His smile encourages me to move downward, my hand encountering his hairy chest and nipples. I give Matteo a confused look as he arches up when I touch his nipple for the first time, even though he is trying his best to stay still. I brush the nipple again before, without thought, I lean down and lick the tip of my tongue across his nipple. The arch becomes sharper, a growl coming from deep inside Matteo’s chest. I lick again and again before, thinking of how I had overheard girls whisper to each other about how much fun nipples can be, I lean down once again and take one in my mouth, sucking sharply.

“Damian, you are going to be the death of me!” Matteo moans out, his cock jerking upwards at his words. I quickly suck on the other nipple a few times before pulling back to examine Matteo’s hard cock.

In my past experience, cocks were made to cause only pain. The only exception was the hand job that Thomas gave me, even though I was too young to understand what was going on at the moment. My ‘dealings’ with my own cock had, of course, given me great pleasure over the years, but how does one make sure that they give that same type of pleasure to someone else?

I slowly kiss my way down Matteo’s quivering stomach, stopping where his cock juts out. I ask him to spread his legs (which he eagerly does) and once between them, I sit back to consider my ‘plan of attack.’ Do I kiss the underside of his cock starting at the end, or do I simply start at the bottom and work my way up? I suddenly feel an unexpected jolt of excitement running through my veins.

I decide to split the difference by gently kissing the very tip of Matteo’s cock, which jumps under my lips. I look up to see Matteo clutching the sheet below him in an attempt to stay still. I then reach out and gently touch the huge cock in front of me, taking in its size, shape, feel. It doesn’t look as scary as I imagined it would. If I have to be totally honest, in that very moment, the only word to describe my condition is—intrigued.

I have to admit, Matteo played it low key. My hand moved up and down his large cock and the only thing he did was cuss softly. I stare deep into his eyes as my hand quickens. What do I do now? Do I continue, allowing him to come all over his stomach as I did when I masturbated? Or do I try to place his cock in my mouth and give him the blowjob I’m sure he’s looking for? When I was at the monastery, the Monsignor choked me with his cock a few times. I hated the taste, the fear when I couldn’t breathe as my windpipe was cut off. Fear once again took over as I contemplate my next move. But then again, here is a chance to experiment on MY terms, in MY time! I’d be a fool to turn down this opportunity.

I mumble “I’m…gonna try…” before opening my mouth and sucking on the end of Matteo’s huge cock. Taking a deep breath, I slowly lower my head, taking in the first two inches. I hear Matteo’s breath catch as I hold his cock in my mouth as if waiting for it to bite me. When I realize that Matteo isn’t going to grab my head and force me down his dick, I pull back slightly before once again moving forward to take in three inches this time.

Before I know it, I am doing an admirable job of giving the King a blow job, even if I do panic if the huge cock in my mouth starts to choke me. Matteo shifts under me once or twice but he keeps his hands fisted in the sheets, curse words flying out of his mouth in a continuous flow, letting me know that he is getting close to completion. I reach my free hand downward to cup Matteo’s balls, delighting when I feel them move upwards towards Matteo’s body. I try to double my efforts in time to feel the first shot of cum enter my mouth, panic making me swallow without tasting for a moment. I continue to suck until the very last drop has left the King’s body and has landed in my stomach.

Once Matteo’s orgasm is over, he reaches down to pull me up until my head rests on his heaving chest. I smile at his whispered words of praise. “Dammit, Tesoro! You were amazing! I thank you for making me feel so good!” I feel Matteo’s hands stroke down my back gently, his hands staying above the waistband of my pants. “Would you like it if I did the same to you, Tesoro?

I nod once, suddenly shy again. Matteo chuckles softly. “Then take off your clothes, amore. It’s okay, I will not hurt you.” Before I know it, my clothes are off and our positions are reversed. The King kisses me sweetly before sucking hickeys over my neck and chest. He pauses at my nipples, making sure to give them the same consideration that I gave his. As Matteo reaches down for my cock, it seems to jump into his hand when he closes around it. How could I not find this pleasurable?

Before I know it, the King of Italy has my cock down his throat, his tongue licking the underside with every downward stroke of his tight lips. I cannot believe how good this feels! I tangle my fingers within the King’s long hair, pulling him closer to me. I never want this feeling to end.

Minutes later I am shooting down Matteo’s throat, my cries carrying through the night as I scream out Matteo’s name. If it is possible to die from pleasure alone, I would have died in this moment.

Once again, I am heaved up onto Matteo’s chest, my head pillowed against his neck. We are both gasping for air like two drowning men. I still cannot believe that this powerful man has given me so much pleasure. But even though my body is still rocking with aftershocks, I can’t help but ask in a scared voice “Will you…want more of me?”

Matteo sighs heavily before pulling me back to meet my eyes. “Damian, did you find pleasure in what we just did?” I nod enthusiastically. “I know that what you went through before was horrible beyond words, but there are other things that are just as pleasurable, if handled in the right way. Do you think you can trust me to show you?”

Can I? Will I go through life scared of other men, always seeing dark shadows where there aren’t any? Or can I give my trust over to this man, who has just given me more pleasure that I ever imagined before?

Feeling daring, I answer in a confident voice “I trust you, Matteo.” I watch Matteo’s face light up in a huge smile, both his hands taking one of mine and bringing it to his lips for a series of light kisses. “You will never regret it, amore mio! Thank you for gifting me with your trust.”

Before I know it, I am laying on my front, my ass high in the air, my legs spread wide. Matteo found the bottle of oil that I kept by the bed (I’m a horny young boy, after all!) and spread it over his hand. I feel his gentle breath on my hole seconds before I feel his hands spread my ass cheeks, his tongue licking over my hole a few times. I moan at the foreign sensation, my face and chest turning red as I blush. Matteo continues to lick a few more times before I feel the tip of his tongue gently insert itself into my hole. It feels so damn good! After a few minutes I feel myself pushing back on his tongue, trying to get it as deep into me as it will go. Matteo is patient with me, waiting until I am practically screaming in ecstasy before stopping to say “Tesoro, I’m going to put in a finger. I need you to relax. I will be gentle.” Matteo swipes his tongue over my hole a few more times before I feel the pressure of his finger begin to enter me. I try to swallow the panic that suddenly rises at the intrusion, but seconds later the panic is overcome by the sensation of Matteo rubbing my prostate. Holy fuck, I saw stars instantly! If I had known that this feeling existed, I would have begged to be fucked a long time ago!

Before I know it, one finger turns into two, then three. I feel each finger scissor me open as they continue to plunder my body. Matteo constantly keeps up a flow of conversation, asking if I am alright, telling me I’m beautiful, how much he loves me. I start to pant, the feeling of being stretched out feeling so good! I want more, even if under it all, I’m still a little scared. What if the pain is too much? Matteo continues to stroke over my prostate every few strokes, trying to keep my panic at bay with pleasure. So far it is working…

“Damian, you will feel pressure and a small bit of pain when I push in. It is normal to feel this. Be patient with me, and you will soon feel pleasure like you’ve never felt before. Take a deep breath and then breathe out slowly, amore.” As I push the air from my lungs, I feel Matteo slowly but steadily push into me, past the ring of muscle holding him back. I give a sharp sound of discomfort causing him to slowly pull out and gently push back in. I hear him ask if I’m alright and I nod in response because words are failing me again. I feel Matteo slowly push forward until he is seated deep within me.

“Still with me, Damian? Talk to me.” I feel tears fill my eyes as I struggle to calm down. Even with careful prep, the pain is overwhelming at the moment. The last thing I want to do is disappoint Matteo, so I softly say “Please, go on. I want to feel you…”

Matteo brushes against my prostate on his next push in, causing stars to explode behind my eyelids. “Again, PLEASE!” Matteo chuckles as he gives me another deep stroke, pushing hard against my prostate. “Godddd, that feelssss SO good! PLEASE!” I scream at the top of my lungs. Matteo obeys my pleas, speeding up his strokes in an effort to bring me pleasure. But I find that it is not enough. Without thinking I start to beg “Please, let me see you. Don’t…FUCK!...please, I want to see you…” Before I know it, Matteo pulls out of me, flipping me over and settling me within his strong arms, my legs wrapping themselves over Matteo’s hips on their own accord. I look into Matteo’s eyes as I beg “Please, fuck me…”

Matteo starts pounding me into the mattress. I run my hands up and down his back and ass, pulling him even closer to me. I hear Matteo’s harsh breathing, his grunts of pure need as he slams his hips into mine. I push back into him the best I can, getting him to go as deep as possible. My toes start to curl, my head throws back in passion as I cum without anyone touching my cock. I scream out “Matteo, ti voglio bene!” as I feel my orgasm take me over. I hear Matteo grunt a few more times, feel his cock swell before it explodes deep within me. “Ti amo anch’io, bellissimo” Matteo gasps as I feel him flood my very being with his cum.

The two of us cling to one another as our bodies cool down. Matteo slowly pulls out of me, there is a temporary sharp pain before cum starts to dribble onto the bed. Matteo gathers the blankets that were thrown on the floor in the heat of passion, pulling them over us as he pulls my smaller body into his once again. I pillow my head on his broad chest, my body feeling so small next to his. So, this is the passion that my real mother was always chasing with her young studs!

As my heartbeat returns to normal, Matteo whispers in my ear “So, are you happy we made love, Tesoro?” I nod enthusiastically, my voice excited as I ask “Can we do it again?” Matteo laughs in my ear. “Of course, but I am an old man compared to you! I need to recover! Rest now, and I promise we will make love again soon.” I fall asleep listening to the sound of the Matteo’s heartbeat.

The next morning, I am stiff and sore but feeling on top of the world. Matteo and I made love two more times during the night, both times ending with my coming on Matteo’s cock alone. I cannot express the level of pride Matteo seemed to show each time, as if I were the most amazing prize in the world. I did not understand his ego then but I do now! Each time my Tommy Joe comes unaided on my cock, I preened like a peacock! Ah, the vanity of man!

We lie in bed drinking wine and eating pastries until the sun is high in the sky. When Matteo finally pulls away to wash up and dress, the feeling of loneliness begins to push in on me. How will I sleep without him? Matteo must see what I’m feeling cross my face because the next thing I know, my naked body is seated on his lap, his arms hugging me tightly. “This is not the end, Tesoro! Only the beginning! You will have your days with the Queen and I, and I will come to you whenever I can. Never forget that you hold my heart in your hand, amore. You are mine.” With that final assurance and a crushing kiss of dominance, Matteo becomes my King again, his arm giving me a wave of farewell as he leaves my apartment.

Angelo returns twenty minutes later, taking in the rumpled sheets, the smell of sex in the air without comment. I ask him to change the sheets, draw me a hot bath to soothe my aching muscles and to lay out a suit of clothing for me. I suddenly find that I will have no peace until I speak with the Queen.

I find the Queen in the throne room, her ladies surrounding her. As I approach I give her a deep bow, my movements stiff. I hear the Queen laugh as she beckons me to her side to whisper in my ear “I know, amore. I feel the same way when he rides me the way I like!” I blush as I laugh. “He DOES have a way to make you feel like a filly being ridden hard and put up wet!” The Queen throws back her head and laughs out loud, her small fingers finding and pinching my cheek, joy in her eyes. She does turn serious for a moment though. “I spoke to him when he returned. You gave him much happiness, amore, and I will never forget it. We will spoil you in ways you never dreamed of! You are in my debt.” I bow low before the Queen, sincerity in my voice as I respond “And I will always strive to make both of you proud of me, my Queen. Your love is all I ask from you both, except for one thing.” I hold my breath until I hear the response I long for—“You will have it, bambino. What is it?”

I try my hardest to hold back the gleam in my eye and the smirk on my face as I softly demand in the Queen’s ear “I'd like you to destroy the Lavelli family.”

Deep within my mind I hear a loud peal of feminine laughter.

Chapter Text

The only true desire that I carried in my heart, from the moment my father killed Thomas in my parent’s bedroom, is finally taking place in front of me. The Lavelli family is about to be destroyed, broken and left in tatters on the throne room floor.

The King ordered my parents to be brought before the King’s majesty. I stand at the King’s side as my parents slowly enter the throne room, their eyes down and their heads bowed in shame despite their fancy clothes and jewels. Everyone standing in the crowd knows that it was my whispered words in the Queen’s ears that have brought my parents to this predicament. The richest and most important men and women in the crowd bow their heads to me in deference when we make eye contact, as if afraid to anger me in any way.

The King looks down his nose at my parents, his hand moving to rest on my forearm in a show of support. “Count and Countess Lavelli, you have schemed your last scheme against the Crown.” My mother glares at me momentarily, then resorts to tears and pretty words to try and win over the King and Queen. Bowing low, she softly comments “Your Majesties, we thank the two of you for taking in our wayward son…” The King ignores her, cutting off her soliloquy. “Madame, your ploy will not work this time. I hereby strip the two of you of your titles. Your lands and money will be seized and returned to the Crown. You and your hideous husband will spend the rest of your days toiling away in the prison workhouse.” A look of pure horror crosses both my parent’s faces at the thought of the fate that awaits them. “But my babies! What of our younger children, who will depend on our title to make their way in the world?” The King glances at me, takes in my slight shake of head and continues. “You should have thought about them before you tried to reach for my crown, Madame. They will have to find their own way in the world. Begone from our sight and never darken our doorway again!” I watch with glee as the King’s guard moves in to grab both my parents by the arm and drag them out of the room. But as always, my mother gets in the last word…

“DAMIAN! You will BURN IN HELL for this! You will never find lasting happiness, you will suffer for what you have done here! Mark my words! YOU WILL BURN!!!”

Gentle reader, there have been times when my mother’s curse has come to mind over my lifetime, and I have more than once taken those spiteful words to heart. It took a long time for me to realize that my happiness is something I control, therefore only I can truly destroy it. It's all in the perception of the beholder.

The crowd starts to gossip quietly about what they have just witnessed. I turn and bow low before the King and Queen, quietly commenting "I thank both Your Majesties for this, as well as for gifting my older brother with an endowment. I'm sure he will make a fine life out of the gift you have given him." My thoughts flee to my sister Elena, who married a rich merchant and moved far away from my parents. At least these two siblings will have a good life out of the shadow of those two vipers.

"Anything for our favorite, Damian" the King replies before motioning me closer. As I bow down next to his chair, Matteo chuckles then moans out "You can thank me later tonight--on your knees, Tosoro." I blush as I bow once more, the Queen laughing out loud at our exchange.

The King was right, of course. Later that evening I was indeed kneeling in front of Matteo, my mouth full of his delicious cock. As I sucked hard, my mind wandered to the first time I saw my mother sucking cock. I watched as she slurped down her lover’s cum as if it was the most delicious treat in the world. ‘Like mother, like son’ I think as Matteo moans loudly, his cum sliding down my throat to pool in my stomach.

Never again will I have to hear my mother’s screeching voice curse me to hell, feel her kicks and slaps. That bitch and her heartless husband will spend the rest of their days toiling in the prison workhouse, while I’m living in the lap of luxury here at the castle.

There is a God, and I’m kneeling in front of him.

Three months later Italy was at war with France, and the King was gone for long periods of time at the front lines. I would sometimes visit Matteo, curled up in his bed with him as the sound of the battle could be heard in the distance. The King’s generals all treated me with respect—after all, the happier the King was, the easier their lives were in the long run! But one morning an arrow was shot into the King’s tent at six am, and before I knew it I was being sent home immediately for my safety.

As I start to walk from Matteo’s tent, I felt Matteo stop me by grabbing my arm in a tight grip. “Tesoro, take good care of the Queen for me. See to her comfort and…take care of her.” I bow my head and answer “Of course, my King.” Matteo gives me a searing look, his eyes hooded. “No, Damian. I mean TAKE CARE of the Queen, ALL her needs. Bring her pleasure in my absence. That is an order.” My stomach immediately flops over at the thought of pleasuring the Queen, but if my Matteo demands it, I will do anything he asks. “I will do my very best to see to her needs, my King.” I lean up on my toes, my arms encircling Matteo’s waist as I plant a kiss on his lips. “Stay safe for us, Sire. We await your return.” I then turn and make my way to my stallion for the long trip back to the castle.

How the hell am I to ‘take care of the Queen’s needs?’ I’d never slept with a woman before! She’ll probably laugh me right out of bed!

As soon as the King’s guards and I arrive at the castle, I find the Queen reading in front of the fire, alone in her private chambers. “Damian! How is our Matteo?” she asks, a small smile lighting up her features.

I think I’m going to be sick…

I take her small hand in mine as I respond “He’s fine, Majesty. He asked me to take care of all your needs while he’s gone.” The Queen’s face blushes a deep red, her dimples standing out on her pretty cheeks. “Kind Matteo, always looking after me!” She quickly pats my hand a few times. “But amore, I know that you know nothing of women, much less have experience in that realm! I cannot ask you to…” I kneel down in front of the Queen, my shaking hands now in hers. “Your Majesty, I wish nothing more than to bring you pleasure, and make Matteo proud of me. May I join you this evening? We could have a private dinner and then after…” I try my very best to look and sound interested “…you can teach me everything I need to know.” The Queen looks again as if she wants to protest, but instead she simply says “Of course, amore. I will see you at seven tonight.”

I spend the rest of my day drinking wine and playing cards to distract me from the night to come. When seven o’clock rolls around, I find myself standing outside the Queen’s chambers, my limbs shaking. Can I do this? Or will I simply disappoint the two most important people in my life?

I enter the room to find the Queen at her small dining table with only one lady in attendance. I bow low before them, my hand on my chest. “Good evening, Majesty!” The Queen chuckles in response, her flushed cheeks showing the amount of wine that she too must have drank during the day. “My Damian! Come have dinner with me.”

Two hours later, after a three-course meal and at least one more bottle of wine, the Queen dismisses her lady in waiting. When she first sees the look of panic on my face, she leans across the table to take my hand, her breasts practically falling out of her dress. “Amore, relax. Come sit with me on the bed, let me hold you.” I stand on shaky legs and follow the Queen to her bed like an overexcited puppy dog.

I have always found women to be truly beautiful. Their bodies have always been intriguing to me, but I had never felt the urge to sleep with one. The Queen pats the bed next to her, her eyes kind. I move quietly forward until I feel her body pressing into my side, my posture stiff as she puts her arms around me.

“You know, Damian, I’m not going to hurt you. Just trust me, I’m sure it won’t be as bad as you imagine.”

“Your Majesty…”

“Juliana, amore. Call me by my given name.” I feel the Queen brush her fingers down my cheek before her hand comes to rest on my chin, drawing me closer to her. I look at her lips as they descend on mine, her soft lips parting under the slight pressure. The kiss is gentle, unexpected. By now Matteo would dominate our kiss, leading the way in all instances. Do I ramp up the kiss, or let her take the lead?

In my panic I barely move. After a while Juliana feels what she takes to be reluctance coming from me and pulls away. “Off to bed with you, Damian. I will see you in the morning.” She motions me away from her, her back slowly turning away from me. “But…” I see her shoulder quake before I hear her hollow words. “We shall simply tell the king that you performed your duties admirably. I’m sure he will believe me. Goodnight, amore.” I watch the Queen remove her robe and slide under the covers. I am suddenly confused, and I feel like a jerk for disappointing the Queen.

“My lady?”

“Good night, Damian. See you in the morning.” I watch her roll over in bed with her face towards the opposite wall.

Later I lie in my bed, trying to comprehend the thoughts and feelings flooding through me. I know that I should’ve tried harder to push through my fears and panic to make the Queen happy, but what does a young gay boy know of such things? And how the fuck do I make things right now? After a night of tossing and turning, I wake with a new determination to make things right.

I barge into the Queen’s chambers unannounced in my underwear. The ladies in waiting shriek in surprise as I walk into the Queen’s bedroom to find the Queen still in bed. “Out of the room, now!” I bellow, moving to stand at the foot of the bed with my hands on my hips. As the ladies scurry out of the room, the Queen opens one eye, a look of exasperation and shock on her face. “What the hell do you think you’re doing, Damian! Ordering my ladies like that! You would think you were the King…”

I grab the blankets in both hands and fling them on the floor, leaving the Queen in just her nightgown. “Why Majesty, I thought you might be lonely this morning! Are you saying you wouldn’t like some attention…”

I have no idea what to do, so I climb on the bottom of the bed, slowly making my way up her body until I’m lying on top of her. I capture her lips with mine, putting as much lust as I can muster into the kiss. I feel Juliana initially panic before I hear her soft moan, her lips surging up to meet mine. I feel her soft tongue lick my lips, so I open up to her, twining our tongues in a fight for supremacy. So, this is what it’s like to take the lead! I find myself enjoying our kiss but then panic sets in again as I try like hell to figure out my next move.

Juliana must’ve felt my growing panic, because the next thing I know, she is pushing me back into a sitting position. “Slow down, amore. Just let me…” I watch entranced as Juliana removes her nightgown, her movements sexy and slow. Looking back on it now, I have to admit that she was the most beautiful woman I have ever known (and I’ve met a lot of them!)

And boobs! Oh my heavens, why didn’t someone tell me how amazing boobs are? Without thinking I reach my hands out, the look on my face showing the wonder I’m feeling at touching these two mounds of softness! I look up into Juliana’s smiling face as I slowly move my hands over both of her breasts, feeling them firm up under my touch. I feel myself blush from head to toe as I softly ask “Juliana…what do…I do?”

“Hush amore. Give me your hand…” I place my hand in hers, biting my bottom lip. She brings my hand down between her legs. “Touch me, amore. Anything feels good. Just keep touching me.”

After a few minutes of fumbling around inside, I realize what I’m doing isn’t going to be enough. Juliana’s face is strained, as if trying to reach something out of reach. Feeling brave, I place a few kisses to her lips then kiss my way down to her right breast. Matteo loves it when I bite his nipples, would it work the same for Juliana? I place my lips around her right nipple and gently bite until I feel Juliana's back shoot up from the bed. I keep sucking lightly as I find...something...

Juliana bolts upright on the bed, her eyes wide open. I brush the little node one more time, hear her swear, watch perspiration break out on her forehead. "Again, amore! Please!" Feeling brave once again, I lean down until I am gazing between her legs. If my fingers could bring on this wonderful response, what would my tongue do...

Five minutes later I feel Juliana begin to quake from head to toe, her hands clenched tight in the bedsheets. I continue to lick and move my hand until at last, she throws her head back and screams at the top of her lungs. After a few minutes she quiets, but her body continues to shake. I lick my lips as I gather the Queen in my arms, holding her against my chest.

"Did I...do well, Juliana?" I venture to ask, my fragile ego sounding through in my voice. Before she can respond, three members of the King's guard burst into the room, pikes and swords out. "Your Majesty!" the head guard screams out. "What..." I cover Juliana with my body the best I can while yelling "OUT knave! Can't you see the Queen's just fine?" Below me, I hear Juliana trying to keep laughter from her voice as she says “It’s alright, Alberto! I’m just fine! Please, have my ladies bring food and wine.” The head guard nods once, his face red as he pushes the other guards out of the room in front of him. The minute they are all out of the room, the two of us burst out in laughter.

“Amore, you were perfect! I thank you for making me feel so good.” I take Juliana’s hand in mine as I answer, honesty in my voice. “My pleasure! I would like to of use anytime you wish, my lady.” I lean down and kiss Juliana once more as we hear the Queen’s ladies return to the other room to lay out breakfast.

Three more months drag by before Matteo’s troops make a final siege that ends the war. I have practically moved into the Queen’s chambers by this time, being by her side as she attends to duties during the day, then keeping her satisfied at night. Juliana lavishes me with small gifts of money and clothing, as well as sweets from around the world.

Matteo’s return was delayed two extra weeks, so he could meet with the King of France and sign a new peace treaty. During this time, another event takes place that leads me further down the slow path to the dark side.

My mother had a twink looking lover at court by the name of Marcus Lebow. She had met him the year I was born, and they became lovers the year before I was taken to the monastery. Marcus was only out for my mother’s money, and, since he was gay, everybody at court knew the truth of it. After I was thrown out of the house, Marcus became my mother’s only lover, and she gave him a steady stream of cash to keep him in her bed. Problem was, by sending my mother to the work house, Marcus’s cash cow disappeared. Little did I know that he became so angry at this, he vowed revenge on me.

I heard a rumor that a slave was caught red-handed with stolen jewelry. I didn’t think too much about it, gossip flowed all the time at court. It wasn’t until I was at dinner the next night with Juliana that I overheard two of her ladies discussing the event.

“Can you believe it? He stole the Queen’s jewels! I’m SURE he will be put to death…”

I turned to Juliana, asking her about the event. Anger laced her words as she replied “Yes, Damian. Marious’s slave was the last person on the planet I expected to steal my jewelry! The guards caught him with the jewels in his hands! He has been thrown in the dungeon pending Matteo’s return.”

VINCENT, a jewel thief? There was no way that my Vincent would do such a thing! When I say this to Juliana, she waves a hand in the air to dismiss me. “People never show their true sides, Damian! He may have been a good mother to you, but he’s a slave. They can never be trusted, amore. You would do better to forget him.”

Fear, rage and confusion fill my soul. How can Juliana dismiss my beloved Vincent this way? I become so filled with rage that after dinner I beg off the rest of the evening, blaming a headache for my leaving Juliana’s side. She kisses my forehead and bids me goodnight, disappointment briefly filling her eyes.

I immediately head to the dungeon.

After a series of bribes, I am standing against the dirty bars of Vincent’s prison cell. Bruises cover Vincent’s arms, chest and face, a testament of the rough treatment he suffered at the hands of the guards. Shirtless, I watch him shiver with cold, his dirty breeches torn to shreds.

“My sweet boy! What are you doing here?” I feel tears well up in my eyes as I take Vincent’s hands in mine.

“I’ve come to see you, Madre. I know you didn’t do what they said you did…”

“Damian, I didn’t, I swear! I was out at the market and when I returned, I found the jewelry on my pillow. I recognized one of the necklaces. I gathered the jewelry to take to Marious when the guards burst into our rooms and arrested me.”

I squeeze both of Vincent’s hands tightly, tears streaming down my face. “I swear to you, Madre, I will appeal to the King when he returns…”

“NO!” Vincent pulls sharply on both my hands. “Don’t even think of it, amore! I will not be the cause of your downfall with the royal couple!”

“But Madre…”

I said NO! Damian, I am but a slave. There is no justice for me. If you anger the King over this, it will be your undoing! You must keep his favor at all costs. The world is a slippery place.” Seeing the rage burning in my eyes, Vincent tries once again. “There are those who wish to see you fall from grace. You have come far amore, but it only takes one word to undo a lifetime of good deeds. Do not give in to your rage. That is my final wish.”

A guard appears at my right shoulder. “Time’s up.”

Vincent squeezes my hands before leaning down to pepper them with kisses. “Ti voglio bene, Damian. Never forget me, for I will be by your side always. Forgive those who you hate, for they someday may be your salvation.”

I feel the guard push on my arm in an attempt to get me to leave. I push back long enough to answer “Ti voglio bene, Madre. You will always be in my heart.” With a heavy heart I turn, leaving behind the only truly loving person I have ever known to his fate.

When Matteo returns three days later, I am summoned to his chambers. Thinking to find myself alone with him, I am surprised to find Marcus Lebow at the King’s side, drinking wine with him and flirting. “Your Majesty, that’s exactly as I heard it. He was caught with the jewels in his possession! I hear they are only awaiting your word for his execution.”

I bow low before Matteo, ignoring Marcus the best I can. “Welcome home, Sire. We all missed you very much.” I see Matteo wave a hand at me while he turns his attention to Marcus. “I give you leave, Marcus. I must speak with Damian.” Marcus bows low before the king but not before throwing my way the evilest smirk I had ever seen. I must admit, I have worked hard over the years to copy this smirk, but I never have been able to fully capture the same amount of sheer evil. Vincent’s words regarding those who wish to see me fall from grace ring in my ears as I watch Marcus strut out of the room.

“Damian! Come here and welcome me home!” Believe me, it took over four hours to ‘properly’ welcome him home, in every way possible. I wait until Matteo is snacking on pastries and wine, trying to gain enough strength for round five, to bring up the topic of Vincent.

“Why would I save him? He’s a thieving slave, Damian!” I try to explain what Vincent told me, causing Matteo to erupt in a rage. “You WENT to the DUNGEON, DAMIAN? Are you out of your mind? OF COURSE, he will tell you a lie, what did you expect, amore? Honesty? From a thief?” Matteo laughs loudly, the sound of it grating my soul. “You think too deeply, Damian. Give your allegiance to those that truly deserve it, Tosoro. Leave the slaves of the world to those who know how best to deal with them.”

Vincent’s death sentence was handed down in the King’s last sentence to me. I remember I felt a chill shoot down my spine, even though I was standing in front of a blazing fire, a blanket covering my body. Matteo, my lover, my King, my very life, is going to issue Vincent’s death as easily as one would order lunch in a fancy restaurant. I feel rage run through my body as I struggle to school my features into a much more submissive look. The only thought that keeps running through my mind is to be careful or I’ll end up next to Vincent, my head on a block.

My voice shakes slightly as I drop the blanket and bow low before Matteo, my skin shining in the firelight. “As you wish, my Lord.” I remember that it took everything that I had to lie down next to Matteo, taking his cock into my mouth with more duty than pleasure. How can I ever love this man again, after what transpired this evening?

The female voice in my head whispers “Trust and love only yourself, Damian. The rest of the world is a lie.”

Chapter Text

Risking the ire of the royal couple, I attend Vincent’s execution three days later. I stand in the front of the crowd as the guards lead him to the makeshift stand at the center of town. Vincent walks slowly, his head hung low as the townspeople throw rotten vegetables and trash on him as he passes. Once atop the stairs to the platform, Vincent’s sad eyes lock on mine. I give him a faltering smile, my tears streaming down my face. I hear the guard command Vincent to bow down and place his head to the block.

The crowd becomes silent as the town priest begins his prayers. Vincent mouths the words “I love you” before closing his eyes for the last time.

I will never forget the sound of the long-handled axe as it connected with Vincent’s neck. Blood sprayed over me as Vincent’s head fell into the basket placed in front of the block, directly in front of me.

I make my slow way back to the castle, blood dripping down my long hair. Once inside, I run into Marious, Matteo and Juliana laughing and joking on their way to the throne room.

I could feel my heart shrink.

I make an exaggerated bow then push past the three, no words exchanged. I make my way to my apartment in silence. Once there, I order Angelo to draw me a bath. “Then tell the chamberlain to inform the royal couple that I will not be attending on them this evening. Have the stable boy saddle my horse.”

Angelo, though stunned, carries out my orders swiftly. Before I know it, the bathtub is red with blood. After dressing in something warm, I ask Angelo to pack me a meal for horseback as quickly as possible. I want to be the fuck out of the castle before I do something that I will regret…

With blanket and meal in hand I make my way out to the stable. Midnight was saddled and waiting for my arrival. Just as I am to place my foot in the stirrup, I hear a firm voice behind me calling out my name. As I turn, I notice Marious standing at the door of Midnight’s stall.

“What is it, Marious? I’m leaving…”

“…at your peril, young man. The King received your message and was furious. If you have any common sense, you will turn around and go back to your rooms…”

I sneer at Marious. “What’s this? Concern for one whom you thought to hate for the rest of time? What brought on this parental concern? Or are you simply trying to cover your own ass with the King. After all, he still sees me as your son…”

Marious slams his fist against the stall door, making Midnight jump. “Blast you, Damian! Why can’t you just behave like a normal person? Why act…”

“…like I didn’t just see my Madre, YOUR LOVE, YOUR fucking WIFE killed before my very eyes? WHY WEREN’T YOU THERE?” Marious gives me a look that would curdle milk. “Didn’t he mean anything to you? Or was he disposable, the same way you view me?”

Marious straightens his shoulders, as if looking for a fight. “My relationship with Vincent was and always will be none of your concern, Damian!”

Midnight starts to whinny and paw the ground. I move past Marious out into the stables, hoping he will calm down if we move the fight away from him. “HOW CAN YOU FUCKING SAY THAT TO ME? YOU told me we were a FAMILY, that I should consider Vincent my Madre! If you weren’t my parents, would I be this upset? NO, I wouldn’t be! Now you tell me to shut the fuck up about things as if it all never mattered.” I shove my hands onto my hips. “Maybe to YOU it never did! And now you’re playing games with the King and Queen, covering your ass as if you’re not in pain! Well, I can’t do that!” I push at Marious with both hands. “You don’t have to suck the King’s cock every night, knowing that it was the King who put the one we loved to death!” I turn to go back into the stall but Marious grabs me by the arm, yanking me back to his side. “Damian! We all have parts to play in the game of court. You have managed to find yourself a good position at court that will, God willing, keep us both alive.” Marious sees the rage building in me, knowing that I am barely listening to him. He shakes me hard as he continues “…But ONLY IF YOU DO NOT RUIN YOUR CHANCES! Do you really want Marcus Lebow to take your place in the King’s bed?”

I feel ice enter my veins at that name. So that was Marcus’ plan all along—to replace me, not punish me.

Marious’ eyes plead with mine. “Take a ride son, clear your head. I will go tell the King that you have a headache, that you will join them after dinner. I will make things right, I promise. Just take a ride and be ready this evening.” I nod once, turning away to mount Midnight.

As Midnight and I fly across the countryside, I let the tears flow. From the moment I was introduced to the court, I had the King and Queen in the palm of my hand. They both gave me their love and attention. With the King home from war, the Queen no longer seeks out my companionship on a regular basis. The King takes care of her ‘personal needs’ so I am no longer required in that capacity. Even though the King still visits my apartments on a regular basis, I’ve lately noticed his eye wandering the throne room. I know my father is correct, I need to work harder to keep the attention of the royal couple. The question is—do I really want to? And how do I achieve this task?

A woman suddenly steps out of the edge of the woods, practically under Midnight’s nose. Neither of us noticed her until it was too late. The next thing I know, I’m being thrown headfirst on the ground.

“Oh my Goddess, are you alright?” The soft voice reaching my ears jingles like bells. As I drag myself off the ground, I hear her whispering to Midnight as she grabs his reins in a steady hand.

“I’m fine, thank you.” I bow low before the young lady, which releases more peals of laughter. “Are YOU alright?”

I watch, fascinated as the young lady strokes her hand gently down Midnight’s flank. Normally the horse balks at strangers touching him, but he is actually pushing into her hand. “I am fine as well, my Lord. I was singing and didn’t hear your approach.”

The only modern-day comparison I can make with this young lady is Stevie Nicks of the band Fleetwood Mac. The dress she is wearing is made of a lacey thin material of a deep red color, an odd choice for such a cool day. She has black sandals on her feet and a basket of produce on her arm. Her long flowing brown hair sways in the breeze, blowing into her honey colored eyes.

“May I ask your name?” I ask as politely as possible. She laughs then answers “Rosana, my Lord. And whom may you be, please?” I bow once again. “Damian, my Lady. It appears that you have made a friend.” Midnight nickers in answer, taking the carrot that Rosana offers him. “I was just about to have a picnic lunch. Would you care to join me?”

Rosana nods once, a blush covering her cheeks. I remove the blanket from the back of my saddle and place it on the ground, returning for the picnic basket that Angelo packed for me a while ago. Over the next two hours, Rosana and I drank wine and ate a delicious meal, our laughter floating over the hillside as we get to know each other.

I have to admit that, without my experience pleasuring the Queen, I wouldn’t have felt at ease during my time with Rosana. Except for the Queen, I had spent the majority of my life with men. I told her of my position as the King’s favorite (and all it entailed) and Rosana admitted to me that she was a pagan. I had heard of that religion but wasn’t very familiar with it. She told me that she worships nature, not a God. She answered my questions with an open frankness that I found lacking in others.

Noticing the position of the sun in the sky, I told Rosana that I had to get back to the castle. I then asked her if she wanted a ride home. She giggled while responding “My home is just at the bottom of the hill, but I would appreciate the ride, my Lord.” We saddled up and headed off, Rosana sitting in front of my saddle.

When we arrived at her home, I was surprised to see it was only a small shack. As she dismounted Rosana took my hand in her small one. “You must come visit me again, Damian. I enjoyed our time together. I want to hear more about life at court! It all sounds very exciting!” I bow in the saddle, promising to return soon. Rosana pats Midnight a few times, offering him a final carrot before waving goodbye to me as we leave.

When I return to my room a note is waiting for me from Matteo. With shaking hands, I pick up the note. It read “Never mind meeting with me this evening, I’ve found other consolation. Matteo.”

At first panic takes over. Is this the end for me? Am I to be cast out? The more I pace my rooms, the more anger takes over my panic. Replace me? ME? Throwing the note in the fire, I make my way to my bedroom to put on a see-through shirt and a pair of tight pants. We’ll see who gets tossed out on their ass tonight…

I make my way past the King’s guard (who know me quite well) and push my way into Matteo’s bedroom. Marcus is sitting naked on his knees at Matteo’s feet, his hands behind his back, head down. Matteo is looking him over like a prime piece of steak in a butcher’s window. It takes him a full minute to turn his gaze over to me.

“I told you to stay in your rooms, Damian. That was an order.” Matteo sounds irritated, not angry. Point scored for me. As his eyes make their way over my body, I respond “Unlike the dog at your feet, I never was good at following orders, Master.” I make my way to stand next to Matteo, hands on my hips in the saucy way he likes. “Maybe I could let the dog out so we can play?” I sidestep my way around Marcus so I am standing inches from Matteo, a lustful smile playing on my lips. “Of course, if you’d rather let him stay and watch...”

I hear a slight grunt of dissatisfaction from Marcus as I bend over, placing my ass directly in his face. I capture Matteo’s bottom lip between my teeth and tug slightly before letting go, standing upright again to check Matteo’s response.

He doesn’t speak. Instead he points at his bed. “Should I undress, Sire?” I ask in the sexiest voice I can manage. “No, Damian, let Marcus do it. He’s going to fuck you and I’m going to watch.”

I hear Marcus’ sharp gasp as I feel my stomach flip over. That DOG is going to fuck ME? I school my face carefully as move to the bed and lie down on my stomach. The very thought of that creep touching me (much less anything else) is sending goose bumps down my spine.

Now, one would think that, in my position as the King’s courtesan, I would feel like a whore every moment I am with the King. The opposite is true. Matteo always made me feel cherished in every way, made me feel as if I belong to him, the same way the Queen does. But right now? Yep, I feel every inch the whore, being made to feel like a trained monkey in a cheap circus sideshow. Out of the corner of my eye, I see Marcus stand and make his way to the side of the bed. I feel his hands push me onto my back, watch his eyes as they come closer until I feel lips on mine.

I hear Matteo moan softly from his chair as Marcus grabs a handful of my hair and pulls sharply, causing my mouth to open in protest. So that’s the way he wants to play?! Well by Gods above, he’s going to fight me tooth and nail every step of the way to gain entrance into my body!

Marcus pulls back from my mouth and proceeds to rip my clothes until I am laying bare on the bed. I watch his eyes widen as he takes in my naked flesh. I manage to punch him a few times, but he doesn’t even react. Before I could move further I feel Marcus’ fingernails scratching over every available inch of skin he can reach, blood raising to the top. I repeatedly smack him, which only serves to make him angry, climbing on top of me to try and hold me still. I watch him tear a long strip of cloth from the sheet under me, hear him grunt in satisfaction as he wrestles my wrists together, binding them with the cloth. I then watch him tie the cloth to the headboard at the top of the bed. I cannot move my wrists, but the way I am tied, it would be easy for Marcus to flip me over any time he sees fit.

I lay on my back with my hands over my head, my legs flaying as Marcus tears two more long strips of cloth. I turn my head to the side and stare at Matteo, watching him slowly tease his hand over his bare cock. I kick Marcus in the stomach twice before he manages to grab my right ankle, tying it to the footboard. After another struggle, he manages to grab my other ankle, doing the same.

I helplessly watch as Marcus walks over to Matteo, whispering in his ear. Matteo’s eyes light up as he replies “In the cabinet in the next room.” Marcus gives me his usual evil grin as he leaves the room, returning with a few items and a riding crop. Marcus makes his way back to the end of the bed, placing the items within easy reach.

Matteo calls out to Marcus “I’ve never used those items on him before, Marcus. Make him howl.”

I feel a sharp pain hit the bottom of my foot. I look down as Marcus strikes my other foot with a long stick. “Master?” I ask, confused. “What does this have to do with sex?”

I feel several strikes hit both feet, the breath leaving my body. Seconds later, I feel something hit my dick full force. Jesus Christ that hurt! I watch the crop hit my dick over and over, then feel Marcus shift to the bottom of my feet again. With his free hand he continues to scratch his nails over my body.

Tears fill my eyes and flow down my face, my breath coming in ragged bursts. I feel the crop start to hit my chest and stomach, my dick feeling bruised and sore. Each hit makes me want to scream at the top of my lungs. Matteo’s moans are louder now, mixed with mine. Marcus stops hitting me long enough to place bites all over my neck and chest, returning to slapping the crop on my dick in time with my screams.

After what feels like forever, Marcus stops. I watch him wrap a leather strap around my cock and balls, pulling tightly as I whimper in pain. “Let’s see you get off now, little Lord! I’m not finished with you yet!” Marcus releases first one and then the other leg, flipping me over like a Thanksgiving turkey, then jumping on my legs to tie them down wide again, my hole on display. My sore dick is now rubbing on the bed with each movement, and I know that both Marcus and Matteo are enjoying the pained noises I’m making.

I feel something sharper than the crop hit my back. The pain makes me gasp and raise off the bed. The whip lays down again on almost the exact same marks, making me whimper. I hear Matteo softly say “again” many more times over the next ten minutes or so, as my back is laid open in crisscrossing marks.

I feel a slick finger push deep within me, to be followed by two and then three in short succession. I try to raise up to fight Marcus off to no avail, tied tightly as I am. Marcus then climbs on the bottom of the bed, grabbing a handful of my hair as he lines up with my hole. I hear him hiss out “Take it, bitch” as I feel Marcus’ cock sink into me in one go.

Not since the monastery have I felt such pain. I’m aching all over, cursing and begging the pain to stop. My cock feels crushed under me, I feel Marcus dig his fingers into the marks on my back as he rides me harshly.

Marcus’ fingers then slide into my mouth, pulling my jaw down. I hear him grunt out “Here, Master” as my mouth is forcefully held open. I feel the bed dip down seconds before Matteo lifts my head enough to slide his erection into my mouth.

“Damian…FUCK! Suck my cock boy while…mmmmm…Marcus fucks your pretty ass! All nice and pink and bloody for us.” I can hear the smirk in Marcus’ words as he barks out “His place is now under us, Master.”

Matteo throws back his head and screams as his come flows down my throat. Marcus slaps his hand over my backside repeatedly as he comes deep inside me a few minutes later.

Matteo and Marcus leave me tied to the bed as they take a break to drink wine and eat a late dinner. When I begin to beg to be untied, Matteo rips off another strip of cloth and shoves it into my mouth to silence me.

A monster was created that night. My beloved King turned into a sadist, lusting for my blood and pain. The more I screamed for mercy, the more he loved it. They took turns fucking me and causing as much pain as they could until nearly noon the next day, when I was laid out in a spare room in the King’s quarters.

Sometime later, fed and somewhat medically treated from head to toe, I wrap a blanket around myself in an attempt to sneak out and return to my room. As I make it out the door of the King’s quarters, I hear Matteo demand “Damian, get back in here.”

I slowly return to stand in front of Matteo, my head bowed. “Master?” “From now on, that room you were in will be your room. I will have your servant move your things over, and he can sleep at the foot of your bed. You will attend on me nonstop, ready for me when I demand it. I will tell the Queen that from now on, you are exclusively mine. Your time for freedom is over.” Matteo walks over to me and places a soft hand under my chin, raising it until our eyes meet. “Damian, I love you. With all my heart, never doubt it.” My eyes must be communicating the doubt I am feeling, forcing Matteo to continue. “You and I are about to embark on a great adventure together. We will both learn many new things. I’m looking forward to it.” With that declaration, Matteo turns and leaves the room, his steps quick and loud as he strides down the hall.

From behind I feel a thick piece of leather slip tight around my throat, hear a cold clasp snapping shut. In a panic I tug on the front as I hear Marcus hiss in my ear. “Now you really are the dog, pretty boy. Get ready to learn how to beg…”

Chapter Text

Three weeks later I am laying on my bed when I hear “Out of my way! I have the King’s permission! I’m here to see my son…” I shift carefully on my bed, opening my eyes. I watch as two guards try to hold back Marious from entering my small bedroom. Once he finally makes it in the room the door shuts loudly behind him, the sound barely masking the gasp that Marious makes when his eyes scan my body.

I am covered with purple and blue marks, some merely under the surface of my skin, some raised and accompanying whip marks. The skin around the collar on my neck is where the freshest marks are, since I was choked out the night before by Marcus. I feel shame and fear as my father continues to stare at me, his mind refusing to comprehend the condition his child is in.

“Father” I croak, my voice broken from screaming. “I…why have you come to see me?”

Marious sits down on the side of my bed, careful not to touch my body for fear of causing me more pain. “I…heard a rumor…about…” Looking at the floor, he continues “…your current situation. I just had to…” Father raises his sad eyes to mine “…see for myself.”

I brush the hair out of my eyes with a shaking hand. “Well as you can see, I’ve ‘learned how to play the game’ here at court!” I shiver as a sharp pain runs down my back. “Aren’t you proud of me, Father?”

“Damian!” Marious takes my hand in his, squeezing gently. “I NEVER meant for this to happen to you! I took you out of that monastery to save you from a life like this! You cannot mean to think that I would want this for you, no matter what you think of me!”

I sniffle a few times. “Well, it doesn’t matter anymore, does it? The King does as he will, and I must pay the price. Even though he tells me he loves me every day, I am nothing but his dog anymore, to come and beg when he calls and get kicked when he feels like it.” I struggle to hold back my tears, afraid if I let the dam break, I will drown us both. “I’m doing my part to make sure that the two of us remain safe here at court, Father. I will put up with anything to keep you safe.”

My father gently squeezes my hand again. “It’s that bastard Marcus’ fault, he has warped the King’s mind! I will speak to the King, Damian. He cannot treat you this way. I will make him listen to reason…” As Marious starts to rise off the bed I rise with him, hissing loudly.

“Oh my God, Damian!” I look over my shoulder to see what my father is looking at. The bedsheets under me are covered with large blood stains. “The King must go mad to be able to treat you this way! He must be stopped!” I reach out blindly with both hands, grabbing Marious by the upper arms. “NO, FATHER! Please do not interfere!” I feel Marious try to pull away again so I tighten my hold. “PLEASE! He is so changeable, he may kill you! I could not live if you died! You are all I have left!” Outside my room I hear the King’s guard returning. I try one more time. “Father, give me your word you will not do anything, please.” The door swings open and the head guard enters the room, grabbing Marious by the shoulders. “Your time is up. Say your goodbyes.”

I reach up and place my hand gently against Marious’ cheek. “I love you, Father. I will be alright. Please just let it go, for both our sakes.” As the guard drags my Father out of the room, Marious calls back to me “You’re never alone, Damian. I’m here for you. I love you.”

I lay back down on my bed, tears flowing down my cheeks. I feel all alone in this nightmare, and I have no idea how to make things better, much less survive this hell.

The King changes from moment to moment, I never know what to expect. Two nights ago, he seemed to be the same old loving Matteo he was when I first came to his bed. He sent Marcus away for the evening, drew me a bath and even washed my body himself. He laid me down on his bed and made love to me in the gentlest way, touching and caressing every inch of my body as if I were made of glass. I did everything that I could to show him my appreciation of his love, his kindness. I touched him all over, ran his long hair through my fingers and covered every inch of him that I could reach with kisses. Afterwards, I fell asleep in Matteo’s arms, content and happy for the first time in a long while. But as in all things, it was not meant to last.

Three hours later I awaken to a hand yanking hair out of my head. As I yelp in surprise, I look up into Matteo’s crazed eyes and know I’m in for a world of trouble and hurt.

“Get up, you lazy slave! There’s work for you to do, lie-about!” Before I can get my feet under me, I am dragged down the hall and thrown on the floor in the center of a circle of men in Matteo’s living room. I glance up to see some of the most influential and rich men in the kingdom leering at my naked body. My humiliation is now complete. I once met these men’s gazes across the throne room, feeling equal to them in every way. Now I am only as good as the dirt under their feet.

I have Matteo towering over me, yanking my head back almost to the breaking point, so he can glare into my eyes. “Put that lazy mouth of yours to work, slave!” I want to beg, crying out that I only belong to Matteo, that I’m only for his pleasure, but I know I am forced to do whatever the King demands. Matteo kicks me onto my hands and knees, then directs me towards Lord Bacus by my hair. Once in front of him, I kneel up and take the man’s cock out of his pants, immediately taking him into my mouth. “See how well he behaves, gentleman? I am quite lucky to own such a sweet piece of ass…”

Three hours later, the men leave the room laughing and talking about what ‘fun’ the meeting with the King was. I am lying on the expensive living room carpet, cum dripping out of my mouth and ass. I hear Matteo laughing at me from across the room. “Crawl your ass over here, slave, and suck me dry.” I raise on all fours, slowly making my way over to Matteo. Once there I feel the sharp cut of a short whip hit my back. “Suck me off while I carve up your back, slave. Show me how much you love me.”

Later that night I find myself crying on that same carpet, left alone to bleed while the King heads off to bed. “Don’t stain the carpet, Damian. You don’t want me to have to punish you, do you?”

Six months slowly creep by. I hear the guards talking about my father, how he tries to visit me but is repeatedly refused visits by the King. They mention that the Queen has asked for visits as well, to be instantly denied. Every time someone asks to see me, it goes very bad for me afterwards.

The King has decided to host a party for the summer solstice. Marcus convinced Matteo to put me naked, chained to a platform in the middle of the room while the festivities take place. I am to be a ‘gift to the Gods.’ During the evening, the King would take sealed bids for me, with the highest bidder buying me for the night. Matteo thinks this is all a grand idea, designing the platform to hold all kinds of food for the party goers so they can look me over as they select their meal for the night.

The very thought turns my stomach. I would be the only person naked in a room of hundreds of people. Seeing my reluctance and fear, Matteo walks over to me, grabbing my hair in a firm grasp. “Don’t you wish to show your love for your King, Damian? Is it really so much to ask that you present yourself to our party guests? You DO love me, don’t you?” I see Marcus smirk at me from across the room. “Of course, my Master. But I just want to be yours, sire.” That comment earns me several hard slaps across the face. “You will do what is expected of you and LIKE IT, slave!”

Before the party the next night, Angelo draws me a bath. I am shaved all over, my long hair braided back out of my eyes. Naked, I am led by Marcus into the throne room, my eyes on the floor. “Get on the platform, slave.” I carefully climb atop the platform, lying down on the pillows carefully positioned on the floor for me. As I am chained to the platform, Marcus laughs at my reluctance to move out of a fetal position, my face and chest showing the blush that is creeping through my skin. “Show off what you have, Damian. After all, you are here for all to see you and bid on you.” Marcus moves close enough to my face that I can feel his breath. “And, little Lord, I will do everything in my power to make sure that I am the one that wins you!” With another smirk, he turns and leaves me to my fate.

Slaves give me looks of pity as they arrange food all around me on the platform. Musicians begin playing, and the room quickly filling up with people. I catch the Queen’s startled expression as she is escorted to her throne. I give her a curt nod and look away, embarrassed. I lie back and try my hardest to look at the ceiling, trying to shut out the filthy words being used to discuss my body.

Everyone eats around me, making my stomach growl. I manage to entice a blushing maiden into feeding me a handful of grapes, which she does. As I am thanking her profusely for the gesture, I hear a murmuring start throughout the back of the crowd where the King, Queen and Marcus are sitting. Chained as I am, I cannot see what is going on, but I hear my father’s voice rise above the noise all around me.

“I beseech you, let him go, Sire.” My father’s voice sounds strained, tired. Fear clutches my heart as I start fighting against the chains holding me. Why is he doing this? Doesn’t he understand that he is powerless to stop whatever plans the King has for me?

“Father? Please stop. I am fine, please stop, no more” I call out, hoping to persuade my father from his present course. I know that, if he does not cease his protest, he will put both of us in grave danger.

“Enough, Marious. You were the one who put the boy in my path. Are you really surprised to find him at my beck and call? Go back to your rooms before I lose my patience with you.” I hold my breath, hoping that my father will back down and leave, before it is too late.

“I have stood by and watched you destroy my son, Sire. I will no longer stand idle while you hurt him. He is still the loving, precious boy that you took to your bed. Have pity on him and let him go.” Everyone surrounding me stares from me to my father, looks of disgust and sympathy crossing their faces. What started off as my being a simple ‘party favor’ has suddenly been reduced to something more…

I hear and see the King’s guard make their way across the room towards the royal couple. My struggles increase as I suddenly realize why they are called.

To arrest my father.

The only thing I can do is scream out “Father, please don’t! Stand down, please!” Tears start streaming down my face, my legs kicking out against the hold of the tight chains. I cannot stand not knowing what is going on behind me…

My father tries again to change the King’s mind. “You have changed, My Liege. The King I know would not treat people this way. Please, for the love of all that is holy…”

I hear a loud gasp from the crowd, see people back away from the royal couple to stand in whispering groups, their eyes glued on the scene in front of them. No one is paying any attention to me anymore. I hear my father cry out in pain, hear the King demand that the guards take him to stand next to the platform I'm lying on. I hear heavy footsteps when suddenly my father is standing next to me, six guards surrounding him awaiting further orders. We lock eyes on each other as the King approaches us, his words ringing throughout the room. “You, go and get more chain. You, strip Marious bare. And send for the executioner. We are going to have fun this evening!”

A table is shoved up on the platform next to me, food falling to the floor. I feel someone behind me, unchaining me. The moment I am free I break away from my jailers, throwing myself at the King’s feet. “Please, Majesty! Please, spare his life! I beg of you, I will do anything you ask of me! Please let him live!” I continue to beg as the King grabs me by my hair, hauling me to my feet. Marcus grabs my arms behind me, lashing them together. The guards then help Marcus drag me back onto the platform, my arms and legs bound together so I am on my knees facing Marious, who is naked and tied spread eagle on the table. Marcus stands behind me, holding me up against him, his hissing words constantly reaching my ears.

“You brought this all on yourself, little Lord! Encouraging that bastard to help you escape your fate! You are in for a world of hurt, little man…”

The crowd is now silent, everyone’s face pale and scared. The executioner walks into the room and stops at the King’s side, asking “Sire, what is your bidding?” I watch the King consider for a moment, his eyes on Marious’ prone body. The King whispers in the executioner’s ear, a smirk on his face. I then watch the executioner walk up on the platform, a large carving knife in his hand.

Marious whispers “I love you, Damian.” I answer back, my voice shaking. Our declarations of love seem to piss off the King even more, causing him to yell out “Draw and quarter, then remove the head!”

My screams bounce off the throne room walls as I watch the executioner tie a rope around Marious’ neck, then throw the end to a group of guards standing at the end of the platform. The guards take the rope in hand and pull with all their might, drawing the rope tight around Marious’ neck until his face turns purple. They repeat the process until Marious’ eyes are bugged out of his face and he is barely breathing. I scream his name over and over until the King throws his hands over his ears, screaming “THAT is ENOUGH!” The King climbs up on the platform and takes the large carving knife from the executioner’s hand, then grabs Marious’ cock in his left hand. The crowd gasps as the King swings his arm wide, slicing off Marious’ cock with three strong swings.

“Grab him!” The King bellows to two guards, pointing at me. With the two guards and Marcus holding me between them, the King walks towards me with a menacing step, Marious’ cock still in his hand. “Open his mouth!” The two guards viciously yank down on my jaw, opening my mouth obscenely wide. “This will shut your mouth, bitch!” The king sneers at me as he shoves Marious’ cock down my throat till I gag, tears of horror escaping my eyes. Before turning back to the scene of torture in front of us, the king gives my jaw an upward swing, setting my teeth within the flesh in my throat, making sure I cannot dislodge it without assistance.

The King then gives the carving knife back to the executioner, who slices a wide Y from Marious’ neck to his cock. Blood begins to flow from the wound, Marious’ face still purple from lack of oxygen. The King orders the guards to let go of the rope, to ensure that Marious is awake for the next part of his plan.

The sound of bones breaking fills the air as the executioner begins to break Marious’ ribs one by one, using the hilt of the knife as a weapon. I shut my eyes, trying to escape the nightmare in front of me, but Marcus squeezes my neck tightly, saying “Open your eyes, bitch, or you’re next!” The King hears Marcus, turns towards me with a sneer. “You heard him, Damian! Watch and learn what happens to traitors to the crown!”

The executioner begins to disembowel Marious slowly, obviously enjoying his work. I watch as blood slowly begins to trickle out of Marious’ mouth and nose, see him try one last time to meet my eyes before an eerie stillness takes over him.

The realization that my beloved father is now dead and gone chills my bones. I am now alone in the world, left in the hands of those that only wish to hurt me.

I watch the Queen walk past the platform on the way back to her room, her face pale as she tries her best to ignore everything going on around her. I fear for the Queen’s life as well, for if the King could hurt me, what’s to say that he wouldn’t hurt her as well?

The King loses interest in the events unfolding in front of him the moment that Marious dies. “Quarter him, remove the head and be done with him!” he cries out to the executioner, his attention turning to me. “Throw him out for the dogs to eat! As for Damian…” I look up at the King, hatred showing through my expression. “…keep him as he is and throw him in the communal dungeon. Let the inmates have him for sport…”

Chapter Text

I lay on the cold stone floor, my naked body shivering. The last few days have been pure hell.

As soon as I arrived at the dungeon, the inmates swarmed around me. “Fresh meat!” one man cried, reaching for my jaw to remove Marious’ cock from my throat. I would’ve snapped at him if I could have, but I was desperate to breathe deep again! Fingers yank my jaw down sharply, the flesh removed in one cruel motion.

By my quick count, there are at least thirty men in this small dungeon with me. I see men copulating in a dark corner, observe two large men beating a smaller man who is holding a scrap of meat in his hand. The second Marious’ cock leaves my mouth and hits the floor, three bedraggled men fight over it, one screaming with glee as he steals his prize. I feel bile rise from my stomach at the sight.

Dear friend, I do not need to tell you all the horrific things that happened to me during my time in the dungeon. I’m sure that your imagination can fill in the blanks for you. Let’s just pick up the story where I started this chapter then, shall we?

For once the dungeon is quiet. There is only one other inmate awake, and I will not tell you what he is doing in the corner of the room. I pull my knees to my chest, trying to conserve as much body heat as I can.

I hear a feminine voice in my head snark out “So, the mighty Damian is finally brought to his knees!”

Up to this point, I have not tried to communicate with the voice I hear in my head. The laughter within the voice this time makes me angry, causing me to scream out loud “Very funny!” The guard outside the door to the dungeon yells back “Shut up in there or I will beat you to sleep!”

Laughter fills my head. “No, silly! Respond to me silently, just think your reply. I can hear you, Damian.” (the very same trick that I would use with my beloved Tommy Joe many years later.)

“Who are you? Why do you keep speaking to me?” I think to myself, my eyes glancing around the room frantically.

“You amuse and intrigue me, Damian. You are the perfect candidate.” Before I can inquire further she continues. “The King’s greatest prize reduced to a dungeon whore. Who would’ve thought it possible? And such a weak human being…”

“I’m not weak!” I yell, my hands making fists, my chin high.

“At the moment I tend to disagree, Dam. You were so weak that you let your father and Vincent die, without even trying to stop those that would harm them.” A chill runs down my spine at these words. Am I weak? Could I have done more? “If you were stronger, they would be alive.” Tears fill my eyes, thinking of both of my parents, destroyed by the King. But is it really my fault? “But there is a way to avenge their deaths, darling.”

The word ‘avenge’ bounces around in my head for a minute. Is it possible? To make Marcus and the King pay for what they have done to me? To Vincent and to Marious?

“Avenge? How?”

“Come to the window, darling.” I glance towards the door to the dungeon, see the shadow of the guard standing outside the door. “I will make everything better, I promise.”

I slowly turn over onto my knees, crawling over to the window. Moonlight shines through the bars, the cool air reaching my skin as I await the mysterious woman.

“Damian, up here.” I look up to see a beautiful woman, her skin glowing in the moonlight. “Do you truly wish to avenge those you lost, amore?” I feel rage begin to boil under my skin at the very thought of what the King has done to my beloveds. I nod once, my arms reaching out to the beautiful blonde.

I watch as the bars to the window melt away, feel my body float upwards slowly until I feel the woman gently wrap her arms around me, lifting me as if I only weigh a feather. I stare into the starry sky around me as the blonde carries me swiftly across the castle grounds, moving faster than a normal human. She carries me to the same barn where Midnight is stabled, gently laying me down onto a pile of hay in the corner. It is here where I hear her voice spoken out loud for the first time.

“Damian, I ask you again, do you wish to avenge your parent’s deaths?” I nod once, the cold making me shiver all over. “Say it, Damian. Say the words or we go no further.” Through chattering teeth, I reply, my voice wavering. “Please, help me avenge them. I will do anything.” The blonde’s eyes fill with glee as I watch her part her soft pink lips into a wide smile. The second before she lowers her head, I see sharp teeth…

I gasp as the thin skin of my neck tears, my blood welling to the surface. The blonde clamps her mouth on my neck, sucking blood out of the wound as one would suck on a straw. I place my hands on her chest in an attempt to push her off of me to no avail. She is much stronger than I am, her hands clamping down on my head and shoulder to keep me in place. I feel her wiggle her teeth in my neck, trying to open up a larger wound. I scream as more blood pours into her waiting mouth, my eyesight beginning to gray around the edges, even as adrenaline causes my heart to pound harder.

I cannot tell you how long that I was in this position, with my life’s blood leaving me in an alarming pace. I vaguely remember my memories flashing behind my closed eyes, see my brother and sister, Vincent and Marious as if they were standing in front of me. Time begins to feel as if it’s slowing down and I feel even colder all over. My breathing slows until I feel the last breath begin to leave my body…

“Drink, Damian. Drink and join me.” I feel flesh pressed against my mouth, taste for the first time the tang of blood as it enters my mouth. I try to spit it out but there is too much of it, my jaw locked around the blonde’s wrist like a drowning man clinging to a lifeboat. Without becoming fully aware of it, I start sucking that lovely wrist for more and more of that lifegiving liquid. The more I drink the better it tastes and the more I want.

“Stop, Damian.” I feel the blonde pull her wrist back, see the wound close as if it were never there. “I will get you more soon, amore.” She cradles me in her arms, her body moving to cover mine in an attempt to quell my body’s shaking. “It will be over soon.”

Suddenly I throw my head back and scream, every inch of my body feeling as if I were suddenly thrown into a fire. I clench my eyes tightly close as I hear my bones crack back into place, feel my skin and muscles begin to repair themselves. My nails begin to grow to alarming lengths as my fangs break through my upper and lower jaws.

The thing that scares me the most is when my heart and breathing starts to slow down. I try gasping for air to find that I no longer can, my breath coming out in small puffs of air. I can’t understand why, when my usual bodily functions are fading, I am beginning to feel strong and so very much alive.

The blonde eventually pulls back, leaving me lying in the hay. Why am I so thirsty? Didn’t I practically just take in my weight in blood a few minutes ago?

“Come with me, Damian.” The blonde stands, pulling me upright with her. The moment I feel the ground under my feet sway a bit, I reach out to her to steady myself. She surprises me by turning away from me, calling over her shoulder once again with an order to follow her. I comply, suddenly aware of my lack of clothing. “Uh, you DO realize I’m naked, right?” I hear her laughter moving further and further away, so I try to run to catch up.

That’s when the shit hits the fan…

Vampire speed is the next thing I have to learn to deal with. I feel as if I’m walking slowly but my feet move of their own accord, making giant strides out of simple steps. Before I know it I’ve not only caught up with the blonde but have run passed her, my legs shaking in an attempt to keep up with the rest of my body. “Please!” I beg, hoping she will stop to speak with me instead of making me chase her again. “What is your name? And what is happening to me?” Laughter fills the night air again. “I’m Justine. Your body will catch on soon enough. Come, we must get you clothing and another meal.”

A few minutes later we come across a small cottage. Justine gestures to me to stay outside while she kicks in the door, her motions so fast she looks like a blur. I hear a man scream, hear the sounds of bones breaking. “Damian, come here, before the blood grows cold.” As I enter the cottage I see Justine leaning over the man, his body contorted in pain. “Drink, my love. But do not take the last drop. I would hate to lose you so soon…”

When I lean down I realize that the man is still alive, two holes in the side of his neck. The very thought of killing him causes me to shrink back, my fangs retracting instinctively. I give Justine a look of horror. “I…can’t…” I hear the man moan in pain, hear him begin to pray quietly. “Don’t make me…”

“DAMIAN!” My eyes lock with Justine’s at the tone of dominance in her voice. “You must hurry! It’s not as if I can go around killing people every second for you! You must learn to kill for yourself! Now do it!” I look down at the man again, see not only my next meal but a human being. “Justine…”

“Fine, then starve.” She gets up and storms out of the room, leaving me to take the man’s hand as he dies in front of me.

Shaking, I make my way to a water pitcher and basin in the furthest corner of the room. After finding a clean rag, I slowly wash my body before pulling on a set of clothes and shoes from the closet in the corner. Even fully dressed, I still feel cold. I guess it’s something I will have to get used to…

As I exit the cottage I am shocked to find that Justine has truly left me all alone. I call out to her over and over but she makes no response. And even worse, my stomach begins to burn with a hunger that one could never imagine exists. Damn it! Why didn’t I just listen to her when I had the chance?

I stumble through the trees like a blind man, searching for Justine. What do I do now? I cannot seem to focus my thoughts, my mind taken over by unbearable hunger. As each moment passes my panic rises. I find myself searching for not only Justine but a warm body to slake my thirst.

I finally make my way to a small hovel at the base of a large hill. Without thought I kick in the door and rush inside, my nose picking up the delicious scent of a woman alone in the dark. My eyes adjust to the dark as I rush to the woman’s side, ignoring her screams as I bend her sharply backwards, sinking my fangs into her neck.

I have to admit, my first attempt to feed as a vampire was a messy affair. I bit too deeply, blood gushing into my mouth much faster than I could swallow it, with some leaking out of the corners of my mouth. I remember being surprised how quickly the woman died. Even in the darkness of the room I watched the light die from her eyes, felt her body slacken under my tight grip. Until this moment, I took for granted just how fragile human life truly is.

I gently laid the woman back down on her bed, a feeling of sadness taking over me. I did this, I was the one to take her life. I am now a killer, a fiend in the night. I would never be the same.

I really have no idea what caused me to set fire to the hovel as I left. Was it a misplaced feeling of remorse? Or simply self-preservation? I had no instructions on what to do with my prey, but I had a gut feeling that I had to do something to cover my tracks. Setting the fire seemed to make the most sense in the moment.

I call out to Justine once again as I watch the hovel burn to the ground. Would I be alone now for all eternity? I am so lost in thought that I fail to notice the sky begin to lighten up with the first rays of morning.

Chapter Text

A month passed in a heartbeat’s time frame. During that time period I struggled to learn all that was expected of me as a member of the undead. Justine’s disappearance left me at a disadvantage in many ways, with many hard lessons learned on my own.

After my first meal as a vampire, I stayed out in the open as the first rays of sunlight rose in the sky. Not knowing that I could burn up in the light of day, I was shocked when my skin began to sizzle, smoke rising from my burning flesh. As luck would have it, I ran through the forest until I found a small cave in the side of a hill, the doorway mostly covered with old vines and brush. My skin healed as I hid in the cave until nightfall, then I ventured out for another meal. So, I’m never to experience the light of day again? I wish I had known this important bit of information before becoming what I am! The very thought of being forced into the darkness is a somewhat depressing thought.

Being a vampire meant adapting to a variety of unexpected challenges. Since my maker decided to leave me behind, I had no ‘roadmap’ to follow through each new experience. After my horrendous run in with the sun, I lived each day scared of what was to happen to me next!

Even the softest sounds were now ear shattering. I swear I could even hear the fucking grass grow, my ears were so sensitive! I could pick up the scent of a deer three miles away through the slightest breeze, and my eyesight was almost as good as my sense of smell.

I now possessed unbelievable strength, which brings with it its own problems. While it is nice to be able to pull a full-grown tree out of the ground without effort, I could shatter materials such as glass and metal simply by picking them up in my hand. The other day I pushed off the arms of a chair as I stood up and the chair crumbled to pieces beneath me. I picked up a glass bauble on a shelf and shards instantly filled my hand. Gently leaning against a table or a bedstead would cause the wood to splinter into a million pieces. I had to plan out every movement, be careful of each step I took. By the end of each night, I was exhausted by each new challenge, my anger turning to rage as I cursed Justine with every short breath I took. How the fuck could she leave me to figure out my new existence alone?

My hunger was insatiable. I took to killing three, sometimes four people a night. Where once I was holding onto humanity with a tight grip, my never-ending hunger eventually forced me to treat humans as nothing more than a quick, easy meal. In the early mornings I would hang my head in shame for the deeds I carried out in the night. Is killing all I have to look forward to from now on? I began to regret my decision to become what I am, especially if I must face this life alone for eternity.

It was during one of my early morning pity parties that the thought came to me. My life needs direction. What better direction than plotting revenge on those that killed my parents?

The first thing that had to be done was to make my way back to my previous apartment in the castle, where my clothing and possessions were still kept. Once there, I gathered everything I needed (my money included) and made my way out of the window to a cottage that I had set up for my own use. This would give me a location to take my captives to, a place where I could slowly torture them to a death that was too good for them.

Killing Marcus would be much easier than killing Matteo, considering the amount of guards that are always around the King. But whom to exact revenge on first? After pondering my choices for a bit, I decide that Marcus must be the first to taste my wrath.

It was easy enough to climb through the window to Marcus’ rooms. I sat in the dark, waiting patiently until the bastard finally returned for the night. You see, he never actually slept with Matteo; he preferred to have his fun and then return to his own bed. Excitement burned in my veins as the door to the room slowly opened. At last, the opportunity I was waiting for!

I hit Marcus from behind, knocking him out with a small bronze statue. I threw him over my shoulder, escaping into the night with my prize. Once back to the safety of my cottage, I stripped Marcus and tied his wrists together, securing them to the top of the bed. I grabbed each ankle in turn and tied them at the bottom corners of my bed, leaving Marcus spread eagle on his front. I tied a knot in the center of a piece of cloth, inserting the knot into Marcus’ mouth before tying the cloth at the back of his head. Convinced that my prey was secured, I headed off into the night in search of my next meal.

When I returned Marcus was awake and struggling to free himself from his bindings. The terror in his eyes turns to hatred as he turns his gaze to mine, words of frustration muffled through the gag in his mouth. I gave him a sweet smile. “Marcus! So kind of you to visit me!” I stroked the hair back from his forehead as I continue. “It’s high time I pay you back for all the abuse you put me through.”

Reaching under the bed, I pull out a long wooden box. Marcus watches me place the box on the table near him, fear slowly crossing his face when he sees me pull out a long, sharp stick. I make my way to the bottom of the bed, my smile still in place. “Where to begin, Marcus? There are so VERY many things to punish you for.” I slap the stick against the soles of Marcus’ feet, watch him wiggle his feet as the pain sinks in. “You pushed the King to kill not only Vincent but Marious as well.” With each word, I swing the stick harder and harder. “You sought to replace me in the King’s bed.” I move the stick higher and higher, until I am finally striking Marcus’ shoulders. “You introduced the King to BDSM, using it to hurt me as much as you possibly could.” I grab the stick at the end, lining the sharp end up with Marcus’ hole and shove forward with all my strength, leaving the stick inside him. I continue speaking over Marcus’ howls. “You urged the King to put me on display at the festival the night Marious died.” I then pick up a bullwhip out of the box, standing back enough to ensure the entire length of the whip will strike with each blow. The first slice brings not only the sound of pain but the sweet smell of blood to my senses. “YOU SET VINCENT UP! You planted the jewels so he could be arrested!” I start lashing the whip over and over in a frenzy. “YOU KILLED THE KING’S LOVE FOR ME AND CAUSED ME UNSPEAKABLE AGONY! For this and all of your crimes YOU WILL PAY THE ULTIMATE PRICE!” I throw the whip into the corner then quickly strip out of my clothing. I then lick the blood from all of Marcus’ wounds, my saliva instantly closing them again. I can hurt Marcus over and over, then instantly heal him before he suffers too much blood loss. This is going to be fun!

I yank the stick out of Marcus’ hole, throwing it across the room. I line up my cock and then grab two handfuls of Marcus’ hair, pulling his head back sharply as I shove myself into him in one go. I give out a demented laugh as I feel his hole tear around me, feel Marcus try his hardest to escape the hell I’m putting him through. The more he struggles, the more I enjoy it. “Relax, Marcus! This is only round one! You might as well enjoy it…I know I will.”

Chapter Text

When I wasn’t out hunting down my next meal, I spend the better part of the next two months torturing Marcus. Being a vampire gave me an advantage that I would never have as a human. I could heal Marcus’ wounds over and over, keeping him alive just enough to experience each new act of depravity that I forced upon him.

Marcus’ pain became a drug to me. I got high listening to him beg and plead with me to let him go, to forgive him. I became so wrapped up in listening to his pleas that I didn’t see what was happening to me. I was changing, becoming someone that my parents would be ashamed of. I craved the screams, lived to hand out torture, laughed at the pain that I saw cross my victim’s face. The more he screamed the more I loved it. I had moved far away from that innocent eight-year-old boy who was so enamored with his mother. I was turning into a carbon copy of Marcus, the man who broke me. I was well on my way to becoming the fiend that Tommy Joe and Adam would encounter and be hurt by in the future.

My next step was to befriend a few guards at the castle. I would visit my new friends at night to hear all the gossip. I wanted to find out if the King had put a search out for Marcus.

“When he disappeared, the King sent men out to the countryside to look for him. Since then he has found other ‘enticements’ to keep himself occupied” one of the guards told me. So, the King found himself another victim! All the more reason to kidnap Matteo and hand out some justice of my own. In this scenario, I was the avenging angel.

I relocated Marcus to the basement of an abandoned manor house about twenty miles from the castle. The basement could be accessed from a trap door in one of the bedrooms. I cleaned and decorated the manor, and then purchased large, thick rugs to muffle the sounds from the basement, in case guards arrived to search the manor. How very Edgar Allen Poe of me! Can’t have anyone hearing my prisoners while I’m out looking for a snack, can I?

After securing Marcus in the basement, I was fortunate later that evening to come across a group of young people out walking toward the castle. One of the young ladies told me that they were headed to a banquet which was to be held by the King himself. Walking within the middle of the group, I managed to make my way into the castle grounds virtually undetected by the guards who manned the front gate. Once inside the castle, I separated myself from the group and made my silent way to the King’s chambers.

When I became Matteo’s whipping boy, the King insisted that the guard post be moved further away from his rooms, so the torture that I suffered would not easily be overheard by others. This made it easy for me to slip into Matteo’s rooms unnoticed. When I entered, the sight in front of me made me gasp.

A young boy around fifteen years old was naked, bent over a table, his arms and legs tied to the table legs. (Ironically, this would be the very same position that, much late on, I would rape my sweet Tommy for the first time. Trust me, I can now see the similarities, and it will haunt me until the very end of time.) The boy was bleeding from many cuts and whip marks that covered his body from head to toe. The look on the boy’s face implored me to help him escape the hell he was literally locked in.

Rage took me over as I watched Matteo lay another stripe down the boy’s back. The boy choked back a sob, fearing to anger the King if he made a sound. As he flung the whip back over his shoulder, Matteo finally took notice of me. “So, my little whipping boy has finally returned to beg forgiveness! As you can see, Damian, I have found a replacement for you. He begs even more beautifully than you did!”

As if on cue, the boy started to cry and shake, begging the King to release him. I think he thought that I was there to hurt him as well. Knowing Matteo as I did, I’m sure he had already shared the poor boy with all of his friends.

“I’m not here to beg anything from you, Matteo. I’m here to hear YOU beg this time!” I slowly made my way over to the boy’s side, running a gentle hand through the boy’s hair in an effort to quiet him. “You put me through hell and it’s time you pay for it!” I quickly moved forward, wrenching the whip from Matteo and wrapping it around his neck, pulling tight until he falls unconscious onto the floor.

I returned to the boy, saying as I untie him “It’s okay, I’m going to rescue you.” The boy heaves a shaky breath, his voice broken as he replies “Please sir! Before he wakes up! Please HELP ME!” I whisper to the boy the same way that I would whisper to a horse, my tone gentle and soft. “Don’t worry, little one. The King will NEVER touch you again.”

Once the boy is loose from his bindings, I grab a blanket from the bed, wrapping it around the boy before helping him sit on the edge of the bed. “My name is Damian. I’m going to rescue you, but I need your help. What is your name son?” The boy sniffles a few times, his black hair hanging over his eyes. “Vincenzo. My brother used to call me Vin.” I once again brush the hair out of the boy’s eyes as I respond “Okay, Vin. I have to take care of the King, but before I do, I will put you somewhere safe until I return. Will you wait for me?” The boy nods once, his scared eyes meeting mine. I open the window, gently pick the boy up in my arms and jump out the window. I hear Vin’s surprised gasp as we move faster than the eye can see until we are standing in the loft of the horse barn. I gently lay the boy down on some bales of hay. “Stay right where you are, I will be back shortly. You will be safe here.”

I make short work of disguising Matteo in another blanket before running off into the night with him. When we arrive at the manor house, I hear muffled yells coming from the blanket. “Yell all you want, your Highness! No one will hear you now!” As I descend into the basement, I hear Marcus trying to warn Matteo through the gag in his mouth, hear Matteo demand to be set free. This is going to be fun!

I hogtie and gag Matteo before running back to Vin. He is still where I left him, shaking on top of the hay bales. I suddenly realize what I have to do. In order to help Vin return to some form of ‘normalcy,’ I need to heal him the fastest way I can. And there is only one way to do that…

“Hello Vin, I’m back.” The boy looks up at me, his eyes haunted. I know that look intimately, I wore it as well at the hands of my captures. “The King will never harm you again, I made sure of it.” I knelt down next to Vin, my fingertips brushing back his hair out of his eyes. “I know you don’t know me, and I can understand how difficult it would be to trust me, but I can help you get well, if you will let me.” A look of doubt crosses Vin’s young features. “I will make you a deal. If you let me try to help you, if you feel any discomfort or pain, I promise that I will stop immediately. I know what you are going through.” I go on to briefly describe my time as Matteo’s pain slave, watch Vin’s eyebrows raise as I share my story with him. “I hate that you are feeling the very same pain I felt. I want to help you.” After a moment or two, Vin shyly nods his head in agreement.

Before I begin removing the blanket from Vin’s body I tell him. “I’m going to start with your hand. This is going to be a bit weird, but I promise you the weirdness will be worth it.” I then reach into the blanket surrounding Vin and gently bring his arm into view. Before Vin can panic and back out, I lean down and gently swipe my tongue over the worst of his cuts. I then smile at Vin as I watch his amazement as the cut completely disappears. “You may think this is a gross way to heal you, but it works. Are you ready for more?” Another nod, this time enthusiastically.

It takes about forty minutes to heal the worst of Vin’s wounds. I feel the boy tense under me over and over as I try to be as gentle at my task as I can be. By the time I am finished, the poor boy is covered in my saliva but is basically healed. But what next?

“Here, put on these clothes that I brought with me. As soon as you are dressed, I can return you to your family.” I’m surprised when Vin doesn’t move, instead breaks down in tears. “I…have no family, Damian. They died of influenza last winter. That’s how I came to be employed at the castle. I was working in the kitchens when the King took notice of me. Now I have no job and no where to go. What do I do now?”

As I watch the boy cry in my arms, Vin’s tears touch me like nothing else possibly could. Within this boy is a kindred spirit—both of us without family, alone in the world, afraid of what we will become. In this moment, I hold in my arms a better version of myself, an innocent version. Can I really send him out into the cruel world alone, to fall into the hands of the likes of Marcus and Matteo? To starve to death, without a soul to lean on? On the other hand, who am I to save someone else, especially since I’ve already damned my own soul to hell? Will I end up destroying this sweet boy in the end?

My soul may have darkened a bit over time, but I still had enough heart left to take this young boy into my arms and whisper “Don’t worry, Vin. I will take care of you.”

Chapter Text

As Vin and I make our way to my manor house, the same thought keeps bouncing around in my head—“What the fuck am I doing?” I currently have two assholes in the basement of my home, and I am bringing this sweet young boy into the lion’s den? Even I, who behaves erratically and spontaneously on a good day, can see the holes in this ‘wisdom.’

It’s about three in the morning when we arrive at the manor house. Vin keeps trying to cover his yawns to no avail. I know that he desperately wants to simply crawl into a soft bed and sleep until mid-morning, but before he can be shown to his bed, the two of us need to have a conversation. Knowing that I need to make this fast, I direct Vin towards a chair and light a fire in the fireplace.

“Vin, I know you are tired, but we have to talk before you go to bed.” Vin turns bleary eyes towards me, his expression one of silent frustration. “I promise to be quick, but there are things you need to know.”

I tell Vin that I’m a vampire, even giving him a flash of my fangs when he doesn’t believe me right away. “I won’t hurt you, I promise. I will go out hunting every evening for my dinner.” Vin’s eyes widen at the thought of my ‘eating’ random people for a meal. “I cannot go out in the sun, so I have to stay hidden until the sun sets every night. Please keep the curtains pulled tight. My skin burns if I am caught in sunlight.” Even though I’m sure Vin thinks that he must be dreaming to hear me talking about these things, he simply nods along with my conversation. “Before morning comes, I will go out and find food for you. This is your home from now on. Please feel free to make yourself comfortable here.” Vin’s eyes fill with tears at the very thought of having a home again. I gently take him in my arms and give him a quick squeeze. “I have just one demand of you.”

I tell Vin that he has to keep out of the basement, no matter what he hears through the floor. “I am the only one allowed down there, understand?” Vin nods then asks “But why, Damian? Do you have breakables down there?”

I can’t keep the grin off my face as I reply “Why yes, Vin, I do.” I go on to explain that I have Marcus and the King hidden away in the shadows of the basement. The look of terror on Vin’s face sends a thrill down my spine, I can’t help it. “You have nothing to fear. Neither of them can harm you, you have my word on that. They are not long for this world. If the king’s guard arrives at the front door, simply let them tour the house and send them away with a smile.” I gesture to Vin to follow me to his bedroom. “This will be your room. There are extra blankets in the closet if you get cold. Do you want me to light a fire?” Vin shakes his head, so I pause at the doorway on my way out. “Vin? I’m…glad you are here.”

Vin gives me a smile and a nod in response. “I’m glad I’m here too, Damian. Thank you for everything.” I return his nod and leave the room, closing the door behind me.

The first month of Vin’s stay with me is uneventful. I go out every night, not only looking for a meal for myself but to find food for Vin and listen to the gossip.

While purchasing a meal at a local pub I hear that the Queen is still planning to hold the annual spring festival at the castle. The bartender tells me that he heard that the Queen is afraid to ‘offend the Gods’ by cancelling the festival. Seems as if I found my chance to speak to the Queen after all!

Three days later I tempt the Gods myself by leaving home before the sun is completely set. I am wearing a large straw hat and I am covered the best that I can against the sun’s rays. When I arrive at the castle, the guards merely nod me through the gates, no questions asked. I leave my disguise in the hallway and make my way to the banquet hall.

I feel the breath leave my body as I enter the hall. The last time that I was in this room, my father was murdered right in front of me. As soon as my eyes see the dais in the middle of the room, I feel tears threaten to fall. So much for composure…

“DAMIAN!” the Queen’s voice reaches me before I can turn around. I take a deep breath and put on a mask of surprise before turning around. “Queen Juliana!” I bow low before the Queen, my eyes taking in the only woman I had ever bedded. “How beautiful you look!” To be fair, the Queen truly is beautiful this evening, dressed in rich purple from head to toe. The stress that Juliana carried during the last year of Matteo’s reign is no longer etched in her features. I’m sure her life has greatly improved since Matteo is no longer around to make her life miserable. If she only knew that he was currently in my basement…

“Always the flatterer, Damian! You look well.” I watch as Juliana waves her hand in the air, sending her attendants away. “Will you join me this evening? I have so missed you!” I once again bow low before Juliana. “How could I resist such an honor, my Queen?”

As the events of the evening move forward, Juliana moves closer and closer to my side. Whispering in my ear, she confesses “I rarely think of Matteo anymore. He changed so much over the last year we were together, no longer to be the man I had grown to love. He grew violent, preferring to spend all his time with that wretched Marcus creature! Even though I mourn the love that I had with Matteo, I’m very glad that they both are gone from this realm.” Juliana’s eyes bore into mine as she whispers “There was gossip that you became a pawn in their games, Damian. Is this true?” Juliana’s hand grasps my wrist, holding on tightly. “Did they hurt you?”

How to respond? Tell a lie, protect her gentle nature? Or tell her what a fiend her husband and King had become, make myself a victim in her eyes? After a moment’s quick contemplation, I decide to protect her feelings. “Things…were rough for a while, but they are much better now. I do miss the love I shared with both you and Matteo.” I see tears begin to fill Juliana’s eyes. The best thing to do is to distract her by saying “But I have heard from your subjects the amazing job that you are doing in the King’s absence! I always knew you were the real ruler!” Dabbing at both eyes, Juliana chuckles. “You are just saying that because you always loved a party, Damian!” I take Juliana’s hand in mine as I stand, bowing low before her. “Very true, your Majesty! Would you care to dance with me?”

Somewhere around one in the morning I notice the Queen has begun to tire, occasional yawns slipping through the laughter and conversation. I stand, once again bowing low before her. We are being closely watched by those surrounding us. “Your Majesty, it is getting very late. I ask permission to head home to bed. I thank you for a wonderful evening. I hope to see you soon.” Juliana breaks character, wrapping her arms around my neck, pulling me in for a kiss goodbye. If she notices how cold my skin, my lips are, she doesn’t comment. With a sad smile she asks “Would you…like to visit me tomorrow afternoon, Damian? We could talk some more…” I shake my head. “I’m sorry, Majesty. I have business in the next town which will take most of the day.” Juliana looks to the ground, sad and a bit dejected. “But I can visit you tomorrow evening, around eight? Would that please your Majesty?” Juliana’s eyes brighten. “I would enjoy that, Damian! I look forward to seeing you then.” I bow once again and make my way out of the banquet hall, all eyes on me as I leave the room.

I stop at an inn on my way back to the manor house to purchase food for Vin. I notice everyone staring at me as I enter, observe how the innkeeper and his wife, as well as others at the bar, treat me as if I’m royalty. News certainly travels fast at court!

When I arrive home, Vin is nowhere to be found. The boy tends to have nightmares, and more than once he has taken a walk to calm his nerves. I place the food I brought him on the table and light a lantern, quietly opening the hatch to the basement and closing it behind me.

Marcus starts crying the moment he sees me, but a string of muffled words are screamed from behind Matteo’s gag. “Well boys, I see you’re still alive!” I take the gag off of Marcus, my hands itching to take the knife and slowly peal the skin off his back. “Let’s see…what should your torture be tonight, hum?”

Around twenty minutes goes by. I am currently hitting Marcus’ open back wounds with a riding crop when I hear a slight noise behind me. Instead of stopping the swing of my arm, I quietly ask “Didn’t I tell you never to come down here, Vincenzo?”

I feel Vin move closer behind me. Out of the corner of my eye, I see the boy shaking, his eyes locked onto Matteo’s tied body. I sigh deeply before dropping the crop and turning around, effectively blocking his view of Matteo.

“I…wanted to see…what you are doing down here, Damian.” Vin takes a step back, his eyes locking with mine. For the first time since he has been living with me, I see fear in his eyes. “I know you told me to stay away…”

“YES! I told you to STAY AWAY! To shield you from more torment!” I sigh, my hands coming to rest on my hips. “Is THIS the sight you wished to behold?”

“I want to help.”

What??? Could I possibly have heard what I thought I heard? Sweet Vin, wanting to create unspeakable acts of violence on these two devils?

“I…couldn’t have heard you correctly, Vin. I thought you said…”

“I said I want to help.” Vin slowly walks around me, coming to the foot of the table where Marcus is slowly bleeding in rivulets onto the table top. “He’s the other one who hurt you, isn’t he?” I nod once, watching Vin slowly bend to pick up the crop that I dropped onto the floor. “Then he needs to be punished for hurting you. I want to help you make them pay for what they have done.”

My jaw drops to the floor as Vin swings the crop with all his might towards Marcus’ face. I quickly move to stop the crop as it arches widely, almost hitting me by accident. “VIN! UPSTAIRS NOW!” I turn back to Marcus as I hear Vin swear as he storms his way upstairs. I take the time to close Marcus’ wounds before, taking a deep breath to steady myself, I make my way upstairs to face the disgruntled teenager waiting for me in the living room.

Before I can say anything, Vin lunges out of his chair, his eyes wild. “Why did you stop me? I want to see him hurt! They both need to pay for what they have done! I want to help you destroy them…”

“STOP!” I scream at the top of my voice. But instead of cowering as I expect him to, Vin storms over to me, placing both hands against my chest in a failed attempt to push me back. “NO, YOU STOP!” Vin pushes at me again in frustration. “They have to be made to pay for their crimes! I want to make them pay for BOTH our pain! They can’t be left to live…” Vin attempts to push me again, but I gently grab both of his wrists to hold him still.

This sweet boy wants to do the unthinkable, with no thought to where it may lead him. “Vin, I appreciate that you want to help me, I do. But it’s my burden, not yours! Once you go down that path there is no turning back, darling! I care about you too much to allow you to become a creature like me! I will avenge us both…”

“NO!” Vin tries to pull against my hold. “I’m a grown man, capable of making my own decisions! I may have been a kid when the King took me from the kitchens, but he MADE ME a man! A man that will send him to his grave…”

What the fuck am I to do in this moment? Vin is right, even though I think of him as a teenage boy, he IS a man in every way that counts. Who am I to get in the way of his achieving the very vengeance that I myself are chasing?

“Vin, you do not understand! Taking a life changes you, in ways that you will never truly understand.” I reach my hand out to Vin, begging him to hear me, to understand. “I made my choice, the one that forces me to drink blood, to kill every single night to survive. I made the choice to avenge my parents, to win this battle to vanquish my enemies. The last thing that I want is for you to make a rash decision like I did, then hate yourself for making that decision…”

Vin bats my hand away, his eyes boring into mine, begging me to understand. “I’ve made MY choice, Damian! It’s MY CHOICE, NOT YOURS! I will live with the changes to my soul the same way you weather yours.”

We stand a foot apart from one another, staring deep into each other’s eyes, neither backing down. After what feels like an eternity I finally see what I’m looking for.

My boy is about to grow up. I can’t stop it, I have to let it happen. It feels as if I’m about to lose my soul again…

“Alright. But we do it my way.”

The two of us make our way back into the basement. The moment Matteo sees us, he sneers the best he can with the gag in his mouth. Vin rushes over to Matteo, his hand slapping Matteo across the face.

“VIN!” I put my body between them again. “I will give you tonight. When you are finished, you may strike the blow but I will finish him off, got it?” Vin nods, his hands itching to make a choice from the variety of tools that I had placed on a table against the wall.

It was a long night. Vin was slow, methodical. By the time he was finished, Matteo didn’t have a bone in his body that hadn’t been broken at least once. Blood trickled from superficial wounds made to bring only torment. By the time the dawn was close to breaking, Vin was covered in blood and tiring. The time had come.

I moved to one side of the table, Vin directly opposite me. I knew only Matteo’s death mattered to him, so I said “Grab the knife off of the table, Vin.” Following my direction, I yelled out “Slice him!”

Vin grabbed Matteo’s hair in a tight grip, yanking his chin high off the table. With his other hand, he quickly slices the knife across Matteo’s neck. At the same time, I sink my teeth into the side of Matteo’s neck, sucking hard as I watch the blood flow out of Matteo’s wound onto the table and then onto the floor surrounding us.

Once Matteo’s body is drained of both blood and life, I pull out my teeth and stand to face my son, blood clinging to my face and fangs. Staring back at me isn’t the boy who entered the basement earlier this evening. In his place stands a man who is proud of the act that he just committed. With an evil grin on his face, Vin shocks me once again with his next sentence.

“Father…make me a vampire.”

Chapter Text

What the actual fuck?

I must have muck in my ears. Or I’m imagining the words that my adopted son just said to me. There is no possible way that I heard the words that are rattling through my blood-filled brain.

Vin wants me to turn him!

Is the boy crazy? Hasn’t he seen me sequestered against the daylight hours, hiding from the sun’s deadly rays? Hasn’t he seen me, covered with the blood of some human or animal, returning from a late-night hunt? Can he truly ignore the changes to my personality brought on by my blood lust, my rages and total disregard for all the things that I once held so dear to my heart? Can I be responsible for the changes that would take over Vin if I were to turn him into a version of myself?

I have to admit, I’ve become quite fond of the young man. He has become a son to me. Since losing my family, I’ve grown quite weary of being alone. But if I were to change Vin into a vampire, there is no guarantee that he won’t leave me to start his own immortal life alone. Either way, I’m taking a chance that I will have face eternity alone.

Realizing that the sun will rise shortly, I use this as an excuse to put off my answer. “I shall have to think on it, Vin.” When he starts to protest, I simply raise my hand and state “The sun will be up momentarily and we both need rest. I must visit the Queen tomorrow evening. And there’s the case of the other ‘problem’ to deal with later.” Seeing the look of dismay on Vin’s face, I gently place my hand on his shoulder. “I promise to give you my answer shortly, son.” With a small smile I bid Vin goodnight and head towards my darkened room.

When I awaken, Vin is nowhere to be found. I dress in my very best court clothing and head out for a quick meal before meeting with the Queen.

My evening with the Queen starts off as most evenings at court do--the obligatory kissing the backs of hands, the compliments given at just the proper moment. Before I know it, dinner is served to the Queen (I politely declined, of course, stating that I had already dined the next village over) and before I know it, the two of us are playing cards until one o'clock in the morning.

As I go to shuffle another hand, Juliana places both her hands on top of mine. Her face softens with sadness as she softly comments "When are you going to confide in me, Damian?" I narrow my eyes a bit as I shake my head in confusion, a small smile plastered on my face. "Cold hands, drinking an excessive amount of wine without the slight sign of drunkenness, your constant refusal of food. And your eyes! They are darker than I remember, more animal-like. The predator is in you now, and it has nothing to do with what Matteo has done to you!" Juliana squeezes my hands as her voice lowers into a whisper. "When are you going to admit to me that you've become a vampire, Dam?"

Silence fills the room as I try to find a way out of this situation. How can I admit the truth? Juliana is smart, she will see right through any lie I create. I glance around the room, trying to avoid the topic at hand. Just when I think I have the perfect comeback, the perfect lie, Juliana's soft voice cuts me to the core. "I... have a brother named Antonio. He is the light of my life, my most beloved. We are close in age, spending all our time together growing up. Not long after I wed Matteo, Antonio was attacked by a vampire. He...changed, becoming distant, withdrawing from me. I refused to accept his condition, treating him the same as he was before, but Matteo forbade my spending time with Antonio. I knew he would never hurt me, but Matteo didn't trust him." Slow tears begin to roll down Juliana's face as she whispers "Matteo had six men drag Antonio out of the castle. I remember him yelling out to me that he would always love me. He didn't fight the men, even though he could've destroyed them without trying. That is the kind of man he is."

"What became of him, Highness?"

"I have no idea, Damian." The sense of loss that overtakes her floods my very being. "Behind Matteo's back, I secretly sent out guards to look for him. I have been actively searching for him since Matteo's 'disappearance.' I hope to find him one day. I long to know that he is okay." Juliana's eyes narrow. "And as to you, Damian. Tell your Queen the truth. You are a vampire as well, are you not?"

I pull my hands gently away from Juliana's as I look everywhere but into her eyes. "Yes, I'm a vampire." I then pace the room as I tell my story, beginning with Marcus warping Matteo's mind, all the way through to the current day. "...and now Vin wants me to make him a vampire!" I turn to meet Juliana's eyes for the first time since starting my tale. "How can I do that to him, knowing what I endure each day, each night? How can I turn him into the monster that you see in front of you?"

Juliana grips my arm and pulled me down next to her on the couch. "I see no way for you to deny him, Damian." I glare at Juliana, my frustration showing through the set of my shoulders and the tremble of my hands. "You said you have no idea where the woman who turned you is, correct?" I nod once. "She could be out there, watching your every move. What if she takes advantage of Vin, the same way she did of you?" I admit, I didn't think of that. "What if she is just waiting to strike, to take that boy of yours away from you. Or even worse..." What could be worse than that? "...what if he goes off searching for her?"

Could Juliana be right? Could my boy be off this very minute, looking for Justine?

"I must bid you goodnight, Juliana. I must go find Vin. Thank you for..."

"Wait!" Juliana moves to stand in front of me, her hands gripping my arms. "Before you go, please consider a position as my chief advisor." I look at her as if she has lost her mind. "You and Vin can move into the castle; we can work out an evening schedule for you. The two of you can live in the lap of luxury. Please just...consider it. I miss you, Dam."

I thank Juliana for the wonderful evening and for her words of advice, then head quickly out the door towards home. If Juliana is correct, Vin might well be in danger...

As I approach the manor, I notice that the house is dark and still. I enter slowly, lighting candles along the way before I light a fire in the fireplace. Panic begins to rise in my chest as the front door to the manor opens...

"Damian? Are you here?" Vin sounds a bit apprehensive, his movements slow. "In here, Vin."

The first thing I notice as Vin enters the room is that his shirt is covered in blood, his gait a bit unsteady. He looks weak and disoriented. I rush to his side, pulling Vin into the closest chair before sinking to my knees in front of him. The fear in his eyes sends a chill down my back. As I start to ask what happen to him, I hear the manor door slam open, hear chains clanging together.

"Vinny? That wasn't very nice, was it? Running from your maker like that..."

Without thought, I sink my fangs deep into Vin's neck next to the marks Justine left behind. Just how the fuck did Vin manage to get away from the bitch?

I hear Vin whimper, feel his body begin to collapse forward into my arms as his blood flows over my tongue. I suck hard, draining as much as quickly as possible. I feel the flow of blood slow, feel a rush of coldness move over Vin's skin under my lips. As I detach my fangs, I stand quickly, pushing Justine back as I rasp out in a husky voice "He's MINE! Keep your hands off him."

Justine laughs, her fangs flashing in the firelight. "Isn't he a little young for you, Damian? I thought you liked your men older, full of authority. This little whelp belongs to ME! Just like YOU DO!" I snarl at her, my back to Vin as I stand between him and Justine. "My venom is in his veins, the same way you carry mine in you, Damian. You BOTH belong to me! Now back off, brat, so I can claim my prize..."

I jump high into the air, spinning around so that the force of my movement slams me full force into Justine, who falls backward against the fireplace. Before my feet can once again touch the floor, my teeth have ripped open a large gash in my wrist. I grab the back of Vin's head with one hand as I land, shoving my wrist into Vin's mouth as much as possible so the blood will drain into his open mouth. I feel nails sinking into my skin, feel myself become airborne as I am thrown across the room. I somehow manage to keep Vin in my arms as we sail into the wall at the far end of the room. I just pray that I'm in time...

Vin's eyes open. I feel him grab my wrist with both hands, watch his eyes slowly turn blood red as he sucks the blood from my open wound. I feel Justine's frustrated kicks and punches, hear her curse me as I take her prize from her. Vin may carry her venom, but I am his maker. Nothing can change that...

I gently pull my wrist back and look deep into Vin's disoriented eyes. "Enough for now, Vin. I will get you more soon..." I then drop Vin as Justine grabs the back of my neck with both hands, turning me to repeatedly slam my face into the closest wall. "Why not now, Dam? I'll give the boy what he wants..." Justine then slams me into a chair and grabs a length of chain that she brought in with her when she arrived (little did I know at the time that the chains were cursed with Justine’s magic). Before I can blink, she has me chained to the chair (a tactic that I became a pro at later in my undead existence). An evil smile crosses her face as she slowly approaches Vin.

I struggle with the cursed chains as I watch in horror as Justine bites into her arm, blood flowing freely onto the floor. She grabs Vin's arms, pulls his face downward until Vin's lips surround the bite. I watch my son drink deeply as Justine coos to him as if he were a baby in her arms. "That's right, Vin, drink from mama. You're gonna be big and strong, drinking from both of us. A new generation of evil..."

Justine looks deep into my eyes as her laughter drowns out my screams...

I wake up sometime the next evening, still chained to the chair. The house is dark and quiet, the fire long burned out in the grate. The night chill settles in my bones as I once again struggle against the chains.

"Here, let me get that for you, father."

I turn my head to see Vin, his eyes glowing in the dark as he reaches behind me. Seconds later, the chains and lock hit the floor, the sound loud in the stillness. I notice chunks of flesh attached to the chains.

"Justine said the chains are magic, made from a special metal that vampires cannot break. You struggled so hard against them that you lost flesh, father. Here..." Vin leads me to the basement trapdoor. "...you need to feed."

I smell Marcus before I see him in the dark. The sight of him struggling against his bonds has my senses reeling. I hear the smile in Vin's voice as he comments "What do you say, father? Shall we finish him off together?"

Vin circles to the opposite side of the table. He reaches out, grabs Marcus by the hair and yanks his head straight back, exposing his long neck. I lean in, sink my teeth in deep, Vin following seconds later. The two of us make short work of draining the bastard dry.

"Son, come upstairs with me. There is much to discuss."

Once upstairs, I light a fire in the grate out of habit. Neither of us really need the warmth anymore, much less the light. But there is something about firelight that makes our time together feel more 'normal.'

"First off, I'm sorry that I took your choice from you last night. I didn't know what else to do. I couldn't just let Justine have you. That bitch is pure evil. It's bad enough that she sired me..." Vin places a hand on my arm to stop my words. I am shocked when I look into his eyes. The rims of his pupils are thick, thicker than my own. His voice has grown deeper, heavier. He carries himself with newfound grace. No one will be able to resist him now. I pity the humans that he comes across.

"Father, I'm grateful that you are my maker. I can feel Justine's evil flowing through my veins. It makes me want to go out and destroy everything in my path. But..." A gentle smile crosses his attractive face. "...I can also feel good from you, father. You are not pure evil like you think you are. You are good, father. Never doubt it." Vin’s smile turns into a smirk as he settles into the chair directly across from mine. "It seems you will have your hands full, trying to make me behave."

Vin then tells me about his run-in with Justine. "I was walking home from the pub, minding my own business. She jumped out of a tree and landed on me. I felt her teeth in my neck, and before I knew it, she drained almost half of my blood. I reached out with my hand and grabbed a small log. I swung it as hard as I could, hitting her upside her head, ripping her fangs out of my neck. I was covered with blood and weak, but I knew that I had to make it home. I'm just glad that I stunned her enough to be able to run away, and that you were home."

I smile at Vin as I tell him “No matter what, you will always be my son. I love you, Vin.” Vin smiles back at me as he responds “I love you too, father. I’m lucky to have you in my life.”

I then fill Vin in on my visit with the Queen and tell him about her invitation to move into the castle. "She wants me to be her chief advisor. I would work nights, helping her navigate difficult issues and hosting foreign dignitaries.” I watch a shadow cross Vin’s face. “Listen Vin, I know that you have many bad memories that took place in the castle. I have them as well.” I move closer to Vin, place a hand on his shoulder. “I would completely understand if you decide that living in the castle is the last thing you want to do. Just think it over, alright? I will abide by your decision.”

Vin’s time as a new vampire was…well, let’s just say that he adapted to his new life without much strain. Where I was gangly and awkward, Vin showed a style and grace that surprised me. He floated from room to room, barely breaking anything. He also developed a flair for fashionable clothing. I kept three seamstresses working practically around the clock making new clothing for the two of us.

One evening about three weeks after Vin was turned, he met with me when I returned to the manor house for the evening. Vin had acquired a beautifully polished walking stick from one of his victims, which he casually played with as he sat in front of the fire. “Father, I’ve been thinking.” Pausing for effect as well as to make sure he had my full attention; I watch him tilt his head to the side thoughtfully. “I think that I would like to move into the castle. Do you still want that position with the Queen?”

As a playful smirk crosses Vin’s handsome face, I comment “Well, Juliana keeps asking for me to take the position. I have been more concerned about you. What has changed your mind, Vin?” When I first brought up moving to the castle, Vin gave me a lot of push back on the idea, so I let the subject drop.

The smirk widens. “Well father, I believe I found someone that might make living in the castle a whole lot more tolerable.”

I return the smirk that my son gives me, my arms crossing my chest as I stand in front Vin. “Oh? And who may that be?”

“Your older brother.”

Chapter Text

FUCK!

The slow-moving acid is entering my system one agonizing drop at a time. I breathe deeply as each drop burns not only my body, but my thoughts. I keep having flashbacks to people and places long since out of existence, left to be only ghosts in my memory.

“Earth to Damian!” I feel a hand gently stroking my arm. “What are you so deep in thought over, love?”

I shake my head from side to side a few times to clear it. Mikey? My dark Queen, my darling Mikey. Could she really be standing regally in front of me, her ever-changing eyes meeting mine in a steady gaze. The harsh overhead lights play with the highlights in Mikey’s dirty blonde hair. “How did you…WHEN did you get here? I didn’t…”

“…hear me? No Dam, you were lost in thought when I walked through the door. For a moment there I thought we had lost you forever.” Mikey’s soft voice reaches my ears as her hand caresses my cheek. I lean into her palm, trying to get closer to her. These fucking chains! First Adam, now Mikey! They are keeping me from the ones I love…

“Dam…” sadness colors Mikey’s voice as she continues “…I spoke with Adam. Why won’t you tell the Council the truth, so they can set you free? I never meant for the favor that I asked you for to lead you to your death.” Tears fill Mikey’s eyes as she continues to stroke my cheek. “The family will find some other way to hold onto its place in the Council. There has to be another way…” I turn my head, kissing the sweet hand that strives to bring me solace. “My love, there IS NO OTHER WAY! I called in that favor, knowing full well what I was doing. I must take the blame; I must be the one that the Council holds accountable! The family cannot be the ones who called in that favor.” Seeing the doubt in my Mikey’s eyes, I continue. “Your enemies have made the perfect move against you. If I do not…” pain wracks my body, momentarily taking my breath away. I watch Mikey’s tears fall faster as she witnesses my flinch, the way my eyes dilate “…pay for my crime, the family will be destroyed. I cannot let that happen to you, to Tommy, to Devlin, or to Adam. I love all of you too much for me to allow anything to happen to all of you.” I hope that my speech will dissuade Mikey from her line of persuasion, but it’s to no avail. Instead, she hits me hard with “And what of your son? Are you just going to leave him alone in this world to be our enemy’s next target?”

I shake my head, my resolve unwavering. “Adam and Tommy will see to Devlin’s safety, Mikey. They will keep him safe until it is his turn to take over the Council. Until then, Adam will have the opportunity to remove all enemies of the Toro family.” Mikey sadly shakes her head, her eyes continuing to plead with me. “Adam need you NOW, Dam! He needs you by his side to help him rule. Tommy is trying his best, we all are, but it’s not enough. We need you now, more than ever.”

I shake my head, tears beginning to fill my eyes. “Baby, it’s not that simple. The longer that I hang here taking my fate, the better chance Adam’s secret plans have at succeeding. I’m the perfect distraction!” I flash my perfect smile at Mikey, mischief in my eyes. “You know me, I’m perfect at everything I do!” Mikey smiles her gentle smile, a small chuckle breaking through the tears. “Yes, Damian my love, except for your stubbornness, you ARE perfect.” I snort in response “I just know better this time, love, that’s all.” With a heavy heart I try to sound casual as I ask, “How are they, Mikey?” Mikey immediately knows whom I’m referring to. “They are doing their best to hang in there, Dam. They all miss you so very much. Adam has forbidden Tommy Joe from coming to visit you, fearing that Devlin will sneak out and follow him to you. I take it that you were in on the plans to keep Devlin safely hidden?” I nod my head, my heart suddenly feeling as if it is being squeezed tight by an invisible hand. I miss both Devlin and Tommy so fucking much!!! “They all talk about you constantly, trying to come up with an alternative plan to rescue you. The four of us love you so very much.”

Staring at my darling Mikey, my thoughts take me back to the very first time that I met her. It was around the same time as my reunion with my brother Alberto…

“Alberto?”

Vin nods his head, his smirk trying and failing to cover the predatory gleam in his eyes. “He’s at court? When did he arrive?” A thrill goes through me at the very idea that my older brother had returned to Genoa.

“I ran into him shortly after you turned me. I was so thirsty the night I met him, my first thought upon seeing him in the moonlight was to drain him dry.” A shudder runs down my spine at Vin’s words. “But as I moved closer to him, I saw how much he resembled you. I managed to keep my thirst at bay long enough to engage him in conversation. He told me that he, his wife and their servants were moving into a new suite in the castle, and that he had just taken on the job of the Queen’s personal chef. I asked him if he was related to you, and he told me that yes, he was your older brother, and that the two of you had become estranged when your parents were stripped of their title and sent to the workhouse.” Vin moves to stand next to me, his hand on my shoulder. “Don’t worry, father. I didn’t tell him our relationship, or where you have been all this time. I simply told him that it was a pleasure to make his acquaintance and that I hoped to see him again soon. Then…” the smirk is back as Vin finishes his story with “…I made SURE that I saw him again!”

“You’re sleeping with my brother?!” While I was growing up, Alberto was always surrounded by the most beautiful of women. He always seemed to love their attention…

“Like father, like son.” My mouth hangs open in shock. “No, father…I am not sleeping with your brother…yet.” Vin paces the room for a moment, avoiding eye contact with me. “Let’s just say that I am truly delighted with idea of such a challenge. He is a gorgeous man, who wouldn’t want him in their bed? And if we lived in the castle, my chances to entice him would improve greatly…”

The prospect of seeing my brother again makes me throw precaution to the wind. The Queen would get me as her advisor, Vin and I would get to live in the lap of luxury, the Queen would keep our secret, and I would get my older brother back in my life again. What could possibly go wrong?

I turn on my most charming smile, gesturing towards the door. “Then son, why don’t we visit the Queen to tell her that I accept her offer…”

A month has flown by since Vin and I have moved into the castle. My nights have been filled with non-stop parties and meetings, my time spent with visiting ambassadors, royalty, clerics, business brokers and alchemists. I do my very best to charm them all, to entice those that the Queen wishes to move into her ‘inner circle.’ I discuss monetary investments, debate scientific discoveries, discuss religion in other counties, debate the existence of the supernatural. My reputation starts to spread; those who visit from other countries often seek me out first before visiting the Queen herself!

Vin spends all his waking hours charming the courtiers and visitors to court. His sharp wit and winning smile soon make him a court favorite. The only time that I notice his smile slip slightly is when my brother enters the room, always accompanied by his clinging, arrogant wife. Neither of us have managed a moment alone with Alberto since we have moved into the castle, and Vin is starting to run out of patience.

I gracefully excuse myself from the cleric who has spent the better part of an hour droning on and on about how the local parish needs more funding, and rush across the room, coming to a halt in front of my brother and his wife as they move to get in line to speak with the Queen.

“Alberto!” I bellow out, my arms spread wide. “I’ve missed you so, brother!” I see my brother slightly flinch at the term of endearment. “And this must be your lovely wife!” I take one of her hands in mine, bringing it to my lips briefly. “I’m Damian, your brother-in-law.”

“Yes, I’ve heard about YOU.” Alberto’s wife shakes off my hand, turning briefly to Alberto. “I’ll just get in line, husband. I’ll see you in a moment.” Without another glance my way, the bitch flounces off to join the other kiss asses waiting to suck up to Juliana.

Alberto crosses his arms across his chest, his eyes staring at the floor. “What is it you want, Damian?” I feel all eyes in the room look our way, so I place a gentle hand in the center of Alberto’s back, steering him out into the closest hallway. Once there, Alberto hisses “I can’t understand how you have the nerve to speak to me, after what you did!” I open my mouth to speak but he cuts me off. “Did you really think I would welcome you with open arms? After destroying our family, sending our parents to jail?” My mouth gaped open in shock. “You got to prance off to live the good life, while the rest of us suffered under the burden.” Alberto tries to push his way around me, but I block his path. “The good life? Is that what you think I lived? You have no idea what you are talking about! And I made sure that you received that huge endowment from the King! I wanted to make sure that you wouldn’t suffer…” Alberto places both hands on my shoulders and shoves me backward. “Did you think that I would keep all that money to myself, when our brothers and sisters were starving without the family title and money? No, I shared that money with the rest of the family, and so now I am forced to bow and scrape my way through life. Now if you will excuse me, I must get back in line so I can ask the Queen if she would be kind enough to give me an advance in my salary. Our youngest sister needs an operation…” With a brisk nod of his head, Alberto walks around me to join his wife in the receiving line.

“So? What’s the verdict? Shall I call him Uncle from now on?” I turn towards Vin, a sour expression on my face. “He hates me. I ruined his life, and he doesn’t have a clue about the hardships that I suffered all these years. He’d be happier if I were dead. And his wife is a true bitch.” I turn on my heel and head towards the front door of the castle to walk off my anger and frustration.

“Father! You can’t give up now! He’s just angry and hurt, you both are. Just give it some time…” A guard suddenly appears at my elbow. “Sir, Queen Juliana requests your appearance, immediately.” With a sigh, Vin and I rejoin the crowd surrounding Juliana.

“Damian! Vin! Just in time! I do believe Damian that this is your long-lost brother Alberto…” Juliana waves a hand in Alberto’s direction. My brother is trying hard to school his face in a serene expression. “Why yes, your Majesty. I was just speaking with Damian a moment ago.” Alberto’s wife purses her lips for a moment, then turns her brightest smile on Juliana. It’s easy to see that she is pissed that no one has included her the conversation. Vin shoots Alberto a winning smile, one that is returned with a grimace.

“I’m so glad that the two of you are on speaking terms, considering what has happened in your family, Alberto. I’m sure you have heard how your parents deposited Dam at that horrible orphanage, and how badly they abused him there.” Alberto’s eyebrows arch in disbelief. “I’m also sure that you have heard how many times your parents schemed against Damian and the Crown, especially after Damian was adopted by Marious.” My eye’s tear up at Marious’ name. “Damian asked the King and I to dissolve your family, simply so no one else could be harmed by your parents. He was only thinking of you and your sister. Many times, Dam told me how much he loves both of you, that he only considered the two of you as members of his old family. It’s so good to see you both on speaking terms, especially after the hell that Damian has just been through in his life.” Juliana turns to me, her hand on my wrist. “Dam, why don’t you take your brother aside and speak to him about funding. I’m sure that the two of you can come to some type of agreement.” With a parting nod of her head, Juliana dismisses us all.

I place my hand on my brother’s arm, squeezing tightly. “Alberto, why don’t we adjourn to my suite?” I shoot a dismissive glare at the bitch standing next to him. “Don’t worry, I’ll return him to you shortly.” With that, I steer my brother out the room, through an antechamber and into my suite. My brother’s eyes narrow as they take in all the expensive tapestries, velvet throw rugs and silk coverings on my furniture. I cannot keep myself from blurting out “Oh fuck off, Alberto! It all came with the suite; I don’t own any of it!” I gesture to a chair in front of the fireplace, sitting down opposite him. “We have a lot to catch up on, don’t you think?”

I spend the better part of the next hour filling Alberto in on all the events of my recent existence. I hold nothing back, from my rape by Thomas to my time at the orphanage, all the way through my becoming a vampire and adopting Vin. “So now you know it all, brother. Still think I was just too high and mighty to take time to help my older brother? Still think I forgot you?”

Alberto sits in silence as I make my way over to desk in the corner of the room. Before returning to my brother’s side, I write out a draft to be cashed at a local bank. “Here. This amount should help you out.” Before Alberto can comment on the amount, I tell him “That is from my own account. You can split that money up among our siblings.” I see Alberto’s eyes grow wide. “By tomorrow morning, you shall receive a separate draft, drawn on the Queen’s account. That will be for you and…” with a small sniff, I ask “…what is her name, exactly?”

“Anna” I can tell that my brother is overwhelmed by the amount of money that I have just gifted him. “Alberto, I hope that the two of us can build a good relationship going forward. And…” I pull my brother out of his seat, my eyes boring into his. “…I certainly hope that what I shared with you this evening stays between the two of us.” Alberto nods, his eyes locked on mine as he says “I promise, Damian. I’m so very sorry for the way I treated you. I thank you for telling me everything about your life up to this minute. I now understand, and I want nothing more than my brother back in my life.” I hug my brother tightly, and with an evil grin I escort him to the door, stating “Oh, and if you get the chance, take the time to get to know Vin. I think you might enjoy spending time with him…”

As I return to the throne room, my eyes take in a tall, regal figure dressed all in black, standing very close to Juliana. For reasons unknown, I am instantly drawn to this stranger like a moth to a flame. The stranger’s subtle deferment to Juliana’s rank is shown by slight head nods and fleeting eye contact filled with both sincerity and pretense. As I approach, I realize that I’ve never been this mesmerized by anyone in my entire life…

“Oh good, Damian! I’m glad you returned! I would like you to meet…” Juliana looks a bit flustered as she admits “Oh, I’m so sorry! What is your name again?”

“Mikey Way, your Grace.” Mikey makes a slight bow towards Juliana, but those eyes! Those beautiful multi-colored eyes sink deep into mine at the same time, pulling on my very soul. I nod my head to Juliana before bowing low before Mikey, my voice deep and seductive as I respond with “It is an honor to meet you, Mikey.” Mikey smirks at me, eyes dancing with mirth.

I can see both masculine and feminine traits in the creature before me. Pale skin, almost translucent, shines in the lights of the throne room. I watch Mikey’s chest move slowly, giving away the fact that he is barely breathing. My sharp hearing cannot detect any throbbing of blood flowing underneath that beautiful pale skin. My eyes take in toned muscles and sharp cheekbones, my hands itching to touch.

Considering my recent experiences with Justine, one would think that I would show at least SOME caution when meeting another vampire. But in true Damian style, I throw all precaution to the wind. I cannot wait to get to know him better!

“Your reputation proceeds you, sir.” Mikey takes my hand in his, a slight smirk on his beautiful face. Turning to Juliana, Mikey asks “Your Highness, would you permit me to leave you for now, so I may speak to Damian alone? I understand he has quite the head for…business.” Juliana nods her head in approval. “Oh yes, my Damian is quite talented in many things! I’m sure he will be able to help you…fill your needs.” Juliana waves the two of us away from her side, a secret smile curling the corners of her mouth at her parting words.

I take Mikey’s arm in a gentle grasp. “If you will permit me, sir, I would like to show you the gardens. They are quite stunning in the moonlight…” I open the door for both of us, my manners on full display. I notice everyone near the doorway paying special attention to us as we make our way outside. Gossip will surely be making its way throughout the castle about us by morning…

I lead Mikey to a small pond near the middle of the garden, then gesture towards a small bench. “I figured this would be a quiet place for us to chat.” Mikey nods once, gracefully seating himself on the bench. “A grand idea Damian. I’m sure you wouldn’t want everyone in the throne room to hear you interrogate me, would you?” Mikey crosses his ankles, his hands coming to rest on his knees. “Then again, I’m not sure if any one of them could handle even the thought of two vampires so close in proximity to their Queen, much less the fact that the two of us exist.” I take a seat on the bench, my elbow gently grazing Mikey’s arm. “How correct you are! I have a hard enough time trying to stay one step ahead of the gossip as is!” Mikey chuckles softly. I’m enthralled by the very sound of his voice, which is musical yet sophisticated at the same time. My eyes catch how the moonlight seems to set Mikey’s white skin into varying tones of light and shadow.

Mikey notices my silent stares. Leaning towards me until the side of his body contacts mine, I hear a slight growl highlight the question “See something you like, Damian?”

“You.” It’s the most honest answer I have ever given anyone. Mikey seems to understand the meaning behind my singular answer. I feel him slide his hand into mine, squeezing gently once. “Be careful, sir. You have no idea the amount of trouble that I can lead you into. I may seem sweet and demure, but I can assure you…” Mikey leans even closer to me, his vision landing on my lips as he continues “…I’m more trouble that you can handle.”

I smirk, confidence dripping out of every pore as I snark “That makes two of us, love. You’ve never experienced trouble until you fall under my charms, darling.” I squeeze Mikey’s hand tightly as I bend forward, sweeping my lips across his. Mikey lets go of my hand, using both of his to grab my arms, hauling me forward to close the remaining distance between us until he claims my lips in a searing kiss.

The kiss seems to go on and on, since neither of us really need oxygen. I wrap both my arms around Mikey, pulling until she ends up on my lap facing me, her long legs sprawled on either side of mine. Her cold flesh feels wonderful under my fingertips, and I long to strip her of her clothes to explore more of her.

After a few minutes more, Mikey raises her head quickly. She cocks her head to the side, as if listening to something a great distance away. I wrap my hand around the back of her head, trying to pull her in for another kiss, but she resists, her eyes distant. My face must give away my confusion but after a few moments more Mikey glances back at me, her face showing barely veiled frustration. Before I can pose my question, I feel fingertips covering my lips. Looking contrite, Mikey starts “I’m so very sorry, Damian. I…forgot something very important that I must take care of immediately. I am loath to leave you, but I must go.” I make a sound of my own frustration, but the fingertips press further into my lips for a second to keep me quiet. “I certainly hope your response means that you would like to see me again. I would like nothing more to spend time getting to know you.” Mikey gives me a sweet, seductive smile. “If you can clear some time for me tomorrow night, I promise to meet you later in the evening in the throne room. Would you like that?” I nod and the fingertips are removed from lips, to once again feel Mikey’s lips on mine for a moment. “Wonderful! Would it be too much to ask for you to escort me to my carriage? It’s waiting outside the front gates.” As Mikey slowly stands, one hand reaching forward to pull me out of my seat, I stay still on the bench. When Mikey cocks her head to the side, a curious look on her beautiful face, I comment in a serious voice “I’m not sure that I can stand, Mikey. You’ve given me a…bit of a problem.” Mikey looks down at my hard on and bursts out laughing, her laughter sounding musical. “I’m sure you will be alright, love. Shall we…” pointing to my lap, he continues “…walk it off?” Mikey then pulls me to my feet, both of us laughing as we make our way to the front of the castle.

When we arrive hand in hand at Mikey’s carriage, I notice both grey geldings whinny to Mikey as she approaches. She leans over to pet both horses before turning back to me, her face a bit flushed. “I had a wonderful time…getting to know you, Damian.” I reach out, sinking my fingers into Mikey’s soft hair. “I look forward to getting to know you even better tomorrow night.” I yank on Mikey’s hair, pulling her in for another long kiss. I can feel that she is anxious to leave, while at the same time loath to break our kiss. After a few moments I pull my head back, my tongue gently licking over Mikey’s lips. “I will count the hours until we meet again, Mikey. It was a pleasure.” With a twinkle in his eyes, Mikey gives me a final look before turning his attention to the carriage driver. “My home, immediately.” The driver nods, and Mikey walks to the carriage door. I open it for her, squeezing her hand for the final time this evening. Once she is seated, I firmly close the carriage door, stepping back just in time as the carriage lurches off into the night at top speed.

When I return to my rooms, I find Vin waiting for me in front of the fire. He turns to me with the enthusiasm of an excited puppy. “Father, I have no idea what you said to Alberto, but thank you!” I chuckle as I respond with “So does this mean that the two of you spoke?” I watch Vin twirl his walking cane. “We are to spend time together tomorrow night. His bitchy wife has to visit her family for a few days, so I get him all to myself!” As I drape my shirt over a chair I respond “Just go easy on the man, Vin! I think he’s straight.” Vin approaches me, wrapping me in a quick hug before heading to the door. “He won’t be by the time I’m done with him!”

Looking into Mikey’s ever-changing eyes, I blurt out “I’m so very glad you came to visit me, darling. I’ve missed you so! Please try to come back to see me before I…” I cannot finish my sentence, tears flowing down my face. Mikey makes soft noises of despair as she moves closer, her soft lips meeting mine in a gentle kiss. As she starts to pull away, I blurt out “I love you, Mikey Way. I always have.” Mikey caresses my cheek then turns towards the door. “I have always loved you, my darling Damian. No matter what.”

As she opens the door to exit, I call out, my voice sharp with pain. “Honey, before you go.” Mikey turns back towards me; an inquiring look on her face. “I hate to ask, but could you please speak to Tommy? I really would love to see him once more before the end.” I see Mikey start to answer me, wanting to deny my impending death, but I cut her off. “I know it would be hard for him to get away, but could you please ask him to try?” After a few seconds Mikey nods once, a resigned look on her face. “Thank you, sweetheart.” Mikey blows me one last kiss and quietly leaves the room.

Chapter Text

You're so supersonic
Wanna feel your powers
Stun me with your laser
Your kiss is cosmic
Every move is magic
You're from a whole 'nother world
A different dimension
You open my eyes
And I'm ready to go
Lead me into the light
Kiss me, ki-ki-kiss me
Infect me with your lovin'
Fill me with your poison
Take me, ta-ta-take me
Wanna be your victim
Ready for abduction
Boy, you're an alien
Your touch, so foreign
It's supernatural
Extraterrestrial
This is transcendental
On another level
Boy, you're my lucky star
I wanna walk on your wavelength
And be there when you vibrate
For you, I'll risk it all, all
ET—Katy Perry

Six long months have passed since my reunion with my older brother.

Alberto and I have become closer than ever. Against his wife’s wishes, he manages to spend more and more time in Juliana’s throne room after dark. Alberto has become a regular at Juliana’s Wednesday and Friday game nights, playing cards and throwing dice until the early hours. Juliana has taken quite the liking to Alberto, asking him to personally handle private business affairs for her. Through his connections with the Queen, my brother is becoming rich in his own right.

Speaking of affairs, Juliana has taken on a few of her own. Recently she has taken interest in a handsome aristocrat from Milan, a man of both wealth and taste. The last part I know from experience, since I drank from him after he passed out drunk from a long night of debauchery with the Queen. When Juliana later found out that I had ‘sampled his wares,’ she chuckled and admonished me not to get carried away enough to kill the poor chap. “I like this one, Damian! Please show some restraint!”

Vin has been nothing but frustrated with my brother for the last six months. While they spend time together gambling and drinking, the looks of longing that Vin gives Alberto are missing their mark entirely. Either my brother knows what is going on and is playing dumb, or he really is obvious to a man’s advances. I encouraged Vin to simply speak his mind, to tell Alberto that he has fallen for him, but Vin refuses, stating that he is loath to risk losing Alberto’s friendship. It appears that Vin has found himself in a no-win situation.

Mikey, on the other hand, has been full of surprises—not all of them pleasant. The night after we met, Mikey returned to the throne room as he promised. We spent the evening laughing and talking about trivial things, then we went to my suite. We spent an hour making out and touching each other, but just when we were about to have sex, Mikey cocked his head to the side and, hearing something I could not hear, immediately stands up and yanks his clothes on.

“Where are you going?” I ask, my hand reaching out to grab at Mikey’s. With a sad smile, Mikey pulls away out of my reach. “I’m really sorry, Dam, but I have to go. I promise to be back tomorrow. I really enjoyed our time together…” I jump up from my bed, my fingers curling around Mikey’s as he turns to leave. “Then stay. Please.” Me, who NEVER begs for sex, is begging this pale God to stay in my bed for a little longer as if he were the last vamp on earth.

Mikey pulls his hand away from mine, the sadness on his face turning into a look of determination. “I’m really sorry, Dam. I truly am.” Without a backward glance, he walks out of the room, the door slamming behind him.

So starts a repeating pattern between us over the next six months.

Sometimes Mikey is so late arriving that I finally end up falling asleep while waiting for him. When these occasions happen, I wake to a note of apology, no Mikey present.

Some nights we begin having sex, only to be interrupted by an invisible cockblocker. Mikey leaves immediately his face full of anger while apologies flow from his lips.

On the rare nights when Mikey stays with me all night, I usually wake to find myself alone, a hastily scribbled note of goodbye on Mikey’s pillow.

I adore Mikey, I really do—but I’ve had it! I cannot continue being with him if he refuses to confide in me about anything, much less spend time with me! When I ask Mikey those usual ‘get to know you’ questions that all couples ask each other in the beginning, he turns silent. He refuses to tell me where he goes when he leaves. Hell, I don’t even know how old he is! He is king of keeping secrets, and I’m sick of it!

I’m meeting Mikey this evening after my meeting with the Paris delegation, and I’m going to demand some answers! If he refuses to talk to me, then we are over.

My meeting is long but very productive. I then have a short private meeting with Juliana to fill her in on the progress I made. With a pleased smile, she waves me away. “Enough for tonight, Damian! Go and have fun. I’m sure that I saw Mikey just a few minutes ago, waiting for you by the gaming table.” I nod and bow to Juliana, wishing her a good night.

Mikey immediately moves to my side when he sees me, his hand squeezing my arm. “There you are!” Leaning in, his nose brushing my long hair, Mikey whispers “What say we go to your suite and…” Before he can finish his sentence, I grip his arm tightly and all but drag him outside. Coming to a stop next to the pond where we had our first conversation, I hear Mikey laughingly comment “…but if you’d rather do it out in the open, darling…”

“Talk to me.”

Mikey pauses then shakes his head, his smirk slipping a little around the edges. “I thought we WERE talking, love. But I’d rather make love to you instead.”

My anxiety rising, I blurt out in response “Talk to me or we are through, Mikey.”

Mikey looks as if I slapped him. His discomfort begins to leak through his casual stance. “But Damian! We have so little time together…”

“Whose fault is that I wonder?” I turn to go, my shoulders slumping in defeat.

“DAM!” Mikey yells, then changes tactics. He reaches out to stroke my arm, trying hard to get me to switch gears with him. “I’m sorry I yelled, but I really do not see…”

Without another word I walk back to my suite, alone.

Once I arrive, Vin is sitting in front of my fireplace, his face lost in thought. I sigh, asking in an overly dramatic voice “What’s got YOUR panties in a bunch this evening, darling?”

To give you a synopsis of our conversation, Vin wanted to ask Alberto if he would be his donor. My brother knows that both Vin and I are vampires. Vin would love to ask but he is afraid to lose Alberto’s friendship. He would rather be friends with my brother, than not have him in his life altogether.

“Alberto really likes you, Vin. If you explain what being a donor entails, he then can make up his own mind if he wants to participate or not. I bet he will agree though.” When Vin asks why I think so, I supply “He is curious as to what makes vampires the way we are. He will agree, if nothing else to sooth his curiosity.” I pull Vin out of his chair, hug him tightly and then push him towards the door. “Go get ‘em, champ!” Vin laughs loudly as he thanks me then walks out the door

As soon as the door closes, I feel the sensation of lurching forward. I’m instantly dizzy, my eyes refusing to focus on the streaks of light that suddenly fill my vision. I become queasy; my head starts throbbing as my body accelerates. Wind blows my hair into my eyes, and I open my mouth to scream but nothing comes out but a pitiful whimper. Except for the experience of becoming a vampire, I have never been so terrified in my entire existence!

All movement abruptly stops, throwing me forward like a rag doll into a stone wall. I cling to the wall for support, my ears ringing. Once my head finally stops spinning, I realize that I am standing alone in what appears to be a throne room of a castle. Black velvet tapestries hang on the walls, and a single throne made from bone and leather sits on a high dais at the end of the room opposite me. The stairs leading to the throne are covered in a velvet runner that leads all the way to an antechamber at the back of the room. Large sconces around the room hold torches which illuminate murals of bloody battle scenes, the blood appearing to be real blood instead of mere paint. In one of the murals, a young man who resembles Mikey is standing over a dead body, his body armor covered in blood and a sword in his hand.

“Hello, Damian.”

I turn to find Mikey standing next to me. Instead of wearing his usual colorful garments, Mikey is wearing a tight long sleeved, low cut black leather and velvet dress, black leather high heeled boots shining in the firelight. Mikey looks so stunningly beautiful that when I try to say something, anything—only gibberish rolls off my stunned tongue.

“You’re right, Damian. It’s time you learned all about me.” Turning towards the antechamber, Mikey screams out “SLAVE!”

A panicked-looking human runs into the room, his head bowed. Once he stops in front of Mikey, he instantly sinks to his knees, his hands clenched behind his back, eyes to the floor. I can’t help but notice how muscular the slave is, as if he were chosen to do manual labor instead of “…fetch me a large pitcher of blood for my guest and I. Make it fresh.” The slave nods, eyes down as he replies “Yes, my Queen!” He then stands and runs out of the room to do Mikey’s bidding.

“Queen?” My voice shakes as my eyebrows arch in comical fashion.

“Come, Damian. Sit by me. We have much to discuss.” Mikey takes my hand and leads me up the steps to the throne. I hesitate, then move to sit on the leather covered step stool at the chair’s base. “No, darling.” Mikey pushes me onto the throne, moving to sit at my feet on the stool. “You are no lapdog.”

I look once again around the room, my eyes showing the sense of wonder that I am feeling. “Like it, darling?” Mikey plays with my fingers as he continues. “The murals depict our wins in past battles against the Light realm. I can remember when the first war took place, I was a vampire of thirteen years then. That painting over there is of me in the last battle.” Mikey points to the painting that I was admiring when I arrived. So it WAS Mikey in the painting! “I proudly took my place in battle and was well compensated for my troubles.” Looking deep into my eyes, Mikey notices my questions, my confusion. “But I suppose it would be best if I start at the beginning…”

The slave enters, carrying the pitcher and two large goblets. Mikey waits until he serves us, then commands him to leave. “Spread the word to the guards on duty that I do not wish to be disturbed, slave.” The slave responds “As you wish, my Queen” as he runs out to carry out Mikey’s command.

The blood tastes different than the blood I drink at home. The taste is richer, sweeter. When I comment to Mikey about the difference, he simply shrugs, his eyes lighting up. “Our slaves are fed a special diet. It makes their blood sweeter than the blood in the Light realm. It also has the effect of being much more addictive to us vampires.”

“Light realm? Where is that?” I pour myself another goblet of blood as I wait for an explanation.

“I better start at the beginning, Damian. My real name is Michael Way de Clermont, but nowadays I simply go by Mikey Way. I am the oldest of twelve children. I was born to peasant farmers in the town of Lyon, France. When I was nine, I was sent to live with the royal family as a playmate to the King’s children. Little did I know…” Mikey’s eyes darken, her expression hardens “…that I was to become the playmate to the King as well.”

“The King’s Fool studied magick, even though the King expressly forbade him to. I became friends with the Fool, eventually asking him to teach me what he knew. At first, he refused but eventually, as I graced his palm with stolen money, he gave in. For the next eight years, every free moment that I had, I practiced magick. I excelled beyond the skill of my teacher, who looked far and wide to find someone talented enough to continue my training.”

Then late one night, the King wanted sex, so he went in search of me. When he found me, I was levitating three feet off the floor. The King grabbed my arm and slammed me into the closest wall, hitting me over and over until a dark rage took over me. I mumbled a few words and the King fell to the floor; his neck broken in three places. That night began my path to the Dark side.”

“I ran away from the castle that night, searching out teacher after teacher until I could find no one else to instruct me. Then one night, while meditating, I transported to the Dark realm, exactly as you did tonight. Those that I met here were all pure evil, dark hearts deep within dark souls.”

“It was also here in the Dark realm where I found Koyoto, my most powerful teacher. I asked him to make me a vampire. I love him very much, and I wanted to become his daughter. Koyoto taught me the darkest kind of magick called Neygin. It took me five years of studying night and day, but I managed to even surpass my teacher’s skills. I was finally happy, feeling as if I found a home at last.” My thoughts begin to wander. Could I learn magick? Could I ever be as powerful as Mikey? My wandering thoughts seem to catch Mikey’s attention. He flashes me with an evil grin as he comments “Intriguing thought, isn’t it, Damian?” I nod in response, my expression turning serious. I’m not exactly sure how I suddenly know it, but Mikey’s evil grin makes me feel as if I’d given away my greatest secret to someone who has the actual power to turn it against me.

Squeezing my hands to regain my attention, Mikey continues his story. “When the first Great War broke out against the Light realm, I had no idea of the politics behind the battles. I simply fought for the thrill of it, watching both humans and vampires fall at my feet in puddles of blood. War brought out the evil in my soul, and I loved every minute of it.”

“When the war was finally over, the King of the Dark realm demanded to see me. He praised my skills in battle. In a private meeting, King Henry told me that he was dying from a disease that none of the healers could cure. I placed hands on the King, and he was instantly cured. In gratitude, King Henry asked me to be his chief advisor, which was basically the same position you hold with Queen Juliana.”

“I learned politics, accounting, social skills. I charmed everyone I encountered, earning even more praise along the way. Rumors began to circulate that I was an evil witch, to beware of my powers. The more the rumors were told, the more popular I became.”

Thirty years or so later the King was killed in battle. When the legal decree was read, the kingdom learned that Henry’s last wish was that I become the next ruler of the Dark realm. Since everyone feared me so, they simply bowed their heads in acceptance, and I became Queen.”

While Mikey pauses to take a sip of blood, I inquire “But Mikey? I do not wish to offend you by asking, but why Queen instead of King?” Mikey’s head nods once, accepting the question with no sign of distress. “I’ve always felt more female than male, Damian. I even wore dresses into battle!” Seeing the question remaining in my eyes, Mikey continues “I wore men’s clothing when I would visit you, simply to fit in. I notice that the Light realm seems to have stricter guidelines on dress and decorum.”'

I lean towards Mikey, taking his hand in mine. “The Light realm? That’s where I live?”

“Yes, but I will get to that in a while. One thing at a time.” Mikey kisses the top of my hand, then squeezes my fingers tightly. “Once I became Queen, the Dark realm became even darker. At that time, there were only vampires living here. We imported blood, which was both expensive and time consuming. I insisted that we import humans instead, turning them not only into our food source but also as slaves to serve us. With the help of my advisors, we set up a district in a close by town dedicated to the breeding of humans. The human female’s only job there is to have children, which are sold to vampires when they are born. Those children are raised by slaves, to replace those that either die of natural causes or by being fed upon. The system has worked well for over 8 millennium so far…”

“You’re THAT old?” I blurt out, my face showing shock and surprise. Mikey throws back his head and laughs. “The worlds are a lot older than you know, darling. I’ve lived a long time, and I intend to live a lot longer!” I smile, my mind still wrapping around the thought that the young man that I enjoyed having sex with is that ancient.

“Shortly after I became Queen, infighting began amongst the vampires. To restore order, the first thing I did was to separate those with the strongest evil powers from the ‘everyday’ vampires. Those powerful vamps sit on a special Council that I founded named the Vampaire. The main goal of the Vampaire is to instill order. It oversees the army, handles the business of the Dark realm, and hands out punishments to those that deserve them. I am its leader, of course. I rule with an iron fist.”

My head spins with all the information that Mikey have given me in such a short amount of time. Seeing my disbelief and shock, Mikey takes both of my hands in his, gently pulling me out of my seat. “What say the two of us go for a walk, Dam? That way you can see for yourself a bit of the kingdom.” I nod once, my words somehow escaping me. Mikey leads me off the dais and through the castle, her dress swaying slightly as she walks.

Dark furnishings and wall coverings fill my vision as we walk through the main floor of the castle. Guards hold back slaves as we make our way through the narrow stone corridors, everyone bowing their heads to us as we pass.

The main courtyard is full of guards carrying out military maneuvers. A small vampire bellows out “The QUEEN!” as we pick our way through the crowd, Mikey’s head held high, his vision straight ahead. I follow suite, making sure that my vision does not fall on any individual except for Mikey.

A carriage waits for us at the front gate. I help Mikey into the carriage before climbing in beside him…her. This is going to be difficult…

“I see you are falling into line perfectly, Dam!” Mikey comments, a smirk on her face. Seeing my frown, she immediately squeezes my hand. “I’m joking, love! Your submission is the last thing I want…” Mikey leans towards me, placing a hand on my cock and squeezing a few times. “…unless it’s in bed!” Mikey then leans down to kiss my cheek, her laughter ringing in my ears.

We tour three villages of different sizes. In each, slaves bow their heads and vampires call out “Hale to Queen Mikey!” Mikey waves and nods, a solemn look belied by the slight smile on her lips. The villages look no different the villages in the Light realm. When I make a comment regarding this, her response is “Yes, but the feel is different, isn’t it? You are only seeing a gentle glimpse in time. You are not seeing how the slave owners beat their slaves for the smallest infractions, or how rape happens throughout the kingdom every day, all day long. What you see is a large group of individuals on their best behavior, because their Queen is walking amongst them. You have no idea, Damian, how much evil is carried out here on a daily basis. Only those with the darkest hearts survive this hell-forsaken piece of purgatory.” We seat ourselves in the carriage for the trip back to the castle. “And you, my love?” Mikey turns to me, lust in his eyes. “I want to make you my King…”

Chapter Text

“King?”

Now, ladies and gentlemen, I usually pride myself on my quick wit. I may not be the sharpest tool in the shed, but I’m not completely stupid either. I get the feeling that Mikey wants me to throw precaution to the wind and immediately accept his invitation to rule by his side. But this time? Instead of rushing to answer Mikey by making promises I could very well regret later, I stop myself short of saying anything else. Instead, I sit back in my seat and wait for Mikey to tell me more about this decision of hers. But as usual, Mikey surprises me by suddenly appearing disinterested in finishing the very conversation that she started in the first place.

“Let’s wait until we arrive back at the castle before we say any more, darling.” Mikey softly responds. I nod once and we spend the rest of the ride to the castle in silence.

After entering the castle, Mikey leads me to her private study. After calling for more blood, she sits gracefully next to me, her hand linking with mine. “I know you must have a million questions floating around in that blonde skull of yours, Damian. I threw a lot of information at you today, simply by bringing you to my home. I’m sorry if you are overwhelmed, my darling.”

I take a sip of blood before commenting “I appreciate your bringing me here, Mikey, and telling me your life story. I feel much closer to you now.” Mikey gives me a grin that has an evil undertone to it, sending a chill down my spine. “You are right, the list of questions that I have for you feels endless. But right now, I hope you will not be insulted by my need to return home and rest.”

Mikey waits until I finish my glass of blood before standing and making her way to a bookshelf at the other end of her study. After running her fingers lightly over the spines of at least a dozen books, she finally finds what she is looking for. As she returns to me, she hands a book out for me to take. I notice the title “Abandando electrix” as my fingers close around the spine. The moment my flesh touches the heavy book, a jolt of electricity shoots up my arm into my chest.

“Here, Damian. I’m entrusting you with my first spell book. Keep it safe, keep it well hidden. In your realm, discovery of that book will get you burned at the stake. Most individuals there are unsophisticated and superstitious, so be very cautious if you decide you wish to try any of the spells in the book. I would hate to find my Damian reduced to a charcoal briquet.”

The book’s cover is pale human skin stitched together with multiple seams, the texture hard and leathery. A musty smell fills the room as I try to release the clasps on top of the heavy cover. The book resists me, the clasps groaning and shuddering, digging into my fingers deep enough to draw blood. As my blood drips onto the edge of the cover, the book gives out a loud screech of warning. As I rush to place my cut fingers into my mouth to heal them, Mikey moves closer to me and slaps her hand down sharply on the cover, commanding in a sharp tone “ENOUGH!” The book’s clasps pop open on their own, the cover flying open onto my leg with a sigh of surrender. Once my fingers finally heal, I gently run them over the title page in Mikey’s own handwriting.

“Don’t fret, Damian. The book will behave for you.” The book gives out another resigned sigh. “Just do not try to work the spell on the last page. If you do, the book will go up in flames. That spell is only for me to cast.” Mikey then gently places her hands on either side of my face, her fingers touching my temples. I hear her mumble a few strings of nonsensical words seconds before I feel a shock wave enter my skull, traveling down my body with alarming speed. I feel instantly energized, as if there is a spiral of power flowing through my veins.

Mikey looks down at me and smirks. “That, my dearest Damian, is just a tiny sample of my powers. I give them to you freely, so you can travel between the realms and visit me. You can come see me anytime you please.” Mikey grabs my arms, pulling me out of my chair, the book held tightly against my chest. She wraps her arms around me, hugging me close before kissing me gently. “I hope you want to see me again, Dam. I’m going to miss you.” Mikey kisses me once again and then steps away from me. “Now, the goal to time travel is to want to be ‘there’ more than ‘here.’ Concentrate on your suite in the Light realm, see it in your mind.” I focus on my bedroom, thinking to myself that I’m tired and really want to go to bed. I feel a breeze slowly encircle my body, feel it grow stronger the more I focus. I faintly hear Mikey’s pleased voice as she says “Excellent, Damian! Goodbye my love, see you soon.” The next thing I know, my long hair is whipping around me, and I see the lights once again streak past me as I move at breakneck speed. This time though, I am not scared, instead I’m focused on my destination with laser like precision.

I end up landing on my bed, the spell book falling on the bed next to me with a startled grunt. I then realize that keeping this book quiet is going to be quite the feat.

I get up and make a hiding place for book in the back of my linen closet under a few blankets. I shush it when it begins to complain, telling it I would burn it at first chance if it did not keep quiet. I cannot help but wonder if all of Mikey’s book are as grumpy as this one.

With the events of the evening floating through my tired mind, I tuck myself into bed for a well-deserved sleep.

Sometime during the weeks that follow my first trip to the Dark realm, it occurs to me that, having Justine as my maker, I must be evil too. Add that to the power that Mikey gave me to travel between the realms—exactly HOW evil am I? I feel no different than before Mikey cast her spell. Would all this evil help me to cast magick of my very own? Or would it cause me to strike out against those that I love here in the Light realm?

There was only one way to find out.

I wait until I am completely alone (which is indeed a feat, considering how many visitors are always coming and going from my rooms) and take the spell book out of hiding. The book immediately hisses at me, the clasps snapping together like teeth in an angry animal’s mouth. Feeling stupid for doing so, I utter an apology to the book. “I’m sorry for leaving you in hiding so long book. Now be kind and open for me, please.” The book shudders and groans for a moment before the cover snaps open, the first spell page shining in the fire light. The book makes a grunt of complaint when I begin to leaf through the pages, as if it is trying to tell me not wander beyond the page that it supplied for me to read.

I spend the day learning how to make a witch’s ladder, how to cast spells for various things like protection, success and wealth. For some reason these spells seem quite simple to cast, as if I had the ability to learn faster than I originally expected. But the book has other ideas, insisting that I completely read a spell before allowing me to move on to the next one by turning the page for me. Five hours in, I’m getting so frustrated at the slow speed which I’m learning that it’s enough to make me want to carry out my previous threat by throwing the book into the fire!

At this thought, a shot of electricity shoots through me, making my skin smoke. As I shake my head to clear it, I hear Mikey’s voice boom in my head. “One spell at a time, Dam! Walk before you run! And if you harm my book, so help me I’ll fry you like a chicken on an open pit!” I hang my head in defeat, answering Mikey softly within my thoughts. “I’m sorry, my Queen. I will behave!” I hear an evil chuckle fill my head at my use of Mikey’s title for the first time. Maybe I am a lapdog after all?

The next spell I come across is for something called a glamour. In Mikey’s small but perfect handwriting, she explains that a glamour is an illusion, concealing the true form of something. It either changes your outward appearance, or how someone else perceives you.

Without much thought to the consequences, I think to myself “I always wondered what I’d look like with black hair!” as I chant the words on the page in front of me. I rush to gaze into the mirror in my bedroom, but all I see is blonde hair. What could I possibly have done wrong?

Just then the front door to my suite swings open. I rush to pick up book, shoving him quickly into the bottom of a pile of dirty laundry. I hear book give out a tired sigh right before it sneezes twice.

“Bless you!” I hear Vin yell as he rushes to my bedroom. “Dam, you’ll never guess what happened! The Queen WHAT THE FUCK DID YOU DO TO YOUR HAIR?”

I try to act innocent. “Whatever do you mean, Vin? What’s wrong with my hair?” Vin reaches his hand out until he ends up running his fingers through my long hair. “Your blonde hair! You dyed it black! How did you manage it?”

I try to keep the pleased chuckle out of my voice as I respond “I just wanted to try something different, to surprise you and Juliana. I just rinsed my hair with a concoction that the healer gave me. It will fade quickly, practically right in front of your eyes.” I take Vin’s hand in mine, saying “Let’s go say good evening to our Queen, Vin. Then you can catch me up on all the good gossip.” As we leave to spend some time in the throne room, I hear Mikey’s chuckle reverberate in my head.

It doesn’t take me very long to read the entire spell book. I tried out most of the spells, some with success and others…not so much. Mikey demands that I try the failed spells over again until I get them right. “You have to build your power, Damian. Practice makes perfect!”

After a few weeks’ time, book turns the page to the final spell. This page is unlike the others, there is no title, no written instructions. There is only a paragraph of what appears to be Egyptian hieroglyphics. I remember what Mikey told me, that this spell is only for her to cast. Hell, I couldn’t even read it to do so!

Book grunts a few times before slamming shut, the clasps clicking together before flinging itself into my arms. Once I wrap my arms around the book, I feel wind beginning to circulate around my feet. The next thing I know, I’m sitting on a leather chair in Mikey’s study, the book landing on my lap with a thump.

Mikey looks beautiful in a tight grey and black leather dress. “I hope you enjoyed your first set of spells, Dam.” Mikey picks book up off my lap, gliding across the room to replace it on the bookcase. Book makes a final grunt, as if saying goodbye to me. “Would you like to learn another one?” She gestures to the wall of books she is standing in front of. “I have plenty to choose from.”

I’m speechless. Mikey is insinuating that every book in her huge bookshelf is a spell book! It would take me many, many years to learn it all. Mikey’s eyes flash with glee as she responds “Not necessarily, darling. You catch on quickly; I can see you getting through these in oh…say three to five years of diligent study.”

Seriously? Nothing to do but reading all that time? Mikey must sense my reluctance, because she quickly adds “But of course, there is more to studying magick than just reading spell books! The fun part is the practice, not the reading.” Mikey turns back to the shelves once again, selecting a huge leather-bound book three times longer than the one I just read, and at least a foot thick. Placing the book down gently on her desk, she comments “But unfortunately, before you begin that fun, you must first read this.” Taking a seat opposite me, Mikey continues, her face solemn. “This is my grimoire. I wrote every word in it, it is the most important of all my books.” I hear the books on the shelves grunt and growl at this comment. Mikey ignores them. “The very basics of magick is in that book, Dam. Herbs, crystals, runes, wands, shells…the tools of magick and how to use them. It also teaches you how to write your own spells. I want you to take your time and read everything carefully, I will be testing you along the way. And one more thing…” Mikey shifts towards me, her eyes flashing with intensity. “…the book stays here, Damian. It does not leave the Dark realm. You will have to come here to read it. Understand?” When I nod once, Mikey’s fingertips flash bright blue, bolts of lightning crackling from the ceiling as she snarls out in an authoritarian voice laced with acid. “Words, Damian! I need to hear you say that my book will never leave the Dark realm, I need your words, understand? In the wrong hands, it is extremely dangerous. It could destroy me. Say it!” I reach out to Mikey, laying a shaking hand on her arm. “I promise, Mikey. I promise to never physically remove the book from this realm.” Mikey stares into my eyes for a few moments, her face appearing undecisive, as if she thinks I’m going to try to trick her. The lightning bolts eventually disappear, her fingertips returning to normal. Eventually she gives in, standing to pull me into her embrace. “I trust you, Damian. I know you would never betray me. That is why I asked you to be my King. I would love to have you rule at my side.”

I avoid her gaze, instead lowering my head, my feet beginning to slowly pace in the small space. “Just…what would that entail, Mikey? Can I still live in the Light realm, or would I have to move here?”

I feel more than see Mikey’s disappointment. “Why, darling! I thought that you would move to the Dark realm with me! Wouldn’t you like for the two of us to live together? You are always saying that you want to see more of me…” Mikey reaches out a hand to stop my pacing. “I would love to share my throne with you, my bed…all aspects of my life.”

My eyes finally raise to meet Mikey’s. “But I have a life in the Light realm. Friends, family! How can I leave those that mean so much to me behind? And what if there is another war? I could never raise arms against my family…”

Mikey sighs deeply, her hands gripping my arms tightly. “It’s not as if you couldn’t visit them, Dam! I understand just how much they mean to you. And as far as war is concerned, there hasn’t been a war for at least a thousand years, darling. By the time there would be another war, those that you love will have long passed away. And of course, you could always bring Vin to the Dark realm to live! I’m sure a bright young thing such as him could find an interesting position at court.” Mikey’s eyes beg me to consider the options laid before me.

What exactly do I want? Everything sounds so intriguing! Me, King? The entire kingdom at my feet, bowing to my every whim? The chance to focus on magick training, to help Mikey rule. And what of Vin and the evil that Justine gave him when she made him? Would coming to the Dark realm be the equivalent of coming home for Vin? Or would he choose to stay in the Light realm with my brother?

Mikey gives me a ghost of an evil smile. I know that she is listening to my thoughts. “Darling, you do not have to answer right now. I just want you to think about it. Visit when you can to read my grimoire. We will talk together about what you read, practice using the tools that you find in the book. I promise you will find it enlightening. And if you wish, talk to Vin about us here in the Dark realm. He may end up deciding to visit all on his own. Frankly, I’m surprised that Justine never mentioned this realm to either of you before. That bitch always did have a big mouth…” Mikey pulls me into a hug, kissing my cheek. “I have court business to attend to. Stay if you’d like. You can just leave the book open to whatever page you finish on; it won’t be in my way. I’ll see you later, darling.” With a wink, Mikey slowly sways her way out of the room.

Current day…

Still with me folks? I’m sure this switching back and forth is annoying, but it is the only way to tell my story while still focusing on the here and now.

Speaking of magick, I wonder just how powerful I still am? The Council assured me that the acid that is running through my veins would destroy everything, including my magick skills. Well, there is only one way to find out! Closing my eyes, I focus on the one thing that I want more than anything else…and with a flash of light they appear in front of me.

“Hello, Tommy Joe.”

Chapter Text

Silently, I hold my breath for a moment, my eyes taking in the beautiful creature standing not two feet away from me. Tommy slowly raises his right hand to brush back his bangs from his forehead, knowing full well that they will simply fall forward again the second he moves. I continue to take silent inventory of the vampire standing in front of me while he gathers his composure.

Tommy looks as if he was deep asleep when I snatched him from his comfortable bed. Brown eyes blink at the bright lights above us, his hands raising to rub the sleep out of his eyes. Tommy’s face is free of makeup, even the lip gloss that usually graces his lips at all hours of the day and night is missing. The bar and hoop earrings that I pierced Tommy’s petite ears with are still there. He is wearing a beat-up pair of sleep pants which ride low on his hips, and a low-cut black tee shirt, which clings tightly to his trim chest and arms. The leather cord necklace with the eye of Horus amulet that I gave Tommy still hangs gracefully around his thin neck. I chuckle softly when I notice that Tommy’s bare feet are graced with black painted toenails.

To me, I’ve never seen anything more beautiful than the sweet boy standing in front of me.

“Sorry to wake you, sweetheart, but I couldn’t wait any longer to see you. Don’t worry, I told Adam where you are.” Tommy stands stock still, as if I had put him under a spell. “Please, come closer, my love. I’ve missed you so.”

What I hoped would be a sweet reunion between us instantly turns confrontational, as soon as Tommy gets his bearings. He storms over to me, swings his arm back and slaps me soundly across the face. “How dare you??” When my head snaps back to center, I see then feel Tommy slap my face even harder a second time. “How FUCKING DARE YOU!!!!”

“I missed you too, love” I softly respond. A few seconds go by before Tommy snorts, his hands flying over his head in a gesture of frustration. “I know that you are frustrated with me…”

“You know NOTHING of the sort, Dam! Frustrated doesn’t begin to cut it!” Tommy takes a step back, his eyes locked on mine. “Do you know what it’s like knowing that one of the men you love is TRYING to kill himself? That he wants to remove himself from not only your life, but his SON’S life? That he has embarked on a foolhardy attempt to save the family that he claims to love, instead of helping us fight this battle head on? You have NO fucking idea how beyond frustrated I am with you, Damian. If I didn’t love you so much, I’d hate your guts!”

I hate to admit it, my Tommy is sexy as hell when he’s in a rage. “Baby, you have to hear my side of the story…”

With surprising strength Tommy lunges forward, wrapping his hands around my throat, squeezing until I’m gasping for breath. “I HAVE heard your side of the story, asshole! I’ve heard it from Adam and Mikey. Hell, even our son quotes you as if you were Shakespeare! I’m SICK to DEATH of your side of the story, so you are going to SHUT IT while I tell you MINE!”

What’s my response as soon as he loosens his death grip on my throat? “As long as you kiss me first, love.”

Tommy wrinkles his little turned up nose, his eyes murderous as he spits out “Later, IF you shut up and listen to me!” Seeing my responding smirk, Tommy’s eyes twinkle for a second before he regains his composure. “Damian, I MEAN IT! You woke me from a dead sleep and dragged me here SO YOU ARE GOING TO LISTEN TO ME, DAMN IT!!!”

I look deeply into Tommy’s beautiful brown eyes, all traces of humor gone from my face. “Of course, my love. Please go ahead, I am listening.”

Tommy reaches out a shaking hand, placing it gently on the center of my chest. “The family needs you, Dam. I know you are not fond of certain members of the family (*side note—in case you do not know, most of the Toro family, which Tommy is a part of, hates my guts. And they have good reason to, to be honest. But I’ve always been jealous of them and the love that they bear for each other, and I have always wished to be a real part of the family) but they have all concluded that we need your help. Baby…” Tommy runs the backs of his fingers gently down my face. “…we cannot win this war without you fighting by our side. Even Ray’s opinion has changed. We cannot do this without you.”

I grunt as another drop of acid hits my system. “Tommy baby, I can’t! If I give in and get off this cross, the enemy will win for sure. I called in that favor to take the heat off the family, to bide all of you some time to flush out the enemy and destroy them. If I recant now, if I tell my secret, the family will be destroyed.”

Tommy strokes my face again. “No, Damian. That’s what the enemy wants you to think. Ray and Adam have done some digging, and this is bigger than we originally thought. We have not one but TWO enemy families out to bring us down. Even with all the members of our three clans united, we are no match for what lies in wait for us. See, Ray has admitted to making a horrible mistake. He became lax about creating new clan members. He always believed that our royal bloodline would be enough to keep us safe, since the family has always had special skills that other families have lacked. But even with Adam’s fierceness and Frankie’s magic, it won’t be enough. We cannot fight against these two larger clans. It would be suicide. They have a kind of magic that even Mikey hasn’t seen before. We are losing battle after battle. We need you, baby, to fight with us.”

My fingers ache to run through Tommy’s blonde locks, to scratch down the shaved side of his head. “Are you…saying what I think you are saying, Tommy Joe?” Terror fills my very being and my stomach flips over, and this time it has nothing to do with the acid in my system.

The sad look in Tommy’s eyes tells the tale. “I know that it is the last thing you would ever want to do, Damian. It is the last thing we who love you want you to do. You have already given so much to the family, we shouldn’t expect you to go that far to save us. But we have run out of options.” Tommy’s bottom lip begins to tremble, tears filling his eyes. “We need you; your son needs you. You would finally be a true Toro, one of us. I know how long you’ve waited to say that, to belong.”

My voice drops a few octaves, my words cut like ice as I respond “Sure. I only have to lose my heart, my soul, my entire personality…” My eyes narrow and the next words I speak are filled with heartbreak “…and you.”

Tommy steps forward until we are practically nose to nose. “That will never happen…”

I laugh, my voice ragged and rough. “Oh no? Now who are you trying to kid, TJ? You want me to go back to the Dark realm, become King, and become the hard assed evil bastard that I was when we first met? The one who raped you, killed your children, tried to destroy your family? The one who broke your bones, laughed as you begged to be released from all the hell I put you through? You think that won’t happen again, huh? Boy, are you delusional! I’m sure the beloved family will rush forward to welcome the King of the Dark realm into its fold. Ray would rather die again than watch me lose control and hurt you all over again. Is that what you really want?” My heart hurts, my head hurts, my very soul (or what’s left of it) hurts. I don’t know whether to feel betrayed or to simply stay on the cross, letting the acid finish me off. What kind of a tradeoff does he really think he’s offering me?!

“Dam.” Tommy sighs, his eyes suddenly glued to anything except me. “You know I love you. And you know that I would never ask something like this from you, unless I really had no choice. The last thing I want is for you to lose all that you have gained these last years. But I don’t know what else to do. None of us do.” His gaze finally meets mine, the truth there for me to see. “We need the Dark realm’s army to defeat our enemies. I’m just sorry that we need you to risk losing yourself in the process.”

Tears suddenly fill my eyes. “I can’t lose you again, Tommy Joe. I couldn’t stand it. To know that I am the one ripping you apart, limb by limb would destroy me for good this time.”

Tommy softly strokes his hand over my chest, his fingers clutching my shirt as he answers, sincerity in his eyes. “You will NEVER lose me, Damian. I will always be here, no matter what.”

I shake the hair out of my face and give Tommy a look of distain. “You say that now. Will you love me while I rape you? Will you still love me when I hurt Adam, or Mikey, or Ray? Will you try to destroy me if I raise a hand to hurt our son? And will you despise me when I breed you with evil, make you carry my pups again? You know that I can do all that and more. The moment I enter the Dark realm, I cease to be me. Me, the very self you see in front of you. The one who would never raise a hand to hurt you, or those I love. You’re asking me to destroy everything that I have worked so carefully to build.”

Tears stream unchecked down Tommy’s face. The light in the room reflects off them, prisms of rainbow light catching my vision. My heart feels as if it is being squeezed in a vice. What the fuck am I going to do? Trade one prison for another?

I close my eyes and concentrate. I hear Tommy gasp as I open them again. Adam, Mikey, Ray, Frankie and our son Devlin are now standing in the room with us, each rubbing sleep from their eyes. Before they can say anything, I start off with “Hello everyone. I’m sorry to pull you away from your warm beds, but we have a lot to discuss.” I nod at Ray, who nods back at me, a surprising look of respect in his eyes. Ray answers “You’re right, Damian. We do have a lot to discuss. Thank you for bringing us here.” Adam gives me a wink before blowing me a kiss, his arms encircling Tommy, pulling him tightly against his chest. “Hey Dam. I’ve missed you.” Frankie, on the other hand, doesn’t give me anything to work with. His expression is guarded, his hair flopping over his eyes, hands clasped in front of him. Devlin shoots me a lopsided grin, his eyes bright. “Hi Papa. I love you.” I respond in kind, my expression filled with pride for my only son.

“Tommy has been filling me in on the family’s current situation.” I shudder again as a drop of acid hits my system. “He’s informed me of your plan to have me return to the Dark realm, become King and lead the Dark army in battle against your enemies.” Ray, Mikey and Frankie nod their heads, their eyes adverted. Tommy and Adam look ashamed, even as they nod in agreement with me. Devlin’s body rocks side to side with nervous energy, his hands behind his back, eyes shining with love.

My voice turns rough once again, filled with emotion. “Do you really know what you are asking for? I mean, come on! Each of you felt the effects of evil taking over me. I have hurt each of you, and while some of you have forgiven me, I will never forget the hell I’ve put you all through, much less forgiven myself for it. And now you want me to return to my former self? Do you honestly think I’ll be able to control myself, once the power takes me over? When I am in that state, I do not care about right or wrong. I simply do as I please, how I please. Just how do you plan to stop me from hurting all of you?”

Mikey softly replies “Fight power with power, Damian. I plan to go to the Dark realm with you. I will become Queen again, rule by your side. Once we have defeated our enemy, I will…”

I struggle against the chains holding me in place. “NO! You will not join me, Mikey! The family cannot afford to take the chance of losing you, too! If I do this, I go alone.” I lock eyes with Mikey. “You will be needed here. And when the time is right, you can bind my powers for me.” As Mikey begins to protest, I cut her off by shutting my eyes and whispering “book.” Within seconds, Mikey’s first spell book appears, floating in the air in front of her. Book sighs then shudders as Mikey gently takes Book into her arms. “You’re going to need that, darling, if you are going to bind me.” With a smile, I finish with “I know that binding is what the last spell in book is for.”

“I hate the idea of you sacrificing yourself for us, Father” Devlin comments, his eyes filling with tears. “I have heard the tales of your past, and the last thing I want is for you to become that monster again.” I nod my head, tears rolling down my face. “I understand son, I truly do. Ray?” As I turn my attention to Ray, he answers with a terse “Yes, Damian?” Mikey, not liking the way Ray responded, steps on Ray’s foot as I ask, “Are you…sure…that this is the only way?”

The room grows silent, everyone holding their collective breaths. Ray looks at Adam, who nods, then turns back to me. “I’m sorry, Damian, but it is the only way.”

“What about you, short stuff?” I turn to Frankie, trying to get a rise out of him. He refuses to take the bait. “You hate my guts the most. What do you have to say about all of this?”

Frankie’s eyes turn murderous, his snarl sounding unusually loud in the small room. “Hurt one person I love, and I will kill you. End of discussion.”

I hold Frankie’s gaze for a few seconds before turning to look each member of the family in the eye. I see sorrow, regret, anxiety as well as determination. This is the family that I have chosen to love and be a part of. They need me, and I need them. In the end, the decision is really a no-brainer. They must come first. They must survive. But I can’t help but wonder…will they survive ME?

I close my eyes and concentrate. The cross groans and splits down the middle with an explosion of bark and splinters. The chains holding me break apart as if they were made of glass. Ripping the IV out of my side, I take a deep breath and step forward, yelling out “Alrighty then! Let’s do this!” I close my eyes, returning Ray, Mikey, Devlin and Frankie to their beds. Once they arrive safely, I then turn my attention to Adam and Tommy, wrapping my arms around both their necks, pulling them close. “Hold on tight, darlings! Tonight, there’s going to be three in your bed…” I blink, and we all end up in Adam and Tommy’s California King sized bed for a long-awaited reunion. Curled tight around each other, our soft goodnights fill the air as we try to reassure ourselves that everything will be alright.

The next evening Ray, Adam, Frankie, Mikey and Tommy invite me to sit with them at the mansion’s dining room table. The last time I remember being here, Frankie threw Mikey’s good china across the room at me. I watch with a smile as Mikey looks at Frankie and then towards the china cabinet in the corner, making sure that it is locked just in case of a repeat performance.

When everyone seems reluctant to begin the conversation, I step in as usual. “So, who are the families that are causing all this fuss? Do I know them?” Frankie grunts, his fingers tucking his bangs behind his ear. “You should know them. You share a past with them.” When I shoot the group a confused look, Ray supplies “The Dante and Aprile Families. I understand you had a run-in with past members of their clans.” My blood runs cold as Ray continues. “They’ve been bragging about how they are finally going to take down our family and destroy you in the process.”

This can’t be happening! I heard rumors that members of these families became vampires around the time that Justine turned me. I always dismissed the rumors as pure fiction, even though the gossip in the vampire world was that these vampires were also sired by Justine.

These families can be traced back to the two demons that destroyed my world before I became a vampire. The Dante family sired Matteo, and the Aprile family sired Marcus. Somewhere along the way, a member of one of the families must’ve found out that I was responsible for the murders of Matteo and Marcus. How they found out, I’ll never know, though I would put money on it that it was that bitch Justine who told them.

Everyone remains quiet for a moment, allowing me to digest this latest news. Shock turns to rage in a heartbeat. How dare they threaten me and the family that I love? How FUCKING DARE they think that they will destroy ME to avenge those bastards! Over my undead goddamn body!!!

My tone sharp I ask the group “Has the Council realized that I’ve escaped?” Adam responds with “They weren’t surprised in the least; they’ve been expecting you to vanish on them eventually.” Before he can say anything else, Devlin bursts into the room. “Bobby’s clan was attacked on their way here to meet with us. So far, Bobby estimates he’s lost at least eighty vamps. He’s asking for back up.” Adam growls under his breath. “Devlin, we barely have any back up left!” Ray, his voice calm, cuts in. “Mikey, darling? Could you please transport thirty guards to Bobby for me?” Mikey nods as she slices a hand in the air Jedi-style. “All done, Ray dear.” As Devlin leaves the room, Mikey answers my questions without my even asking them. “I asked Frankie to unbind my magick the moment the two families attacked us, Dam. He managed to curb the darkness within me, at least for the time being. I would’ve gone to the Dark realm to bring us the soldiers, but you and I know both know that I am not as strong of a leader as you are. I’m sorry that it falls to you to do the task yourself, darling.”

I take a deep breath, trying my hardest to reign in my emotions. “I will go to the Dark realm immediately. I have reestablished my mental link with Tommy Joe. It will be easier to focus on speaking only with him for now.” Adam nods once, his face concerned. Tommy gives me a brief smile when I think to him “Is that okay with you, babes?” Tommy thinks back in reply “Just like old times, honey. I’ve missed sharing my grey matter with you.”

Ray asks, his voice cracking with stress. “Who oversees the Dark realm now, Damian? Are they an ally of yours?” Mikey answers before I can. “The Dark realm is run by King Stephan. He and Dam share an…interesting past. It may take a little while for Damian to gain control.” Mikey’s eyebrows arch at her own double entendre. “Think you are UP to it, Damian?”

I smirk at Mikey. “Of course I am, my dear. But first, you must unbind me. I cannot show up to the Dark realm with only these minimal powers to fight with.” I watch everyone in the room tense, watch Ray and Adam unconsciously wrap an arm around Mikey and Tommy. After a few seconds, Mikey nods then stands up, moving to stand in front of me. I hear Ray growl under his breath as Mikey places her hands on my temples, the same way that she did so long ago when she gave me power to travel between the realms. She strings together a few sentences, her sweet voice full of strength.

A burning sensation begins at the soles of my feet, moving slowly upward. I close my eyes against the sting, but I cannot hold in my cry of pain as I am suddenly engulfed in a first wave of evil power. I feel my skin begin to smoke, feel my fingers clench and unclench against the chair arms. I feel the breath push out of my lungs, to be replaced with a fiery mist. The moment Mikey finishes her chant, my eyes snap open, causing her to take an unconscious step away from me. No one needs to tell me that my eyes are now pure black, my fingers turning blue as the power settles there, waiting to be used.

I look up into Mikey’s beautiful face. “Thanks, sweetie.” My voice has lowered three octaves into a deep baritone which rumbles through my chest. “I owe you one.” I turn to Tommy Joe, who is seated next to me. Tommy’s hair fills with static as I run my fingers through his bangs, pulling a little. “Hey hot stuff. Missed me?” I fight the urge to yank him into my arms, to run away into the night with him never to return. Tommy returns my look with a look of lust that the entire table can feel the heat of. My evil side always brought out the horny side of that boy, even if he would never admit it out loud.

It feels SO fucking good to be evil again! I feel so free. Why the fuck did I even try to fight it all this time? This is where I belong, this is who I am. I just hope the family doesn’t regret what they’ve unleashed on the world…

With a low growl, I demand “I want a final goodbye with each of you before I go.” My head snaps towards Frankie. “Except for you, shorty. We have nothing to say to one another. Send Gerard my love.” Frankie jumps out of his seat to be immediately restrained by Adam and Ray. They drag him kicking and screaming threats at me to the door and push him out of it, Ray barking out “Was that really necessary, Dam?” I throw my head back and laugh out loud. “Of course it was, Ray! That little bastard hates my guts! Did you want me to kiss him goodbye?”

Mikey makes her way back over to me, placing a gentle hand on my arm. “Be careful, Damian. Don’t lose yourself. If you do, we lose you. We can’t have that happen.” Without looking at Ray I bark out “Don’t look, Ray.” I then stand and take Mikey in my arms, holding her tight against me. Every instinct in my body is demanding that I sink my fangs into that gorgeous neck, drink deep of Mikey’s power. I kiss Mikey instead, our lips coming together in a searing kiss. When we part, I tell her “I love you, gorgeous.” When Mikey responds in kind, I continue. “One last thing, Mikey. Keep Devlin safe for me. He reminds me so much of our Vin…”

Mikey’s eyes fill with tears as she nods once, stepping away to the back of the room. Ray then steps forward, spontaneously wrapping his arms around me. “Thank you, Damian. Thank you for saving the family, for losing your soul for us. We love you.”

I surprise Ray by kissing his cheek while returning his bear hug. “You may not hear me say this again for a long, long time. I love you and your family. Keep all of you safe for me.” I feel the evil growing stronger in me, like a low hum under my skin. Instinctively, I know I do not have much longer. I pull out of Ray’s arms, smirking at him as he nods, moves over to Mikey and pulls her with him out of the room.

Only Adam and Tommy are left to say goodbye to.

I make my way over to Adam first. He is fighting his wolf, which wants to get out and tear me to pieces. I pull him into my arms, holding on tight. I hear Adam’s muffled plea of “Please, don’t hurt him, Damian.” I instantly know that he is referring to Tommy. “Hurt me instead. I’ll take it, I’ll take it all. Just don’t harm him, I beg of you. I love you.”

I pull back and look deep into Adam’s eyes. “I’ll try, Adam. You know this version of me needs Tommy like I need blood. I can’t promise that I’ll stay away from him, that I won’t hurt him. But I’ll try my hardest, love.” I grab Adam’s chin and pull him into a fierce kiss, one that leaves Adam breathless. “I love and adore you, Adam. Never forget it.” Adam nods once, but I feel the unspoken tension between us.

As I step around Adam towards Tommy, I feel myself complete the transition into my evil self. I stop short, considering two possible scenarios. Part of me wants to grab Tommy, force him to his knees and make him suck my cock until I explode. Another part of me wants to whip the living hell out of him, to watch his blood pool at his feet. It doesn’t help that Tommy is refusing to cower, standing up to me with his chin jutting forward, eyes locked on mine. I reach my hand around Tommy’s throat, squeezing until I hear his lungs empty of air. “So you want to challenge me, Thomas? Do you think that’s wise, considering I could snap you in two without thinking about it?” I release his throat a fraction, feel Adam move behind me, his hands gripping my arms in a vise like grip. “Let him go, Dam. Tommy, stand down.” I see Tommy’s eyes flutter, see him lower them submissively. Lust slams through me to settle in my stomach as I remove my hand from his throat. “Tommy Joe. Look at me.” Tommy responds to the authority in my voice, his eyes locking into mine. “You know I love you, right?” Tommy nods once. “I love you too, Damian. Adam, please let go of him. I want to hug him goodbye.” Adam drops his hands, moving backwards a step, waiting for what happens next.

I wrap my arms passionately around Tommy. “Kiss me baby.” I lean in, our teeth clashing as we both try to deepen the kiss. I lick into Tommy’s mouth, feel his soft lips on mine. I hear Tommy whimper when the kiss comes to its natural end. I pull back enough to whisper “Oh, the things I want to do to you, TJ. I want to hear you moan my name while I take you apart. I want to breed you. I want to tear you down and build you back up again.” Tommy shivers while I hear Adam’s sharp intake of breath as he realizes exactly what he’s up against. I love Adam, I really do—but he knows I love and want Tommy more.

I back away from both vamps, my hands beginning to shake. I must get the fuck out of here, before I do something that we will all regret.

I look from one to the other. “Watch your backs. You never know when I might stop by for a midnight snack.” I close my eyes, focus on the Dark realm and disappear.

I end up in the rose garden that surrounds the back of the castle. Mikey planted these black roses the year that we got together. I can’t help smirking, thinking that Mikey would be happy to know that they are still here.

“Damian! Fancy meeting you here! We figured you were gone to the Light realm for good this time.”

I slowly turn towards the vampire standing behind me. I bow low, my right hand making a sweeping motion in front of me. “Stephan! I was just about to have the chamberlain announce my presence.” Stephan glares at me, as if he doubts my words. “I’ve been looking forward to seeing you again.”

Stephan grunts then turns to walk into the castle. I follow, a footstep behind. Stephan always did stand on protocol, and the last thing that I want to do is to anger him the second I arrive.

Once in the throne room, Stephan slowly climbs the stairs to the dais, his eyes meeting mine as he sits on Mikey’s throne. I will always think of it as Mikey’s, no matter who the current King is. I stand at the foot of the stairs, waiting for Stephan to speak.

“And this unexpected visit of yours doesn’t have a single thing to do with the war going on between the Toro, Aprile, and Dante families, now does it, Damian?” Ah, so Stephan is as well connected as ever, to know my business before I even open my mouth to speak!

“My Lord, I have missed you. It’s as simple as that. As you can sense, any residual effects from my being gone so long in the Light realm have worn away. I stand before you, the evil Damian you know and love.” I bow low before the throne, a smirk on my face. “As for any petty bickering between old enemies…” I hold my hand out in front of my face, my eyes carefully looking over my nails in a stance of nonchalance. “…it does not concern me in the slightest.”

“Oh really, Dam?” Stephan’s eyes narrow. “Two families have vowed vengeance against you, and you dismiss the fact as easily as if you were ordering breakfast from a tavern whore!” I turn my attention to my other hand, tutting out loud when I find a nail that is slightly crooked. “Or have you turned soft?”

I throw back my head and laugh. “Me, turn soft?” Against all sense, I begin to ascend the stairs without permission, coming to a stop mere inches away from Stephan. “What a question, my Lord! The real question here is why, after so damn long, do these idiots waste their time and mine on revenge long grown cold?”

“On your knees, Damian.”

Once upon a time, that command from Stephan would have been met with my instant compliance. I was once Stephan’s favorite, sharing rooms with him, eating with him. I became his most trusted confidant. Is this what I’m going to have to do to worm my way back into his good graces? Kneel on the floor like a common dog begging for his master’s attention?

I try another tactic. I run the backs of my fingers down the side of Stephan’s handsome face, my voice seductive as I whisper “Wouldn’t you rather take me to your rooms, my King? Like old times…”

“KNEEL AT MY FEET LIKE THE DOG YOU ARE, DAMIAN! Do you think you can just walk back into my court, that everything will be as it was between us? Do you think I’m that stupid?” Stephan stares me down, his finger pointing to the dais at his feet. “Sit up and beg to stay within my realm, Damian.”

Every fiber of my being is demanding that I turn on my heel and storm out. Who does this piece of shit think he is? Doesn’t he know me, know my reputation? Doesn’t he know what I’m capable of?

Just as I start to turn away, I hear Tommy’s voice in my head. “Kneel, Damian. Win his trust, so you can destroy him. Do as he wants you to do. Later you will hold his severed head in your bloody hands as you take over the Dark realm.”

I take a deep breath. Without looking directly at Stephan, I move to stand next to the throne, my body slowly lowering until I’m kneeling on the hard surface below me. I keep my voice low as I beg “Please, King Stephan. May your humble servant stay within your realm, to obey and serve you as you wish.”

Stephan runs his hand through my long locks, gripping hard on my curls and yanking my head till I’m looking deep into his eyes. “I knew I could make you sit up and beg, dog. Let’s see how long it’ll take for you to prove you are a loyal companion.”

Chapter Text

I’m not crazy I’m just a little unwell
I know, right now you can’t tell
But stay awhile and maybe you’ll see a different side of me
I’m not crazy, I’m just a little impaired I know, right now you don’t care
But soon enough you’re gonna think of me and how I used to be…me
Unwell—Matchbox 20

Hello friend! Even though I have managed to escape my terrible fate and rejoin with my darling family to take down our enemy, I still have a tale to tell. To understand who I really am, I must continue to fill you in on my past. Please allow me to tell you more about myself.

Madness has a few definitions. It is the state of being mentally ill, extremely foolish behavior, or a state of frenzied or chaotic behavior. While no one has ever had the balls to apply the first definition when describing me, the last two definitions certainly have been used in connection with me. This part of the tale that I am sharing with you today certainly proves both points admirably.

Madness is a funny thing. It sneaks up on you while you’re not looking. No one wants to be mad; it just happens. My long fall down the magick rabbit hole is an excellent example of this.

From the very moment that Mikey placed her grimoire in front of me, I became obsessed with the world of magick. I slowly started spending more and more time in the Dark realm, learning magick spells and potions. Mikey would give me time to learn a handful of pages, then she would quiz me on what I had learned.

Slowly, I turned my back on the light realm. It isn’t something that I’m proud of, nor is it something that I set out to do. In the beginning, I would spend nights in the throne room with Vin and Juliana, gambling and socializing until dawn, then I would head to the Dark realm for a few hours of reading. But slowly over time, I started sneaking away early from the throne room, excuse after excuse pouring from my lips like honey. Since I managed to keep up my duties as Juliana’s advisor, she rarely commented if I bowed out early on certain evenings. The person that noticed, and therefore began to keep a close eye on me, was Vin.

The reasons that I refused to share my connection to the Dark realm with Vin are purely selfish on my part. I loved being able to visit Mikey whenever I wanted to. It was the perfect getaway. I would simply pop up in her bedroom, the throne room, the study or the gardens in search of Mikey. I loved my private time with her, either fucking each other’s brains out, or simply cuddling on the couch.

I became addicted to the practice of Magick. The more I learned, the more I craved. Looking back now, I realize that the high I was getting from it was being quietly fed by Mikey herself. If she thought that I had stepped away from my studies for too long, she would call to me from the Dark realm, or visit me in the throne room in the Light realm. On her lips were sweet reminders to return my attention to my “other great love.”

Vin began questioning me on my whereabouts around two months after I started my trips to the Dark realm. Of course I was full of excuses: stating that I needed alone time, that I was having flings behind Mikey’s back—anything to get Vin off my back. In the beginning he believed my request for alone time, but it didn’t take him long to doubt my ‘fling’ excuse, since he could see how devoted I was to Mikey.

I ended up going to Juliana to ask for a leave of absence from the realm. I told her that I needed to visit far away relatives. She immediately agreed. “You have been nothing short of a miracle the way you have helped me run the court, Damian. Of course you deserve time away! Please come back soon, though, Dam. I will miss you very much!” I bowed low before Juliana, thanking her for her kindness and understanding. Little did I know that Vin was standing not far behind me, listening to our conversation.

Vin bursts into my room a few minutes later, rage in his eyes. He blurts out “So you’re going away, father?” He steps closer to me. “Where are you going? And why haven’t you invited me to join you? Or have you tired of me?”

My eyes lock on his for a moment, hoping he doesn’t see my lie for what it is. “I’m going away for a short trip, Vin.” Vin turns and storms his way to my bedroom, yelling out “But you have yet to prepare. Where is your suitcase, father?”

I feel Mikey pull me towards the Dark realm, hear her whisper in my ear. “Bring him with you, Dam. I’ll keep the boy entertained while you study. I’m sure he will love it here.”

Do I really want to give my secret to my son, give up my sanctuary so I can spend more time with him? I hear the grimoire call to me, feel my fingers itch to turn its pages. Mikey tries once more, coaxing “We’ll be a real family, Dam. I want to see both of you. Please, sweetheart?”

I ignore Mikey and ask Vin to join me again in the front parlor. His rage has continued to grow, his hands flexing into fists repeatedly to purge some of his rage. “Son, I didn’t lie to you. I AM taking a trip. I’m sorry that I didn’t invite you to travel with me. But you see, I’m going to visit relatives in…”

The sound of thunder rumbles through the room. Lightning bolts crackle down from the ceiling, and the room becomes cold enough to see your breath. Vin shivers, his eyes locked on the ceiling as he takes in the light show with a look of disbelief.

Mikey suddenly appears in the middle of the room in a skintight leather dress and high heeled boots. The front of the dress is laced so tightly that it looks as if it will explode open if she takes a deep breath. She has her hands on her hips, with a look of rage that easily matches Vin’s.

“Damian, you are not being fair to Vin!” Mikey moves to stand at Vin’s side, her expression taking on a motherly look of pride. “He deserves to know the truth! What were you going to do, leave him behind to miss you, when he can easily stay with us? You’re being cruel…”

“Mikey!” I bellow, my own rage rising. “It’s my decision to make the trip alone if I wish! Why are you always pushing your own agenda…”

Mikey wraps an arm around Vin, pulling him close. “Then I will take him back with me. It’s about time that he sees what he will someday inherit as our son.” The next second, Mikey and Vin disappear. Shocked, a deep growl rumbling my chest, I picture the Dark realm’s throne room in my mind and disappear.

When I arrive, I am alone in the throne room. I spend the next half hour pacing from room to room, through the gardens and then walking the battlements that surround the castle. Another hour passes before I return to Mikey’s private study to find Mikey and Vin seated in the overstuffed chairs by the fireplace.

“…and that’s when I became Queen” Mikey finishes, her expression soft and loving for one so evil.

Every muscle in my body clenches tight as I growl through closed teeth “Mikey! I need to see you NOW!”

Vin shoots me a look of confusion as Mikey stands gracefully, taking my hand and pulling me out of the room, saying over her shoulder “Make yourself at home, Vin. Your father and I will be right back.”

Mikey drags me back to the throne room. Once there, she disentangles herself from my grip, her most charming smile on her face. “Now Damian, I know you are mad at me, but Vin…”

“VIN IS MY CONCERN, NOT YOURS, MIKEY!” Mikey wrinkles up her nose in a sign of distain, her arms crossing her chest in a stance of defiance. “If I wanted Vin here, I would’ve brought him myself! I wanted private time to study, to be alone with your grimoire. The last thing I wanted was to tell him about the Dark realm…”

“Oh, so my realm isn’t good enough for your son, Damian?” Mikey moves forward, standing toe to toe with me. “I thought that since the two of us are together, we could be a real family. You are always saying that a family is your only true desire. Well, I’ve always wanted a son too, someone to pass the realm to. Vin is a fine boy, he will make a wonderful King, with the right training.”

I shake the hair off my forehead, my hands on my hips. “I wasn’t even sure if I was going to tell him about the Dark realm! Now he’s going to want to come here all the time…”

“Is that so bad, Dam? Is it too much to let the boy spend time with us? He’s lonely, he misses you! He told me so himself. He wants us to be his parents, wants to learn more about what it means to be a vampire. Would you really deny him that, Damian? The one who claims to love him the most?”

Once again, I feel the grimoire calling to me. I immediately forget my anger, my full attention diverted towards the study. Mikey realizes I have once again heard the grimoire’s call, a smirk crossing her beautiful face. “The book is calling you, isn’t it? It wants you to continue your studies. Go, darling…” Mikey gently grabs my arm, pulling me from the room to return to her study, where Vin is waiting for us. “I’ll fill Vin in on your studies, my love. You go, have a glass of blood and get back to learning magick. We will both be here when you need a break…” The moment the grimoire is in sight, I walk directly over to it, taking a seat in front of it without a word. Mikey pours me a cup of blood, placing it down next to my wrist. With a kiss to my forehead, she softly comments “Come, Vin. Let’s continue our conversation in the throne room. Your father needs to concentrate.” I barely register the two of them leaving the room.

I have no idea how much time has passed when the last candle in the room suddenly snuffs itself out, leaving me in darkness. I stretch my arms over my head, feel every bone in my back crack and groan from sitting in one place for so long. I carefully stand, grateful for my vampire vision as I make my way to the doorway. From the hall I hear Mikey softly murmur “Spell, Damian?”

I close my eyes and recite a few strings of words. A fire roars to life in the fireplace as candles float through the air from a box in the corner. Each candle comes to rest inside its own holder. I mumble a few more words, and each candle lights itself. The room fills with light, the logs in the fireplace crackling and sizzling as they burn.

“Excellent, Dam! I knew you could do it!” As I open my eyes, Mikey wraps me in a tight hug, a kiss landing on my cheek. “Now, darling, let’s go visit with Vin. I have him settled in his own room on the second floor. I’ll have blood sent up for us, and you can fill us in on your studies.”

The pattern repeats for a month. I spend hours in the study, absorbing as much as I can from Mikey’s grimoire, before joining Mikey and Vin for family time. We laugh, drink blood and discuss everything from the weather to Mikey’s problems with her court. Mikey has gone out of her way to make sure that Vin feels valued and loved by both of us. This pattern continues until late one May evening.

I hear screaming coming from the throne room. I bolt up out of my chair, running as fast as I can to see what the trouble is. The sight that greets me sends me into a blind rage, my eyes refusing to believe what they are seeing.

My brother Alberto is lying on the floor, Vin’s body covering him, holding him down. Alberto continues to try to yell around Vin’s wrist, which Vin has shoved into his mouth. Mikey stands over Vin, cooing encouragement and instructions to Vin, who is forcing his blood into my brother’s mouth. Eventually, Alberto passes out.

“What the FUCK?” I attempt to grab Vin, to pull him off Alberto, but Mikey’s faster. She mumbles a few sentences in Egyptian, which has me slamming into the closest wall. With a growl I realize that I cannot move, my rage growing as I am helpless to help my brother against my own son.

Mikey stops Vin after a few minutes. “That’s enough, darling. When he wakes, he’ll be just like us.” Vin seals the wound on his wrist, sitting up with a look of satisfaction on his face. I watch in disbelief as Vin begins to stroke his hand down Alberto’s face, see the look of longing and love he gives my brother. I feel like throwing up.

Mikey slowly walks over to me, an evil smirk on her beautiful face. “Are you going to behave now, Dam?” I growl again but the sound is cut off by Mikey sweeping her hand in front of me. “The deed’s done, darling. No need to get yourself all worked up over nothing…” I think through a few magick sentences until I manage to find the right words. Within seconds I’m peeling myself off the wall slowly while my jaw unlocks. “NOTHING to get WORKED UP about? THAT’S MY BROTHER ON THE FLOOR! HOW CAN YOU CARE SO LITTLE FOR SOMEONE WHO MEANS SO MUCH TO ME, MIKEY!” I cross the room, kneeling next to my unconscious brother. I refuse to make eye contact with Vin as I lift my brother in my arms. “I’m taking him back to the Light realm. If either of you tries to follow me, I will kill you. Just leave us alone.” Holding my brother tighter within my arms, I blink and we both disappear.

It takes a few weeks for Alberto to wrap his mind around what has happened to him. I teach him how to hunt, how to take care of himself. I teach him all the things that I had wished that Justine would’ve taught to me. When he seems to be able to take care of himself, I tell him I will return then head to the Dark realm. I find the Dark court in session, with both Vin and Mikey on the dais, listening to a vampire air out his grievances before the court. Noticing me among the crowd, Mikey cuts off the vampire, instantly giving her decision then dismissing the court.

Moving towards me, her arms outstretched, Mikey smiles as she says “Welcome back, my love…”

I growl out “You and Vin, study. NOW.” I turn on my heel and head to the study without waiting to see if they will follow. Once there, I pace the room, my gaze purposely avoiding the grimoire in the back of the room.

“Darling, we missed you” is spoken over “How’s Alberto, father?” I ignore them both for a moment, my back turned to them as I stare into the fireplace. “Mikey, we are through. I cannot continue to live this way. I’ve spoken to Alberto; he wants to stay in the Light realm. I will live there with him. You can keep Vin and your magick, I never want to see either of you again.” I feel Mikey place a hand on my shoulder, hear Vin protest my words, feel the pull from the grimoire in the corner. I drown them all out. “Vin can be your King, the two of you are perfect for each other. I hope you enjoy each other’s company.” I close my eyes and head back to the Light realm.

Mikey beats me back. I find her standing against the fireplace in my bedroom, hand on her hip. “You think that’s all it takes to get rid of us, darling? You find yourself unhappy with a situation, and you think we will simply just go away, never to return? How little you know us, Dam. We will NEVER let you go…”

“How could you encourage Vin to turn Alberto? How could you take my brother’s life from him, without a single thought to the consequences? Alberto doesn’t love Vin! And now he is stuck with him as his maker! You and Vin are no different than Justine! You simply do as you please, without thought as to anyone but yourselves! I can’t even stand to be near you anymore!” Before I can move, I find myself floating in the air three feet off the ground. “Shut your damn mouth, Damian, and listen to what I have to tell you!” I try muttering magickal spells and sentences to no avail. “Vin and I love you. Vin has been in love with Alberto for a long time. He just wants the same happiness that the two of us have.” I snort out in disbelief at that sentence. “I know you love me, Damian. You are simply mad at me for helping Vin find his true love. In time you will realize…”

“…I will find even more reasons to despise you, Mikes, since you continue to act any way you please in this relationship…”

“…I am QUEEN, Dam! I will act according to my will, and my will alone. You will just have to get in line and…”

“…and what, be your slave? You TOLD ME you would NEVER make me your slave, Mikes! You said we are equal in this relationship…”

“…behave yourself, know your place! I love and adore you, but you need to know when to stay in line, darling! I’ve given you everything, and this is how you treat me…”

“…and it looks as if that was nothing but a pile of dog shit…”

“STOP!!!” Mikey breaks the spell and I drop to my ass on the floor, gasping for breath. “I cannot help how I am, Damian. You forget that I am EVIL, you forget that I oversee the Dark realm. You insist on seeing me as this pretty, demure creature that has pure intentions. You keep forgetting whom you are dealing with!"

I stand and face Mikey, rubbing my sore ass. “I haven’t forgotten anything, Mikey. YOU are the forgetful one. I am NOT EVIL, nor WILL I EVER BE! I may have Justine’s blood flowing through my veins, but that alone does not make me evil. I’m still a good person. I could NEVER do what I saw you and Vin do to Alberto, turning someone against their will like that. I could never hurt another person, Mikey, for selfish reasons. I’m not evil like you, and I never will be. It’s time we part ways for good.”

Mikey walks up on me until we are nose to nose. Her eyes turn black, her lips pull back in a snarl. I feel electricity shoot through my body, making my skin smoke. Mikey glares into my eyes as she says in her most evil tone “You will NEVER leave me, Damian. YOU ARE MINE. I keep what’s mine, until I decide I don’t want it anymore. And I want YOU…”

“I am NOT your MATE, Mikey! I am simply the vampire that warms your bed…” I gasp out loud when Mikey lunges forward, sinking her teeth into my neck in a mating bite. I try to push her off, but she is too strong for me. I feel her fangs sink deep in my neck, feel the mating link begin to form. In my mind, I hear Mikey whispering in her mind spell after spell as my strength is sapped from my body. “NO!” I scream, trying even harder to push Mikey off me. I feel a sensation that I have never felt before—a link forms between us, tying our souls together. I don’t want this to happen, I never wanted a mate, but it is happening regardless of what I want. Mikey sucks even harder until I feel blood vessels break in my neck. Just before I begin to feel woozy from blood loss, Mikey pulls back, my blood on her teeth and lips. I begin to slide down to the floor, my eyes closing against the monster that has tied me to her for eternity.

Mikey picks me up in her arms as if I weigh nothing. Against my closed eyes, I feel the woosh of wind as the two of us travel back to the Dark realm. Upon arrival I instantly feel satin and leather under my cheek, realizing without opening my eyes that I have been gently laid on Mikey’s bed. Seconds later, I feel the cool touch of Mikey’s wrist against my lips, feel her blood seep into my mouth. Once again, I try to fight back, trying to shake my head while pulling away from her, but it’s to no avail. Mikey’s evil blood floods my mouth and my senses.

Since the first moment I met Mikey, I have refused to drink her blood. Knowing how evil she really is, I have always refused to share in that evil. The only time that I have taken her evil into myself was when she gave me the power to travel between the realms. She has offered many times, but I have always resisted the invitation.

A rush of power shoots through my body. Before I know it, I am free to move, pulling more of Mikey’s wrist into my mouth and gulping down her sweet blood. I have never tasted anything so sweet before! I feel evil begin to course through my body, flooding my senses.

When Mikey finally pulls back, there is triumph in her eyes. “We are mated now, darling. You are mine for eternity. We are truly a family now.” I feel a hum under my skin, as if I can hear my blood sing.

“My blood only gives you so much power and evil, darling. You must find the rest on your own. You will find yourself craving more of my blood, more of my evil over time. As you continue your magickal studies, the evil in your system will grow. Why do you think I was always pushing you to study? I enchanted the grimoire to call out to you, to entice you into wanting to learn.”

“I want more” I demand, my voice several octaves lower than normal. The evil in my blood is now reverberating through my voice.

“Later, my love. Right now, the two of us need to find Vin. I’m sure he will be pleased that his father has just joined the dark side.”

The two things that I never wanted to be—evil and mated—have just happened to me without my consent. Mikey has set my feet on the path, and I will never be the same vampire. I follow Mikey out of her bedroom in search of our son, an evil smirk on my face.

Chapter Text

The moment I open my eyes the next evening, a wave of regret takes over me. Regret that I wasn’t more forceful in rejecting Mikey. Regret that I was now mated to her for an eternity. Regret that I didn’t prepare Vin for life in the Dark realm. But most of all, I regret the evil blood that is now flowing through my veins.

I begin to physically and mentally pull away from Mikey, turning all my attention to Mikey’s spell books. I finish the grimoire in record time, feeling a rush of satisfaction as I replace it on the bookshelves. I stand back and called out to the books on the shelves “Who’s next?” A book bound in snakeskin flies into my open hand, ready to be read.

Time flies by without rhyme or reason. Vin returns to the Light realm to spend time with Alberto. Mikey repeatedly tries to capture my attention, even going as far as to try to distract me by undressing right next to me in the study. Without even raising my head to look in her directly, I push her away. “I’m busy” I blurt out, moving even closer to the book in front of me.

“But Damian, I miss you! Please put the book aside for a while…” I mumble a few words which send Mikey flying out the study room door naked, directly into a wall. “I SAID…” I snarl out, my eyes still refusing to raise from the page in front of me. “…I’m BUSY!” A few more mumbled words and the door slams shut behind her, the sound of the door locking loud in the silent room as I make my point known in the only way I know how to. I yell out, my voice more of a growl than anything else “YOU WANTED ME TO STUDY, SO I’M STUDYING! LEAVE ME ALONE!” Without a second thought to the situation, I return to my book.

Little did I know that, by doing what I just did, I started a battle of wills that wouldn’t easily be won.

Mikey starts with hiding my spell book when I take a short break to drink some blood. After storming around the study searching for the book, I retaliate by removing her throne from the throne room as Mikey is in the process of sitting on it, sending it to the Light realm and her to the floor in a heap. When I attempt to start studying from another spell book, Mikey makes them ALL disappear. In response, I send Mikey to a jail cell in Egypt.

This type of stupid one-upmanship continues until Mikey realizes that I have learned just enough magick to cause her considerable trouble. I get the idea that Mikey is frustrated regarding how long it is taking for the rest of my evil side to appear. So, she does the thing she does best—instead of trying to constantly outdo me, she changes tact and tries a form of persuasion instead.

One Friday afternoon a tall blonde man walks into the study. Thinking that he is simply lost, I raise my eyes from the page to inform him where he is, before becoming captivated by a pair of beautiful blue eyes. The spell book forgotten, I sit back in my seat and cross my arms, asking “Are you lost, handsome?” A smirk crosses his face. “Sorry to bother you, but I am looking for Damian. Mikey told me that I would find him here.” I feel a jolt of warmth as the man unabashedly gives me the once over. “I’m Damian. May I ask why you are inquiring about me?” The blonde man’s smile grows as he answers “I’m Andrew. The Queen has just instructed me to show you a good time here in the Dark realm. She says you have yet to see the fun parts of the realm.”

“Is that so?” I stare down Andrew, suddenly intrigued. “And what makes you think I want to have a good time, Andrew?” Andrew throws back his head and laughs. “See, that right there!” I wrinkle up my nose in distain. “Mikey said you’d fight me, that you would pussy out! She says you are turning into an old man with all your books and spells. I bet you can’t even remember what fun really is!” Andrew throws his hands on his hips, one knee thrust forward as if daring me to prove him wrong. “Come on, Damian. Spend one evening with me. Let’s see if we can find the young man buried inside.” The next thing I know, I am being dragged out of the study door, a strong arm around my waist. We pass Mikey in a corridor outside the throne room. “Have fun my darling!” Mikey steps in front of me, hands grasping my shoulders. In a seductive voice she whispers “Tonight, all bets are off. You’re free to do anything…” her eyes sparkle with an evil gleam “…OR anyone you want! Enjoy yourself, darling.” With a quick kiss to my lips and a wink to Andrew, she moves out of our way, exiting into the throne room.

“What did she mean by that?” I wonder out loud. Andrew shoots me a look of disbelief at my confusion. “She just gave you a free pass, Damian! You’re one lucky bastard!”

Before I know it, we are entering a large, beautifully ornate theatre. The atmosphere in the theatre is jovial. Vampires call out to each other as an orchestra plays a bawdy tune. Andrew and I are escorted to our seats in the Queen’s reserved box just to the right of the stage, cups of blood in our hands. When I inquire what the play is, Andrew’s eyebrows raise, his face breaking out in a huge smirk. “Oh, there is no play tonight, Damian. We are here for the punishments!” Before I can ask any further questions, the stage curtains are pulled back to reveal a vampire standing in the middle of a blood-soaked stage, the scent driving the crowd into a frenzy. The orchestra stops playing, and everyone reluctantly settles down as the vampire asks for silence.

“Good evening, vamps! We are indeed in for a treat tonight! We have the largest group of miscreants and law breakers from all corners of the Dark realm to entertain us. The Vampaire has graciously allowed their punishments to be experienced by this lucky crowd this evening! So, without further ado, send out the first group of law breakers!”

A group of eight raggedy dressed humans in chains are pushed into the back of the stage. They include young and old, male and female. A St. Andrew’s cross is rolled out on the stage, along with three carts filled with instruments of torture. A group of the Queen’s soldiers keep the group of humans from running away as they panic, their eyes wide with fright. The host vampire calls out “The oldest first, please.”

A man of about sixty years of age is pushed towards the cross. The soldiers make him face the cross, his hands yanked over his head. Shackles close on his wrists and ankles, the clothes ripped from his body. I feel a shiver run through my body, causing me to sit at the end of my seat. Andrew notices but makes no comment, other than the wide smile on his face.

The vampire calls out to the audience once again. “We asked you to write your name on a piece of paper when you arrived. I now have those papers, and I will choose a name. Once your name is chosen, you will be escorted to the stage to hand out the punishment.” A guard hands the vamp a large bowl. The crowd is suddenly quiet as the vamp chooses a piece of folded paper. Opening the paper, he smiles at the audience as he calls out “Damian Lavelli!”

I stare at Andrew, my body frozen in fear. Me, torture a slave? Yes, I tortured Matteo and Marcus, but that was a personal vendetta. I wanted them to feel the same pain that they caused me. But a slave, someone who has never done anything to me? I can’t do this!

When I do not respond immediately, the vamp calls out “Where are you, sir?” Andrew immediately stands up, pointing at me. “He’s here! He needs a little encouragement!” The crowd roars as one the Queen’s guard makes his way up the steps to grip my arm, practically yanking me out of my seat. With a light push he pushes me down the stairs and onto the stage. The vampire smiles at me as he motions to the carts to the left of the slave. “Here, good sir! Use what you like on this swine! He deserves everything he gets for murdering his Mistress!”

The slave begins to beg as I move towards the carts in a daze. For a split second, I am repulsed at the very idea of using these methods of torture. But as my hands begin to run over all kinds of implements, the evil in my blood beginning to hum loudly. After a moment or two, my eyes fall on one of my favorite instruments of punishment—a cat o’ nine tails.

Some members of the crowd call out their displeasure at the idea of my using such a tame instrument of torture, but the vampire next to me waves them to silence. “Good ladies and gentlemen, you don’t really expect him to start off with the hook, do you? Give the vamp a chance to warm up first!” The vampire nods at me before moving out of the way, ensuring he doesn’t accidently get hit by a wild swing.

I walk closer to the slave, within striking distance. I watch him shiver and shake, hear his begging gaining volume with each passing moment. I feel the evil in my veins roar to life as I let go of all conscious thought, my arm swinging back for a second, all my weight behind the first throw. Long red welts immediately rise between the slave’s shoulder blades, the sound of leather hitting skin loud in the theatre. I hear members of the audience moan, the sound drowning out the slave’s sounds of pain.

I slowly lay hit after hit upon the slave, until I finally break skin. The smell alone is enough to drive me into a frenzy. I make eye contact with a guard, who gives me an evil smile.

I make my way back over to the carts, picking up the very first thing I find—a whip with six strings made of razor blades. I return to my victim, stepping even closer to him than before. I lay down six quick hits, hear the crowd cheer as more blood trickles down the slave’s back and legs.

I have no idea how long I am on stage. I went through at least twelve different instruments of torture, including breaking the slave’s fingers by using thumb screws. This really seemed to delight the audience, who were jaded from seeing nothing but extreme bloodletting as punishment. My work was more refined. I broke bones with a hammer, I nailed long spikes into his arms and legs. I didn’t know who I was anymore, just some beast getting off on the pain and torture of a nameless slave. The crowd egged me on, screaming out ideas every time I returned to the carts for more instruments. Little did I know at the time, but I would become an expert in torture, using various forms of punishments over the years, the very worst experienced by my own beloved Tommy Joe many years in the future.

The vampire yelled from the side of the stage “This is the most creative torture I have ever seen! We’ll have to have him back in the future!” The crowd screamed in agreement, then began to chant my name as I walked over to the cart for my last choice of the evening. I picked up a heavy chain with a large metal hook on the end. Moving behind my victim, I swung the hook over my head a few times before letting it fly, the hook sinking into the base of the slave’s skull. His head dropped forward as he finally died, blood still flowing on the stage around me.

The crowd was silent for a second, then the screams, cheering and clapping began. The vamp moved to stand next to me, one hand raising my arm over my head, the other hand pointing to me as the volume grew. The vampire then congratulated me on a job well done, and I was escorted by the Queen’s guard off stage, after I waved at the audience, of course! I was given a large glass of blood and told I could return to my seat.

Once there, Andrew looks at me in amazement. “Damian! I didn’t know you had it in you! That was PERFECTION!” He pulls me into a hug, ignoring my blood covered clothing. “I could HEAR the evil in your blood sing all the way up here! I have been here many times, and I never saw anyone as methodical as you were tonight! You should be proud of yourself! Just think! The Queen told me she was worried about you, that you didn’t show any evil inclinations, even after the blood she gave you at your mating. If she could only see you now! She would be SO proud!”

I wanted more, wanted to hurt every slave on that stage. I wanted to bathe in their blood, rip their bodies apart while they screamed. I had never felt so high, so uninhibited. As each slave was punished, my senses were driven higher and higher, until I found myself standing, pulling on Andrew’s arm. “Let’s go see what other kind of trouble we can get into, Andrew! I can’t sit still a moment longer!” Andrew dutifully stands then escorts me out of the theatre. Once outside, he gives me his most evil smirk, his eyes lighting up. “C’mon Damian! I’m craving a warm body and a meal. Let’s go!” We hail a carriage to take us to the outskirts of town.

We disembark at the end of a darkened lane, the only lights coming from the windows of a lavish three-story mansion at the end of the lane. When I inquire where we are going, Andrew simply points me towards the mansion, a gleam in his eyes. When he knocks on the door, a young black female slave opens the door, eyes to the floor. From the back of the room, I hear a woman call out “Andrew! It’s been too long since you’ve you graced us with your presence! And you brought a friend, how nice!” The lady vampire walks up to me and bows. “My name is Cecile. Welcome to my home.” She kisses both Andrew and I on the cheek in greeting. Andrew kisses her back, commenting “This is my friend Damian. We are here for a nice young piece of ass, darling! A few that you do not mind losing, if you understand me. I will pay handsomely, as always.”

Cecile tuts, then motions us to follow her to the back of the mansion. “There is only one that I keep for my son’s use, I’m afraid you cannot have him. You may have your pick of the rest, gentlemen. There are rooms out back for your use.”

The three of us enter a room filled with at least thirty young humans, ranging in age from ten to around nineteen. They are shirtless, a cloth wrapped around their privates. I immediately ignore the children, my attention turned to a young blonde around the age of eighteen. He looks like Thomas, the man who took my virginity so very long ago. “I’ll take him” I casually comment, my hand resting on the young man’s shoulder. I feel his flesh quiver at my touch, smell his blood sweeten as he shivers with fear.

Andrew selects his youth, a muscular nineteen-year-old, then hands a bag of coins to Celine. “Thank you, Andrew. Enjoy yourselves, gentlemen!” I hear her laugh as the two of us escort our teens to private individual dwellings outside. “Meet you back in the house, Damian” Andrew lazily comments, his full attention on the teen in front of him. I mumble an answer before shoving my teen into the small hut, my fangs gleaming.

I strip off the cloth covering the teen and push him onto a cot in the corner. As I strip my clothing off, for a second I think of Vin and all he suffered at the hands of Matteo, but this thought is instantly replaced by my need to bite and fuck. I listen to the chorus of beautiful screams as I plow into the body below me, feel flesh tear as I fuck deep into the teen. The more he fights, the more I love it. I smell blood in the air as I come deep inside him, hear him beg as I tear open his throat. I think of Thomas as I drain the teen, my nails digging into flesh, tearing and ripping limbs until body parts have been thrown in every corner of the room.

This is another turning point in my undead existence. Mikey won this round; she played me perfectly. As I stare at the dead teen, I’m not sure either to congratulate her or despise her. This evening was designed to kick start my evil side, to make me crave more and more evil. I must admit, she accomplished her goals. I want to hear more screams, tear more and more bodies apart.

I make my way back to the house. Celine keeps me company until Andrew arrives, blood all over his white shirt. The two of us tip Celine generously on our way out the door, thanking her profusely for our victims.

Once we are back at the castle, Andrew pulls me to a halt at the side door. “I really enjoyed this evening, Damian. Thanks for going with me.” I’m surprised when Andrew takes me in his arms, pulling me up against his broad chest. “I hope we can spend more time together. Don’t forget me.” I hold my breath as Andrew passionately kisses me, his hand coming to rest at the back of my head. When I sigh, he slips his tongue into my mouth, deepening the kiss as his hands begin to wander my body. I grab his hips to keep from tipping over backwards, but Andrew takes this as a sign to keep going. We end up making out like a couple of teenagers before Andrew eventually ends the kiss, licking my bottom lip. “Just as sweet as I thought you’d be, darling.” He winks at me then slaps my ass as he walks away, a smirk on his face.

“Well, it seems as if you liked your evening out, darling” Mikey’s voice can be heard calling from one of the windows in the study. “Come, tell me all about it.”

With a smirk on my face, I do just that.

Eventually I become bored with all my studying, frustrated that it is taking so long. As I think these thoughts, a small spell book on the very top of the bookshelf falls onto the floor a few feet from me. Intrigued, I stand and pick up the small book, which opens to a blank page at the back of the book. At first, all I see is the whiteness of the page, but the longer I look, the more I realize that there are words in gold lettering floating across the invisible lines. I take the book over to the candelabra on my desk. Squinting at the page, I see that the words floating by are in Egyptian. With a sigh, I grab the back cover to close the book as a flash of white light erupts from the page. Looking once again at the fast-moving lettering, I notice that the words are now in Italian. Without thinking, I begin to recite the words that are flying by at top speed.

Every book on the bookshelf starts to shake, white light shoots out of every spine. The books squeal and moan as I read faster. When I read the last word on the page, those shafts of white light come together in one blinding ray of light, which is directed straight at my forehead. I feel a pressure against my skull, as if every word on every page of every book is being seared into my brain at once. I shut my eyes against the pain, feel my body rise out of my chair. The pressure continues to build until I’m screaming, every effort to escape is foiled by the ray of light keeping me captive.

I hear Mikey enter the room, hear her scream out a spell to no avail. She tries again and again, but it’s as if time was standing still. Then suddenly the light disappears, leaving me to crumble to the floor with a blinding headache.

“Damian, what the fuck?” Mikey screams, bending down to pull me off the floor. “What were you reading?”

“That” I comment, pointing at the small book on the desk. Mikey sets me gently on my chair, leaning over to look at the page that I indicated.

“This cannot be.”

I rub my aching temples, my head feeling as if it were on fire. “What? What cannot be?”

“This book. I lost it one hundred and sixteen years ago in Germany. It has been missing ever since then. And now it appears, only to you? Were the words that you read in Egyptian?” I explain what happen, even though I’m even beginning to think I dreamed everything up. “This spell did not exist when I owned the book, Damian. It was created by the book for you.”

Mikey starts to pace the room, barking out orders. “Raise the desk, Damian.” I do so, without conscious thought. “Now turn the sky black.” Mikey goes to the window. She gasps as I turn the sky from day to pitch black and back again. “Now raise the castle, darling.” Seconds later, I raise my hands and the castle breaks free of its foundation, floating a good thirty feet off the ground. It floats in the air for a few minutes before returning to its foundation. “See that man over there, Dam? Kill him.” I glance out the window and the man collapses, dead on the ground.

Mikey runs me through more tests. I end up making her dance against her will, fly her to the moon in my arms, melt metal in my hands without feeling the heat. I walk through walls, resurrect the man that died in the courtyard, turn myself invisible. I prove that I have mastered all the elements, can even stop time in its tracks.

By the time I’m finished, Mikey looks at me with a combination of surprise and pride. “Damian, you now carry within you every spell in those spell books. I have nothing more to teach you. You have learned it all.” She walks over to me, takes me in her arms. “We will have to find you other teachers, darling. You must continue your training. With a little help, you will be the most feared and respected vampire in all the worlds. Everyone will kneel at your feet.” Mikey kneels in front of me, her hand unzipping my pants. “Here, darling…let me be the first…”

Chapter Text

Well they encourage your complete cooperation
Send you roses when they think you need to smile
I can’t control myself because I don’t know how
When they love me for it honestly, I’ll be here for a while
So give them blood, blood, gallons of the stuff
Give them all that they could drink and it will never be enough
So give them blood, blood, blood
Grab a glass because there’s going to be a flood

***Current day***

Time moves differently in the Dark realm than it does in the Light realm. Weeks fly by here without notice, where in the Light realm, time creeps by slowly. It takes me a bit to reacquaint myself to this change, while at the same time keeping in mind that time is almost running out on my dear family.

Stephan kept me at arm’s length for the first two weeks that I served him at the castle. I purchased the very finest skintight leather outfit to help seduce him, but no amount of charm or coercion worked on him. Stephan allowed me to serve him his meals and sit by him at the many banquets that he loved to throw, but that was it.

Stephan held many private meetings in his suite during those two weeks. Those he met with covered their faces as they walked through the halls of the castle. Paranoid as ever, Stephan surrounded his suite with enough guards to fill a roster for a football game. Try as I might, I could never get close enough to find out who these individuals were. Even using my magick, I couldn’t hear what was being said during these times. It’s as if someone—or something—is blocking me…

“Any luck, Dam?” I hear my sweet Tommy Joe’s voice echo through my head. Gods above, do I want to fuck that boy to death and back! My lust for him seems to know no bounds. The very second I can get him alone I’m gonna…

“No, baby, no luck at all. Something’s not right here, and…wait!” Voices carry though the air as Stephan slowly leads his guests from his rooms, down the hall past me to the throne room. As they pass me, I bow low as expected, but my eyes remained locked on the covered guests instead of on the floor. Frustrated, I follow the other vampires into the throne room.

Once at the dais, Stephan gestures his two guests to proceed him up the stairs. These two individuals stop in front of two chairs, one placed on either side of the throne. Stephan climbs the stairs, and the three of them sit down at the same time. I move further into the room, coming to a stop near the dais as the two guests remove their head coverings. Somehow, the two of them look familiar…

Stephan calls out “Damian Lavelli, come to the dais.” I push my way through the crowd, coming to a stop at the bottom of the stairs. “These gentlemen would like to speak with you.” Suddenly it hits me who these two vampires are, causing every hair on my body to stand on end.

“This meeting has been a long time coming, Damian” Leonardo Aprile snarls at me. “You have a lot to answer for.”

“Yes. We’ve heard that you’ve thrown in your lot with the Toro family.” Andre Dante comments from the other side of Stephan. “Heard you even bred one of them. No accounting for good taste…”

“Dam! Stay calm! Don’t show your hand, baby” I hear vibrating through my skull. Giving my enemies a snarl then a smirk, I comment “I’ve bred quite a few vamps over the years, Andre. Some from your very own families.” Andre and Leonardo begin to growl, while Stephan struggles to hide his smirk. “What makes you think the Toro family is anything special?” Andre leans forward in his chair, his body tense with rage. “You bred up that bitch Tommy Joe with your son, Damian. Every vamp in all the realms of the cosmos knows that! We also hear that your son is the next in line for head of the Light realm Council after Lambert turns to dust.” Pointing at me, Andre leers as he snarls out “It’s about time that you pay for your sins, Damian. You killed a member of each of our families, and we require vengeance for your acts.” Leonardo and Andre turn their attention to Stephan, who barks out “Bring the prisoner before the court.”

There is a flash of light seconds before Tommy Joe appears at my side. My baby looks at me with a combination of fear and confusion. I want to wrap my arms around him, to pull him close but I stay still, trying to quell my rage. “What the fuck? Why have you brought him here? He has nothing to do with…”

Stephan begins to speak over me. “…an eye for an eye, Damian. His death will bring the scales back to even. Guards take him to the dungeon. He dies two weeks from today.” Six guards encircle Tommy, who turns towards me, panic on his beautiful face. “Please Damian! Please don’t let them take me! Please NO…” Tommy swears and kicks, fear in his eyes as the guards drag him from the room. I want to tear each guard apart for laying their hands on my boy! In my mind I whisper to Tommy “Baby, be calm and obey them! I’ll get you out as soon as I can. Just know I love you.” Tommy replies, his voice strained “I love you too, Dam. I’ll be alright. Send Adam and the family my love…”

“How DARE you take my property from me?” I glare down all three in front of me, still trying to keep my cool. “You call this vengeance? And what about everything these two have been doing to the Toro family for the last two months? Have them call off their soldiers, Stephan. Enough is enough.” Before Stephan can answer me, Andre blurts out “He’s just trying to protect his son, your Highness!”

Stephan makes eye contact with both men sitting with him before glaring at me. “Bring your son here, Damian. Now.”

“I can’t.”

“Can’t, or won’t?” Stephan snarls.

“Both.” Refusing to back down, I glare at Stephan. “My son is in safe keeping until this entire affair is over. Even I do not know where he is. Tommy’s life will just have to do.” I cross my arms over my chest, my face defiant as both vamps turn to Stephan at the same time, their complaints drowning each other out. Stephan raises his hands in the air. “Enough!” When silence takes over again, he stands. “Tommy’s death will cancel out your losses, gentlemen. That is enough for now.” Andre and Leonardo stand. I bow as Stephan makes his way down the stairs towards me. As he passes, he whispers “I have given you a reprieve, Dam. Don’t make me regret it.” I nod once, mumbling my thanks before turning on my heel and storming out of the room.

I head to Mikey’s old study. Once I’m alone, I think to Tommy “Hold on, baby, for just a little while. I’ll get you out as soon as I can. Right now, I’m headed to the Light realm to speak to the family. I love you, Tommy.” Tommy responds with “I love you too, Dam. I know you will save me when the time is right.”

“The King won’t always be there to save your ass, Damian” Andre sneers at me as he enters the room. “You think you’re the smartest vampire that ever lived. It’s about time you have to pay for your sins.” I step forward, my nose practically bumping his. “And you think you’re just the vamp to make that happen, Andre? You want me to pay for the sins of YOUR ancestor, the one that set out to destroy ME?” I place both of my hands in the center of Andre’s chest, shoving him so hard he ends up on his ass on the floor. “Marcus Aprile couldn’t destroy me, and neither will you! I will live on while your families are turned to dust!” I turn on my heel, delivering a parting shot as I head out the door. “The Toro family will survive, and my son will rule the vampire empire. You can count on that, Aprile…”

In the hall I close my eyes and end up walking straight into the path of Adam as he paces the living room of the mansion, Mikey and Ray sitting nearby.

“Dam, thank fuck you’re here! Tommy…”

“…is in a dungeon in the Dark realm, awaiting execution” I finish for him. I explain what happened over Adam’s cursing and growling. “I had to act calm, I had to let them take him away! If I fought them…”

“…you’d lose your advantage, ending up in the dungeon, too” Mikey finishes for me. As I watch Mikey’s eyes flash black, instantly I feel the room grow colder. I walk over to Mikey and wrap my arm around her, whispering in her ear “Careful, darling. Your evil is showing.” Mikey eyes return to their normal color as the room returns to a normal temperature, her hand patting my arm in thanks. Ray just watches the two of us, his eyebrows raised.

“We just can’t stand here while Tommy rots in a fucking dungeon!” Adam yells, tears in his eyes. I release Mikey and walk over to Adam, taking his hand in mine. “I will do my best to keep an eye on him, but for a while he has to stay in the dungeon, Adam. Mikey’s right. This is not the time to make mistakes. We have to plan out our next move perfectly…” Just then, Frank strides into the room, Gerard just a few steps behind him. I am suddenly taken aback at how beautiful Gee is. I can’t quite keep the smirk off my face as our eyes meet, Gee instantly blushing. He has lost quite a bit of weight since the last time I saw him; his body lean and muscular. I wonder if Gee would like to carry some more pups…

Frank stops a few feet away from me, hatred in his eyes. “I warned you what would happen if a member of my family were hurt or killed under your watch, Lavelli.” I stare into Frank’s pretty face while out of the corner of my eye I watch his wolf fighting to get out. “You’ve let Tommy be dragged off to a dungeon without even lifting a finger to save him! You’re gonna pay for that…” Gee moves closer to Frank, whispering his name in fear as he reaches out to clutch Frank’s arm, knowing what his husband is capable of.

Mikey softly comments “Frank, this isn’t the time” just as Frank rushes me, his small frame slamming me into the closest wall. As much as I would love to tear his head off, Mikey is correct in stating that a showdown with me could wait for another day. Frank lands a few quick punches, one of them connecting with my nose as Ray and Adam yell at Frank to stop hitting me. I growl out my rage as blood starts to flow down my face. For his size, the little fucker is tough! I swing at Frank, my fist connecting with his stomach repeatedly. The next thing I know, we are rolling around on the floor beating the shit out of each other.

Mikey’s frustrated voice tries again to ask for peace, to no avail, so she does the next best thing. Clapping her hands together in front of her, Mikey screams out in Egyptian “munfasil bialmisrih!” The next thing I know, Frank and I are pulled up off the floor by invisible hands and slammed into walls opposite each other. Mikey lifts her hands above her head and barks out “tajmid fi misr!” which earns a growl from me. I have been on the end of this spell more than once from Mikey, so I know that it is useless for me to try to move my body away from the wall. Frank and I are stuck in this position until Mikey sees fit to release us.

Mikey storms over to Frank, her eyes pure black. “What the fuck is wrong with you, Franklin?” Frank tries to open his mouth to defend himself but shuts it again once he looks deep into Mikey’s black eyes. “We asked Damian to help us win this war, but you would rather waste time with your vendetta against him. I DON’T CARE if you like him or not, but Damian is now a member of this family, and you will treat him as such. If you cannot manage that…” Mikey steps even closer to Frank, her voice savage as she finishes “…then you’ll have to deal with me.” With a wave of her hand, both of us can finally peel ourselves from the wall. Frank gives me a glare, his icy tone full of rage as he barks out “We’re not finished with this, Lavelli” as he brushes past Mikey on his way out of the room. Gee softly tells everyone “I’m sorry about that” then makes eye contact with me again briefly before leaving the room.

I make my way over to Adam’s side. “Wow, I’m really batting a thousand! My list of haters always seems to be growing. And I’m such a nice guy, too.” Mikey, despite herself, grunts out loud at my comment. “Damian, I’ve never known a vampire to have more enemies than you. You should be used to it by now.” As I turn towards Mikey to make a retort, I see Mikey’s black eyes light up with sudden excitement. Ray stands up from the couch and slowly moves to Mikey’s side as if he fears his wife, which he should if he were smart. Placing his arm around her shoulders, Ray quietly asks “What is it, love?” Mikey squeezes Ray hand as she turns back to me, her face carefully watching my expression as she answers him “I know of a way to save Tommy’s life.” Adam makes his way over to me, his arm encircling my waist. “How’s that, Mother?” Mikey continues to stare into my eyes, a delighted smirk on her face as she comments “I’m going to the Dark realm to take my throne back.”

The next hour is spent with Adam and Ray arguing with Mikey over her plan. No matter how hard they try to change her mind, Mikey digs in her heels and insists that she is more than capable to take down Stephan and regain her crown. Seeing that we have come to a standoff on the subject, I growl out “Why don’t we ask the rest of the family then, Mikey?” I close my eyes for a moment, knowing what I’m asking for—nothing but trouble. When I open my eyes, Gerard, Bob, Robbie, Pete, Patrick, Andrew and Frank are sitting around the large living room with us, each face showing surprise and, upon looking at me, disgust. All but Gerard’s face, which turns red again when our eyes accidently meet. Like I said—nothing but more trouble, but this conversation needs to happen amongst all the entire family.

“What the fuck?” Bob growls out, his hands balling into fists. “I had heard that Lavelli is the new family savior, but I didn’t believe it! Just what the fuck have you done this time, bastard?” Robbie places a hand on Bob’s chest to keep him from attacking me, his soft voice imploring Bob to stay where he is.

Mikey quickly tells everyone about Tommy, then tries to share her plan with them. “Once I am Queen again I will…”

“NO!” Andrew and Gee scream in unison. Mikey tries to finish her sentence, but Andrew cuts in with “We talked about this, Mikey. It’s too dangerous for you to go back to the Dark realm! We don’t want you to lose yourself…” Mikey, losing her patience, snarls out “It was okay for Damian to lose his soul, but not me?” Bob snarls in return “We love you, Mikes. It’s him we don’t give a shit about…” and Pete comments “He can rot in hell for all we care…”

“SHUT THE MOTHERFUCK UP!” I scream at the top of my lungs, my black eyes glaring at the group. “I couldn’t GIVE A SHIT if you like me or hate me, BUT THIS ISN’T ABOUT ME!” I turn to Mikey, who’s eyes have turned back to black again. “At least let her finish telling you her plan!” I move to stand next to Mikey’s chair, which causes another round of snarls to fill the room. “Go ahead, Mikey, please.”

Mikey looks up at me, a slight smile on her lips. “Thank you, Dam.” Turning back to the group, she continues. “I plan to not only retake my throne and control of the vampire army, but to reinstate the original Vampaire.”

The room fills with silence, every shocked face focused on Mikey, even mine. I take this opportunity to place my hand on Mikey’s arm, quietly asking “My Queen, the Vampaire? They haven’t existed for a millennium. Just how can you ensure that the members are still undead?” Mikey raises her eyes to mine, determination showing through her gaze. “Trust me, Damian. The Vampaire has been in hiding since the last war with the Light realm. They will gather together on my order.” Placing her hand on mine, Mikey asks “Will you be my King, Damian?”

I feel all eyes in the room on me as I sink to one knee, my eyes staring into Mikey’s. “My Queen, I would follow you into the halls of Hell and back. I will proudly serve as your King.” Mikey smirks at me as she takes my hand in hers. “Then rise, my King. We will take over the Dark realm together.” As I stand, Mikey slowly turns her haughty gaze on each member of the family, especially her husbands. Andrew refuses to make eye contact with her, while Ray looks at her with respect.

“Mother?” Adam asks, his expression one of sadness. In this moment, I believe that only Ray and Adam truly realize the great sacrifice that Mikey is making to save us all. “What of the Vampaire? What happens to them when we win this war?” Mikey responds “They will stay under my orders, Adam. I will see to it that they heed my commands.” Adam slowly stands, moving next to Mikey on the opposite side of the chair from me. “To do so, won’t you be forced to spend the rest of your existence in the Dark realm?” I hear both Ray and Andrew’s angry comments, hear Gee gasp over Trick’s words of denial. I make eye contact with Adam as I growl out “I will never let that happen, Adam. I’ll spend the rest of eternity in the Dark realm running the Vampaire and the army so Mikey can return home where she belongs. Your mother will return home, you have my solemn vow, Adam.” Mikey grabs my arm, her nails sinking through leather to get my attention, but I keep my eyes locked on Adam’s. After a few second, in his role as head of the family, Adam chokes out “It’s settled. When she is ready, mother will head to the Dark realm. Damian will head there first to keep an eye on Tommy.” When the rest of the family starts to yell and complain, I close my eyes and send them all to different parts of the mansion. All but Ray, who moves to take Mikey in his arms, and Adam who reaches out for me. The four of us stand together in a tight group, feeling the darkness take over the room.

Chapter Text

“Vampires don’t settle old scores. We harbor them.”
Lestat—Queen of the Damned

“What the fuck was that Gerard?” Frank barks out, rage tinging his voice. Gerard was standing out on their bedroom balcony, trying to enjoy the first nice spring evening of the year. Turning to his husband, Gee raises a questioning eyebrow. “What the fuck was what, Frank?” Even though Gee knows the topic of conversation, he attempts to play dumb instead of trying to start a fight. There is no way he is going to get out of this one easily…

“You were flirting with that fucker Damian, Gerard! Not once, but twice! I saw the way you blushed when that bastard made eye contact with you!” Frank leans forward, attempting to scent his mate to learn the truth. Unfortunately for Frank, Gee has managed to become very adept at hiding his scent from Frank, which pisses him off to no end. “He looked at you as if he wanted to have you for dinner! And you didn’t dissuade him at all!” Gee’s eyes narrow, his lips purse together when Frank continues with “If I didn’t know any better, I’d think you’d WANT the bastard to fuck you…” Frank, as strong and agile as he is, doesn’t even see Gee’s fist connect with his jaw until it’s too late. He staggers backwards as his mate continues to throw punch after punch at him, most of them connecting. Frank bellows out “GERARD!” in his most alpha tone, but Gee ignores it, his rapid swings now connecting with Frank’s stomach. “You FUCKER! HOW DARE YOU SAY SUCH SHIT TO ME!!!” Frank shoves Gee backwards with enough strength to slam him into the balcony railing before attempting to pin him there, holding him down with both hands. Gee wiggles in Frank’s grasp, his growls of frustration becoming louder as Frank presses his body into Gee’s to hold him still. “I’m sick of all your bullshit, Frank! All you ever do is bitch about Damian, how much you hate him, how he’s not a part of the family. You spend 24/7 carrying on about Damian, devising plans to destroy him. With you, it’s always Damian, Damian, Damian! What about your children, YOUR MATE? Do you ever spend a second thinking about US?” Gee pushes with all his strength, backing up Frank enough to make his way around him and back into the house, Frank right on his heels. “Today is our anniversary, Frank. I made you a special breakfast in bed, and all you did was discuss your plans to talk to Mother about Damian. Then I asked you to go on a romantic walk in the woods with me, and the whole time we were there, the conversation focused on Damian and your hatred of him. Then I suggested we go out to a club after dinner, but instead of answering me, you ran out of the room to confront Damian! I am SO sick of hearing his name!” Tears fill Gee’s eyes as he raises his arms out in front of himself, backing away from Frank who is trying to take Gee in his arms. “I’m not falling for that again. I love you Frank, I really do. But you’ll make me think that you want to be with me, and in a few minutes, you’ll be focused on Damian again. You’re fucking obsessed.” Gee makes his way to the bedroom door, yelling over his shoulder as he heads out of the room “Well I hope you can keep up a conversation by yourself, Frank, cause I’m not hanging around to listen!”

Gee heads out to the back garden by the fountain, tears flowing down his face. So many times, in the past, Gee would wait here for Frank to finish his magic lessons with Mikey. Then they would sneak off into the woods together, knowing their love was forbidden. So much has changed since those days. Gee sighs as he sits down on a swing, his mind locked in the past…

“Tears, Gerard?” Gee looks up in surprise, staring blankly into Damian’s face. “Did that bastard Frank break your heart again?” Damian’s searing gaze takes in Gee’s shaking hands, his red nose and tear tracks covering his face. “Do I need to go hunt your husband down and beat his ass for you?”

Gee pauses to stare at Damian’s tight leather outfit, his long blonde hair hanging in waves across his broad shoulders. It had been so long since he and Frank had sex, just the sight of Damian’s body was making him horny. Without thinking, Gee snorts out loud. “No Damian, not unless you want your ass handed to you.” Damian throws back his head and laughs. “Oh, Gee darlin, the only one losing an ass would be Frank.”

Damian goes to sit down on the swing, but thinking better of it, nods his head to ask permission first. Gee thinks to himself “In for a penny…” and moves over to give Damian room to sit next to him. Once they are both settled and the swing begins to slowly move, Damian looks at Gee and says “Let me guess. The fight was about me, correct?” Gee nods once. “I knew I shouldn’t have flirted with you in front of Frank. I’m very sorry, Gee, to have you hurt this way.”

Gee raises an eyebrow, his eyes boring into Damian’s. “But…you’re evil!” Dam nods then cocks his head to the side. “Then why are you being so nice to me? You’re never nice to me.”

Damian sighs, then takes a moment to gather his thoughts. “You see, Gee…there is no such thing as ‘pure evil.’” Gee wrinkles his nose, his way of showing that he disagrees. “Oh, most of the worst characters that have ever existed were 99.999% evil. In everyone, there is someone they love or care deeply about…or become obsessed with. Hell…” Damian leans closer to Gee for effect “…even Jason Voorhees loved his mother.” Damian smirks when Gee gives a small smile at his comment. “Truthfully…” Damian’s eyebrows knit together as he tries to find the correct words “…something has happened to me this time around. Yes, I’m evil…” Damian’s eyes flash from green to black and then green again, momentarily scaring Gee “…and I will be until I am bound, but I can manage to push it into the background sometimes. I still carry the love I have for the family in my soul.” Damian reaches out, moving slowly to take Gee’s smaller hand in his. “Gerard, I haven’t taken the time to properly say this to you, but I’m truly sorry for all the pain that I have caused you over the years. I know that I haven’t always been the nicest to you, and I am sorry…”

“And you should be!” Frank grunts out, his eyes blazing as he comes to a halt in front of the two. Frank’s face turns red with rage when he notices Damian holding hands with Gee. “How many times do I have to tell you to keep away from MY family, fucker?” Damian squeezes Gee’s hand once then quickly lets go, a look of apology on his face directed at Gee. “You think you can just waltz in here and take my MATE from me?”

Gee blurts out “That’s not what was happening, Frank! If you would only listen…” Damian abruptly stands, bowing to Gee while ignoring Frank’s rant. “Gerard, it’s been a pleasure. I hope you take my words to heart. I will leave the two of you before things become more heated. Good evening, Gerard.” Damian bows once more and then makes his way back to Adam’s suite, a smirk on his face as he hears the couple start to scream at each other.

“NO TRICK!” Pete screams at the top of his lungs, startling Patrick. “You will NEVER put yourself in harm’s way again when it comes to Damian and this family, do you hear me?” Pete crosses the room to take his Trick into his arms. He needs to find a way to make his sweetheart understand where he is coming from. “Baby, the last time Damian was in the picture, he forced Bob to rape you using mind control.” Trick’s eyes darken at the memory, his face turning pale. Pete can just about kick himself for bringing up that horrible moment in time but he’s desperate for Trick to see reason. “The last thing I want is for you to get near him again. I can’t lose you baby, I can’t.” Trick swallows hard before placing his hands on Pete’s arms. “Honey, I’ve worked hard on my magickal studies over the years. I’m much more talented than I was when we first met. I’ll be working with Mikey, Adam, Ray AND Damian to bring Tommy home and help them defeat our enemies. I know you don’t want me anywhere near Damian, but I must do this. Please don’t make me fight you on this, because as much as I love you, you will lose. I have to help where I can…”

Without thought Pete blurts out “But baby! You’re HUMAN!” Trick’s eyes narrow, his face turning bright red as he shoves himself from Pete’s arms. “WHOSE FAULT IS THAT PETE? I BEGGED YOU OVER AND OVER TO CHANGE ME YET YOU REFUSED!” Trick turns on his heels and storms out, his temper making his eyes water as he heads for Adam’s room.

“Come in!” Adam yells when Trick knocks on the door. Trick slowly enters Adam’s suite, confusion taking over when he doesn’t see Adam right away. “In the bedroom.”

The sight that greets Trick stops him short. Adam and Damian are curled up together in Adam and Tommy’s bed, both without shirts on. Damian, upon looking at Trick, blurts out “Jesus, is EVERYONE crying tonight? I had no idea that my visit would cause such an impact.” Adam snorts at Damian. “Ignore him, Trick. What’s on your mind?”

Trick takes a slow step closer to the bed. “I…just wanted to offer my help with the war the family is fighting, Adam. Pete…” Trick wrinkles his nose at his husband’s name “objects to my making the offer, but I’m making it all the same.”

Damian leans forward out of Adam’s arms, his eyes intent on Patrick. “Does this have to do with me, Trick?” Trick crosses his arms then nods, refusing to make eye contact with Damian. “He’s afraid that you will hurt me…again.”

Adam goes to get out of bed, but Damian places a hand on Adam’s arm to stop him. Damian gets up instead, coming to a stop at the end of the bed. “Trick, I apologized multiple times about…” Trick makes a cutting motion with his hand. “I don’t want to talk about that. I want…” Damian doesn’t back down, instead he takes another step towards Trick. “You need to know this, Trick. Things are different this time. I’m fighting on the side of the family, not against it.” Trick takes a step back, staring up into Damian’s face. “I have accepted you as a member of the family, Damian. I forgave you so we could move forward. I’ll trust you because I have no choice. But don’t ever kid yourself into believing that I have forgotten the things you have done, to me and others. But regardless of all that, I have a request to make of you, Damian.” Dam nods once to encourage Trick to continue. Trick steps close enough for Damian to smell Trick’s shampoo. In a soft voice Trick asks, “Will you change me, Damian?”

Adam makes a startled noise from behind them before asking “But what about Pete? Since he is your husband, he has every right to…” Trick cuts off Adam’s sentence, more tears in his eyes. “Pete refuses to turn me. He told me he would rather destroy me than turn me into a monster. He said that…a monster.” Trick makes quick eye contact with Adam, a look of apology on his face. “I would ask you, Adam, but I don’t want to become a werevamp. Damian, if you make me a vampire, some of your magick will transfer to me through your blood. I have some magickal skill, but your skills outrank mine by a long shot. I’ve always wanted to become a vampire, to properly join the family that adopted me, as well as to expand my magick. This is the perfect time, since I would be better suited to help us win this war.” With pleading eyes, Trick begs “Please, Damian…

Damian stands in front of Trick, shocked to the core. When he turns back to look at Adam, he encounters only raised eyebrows and a simple shrug of shoulders. Clearly Adam wants Dam to make up his own mind without any input from him.

Damian moves back to sit down on the edge of the bed, his head reeling. “Trick honey, do you realize what you are asking me to do? Pete will despise me even more than he already does! Not that it bothers me exactly, but it will cause a world of hurt for you. Are you willing to take a chance on something that could possibly destroy your marriage?” Trick cuts in “What good is a marriage if I cannot be who I am meant to be? Pete knew I was different when he married me, he knew that I felt that being a vampire was what I was meant to be. He’s the one refusing to help me achieve it.” With a shrug of his shoulders Trick snarls out “If I change and he refuses to accept it, then we are over. I’m tired of living my life by Pete’s standards and Pete’s rules.” Turning doe eyes once again on Damian, Trick begs “Please, will you make me a vampire, Damian?”

Damian doesn’t know what to do. He blurts out “Then I’d be your maker. You do realize what that means, don’t you? An unbreakable bond will be created between us, and you will become a part of me, a part of my life. Can you handle spending time with me? It will be my responsibility to introduce you to life as a vampire. I can hold back the evil with a spell long enough to give you my blood, but at the end of the day, the real me will always be there.”

“I understand, and I appreciate that you are taking the time to make sure I do understand, Damian. I can accept you the way you are, if you are willing to accept me in return. The real question is, are you willing to make me your fledgling?”

If Damian is honest with himself, he must admit that he has nothing against the boy. He remembers when Trick was Andrew’s slave in the Dark realm, remembers the very first time he met Trick. According to Mikey, Andrew had basically cut off all ties with Trick when they first arrived in the Light realm, which made the boy extremely insecure. Ever since then, Trick and that obnoxious bastard Pete have been basically attached at the hip. Damian’s eyes flash black at the very idea of pissing off Pete. “I will change you, Trick, but not tonight. I must head back to the Dark realm shortly. But I promise that the very next time I’m here, I will set aside enough time for the process. Does it make you happy to know that I’m willing to do so?”

Trick gives Damian a huge smile, then does something that shocks all three of them. He hugs Damian, holding on until Damian hugs him back. Trick lets go, stepping out of Damian’s arms as Pete’s loud voice is heard calling out Trick’s name in the hallway. With a soft “Thank you” Trick nods to both vamps, heading out of the suite with a huge smile on his lips.

Damian turns around and exclaims “This has been one freaky night! Did I do the right thing, Adam?” In return he gets another shrug and raised eyebrows. Sighing, Damian crawls back into bed. Once in his lover’s arms, Damian shares his thoughts. “Wentz will lose his shit, and the dark part of me can’t wait to see it. He treats that boy unfairly, smothering him until the poor thing can’t even see himself anymore. That pisses me off. I looked into those eyes and all I saw was a lost kid trying to figure out who he is really is. How can I turn my back on that?” Adam pulls Dam’s head down onto his chest, his fingers running through Dam’s long hair. “Shit, I sound like an old softy. I’m holding you to secrecy, Adam.” Adam grunts out in response “No promises, love. Maybe it’s time that the world gets to see the real you, too.” Damian’s response is to sigh and say “Someday, darlin.”

After a few minutes Damian asks, “Want to talk to Tommy, Adam?” With excitement Adam responds “I thought you were keeping conversation at a minimum, Dam. Won’t it be too much of a risk?” Damian smiles at Adam, his eyes sparkling. “I can set it up so the three of us can converse together. I’m sure the enemy already knows that I’m keeping tabs on Tommy, that can’t be helped. But if it will put your mind at ease…” Dam looks deep into Adam’s blue eyes “…then let’s do it.”

Damian closes his eyes for a few minutes before Adam hears in his head “Tommy, are you there, love? Adam is here with me. We are both worried sick about you!” Dam nods at Adam, who adds “I love and miss you, baby, so fucking much! How are you holding up?”

Tommy’s voice sounds tired, stressed. “Hello my loves. I’m hanging in there the best I can. The other inmates smell like hell, and they only give us a small cup of blood a day, but I’ve managed to beatdown anyone who tries shit with me. I’m so glad to hear your voices! I miss you so.” Dam turns his head to look at Adam and his breath catches in his chest. Adam looks so heartbroken, as if he will never see his mate again. It’s funny—Damian feels possessive of the two of them, but more so about Tommy, sometimes forgetting that Tommy and Adam are mated. He simply thinks of them as his. Even though Damian can feel evil sliding through his body, he can’t help but feel sorry for Adam in this moment.

Damian takes a deep breath and thinks “Tommy, the family is working on a plan to rescue you. I know we are asking a lot of you, expecting you to sit in that dungeon. I promise you; we will get you out in time.”

The rest of the conversation is less stressed, with the two of them telling Tommy about Frank’s freak out earlier in the evening, and Trick asking Dam to turn him. Tommy agrees with the two of them that Pete will never turn Trick on his own, so someone needs to help the poor boy. With a voice filled with sadness, Dam says “I just hope I can manage to do a better job as his maker than I was with you, darling.”

“Enough of that, Dam! You were a different vampire, and that was long ago. Let it rest. You will be an amazing father figure to him.” Dam cannot help himself, asking “TJ, do you remember long ago when I told you that someday I would explain why I treated you the way I did?” Tommy replies “I remember, honey. And if you never tell me, it’s okay.” Damian, looking at the wall, responds with a soft “I promise to you, TJ, that I will tell you after we win this war. We will sit down together, and you will get the whole story. But for now, I must get back to the Dark realm. I’ll bow out of the conversation so you and Adam can have some privacy.” Dam grabs Adam by the chin and pulls him in for a searing kiss. With a whispered “Goodbye darlings, I love both of you” Dam disappears.

“What’s wrong, Ray?” Mikey sits cross legged on the couch in the suite she shares with her husbands, a huge smirk on her face. Gazing at Ray with her black eyes, she taunts him with “Cat got your tongue? Or are you simply scared of your little wifey?” She uncrosses her legs, giving Ray a glimpse of black lace panties under her short leather dress.

Ray stands still a few feet away from where Mikey is sitting. He’s been having flashbacks ever since his wife’s eyes turned and stayed black, and he seems to be in the middle of one right at this moment. Mikey finds it all amusing, the way that her strong, forceful husband has been reduced to this state. The very thought of it sends shivers up her spine.

Moving to stand in front of Ray, she gently brushes the back of her fingers down the side of Ray’s face. “RAY! Snap out of it!” Mikey pulls back her hand far enough to lay a sharp slap to Ray’s face. “Wake the fuck up and talk to me!” Ray shakes his head when he feels the slap, trying to dispel the images in his head. “Wwwhat?” Eyes coming into focus, Ray gazes into Mikey’s beautiful face, his cheeks turning red. “I didn’t mean…I…” Mikey breaks in, asking in a sharp voice “Are you having flashbacks about your time with me in the Dark realm, husband? When I had you on your knees every chance I had?” Ray’s eyes darken at the memories. “When I had you lick my boots clean, when I whipped you for simply looking at me?” Ray nods once, sweat showing on his forehead. “You miss it, don’t you, Ray? You miss feeling my wrath, my punishments?” Mikey slowly circles Ray, her hands touching his body as she goes. “You want me to pick up my riding crop, my whip? You want me to use them to keep you in line, to dominate you? To bring you out of yourself, to ground you?” Ray, knowing better than to voice an answer to Mikey’s questions, simply nods once.

Before Mikey can say another word, the door to their suite slams into the wall. Andrew strides into the room, rage showing through every pore of his body. Coming to a stop in front of the two vamps Andrew ignores Ray, addressing Mikey with his hands on his hips. “You think you can do this to the family, to US, Mikey? You think you can set out for the Dark realm, take over the throne and not lose yourself? You are wrong if you think that your relationship with us won’t be damaged or destroyed in the end.” Mikey grunts, her hands landing on her hips. “And don’t think you can intimidate me, Mikey. I knew you when you were the Queen of the Dark realm, remember? I know what you are capable of.” Mikey turns towards Andrew, Ray momentarily forgotten. “Then if I were you, husband…” Mikey steps into Andrew’s space, eyes glaring wide and black “…I would BACK THE FUCK OFF! I’m doing the best I can for the family, for all of us! I don’t give a fuck if you believe me or not…” Andrew chest thumps Mikey, his voice harsh. “You are the oldest vampire in existence, Mikey, and one of the strongest. Why don’t you just admit the truth, that you want your throne back FOR YOU and YOU ALONE! You miss having power and you’re tired of being good all the time! The least you can do is TELL US THE TRUTH!”

Mikey surprises both her husbands by turning her back on them to pace the room, head down and eyes on the floor. Ray and Andrew watch her in silence, both waiting for the next explosion. When it doesn’t come, Andrew decides to poke the bear by softly asking “What is it you really want, Mikes? Level with us babes. We’re here for you…”

Mikey slows then stops her steps, coming within a foot of her husbands. Raising her chin until their eyes meet, she replies “You’re right, Andrew. I AM the oldest living vampire. I have seen things that the two of you have only dreamed of or learned about in history books. I ruled the Dark realm longer than any other leader, until the last battle with the Light realm where I was injured and had to go into hiding here. I’ve had my evil side bound for what feels like an eternity, and yes, I’m tired of it. Damian and I want to be free, to be who we are meant to be, on our terms. I’m tired of feeling like I’m only half of my true self. But at the same time, I want our enemies defeated and our family safe. Deep down inside, I love every member of our family, I always will. If you love me, you will let me do this, if not only for the family but for both sides of me. I must find a way to make both sides coexist, to find peace for Damian and myself. There must be a way, and I intend to find it. I’m going back to the Dark realm, and if you love me, you’ll let me go.”

Chapter Text

The story of my past continues…

Time flies by so fast I lose all track of it. Events take place that manage to catch my attention for short bursts of time, but for the most part my life still revolves around the learning of magick.

My relationship with Mikey settles into what one might call ‘marital bliss’—for the most part. I eventually accept the fact that I was mated. In an attempt at peace, I spend almost all my free time with Mikey. This pleases my mate, who in return allows me the opportunity to continue seeking out the things that bring me joy.

During this time, two deaths devastate me. The first is Juliana, who dies during childbirth. She was a dear friend, and I will always miss her. Unfortunately, the second death is my very own brother Antonio.

When Antonio was a new vampire, I warned him to stay out of the sun. Fledglings burn much easier as older vampires, a mistake that I made myself early after my turning. What I did not see coming was my brother’s demise. Antonio surprised everyone by committing suicide.

Vin started spending more and more time in the Light realm with Antonio, attempting to mentor him. Unfortunately, Vin couldn’t hide his love for my brother, which Antonio did not feel in return. Vin kept pushing my brother to sleep with him, even though I tried (and surprisingly, Mikey tried as well) to get him to back off. One day Vin arrived for a visit to find my brother screaming in agony. Upon arriving at a nearby clearing, he found Antonio nearly destroyed by the sun. Vin screamed to Mikey for help, who arrived just as Antonio’s body burned completely away.

When the two returned to the Dark realm, Mikey told me what had transpired. Without saying a word, I left to find Vin in his room. He was laying on his bed crying his eyes out. I walk up to Vin and proceeded to beat the undead out of him. Blood slowly begins running on the bed from my repeated blows to Vin’s face and body, as he screams and begs for me to stop. The only thing that stops me is Mikey, who somehow manages to drag me out of the room and into ours. She pushes me down on a chair and sits on me to keep me from returning to Vin’s room. Mikey then spends the next few minutes licking the wounds on my knuckles closed. Her voice shocked, Mikey asks “Just what the fuck were you thinking, Dam? That boy just lost the love of his life…” I push against Mikey to no avail, my voice rising as I yell at the top of my lungs. “What the fuck do you think killed my brother, Mikes? VIN’S LOVE FOR HIM!!! I told that boy a million times that Antonio wasn’t gay, that he didn’t love Vin at all. The little brat just wouldn’t listen! And now my brother’s DEAD!” Mikey leans down and kisses my lips to calm me, even as I try to push her off me. “You don’t understand Mikey! My brother was my last connection to my human family. When he became a vampire, we became closer than ever, even though we were living in different realms.” Mikey runs her fingers through my long hair, her voice soft as she comments “I know how much you loved him, Dam. I just wish there was something I could’ve done…” I sigh heavily as I respond with “You did your best, and I thank you for trying Mikey...” I squeeze her waist tightly as I continue “…but don’t expect me to go easy on Vin. He doesn’t deserve it!”

After a few hours Vin tries to apologize to me, tries to get me to speak to him, but I refuse to even see him. I take Vin’s actions as the ultimate betrayal, something that cannot easily be fixed by a simple I’m sorry. Even though Mikey tries many, many times over the years to heal the rift between us, it still takes me more than one hundred years to completely forgive Vin and speak to him again.

With these two deaths, my connection to the Light realm completely disappears. I made one final trip there to pick up some of my belongings and say goodbye to a few people at court. It’s hard to believe that I will never return—or so I thought at the time.

Once I return home, I begin my search to find magick teachers on other realms. Much to Mikey’s displeasure, I begin to spend more and more time away from home. My magick skills grew over time, along with my arrogance and the evil inside of me. Once I learned whatever I could from a teacher, I would kill them. I didn’t want anyone else to learn the power that I held. When I do take the time to visit Mikey, she would inquire about my teachers and my lessons, but I share very little truthful information with her. I had a premonition that someday I would need to use my skills against her, and I didn’t want to tip my hand too easily. Sounds like a horrible thing to think about one’s mate, huh? Little did I know that someday far in the future this scenario would play out exactly like I thought it would…

Vin withdrew into himself shortly after Antonio’s death. He would visit the Light realm for years on end, looking for someone to love him. This left Mikey alone most of the time, something that she truly hated. So, after a while, she begged me to come back to the Dark realm, bribing me by asking me to serve as the King of the realm. I must admit, my ego was intrigued with the idea. Mikey told me that she would teach me all that I needed to know, if I would simply rule by her side.

One evening a few weeks later, the two of us end up cuddling naked in front of the fireplace in our bedroom. Running her fingers lightly across my chest, Mikey mumbles “Have you thought about it, Dam? Do you want to rule the realm with me?” I picked up Mikey’s hand, lacing my fingers through hers. “I’m interested, Mikes, but there are a few issues I wish to talk to you about.” Mikey nods once, her eyes boring into mine. “First off, if I’m going to rule with you, I want to learn everything about this realm.” Mikey’s eyes light up at this idea. “I want to learn military maneuvers and tactics. I want to lead the army. I want to learn the laws of the realm. I don’t just want to be a figure head honey; I want to learn to be a real leader.” Mikey is quiet for a few minutes, her fingers playing with mine as she looks lost in thought. “I understand, darling. I can arrange for my advisors to connect you with the right vamps to teach you all these things. You can absorb the laws the same way that you absorbed your magick lessons, that will not be difficult. Before you know it, you will be King in no time.”

I nibble on Mikey’s graceful neck before going in for the kill. “But there is more, Mikes. I want time off to continue learning magick. I know there is so much more for me to learn.” Mikey looks a bit unhappy at this idea, knowing it means more time away from me. “Besides, I know how much you like it when you see the evil inside me grow, love. I wouldn’t want to take away your favorite pastime, would I?” Mikey agrees with me, commenting “Your evil has grown to immense proportions, love. I am so very proud of you. Now, if there isn’t anything else…” I pull Mikey closer to me, my body covering hers as I comment “There’s just one more little thing, darling.” I wrap my hand around Mikey’s cock, giving a few pulls to hear her moan in my ear. “I want to join the Vampaire.”

Mikey sits up so quickly that I end up falling on the floor. Peering down at me as if I’ve lost my mind, she snarls out “Oh, is THAT all, Damian?” I look up at Mikey from my place on the floor, my expression showing my disbelief even as a smirk pulls at my lips. Mikey places her hands on her hips, sneering down at me. “Being my King isn’t fucking enough for you? Christ, Damian! You need to run it all, huh?” Mikey rises off the couch and reaches for a dressing gown. “What makes you think that you are talented enough to be a part of the most important ruling body on this realm?” I rise from the floor, my hand grasping for Mikey’s to calm her down. She backs away from me, her hands behind her. “I’m offering you a chance to rule with me, not take over my entire kingdom from me!” It is then that truly realize my mistake. I never wanted to replace Mikey! I just wanted to… “Baby, you have it all wrong! I don’t want to replace you! I want to be the best mate I can be, to help you in any way possible! I just thought that if I could…” Mikey makes a cutting motion in the air before turning her back to me, her shoulders shaking. “I’ve ruled this realm for longer than anyone else, and I did it alone. I wanted you to rule with me, NOT REPLACE ME! Forget I said anything, Dam.” Turning on her heel, Mikey makes her way out of the room.

I throw on some clothes and go in search of her, my boots ringing out through the empty halls as I search from room to room. When I arrive in the throne room, I’m so lost in thought that I walk right into Andrew, who gives me a smile of welcome. “Damian! I was hoping to run into you! How have you been?” I attempt to smile back but fail. “Fine until twenty minutes ago! I’ve managed to upset Mikey again…” Andrew throws back his head and laughs heartily. “Welcome to life with our Queen, Dam! I thought you’d know by now that this is the norm. Our Queen runs hot and cold on a good day. You never know what she’s going to do…”

“Do tell us more, dear Andrew!” Mikey comments from the opposite doorway, her arms crossed, face red with rage. “So, I’m unhinged, is it? Just a typical female, acting hysterical? Is that what you think of your sovereign?” When Andrew doesn’t immediately respond, Mikey taunts him with “Why don’t you enlighten us with your thoughts on the subject, servant?”

Andrew immediately sinks to his knees, his eyes to the floor. “My liege, I simply was pointing out the ever-changing environment of the court, and your response to those changes. One cannot remain stagnate and survive in your role here at court. Even Damian here can attest to the chaos that we call home, and what it takes to survive it.” Mikey remains silent for a few moments, taking the time to examine Andrew’s words. Her words sharp, she retorts “It seems as if I have misjudged you, Andrew. I was going to extend an invitation for you to stay here at the castle with Damian and I. Based on your latest comments, I retract your invitation. Leave my sight.” Pointing to the closest doorway, Mikey growls out “NOW.” Andrew slowly stands up, his eyes meeting mine as he comments on the way out the door “I’m sorry, my liege, I truly am. I love you my Queen…”

Without hesitation I sink to my knees in front of Mikey. “Please, my love, hear my plea. I never meant to overstep my position. I now realize that a position with the Vampaire is a privilege that only the Queen can bestow on those who deserve it. Please, my Queen, allow me the chance to prove to you that I am worthy, not only to be a leader for this realm, but to stand by your side.”

Seconds turn into long minutes. Just as I am on the verge of begging again, Mikey moves close enough to place her hand under my chin. Pulling upwards until our eyes meet, she gives me a ghost of a smile. “Damian, I have no doubt that once you have applied yourself to the ruling of this realm, you will earn yourself a place on the Vampaire. But you need to learn to walk before you learn to run! One thing at a time, my love…”

Mikey is instantly delighted with my ambition. In a few years’ time, I was made General of the Dark army. Mikey immediately tested me by having me lead the army into battle against the Crystal realm. The war lasted for two years before the vamps under my leadership managed to make a sneak attack that ended up in the death of the Crystal King. I spent weeks afterwards dealing with advisors and ‘wisemen’ who all had an opinion as to how my interactions with this realm should be handled. When the inhabitants of the Crystal realm finally bowed low before my feet in supplication, I knew that I had completed the first step on my way to a place on the Vampaire.

When I return home, against my will, I find myself in an open relationship. Shortly after welcoming me home, Mikey came to me to voice her desire to have an affair with Peter Wentz, a high-ranking member of the Queen’s guard. I disliked Wentz from the very first moment I saw the arrogant bastard. Rumor was it that Wentz would sleep with anything that moved (or didn’t move), and he kept my bed and my Queen warm while I was off leading the army in the Crystal realm war.

I had two choices—give in and let Mikey have her way or kill Wentz and deal with Mikey’s wrath. I decided the best thing to do was to simply give in to Mikey.

As my relationship began to unravel, I would do anything to keep from having to see the two of them together. I moved into my own suite in the castle, much to Mikey’s dismay. Unbelievably, she thought that the three of us could build a relationship together. The very thought made me want to vomit. I became so overwhelmingly jealous, turning me into a monster who stalked the halls at night trying to escape my own mind, my own torment. Eventually, I realized that I had to do something to help me keep my sanity, else I end up stabbing both Mikey and Pete in their sleep.

I turned all my time and attention into adding on to the castle, doubling its size in a few short years. I invited the greatest minds of the day to stay at the castle, which included everyone from scientists to religious leaders to philosophers. I held open debates and presentations for vampires to expand their opinions and their minds. I sponsored fairs and concerts, sporting events and banquets.

I made it my mission to endear myself to the vampires in Mikey’s realm. I imported humans from every realm in the cosmos until the population of both vampires and humans tripled in size. I put forward an amendment to the ‘turning’ law, which severely limited the number of vampires that could be created a year. I expanded the law, allowing vamps to make ten humans into vampires per year. This expanded the realm’s coffers, since each vampire was taxed each year based on the size of their property and the number of vamps and humans who lived there.

I put forward opportunities for education for vampires, as well as improved the caste system that had been in place for a millennium. Mikey was delighted with the changes that I put forward, encouraging me each time we saw each other when court was in session. At each session, I would notice Wentz standing in the back of the crowd, his arms crossed and a cocky smirk on his ugly face. I wanted to beat the shit out of him…

“Dam, did you hear what I said?” Mikey asks, her voice extra sugar sweet. When I shake my head, she repeats “Would you like to come out with Pete and I this evening?” When I do not immediately respond, she continues with “We are going to the theatre.” This raises my eyebrows to the ceiling. I ask “The Orrore Theatre, Mikes?” When Mikey nods, I cannot hide my smirk. “I have a few things to do, but I will meet you there. In your private box, correct?” Mikey looks a bit displeased, but she nods her head. “Yes, Dam. I guess we will see you there then.” With that, she turns and heads to her study.

Four hours later I am standing in the lobby of the Orrore Theatre, the very place where I tortured the slave the night I went out with Andrew. I hear “Mr. Lavelli!” behind me, and I turn to find the very same vampire that hosted the punishment shows. “Sir, it is a pleasure that you have returned! Care to be the opener for tonight’s entertainment? I’m sure the crowd would love to see you rip apart another slave!” When I agree, I am escorted backstage to await my turn in the footlights. From where I am standing offstage, I can see Pete leaning close to Mikey in the royal box, his hand in hers. Mikey seems to be slightly distracted, looking around as if she is looking for me.

The lights dim and the curtain rises. Before I know it, I am standing on the stage in front of two slaves who are chained to St. Andrew crosses, three large carts full of torture equipment next to me.

My process this time is the same as the last time—the crowd screaming out my name, applause thick in the air. This time though I take my time, my cruelty level much higher. My goal is to thoroughly destroy the two slaves by the time I am finished with them.

I continuously throw water on both slaves to keep them awake through the torture, to make the process last longer. I feel Mikey and Pete’s eyes on me the entire time, feel how proud Mikey is to witness my demon soul turned loose on the stage.

As the crowd screams out their appreciation, I turn to stare at Pete, my eyes bloodshot from the evil running in my veins. He looks scared, as if he’d seen a ghost. I lock my ice-cold glare on him, my lips pulled back into a sneer. Out of the corner of my eye, I see Mikey smirk in delight. Has she been waiting for me to show my true feelings towards Pete? Or is she in the moment simply proud of what I have become?

I pick up a small cattle prod (at least nine inches long and five inches across) and, mouthing to Pete the words “You’re next, Wentz” I shove the cattle prod up the ass of the female slave in front of me, turning it up full blast. As the entire room begins to smell her flesh burning from the inside out, I turn back to Pete and extend my thumb, slowly making a slicing motion across my throat as I spit in Wentz’s direction. When the slave finally stops thrashing, her blood still dripping onto the stage, I take a sledgehammer and proceed to smash her body over and over until she sags down the cross, not a bone unbroken. I then proceed to do the same to the male on the other cross, this time finishing with a few swings into the back of the slave’s skull until brain matter splatters the stage.

As I leave the stage covered in blood and bits of brain, I head up to the box to find Mikey alone. “Where’s Pete, Mikey?” I ask innocently. Mikey laughs, her eyes ablaze with delight. “He thought of something that he forgot to do and left, Damian. I think you scared him to death, darling!” Mikey stands, pushing forward until our bodies collide. Taking my hands in hers, she seductively comments “Come on, love. I’m so proud of you! Take your mate home and fuck her into the mattress…”

Around three hundred years later, rumors of revolution reach us from the Light realm. Vampires there slowly took over the realm, finally coming out of the shadows. They began taking humans as slaves, in much the same way that we did in the Dark realm. A group of elite vampires gathered into a central Council, with one vampire from each country serving a vampire King that leads the Council.

Mikey disregards the rumor, but I take it seriously, sending spies to get to the truth. If I am honest with myself, the one thing I can’t stand about my mate is her hubris. Maybe it’s my recent military training, but if the enemy is banding together, they will eventually become a problem for our realm. We need to be ready for anything.

I begin to keep close tabs on what develops in the Light realm. A mini war soon breaks out there, with many families fighting for control of the Council. I bring this to Mikey’s attention, suggesting that this would be the perfect time to attack the Light realm. Mikey brushes off my suggestion. “Damian, thanks to you, we have tripled our army. I do not believe that this is the time to attack. Let’s wait and see who becomes King, then try to negotiate with him or her when they take the throne. We clearly have the superior army. I am not worried, darling. All will be well.” Frustration showing through every pore of my body, I try again. “My Queen, we should…” Mikey’s eyes narrow as she snaps “ENOUGH, DAMIAN! We will deal with the Light realm MY WAY! Enough of your insolence!” With a sneer on my face, I turn on my heel and storm out of the room.

My head spy informs me the last name of the vamp who eventually won King of the Council—Toro. Never heard of him. My sources tell me that he is an egotist with a mean streak. Just the kind of leader that I was worried about taking over.

Without telling Mikey my intentions, I make a solitary trip to the Light realm. I want to talk to this vamp myself, size him up, see for myself.

The Council hall isn’t very large but is beautifully decorated. I find a page standing at the back of the hall, trying his best to look important. I ask him for a meeting with King Toro, and the page hurries off to do my bidding.

Fifteen minutes drag by. I’m just about to search for another page to ask what is taking so long, when a tall, muscular vamp with bushy hair walks up to me, a friendly smile on his handsome face.

“Hello! I hear that you are looking for a meeting with the King. Well, he’s tied up in a meeting with his advisors now. Is there something that I can help you with?” The vamp holds out his hand, his smile never wavering. “I’m the King’s son. My name is Ray Toro.”

Chapter Text

It was easy to strike up a friendship with Ray. Being the King’s progeny, he would often tell me that his father was too busy running the realm to spend much time with him. This allowed me the perfect opportunity to build a friendship with Ray without his finding out who I really am.

After a few visits, Ray and I started canvasing vampire bars together. I could tell that he was anxious to find a mate, someone to share his life with. Everywhere we went, male and female vamps flocked to his side, fighting for his attention. Ray was smart enough to realize that they all wanted him for his connection to the King, not for anything else. I felt sorry for the poor vamp. Ray was funny, friendly and easy to talk to. He didn’t deserve to be alone.

Mikey became furious with me when she found out that I had befriended Ray. “Dam, just what the FUCK were you THINKING????? What if he were to find out who you really are? Did you even think for one SECOND that you could put this realm in jeopardy if your identity was discovered??? How could you be SO FOOLISH???” Following her as she stormed around the castle in a rage, I tried to explain my side of things. “Baby, if you would just LISTEN!!!” I ended up stepping in front of her to stop her forward motion, the two of us coming to a halt on top of one of the tower’s battlements. “Look around you, Mikes. This is the realm that you have ruled for so fucking long. This is the realm that you have asked me to help you defend as your King. Do you REALLY think that I would purposely jeopardize it all for a trivial trip to the Light realm??? NO, I wouldn’t!” Mikey crosses her arms over her chest, her expression set with an eyebrow raised to the heavens. “I went to visit their King, that is true. But I covered my tracks. He would never have found out who I was! It was simply fate that I ended up meeting the son instead. I was able to make a good connection there, honey. Ray is very knowledgeable about the background workings of his realm. I have managed to get him to disclose a few helpful things so far, love.” I step forward to wrap my arms around Mikey, even though her body remains stiff in my arms. “The more I find out, the better for all of us, Mikey.” Then I get hit with an idea. “Why don’t you go with me to meet him, love?” Mikey grumbles something under her breath. “We can create a spell to hide our real identities. I can simply invite you to our next evening out as my ‘friend.’ That way, you can try your hand at getting information out of him. I know that is your specialty, love.”

It takes me two full weeks to convince Mikey to go with me to the Light realm to meet Ray. I was to meet him at a vamp bar called “The Bite,” which was an intimate bar with a dance floor and different bands playing each night. Mikey, against her better judgement, agrees to go with me. “If it all starts to go belly up, I’m leaving, Dam.” I agreed with her as she takes my hand and mumbles a spell. “There. Our Dark realm identities are now cloaked. Just one more thing…” Seconds later, Mikey is standing in front of me in men’s clothing. “The last thing I need is to be asked a million questions about my attire. Let’s go, Damian.” With a final sigh from Mikey, I close my eyes and the two of us end up in an alley next to the bar.

Mikey lets go of my hand as we enter the crowded bar. I lead her to the VIP section in the back, where Ray told me he would be. We find him surrounded by hangers-on, each jockeying for his attention. Ray turns to us with a smile when he recognizes me in the crowd around him. “Damian! I’m so glad you’re here!” Ray’s eyes then land on Mikey, who graces him with a small smile, dimples showing. “And who is this lovely creature you brought with you?”

I look quickly from Mikey to Ray. “Ray, I’d like to introduce you to Michael James Way. I hope you don’t mind that I brought her with me. I think the two of you will get along famously.” Mikey steps in front of me, hands reaching out towards Ray. “It’s a pleasure to meet you, Prince Ray. Please call me Mikey! Damian has told me so much about you, I feel as if I know you already!” Ray stands, taking both Mikey’s hands in his and laying gentle kisses on the backs of them. “The pleasure is mine, Mikey! Please, both of you join me.” With a stern look to the hangers-on surrounding him, they scurry off to find something else to amuse them. Mikey sits down next to Ray, their knees bumping. I take a seat on the opposite side, calling out to a waitress for a pitcher of blood and three glasses.

Mikey concocted the perfect story to explain her (and by extension, my own) background story. She tells Ray that she lives on the Ice realm, which is the farthest realm in the cosmos. Mikey explains that she met me during childhood, long before we became vampires. Mikey’s tale twists and turns until even I’m not sure how she is keeping the information straight in her head. Mikey tells Ray that she is a princess in her home realm, that she is next in line for the throne. Finally, she tells Ray that recently she visited me in the Light realm, and that was when I told her all about Ray. “He spoke so highly of you, I just HAD to meet you!” Ray blushed at Mikey’s words, a bright smile on his handsome face.

Mikey turns on the charm all evening, much the same way that she did to me when we first met. It takes no time at all until Ray is totally enraptured by Mikey’s wiles. After just an hour, Mikey manages to place her hand on Ray’s bicep, exclaiming over how large it is. She manages to shift closer to Ray as she talks, until their bodies end up touching from end to end. Mikey asks questions about Ray’s life, his turning, his place in the grand scheme of the Light realm. Ray babbles out personal information, as well as discussing certain things about the running of his realm. Mikey nods along at the right moments, exclaiming at Ray’s intelligence. If I didn’t know any better, I would’ve thought the two of them were lifelong friends sharing confidences with each other, instead of strangers who had just met.

By the end of the evening, Mikey makes plans for the two of us to meet Ray a few nights later at the bar. As we depart for the evening, Ray hugs me tightly against him, whispering in my ear “You’ve been holding out on me, Dam! What an enchanting creature! Please make sure she returns.” I mumble in agreement, promising that we would see him in a few nights. Ray turned to Mikey and thanks her for coming, her hand taking his in a tight grip. He pulls Mikey’s hand to his lips and kisses it. “Mikey, it was pure pleasure getting to know you! I look forward to seeing you again.” Mikey then surprises Ray by leaning forward, her lips gently kissing his cheek. “I feel the same way, darling. I will see you in a few evenings.” With that, Mikey smiles then turns on her heels, heading towards the front door.

Once we get home, I ask Mike’s opinion of Ray. “You are correct; he is a sweet vamp. It’s a shame that he is so lonely. Someone like him should have a mate.” Mikey smiles at me her most devious smile. “You and I should do something to help him achieve that goal.”

We continue to spend time with Ray over the next seven months. Eventually, we are invited to a royal event, where Mikey manages to charm Ray’s father. When we are presented to the King, Ray drapes himself all over Mikey as if she were Ray’s possession instead of a close friend. Later that evening, Ray apologized. “You see, my father is a Casanova. If I didn’t respond the way I did, right now he would be trying to get you into his bed. I should’ve explained earlier, I apologize, Mikey dear. Please forgive me.” Mikey smiles at Ray, thanking him for his consideration. “What say we go to The Bite for drinks, darling? That way you don’t have to worry about your father…” I decline the offer, stating that I have an appointment with someone in the Crystal realm in a few hours. As soon as Mikey and Ray leave, I find a secluded spot and then transport back to the Dark realm.

Once at The Bite, Mikey tells Ray that she would prefer to choose a human from the cage in the back room, instead of drinking synthetic blood. This very cage is the same cage that Adam will be placed in the night that Tommy Joe met and rescued him so many years later. (author sidenote: this happened in the beginning of my story Slave, if you haven’t read it.) Ray accompanies Mikey to the backroom, where the two of them look over the humans standing or sitting in the cage. Suddenly Mikey exclaims “Oh Ray! Do you see the one in the back, the one with the black hair and hazel eyes?” Ray makes eye contact with the human, barking out “Come closer, human. My lady wants to see you.” The man slowly moves past the others in the cage until he is standing at the bars. His black hair hangs over one eye, his stance confident even though he must be scared out of his mind at the situation he finds himself in.

Mikey takes one of Ray’s hands in hers, squeezing tightly. “Oh Ray! He would make a beautiful vampire! I wish I lived on this realm; if I did, I would turn him. But he unfortunately cannot live with me…” Ray looks fondly at Mikey. “I’ve always wanted a son, Mikey. I could turn him, keep him with me. You could visit him when you visit me. What do you think, darling?” Mikey bats her eyes at Ray, leaning in to give Ray a kiss on the lips, which makes Ray blush. “Let’s do it, please Ray?” Ray looks back at the human. “What is your name, boy?” Brushing the hair out of his eyes, the human softly replies “My name is Gerard. Most people call me Gee.” Mikey is so excited; she can barely stand still. Ray calls over the vamp in charge of the cage, asking “How much for him?” The vamp replies “Five hundred.” Ray reaches into his wallet and pulls out a handful of bills. “We’ll take him and those two other humans behind him.” When the vamp goes to put binders on Gerard, Ray replies “No, he’s not for a snack. He’s ours.” The other two humans walk out of the cage to immediately be placed in binders. Ray and Mikey lead all three humans into the VIP section of the bar.

Once there, Ray directs Gerard. “Sit on the couch while we have our snack, Gee.” Gerard gingerly sits down, his eyes locked on the floor. Ray and Mikey each take a human in their arms, biting deep into their throats. When they are finished with their meal, they dump the two humans onto the floor for the waitress to clean up.

Ray turns to a frightened Gerard, his voice loud over the music. “Gerard, my name is Ray Toro. This is Mikey Way. Don’t be afraid.” Ray sits down next to Gee, one hand gently reaching out to brush back the hair hanging in Gee’s eyes. “We are here to save you from certain death. I am going to make you a vampire, just like us. You will be my son; we will be family. You will be royalty, never wanting for anything. Do you hear me, Gerard?” No reaction. Ray looks to Mikey for help.

Mikey sits down next to Gerard, taking one of his hands in hers. “Gee, do you have any family?” Eyes still on the floor, Gerard shakes his head “no” in response. “Sweetheart, would you like to have a family?” Shrugged shoulders are the only response they get. “Ray will be your father, and I will be your mother. We will teach you how to interact with your new world, help you adjust to the changes. We will always be there for you.” Mikey gently grabs Gerard’s chin, pulling back until Gerard finally meets her eyes. “You will be loved, darling.”

After a few minutes lost in thought, Gee shakes his head yes. Mikey smiles at Gee, instructing him to sit on Ray’s lap. “It will be easier if you have Ray to hold onto. Please, Gerard.” Gee nods once as he stands, his body shaking as he gently lowers himself onto Ray’s lap. “Mikey, sweetheart? Here, take this money. Will you please buy our boy a couple of sweet treats for after his transition? He’s going to be hungry.” Mikey smiles at Gee before making her graceful way back to the cage where they found Gerard.

Ray strokes Gee’s hair once more, trying to calm him. Gee begins shaking with fear in Ray’s arms, even though he manages to maintain eye contact with him. “Tilt your head to the side, Gee. It will all be over soon, I promise.” Gee nods then tilts his head, his eyes closed. Ray wastes no time, bending down to sink his teeth into Gee’s neck, ignoring his gasp of pain.

As Gee feels himself close to death, he hears Mikey say “They are bringing the humans to us soon, Ray. Do you mind if he takes a turn drinking some of my blood, darling? That way we are truly a family…”

Seconds later, Gee dies in Ray’s arms.

The next thing Gee knows, his eyes are slowly opening. He is still within the circle of Ray’s arms, but he is sucking on Mikey’s wrist. The blood feels cool on his tongue, which helps to ground him. Everything feels sharper, brighter than usual. Then he feels Ray pull on Gee’s neck, the movement detaching Gee’s lips from Mikey’s wrist. Gee cannot help making a whimper of loss as he is set back into Ray’s strong arms.

“It’s okay, son. They will be here in a moment with a few humans for you to feed on. Just be patient.” Voice rough, Gee asks “What do I call the two of you?” Ray smiles down at Gee, a twinkle in his eye. “You may use our names, or call us Mom and Dad, whichever you wish. Technically, I am your maker, and Mikey is your secondary maker. We are now your family.”

Once the humans arrive, it’s Mikey who teaches Gee the ins and outs of drinking from humans. Gee drains three of them dry before he is sated. He then spends the next two hours talking with his new parents, getting to know them. Eventually, Mikey declares that she must leave. “I have a business meeting first thing in the morning, or I would stay. Gee, you are going to be living with Ray now. I promise I will visit you often, never fear. Just remember, we are family now.” Gee rises with Mikey, giving her a hug and kissing her cheek. “Thank you, Mother. I hope to see you soon.” Mikey gently pats Gee’s cheek, then leans forward to kiss Ray on the lips. “Bye Ray. Take good care of our boy.” Ray smiles, saying “Goodnight, love. Safe travels.”

“You did WHAT????” I roar. Mikey spent the next evening filling me in on her eventful time with Ray. “Jesus fuck Mikey! You and Ray MADE A VAMPIRE TOGETHER??? Why the HELL would you do such a thing???”

Mikey takes my hand in hers, squeezing tight. “Darling, please don’t be angry! If you would have only seen this human, you would have done the same thing! And it made Ray oh so happy to have a fledgling, someone to take away his loneliness while he tries to find a mate…” I cut Mikey off by reminding her “YOU helped turn him! Now he’s part evil…”

Mikey throws back her head and laughs. “Did you think I would be so foolish? I created a spell to keep my evil at bay long enough for me to give Gee my blood. Don’t you see why I did this, Damian?” Mikey tries to wrap her body around mine, growling when I push her away from me. “I did this so I could get closer to Ray. This way, we can guarantee that at least one of us stays in his life from now on. You were right, Ray is the key to our taking over the Light realm!”

I start to pace the room. “If I didn’t know any better, Mikey…” I turn back to her, my teeth bared. “…I’d think you’ve fallen for Ray” Mikey laughs her bright laugh, her hands falling in place on her hips. “That’s absurd, Damian! You are my mate. I am yours forever, never fear, darling!” I grunt in response. “That didn’t stop you from bringing Wentz into our lives, did it?”

Mikey throws her hands in the air, her hair hanging in her beautiful face. “Would you PLEASE stop bringing up Pete EVERY TIME we have an argument or you’re not happy about something, Dam? I slept with him and I’m sorry, I have apologized to you a million times over! Would you please LET IT REST???”

“Just once, will you PLEASE put yourself into my shoes for a moment, Mikey?” Mikey gives me a glare but motions for me to continue. “I love you more than anything. I work my ass off trying to make myself good enough to help you run the realm as your King. I go off to war ON YOUR ORDERS, to come home to find you spent most of those two years sleeping with Wentz. I loved you enough to forgive you and allow the relationship to continue. THEN I introduce you to Ray, and you make a fledgling with him!” I swing my arms in the air in a dramatic fashion. “It feels as if I’m not enough for you, Mikey! And all the reassurance in the world isn’t enough to take this feeling of inadequacy from me. I wish I knew what it takes to hold your love, your attention. Sometimes I wonder if you love me at all.” With one more sad glare, I leave Mikey standing alone in the study while I try to find someone or something to escape the pain.

I end up in a nearby village. Luckily for me, a group of soldiers are standing in a group in the town square, doling out punishments on a group of helpless humans. I join their escapades, walking away towards home covered in blood from head to toe, with a heavy heart but a huge smirk on my face.

Mikey continues to spend her every free minute with Ray and Gerard. I eventually meet Gerard, immediately finding him wanting in many aspects. Sure, he was beautiful, but he was nothing special to speak of. I’m not exactly sure how much of my observations are based on my dislike for the circumstances of his birth, or truly seeing deficiencies in the new vamp. It takes everything I have in me to keep from ripping his head off when I am introduced to him one evening at Ray’s house.

“You’re not mad Mikey and I made Gee together, are you, Dam?” Ray asks me one evening a month after Gee’s turning. Watching Mikey gently brush hair out of Gee’s eyes, and the smile Gee gives her in return, I blurt out “Of course not! What would give you that idea, Ray?” even though I would really prefer to stake Gee out in the sun until he dissolves. “I’m glad you have a son. It must help with the loneliness that you were feeling, Ray.” With a fond look toward mother and son, Ray’s eyes turn soft as he replies without thinking “You’re right, Damian. I finally have the family that I always wanted.” With a smile, Ray walks over to Mikey, putting his arm around her middle as she kisses Gee on the forehead.

Little do I know it at the time, but this evening is the beginning of the end of my relationship with Mikey. It is a moment that will lead to the pain and destruction of many individuals throughout the coming centuries, all by my hand. This is where the story of my life plummets straight into hell, with no chance at redemption in sight.

Chapter Text

"What's the worst thing I can say
Things are better if I stay
So long and goodnight
So long and goodnight
Well if you carry on this way
Things are better if I stay
So long and goodnight
So long and goodnight
Helena--My Chemical Romance

Current day…

A few days later, I receive a mental message from Trick as I’m speaking to a few courtiers in the Dark realm’s castle.

“Damian, are you there?” I quickly excuse myself from my conversation, walking away with a terse nod towards Stephan. “Hello, Trick. What can I do for you?”

There is a brief pause before I hear a sigh of relief. “Frank and Pete just left for a few days. They are trying to find a way to break through the enemy’s magic. Is there a chance that you can turn me while they are gone? That way, I will be ready to help the family as soon as Mikey takes over the Dark realm.” I mull it over in my mind for a minute. Having both Pete and Frank gone is indeed a blessing in disguise. This will also give me an opportunity to have a private conversation with Gerard before turning Trick. “I’ll be to see you in a little while, Trick. First, I’m going to visit Gee, then I will turn you tonight, I promise. Get some rest, you’re going to need it. See you soon.” I immediately head to an empty room then head off to the Light realm.

Gerard opens the door when I knock, covered in acrylic paint and charcoal pencil. Without thinking, I blurt out “Using yourself as a canvas, Gee?” Gee stares at me in disbelief, as if shocked that I would try to visit with Frank away. After a few seconds, Gee backs up to allow me to enter. “Come in, Damian. I was just getting out my frustrations through art. What brings you to my suite?”

Taking the seat on the couch that Gee indicates, I answer “I was hoping to have a private word with you. Hopefully you aren’t uncomfortable with my being here? If so, I will leave.” Gee sits down next to me on the couch, leaving little daylight between us. “I’m fine, truly, Damian. What is it that you wish to discuss?”

I quickly fill Gee in on Trick’s situation. “I was wondering if you would like to sit with us while I turn Trick. You know the usual protocol is to have someone with you, in case something goes wrong.” I reach out and take Gee’s hand in mine, squeezing a little. “Adam and Mikey are in a private meeting, making plans for her takeover, and Ray is at a Council meeting. I would understand if you said no, Gee. I know that asking you is really putting you on the spot. If you are worried that Pete or Frank will find out, I will try to find someone else, or go it alone.” I look deep into Gee’s eyes as I admit “Turning humans makes me nervous.”

For a moment, I think Gee is going to turn me down. But after a few minutes of mulling things over, I feel pressure on my hand as Gee squeezes it. “Damian, I love Trick very much. He saved my life once. I would love to be there when he becomes a vampire. Thank you for asking me to be a part of his turning.” Gee sighs, suddenly looking tired and sad. “Gee darling, what’s wrong? Anything I can help you with?” The second the question passes my lips; Gee’s eyes fill with tears. “You can tell me, honey. What happened?”

With a sigh, Gee wipes away tears. “I’m sorry to always be crying around you, Damian. Lately all I seem to do is cry.” Without thinking, I take Gee into my arms. “You can confide in me, Gerard. Sometimes it’s just easier to talk to someone who isn’t a part of the situation.”

Gee proceeds to tell me about a conversation that happened right before Frank left. “I finally felt that I had Frank’s full attention, so I asked him to talk with me before he left. He seemed in a hurry, so he kinda rushed me through what I wanted to say. You see…” Gee looks downwards, not meeting my gaze “…for a while now, I have been feeling…different. I’m not sure if it’s because I’m a werepire, with both vampire and werewolf DNA, or because I’ve given birth to pups, or if it’s because I’m just having an enlightenment of some kind. I have been feeling feminine for the first time in my life. When I’m alone, I put on a dress that I keep hidden in the back of my closet. I’ve even gone as far as to shave my legs on a regular basis. I told Frank everything, even explaining that I want to change my pronouns to he/they. Frank’s reaction was not what I expected.” I feel anger begin to rise within me. “Let me guess. He gave you pushback, correct?” Gee’s tears fill in the blanks. “No, he didn’t. He was dismissive. He told me that he, as the family healer, will deal with my hormones when he returns home. I don’t even think that he was listening to me. I…” Gee rests their head on my shoulder, shaking with the flood of tears leaving trickles of water on my leather vest “…feel so alone, Damian. Especially since Jay was killed four months ago.”

I give Gee a tight hug. “Well, I’m listening, and you are not alone. I’m so sorry that you lost Jay honey. I know how much he meant to both you and Frank. But let me be the first to say that I am proud of you for your self-discovery, and I will gladly use your pronouns from now on. I’m not sure what is going on with Frank, but I do know that underneath it all, he loves you very much.” I rock Gee back and forth like a baby, my hand gently running through their hair. “Honestly, I think that all the years healing the family and providing whatever magic the family required, as well as being the main protector, has taken its toll on Frank. It’s made him obsessed with protecting the family at all costs, which I can understand but it isn’t fair to you. And of course, my being back in the picture isn’t helping anything.” Gee snorts at my comment, making me laugh. “I just wish he would let it the fuck go and meet me halfway. It drives me crazy that all he wants to do is fight with me or try to find a way to get rid of me. He needs to understand that I’m here to stay, I’m not going anywhere, no matter how hard he tries. The only way that I will leave this family will be if Mikey demands it, and I’ll still fight her on my way out the door.”

Gee raises their head to stare into my eyes. “I hope that day never comes, Damian. I’m glad that you are here with us. Thank you for your kind words.” I squeeze Gee tightly, brushing back Gee’s hair from their sweaty forehead. “I meant them. Gee, I have an idea.” Reaching to the side table for the box of tissues, I hand them to Gee as I ask “Why don’t you go get cleaned up, and then put on your dress? I’m sure it will make you feel better.” Gee wipes their face, eyes locked on mine. For a moment the two of us stare deep into each other’s eyes, as if we are trying to judge each other’s next moves in a game of chess. Gee leans forward, their lips brushing my cheek for a brief kiss. Breath shaking, Gee softly says “I…think that’s a good idea, Dam. I’ll be right back.” I release my hold on Gee, who stands up on shaking legs to leave for their bedroom.

A short time later, I look up to see Gee standing shyly in their bedroom doorway. All signs of paint and pencil are gone, revealing creamy white skin. They are wearing a tight-fitting black velvet and lace long sleeve dress, which ends just below their knees. A pair of stockings and black kitten heels completed the outfit.

“You are beautiful, Gee.” Gee’s cheeks flame bright red even as they shoot me a happy smile. I stand up and make my way to their side, kissing their hand gently. “Do you feel safe enough in your dress to go to Trick’s room with me? Or should I bring him here?” Gee is quiet for a moment, deep in thought. I know that this is a big step for them, leaving the room in a dress for the first time. With a determined look, Gee gives me a smile. “I’m feeling brave tonight. Let’s go to Trick’s room.” I offer Gee my arm, which makes dimples stand out on Gee’s cheeks as they link their arm through mine. “Then let’s go make Trick happy, shall we?”

We encounter a nervous Trick when we enter his room. Eyes sweeping over Gee’s figure, Trick compliments Gee on their dress. “You look beautiful, Gee! And for once you look happy. You should wear dresses more often!” Gee blushes as they take a seat across from me. “Thank you, Trick.”

After placing the blood bags we brought with us on the coffee table, I reach out my hand to Trick. “Are you still sure you want to do this, honey?” Trick nods, eagerly walking over to stand in front of me. “I do, Damian. How do you want to do this?” I reach out to take Trick’s hand in mine. “It would easier for you to sit on my lap. Is that okay with you?” Trick nods, gingerly moving forward to perch himself on my lap. I hold him close to my chest, my breath stirring his hair. “When you awaken, do not be surprised if you feel lightheaded or dizzy. The lights will be too bright, colors too strong, so you may have to keep your eyes closed for a bit. Just hold onto me and everything will be okay. Gee will be here with us the entire time honey. We will give you the blood bags as soon as you finish feeding from me. Are you ready? This is your last chance to back out, Trick.”

Trick stares at me, a large smile gracing his handsome face. “I’m ready, Damian. Let’s do this.” I then brush the hair away from Trick’s neck, my heart beating faster. “Then tilt your head towards Gee, love, and hold on tight.” As Trick turns his head, I sink my fangs into his neck. I feel his entire body stiffen in my arms before relaxing, Trick’s hand reaching out towards Gee, who takes it in their tight grip. I glance up at Gee, who is watching intently for any sign of trouble.

In my mind’s eye, Trick’s memories are slowly revealed to me. I see Trick as a little boy dressed in rags. I feel his pain as he is beaten by a slave trader when he was just eight years old, see him stand proudly as the whip removes skin from his back. I watch a young Trick kneel before Andrew, who jerks Trick’s head upward until their eyes meet for the first time. I feel Trick’s fear and awe as he follows Andrew into his large house, Trick’s hands tied behind his back. Through Trick’s eyes, I see his first encounter with Pete, feel the instant love that Trick feels for Pete. I feel the anguish and longing Trick feels for Master Andrew when they move to the Light realm, feel Trick’s rejection and sorrow when Andrew turns his back on Trick, severing their bond. I watch Trick’s rage when he realizes that Pete tricked him into marriage in the Dark realm. I experience Trick and Pete’s wedding ceremony in the Light realm, feel Trick’s happiness. I feel the sadness and longing Trick felt about Pete’s rejecting his request to be made a vampire. I feel the joy growing inside Trick at his opportunity to make his turning a reality.

I hear Gee’s breath hitch when Trick’s head falls back in my arms, his last gasp right before he dies loud in our ears.

I detach my fangs, my stomach lurching nervously. I hate this part. I rip open my wrist, immediately placing it to Trick’s lips. I am filled with delight as I feel our bond begin to grow. When it takes longer than usual for Trick to come around, Gee reaches out and takes my other hand. “You’ve given him too much blood, Dam. Let me, please.” Gee then tears open their wrist, replacing my wrist with theirs. After a few minutes or so, Trick’s eyes fly open, a look of panic on his face. I lean down and whisper in his ear “Easy Trick. Gee is giving you some of their blood. You’ve made it! You’re a vampire now love.” As Gee pulls their wrist away, Trick licks his lips and then blurts out “I love you, Dam. You too, Gee. Thank you both.” Gee and I exchange looks, smiles on both our faces. “We love you too, Trick. Here, darling, sit up a bit and we will give you the blood bags now.” Trick responds by burying himself even deeper into my arms, his eyes half closing. “It’s bright in here, Gee. Will it always be so bright?” Gee smirks as they hand Trick the blood bag. “You will adjust, never fear, Trick. Just be patient.” Trick nods as he sips at the bag. “Damian is your primary maker, and since I gave you my blood as well, I am your secondary maker. We are both here for you, honey. We will help you find your footing in this new life of yours.” Watching Trick sip at his blood bag, I run my fingers through his hair as I softly say “In a short amount of time, darling, I will be forced to live in the Dark realm as their King. I hate the idea that we will be separated, but I won’t leave until I know for sure that you are settled in your new life. And as always, you will have Gee here with you, for whatever you need. We will make sure your new life is as happy as it can be, darling.”

An hour later, I find Adam in his and Tommy’s room. With a quick kiss hello I comment “Adam, I have a request for you that is out of the ordinary.” I quickly tell Adam about Trick’s turning. “Trick and Gee are both feeling a bit…needy, and with good reason. They want me to stay the night with them. The problem? The last thing the two of them need, is to end up with my scent in either of their beds. Pete and Frank would wig the fuck out. So…” I wrap my arms around Adam, practically begging “…can the three of us sleep with you tonight?” Surprise then acceptance crosses Adam’s face. “Sure, honey. The bed is plenty big enough for four. Go get them.” I give Adam a searing thank you kiss before leaving.

Adam greets the three of us as we enter. “Congrats, Trick! Come curl up in bed with us and enjoy your first night as a vampire!” Adam kisses Trick and then Gee hello on the cheek. Taking in Gee’s attire, Adam comments “You look beautiful, Gee! You should dress like that more often!” Gee blushes and thanks Adam, who hands Gee a long shirt to change into. I snuggle into Adam’s side in the bed, opening my arms to Trick, who gratefully crawls into my arms. When Gee returns to the bed, they wrap their arms around Trick from the other side. I laughingly comment “Look at us. A werepire and vampire burrito!” which has all four of us laughing.

Eventually, Trick and Gee fall asleep next to us. I then quietly fill Adam in on the conversation that I had earlier with Gee. Adam gives me a side eye as he drily comments “Seems like you and Gee are getting cozy, Dam.” I raise my head from Adam’s shoulder to stare him straight in the eye. “And you think I’m just doing so to get a rise out of Iero, right?” Adam grunts in answer, suddenly avoiding looking directly at me. “Babes, if I wanted to cause issues with that little brat, the last thing I would do is to purposely put Gee in the middle. They don’t deserve that, it’s bad enough that they must deal with that jackass on the daily! I’m a bastard but not THAT much of a bastard! Iero is going to wig out when he finds out that Gee not only was a part of Trick’s turning but is his second maker! Add Wentz to the mix and you end up with a shitstorm!” Adam begins to play with my hair, running his fingers through it. “Then why did you allow Gee to be there, Dam? You’ve changed humans before without trouble. I mean, there’s Tommy…” When he doesn’t receive an immediate response from me, Adam asks “Dam? What happened…”

Tears fill my eyes. “After Tommy, there was a young girl named Maria. She begged and begged me to make her a vampire. When I did, she never woke up. I gave her practically all my blood, and she…” I shake my head to clear it. “And then there was a man by the name of Andre. Big, strong, healthy as can be. He woke up briefly but then slipped back into a coma of sorts. Never woke up again. I ended up having to destroy both of them.” I look into Adam’s eyes, a sigh on my lips. “See dear, it wasn’t always fun and games. I was nervous to change Trick by myself, so I asked Gee if they would be there with me. I told them that I would do it alone if necessary, but Gee wanted to be there for Trick. If I did something wrong, then I’m sorry.” Adam sighs in my ear, pulling me into a tighter hug, fingers ghosting over my chest and side. “Baby, I’m sorry to upset you like that. It’s just that, with things being as they are with this war, we need as much unity as we can get. But you are right, only Gee could’ve made that decision for themselves. I just hope that they are up to dealing with the fallout. Trick, too. Pete is gonna lose it big time.”

Pete and Frank return home earlier than expected. They find Gee and Trick huddled together in the parlor, giggling like a couple of school children. The moment that Pete scents Trick, he bares his fangs. “Trick? WHAT THE FUCK DID YOU DO???”

At the same time, Frank’s attention is focused on Gee, who is wearing a pale blue silk princess dress, their feet bare. Frank walks up to Gee carefully, as one would approach a rabid dog. “Gerard, why the hell are you wearing a DRESS? And why do the two of you smell like Damian?”

Trick slowly stands, crossing the room to come to a stop in front of Pete. “Honey, I know that this is a shock to you, but I…” Pete screams at the top of his lungs “That bastard Damian! I’ll fucking KILL HIM for turning you against your will! I’ll…” Trick grabs Pete’s arm, his expression begging Pete to listen to him. “He didn’t turn me against my will! I BEGGED him to turn me! He only did as I asked! Please, Pete, for the love of God LISTEN TO ME!!!...”

Pete and Frank give Trick a look of shock and disbelief. “You ASKED him to turn you? Why in the FUCK would you do such a thing? When I’m here to…”

Trick’s reserve snaps. His fangs bared, he pushes Pete backwards, his fist connecting with Pete’s face. “YOU FUCKER!!!! How many times did I cry, did I BEG for you to change me? Every time you’d laugh it off, laugh in MY FACE how I was being stupid, how I didn’t know my own mind! Well, you don’t have to laugh at me anymore. I have others in my life that actually love me and care about my needs, even if you do not.” Gee moves to Trick’s side, wrapping their arm around Trick’s middle in a show of support. This sets Frank off. “Gerard, you…you helped turn Trick? You AND Damian???” Gee raises their chin in the air in a show of defiance. “How could you help that bastard…” Gee quietly responds “Yes, I am Trick’s second maker. I held his hand as Damian turned him, then I gave him my blood. Why wouldn’t I? I love Trick, I would do anything for him.” Turning searing eyes on Pete, Gee continues “Maybe you should’ve considered that, before Trick went to someone else to get what he needed. You have no one to blame but yourself, so you can’t bitch at the outcome.” Turning to Frank, Gee yells “Yes, I’m in a dress, genius. Get used to it, because I’ll be wearing one from now on, if you like it or not. I’m sick of hiding my true self from you. I don’t need your biting sarcasm. Both of you need to get over yourselves, you’re not the center of the world like you think you are. Trick and I have rights, and from now on we are going to exercise them, regardless of what you or the world thinks.” Trick takes Gee’s hand in his and the two of them exit the room, leaving Pete and Frank momentarily speechless.

A few nights later, Mikey’s voice echoes through my brain. “Do you have a few minutes for Ray and myself, Dam?” Seconds later, I appear in the living room of their suite. Looking at the happy couple curled up together on their couch, I find it hard to believe that I ever despised the two of them at one point in my past. It seems forever ago when Mikey left me for Ray. Somehow, sitting here with the two of them, it feels as if we all have come full circle.

Ray looks slightly uncomfortable. Hopefully one day he will learn to relax completely in my presence. I know it’s a lot to ask, considering how much damage I’ve done to his family over the years. I chuckle internally as I watch him shift on the couch, pulling Mikey closer to his side.

“Thanks for coming, Dam.” I nod to Mikey, a smile on my face. Her black eyes shine at me in the dimly lit room. “Did you get my communication earlier?” I nod once again, waiting for more information before I answer. “Do you think the plan will work? Or do you have any other suggestions…”

I glance at Ray before addressing Mikey. “Yes, I believe it will work. Though I am surprised that you brought Adam into this, considering his position in the family. You are taking a chance that he may be captured, my Queen.”

Mikey turns her attention to Ray, raking her nails sharply down his inner arm before lacing her fingers through his. For the first time I notice the ring of bruises surrounding Ray’s wrists, then notice a lighter ring around his neck. It seems as if Mikey has been up to her old Dominatrix ways…

“Adam insisted on being a part of Tommy’s rescue. He wouldn’t take no for an answer. I figured this would be the safest way for everyone involved. Did you get my invitation, Dam?” Once again, I nod my head. “Thank you, my Queen. I am honored, to be sure.”

Mikey makes a dismissive gesture, a smirk growing on her lips. “After all this time, I felt I owed it to you, Dam. Especially since you are now my King. Truthfully, I wouldn’t want anyone else in that position.” Mikey shoots Ray a glance, who nods in return. “You know me in ways that no one else does, you understand both my evil side as well as my Light realm side. I trust you implicitly, Damian.” I bow my head, my hand on my heart. “I will never do anything to break your trust, my Queen. I thank you for believing in me.”

Ray softly adds “Damian, we appreciate your turning Trick. That poor boy was too shy to ask either of us, even though it was plain that he was suffering for a long time. And thank you for all the support that you have been giving to Gee. They have blossomed since that conversation the two of you had. Both are happier and stronger than ever, thanks to you.”

I smile at Ray. “It was the least I could do. I’m just sorry that by doing so, I’ve made Pete and Frank bigger enemies than before.” With a sigh I continue “I spoke to Tommy this evening. He is nervous and stressed, considering he is meant to die tomorrow. I tried my best to reassure him that all will go well, that we won’t let any harm come to him. He told me to tell the two of you that he loves you.” I slap my palms on my thighs then stand up. “I better be leaving, so I can give you some privacy on your last night together for a while. I’m sure Andrew is waiting for you…” Ray stands, taking me into his arms for a hug. “Take care of our Queen, Damian. I will see you soon.” I surprise Ray by hugging him tightly in my arms, my lips crashing into his. I hear Mikey’s growl of desire as I deepen the kiss, my tongue brushing against Ray’s as I slide my hands down to Ray’s ass cheeks, squeezing and pulling him closer to me. Ray stands still for a moment; not pushing me away, not pulling me forward. Then suddenly, I feel his hands pull my body closer, I feel him return my kisses as his tongue fights mine for dominance. Instantly, I feel Ray harden against me, making me sigh against his swollen lips.

As the kiss comes to a natural end, I hear Mikey’s voice growl out “The two of you are beautiful together! I wish…” I place a gentle kiss to Ray’s lips, my arms tightening briefly around him. “I’ve always wished, Mikey. I never had the chance before. But you better believe, I’m going to try again in the future!” I smile at Ray, leaning in to kiss his cheek. “Thank you, Ray, for making my dream come true.” Ray sighs out a quiet thank you. I reluctantly let go of him, turning back to Mikey. “I will see you at the appointed time tomorrow. Love you both. I will be spending the night with Adam, if you need me.”

Adam and I spend the next few hours making mad passionate love. Exhausted, Adam lays down next to me, his head on my chest. “Tommy and I are going to miss you, Dam. I hope you can manage to sneak away from time to time to be with us.” I pull Adam closer, my arms tightening around him. “I will try, but I cannot make any promises, love. My main job will be to protect Mikey at all costs, which will be a full-time job! I will sneak away when I can, but I will also be leading the army. My main job is to win this war for the family, so peace can finally reign for a while. Then, and only then, can Mikey and I focus on a way to come back here permanently.” I pull Adam in for a kiss. “I love you and Tommy more than anything, Adam. Please take care of each other for me. Not a minute will go by without my thinking of you.”

Adam and I enter the living room at nine the next morning. Tommy has been whispering to us for a few hours, his nervousness unsettling him. I tell him that I am in the Light realm for a final meeting with the family, before leaving to rescue him. “Hang tight my love, you will be home soon.”

Everyone else in the family slowly enters the room. Adam pulls me into his arms, kissing me fiercely. “How’s my King feeling this morning, darling?” he asks, a smirk crossing his beautiful face. “Worried about you, my love. Please promise me that you will be careful and kiss our boy for me. I’m not sure when I’ll see either of you again.” From behind me, I hear Pete mumble “Hopefully, never again.” The two of us choose to ignore him. After another lingering kiss, Adam and I move to stand at Mikey’s side.

Mikey then address the family. “Adam is going with Dam and I to rescue Tommy. Afterwards, Damian and I will be living in the Dark realm for the unforeseeable future. Dam taught Adam how to silently communicate the same way that Tommy already does. If you need to contact either Dam or I, please relay your message through Adam or Tommy. Now, let me say my goodbyes so we can get going.” Gee moves forward to give me a hug, sadness in their eyes. “I’ll miss you, Dam. Please be careful.” Trick takes me in his arms next, begging me to be careful as well. “I’ll be worrying about you, father. Please stay safe. I love you.” I lean down to whisper in Trick’s ear. “You know how to contact me; you’ve done it before. I just didn’t want Pete finding out, so we didn’t include you in Mikey’s speech. I’m here for you, darling, no matter what! Gee will take care of any of your needs while I’m gone. Please take care of yourself for me. I love you.” Trick nods then crosses the room to stand against the wall, pointily ignoring Pete.

Everyone takes a moment to hug and kiss Mikey and Adam. Ray and Andrew hold onto Mikey longer than the rest, each reluctant to say goodbye. When they finally stand back, sadness in their eyes, Mikey places her hand on top of my hand, with Adam standing directly behind us. Mikey mumbles a few words, and the three of us head off to the Dark realm.

Chapter Text

*You were a hammer to the statue of David
We were a painting you could never frame
You were the sunshine, of my lifetime
What would you trade the pain for?

Sending my love from the other side of the apocalypse
And I just about snapped, don’t look back
Every lover’s got a little dagger in their hand
Love from the other side of the apocalypse
FOB—Love From The Other Side

Are you ready for more of my story, my friend? I promise I will do my very best to keep you from getting bored along the way…

My life began to dramatically change after Mikey became a mother to Gerard. I spent more and more time alone, backing away from Ray and Mikey with every little excuse I could find. To see them together was pure torture. It became harder and harder to plaster a smile on my face while I watched the two of them share stolen glances and little touches right under my nose. It was worse than seeing Mikey with Wentz.

Over time, I feel my soul shrink, slowly turning to stone. Little did I know that this was the beginning of my slow slide into Hell’s abyss. I try to fight it, to remove the coldness from my body and mind to no avail. When I look deep into the mirror each day, I do not recognize myself. Deception becomes easier as time goes by—hiding my real self from Mikey, Ray and everyone else becomes the norm.

Mikey angers me over the amount of time that she spends in the Light realm. The Vampaire becomes rudderless with their leader gone so often, becoming unproductive and worthless. With Mikey refusing to make me the leader of the Vampaire, I do the next best thing. I send a mental message to Mikey, telling her that I am taking over the rulership of the Dark realm from her. When her offhanded response to my demand is a simple “Sure, Damian, whatever” in a rage I disband the Vampaire, taking full power unto myself. For the next fifty-three peaceful years, I lead the Dark and Crystal realms without a consort.

*Last year’s wishes are this year’s apologies
Every last time I come home
I take my last chance to burn a bridge or two
I only keep myself this sick in the head
‘cause I know how the words get you off
We’re the new face of failure
Prettier and younger but not any better off
Bulletproof loneliness at best, at best
Me and you setting in a honeymoon, if I woke up next to you.
FOB—I’m Like a Lawyer

One fateful evening, rumors reach me from the Light realm. A trusted spy informs me that Ray’s father is planning to attack the Dark realm. I immediately demand Mikey come home. “I’m in the middle of something, Dam. What’s so important?” echoes through my head. “I NEED YOU HERE, Mikey! Have you forgotten that you are the fucking Queen of the Dark realm? Is Ray all you fucking want now? I thought you were MY MATE! The realm and I need you HERE…” Seconds later, Mikey stands in front of me, hands on her hips. “What the fuck could be so important, Dam? You’ve been doing an amazing job leading the realms, you don’t need me…”

It takes everything I have to keep from wrapping my hands around her throat. “Oh, I don’t know Mikey. How about THE LIGHT REALM INVADING THE DARK REALM??? Could THAT be important enough for you to return??? You are the one living there, the LEAST you can do is to keep me updated on what is going on, instead of leaving me to rely on rumors and inuendo? I thought that you were spending time in the Light realm so you could keep an eye on things, to find out their plans. Or are you too busy spending all your time fucking Ray?”

To my surprise, instead of denying my words, Mikey blushes at my accusation. Nothing like giving yourself away! I feel my stomach flip over, feel more of my soul crack and break off.

“Damian, I’m NOT fucking Ray!” I throw my head back and laugh at the top of my lungs. “I’ve never seen denial make you blush before, Mikey! For someone as evil as you are, you are a terrible liar. The least you can do is give our relationship one small shred of honesty, by telling me the truth for once!” Mikey’s face turns redder, her eyes on the floor. “Believe what you want, Dam. You anyways do. I’ve always loved you, but you refuse to believe me when I tell you so. Are you sure that YOU are not the one with the problem? You never come to the Light realm to visit anymore. Ray and Gee are always asking about you, always disappointed when you never show up. Can YOU face the truth, Damian, that YOU are the problem, that YOU are the one who pulled away from ME?”

When I refuse to immediately acknowledge Mikey’s words, she continues “Yes, Ray’s father is planning to attack this realm, in a very short time. I told Ray and Gee last night that I will have to return to the Ice realm shortly to take the throne, as a cover story for my having to leave. When the attack is imminent, I will return here to help you lead us into battle. You should have a little faith in me, Dam. I wouldn’t let you down…” I grunt in response, my eyes practically rolling out of my head. “That is yet to be seen, Mikey. I’ll believe it when I see it.” Mikey steps closer to me, her cold lips gently brushing my cheek. “Dam, I’m so sorry that I stayed away so long.” Batting her eyes at me, Mikey asks “Do you forgive me?” With a smirk on my lips, I respond “That depends. Do you forgive me for disbanding the Vampaire?”

Mikey’s eyes blaze, her face turning white. “YOU did WHAT DAMIAN??? The Vampaire is the most important ruling body here! How could you…” I cut Mikey off by laughingly asking “They were so important, you didn’t even know they were gone, right, Mikey?” Lightning and thunder echoes throughout the room, the temperature dropping until I can see my breath. “Are you angry that you were gone so long that you didn’t notice, or are you mad at me for changing all that you used to hold dear, honey? You cannot fault me for making the realm as strong as it is, or for having the balls to make the changes that you didn’t take the time to see. Your anger is misplaced, Mikes. You should be angry at yourself, not me and my decisions. If you were here, you’d know I love you enough to take on anything, to do the very best that I can to run this realm as if it were truly my own. Maybe you should put your priorities in order, darling.” With that said, I blink and head to the Crystal realm with a heavy heart.

*The tombstones were waiting
They were half-engraved
They knew it was over
Just didn’t know the date
And I cast a spell over the west to make you think of me
The same way I think of you
This is a love song in my own way
Happily ever after below the waist
Best friends, ex-friends till the end
Better off as lovers
FOB—Bang the Doldrums

Dear friends, I will not bore you by describing all twenty-six years of war between the Light and Dark realms. Mikey did indeed come home at the beginning of the war as she promised, ruling with me, and leading the army to many victories along the way. She still managed to sneak off to visit Ray and Gee on a semi-regular basis, keeping up the illusion that she was ruling the Ice realm. When she was home with me, we slept together, with Mikey making love to me as if I were her one and only. If only that were true…

When Mikey and I fought in battle at the front of the army, we would use a glamour to hide our true identities from the Light realm. This was Mikey’s idea, and I whole heartily agreed with her. The last thing we needed was for Ray to find out that we were the true leaders of his enemy’s realm and army.

I stepped up the importation of human slaves from other realms, some purchased and some even stolen. I instituted a group of vampires whose only job was to create other vampires from some of these humans, as fast as they possibly could. Soon the population of our realm was bursting at the seams, with all vampires receiving military training. Throughout the war, I constantly surprised Mikey with my military and leadership skills. My main priority was to make sure that we always had enough soldiers and humans to sustain the realm.

We encountered Ray in battle a few times over the years. Ray was a fierce leader, placing himself in the thick of the battle whenever he could. Mikey and I would engage him in hand-to-hand combat, making sure that these battles always ended in a draw without any real damage inflicted on Ray or, if possible, his men. Most of the time we would simply withdraw our troops so Ray would be forced to change tactics and attack another flank, giving Mikey or I the chance to disappear.

One evening, Mikey was leading her division of soldiers into battle against Ray and his men. There was a commotion at the front of the line, which caused Mikey to take her eyes off the battle in front of her just long enough for Ray’s sword to slice Mikey’s side and face wide open. She fell at Ray’s feet, and it was a miracle that her men moved fast enough to remove her before Ray could make a killing thrust. She was brought to me at the castle, where I tried my hardest to heal her. Unfortunately, the sword that Ray used was bewitched, keeping the wounds from closing.

The door to our suite slammed open, and a small man entered. He approached us as I frantically rip open my wrist, intending on giving Mikey my blood so she would stay alive.

“You needn’t do so, King Damian. I can heal the Queen…” as I raise my eyes to his, I see a twinkle in them. “…for a price.”

As I watch the puddle of Mikey’s blood grow larger under her, I bark out “What price? What do you want from me?” The man takes my hand and my wrist immediately closes. “You, my King. I want you. It’s a small price to pay, to save the Queen, don’t you think?”

Mikey mumbles something I cannot hear. Her lips turn gray, her hair beginning to dry out and crumble onto the floor. I’m running out of time, and I don’t know what else to do. I turn to the man, tears in my eyes. “You vow you can save her?” The man nods, his eyes hooded. “Then heal her. I will then be yours.”

The man moves to Mikey’s side, his hands turning purple, lightning bolts flashing from his fingertips. He gently places his hands on her torn flesh, a stream of what sounds like nonsensical words flowing from his lips. I stand back, tears now running down my face. I watch as the wounds on Mikey’s face and neck close, watch the spilled blood become reabsorbed into her body, her hair returning to its original luster. The man then moves his hands down to Mikey’s side, his mutterings growing louder in the quiet room. It takes a few moments before Mikey gasps, her eyes flying open as the man removes his hands from her. I watch her take a few breaths, see her eyes lock on mine. “Wwwhhhaaat happened, Dam?” Mikey asks, trying to sit up. “This man here saved you, Mikey. Ray cut you open in battle. We almost lost you.” Mikey looks at the man standing next to her, her face still and white. “Wongsudoe? What are you doing here? Why did you save me? You hate my guts…” The man smirks at Mikey, his hands on his hips. “I didn’t come to save you; I came for your King. He is mine now, Queen Mikey. I will take him back to the Ice realm, teach him what it means to be a REAL evil magician.”

I step between Wongsudoe and Mikey, my voice filled with panic as I blurt out “But the war! I cannot…” Wongsudoe cuts me off with a wave of his hand. “The war is now over, my King. Your soldiers surrendered to the Light realm the moment that Queen Mikey was injured. There is no reason for you to stay here any longer, you will come with me.” There is a bright flash, and the next thing I know, I am surrounded by mountains of ice and snow. “Welcome to your new home, my King. It’s time you become who you were meant to be.”

*I love the world but
I just don’t love the way it makes me feel
Got a few more fake friends
And it’s getting hard to know what’s real
And if death is the last appointment
Then we’re all just sitting in the waiting room
I’m just a human trying to avoid my certain doom
If you were church, yea
I’d get on my knees
Confess my love
I’d know where to be
My sanctuary, you’re holy to me
If you were church, yeah, I’d get on my knees
FOB-Church

Wongsudoe leads me through the doorway of his large house. Dark rooms covered in cobwebs give off the feeling of being in a haunted house. Shivering, I cast a spell to warm myself, which brings a smile to Wongsudoe’s face. He gestures for me to sit in a chair in the parlor, the fire in the fireplace doing nothing to warm the room. As I sit down, Wongsudoe offers me a glass of…something dark. “Drink it, young King. The blood that you find here in the Ice realm is thicker than you are used to, but you will get used to it soon enough. You need to drink constantly here to stay warm. I will make sure that you have plenty available.” Looking closer at Wongsudoe, I notice for the first time that he is a human. “You’re not a vampire? Then how…”

“You have many questions, my King. You will find your answers soon enough.” Wongsudoe warms his hands in front of the fire, his back to me. “Do not attempt to return to the Dark realm, youngster. I will let you return when the time is right, and only then. For now, do not consider yourself my prisoner, but think of yourself as a guest in my home. The sooner you learn what you need to, the faster you will return to the truth.”

“And what truth is that?” I ask, my temper rising. “You speak in riddles! How do I know that you will EVER let me go? Why the hell am I here?”

Wongsudoe moves to take a seat in a chair directly across from me. “You will see the truth when you return home. It is a truth that will change all that you are, all that you will become. At this moment, you are unprepared for that eventuality. I will train you, mold you into your true form. Consider this the first day of the rest of your life, young King. Your life is a slate to be written on. When I am finished with you, every human and vamp in all the realms in the cosmos will know your name.”

Early the next morning, Wongsudoe begins my training. His lessons are much more intense than what I experienced with Mikey. The first time that I tried to emulate a spell that Wongsudoe created, I set off an earthquake that brings the roof crashing down upon our heads. With a laugh, Wonsudoe waves his hands and a new roof instantly appears, the debris disappearing in an instant. “Think on a grander scale, my King. Mikey placed your magick in a box. You need to see past the box to reach the new heights awaiting you!” I try again, pushing my power into the heavens above. I hear planets groan as they move from their current trajectory, witness stars slam into each other. This is a changing moment in my undead existence. I’ve never before realized just how powerful I truly am.

I spend a great amount of time on my own practicing magick. I miss Mikey. I miss Ray. Hell, I even miss that sniffling little shit Gerard. I have found a new definition of hell, and it’s based in solitude.

Each lesson with Wongsudoe is followed by a question-and-answer session—my prize for a lesson well learned. Slowly, I learn more and more about my captor. One evening, after a particularly successful session, I get up to nerve to ask “So…why do you hate Mikey so much?”

My new teacher takes a long time to answer me. Finally, with a long sigh, he tells me “Mikey and I learned magick together at one time in our pasts. Our teacher would praise me constantly, at the same time belittling Mikey’s abilities. When our teacher felt that it was time for us to finally leave him, Mikey waited for years until our teacher was dead before making her move against me. She decided to teach me a lesson in ‘pride’ by destroying the only thing that I had left in all the worlds—my darling daughter. Mikey, now the Queen of the Dark realm, had my daughter and I kidnapped and brought before her. I was chained to a St. Andrew’s cross before the throne. My daughter was brought in and stripped, her body whipped, raped, and fed upon. Mikey made sure that my daughter was still alive when she finally directed her guards to tear her apart limb by limb. Try as I might, I couldn’t close my eyes to the slaughter in front of me, thanks to a spell Mikey cast on me. When my daughter was lying dead on the floor, I was released from the cross and thrown upon my daughter’s corpse. Mikey then cast another spell—one that keeps me from dying. Every single night, the memory of my daughter’s death plays out behind my closed eyes. That was Mikey’s parting gift to me, her ongoing revenge.”

I glance down at my drink, my eyes reluctant to witness the pain in Wongsudoe’s gaze. “I’m truly sorry that she did that to you and your daughter. But, if I may—why did you save her? Saving her would be the last thing that I think you would want to do! Why…” Before I can continue, Wongsudoe cuts off my words with “Because I needed to rescue you, Damian. To remove you from that evil bitch’s clutches!” Moving closer to me on the couch, Wongsudoe grabs my wrist tightly. “She doesn’t love you, Damian! She isn’t capable of loving! She uses people to get what she wants from them. She has played you for so many years now. The only thing that you can see is your own loneliness! She will continue to use you, if you refuse to believe in yourself, in your powers. You are here to learn the skills you need to learn, so you can leave her behind for good.”

I sit in silence, blood pumping loudly in my ears. Did Mikey do the things Wongsudoe claims she did? Has Mikey been playing me all along? Or am I simply listening to the demented ravings of a tortured soul? Did he rescue me to save me, or is there another reason behind it all?

“You stole me to get your revenge on Mikey.” Wongsudoe nods, a smirk on his face. “You plan on making me more powerful than her, to turn my heart and mind against her. You want me to destroy her, to make her pay for her sins. You want me to achieve your revenge for you.”

Wongsudoe gives me a broken smile. “That won’t be necessary, my young King. You will achieve your own revenge when the time is right.”

*Please put the doctor on the phone cause I’m not making any sense
Blaming everyone but me for this mess
And my back has been breaking from this heavy heart
We never seemed so far
I’m hopelessly hopeful, you’re just hopeless enough, but we never had it at all
FOB—I’ve Got a Dark Alley and A Bad Idea That Says You Should Shut Your Mouth

I spend the next three months with Wongsudoe. Every night, at the end of a long day practicing magick, I lay in bed alone listening to the hum of evil throughout my body. My thoughts, as always, do a wonderful job keeping me awake. Where’s Mikey? Has she restored herself to the throne? Is she working to restore the realm, or is she now a puppet of Ray’s father? Is Mikey still with Ray, or has she finally gotten her priorities together? And most important of all—does she love me?

I spend a great amount of time dissecting my relationship with Mikey. Truthfully, I know that I have made many mistakes in the time that we were together. At times, I should have been more vocal about my feelings. I slapped Mikey’s hand away instead of focusing on repairing problems. I was stubborn at times, holding back affection when I felt that her love had wandered.

Mikey is the great love of my life. I want no one else. When I return, I will do everything in my power to win her back, to build our love to even greater heights. I can’t wait to hold her in my arms.

One morning, Wongsudoe surprises me by calling me into his parlor. I take the seat that he indicates, a feeling of impending dread filling me. After giving me his usual morning greeting, I’m told “It’s time I return you to the Dark realm, my King. You are ready to face your future. You have all the skills necessary to become the most feared vampire in the cosmos.” A million questions come to mind at once, but Wondsudoe continues “I will always be here for you, my King, even in death. You have one more important lesson to learn, though, before I return you to your home.” When he has my full attention, Wongsudoe takes my hands in his. “You are one of the most powerful beings in the cosmos, Damian. Make sure that you hide your talents and feelings from the world, especially Mikey. Never let anyone know what you are truly capable of! There are those who will try to take your powers from you for their own gain.” I nod once. “Evil can be good for the right reasons. Never take your focus off those around you my boy, especially those you love. Love is a smokescreen in a perfect world. I love you, son.” Within a bright flash, I feel myself transport through space until I find myself standing in a village in the Dark realm.

Light realm soldiers are everywhere. Dark realm vampires are hanging on crosses in the town square, Light realm soldiers torturing them within an inch of their undead lives. With a heavy heart, I leave the village, determined to find out exactly what is going on. The countryside is filled with the shells of empty houses. Military equipment, blood and body parts lie in the fields along both sides of the road. I feel rage rising through my body at the thought of my beloved realm in such a state. When I arrive, I find the castle practically empty, with only a few humans carrying out their duties.

When I enter the throne room, I find Alexandre on the throne, his body language one of a defeated man. “Alexandre! What in the fuck is going on here?”

“Damian!” Alexandre descends the dais to wrap me up in a tight hug. “Where have you been? I’ve had guards searching the realm for you!” As I pull away from Alexandre’s arms, I quickly make up a story to cover my disappearance. “But why are you on the throne, Alexandre? Where’s Mikey?”

Alexandre gives me a look filled with hate. “The second you disappeared; Mikey called for me. She told me that I was to run the realm until you returned. When I asked her where she was going, she mumbled something about finding someone to bind her powers, so she could live in the Light realm. I tried my best to be a good leader, but the Toro’s have instituted a whole host of laws, effectively reducing my ability to lead. I’m so sorry, Damian! I’ve done my best…”

Rage again runs through my body before I remember what Wongsudoe told me before I left him. Hide my feelings, hide my powers. Easier said than done!

I place my hand on Alexandre’s arm. “I thank you for all that you have done, truly. I promise you that I will find Mikey and bring her back home where she belongs.” Hugging Alexandre once more, I turn to leave. “I will be home before you know it…”

Once outside, I take a few deep breaths until I calm down a bit. I think of Mikey, shutting my eyes as I feel myself move through space towards her.

When I open my eyes, I am standing in the doorway to Ray’s bedroom. Ray lays on his back on the bed, Mikey riding him, her head thrown back in ecstasy. I hear Mikey sigh out “I love you” to Ray, watch as Ray repeats the words back to Mikey. I feel cold, alone. Realization finally hits me—this is what Wongsudoe was referring to! This moment that will shape my destiny forever more…

With tears flowing down my face and ice in my heart, I close my eyes once more, letting fate take me as far away as possible from the scene I just witnessed.

*This has been said so many times
That I’m not sure if it matters
But we never stood a chance
And I’m not sure if it matters
If you are the shores, I am
The waves begging for big moons
I’m mailing letters to addresses in a ghost town
(YOU’RE SECRET’S OUT)

I know this hurts, it was meant to (it was meant to)
Your secret’s out and the best part
Is it isn’t even a good one
And it’s mind you don’t, don’t matter
FOB—Get Busy Living or Get Busy Dying

Chapter Text

I knew you were, you were gonna come to me
And here you are, but you better choose carefully
‘cause I, I’m capable of anything, of anything, of everything
Make me your Aphrodite, make me your one and only
But don’t make me your enemy, your enemy, your enemy
So you wanna play with magic?
Boy, you should know what you’re fallin’ for
Baby, do you dare to do this?
Cause I’m comin’ at ya like a dark horse…
Katy Perry—Dark Horse

As I open my eyes, I discover that fate has taken me to the Hall of Mirrors in the Crystal realm. I find myself alone except for my own reflection, which is repeated in so many mirrored panels around the room. I do not recognize the vamp staring back at me, eyes crazed and face red and strained with pent up emotion. Overwhelmed with rage, I throw myself onto my knees, tears flowing down my face. I pound on the floor as primal screams erupt from the depths of my being, circular thoughts floating through my mind. Why doesn’t she love ME? Why am I not good enough for her? Why doesn’t she want her MATE, the one who should be closest to her than any other vampire? What have I done that was so bad that she felt she had to turn to another?

After a few minutes of self-loathing and internal questions, I decide to ask the bitch herself for the answers I seek. Shaking, I slowly stand up, closing my eyes briefly against my reflection. When I open them again, Mikey appears in front of me, a shocked look on her face. She is naked, her body covered in sweat, her hair sticking to her face. After a few seconds of pure panic, Mikey starts her lie with a shaky voice. “Hello, Dam. You caught me on my way to the shower…”

I charge Mikey, slamming her backwards into the closest mirror. “More lies, darling? Well, you got at least one thing right. You need a shower; you smell like cheap sex. Did I interrupt your after-coital cuddling?” Mikey opens her mouth to protest, but I’m quicker than she is. “There’s no need to deny it, Mikes. I watched you riding Ray on his bed just a few minutes ago.” A guilty look flashes across Mikey’s face. “You exchanged sickening declarations of love while I stood there, too stunned to act or speak. Well, at least the truth is out, there’s no longer any reason for you to lie or deny it. You just confirmed what I knew all along…” Mikey places her hands against my chest to push me backwards, but I slap her hands away. “For once, I’M in charge here, NOT YOU MIKEY! Here…” with a snap of my fingers, Mikey’s skin is covered with a long black dress. “…seeing you naked is making me want to throw up, knowing where you’ve been…” I shove Mikey into the middle of the room, watch as she stumbles before regaining her footing. With rage seeping through my words, I start my verbal attack. “YOU LEFT THE DARK REALM IN SHAMBLES WHILE YOU FUCK RAY! YOU DIDN’T EVEN STAY AROUND LONG ENOUGH TO TRY TO FIX THINGS, YOU TUCKED TAIL AND RAN! YOU LET ALL OUR HARD WORK GO STRAIGHT TO HELL! AND WHAT’S THIS ABOUT YOUR HAVING YOUR POWERS BOUND, SO YOU CAN STAY IN THE LIGHT REALM PERMANENTLY???” I watch as Mikey once again looks guilty. She tries to placate me by saying “I was going to tell you, Damian! I…” Crossing the room I descend on her; my fists pummeling her face. “DID YOU FORGET THAT YOU MADE ME YOUR MATE? That I was YOUR FAMILY FIRST??? YOU FORCED THE MATING ON ME, AND THEN YOU RUN OFF TO THAT BASTARD!” Mikey tries to protect herself, but she cannot escape the rage being vented on her body by my fists. “YOU HAVE PLAYED ME SINCE THE MOMENT WE FIRST MET. I was dumb enough to fall for it, but NO MORE! The two of us ARE THROUGH!”

I turn away from her, my arms shaking with the effort to keep my hands from doing further damage. After a few moments, Mikey silently walks up behind me, placing her hand on my arm. “Damian…I know that I have made a few mistakes…” I laugh as I wrench my arm free from her grasp. “A FEW? Let’s list them, shall we?” I move close enough to Mikey that I can feel her breath on my face. “You set out from the beginning to make me fall in love with you. You tricked me into learning magick, making me your personal Frankenstein. You made me your mate by force, you promised me FOREVER and then you not only took Wentz to your bed, but MY FRIEND Ray as well! You run away from the realm when it needed you most, destroying the one thing that I love almost as much as you! You made Gerard with Ray, turning the three of you into a family WHILE STILL BEING WITH ME! Mikey, you’ve made more than a FEW mistakes! You have destroyed my life in more ways than one. Unfortunately, I am stuck with you for eternity…”

“No, you’re not.”

I feel all the blood in my body drain to my feet. “Whaaat do you…mean, Mikey?” Mikey locks eyes on mine, her chin defiantly thrust upwards, her arms crossing her chest. “Before I had Koyoto bind my evil so I could live in the Light realm, I severed our mating bond. You are free to love whomever you wish, Damian.”

Dearest reader, I cannot do justice in explaining what happened to me in this moment. Thinking back to the last few months of extreme loneliness and despair that I felt while living with Wongsudoe, I simply chalked it up to just missing Mikey, being away from her for so long. Little did I know that I was feeling this way due to a broken mating bond. Through the years, I’ve heard stories about vampires who lost their mates, and the terrible ordeals that they were forced to suffer through. Most lost their minds, destined to spend the rest of eternity lost and mentally broken. On one hand, it simply proves just how strong I am to have survive as well as I have. One the other hand, I know I am cursed to feel this pain and loneliness for the rest of time—unless I am lucky enough to find someone else who wishes to be my mate…

My mind and body feel like they are on fire, while my heart turns to ice. As I look at Mikey, the only emotion I feel is hatred. Where once was love and devotion, now lies a wasteland of rage. I want to destroy Mikey and Ray. I want to see their realm burn to the ground with them in it. I want to see them suffer as I am suffering.

Thinking of Wongsudoe, I take a deep, ragged breath. He would want me to control my emotions, to make sure that Mikey has no ammunition to use against me. Mikey may have some idea of the things I learned while I was with Wongsudoe, but she has no idea the true extent of my powers now. I need to make sure that she continues to stay in the dark regarding my capabilities.

Not only that, but I am not exactly sure of the strength of any residual powers that Mikey has left after her binding. True, she can only use her powers for good, but I’m sure that she has enough left to cause me considerable trouble if she sees fit to exercise them.

Mikey takes my lack of response to mean she’s won. Blood running down her face, Mikey carefully takes my hand in hers, softly begging “Please understand, Damian. I had no idea that I would fall in love with Ray! I know now that my place is in the light realm at his side. You and I were never really meant to be, darling.” When I stay silent, she warily continues “I still love you, Damian! I cannot help it that I love Ray more. I hope you understand.” Batting her eyes at me, she tries to butter me up further by saying “You will always have a place in our lives, darling! You are part of our family…”

I close my eyes for a moment, considering my options. I could continue to beat the living hell out of the bitch before sending her back to Ray. Unfortunately, that would only give me momentary satisfaction. Or I can play along with her little game, gain the upper hand. The choice is surprisingly simple. Mikey may have destroyed her personal Frankenstein, but I plan to be the victor in the end.

I hear and then feel my mind crack. That is the only way I can describe my instant loss of sanity. I feel free, as if I could achieve anything in my quest for revenge. An odd sense of peace envelopes me. In my broken mind, I hear Wongsudoe speak to me. “She has indeed broken you, my King, but she has not beaten you. Pick up the pieces and plan your next steps carefully. You will find that revenge tastes much better served cold…” I look down at our entwined hands. Wongsudoe is correct—it’s better to take revenge slowly against Mikey. One step at a time, I will make her pay for her sins…

“Please forgive me if I do not believe you, Mikey. You have betrayed me in the worst ways imaginable. There is no place for me in your life anymore.” Mikey grabs my arms, squeezing tightly. “Damian, PLEASE! Ray loves you as much as I do! Please, let us prove it…” As Mikey presses her cold lips onto my cheek, I push her away from me. “A kiss won’t fix everything, Mikes. It will be a long time before I can trust you again. In the meantime, I will return to the Dark realm. I will relieve Alexandre from his duties and be the only ruler.” Mikey gives me a side eye glance, as if she knows a secret. “Or is there something else that I am not aware of?” Mikey responds, her feet shifting back and forth like a child about to be caught in a lie. “Alexandre cannot be replaced on the throne without starting another war, Damian. Ray’s father specifically wanted only him to lead, since he is such a malleable ruler. The last thing anyone wants is another war…”

I glare at Mikey, hands on my waist. “Fine then. I’m sure other peaceful arrangements can be made, for the sake of the realm. Goodbye, Mikey.” As Mikey tries to protest, I snap my fingers and send her back to Ray.

This was all you, none of it me
You put your hands on, on my body and told me
Mmm, told me you were ready
For the big one, for the big jump
I’d be your last love, everlasting, you and me
Mmm, that was what you told me
I’m giving you up, I’ve forgiven it all, you set me free
Send my love to your new lover, treat (him) better
We gotta let go of all of our ghosts
We both know we ain’t kids no more
Adele—Send My Love to Your New Lover

I’ve heard it said that one way to mend a broken heart is to stay busy. I head back to the Dark realm to search out Alexandre, to learn about the new laws that Ray’s father put into place. Once I have absorbed all that Alexandre has to tell me, I take him for a long walk in the woods so I can speak to him privately.

“Tell me, how many of our soldiers are left, Alexandre?” With a sad shake of his head, Alexandre responds “Only ten percent of the soldiers that fought in the war, Damian. The Light realm soldiers are still destroying them at an astounding rate, and their King does nothing to stop it. We will soon be without an army…” I place my hand on Alexandre’s arm. “I plan on restoring our realm to its former glory, Alexandre. Will you fight with me?” Alexandre nods, a smirk on his face. “For the time being, I will need you to continue to be the realm’s figurehead. I will work quietly behind the scenes to put everything in place. I just need you to be patient with me for a while longer, Alexandre.”

I then head to the Crystal realm. Conditions there were even worse than what I had witnessed in the Dark realm. Speaking to the realm’s Ambassador, I find out that there is no longer a standing army. “King Toro has his soldiers flocking to our realm night and day. They own a large population of slaves that they use to strip our land for coal and other resources. Pollution has made the air so foul that our human slaves are getting sick in large numbers, reducing their ability to become blood donors. Our realm’s vampires are starting to starve to death…” I quietly fill the Ambassador in on my plans, asking for him to remain patient with me for the time being. “All will be well in the end, Ambassador. In the meantime…” I close my eyes, casting a spell to improve the air quality surrounding the realm. “…this should help begin to turn things around. I will also send you enough slaves to ensure that all may eat. You will hear from me soon, Ambassador.” The Ambassador bows low before me, thanking me for my visit. “All will be well since you have returned to us, my King.”

My first move is to assassinate Ray’s father. I go out of my way to ensure that guilt couldn’t be traced back to the Dark realm or to Alexandre. I commit the crime myself, cornering the King in a back alley as he exits a vampire club one evening. Set up to look like a robbery gone wrong, I behead the corpse and steal his wallet and keys, leaving his body lying in plain sight. I then close my eyes and head to Ray and Mikey’s home.

Arriving on their doorstep, I ring the bell. Gerard opens the door, his face showing his pleasure at my unexpected visit. “Come in, Damian! I’m so glad you are here! I will go get Mother and Father…” I follow Gee to the front parlor, where I take a seat to await their arrival. Moments later, I hear Mikey’s pleased voice call out “Damian! We’re so glad you are here! Ray and I were just talking about you…” I stand, moving forward to embrace Mikey as if I didn’t hate her guts. “Hope you do not mind my barging in on you like this, Mikey. I know it’s been a while…” Mikey smiles in response. “Of course not, Damian! We are so glad that you are here, aren’t we Ray?” As I let go of Mikey, I feel strong arms embrace me from behind. “I’ve missed you, Damian!” I turn in Ray’s arms, instantly returning his embrace. “I’ve missed you too, Ray. I’ve been so busy in the Ice realm!” Ray calls out to Gee to bring us glasses of blood. “Have a seat, Damian, we have some news to tell you!” Once I’m seated, I look from a very nervous Mikey to a beaming Ray, who blurts out “We’re married, Damian!”

I instantly school my expression into passiveness. The last thing that I want is to give away my true feelings by throwing a fit. Mikey cannot seem to pull her eyes from the carpet in front of her, a blush burning bright on her cheeks. “Congratulations to both of you!” I blurt out, my stomach flipping over. Ray leans towards me, his hand grabbing mine. “I’m so sorry that we didn’t wait till you could attend, but Mikey was insistent that we marry as soon as she moved here from the Ice realm. You understand, don’t you, Damian?” Glancing at Mikey, I squeeze Ray’s hand as I answer “Of course I understand, Ray! I wish the best to both of you.” Mikey claps her hands together in glee, happy that I have decided to go along with the situation. “Ray is building a mansion for us now. We will make sure that there is a bedroom for you, Damian…” I smile at the two of them, pretending that I’m happy as hell for them. “I would like that, Mikey, thank you both for considering me a part of the family.”

I was at Ray’s place for approximately an hour before there is a knock at the front door. Mikey, acting like a 1950’s housewife, sways her way out of the room to get the door. She returns with three Light realm guards.

“Mr. Toro? My name is Andros. I am the head of security for the Light realm. I’m afraid that we have arrived to give you bad news.” Andros proceeds to inform Ray of his father’s passing. “We are sorry about your loss, sir.” When Ray asks what happened, Andros explains “It appears to have been a botched robbery. Your father’s wallet was found nearby, empty except for his identification. It seems that he was attacked as he exited the back door of The Blood Drop Club. As far as we can determine, there were no witnesses to the event, no cameras in the vicinity of the club. I hate to say it, but we may never know who attacked your father.”

As Mikey escorts the guards out the front door, I take a few seconds to cast a spell on Ray to ensure that he doesn’t place the blame for his father’s death on either the Dark realm or Alexandre. When Mikey returns, she sits down next to Ray, wrapping her arms around him. “How terrible, sweetheart! I am so sorry.” Mikey turns her attention to me, looking for any clues so she can accuse me of the foul deed. “I just hope that this isn’t a move from the Dark realm…” Ray shakes his head in response. “No Mikey, if the guards say it was a robbery, I believe them. What a terrible way for him to die…” Ray suddenly stands, his hands shaking. “If you will both excuse me. I need to make arrangements…” I step forward, pulling Ray into my arms. “If there is anything that you need from me, simply say the words and I will be here for you, Ray.” Ray returns my hug, whispering “thank you” into my ear. The second I release him; Mikey wraps herself around Ray. “I’ll be with you shortly, darling.” Ray nods and leaves the room.

The moment he is gone, Mikey whispers “Damian! Did you have anything to do with this?” I place my hands on my hips, my expression one of disgust. “How dare you accuse me of something so…evil, Mikey!” Mikey snorts loudly, her eyes narrowing. “With the King gone, you are free to take over the realm from Alexandre. Just what you wanted, isn’t it? Can you blame me for being suspicious?” I step forward until our noses bump each other. “If I were going to remove the King, I would’ve done it in broad daylight, taking full credit! I’m a lot of things, but I’m NOT a coward, Mikes!” Mikey stares deep into my eyes for a few minutes. Finally satisfied with my answer, she smiles at me. “I’m sorry, Damian, for accusing you.” Mikey returns to her seat on the couch, motioning for me to sit as well. “The King was horrible to Ray most of the time, treating him as if he were a slave instead of his son. At least now, Ray will be able to step out of his father’s shadow and become the success that I know he can be!” I nod in agreement even as I want to throw up at Mikey’s gushing words. “Once the state funeral is over, and Ray is crowned King, you can make arrangements to speak to him about the conditions of both realms, Damian.” Little does Mikey know it, but that was my plan all along…

I attend the late King’s funeral, as well as Ray’s coronation. I must keep up appearances after all! As I am leaving the evening’s celebration, I pull Ray aside to speak to him in private. “You are taking on quite a lot, Ray. If you ever need any help settling into your new role, or need any advice, or even a sounding board, you need only to ask me. I will do everything I can to help make the transition a smooth one for you.” Ray, tears in his eyes, wraps me up in a tight hug. “You are the brother that I never had, Damian. I thank you for your kind words, and I promise that I will lean on you if necessary. Mikey and I are blessed to have you in our lives.” I hug Ray tightly in return. “Same here, Ray. We are indeed family…” With a final pat to Ray’s arm, I turn and head to the front door to say goodbye to Mikey, who gives me a bear hug of her own. “Thank you for being there for Ray, Dam. It means the world to the two of us!” With a twinkle in her eyes, she continues “I just KNEW that everything would work out for the best!” I kiss Mikey’s cheek, saying farewell as I head out the door. As soon as I am out of sight of the banquet hall, I close my eyes and head back to the Dark realm, a sinister smirk on my face.

Two months later, Mikey contacts me. She tells me that Ray wants to have a meeting with me as soon as possible. I find Ray at his office in Council headquarters, his hands rubbing his face as he slouches in his chair. “Oh, thank fuck you’re here, Damian! My brain is exploding with decisions that need to be made before the Council session tomorrow morning. Mikey is busy with Gee, so if it’s alright with you, can I ask your advice on some matters?” I nod once, taking a seat across from Ray. “Of course, Ray. Anything to help! Fill me in on what’s going on…” Three hours fly by, the two of us deep in conversation before Ray finally gets around to bringing up to topic of the Dark and Crystal realms. Just the chance I was waiting for!

“I do not wish to conduct business with the realms the way my father did. He was an unnaturally cruel man, ruling with an iron fist when a simple word was necessary. I do not wish to appear weak, but I want to treat the realms fairly.” I brush my hair back from my shoulders, trying to look nonchalant as I ask “Have you invited their King to a meeting? I hear King Alexandre is a caring and competent ruler. A meeting might help you decide which direction you take next, Ray.” Ray leans back in his chair, his arms stretched over his head until his back pops loudly. “I will send an invitation to King Alexandre tomorrow, Damian. Thank you so much for all your help this evening! I don’t know what I would do without your help.”

Once I’ve left Ray, I have a quick meeting with Alexandre, filling him in on our meeting. “When you receive the invitation, accept it. I will use a glamour and go in your place. Hopefully I can convince Ray to make the changes necessary for both realms to survive.” Alexandre agrees to do as I ask, and I head to my rooms to await my opportunity to meet with Ray.

Chapter Text

Current day...

This night, walk the dead
In a solitary style and crash the cemetery gates
In the dress your husband hates…
My Chemical Romance—Cemetery Drive

Mikey and I appear in the throne room of the Dark realm the same exact moment that Adam is transported to the dungeon. I send Trick the following message: “Stand at the ready, Trick! I will give you the go ahead in a few minutes!” Trick instantly responses with “Yes, father.”

The throne room is packed with vamps awaiting Tommy’s slaughter. Stephan sits on Mikey’s throne, his shocked face white as marble, his eyes wide as he notices our arrival. Leonardo Aprile and Andre Dante sit on either side of Stephan, their faces showing the same shocked look as the King.

From our location in the middle of the room, Mikey squeezes my hand once before setting her shoulders to the task at hand. I instantly place a light blue forcefield around Mikey to protect her. The vamps around us begin to whisper excitedly to each other, most of them recognizing us.

“Stephan!” We slowly move closer to the dais, Mikey’s dress billowing around her. “I’ve returned to appropriate my throne.” Leonardo and Andre sneer at us, instantly rising to their feet. Stephan sits back in his chair, his fangs bared. “And what makes you think that I’d bow down to you, Mikey? Your time as ruler of this realm is long past. You gave up your throne to live in the Light realm like the coward that you are. Now you’re nothing more than Toro’s bitch!”

Andre turns to Stephan, his high-pitched voice giving away his hysteria. “This is a trap, your Highness! They are only a diversion, so someone else can rescue their little whore! Call out the guard to bring him in for his execution!”

“NOW, TRICK!” I scream internally. Seconds fly by until I hear Trick excitedly call out “I have them! And I put up the force field, just as you instructed me to. The house is safe!” I thank Trick, telling him I love him as Stephan instructs four guards go to the dungeon to bring Tommy to him. Out of the corner of my eye, I notice a flash of red around the outermost corners of the room, which makes me smirk. I call out “Stand down to Queen Mikey, Stephan! Your time as King has come to an end.” Stephan snarls at me “Go fuck yourself, Damian! You and this bitch have no place in my Dark realm any longer! I’M KING HERE! Take your weak assed powers back to the Light realm where you belong.” Mikey throws her head back and laughs. “Weak assed powers? I believe that you are the only one here WITHOUT any powers, Stephan! The only thing that you have is an army, which cannot help you against the combined power that Damian and I possess! If you had any sense, you’d be running for the hills instead of simply waiting for these two idiots to save you! As you can see, I not only have the power, but I have the Vampaire.” Vampires in red robes push through the crowd, moving to stand behind Mikey in a quiet show of support. The crowd begins to panic as the head guard runs into the throne room screaming “Your Majesty! The prisoner has escaped!” Andre turns toward us, his eyes blazing. “Damian, you bastard! You think you’ve won? I will take possession of that little whore, and I won’t be satisfied until he’s under me! He will be made to pay for your sins…” Leonardo throws a fire ball at me, which I easily deflect as Mikey throws a fire ball directly at Stephan. Leonardo and Andre orb from the dais just as Stephan’s body explodes into flames. Mikey twists her hand, and Stephan’s body is pulled apart in a thousand different flaming directions, causing the other vampires in the room to scream in fear.

As Mikey and I slowly ascend the stairs to the throne, I call out “Adam? Tommy? Are you…” Tommy cuts me off, his soft voice quivering. “I’m a bit shaky but fine, Damian. Adam’s fine as well. I miss you!” As we turn towards the crowd, I continue “I miss you too, baby. Adam, the enemy is now focused on our Tommy Joe. Protect our boy at all costs, Adam. I love the two of you…”

The smell of burnt flesh is still strong in the room, making me smirk. Looking around at the crowd in front of us, I hear a member of the Vampaire loudly call out “All hail Queen Mikey and King Damian!” The entire room, including the members of the Vampaire, bow low before us.

As Mikey leaves to meet with the members of the Vampaire, I wait for a meeting with the current leader of the army. From behind me I hear “Thought you could do this alone, Damian?” When I turn around, I am shocked to find Andrew standing next to me, head cocked to the side and hands on his hips. “I may despise you, my King, but you need my leadership skills. You and Mikey need all the help you can get…” I smirk at Andrew, who glares back at me. “No matter what you say, Andrew, you don’t despise me. Oh, you may not agree with some of the things that I have done in the past, but if that’s the case, I think you are being a bit hypocritical, don’t you think?” When Andrew’s eyes narrow, I place my hands on my hips, my eyes gleaming as I continue with “I remember all that you destroyed in your time here in the Dark realm…” Andrew moves closer to me, his hands fisting my shirt. “You set out to destroy Ray, Mikey and the family that I hold so dear. Am I to forget how you’ve raped Ray, how you turned Mikey evil? Not to mention what you have done to the others…” I wrap my arms around Andrew, pulling him forward into a hug. “Was it really that long ago, Andrew, that Mikey asked you to take me out on the town? You were so proud of me as you watched me destroy that slave onstage. Do you remember our kiss in the dark, while Mikey watched? Little did we know then that we would end up here again someday…” Andrew stares deep into my eyes, searching for something I cannot fathom. “I’m glad you are here with us, truly, Andrew. I welcome your help with the army, and I know that Mikey will be happy to have her husband with her at such a trying time. I just hope that the two of us can start over again, become close as we once were.” Andrew, still looking suspicious, asks “Where is Mikey?” I lead Andrew to Mikey’s study for the war meeting. “She’s currently meeting with the leaders of the Vampaire. We will speak with her after our meeting.”

Two hours later, Mikey joins us. She is overjoyed when she sees Andrew, admonishing me for not telling her sooner that her husband had arrived. “You were busy, darling!” Mikey curls into Andrew’s side, his arms tight around her as we exchange the news from our meetings.

Mikey tells us that the Vampaire is missing only one of their original members, and that all members have all sworn their loyalty to Mikey and myself. She also told them that, after the war is over, I will be taking that missing member’s spot on the roster. They are quite pleased to be back in power and at their Queen and King’s command. I then inform Mikey that I have made Andrew the head of the army. When I receive raised eyebrows at this information, I supply “Mikes, Andrew has graciously arrived to lead the army, and I plan to take full advantage of his leadership skills. As King, my attention will be split between this realm, the Crystal realm, and whatever the family needs from me. Adam will have his hands full trying to protect Tommy and the family from those two bastards. The main problems in front of us? Trying to stay ahead of whatever magickal power those bastards may have, as well as the fact that both realm’s armies are low in numbers. So…” I glance from Andrew to Mikey “…I have reinstituted the vampire law requiring that every vampire on either realm must immediately attend military training. While this will help in the long run, I hired trained assassins from the Ice and Emerald realms to help fill the ranks. We have been fortunate that Andre and Leonardo have been focusing most of their attention on the Light realm so far, but with us in power here, who knows how long that will last? I will personally take one of those groups of soldiers to Ray, to add to the dwindling number of vampires currently fighting the war in the Light realm. I plan to import humans from the Ice and Emerald realms, to be turned into vampires as fast as possible, as well as to provide blood for the realms.” After draining my glass, I continue “Now if I only knew someone who could help us with the magick issue…” Andrew squeezes Mikey’s hand as he asks, “Have you spoken to Luna about this issue?” Mikey and I shake our heads while Mikey inquires “Who is she, Andrew?”

“She’s an ancient, no one really knows how old she is. Luna is said to hold the first magick, the strongest magick known to man or vampire. No one knows where she lives; her last known location was the wilds of Ireland. No one has seen her for over three hundred years, only rumors of her circulate today.” Mikey looks from Andrew to me, her eyes brightening. “Then we will just have to scry to find her. Thank you, Andrew darling.” Mikey gives Andrew a quick kiss. “I’m so glad that the two of you will be working together from now on!” As he takes a sip of his glass of blood, Andrew gives me a slight frown, which I return with a smirk.

The next evening, I arrive at the mansion with a group of trained assassins. Ray meets me at the front door, a surprised look on his face. “Dam! I didn’t expect to see you this soon!” I give Ray a quick hug as I tell him “I brought you some specially trained soldiers to help fill the ranks, Ray. Where do you want them?” Ray tells me the location where his soldiers are currently fighting. “Can you transport them there for me, Dam? They are needed immediately…” I wave my arm and four hundred and fifty soldiers disappear into the night. “Thank you so much, Damian!” I tell Ray that I will send him more soldiers as soon as I can. “Andrew has taken over as leader of the Dark army, Ray. I’m so glad that he has joined us! I know that he doesn’t trust me, but hopefully by the time this war is over, I can rebuild his trust.” Ray squeezes my arm quickly. “Don’t worry about it, Dam. Everyone knows how hard you are working to rescue the family. Those that come around are those who are worth it in the end.”

I visit briefly with Trick, telling him how proud I am of him. “You really came through for the family, Trick! You should be proud of yourself!” Trick gives me a hug, a huge smile on his face. “I couldn’t have done it without you, Father! Thank you for believing in me!” The two of us talk for a while, my line of inquiry focused on Trick’s health and wellbeing. “Gee has been so supportive, Damian! Frankie told Gee they are never to speak to me again, if I continue to claim to be your son. Gee ignores Frank’s orders as if they don’t exist. I hate to be the cause of the tension between them! But Gee tells me he loves me every day, and that he is here for me.” I hug Trick tightly against me. “Gee is an amazing individual. I hope that this damn war will be over soon, so the three of us can spend more time together. In the meantime, know that I love and adore you, Trick.” With a squeeze and a kiss on Trick’s lips, I head to Adam and Tommy’s room.

The next thing I know, Tommy has me backed up against the wall, his arms around me as kisses cover my face. Lust and a desire to force the boy to his knees takes over me, my hands tightening on Tommy’s shoulders. Seconds later, Adam attempts to move between us, a growl echoing through his chest as he pushes Tommy away from me just in time. “Tommy! Give Dam a chance to breathe!” A side glance from Adam gives away his scheme to rescue Tommy from my intentions, much to my dismay. I know that Adam is simply acting out of fear, knowing what I am capable of. Instead of playing into his fears, I decide it’s best to simply kiss both of my boys thoroughly, an evil gleam in my eyes.

I spend the next hour with the two of them, Tommy in my lap and Adam curled up at my side. I let the two of them in on Mikey, Andrew, and my plans so far. When I mention Luna, Tommy shakes his head in acknowledgement. “There have been rumors about her the entire time that I have been a vampire. Most believe that she is an old wives’ tale, while some use her as a warning against those that would try to destroy the realms. I hope she’s still alive and willing to help us.”

When the time comes for me to leave, I hold Adam close, kissing him with passion. When I turn to kiss Tommy, Adam’s wolf howls in Adam’s chest, causing me to tighten my arms around Tommy. “I can’t wait to have you again, baby” I lean in and claim Tommy’s lips in a searing kiss of ownership. The kiss seems to go on forever, until Adam places his hand on my arm, gripping tightly. I pull back, one of my eyebrows quirking to the ceiling in Adam’s direction. If Adam keeps interrupting every time I am with Tommy, there is going to be problems…

I give Tommy one more peck on the lips, Tommy’s expression one of surprise and confusion. I give Tommy my best smirk as I say goodbye and take off for the Dark realm…

Later that night, I join Mikey and Andrew in Mikey’s study. Mikey has managed to find a map of the Light realm, which she has laid out flat on her desk. Mikey picks up a crystal on a chain and, holding it still over the center of the map, calls out to me. “Place your hand over mine, Dam. Chant the following words with me.” Mikey recites the chant to me, which I immediately repeat over and over with her, my eyes closed. After a few minutes I feel the crystal begin to spin on the chain, faster and faster until the chain snaps in two. The crystal lands on the map point first, standing upright. Andrew, who was watching closely the entire time, confirms what the two of us see in front of us. “Antarctica.”

Mikey and I close our eyes and travel to Luna’s ice mansion in Antarctica. The building is huge—a two story sprawling building made from ice blocks. At the front door stands two statues carved out of ice, one the exact likeness of Mikey, the other of myself.

Mikey knocks then pushes open the door, calling out “Mistress Luna? Are you home? We need to speak to you…” From a room at the other end of the building we hear music playing, so we cautiously make our way towards it, walking around a pile of dead bodies which someone had piled next to the entrance.

When we arrive at the last doorway, we hear “Mikey Way Toro! What tragedy could possibly be so bad that the Queen of the Dark realm would resort to seeking my help?” Upon entering the room, we see an old Crone. I move to stand next to Mikey, bowing low towards the Crone. “And Damian Lavelli! A rare treat to see the two of you together! Do you like my ice statues? I believe that they are a good likeness of the two of you.” Mikey nods, a large smile on her face. “Amazing work, Mistress Luna. So, you were expecting us then?” Luna stops playing her piano, her head cocked to the side. “My child, there is very little that goes on in all the worlds that I do not know. I knew before you made up your mind to visit me that you would come to see old Luna.” The Crone stands and makes her slow way to a chair in one corner of the room. “Come, sit with me. I miss spending time with youngsters such as yourselves.” Mikey and I move to sit in overstuffed chairs that face towards Luna. “So, your family is facing insurmountable odds from the Dante and Aprile families, hum?” I nod, my voice suddenly caught in my throat. “Marcus Aprile stole a box from me a great many years ago, containing some powerful magick. That very magick is what those two horrible families are using against your family today.” Mikey nods as a maid enters with cups blood for the two of us. “Never say I do not know how to treat my guests, children!” I take a sip from my cup, marveling at the taste dancing on my tongue. “Blood from twin virgins. I thought you might like a treat, after traveling so far to visit me. Now, let me see. The two of you came to ask me if there is any of that magick left in my possession, or if there is something else that can break that magick, correct?” Mikey and I nod at the same time. “Well…” Luna leans forward in her chair, her long nails clicking on the chair arms. “…I do not have any more of that type of magick to give you, but I have something even better. It was created before the first spell book, before the first witch or warlock. Very little of it has survived. It was here when the first realm was created. This power, used along with the armies of the Dark realm, will help you defeat your enemies.” Mikey leans forward in her chair, her voice slightly shaking as she asks “Would you be willing to teach it to us, Mistress Luna?”

Luna looks deep into my eyes, searching for…something. Chills travel up my back, my hands beginning to tremble. “And you, Damian. You have been very quiet since your arrival. Quite the opposite of what most expect from you, I imagine. What have you to say for yourself, young King?” Luna gives me a challenging look, as if to purposely rile my temper. I softly reply instead “I simply implore you to help us in our hour of need, Great One. We know how powerful, how benevolent you are. There is no one else in the world who can assist us the way you can. Would you please help us?”

Luna sits back in her chair, a smile on her lips. “Such pretty words from one so evil, young King. Then again, that’s part of your charm, is it not? And if I impart such magick to you, how will you use it? Will you simply rescue your family, then forget about it, or would you use it to destroy or take over the cosmos?” I raise an eyebrow in her direction. “There is a reason this certain kind of magick was safely hidden from the world. Having it at your disposal, if not handled properly, could be catastrophic.”

I look deep into the Crone’s eyes. “I realize that when you look at me, all you see is evil. But there is more to me than what you see, Mistress. Mikey and I only became evil again to save our family. I promise you that, once we defeat the Dante and Aprile families, Mikey will have her powers bound again, and she will return to the Light realm. I will stay behind in the Dark realm to lead the Vampaire and the army, as well as be the guardian of the power you give us.”

“Your future is yet to be written, young King” Luna responds with a knowing smirk. “Only I can see your fates. One thing that I know for certain is that your son Devlin is not the next in line to rule the Light realm Council, as you all believe. No, the leadership of both the Light and Dark realms lay in the hands of those yet unborn. Why do you think that your enemy is so keen to steal your love from you, Damian?” In my mind’s eye I see Tommy Joe, his waist swollen with my pups. Luna gives me a ghost of a smile as her sharp eyes dart from me to Mikey. “The real question here, my darlings, is what price are you willing to pay to acquire the magick you need?”

I grip the arms of my chair, the tight hold on my temper gone. “You seriously wish to haggle over this like a seller in the marketplace? When our family’s lives are on the line? And how do we even know that you still possess this power that you speak of?” The Crone snaps her fingers and a surge of power shoots through my body, jolting me back into my chair. I have experienced many different types of magick through my time as a vampire, but this is altogether unique. My fingers turn black up to the second knuckle, while the rest of my skin turns translucent, surges of energy shooting through my veins. Just as I begin to get used to the feeling, the power drains from me, making me turn back to the Crone, disappointment on my face. My voice cracking, I ask “What do you want in return for this magick, Mistress?” The Crone’s eyes darken as she stares into my soul. “The power that just ran through your body, Damian, is an echo of what I am willing to teach you. In return, I have just one request of you, which will be asked when the time is right. Think of it as a favor until then.”

Mikey grabs my arm, her face full of panic and fear. “No, Damian! You can’t do this! You have sacrificed too much already!” She turns towards the Crone, her words reduced to begging. “Please, ask your request of me, not Damian! I will gladly give all I have to…” Luna softly cuts in, her tone icy. “It is of Damian that I ask this request, not you! He must make the sacrifice himself. He alone will take in the power; therefore, he alone will pay the price.” I watch tears begin to slowly slide down Mikey’s face, her eyes begging me to stop, to reconsider the options.

For me, there is no other option.

Dear friend, since you have been following my story so far, I’m sure that you have noticed that I tend to jump into things without really considering the consequences. It is one of my biggest failings. Mikey must have noticing my impending doom when she looked into the Crone’s eyes. All I see when I look into the Crone’s eyes are my family, lying dead around me while I am left to mourn their deaths. This I cannot allow to happen if I have a chance to save everyone I love.

Throwing precaution to the wind, I raise my chin and boldly call out “I accept, Mistress.” At my words, the Crone claps her hands together as she cackles with glee. “Excellent, Damian! Now, say your goodbyes to your Queen. I will not keep you away from your beloved Dark realm for long. You will return before you are hardly missed, my King.” I stand, pulling Mikey out of her chair and into my arms, her tears dripping on my shoulders as I hold her close. “Dam, why did you…how could you…” I hold Mikey even tighter, my hand running through her hair as I whisper “It will be alright, darling. Please, send my love to everyone and keep an eye on Trick and Tommy for me. I’m so worried about the two of them! Tell Andrew I said to take good care of you for me, love. I will see you soon.” Mikey clings to me for a few minutes, until Luna barks out “That is quite long enough, Mikey! Damian will see you soon.” With a wave of the Crone’s hand, Mikey vanishes from sight.

It feels as if I spend forever in Luna’s home. Unsurprisingly, this magickal power is the hardest I’ve ever had to learn to control. It constantly tries to escape my grasp. It also doesn’t help that, with each moment that passes, I’m more consumed with worry about the family. After a few hours, Luna throws her hands up in disgust. “You need to focus, Damian! Remember, there is very little of this power left. Without the proper training, the power will be lost forever!” Noticing that I am only half paying attention to her, Luna sighs loudly as she speaks in a language that I do not recognize. “THERE! I have placed a protective spell around every member of your family while you are here! Now, forget about them and PUT YOUR FOCUS WHERE IT BELONGS!”

During my time at Luna’s home, I spend very little time with her, learning less about her than I did about Wongsudoe. The only daily contact I have is Luna’s maid, Angela. When we do speak, I try to get Luna to give me more information about the favor I owe her. Every time I ask, the only response I get is a wide smirk.

The day that Luna informs me that the time has come for me to leave her, she places her hand on mine. “King Damian, you are ready to wield the most powerful magick in all the cosmos. Remember what I have taught you. It is not like other magick; it has a mind of its own, it may not respond to your commands readily. Simply be prepared for this eventuality. Only use the power when you are backed into a corner, when you have no other remedy. I hope this power serves you well, my King.” Luna steps forward, pulling me into her arms. In a soft voice, she says “When the time comes for you to pay your favor, I will reach out to you. In the meantime, you have something more important to do than to fight a war, my King.” When I give Luna a questioning look, she smiles at me. “Go visit your boy. Give him your evil and bring the next generation of evil into the world. It is only then that you will be ready to face your enemy across the battlefield. But remember…” Luna squeezes my arms tightly to ensure I’m paying attention. “… the other side has similar designs on your boy. The side that finally manages to breed Tommy Joe Ratliff will be the one to win this war…”

Chapter Text

Pockets on shrek, pockets on deck
Tell me what’s next? Alien sex
I’mma disrobe you then I’mma probe you
See I’ve abducted you, so I’ll tell you what to do
What to do, what to do
Kiss me, kiss me
Infect me with your loving, fill me with your poison
Take me, take me
Wanna be your victim, ready for abduction
Boy, you’re an alien, your touch so foreign
It’s supernatural extraterrestrial
ET—Katy Perry

The mansion is eerily quiet, no one in sight for this hour of the night. I make my silent way to the kitchen to grab a few blood bags from the refrigerator. As I drink from the first bag, my thoughts begin to wander.

MY Tommy Joe is the key to winning this war??? The very thought of my baby being held down and raped by Andre sets my blood boiling. That fucking bastard thinks that he can just take what’s mine? I would do anything and everything in my power to ensure that I am the only one to breed that boy…

When I am finished in the kitchen, I set out for Tommy and Adam’s suite. Without knocking, I make my way towards their bedroom, quietly opening the bedroom door…to find the room empty.

I immediately ask Adam “Hey babe, is Tommy Joe with you?” I hear the sounds of swords clanging together then Adam’s strained voice as he replies “No Dam, I’m at the front lines. Tommy should be in the mansion somewhere.” I make a quick search of the mansion from top to bottom, my powers failing to find Tommy anywhere. “I’ll look for him. I’ll get back to you darling. Stay safe for us.” I then contact Mikey, who tells me that Tommy isn’t with her or Andrew.

After another half hour I still cannot find Tommy. Knocking on Ray’s door, I enter to find Ray asleep in his bed. “Ray, please wake up!” Ray opens his eyes, concern instantly crossing his face. I explain that I cannot find Tommy. “I’m scared, Ray! I can’t sense him anywhere! Adam doesn’t know where he is, and neither does Mikey. When did you last see him?” Ray takes a second to answer. “Last night around six when Adam left to fight at the front lines, since Bobby was injured the night before. I saw Tommy kiss him goodbye at the front door. I’ll help you look for him…” Ray gets out of bed as I head out into the hallway, bumping right into a frantic Robbie. Locking eyes with me, Robbie begs “Damian, please help me! Bobby’s wounds won’t heal, even though I have given him plenty of blood and blood bags! I beg you to heal him…” I give Robbie a look of disbelief. While Bob has been very vocal over the years regarding his hatred of me, Robbie has remained curiously silent, staying as far away from me as he can get. Since both Robbie and Bob are werepires, they should be able to regenerate themselves easily if injured. By the way Robbie is describing Bob’s situation, it sounds as if Bob truly is dying…but what should that matter to me? I have Tommy to look for, and one less enemy would be a blessing…

Placing a hand gently on Robbie’s shoulder, I comment “Bob would rather die than let me help him, Robbie. What makes you think that he will even let me be in the room with him?” Robbie grabs my hand, squeezing tightly. “PLEASE, Damian! If not for him, PLEASE do it for me?” I stare deep into Robbie’s eyes, seeing the same love deep inside of them for Bob that I hold for Adam and TJ. With a deep sigh, I pat Robbie’s shoulder. “Take me to him then, please Robbie.” Robbie thanks me then leads me to his bedroom.

The bedroom is dim, with only one light illuminating the bedside. The mattress is dyed red from blood loss, mounds of used bloody towels surrounding Bob’s body. As I move towards Bob, I smell the sweet smell of rotting flesh, meaning that whatever was used to cause the carnage in front of me was somehow bewitched.

As I lean over Bob, his eyes fly open, his body instantly trying to move away from me. “Get this fucker away from me, Robbie!” Bob’s eyes search out Robbie, a low snarl emanating from his chest. “I’d rather die a thousand deaths than to owe this fucker my life…” I turn to leave, but Robbie grabs my arms, pulling me back towards the bed. “PLEASE, DAMIAN! I’m BEGGING you! PLEASE help him! I’ll do ANYTHING!” With another deep sigh, I pat Robbie’s arm. “Fine, but you are going to have to keep him still. This is going to take some work…” Robbie leans forward, his lips touching my cheek, causing Bobby to growl loudly, thrashing on the bed. “Touch him again fucker and I’ll…” With a snap of my fingers, I render Bob unconscious.

It takes three long hours to finally close all of Bob’s wounds. The entire time my thoughts continually wander to my boy, hysteria rising within me. I am worried sick about Tommy. Ray stops in the room long enough to tell me that no one else had seen Tommy after the time he specified earlier to me. Ray then tells me that he will continue to search and leaves.

When I finally inform Robbie that Bob will make a full recovery, he wraps his arms around me, another kiss placed gently on my cheek. I hold Robbie close to me for a moment before pulling away. “Just keep him in bed for a few days and give him plenty of blood bags. If you need me, have Adam contact me. Bob should make a full recovery.” Robbie goes to thank me again, but I gently cut him off with “for all I’ve done to you in the past, it’s the least I can do, Robbie. Take care dear.” With a smile I do not feel, I turn and head back to Tommy’s bedroom to find the room still empty, my anxiety growing even stronger than before. Without conscious thought, I reach out to Luna. “Please, Mistress, HELP ME! Tommy has gone missing, and I cannot sense him! I have no idea where he is. PLEASE HELP ME!” Minutes go by slowly without a response of any kind. I collapse onto Tommy’s side of the bed, his scent filling my nostrils. What if I never see my baby again? What if…

“Damian! Calm down! You are allowing your panic to get in the way of your magickal ability! Take a deep breath and concentrate on your boy, use your magick, not your feelings! Recite the following over and over while you concentrate.” Luna slowly chants in a language that I am unfamiliar with. I join her, my tongue getting tied up a few times before I perfect the words. Closing my eyes, I envision Tommy as he was the last time I held him in my arms. I feel wind swirling around my feet, see lights behind my closed eyes as I am pulled through space.

I am not prepared for what I see when my eyes open…

I am standing at one end of a large hotel room. Tommy is being held between two guards who are doing their best to restrain my panic-stricken darling. Tommy screams out “Damian, help me!” as our eyes connect. Andre, standing behind Tommy, smirks at me as his hand cuts through the air before I can move. As I growl out my frustration, a forcefield shimmers around my body, effectively holding me in place. I raise my hands to push against the invisible curtain, electricity jolting through my body. “Andre you bastard! Leave him alone!” I run through spell after spell in my mind, all of which fail to rescue me from the predicament I find myself in. Without my magick, how can I rescue my baby? I call repeatedly for Luna to help me, but she fails to respond.

Andre rips off Tommy’s shirt and jeans, getting kicked in the stomach for his trouble. When one of the guards takes a swing at Tommy, Andre blocks the shot and barks out “NO! I need him unharmed if I’m going to breed him!” I snarl at Andre, my hands pounding nonstop on the forcefield around my body to no avail. “He’s mine! Get your fucking hands off of him, asshole!”

Andre pulls a narrow table into the center of the room facing me before he instructs the guards to shove Tommy down on the table and to hold him still. With a sarcastic “Remember this, Damian?” Andre reaches into a bag on the room’s only bed, pulling out three sets of chains and locks. Andre gathers Tommy’s arms together in front of him, chaining them together before chaining Tommy’s arms to a front table leg. I feel sick to my stomach as Andre then moves behind Tommy, chaining each of his legs to a table leg, spreading my baby out perfectly before Andre’s demented gaze.

The fucking bastard is reenacting the very first time that I ever raped my Tommy Joe, when I made him mine for the first time. Tommy’s wild eyes beg me to set him free, to rescue him from the torment that he is experiencing. I hear the guards commenting on Tommy’s body, hear Andre agree with them as he slides his hands over Tommy’s bare flesh.

Over Tommy’s begging and whines I hear Andre ask, “Isn’t this how you set up the bitch when you raped him your first time, Damian?” Andre reaches back into the bag, pulling out a studded cock ring and a chain with two claw clamps attached to the ends of a long chain. Andre reaches down to attach the cock ring around Tommy’s cock and balls, cinching tightly. Andre then slaps Tommy’s ass a few times before reaching under Tommy’s chest to attach a clamp to his nipple, pulling the chain over Tommy’s back then attaching the second clamp to the other nipple, squeezing tightly.

I have never felt so fucking useless in my entire existence! All the screaming and pounding on the forcefield that I’m doing comes to nothing. I cannot save my baby from his fate…

Tommy’s eyes stay locked onto mine as Andre orders the guards to stand at the opposite side of the room. Without warning, Andre moves forward, sinking two fingers into Tommy. “What a nice tight piece! No wonder you wanted to make him your own, Lavelli. Mmmmm…” Tommy yelps as Andre then pushes forward once again, this time burying four fingers deep in Tommy’s ass. “Nice and tight, even after birthing pups! Bet you had something to do with that, right?” After a few more pumps, Andre slams his entire fist into Tommy, whose pained screams make Andre smirk. “Take it, bitch! I own you now, gonna breed you full with my pups and rule the cosmos!” After fucking his arm deep inside of Tommy a few times, Andre pulls out and wipes his hand and arm on Tommy’s hair as he circles to stand in front of him. “Open your mouth, slut.” When Tommy refuses, Andre backhands Tommy a few times. “I said open, bitch! Suck my cock like the slut you are…” Andre sinks his fingers into the corners of Tommy’s mouth, yanking down hard until Tommy’s mouth opens against his will. Over my screams of rage, I can hear Tommy’s gasp as Andre slam forward to sink into his throat in one go, Andre’s balls slapping Tommy’s chin. Tears start to pour out of Tommy’s eyes as Andre fucks his face cruelly, reaching out to pull on the chain that connects to Tommy’s nipples. Squeals drown out Andre’s moans as Tommy’s nipples are pulled away from his body. With his free hand, Andre sinks his hand into Tommy’s hair, pulling upwards sharply as he fucks into Tommy’s throat.

The rape feels as if it goes on forever. Hell, if I’m feeling this way, what is my poor baby feeling? With a grunt, Andre finally pulls out of Tommy’s mouth, moving slowly behind Tommy to sink his cock into my baby in one push. “Please, no! Please pull out! I beg you! Don’t…” Tears continue to flow freely down Tommy’s beautiful face to drip on the table below him. I scream out “You’re mine, Tommy!” as Andre begins to slam his full body weight onto my baby’s backside, the table rocking back and forth in a sickening rhythm. With an evil grin, Andre begins to slowly rub his hand over the indents on Tommy’s back, which were made by the iron maiden that I placed Tommy in ages ago. “Maiden marks…way to go, Damian!” Tommy continues to beg; the words drowned out by my threats and screams. “I’m gonna fill you up good, bitch. I’m gonna put my son in your womb, watch him grow inside you. Gonna put you on a leash, teach you to heel like a good bitch.” Tommy keeps his bleary eyes locked on mine, even as he tries to beg again. “Please, let me go! I’m not yours!” Tommy’s eyes widen in shock and fear as he begins to feel Andre unload inside of him. “You are now, bitch. Nothing but my breeding sow. Gonna keep you full of pups until you can’t breed anymore.” Tommy’s eyes drop to the floor as Andre stills his hips, his softening dick still inside Tommy to keep the huge load deep inside of him. With a smirk, Andre tells me “Get comfortable, Damian. This bitch is in for a long night…”

Andre shoots inside of Tommy seven times before he finally allows his guards to take a turn at Tommy’s mouth. “Part of your payment, boys” Andre grunts out. “Just don’t harm him. I have plans for him…”

Sweat has glued Tommy’s hair to his face and neck. He has long ago run out of tears, his beautiful brown eyes bloodshot from crying. When Andre removes the cock ring he placed on Tommy, he is disappointed to find Tommy soft. “Poor baby! I guess I was too much for you…” Andre releases the clamps from Tommy’s nipples, giving each a quick yank with his fingers. When Andre pulls his hands away, his fingers are covered in blood. “Nice, swollen bloody nipples! Perfect for playing with…” I hear Tommy moan in pain as the first guard comes down his throat, the second moving forward to take his turn.

In my ear I hear Luna hiss “See what comes from ‘behaving,’ Damian? Wasting time, saving your enemy! You have pushed your evil down so far to be a part of your ‘family’ that you have lost your edge! The old Damian wouldn’t have walked into a trap! You let your guard down and Tommy has paid the price. It is YOUR fault that he carries your enemy’s prodigy…” I throw my head back, screaming “NO!” into the confines of my cage. I hear Luna laugh, her hissing voice setting my nerves on edge. “So what are you gonna do about it, Damian? If I set you free, what will you do to make this right?” My breath quickens as my fingers begin to vibrate with power, evil flowing in waves through my body. I want to tear Andre’s family limb from limb, want to rape anyone that means anything to him. I feel my eyes blaze black, my breath quickening. But most of all, I want to feel Tommy under me, want to fuck him through a mattress till he screams that I’M the one who owns him. “Let me loose, Luna! I want…” Luna laughs once again. “You WANT, my King? Does it really matter what YOU want?” The second guard grunts loudly as he picks up the pace, fucking Tommy’s face with less restraint than the other guard. “You must make this right, my King. You must claim your bitch, make him bend to your will, make him take your seed deep inside of him till your child is conceived. Destroy him to rebuild him, only then will you get what ‘you want’…” Suddenly, a bolt of lightning strikes both guards, their bodies falling dead on the floor. Andre locks eyes with mine seconds before a whirlwind blows him through a window on the other side of the room. I make eye contact with Tommy, who pulls on his bindings in fear of the evil reflected in my expression. The forcefield powers down around me as Luna laughs “Fuck him good, Damian. Show him who he belongs to…”

I silently cross the room, coming to a standstill in front of Tommy. The smell in the room makes my nostrils flare in disgust. Tommy looks up at me through the hair hanging over his face, terror showing on his face even as he sighs in relief. In a broken voice he softly says “Please, set me free, Dam.”

I circle behind Tommy, repulsed by the sheer amount of come that is slowly leaking out of his hole, covering his legs to pool onto the floor at his feet. With a flick of a finger, I open the locks holding Tommy in place, hear the chains hit the floor. Still silent, I lift Tommy into my arms, taking him into the bathroom. I lay him down on the floor of the shower, my hand reaching up to pull loose the shower head from its holder. Once I set the water temperature, I begin to wash the mess from Tommy’s body. I see Tommy’s eyes widen for a moment as something unseen pushes into him, the bulge looking like a hand punching him from the inside. Tommy moans in pain as a huge gush of come is expelled onto the shower floor between his legs. In my ear I hear Luna mumble “There, my King. On the shower floor is your enemy’s progeny. Destroy it, clean him up and then make him yours.”

The evil in my system sings loudly in my ears. Tommy hears it as well if his reaction is any indication. He turns large, scared eyes to me, his mouth hanging open in shock. I can’t wait any longer—I no longer see Tommy as my beloved. Instead, he simply is a goal to fulfill, a body to fuck as hard and deep as I can get within him. In my mind, I have reduced him to a bitch to simply be fucked, such as I saw him so long ago when I first raped him. History is now repeating itself…

After I wash Tommy’s hair, I take the top off the hose, plunging the hose deep into Tommy’s hole. “Damian! What are you…” I fill him up with water, then push the water back out with both of my hands on either side of his dick. I do this a few times, making sure that he is as clean on the inside as he is on the outside. Exhausted, the most that Tommy can do to fight me is to place his hand on my arm. “Enough, please Damian. I promise you I am clean…” I then turn off the water, leaning over to pick up a few towels, using them to dry Tommy’s hair and body before carrying him out of the bathroom.

Little does Tommy know it, but his ordeal has just begun.

I take us to Tommy’s bedroom, laying him down in the center of his bed before turning to lock the bedroom door. I hear Luna’s laughter in my ear as Tommy softly says “Thank you, darling. I’m so grateful…”

Slowly I crawl up the bed until I am between his legs, staring down at Tommy, my eyes cold and black. In a deep voice I flatly comment “You won’t carry Andre’s baby, Tommy.” When Tommy reaches out to try and take my hand, I grab his arm, twisting it sharply. “Damian, please! Just…” I slap Tommy across the face a few times before I wrap my other hand around his throat. “Look deep into my eyes, Tommy Joe. What do you see?” Tommy’s eyes widen, a jolt of fear running through his tiny frame. Recognition causes Tommy to try to pry my fingers from around his neck. He knows who is leaning over him—it isn’t one of the loves of his life. In front of him is a monster, one who doesn’t care how he feels or what he needs. He knows he’s staring into the eyes of a rapist. “You played the slut to our enemy tonight, Tommy Joe. Now it’s my turn to fuck you raw, make you mine all over again. I will fuck the feeling of that bastard from your skin, bitch.” The very thought that Tommy finally knows what will happen next sends a thrill up my spine. “You may not carry that bastard’s brat, but there’s nothing to stop you from carrying mine…” Tommy’s face turns red, his terrified expression exciting me further as I flip him onto his stomach, yanking him back on all fours, shoving pillows under his stomach. “PLEASE baby! Please let me go! I’ll do anything! I love you…” I use my knees to spread Tommy’s legs wide open, staring down at his puffy, swollen hole. Pulling Tommy’s arms behind his back to hold them in one hand, I lean forward to slam my cock deep inside of my bitch. I hear Tommy gasp for breath, feel his body tense as I fuck my cock as deep as it can go, before pulling out to slam my cock in again and again. “That’s it, my little bitch, take my cock! I know you were fantasying that it was me that took you earlier instead of Andre. Well, now it’s me deep inside of you! I’m gonna fuck you so full and round with my pups…” I sink my hand into Tommy’s wet hair, yanking back on his head until I can sink my fangs deep into his mating scars. The second that his blood touches my tongue, I growl loudly, pushing Tommy’s upper half down on the bed so I am covering him with my body. “Damian! Please don’t…” Tommy shudders under me, a moan leaving his lips as I fuck an orgasm out of him. After I finish drinking from him, I growl out “That’s it, bitch. Stay nice and still for me while I load up your body with my come. Gonna force my pups into you ...you’re mine, not Andre’s, not Adam’s. MINE, Tommy Joe…never forget it…”

Hours go by. The longer that Tommy is under me, the rougher I am with him. I yank strands of his hair out, slap his ass and backside until his skin is raw and deep red. Tommy begs me to let him go, saying over and over that he loves me, that he is mine. All I care about is the come that is already swelling Tommy’s body to the point that he already looks pregnant.

Suddenly I hear Adam’s voice on the other side of the door, calling out to Tommy and asking why the damn door is locked. Tommy goes to scream out an answer, only to find my hand once again around his throat, squeezing tightly. Adam continues to yell and pound on the door, his voice cracking with rage. With a loud bang the bedroom door flies open, Adam’s body instantly filling the doorway. The look of shock on his face makes me smirk.

“Tommy! What the…DAMIAN!” Adam stumbles into the room as I finish for the sixth time deep inside Tommy Joe. Adam storms over to the bed, grabbing me from behind and pulling me out of Tommy, who only can whimper out “Please! Don’t…” Adam throws me on the floor, leaning down over me to rain his fists down on my naked body until I scream out “Enough!” With a twist of my hand, Adam slams into the opposite wall, his body resisting his every effort to pull itself free from the wall. I growl out “Stay there and watch me fill up the little bitch, Adam. His body is mine, I will breed him with my pups and the family will win the war.” I drag myself up off the floor to find that Tommy, as sore and tired as he is, is in the middle of attempting to crawl off the bed. I pick him up and slam him back down on the pile of pillows while I hear Adam’s wolf growl at me, then hear the curse words and threats that Adam is directing towards me. I pull back on Tommy’s hair as I enter him again. “Thought you could escape, my little slut? Thought you could dump that large load on the bed, escape pregnancy? Sorry, darlin, but your fate was cast the moment that Andre raped you. You and I will save the family, Tommy. Accept your fate and take my cock, bitch.”

Another two hours goes by. Adam’s voice breaks eventually, the same way mine did when I was being held captive by Andre. A small part of me cannot help but feel sympathy for Adam, since I know the horror that he is going through not being able to rescue his mate. The rest of my mind simply brushes Adam’s situation off, since he should know by now who really owns TJ…

When I pull out for the final time, I flip Tommy over onto the pillows onto his back, ensuring that his feet stay flat on the bed while my large load fills his belly. I hold him like this for at least another half hour to ensure that Tommy does end up pregnant.

When I believe that enough time had passed with Tommy in this position, I head to the bathroom, picking up a huge bath towel from behind the shower door. I place the towel under Tommy as I pull the pillows out, watching each expression that crosses Tommy’s face as he begs “Please free Adam, Damian. I need both of you…” With a wave of my hand, Adam peels himself off the wall and then charges at me, screaming out his rage. But before he can attack, I turn towards him, both of my hands landing on his outstretched arms to stop him in his tracks. “Back off, Adam. You wouldn’t want little mama to accidently get hurt, would you?” Adam flashes me a look of hatred before moving to stand at the side of the bed to look down at Tommy, who begins to beg Adam to leave me alone. “Please Adam, you don’t know the whole story. It’s not Dam’s fault, it really isn’t. He loves us, please believe that. Please, for me, stop.” Adam looks from me to Tommy; uncertainty clear on his face. After a few moments, his growls fill the room as he lays down on the bed next to Tommy Joe, taking him in his arms and pulling his head down on Adam’s chest. Glaring at me Adam snarls “I can fucking KILL YOU for this! How the fuck could you do that to him, Damian? How in the fuck could you rape him, force him to get pregnant again! Wasn’t the first time traumatic enough for him? I could kill you for what you’ve done!”

“Adam, Andre raped Tommy tonight. He planted his child inside of Tommy. I destroyed that child to replace it with my own. This child will be the future of this family, will help us win the war. I don’t personally give a fuck if you are happy or not, I’ve done my part once again to save this fucking family!” Tommy waves a tired hand between Adam and myself, begging in a sleepy voice “Please, I need both of you, no more fighting! I need sleep…” Tommy rubs his eyes like a little boy, even as a few tears leak out around his fingers. “Lay down with me, both of you. I…need to…be held by you both. In the morning you can fight, but not now, please. I’m so tired and sore, I need you both so badly…” I lay down and spoon Tommy from behind, my arm possessively crossing his middle. Tommy’s scent mixed with the scent of my come fills the room as the front of my sweatpants soon becomes damp with the leftover come that is still leaking from inside of Tommy’s body. With a sigh, I close my tired eyes, a satisfied smirk on my face.

I awaken the next evening to Tommy attempting to scramble over me. Once his feet are on the ground, he runs at top speed into the bathroom, a hand covering his mouth. Adam opens his eyes just in time to hear Tommy throw up into the toilet, the sounds of his distress causing Adam and I to lock gazes—Adam’s look full of hatred, mine full of glee.

Chapter Text

All day staring at the ceiling
Making friends with shadows on my wall
All night hearing voices telling me that I should get some sleep
Because tomorrow might be good for something
Hold on, feel like I’m headed for a breakdown
And I don’t know why

But I’m not crazy I’m just a little unwell
I know, right now you can’t tell
But stay a while and maybe you’ll see a different side of me
I’m not crazy I’m just a little impaired
I know, right now you don’t care
But soon enough you’re gonna think of me and how I used to be…me

I’ve been talking in my sleep
Pretty soon they’ll come to get me
Yeah, they’re taking me away….

Unwell—Matchbox 20

Alexandre received an invitation to attend a private meeting with Ray. Using a glamour, I copied Alexandre’s looks to perfection so I could attend the meeting in his place. The invitation instructed me to meet Ray in his study at his home.

Our first meeting went well for the most part. I acted as genteel and disarming as possible, while Ray acted much more controlled and in charge than he normally appeared. After negotiating for around two hours or so, I managed to get Ray to remove most of his army from both my realms, leaving only enough soldiers behind to “keep the peace.” He told me that he planned to start removing most of his army immediately. Ray also agreed to the extended importation of humans. “The war decimated the human population in both realms. Our vamps have had little to eat since the war, King Toro. If you wish to limit our ability to make new vampires that’s fine, but we need to be able to feed our populations.” Ray agreed, allowing for a mass importation of humans while limiting the number of new vampires to just two per vampires per year. “I realize that number is low, Alexandre, but we need to stabilize the vampire population without worry of overpopulation.” I kept a straight face even as I thought to myself “Yeah right, fucker, you’re too worried about us starting another war.” Little did Ray know, but I planned to reimplement the “all vamps need to take military training” order as soon as possible. I will not allow us to be blindsided again by another war.

Ray informed me that the Dark realm would be expected to pay a fee of $500,000 per year to the Light realm. This was to cover legal and court fees that naturally would occur during the everyday running of the realms. Little did Ray know; at the time of our meeting I personally was worth a grand total of $827 million dollars. That’s what comes from stealing from your victims! Eating the rich was a great way to stay solvent. I could cover his fee in my sleep…

“Alexandre, we expect that you will join us once a month for a ‘state of the realm’ meeting. That way, we can hopefully eliminate any issues before they get out of hand. I look forward to working with you! I believe that the three realms can exist in harmony, as long as we work hard to keep the peace.” I smiled and agreed with Ray, reaching out to shake his hand. “I thank you so much for the opportunity to speak to you, kind King. I look forward to working with you as well.” Ray surprised me when he took me into his arms for a strong hug when I rose from my seat. I patted his back, mumbling that I would keep in touch with him before making my way out of his home and back to the Dark realm.

I filled Alexandre and the ambassador of the Crystal realm in on my meeting with Ray. Both were excited that the majority of the Light realm’s armies would be leaving immediately. I then told them both that I intended to import humans from other realms as soon as possible. “The Crystal realm needs humans more than we do, so I will ‘stock them up’ before I turn my attention to this realm, Alexandre. As soon as possible, I want to start making vampires in both realms. Fuck Ray and his edicts! We need to get back to full power! I never want either realm to be weak in any way ever again…”

Good as his word, Light realm army troops began leaving the next morning. Leaving Alexandre in charge, I headed for the Emerald, Spice and Gold realms in search of humans for purchase.

Rumors slowly start to seep into the Dark realm from the Light realm. Vampires are being mutilated at an alarming rate; their bodies left out in the open for all to see. No one can figure out if the culprit is working alone, or if there is a group carrying out their evil deeds. Money does not seem to be a motivation since most of those attacked come from working class backgrounds. Most of the bodies were found with large chunks of their necks and/or faces torn off. It seems that no matter how many guards prowl the streets, the numbers of vampires found mutilated grew by the month.

Every time I visit Ray or Mikey, it seems that the only thing on everyone’s minds is the vampire killings. Ray becomes more and more tense and stressed as the number of victims skyrocketed. “As King, it’s up to me to put an end to these killings, but we haven’t a clue as to who is doing them! Everyone is looking at me to solve this problem, and no matter what I do, it’s not good enough! I need to find those responsible and bring them to justice!” In private, Mikey begs me to assist Ray in any way necessary. “He needs you, Dam. He’s afraid to fail his people.” I offer my help with this situation to Ray and Mikey, even though secretly I wasn’t exactly sure how I can help, besides casting a few spells to find those responsible.

Slowly over time I restocked both the Dark and Crystal realms, until both were practically bulging with humans and vampires. I continued to council Ray on a regular basis, as well as served on the Light/Dark realms council under the disguise of Alexandre. I even invited Ray to visit the Dark realm, giving him a tour of the neighboring countryside, as well as hosting a huge banquet at the castle in Ray’s honor. I wanted to take away the mystery of our realm, to show Ray that we were nothing to fear. He told me later in the Light realm that he truly enjoyed his time in the Dark realm and hoped to visit there in the future.

As time went by, the voracity which the killer used to destroy his victims grew. The kill count was in the hundreds. If the victims were human, no one would even notice or bat an eyelash. Rich vampires were now targeted, and many were packing up and leaving in droves, the effect of their departure soon felt in the coffers of the government.

One evening, without conscious thought, I find myself heading to the Light realm to visit Ray. I had recently attended a meeting with Ray and the other members of the Light Council. The topic of conversation was whether to levy new taxes on the Dark and Crystal realms, to replace the funds lost by the departure of vampires to other realms. I of course protested the taxes, stating that it was not fair that the Dark and Crystal realms should have to bail out the Light realm. Of course, I was outvoted…

As I stand at Ray’s doorstep ringing the bell, a shiver runs down my spine. “Something isn’t right” I think to myself as the door is flung open by no other than Gerard, who immediately grabs my arm in a tight grip. “Damian! Come in! I have a new friend I want you to meet…”

Dragging me down the hall to the parlor, we come to a stop in front of a young man who is standing in front of the fireplace. He turns to us as soon as we enter the room, and I choke back a gasp.

Vincenzo.

Standing in front of me with a huge smirk on his face is my son. I hadn’t seen him in a couple of hundred years. Vin is well dressed, his hair carefully fashioned away from his face. Gerard, eager for me to meet his friend, blurts out “Damian, I want you to meet Vin. We played a gig together four months ago, and he has become my best friend. Vin, meet Damian, my parent’s friend.”

Vin continues to smirk at me as he reaches out, grabbing my hand tightly. “Nice to meet you, Damian. I’ve heard a lot about you.” Before I can respond, Mikey comes in the room, her eyes sparkling. “Damian! Oh good! I see you have met Vin!” I nod once, my voice slightly shaky as I answer “Why yes, we were just introduced. Pleasure to meet you, Vin.”

Gerard turns to Mikey. “Mother, we were just leaving. Vin and I have another gig tonight. See you tomorrow.” Mikey and I say goodbye to the two young vampires as they make their way out. Vin calls back over his shoulder “It was a pleasure to meet you, Damian. I’m sure we will meet again…”

The moment the front door closes, I turn on Mikey with a hiss. “What is Vin doing here of all places? You can’t be sure that he will keep our identities a secret from Gee and Ray! What makes you think that this is a good idea?” Mikey, as usual, scoffs at my comments. “Oh Damian! Always so dramatic! Aren’t you happy to see our son?” The glare she gives me as she expects me to make a snide comment makes me pause for a moment. “I ran into Vin a week before Gerard met him. I was so happy to see him, I immediately invited him to lunch with me. I explained to Vin the changes in both of our lives. He knows my powers were bound. I told him that we were no longer together. I also told him that I was married to Ray. Vin knows about you as well. Vin promised to keep our secrets, and I whole heartly believe him, Damian. Our boy would never betray us like that! Besides…” Mikey grabs my arm in her excitement to share her news. “…he wants nothing more than to visit you in the Dark realm! He wants to reestablish his relationship with his father…” As Mikey prattles on and on about Vin, I cannot help but think back to our meeting a few minutes earlier. There was something…his eyes! Deeper and darker than I remember. A chill suddenly runs down my spine. What is hiding behind those eyes?

I visited Ray again a few days later. As I was leaving, Vin almost tripped over me in his haste to get my attention. “Damian!” Vin hissed. “Wait up! I want to talk to you!” I nodded once, leading the way outside through the back garden where Mikey’s roses overflowed raised beds. “What is it, Vin…” I let out a loud grunt as Vin runs forward to wrap his arms around me. He mumbles into my chest “Didn’t you miss me, father? I missed you! I’m sorry that I was gone so long, but I wasn’t sure that you wanted me around…” I wrap my arms around him, squeezing tightly. “I’ve long forgiven you, son. Let’s go to the Dark realm. You can spend as much time as you wish there…” Vin squeezes back, tears in his voice as he responds, “I’d like nothing more, father.”

Vin spent the next three weeks with me, the two of us slowly becoming reacquainted with each other. Vin became interested in every aspect of court, especially our interactions with the Light realm. We would stay up late into midday talking about everything except for one ‘off the table’ topic—Justine. I tried to broach the subject of my ex-maker, only to be greeted with silence from Vin. No matter how many times I tried, silence greeted my inquiries.

Vin told me that he picked up the guitar out of boredom. Once learning the instrument, he set out to find other musicians to start a band. Vin happened to meet Gee through another group of like-minded musicians. They hit it off right away, becoming lovers almost immediately, even though Gee was seeing someone else. Vin then confines in me that he has fallen in love with Gee. “I doubt he feels the same about me, father. He told me that he likes playing the field, that the very thought of settling down with one vamp like his parents makes him crazy. I doubt that he will ever feel love for me.” My mind travels back to the way Vin obsessed over my brother Antonio, as I wonder what will happen with this pending disaster.

Every time I ask Vin about the time we spent apart, he changes the subject, or comes up with a vague answer. And the boy wants me to trust him? Not likely…

Around three weeks after he arrives, Vin begins to seem…different. He seems to be holding his breath, in turn jittery then nervous. As time goes by, his temper starts to grow. One evening I walk into the throne room to find Vin pinning a smaller vampire to the wall, an arm across his throat. Vin’s eyes were glazed over, with drool beginning to slowly run down his face and neck. “VIN!” I hear my son growl loudly, his arm tightening on the vampire’s throat. “BACK OFF, SON! STAND DOWN!” I throw a spell in Vin’s direction to make him stop, but it’s to no avail. Spell after spell bounces off him as if he is immune to my magick.

I slowly move across the room until I am standing to the side of Vin, within touching distance. In a soft voice I utter “Son, let him go. No matter what he’s done to you, this isn’t the way to handle it.” Vin growls louder, his lips pulling back until his fangs show, uncontrolled rage turning his face purple and making his eyes appear wild. I gently place my hand on Vin’s arm, pulling until the vamp below Vin can gasp air into his lungs. I pull again, my voice remaining soft as I ramble “…you are my son, Vin. You are better than this. You need to regain control, to find your footing. Deep breathe, son…” Vin turns his wild eyes to lock onto mine, a glimmer of recognition in them. Over and over, I repeat my words, while each passing moment I see more and more life return to Vin’s expression. When it seems that I have finally broken through whatever rage-filled fog that has taken over my son, I firmly push him backwards until there is distance between Vin and the other vamp, who runs out of the room as fast as his legs can carry him. I then haul Vin towards a chair in the corner of the room, pushing him down into it with a firm hand. Without taking my eyes off Vin, I call out for wine.

After I allow Vin to catch his breath, I ask in a parental tone “Just what the fuck was that Vin? What did he do to piss you off until rage took you over?” Vin wipes his face before taking a huge gulp of wine. “I…don’t…he insulted you, father! Said that Mikey was a better ruler, that you sucked as King! He wouldn’t shut his fucking mouth, so I was going to shut it for him…”

I sit down next to Vin, gently placing my hand on his shoulder. “You were going to KILL him, Vin! I saw the rage in your eyes! Were his words really worth killing him over? I’m sure he isn’t the only one to hold that opinion of me, and I couldn’t care less!” Looking closer at Vin, seeing him turn in on himself at my words, so I take his hand in mine. “Son, I appreciate your standing up for me, I really do. But it isn’t worth getting all worked up about someone who isn’t worth the time of day, is it?” After a long pause, Vin shakes his head. “Nnnnooo, father. You are right. I’m…sssorry that I lost my ttttemper…” I squeeze Vin’s hand to keep his attention. “It’s alright, son. But the thing that I don’t understand is why, after several tries, I couldn’t use magick to intervene.” Vin looks at everywhere but me, his eyes growing wild again. “I…don’t know, father. I think I better…head to my room, rest up. I’m a bit tired. Thank you, father.” With a lopsided smile and his eyes averted, Vin rushes past me, heading to his room before I can say another word.

The number of vampire killings continue to grow. Light realm council members slowly begin to blame Dark realm vampires for the murders, tainting the working relationships between the realms. Quietly, I begin to step up military training, fearful that another war will break out eventually if things remain on this trajectory.

Vin continues to travel back and forth between the realms, spending more and more time with me. He seems almost desperate for my attention, practically clinging to me. He continues to have moments where he seems as if he is slowly losing control of himself, as if he will burst out in a rage without the least provocation. When he gets this way, it isn’t long before he disappears for long periods of time.

Late one night I receive a frantic message from Mikey. She tells me to meet her in my suite. Excusing myself from the card game that I was hosting, I silently enter my suite to find a hysterical Mikey clutching the arm of a blood covered Vin.

“What the FUCK?” I scream out, the sound of my voice causing Vin to shrink into himself, his body shaking. He has been reduced to a wild animal, his eyes staring into nothingness. Vin tries to wrench himself out of Mikey’s grasp, causing Mikey to grab Vin with both hands, shaking him sharply. “Stop fighting me, Vin!” Mikey turns her attention on me, her expression one of disbelief and shock. “I…found him…tearing apart a vampire behind a nightclub on the west side of town! HE’S THE VAMPIRE KILLER, DAMIAN! OUR SON IS COMMITTING THESE MURDERS!!!” Mikey’s shrill voice causes Vin to try to pull away from Mikey again, the same way a wild animal would try to escape its trainer.

I raise a hand to placate Mikey, my voice gentle as I turn to Vin, wrapping my arms around him. “Is it true, Vin? Are you the one behind the killings? Are you hurting vampires?”

Vin shakes his head to clear it, deep growls emanating from his chest as he hair hangs in his face. I continue to try and get through to him, rubbing his arms to sooth him as I repeat my gentle words. “Come back to us son. Your parents love you, will love you no matter what. Please come back to us. We are here for you.”

Eventually light returns to Vin’s eyes. He gasps for air as the reality of what he just did dawns on him, his body beginning to shake with cold and shock. I pull Vin deeper into my arms, my fingers carding through his blood covered hair. With a gasp, he blurts out “I’m sorry! I’m SO sorry! I…tried but I…couldn’t…stop.” My eyes lock on Mikey’s as Vin continues “I…don’t know why…I did it…DON’T HATE MEEEEE…..” I try to place a spell on Vin calm him down but once again, magick simply bounces off him.

Mikey sits down on a chair in the corner of my living room, reaching out to pull Vin onto her lap. Vin melts into Mikey’s arms, his head on her shoulder. In her gentle way, Mikey asks “Are you the vampire killer everyone is looking for, Vin?”

Vin shakes his head yes.

“Why do you do it?”

Shrug.

I ask, “Does Justine have anything to do with this?”

No response, except for Vin to shrink even further into Mikey’s hold.

“Did she threaten you? Or us?”

A long pause and then a small nod.

I kneel next to Mikey’s chair, my hand returning to stroke Vin’s hair. “Son, Mikey and I love you so much! We are here for you, no matter what. But you need to talk to us. We cannot help you if we do not know what exactly drove you to this. Please, confine in us, son.” After more gentle prodding, Vin finally raises his head slowly, his breath shaky as he softly responds “Okay, father.”

Vin tells Mikey and I the story of how he one day woke from a sound sleep to find Justine leaning over his bed. She had chained Vin to the bed, her hand gently brushing the hair out of Vin’s face. “Hello, son! It’s been a while, hasn’t it?” Vin told of how he tried to struggle against the chains, how he begged to be let go. “Now, why would I do that? I LIKE you chained down! I think I’ll leave you here for a while, till you become my pet.” Then she left him.

Vin didn’t know just how long that he had been left in this situation, but soon his hunger began. It felt as if Justine had left him for months. Just as he was about to give up, Justine returned with a large glass jar in her hand. “Open up, darling! Momma’s got just what you need…” She wretched Vin’s jaw downward until she could pour what looked like black blood into his mouth. Vin fought against the chains, tried to spit out the blood but Justine covered his mouth with her hand. “Waste not, want not Vin! How DARE you try to spit out my gift?! Momma knows best, darling! Drink it or I’ll bust your face.” Justine slugged Vin hard in the stomach, causing him to gasp as the blood flowed down his throat. Seconds later, Vin passed out.

When he awoke, Justine was gone. Anger at his situation turned quickly to a blood rage, the chains shattering from his efforts to escape. Vin describes the ongoing hell that he experienced—how the madness takes him over, slowly at first, until he cannot control his actions. The only thing that eases his suffering is the sight of blood—anyone’s blood shed by his hand.

Justine’s voice began taunting him continuously. “You’re a disappointment to your parents, Vin. A vampire that is reluctant to kill! Oh, I know you kill enough to stay alive, but what about all those others who deserve to be slaughtered? Don’t you want to make Damian proud of you, Vin? Don’t you want to see your parents, see their smiling faces when they find out their son is a cold-blooded killer? One that thrives on destruction. You are mine, Vin. You will kill for me, will work to make your parents accept you. I will send you the location of your victims, and you will destroy them for me. If you refuse, or do a shitty job at your task, I’ll wipe your parents, Ray and Gerard off the realm, crush them with my bare hands right in front of you. There is nothing they can do to stop me. I have made you immune to magick, so no spell will rescue you. Your parents will never escape me, Vin—and neither will you.”

I fight to stay calm as Vin continues to tell his story, his eyes locked on mine. “She never leaves me alone. I hear her in my head all the time, pushing me to kill.” Vin’s voice slowly rises, hysteria bubbling in his throat until he appears ready to choke on it. “I didn’t want to tell you, father. I don’t want you fighting her, I’m scared to lose you and mother, those that I love. I would’ve gladly gone on the way things were if it meant that you all were safe. I’m so, SO sorry to disappoint you this way! I love both of you so much, you have no idea. Please don’t turn your backs on me…”

It takes Mikey and I the better part of three hours to calm Vin down completely, until the exhausted and blood-stained boy finally collapses sound asleep on my bed. Mikey snugly tucks him in with a comforter tight around his body, as if the two of us were still holding onto him tightly. I watch tears fill Mikey’s eyes as they take in her sleeping boy.

Mikey may be many things—a cheating, deceiving, lying, two-faced bitch—but no one can deny that she loves Vin with all her heart. I feel my chest tighten as she looks from Vin to me, tears straining her voice as she asks “What are we going to do, Damian? How do we save our little boy?”

For the first time in my undead existence, I am stunned silent. I have no idea how to process what we have just experienced. Without thought, I wrap my hand around Mikey’s wrist, pulling her with me. I sit down in the same chair that she recently held Vin in her lap, pulling Mikey down to cuddle in my arms. I hold the love of my life tightly while she weeps for our son, rage flowing through my body. In a broken voice I whisper “We will rescue him from the demon bitch holding our son hostage, love. Though for the life of me, I don’t know how…”

Chapter Text

An alligator prince with crocodile tears
Too many to count
Permanent head cold dreams
Awash in your love falling in and out
Time is luck and I wish ours overlapped more
Or for longer
Orange leaves
Bore the ones falling off the trees
The first time I took the mask off
Just had another one on underneath
I’m just melted wax on a birthday cake
Another year fades away

Charcoal crushed, pixie fever, angel dust
Stuck in a wasteland we covered
In glitter and broadcast
Just for a little serotonin
Self-sabotage at best under your spell
But you know what they say
If you want a job done right you gotta do it yourself
This palace was crystal, but the world was a cruel joke
What is there between us if not a little annihilation?

Baby Annihilation—Fall Out Boy

My immediate reaction to hearing Tommy throw up in the bathroom is to ignore Adam completely. Throwing on a shirt, I quickly escape Adam and Tommy’s room. My feet take me without thought to Ray’s room. When I find his room empty, my feet then take me to Ray’s office.

“Damian! Did you find Tommy? I’ve been frantic…” I move to Ray’s side, my knees thudding on the floor as I bow my head, tears in my eyes. “Ray, I…I’m so fucking sorry! Forgive me! I know you’re going to hate me and there is nothing I can do about that…” I hear Ray’s sharp intake of air, feel him tense even though he is inches from me. “I…had to! I love Tommy so fucking much, more than you or Adam know! The last thing I wanted to do was to hurt him! But now he’s pregnant and every nerve in my body wants me to fight off all of you, to keep him to myself, to run away with him. Ray, help me…” I blurt out everything that happened over the last 24 hours, hot tears running down my face. I feel Ray’s hand gently running through my hair, brushing the hair out of my eyes as I finish “…and now Adam hates me, and I’m afraid that Tommy does too! But the evil side of me is gloating, I’m so fucking proud I knocked him up, made him all mine again…” I finally raise my head, my tears shimmering in the light. “HELP ME RAY!” I take a second to make eye contact with Ray, surprise taking over every inch of my body when I do not see anything but sadness in his face. “I can’t handle this back and forth, good and bad! I want only to be the hero of the family, to make you and Mikey proud but…” My head hangs in shame. “…I’m beyond redemption now…”

Ray pulls me up until I’m sitting on his lap. In a voice full of emotion, he softly tells me “Dam, the family wouldn’t be here without you. You are our evil savior, and I for one love you for all you do for us.” I give Ray a look of shock at this revelation. With a deep chuckle Ray once again brushes the hair out of my eyes. “Yes, Dam…I just admitted to loving you. Why is that so hard to believe? Look at our history. We have known each other for eons, been best friends and enemies, but under it all, I’ve always loved you.” With a shaking hand I gently run my fingers down the side of his face, wonder in my eyes. “I’ve always loved you too, Ray, even in my moments where my heart was broken and my mind was shattered. I’ve never wanted anything more than to be a part of your family and your life. But then…” I look downward, my eyes catching on the logo of Ray’s shirt “the other part of me takes over, and all I do is hurt people…”

In a surprise move, Ray picks me up as if I weight no more than a sack of potatoes. He gently sits me down on the couch in the corner of his office, his voice authoritative as he turns towards me. “Stay here. I’ll be right back…” A few minutes go by in silence, until that silence is broken by Adam’s voice coming from the hall screaming at the top of his lungs “NO, RAY! HE STAYS WITH ME! THAT FUCKER DOESN’T DESERVE TO BE NEAR HIM AFTER WHAT HE DID! RAY YOU FUCKER…”

Seconds later, Tommy is lying in my arms, his head on my shoulder. My poor baby’s face is pale, and he is shaking from throwing up for so long. “Dam…” Tommy whimpers “…why did you leave me? I need you…” I lower my head, my lips kissing his forehead and his cheek. “I’m sorry, baby. I came to Ray to ask his forgiveness for hurting you. I cannot even begin to ask for yours, that would be impossible…”

Ray grunts from his place at his desk. “Dam, Tommy forgives you, it’s written all over his face. It’s you that cannot forget or forgive. Tommy? Do you still love Dam?” Tommy nods his head emphatically, tears in his eyes. “Can you forgive him for getting you pregnant?” Tommy’s eyes lock on mine, a glow suddenly taking over his entire body. “I…have wanted pups for a long time now. I just never thought…” Tommy traces my lips with his finger “…I’d carry again. I’m…not upset, Damian, that I’m pregnant. Sure, it would’ve been nice to be wined and dined first…”

My voice chokes up as I respond “How can you joke at a time like this, TJ? I RAPED you! I held you down and took from you! How the fuck can you just forget that?” With a voice full of tears, Tommy answers “I already have, Dam. It’s time for you to let it go.” My arms tighten around Tommy, my fingers stroking over his stomach. “I want to steal you away, take you to the Dark realm with me. I never want to let you go. Come with me, Baby.”

From down the hall, we hear Adam breaking furniture, screaming at the top of his lungs. “Dam, it might be a good idea for you to take Tommy, just until Adam gets a grip on himself.” Ray suddenly looms over us, pressing a kiss to my lips, then kissing Tommy’s cheek. “I’ll take care of Adam. Just keep in touch, alright? And send my love to my husband and wife…” Standing with Tommy in my arms, I look into Ray’s eyes. “Thank you, Ray, for everything. If you ever want to come visit, just let me know. I’ll come get you. Mikey, Andrew and I will take good care of him.” Tommy smiles at Ray. “Goodbye Grandpa. Take care of yourself for us.” Ray nods in answer, and holding Tommy tightly to my chest, we head to the Dark realm.

We end up in Mikey’s study. Mikey gracefully rises from behind her desk to take Tommy from my arms, kissing first Tommy and then myself before taking a seat in her Victorian loveseat.

Tommy turns in Mikey’s arms, his face burrowed unto Mikey’s shoulder as he wails “Momma! I’m pregnant and I…” Mikey nods at me, then nods at the door. I take the hint, walking out of the room, giving the two of them privacy.

The evil side of me is thrilled to have finally have my boy to myself. I make my way to the top of the highest tower in the castle, my eyes surveying the land around me. A thought suddenly rattles my bones—how will I manage to protect my angel? I’m sure the enemy knows he’s here with me. What shall I do?

I wait two hours before returning to Mikey’s office. When I do, I find Mikey and Andrew rubbing Tommy’s tummy, making the three of them laugh in glee. They turn to me as I walk in, expecting me to join in on their game. Instead, I blurt out “I’m taking Tommy to see Mistress Luna.”

“WHY?” Mikey practically screams. “I do not trust her, Damian! What if she takes Tommy from you? What if she doesn’t allow either of you to return?” I shake my head in response. “I think it’s important that we…” Tommy pulls himself out of Mikey’s arms, coming to stand in front of me. “Who is she, Dam?”

A flash of light blinds us all for a moment. When we can see again, Mistress Luna is standing in the middle of the room, a walking stick in her hand. With a few quick steps, she comes to a stop in front of Tommy. Quirking her head in my direction, she gives Tommy a once-over glance, her eyes questioning. “So…” Luna reaches out to Tommy, running her fingers through Tommy’s hair. “…this is the girl that you fell in love with, Damian! Pretty she is…” Tommy blurts out “I’m sorry, but I’m a man…” to Luna’s shrill laughter. Mikey and Andrew protest as Luna moves her hand from Tommy’s hair to his stomach, patting gently. “Your children say otherwise, little mama. You may have a dick, but the rest of you is pure female. Embrace it, Tommy Joe. Nothing wrong with feeling feminine.” Tommy blushes as Luna turns to me, a scowl on her face. “I come all this way to visit you, and you cannot even ask an old woman if she wants a drink? King, pour me some blood…”

Luna takes a seat next to Tommy on the couch. Placing her hand once again on Tommy’s stomach, she asks him “Do you want to know how many? What they are?” Tommy glances over to me, and I merely nod once in his direction in answer. “Yes please, ma’am. I’d like to know.” Luna leans over towards Tommy, a gleam in her eyes. “You may call me Luna, Princess Tommy. You are carrying two pups, both boys. It appears that one of them has picked up their father’s evilness, the other is as pure as snow, but powerful like his brother. Half good, half evil. Sounds like a handful for their mother, dearest. Enjoy your pregnancy, because it will not last long.”

Twins! Two boys to rule the realms. While Luna continues to sip her blood and rub Tommy’s belly, I blurt out “How will we keep them safe, Luna? How will we ensure that they will survive, with our enemy watching our every move? They hurt Tommy once, I need to ensure that it doesn’t happen again.”

Luna gives Tommy a questioning look. “You have a mate, don’t you?” Tommy nods once in response. It appears that all the rubbing that Luna is doing to Tommy’s stomach has calmed him, the color returning to his face. “He was once evil, was he not? Did Damian ‘fix it’ so that his evilness was bound, making him ‘good’?” Tommy responds “Yes, I asked Dam to bind Adam once we became a threesome. I wanted Adam to be his true self, not the beast that Dam turned him into. Adam has been happy ever since…”

“That is your biggest mistake.” Luna snaps her fingers, and Adam appears in front of the fireplace. His scuffed knuckles and bruised hands attest to his earlier temper tantrum. Without giving Adam a chance to say anything, Luna demands in a sharp voice “Adam! Come here!” When Adam doesn’t immediately move, Luna makes a motion with her hand. Adam glides across the floor, coming to a halt on his knees in front of Luna. “I said COME HERE! You will obey my orders, boy!” Luna presses her fingertips to Adam’s forehead. A white light fills the room for a second, to be followed by a loud growl from Adam’s throat. “You are now the evil vampire that you once were. You will obey my orders.” Adam looks over at Tommy, an evil gleam in his eyes as his hand reaches out to take Tommy’s hand in his. Luna slaps the hand away. “You will protect Tommy and the pups. You will get along with Damian, no petty fights. The time for those fights will be when the war is over. No more bullshit.” Luna pets Tommy’s stomach again, a smirk on her face. “If you want your family to survive and thrive, you will obey my orders and be Tommy’s watchdog. His survival is the upmost importance.” Adam nods his head as Luna once again sweeps her hand, an unseen force bringing Adam to his feet.

Luna stands with difficulty, pulling Tommy to his feet next to her. Without looking at me, Luna asks “Damian? Do you remember that I told you that when the time is right, you will owe me a favor?” I swiftly answer “Of course, Luna, I remember.” Luna nods once, looking Tommy over once more. “Are you prepared to owe me a second favor?” Mikey and Andrew begin to protest, but Luna silences them with another sweep of her hand. “Of course, my Mistress. Anything to keep my TJ safe.”

With an evil cackle, Luna stares deep into Tommy’s eyes. A white glow slowly envelopes Tommy from head to toe, until the glow seems to encase him. Tommy initially looks terrified, but Luna’s smile calms him. Luna mutters a few words in a language no one in the room knows, and the glow disappears into Tommy’s skin. “There! Now she carries a forcefield within her, no matter where she goes. It will protect her and the pups. The rest of you have the chore of making sure the enemy never gets near her!” Luna gives each of us a searching look before adding “But of course, if you want to make sure that she is TRULY protected…” Luna places her hand once again on Tommy’s stomach “…you can have her live with me.”

Once again, Mikey and Andrew yell out their displeasure with this idea. Adam remains strangely silent. Trying to cover all bases, I ask “Would we be allowed to visit?” Tommy’s eyes fill with tears at the idea of living alone with Luna in a strange place. “Of course, Damian! I wouldn’t be holding her hostage! I’m simply offering her a place where she would be safe…”

“I agree.”

All of us turn our shocked faces to Tommy. “Can Adam and Dam come with me, just until I adjust to your home, Luna?” Luna immediately smiles at him. “Of course, mi amore! I would expect nothing less.” With a wave of her hand and a flash of light, Tommy, Adam, and I are transported to Luna’s ice palace.

Tommy immediately starts to shiver the moment we arrive. I snap my fingers, and suddenly he is dressed in layers, the outermost being a beautiful long fur coat, with fur boots and hat to finish the ensemble.

Luna appears next to us, saying “Welcome Princess Tommy to your temporary home! There are servants to wait on your every whim, and the best blood on the realm for you to drink. If you would like, I could teach you some magick while you are here…” Tommy nods his head in deference to Luna’s station. “I thank you for allowing me to stay, Mistress. I promise to be as little trouble to you as possible. If my loves and my family can visit, I will be fine.” Adam wraps his arms around Tommy from behind, a look of possession on his face causing me to frown. Is he really trying to push my buttons? It appears so…

“Behave boys, or out you go! I will have no bickering in my house over who wins the toy. You must share him.” With that, Luna pulls Tommy out of Adam’s grasp and leads him to his new bedroom. “I’ll have a servant put extra blankets on your bed, dearie. I no longer feel the cold, but I’m sure it will get to you easier than I. You also have warm clothes in the closet in the corner.”

Tommy, feeling brave, places a kiss to Luna’s cheek. “Thank you for everything, Mistress. I am forever in your debt…” Luna waves a hand in dismissal. “I like you, Princess. I will do everything in my power to protect you. Let’s just hope the enemy doesn’t have any hidden powers we aren’t aware of.”

Tommy’s POV

Adam and Dam stay with me for the first three days that I am at Luna’s house. Except for the cold, I adapt faster to the winter environment that I expect to.

Adam doesn’t say very much anymore. He focuses his intense glare on me, tracing my every move until I cannot help but feel uncomfortable. I can sense that, somewhere deep inside of him, Adam still loves and cares about me. The evil that flows from him sets my nerves on edge.

Dam is the same Dam, possessive and full of pride at the very fact that he made me pregnant with his children. He can barely take his hands off me, which sends Adam over the edge with jealousy. How in the fuck did I end up in this situation???

On their third day with me, Luna loses her temper at the two of them. “Both of you, back to where you belong! I’m tired of the bullshit that you cannot seem to stop. BEGONE!” With a flick of her wrist, I am left alone with Luna in her huge ice castle.

“I’m sorry to send them away, Princess, but…” Luna runs the back of her hand over her eyes. “…they were driving me insane with all the jealousy! Vamps are possessive by nature, but the two of them are on another level!” Luna slowly moves across the room to sit next to me on couch, her hand reaching out to brush the hair from my forehead. “At least they both love you, that’s important for both you and your pups to thrive in the coming days.”

I smile at Luna before asking “Why do you call me Princess, Luna? I really am a man…” Luna takes my hand in hers. “I can see through you, darling, all the way to your DNA. You are female, make no mistake. That is why you were given the ability to have children. The same as for your brother Gerard.” I look at Luna in surprise. “Yes, love, I know your family tree. I created your family, from the very beginning. There is little about you that I do not know. I have watched you since you were a human baby. I watched you grow up, become a vampire, fall in love with your mate. I watched Damian rape you, make you his. I have always known that we would come to this moment, where you would become the mother of the greatest generation of vampires. I couldn’t change your fate, I couldn’t save you from pain, I couldn’t change your direction in this life. You must fulfill your destiny, darling, and if I can help you now, I will. You and Damian’s children will rule all the realms in the universe.” Suddenly Luna cocks her head to the side, listening to something that I cannot hear. The next few seconds seem to take place in slow motion. I feel a tingling start in my hands, which quickly shoots through my body to the tips of my toes. I feel as if I am moving, my body morphing into a smaller form as I am pulled forward towards Luna. I feel my body shrink until I am no larger than a football, the babies shifting inside of me until I feel as if they will pop through my skin. It takes me a moment to realize that I’m now INSIDE Luna’s body, nestled in her chest. My efforts to speak are cut off by a spell, leaving me speechless and afraid. What the fuck? How did Luna manage to pull this off? And what in the fuck would make her do such a thing???

I feel Luna’s lungs swell gently against me as she calmly says “Hello, Andre…”

Chapter Text

My mood board is just pictures of you
But I’m not sad anymore
So make no plans and none can be broken
No plans and none can be broken
But I didn’t take the love when I had a chance
But I swear I’m not sad anymore
So make no plans and none can be broken
No plans and none can be broken
Do you laugh at me whenever I leave?
Or do I still need more therapy?

Love is in the air, I just gotta figure out a window to break out
Buried alive inside my dreams, but it was all a fake out
And I don’t care, I just gotta figure out a window to break out
Buried alive inside my dreams, but it was all a fake out

Oh we all started out as shiny dimes
But we all got flipped too many times
We did for futures that never came
And for pasts that we’re never gonna change

Fall Out Boy—Fake Out

Mikey and I decided that it would be better if Vin would reside with me in the Dark realm, with limited visits to the Light realm to see Gerard if he so wished. Vin agreed with us, saying that he felt safer by my side. Since we had no idea where Justine was, we figured the best that we could do was to get her to come to us. Mikey’s ‘good’ spells would be nothing pitted against that bitch, so it was up to me to figure out a way to save Vin.

Simple, right? Not on your life…

Vin did his very best to ignore Justine’s constant prattle in his ear. He spent most of his time with me, learning the ins and outs of government, or exercising or practicing yoga by my side. Anything to concentrate his thoughts onto something besides her shrill voice. At first, she merely threatened Vin, saying that she insisted that he make his way to the Light realm to meet her, since she had a ‘job’ for him. When he refused to obey, Justine directly threatened me, stating that she would ‘spread my body across the cosmos.’

“Ignore her, Vin. If she makes a move, I will deal with it. The most important thing is that you are here, safe with me. I’ll deal with the bitch. You want to go visit the Light realm for a while? I’ll going with you. I’m not leaving you to face that bitch alone…”

Justine tries again later that night to harass Vin, who tells her that he refuses to kill for her, even if she threatens everyone he loves. A few days then go by in peace, but late one evening there is a knock at my door.

Vin enters the room, his eyes crazed and his hair covering his eyes. I had been reading in my favorite recliner in the corner of my bedroom. I instantly become alarmed when I look up at my son, taking in his hunched shoulders, rapid breathing and shaking body.

“Help me, father! Please, it hurts SO FUCKING bad! Take my pain away, I BEG of you!” Vin crumbles to the floor next to my chair, his labored breathing loud in the room. “I…am trying…to fight her, but she’s…” A shriek escapes Vin’s lungs, the sound distressing to hear. I know that my son is in pain, it is etched on his features and shown in the way his body folds in on itself.

I lower myself to the floor next to Vin, taking him in my arms. “Hang on to me, Vin! Don’t give in to her! I know it would be easier to just give in, but you cannot cave into her sick desires. Stay here with me, let me help you through it. I love you, son.”

Vin begins to growl, drool leaking out of both sides of his mouth and pooling on his shirt. He pushes against me, searching for a way to escape my arms. I hold on to him tightly, even as I scream out for Justine to show her ugly…

“You called, Damian?” Justine spits out as she suddenly appears in front of us, her face twisted with hate. With fake concern, she turns her head towards Vin, her eyes carefully blank. “Poor little boy! Thinking he can escape his fate by hiding in his daddy’s arms!” Vin shrinks even further into my arms, his nails digging into my skin as he begins to shake his head from side to side, trying to escape. Justine raises her arm, her palm upright momentarily before twisting her hand upside down. Vin screams in agony, his hands rising to cover his ears to escape the shrill voice in his head.

“Justine! Let him go!” I place Vin in the recliner, my body gently pulling away until Vin lets go of me, even while he continues to reach out for me. In my mind, I try to contact Mikey, begging her to come…

“Mikey’s a bit busy, Damian. I doubt she’ll come to your aid. You’ll have to face me all alone…” I turn to face Justine, putting my body between her and Vin. “Let him go, Justine! Make me your victim, hurt me in his place. I can take the pain. He’s just is fledgling…” A sudden chill runs down my spine as a thought crosses my mind. “Justine?” I take a few steps in her direction, fear gripping my heart. “What did you mean when you said that Mikey is ‘busy’?”

In response, Justine claps her hands together in manic glee, excitement showing through her facial features. “Oh, I forgot! Thank you, Damian, for reminding me!” Making another arm gesture, she brings Vin to his feet. “I know! Let’s go on a family field trip! I’m sure that you’ll like the adventure!” With another sweep of her hand, the three of us travel through space until we land on a desolated realm, coming to a halt outside a small, weather worn building. The skies are green with lightning bolts of lavender and red flashing in the distance. The temperature settling around us is stifling, the air heavy with humidity and dust. “Let’s go, both of you! We wouldn’t want to keep Mikey waiting!” Justine swings the door open before ushering us inside.

In the center of the dimly lit warehouse, Mikey is lying strapped down on a medical table. The building is filled with old surgical tools and heavy equipment. Tubes are connected to both of Mikey’s arms, some of them filled with slowly dripping blood, some with a pale blue liquid. Mikey’s skin is white as marble, her eyes glowing in the low light. Nonsensical ramblings constantly flow from her mouth, her head slowly shaking from side to side as if to avoid hearing or seeing something that we cannot.

“I’ve been waiting to destroy Mikey for a long, long time, and here is my chance! Say hello to your husband and son, Mikey. Don’t be rude…” Justine walks around me to come to a stop next to Mikey’s head, her fingers reaching out to tangle around one of the tubes. Mikey’s voice has lowered a few octaves, a low growl escaping her chest as she fights the straps. “See how she reacts? She’s more beast than vamp now.” Turning to Vin, who sinks to his knees at my feet, Justine barks out “See what you’ve done, Vincenzo? It’s your fault that I had to make a replacement for you. She is no longer your mother, I am…” Mikey snarls at us, her eyes wild yet strangely blank. “If you had simply behaved and done what I asked, your mother would be home playing Susie Homemaker this very minute. Now she’s my new killing machine…”

“NO!” Vin screams, hands covering his ears. Justine snaps her fingers, and every tube disconnects from Mikey’s arms as the straps holding her down to the table break into pieces. Mikey bolts from the table, charging directly for me. At the last second Vin jumps in front of me, taking a swipe from Mikey’s talons. Growling loudly, Vin retaliates, charging Mikey into the closest wall. Vin holds both of Mikey’s hands over her head, while doing his best to avoid her slashing teeth that try to latch onto his jugular.

I mumble spell after spell, but none have any effect on Mikey or Vin. Justine laughs at my frustration. “Did you think I would make it easy for you, Damian? Mikey’s reduced to nothing more than a demon to carry out my orders. The two of you should’ve known that I wouldn’t accept no for an answer. And Mikey should’ve known to stay away from my man.” I give Justine a blank look, and she laughs. “Ray was mine before Mikey came along. She took him from me! For that, she will pay…”

Justine makes her way over to Vin and Mikey’s sides, her voice soft as she says “All you have to do, Vin, is just give in and obey me. I will turn Mikey back to her old obnoxious self, and you can continue as my killing machine.” Vin whines as Mikey takes a bite out of his neck, blood running down his chest. “I promise to take it easy on you, son. Just give in…”

I cross the room to push myself between Mikey and Vin. Mikey slashes my chest open, her jaw lowering to take a bite out of my face. I punch Mikey repeatedly in the face before slamming her head into the wall behind her. This only manages to piss her off more. I knock Mikey down then jump on top of her, my thighs tightening around her waist. In a heartbeat, Mikey changes our positions, her legs locked tight around me. I grab both her wrists, holding her hands in one hand while pushing her head back by clamping my hand on her chin.

“I’ll do it. Only if you change mother back first.”

“NO!” I scream, the sound echoing through the room. “You can’t, Vin! Please wait…” Justine laughs again. “Will you obey me, no matter what? Will you kill for me?” Vin looks at the floor, his arms behind his back. “Yes, Justine. I will follow your orders. Just change my mom back!”

Justine snaps her fingers, her face filled with glee. Slowly, Mikey is transformed back into her usual self, tears running down her bloodstained face as I scramble off of her and pull her to her feet. “Vin, baby!” Mikey moves forward until she can take Vin in her arms. “I would’ve stayed that way forever, darling! Take back your vow and let me…”

The next few seconds seem to move in slow motion. Vin looks across the room, his gaze on something in the opposite corner. Glancing at Mikey, Vin leans forward and places a gentle kiss to her cheek. Then, turning towards me, Vin’s tear-filled face twists into a look of regret. “I love you both. Thank you for loving me. I will be with you always.” The next thing I know, Vin is sprinting at full speed towards something at the back of the room.

“Fuck you, Justine!” Vin screams, his middle fingers pointing to the ceiling. Muttering loudly “Feddestra langstta amed” Vin’s body connects with a machine in the corner. It takes me a few seconds to realize that that machine was equipped with sharp blades the size of a katana.

There is a ripping noise as Vin’s head leaves his neck, blood cascading in rivulets down his body as Mikey screams. Both Vin’s neck and head are covered in a blue light, which fades into his skin. I realize what our son has done—he’s managed to place a spell on himself. No magic can heal him now, nothing can place his head back on his neck. My baby boy has managed the perfect, fail-proof way to remain dead for all time.

I remember who I learned that very spell from—Wongsudoe. How in the fuck did my son manage to contact my old teacher? I will never know the details now that he’s gone…

Without hesitation, I send Vin’s body and head to my bedroom in the castle in the Dark realm. The boy deserves a proper burial after all…

Mikey turns into my arms, tears flowing down her face. Before anyone can say anything, a white glow fills the room. A tall, beautiful, scantily clad woman in white appears next to me, her side covered in a scabbard filled with a beautiful sword, a bow and quiver on her back. Mikey gives her a look of recognition and hatred, her voice shocked as gasps out “Athena…”

Stepping in front of Mikey and I, Athena pulls out her sword, pointing it at Justine. “I promised you payback for your evil deeds, bitch! Your day has finally come…” Justine hysterical laugh echoes throughout the building, her right hand suddenly holding a sword as she prepares for battle. “You and your little sword don’t frighten me, Athena! Go to hell!” Athena smirks, her long golden hair shining in the dim light as she barks out “You first, whore…”

I pull Mikey out of the way as the two women lock in combat, the sound of swords clanging filling the air. Athena eventually gets the upper hand, her sword turning a bright purple each time it connects with Justine’s body. After ten minutes of intensive fighting, the floor becomes slippery with blood.

“Goodbye, bitch! Enjoy your time in Hades!” With a high swing, Justine’s head is cleaved from her body, bouncing across the floor. Athena mumbles a few words, and Justine’s head and body melts through the floor.

An unexplainable feeling of sadness takes over me. For better or worse, Justine was my maker, my first connection to the life I now live. I feel hollow, uneasy—I am now truly alone in the world with Justine and Vin gone.

Finally turning towards us, Athena looks Mikey and I over as she returns her sword to her scabbard, obviously pleased with her work. “I apologize for taking away your chance at revenge. I couldn’t wait any longer to exact mine.” Athena glances at Mikey’s shaking, crying form. “Mikey Toro! A pleasure to meet you at last! But I’m sorry to meet you under such circumstances.” The woman turns her eyes on me, running them all over my body. “Well, hello handsome! My name is Athena. You must be Damian Lavelli!” Out of the corner of my eye, I see Mikey’s spine stiffen at Athena’s words. “Wongsudoe told me all about you! You are famous throughout the cosmos!” The look on Mikey’s face is so exasperated that its comical. What the hell can possibly be wrong with her?

Without a word, Athena accompanies us to my rooms in the castle, where Vin’s cold body lies on my bedroom floor. Mikey kneels on the floor next to him, taking Vin’s cold hand in hers. I feel numb until Athena wraps her strong arm around my waist. “I’m sorry for your loss, both of you. I wish I had arrived earlier. Maybe there would’ve been some way that I could’ve helped save him.”

I nod in response to Athena’s comment. “At least he is at peace now. We will miss our boy.” Mikey sobs loudly, tears dripping from her face to land on Vin’s shirt. Turning my attention to our visitor, I ask “Where are you from, Athena?”

“The Copper realm. I am the daughter of King Cresus, leader of that realm. I trained to be a soldier since the age of two.” Athena’s eyes wander to Mikey as she continues, her face solemn. “I have met Mikey in battle many times over the years, but I have never had the opportunity to meet her until today. The last time we fought against each other was when Mikey attacked our realm some 700 years ago.” Mikey’s eyes narrow sharply in thought. “We were lucky to win the war that time. The Dark realm armies are always well trained…”

After conversing for another hour, I transport the four of us outside to the base of the mountain behind the castle. With a few hand motions, Vin is laid to rest. Mikey gathers flowers and lays them at the head of his grave. The three of us return to my rooms for blood, wine, and conversation.

A few hours later, Mikey stands and stretches, her expression one of suspicion and distrust as she looks at Athena. “I have to get back to Ray. I take it that you’re leaving as well, Athena?” Before Athena can answer, I lean over towards her, placing my hand on hers. “She can stay if she wishes, Mikey. I was just about to offer Athena a tour of the castle.” Mikey’s face wrinkles with displeasure as she comments “I don’t think that’s a good idea, Damian.” I stand, moving to take Mikey in my arms. I whisper in her ear “It’s alright, darling.” Placing a kiss on Mikey’s cheek, I then pull her closer to me. “Send my love to Ray, dear. I’ll see you soon.” As Mikey starts to protest, I send her home with a sweep of my hand. Turning to Athena, I reach out my hand to her. “Care for a tour, dearie?”

Athena stays with me for three more days. I am extremely grateful for her company. We pass the time telling war tales and drinking, anything to take my mind off of Vin’s death.

I find out that Athena is indeed an immortal, but not a vampire. She comes from Royal human bloodlines, which go back to the time of the formation of the realms. No wonder Mikey treats her so rudely! Mikey has always had a snobbish viewpoint that only vampires should be the ones allowed to be immortal. I’m sure that, as well as Athena’s beauty, these are the reasons why Mikey is acting so haughty around her.

When Athena takes her leave, she invites me to visit her home in the Copper realm. “My father would simply adore you, Damian! The two of you would become fast friends. Please, feel free to spend as much time with us as you wish. I would love to show you my home.” I place a gentle kiss on Athena’s cheek before responding “I will visit you soon, darling. Thank you for the invitation. And thank you for staying with me during such a sad time. You have lifted my spirits.” Athena surprises me by stepping closer to me, her lips lightly grazing mine in a soft kiss. “It was my pleasure, Dam.” The room is filled with a bright flash, and Athena leaves me all alone.

When I visit Ray and Mikey a few days later, Mikey’s shrill voice fills her sitting room with distain when I tell her that Athena stayed a few days with me. “How could you let that vile creature stay at the castle, Dam?” I try to protest, to convey my sentiments regarding Athena, but Mikey cuts me off. “She is not the sweet, caring creature that you think she is! She is nothing but a snake in the grass! She spent time with you, looking for weaknesses in both yourself and the realm, to use against you in battle! She always has a hidden agenda!” Swiftly standing from her seat on the couch, Mikey storms over to me, leaning down to repeatedly poke her fingers into my chest. “You better go home and prepare the troops for war, Damian! She will attack when you least expect it!”

A deep chuckle escapes my chest. “Relax, Mikey! Do you really think I’d give away the Dark realm’s secrets? I kept her to public areas, staying far away from anything military. How little you think of me! And yes…” I rise up out of my chair, my chest bumping into Mikey’s as I crowd her backwards away from me “…I have our top guard units on standby, in case of an attack. No matter what you may think of me, Mikey—I’m not stupid.”

“Oh Dam!” Mikey sighs deeply, wrapping her arms around me. “I know you are not stupid. And I love you very much.” Mikey’s eyes squint as she continues “But I also know how you tend to let your open heart take over when you are lonely. How do you think I managed to wiggle my way into your life, darling?”

She has a point there; I must admit. She came into my life when I was sad and alone—and look where it got me…

“You’re just jealous that a beautiful lady wants to spend time with me, Mikey” I taunt, a huge smile on my face. Mikey draws back her hand and slaps my shoulder, her face furious. “I am NO SUCH THING!” I laugh loudly, my hand reaching out for Mikey’s before she does some real damage. “You’re just used to having me all to yourself, Mikey. You found someone else, now you must face the idea that I may find someone of my own, and that upsets you. Admit it, babes…you’re jealous.”

Chapter Text

Tommy’s POV

I hold my breath, shaking with fear as Andre replies to Luna’s greeting with a snarling “Fuck the niceties, Luna! Where is Tommy Joe?”

Luna laughs in answer to Andre’s question, the sound reverberating through her chest into me. “Why, I thought you had spies across the cosmos looking for that brat. What makes you think that I, a simple woman, knows where he is?” I feel a sudden tension ripple through Luna as Andre laughs in response. “Because I know that he is here, Luna. You are not the only one who is keeping an eye on that brat. We have your household guarded 24/7. We know that he arrived here a few days ago with those two boorish bastards that claim to love that little whore. I want Tommy for my own uses, and YOU WILL TURN HIM OVER TO ME…”

I try to stay as still as possible, terror running through my body as waves of nausea hit me full force. I feel a slight tremor in my lower abdomen—the first signs of life from my darling pups. Now if I can just keep my lunch down…

“Feel free to search my home, Andre. You won’t find Tommy Joe anywhere. He was here for a few minutes but left with Adam and Damian to some remote realm or another. I told them that I wouldn’t harbor that little brat for them, I’m too old to play games with the likes of all of you.” A few seconds pass by before I hear Andre order “Search the building! Leave no stone unturned! I want that whore found!”

Luna begins humming under her breath to keep me calm. I hear rapid footsteps as Andre’s guards tear apart the castle searching for me. Andre asks Luna, his voice harsh “Is it true that the little bitch is pregnant with Damian’s pups, Luna? Or is it just a ploy to throw me off the track?” Luna replies in a bored voice “I wouldn’t know what that brat is or isn’t, Andre. I care little for your war with the Toro clan, I simply want to be left alone in my old age.” I hear Andre laugh harshly, his voice carrying an unspoken threat. “You and I both know that what you just said is a lie, Luna. You created the Toro clan, your magic created not only Ray and Mikey Toro, but Tommy Joe and Damian as well. You designed this war, just as you designed my ancestor to meet his end at the hands of Damian. You engineered every single step along the way, except for the ending. MY FAMILY will win this war, not you and your precious Toros! I will orchestrate their downfall and destruction, and I will take over the cosmos! You’d better step in line, Luna…before you become a casualty of war.”

I hear a deep voice interrupt with “Sir, the whore is not here. There is no sign of him.” Andre sighs in frustration. “Gather the men, we are leaving. Post two guards at all the doors. No one gets in or out without my knowledge.” For a few minutes there is nothing but the shuffle of feet and low voices before Andre growls out “Enjoy your last days with your pets, Luna. They will no longer exist after I’m through with them.”

A few heartbeats go by before I am quickly moving forward through space, my body exiting Luna’s body at an alarming pace. When once again I am ‘full size’, I bolt for the closest bathroom to throw up my lunch. As I flush the toilet, I hear Luna say from the doorway “Come with me, Princess.”

Once we are seated next to each other on Luna’s ridiculously soft and comfortable couch, Luna begins to rub my belly gently. “I’m sorry to shock you by shrinking you like that, Princess, but I was not sure how else to rescue you from that bastard. I had to think fast…”

I try to give Luna a smile as I brush the hair out of my eyes. “I thank you for protecting me, Luna. And thank you for saving my children.” A shudder creeps down my spine at the thought of Andre. “But I thought you placed a forcefield around me to protect me from that bastard?” Luna chuckles as she feels the pups move slowly under her hand. “I was covering all bases, just in case. You never know what that bastard might do, if he feels cornered, or less than what he really is…” Luna winks at me, making me chuckle as she finishes with “…which, we all know is nothing short of an asshole.”

Placing my hand on top of Luna’s, I ask “Is what Andre said true, Luna? Did you create Mikey, Ray, Damian and me? Are we your children?”

Luna takes a deep breath before answering. “Yes, it’s true, though I always planned to keep that bit of information to myself. I created the matter that the four of you were crafted from. It is because of me that the family is royalty. I created Gerard as well. I’ve always known, since it was time for Mikey to be born, that one day your great family would be my finest achievement. I have always thought of you as my family.” I place my hand over Luna’s, where it rests on my stomach. “So you are willing to do what you can to save your grandchildren…” Luna squeezes my hand tightly. “Yes, my Princess. I will do everything I can to make sure that those grandbabies make it to adulthood.”

In the next second, Adam and Damian materialize in front of us, the two of them screaming at the top of their lungs at each other. Luna stands as quickly as she can, moving between them. “Would you two SHUT IT??? Andre’s guards are outside my very doors, and the last thing we needs is for them to HEAR YOU! I swear the two of you cannot go one second without acting like CHILDREN!” Adam growls at Luna, which earns him a swat on the tip of his nose. When Damian laughs, Luna puts him in a headlock until he apologizes, and promises to behave himself. “The two of you SIT DOWN! Tommy has just had a fright, and he is what you should be paying attention to, instead of trying to one-up each other!”

Adam and Damian sit on either side of me, both trying to rub my belly at the same time, their hands bumping. Luna tells of Andre’s visit, which earns another set of growls from Adam. “I think Tommy should go home with us, Luna. He isn’t safe here…” I tense when Luna leans forward in her seat. “And what other arrangements would you like to make, Adam? Do you think she will be safer with you, what with your family being the target of Andre’s wrath?” As Adam sputters in anger, Luna continues. “I said I would protect her; I did and will continue to do so. She means as much to me as she does to the Toro family, even more since I am her original maker.” A look of shock crosses Damian and Adam’s faces at this statement. I quietly add “Luna is correct. She created you and I, Damian…mother and father, Gerard too. We all her progeny.” After a few seconds, Luna supplies “Tommy Joe is indeed special, since she has three makers—me, Damian, and Ray. This is how she can birth the next leaders of the clan. She also has the capability for magick, if she so wished to learn. She has untapped potential, to the extent that she could easily surpass the talents that Damian and Mikey hold.” Luna stares me down, a serious expression on her face. “You really ought to take the opportunity to learn, darling. That way, you can teach your children the skills that will help them lead the cosmos. Why don’t you try now, Tommy?” Laughing at the confused look that I give Luna, she simply says “That book on the table in the corner? Command it to come to you.”

Not sure what to do, I mumble a command under my breath. Nothing happens. Chuckling, Damian runs his fingers through my hair as he quietly comments “Not with your lips, my love. Focus with your mind. Command the book to come to you. You can do it.” I try again, this time focusing so hard that my eyes squint. Slowly, the book rises off the table a few inches, hovering in the air for a moment before moving to land in my lap. “You did it!” Adam growls out, his hand squeezing mine tightly. Luna gives me a pleased look. “Practicing magick is really like having a conversation with yourself. You think what you want, and through sheer will, you achieve the outcome. You need to practice your skills, Princess. Damian and I will be here to help you.”

After moving a vase, three more books, a side table, two blankets and a foot stool with my mind, I’m exhausted. “I think I’ll go take a nap now. Thank you for teaching me the first steps. I promise to practice every day.” Luna reaches out to take my hand as I stand up. “You did very well for your first time, love. Enjoy your rest.”

Damian stands, following me out of the room to my bedroom. Adam goes to follow, but Luna stops him by saying “I have a job for you to do, Adam. Stay here with me.”

Stripping down to my boxers, I crawl into bed and into Damian’s arms. He feels so good! I sigh as I lay my head down on his naked chest. “I missed this, Dam. I even miss your fights with Adam. The pups make me so tired lately, I could stay in bed sleeping each day away.” Damian’s hand feels good running through my hair as he comments “I’ve miss this, too, baby. But the thing I miss most is making love to you.” Damian kisses my forehead before asking “Are you too tired, love? Or are you up for a little fun?” After a few moments, I raise my head to stare deep into Dam’s beautiful eyes. “If you’re willing to do all the work, darlin. Momma needs to be a pillow princess for the evening…” Damian laughs out loud, the sound bouncing off the walls of the castle. “Then a pillow princess you shall be, my darling!”

Damian slowly makes love to me, the pups kicking against my stomach as he slowly moves back and forth within me. They seem excited that daddy is doing his best to make their mommy happy.

Gerards’s POV

The house is quiet tonight. Ray, Bob, Pete and Frank all went to fight at the front line, leaving Trick and I to entertain ourselves by watching television in the living room of the mansion. Taking a deep drink of blood, I grunt out in frustration as Trick gives me a questioning raised eyebrow. “I’m so pissed at Frank! I armed myself for battle, preparing to leave with the family tonight. Frank started screaming at me, telling me that I “would only get hurt at the front lines, especially in that goddamn dress.” Another dig at how I dress!” I take another gulp of blood, my face red. “Why won’t he just accept me as I am? The rest of the family seems comfortable with me like this. And besides…” I slam my cup down on the table “…Mother wore dresses into battle all the time! Why should I be any different?”

Trick reaches out to place a hand on my wrist. “Well, at least he cares enough to keep you safe. Pete didn’t even say goodbye to me when he left, even though I wrapped my arms around him and kissed his cheek.” With a deep sigh, his eyes lowering to the table before him Trick continues with “We hardly spend time together anymore, much less make love. He still hates the fact that I’m now a vampire. Most days he won’t even speak to me. He’s still so pissed that I went behind his back to become a vampire…”

I let out a deep sigh to match Trick’s. “I just wish there was more the two of us could do to help win this war…”

A portal suddenly opens in the opposite side of the room from where we are sitting. I reach out to grab Trick’s hand as the two of us are sucked into the portal, colors streaking by us as we move through space. Suddenly, the two of us are deposited onto a couch next to each other, the portal shutting behind us.

In front of us stands an old woman, a cane in her right hand. Her long grey hair flows down to her waist, and a large ruby ring shines from her right pointer finger.

“Well, if it isn’t my daughter Gerard! And Trick! I’m so glad to finally meet the two of you!” Glasses of blood appear on the table in front of us. “Please, help yourself to the finest blood in our realm! My name is Luna. Welcome to my home.”

Just then Tommy enters the room, a hand rubbing her eyes as she stumbles to join us, obviously just awoken from a nap. “What…Luna!” Wide eyes take us in as she skids to a halt, her attention suddenly on the old woman. “What have you done, bringing them here! It isn’t safe…”

Luna hushes Tommy, even as her hand reaches out to pet her stomach. “It’s fine, princess. I put up a glamour on the castle. Whomever sees from outside will have no idea that the three of you are with me.”

Trick, his voice shaking with cold, politely asks “Where…are we, Luuuna?” Luna snaps her fingers and both Trick and I are wearing beautiful furs, a thick blanket covering our laps. “To answer your question, Trick, we are in Antarctica. My castle is only visible to vampires and a few other creatures. Humans have no idea that I am here, even with their constant expeditions.” Luna walks over to me and takes both my hands in hers, kissing both my cheeks. “As for who I am, I created the Toro clan. I am your original maker, Gee.” Luna goes on to tell us in depth who she is, and her connection to me. “You also are Tommy’s true sister. The two of you have a connection that cannot be broken by anyone. It goes beyond blood, it’s in your DNA.” Luna stares into my eyes, then into Trick’s eyes before turning her attention back to Tommy. “That connection is needed now that princess here is to have pups. She will need you, Gee, in the coming months. You as well, Trick.”

At the same time Trick and I yell out “PUPS???” Tommy gives us a shy smile, her hand on her stomach. “Yes, pups. And before you ask…” Tommy blushes a deep red as she continues with “…Damian is the father.” Both Trick and I gasp at this news. I cannot help myself, I must ask “But, Adam…” Luna matter-of-factly fills us in on how the conception came about. “Damian did what he had to do for the continuation of the family, Gee. He is not proud that he hurt Tommy in that way, but it had to be done. Those pups are the future of this family, one evil pup to rule the darker realms, one ‘good’ pup to rule the lighter realms. Two brothers working together, ying and yang. When this war is over, there will be peace.”

“I’ve forgiven Damian for his actions. I hope the two of you can as well.” Tommy says. “My love for him has never been stronger than it is now.”

“And this all leads to why you are here.” Luna sits down next to me on the couch. The scent of lavender fills my nose, making me smile. I’ve always loved that scent. “Lady Gee, Tommy needs you by her side. This pregnancy will be half the duration of her last, and it will be very rough on her. Will you be her companion?” Instantly I nod my head in response. “I will gladly stay with Tommy, and I will do my best for her.” Luna nods in agreement. Turning to Trick, Luna smiles. “Dearest Trick, I am not leaving you out. Not only does Tommy need you as a companion, but she also needs help developing her magick skills. Will you be willing to help her?”

Trick blushes as he asks, his eyes averted. “Before I answer, can you please tell me if there is a connection between you and I, Luna? I…something tells me that…you gave me my magickal ability. Is this true?”

Luna chuckles, reaching out to gently take Trick’s hand. “Yes, my dear. I gave you and Frank your powers. Yours come from your intuition; Frank’s comes from his soul. You are both powerful in your own ways. Tommy’s natural ability will be a mirror of your powers, love, but she is a bit…well, let’s just say she needs to learn control. She will learn best from you. What do you say?” Trick takes a deep breath and nods once. “I promise to do my best to make you proud, Luna.” Luna smiles, leaning over me to kiss Trick on the cheek. “I know you will, love.”

Tommy’s soft voice interrupts with “But Luna…does anyone know where they are? I’m sure by now that someone has noticed that they are gone!” Luna waves a hand in answer. “I sent a ‘mind message’ to Damian, Ray, Adam, Frank, and Mikey. Trick can send a message to Pete. I have brought over some of your clothes from the mansion, and I have made sure that there are plenty of warm blankets and clothing for you to use while you are here. There is a refrigerator in the kitchen, which is always filled with pitchers of blood, feel free to help yourselves. I also have a microware to warm the blood if you wish. Come, I’ll show you to your rooms.”

Once we are all settled in the living room under thick blankets, Tommy laments “I wish father was here.” Seconds later, Ray (fully dressed in battle gear and swinging a sword over his head, screaming at the top of his lungs) appears in the middle of room, startling all of us. Ray stops mid-swing, blinking at the room around him as his eyes take in the three of us on the couch. “Ttttommyyyy Joe?” Luna laughs loudly at the situation unfolding in front of her. “See, Trick? Tommy is getting dangerous with her wishing for things. It brought your father to visit us!”

Tommy peels back her blanket before throwing herself into Ray’s arms, heedless of the bloody sword hitting her thigh. “Father! I’m so glad you are here!” Ray gently wraps his arms around Tommy, his face expressing joy at seeing his family. “I’m glad to be here, wherever here is!” Rubbing a hand over Tommy’s stomach, Ray exclaims “TJ! You’re…your showing!” Tommy blushes a deep red as she nods in agreement. “I can feel the pups move already. Luna here says that they will be born in six weeks.”

Tommy introduces Ray to Luna, who politely explains her connection to the clan. “I made you, my son. It is a pleasure to have you visit. You are always welcome here.” Father hugs and kisses both Trick and I before accepting a glass of blood from Luna.

“How are things at the front, father?” I ask. Ray glances at Luna before responding “Not good. We are losing men at an alarming rate. But the other side doesn’t seem to be faring much better right now. Something needs to break this stalemate…” Luna closes her eyes for a moment, her expression one of focus and intent. When she opens her eyes, she says to Ray “I have just sent you six hundred warriors from the Garnett realm. That should help you temporarily. I am also sending you tomorrow four hundred humans to turn into vampires. Most already have some type of military experience. I hope this helps.” Ray’s eyes tear up at this news. “I thank you, Mother Luna, for loving our family and for helping us win this war.” Luna stands from her recliner, slowly crossing the room to lay a kiss on Ray’s cheek. “Anything for my beloved family, Ray.”

Ray spends a few hours with us before commenting “Well, I better get back. I’m sure everyone is missing me by now.” One by one, Ray kisses and hugs us, leaving Tommy for last. “Take good care of yourself for us, dear…and take care of my grandbabies!” Tommy looks up at Ray, tears in her eyes. “Be careful for us, grandpa! We will see you soon.” With a wave of her hand, Luna sends Ray back to the front lines from which he came.

Damian slams his fist down on the table in front of him in frustration. “That plan will not work, Mikey! We must get the troops to Ray as soon as possible! Any delay will be deadly to us all!”

Mikey answers, hands on her hips “We have to wait until the new recruits are ready for battle! What do you want to do, send in a bunch of ‘green’ troops who have no idea how to hold a weapon, much less use it? We have already sent seven thousand troops to Ray, and most of that number is dead! They are just going to have to wait for replacements, like it or not!”

Andrew steps between Mikey and I, trying his best to calm the two of us. “Mikey’s right, Dam. They need more training. I will oversee their training personally, to ensure that everything is done to step things up as much as possible. In the meantime, I will reach out to some friends on other realms to see if we can purchase troops for the time being. Will that satisfy both of you?” Mikey and I stare at each other for a few minutes, each daring the other to complain about Andrew’s idea. In the end, we both shrug at each other. “Alright, Andrew. I know that you will make things right in the end. You agree, Mikey?” Mikey wraps an arm around both of us, kissing each of us on the cheek. “I knew things would work out, with both of us coming together on this. I love the two of you, and I’m proud of you both.”

Tommy lays in bed tucked under the covers, her fingers playfully rubbing her stomach. On the right side she feels a sharp kick, while on the left side she feels a gentle bump against her fingers. Is one pup bigger than the other? Or is one simply stronger?

Tommy’s thoughts turn to her men. How the hell can she manage to bring peace between them again? The two of them are always barking at each other, always trying to one-up each other in front of Tommy, and it seems to get worse as time goes by. How to make them both know that they are loved equally? The pup on the right gives another sharp kick, taking Tommy’s breath away for a moment, while a light knock on the door surprises Tommy out of her thoughts.

“C’mon in!” Tommy struggles to sit up as Gee enters the room, coming to a stop next to the bed. “Mind if I join you, Tommy Joe?” Tommy points to the other side of the bed while slipping another pillow behind her. “Make yourself comfortable, there’s lots of pillows!”

Gee takes a few moments to slide into the sheets, getting comfortable. Once settled, Gee smiles at Tommy as the pups start to kick up a storm. “Kicking already, I see.” Gee cannot help themselves, they reach out a gentle hand to stroke over Tommy’s stomach. “How are your men handling everything?”

Tommy sighs deeply before answering. “Damian is strutting around as if he won the world’s biggest lottery. Adam? Well…” Tommy runs a hand across her brow, her face scrunched up in thought. “Adam’s pride took a huge hit when he found out I was pregnant. He and I have always wanted more pups, but for some reason, it just didn’t happen. Adam started blaming himself for my lack of offspring, while I was blaming myself. When it barely took any trouble for me to get pregnant with Damian’s children, well…” Tommy brushes her hair off her forehead, tucking it behind her ears. “…Adam took it harder than I expected. The tension between the two of them is off the charts, and I’m afraid that it will only get worse when the pups are born.”

Gee squeezes Tommy’s hand. “Well, it sounds as if the family will be having a dramafest to deal with from now on. Pete refuses to speak to Trick most of the time, and Frank…” tears fill Gee’s eyes “is furious with me as well. I’m sure that he doesn’t even miss me.” Tommy squeezes back. “How can you say that Gee? Frank may get mad at you, but he loves you! The two of you have such a strong bond.” Gee shakes their head no, the tears beginning to fall. “You don’t understand, TJ! I…deceived Frank. He will never trust me again. See…” Gee hiccups a few times, his hand rubbing the tears from his face “…I’m pregnant.” Tommy looks at Gee’s flat stomach. “Are you sure?”

“I took a test, and then Frank’s magick confirmed it. I’m going to be a mother again.” Tommy wants to say congratulations, but she isn’t sure if that is the proper thing to say now. “But why is Frankie mad at you, Gee?”

Gee lowers their head in shame. “I…climbed on top of Frank while he was asleep. You know how heavy he sleeps—he barely woke up when he was coming inside of me. By the time he woke up completely, he had come in me three times. He was so pissed off that I took advantage of him! He told me that he can never trust me again, and we haven’t talked since. That was three weeks ago. When I didn’t get a period, I took a test and then asked Frank to use his magick to check, and when he saw the truth, he called me a bitch and stormed out of the room. I know it’s horrible of me, but I do not feel the least bit upset that I took advantage of Frank. I’ve begged him for years for us to have more pups. I know that once they are here, he will be happy with them. But Frank thinks that since he is my alpha, I need to spend every second on my knees begging for his attention and for permission to simply be alive! I’m heartily sick of it all!” Tommy takes Gee’s hand in hers, sadness on her face. “Sounds like the two of you need to talk it all out…” Seconds later, Frank appears at the foot of the bed, sword in his hand and a confused look on his face. Tommy smirks to herself as she says “Hello, Frankie. I brought you here to talk to your mate. Please kindly…” Tommy looks at Gee, nodding once “…take the time to talk to your mate, Gee. Your pups need their daddy…”

Frank grunts loudly. “What makes you think I want THEIR pups, Tommy Joe?” Tommy turns her head and sees tears flow down Gee’s face. “Gee stopped being mine the second they started spending time with Damian…” Tommy feels a sharp kick in her right side at Damian’s name. “I know who they would rather be with. Let Damian be the father, he’s good at picking up strays…” With a leer at Gee, Frankie departs for the front line again, leaving a frustrated Tommy and a heartbroken Gee behind.

Chapter Text

This is a situation that I never thought I’d find myself in. I’m surrounded by Adam, Frank, Bob, and Pete—all my closest enemies. Well…Adam isn’t exactly my enemy, even if the two of us spend most of our time bickering back and forth lately.

The five of us joined Ray and other soldiers early this morning on the battlefield, ready to face another day defending the family honor. I surprised all of them with my desire to join them at the front lines today. Ray welcomed me with open arms, Adam and Bob grunted and nodded at me, but the other two looked at me as if wishing they could thrust their swords into my body instead of the enemy!

As Andre’s men charged us, Bob yelled out “I appreciate your saving my life, Lavelli.” I stare deep into Bob’s eyes for a moment as I answer, “You can repay me by staying alive, Bobbert.” Bob nods once, a glimmer of what I can only take as amusement crossing his face as he thrusts his sword deep into a vampire dressed in dark red velvet.

Have I made a friend out of an enemy? Only time will tell.

We spend the next six hours or so on the battlefield, until Andre’s men finally retreat. Ray ends up with a wound on his arm which I heal for him, his other arm draped heavily across my neck as he thanks me. I hug Ray tightly in my arms, grateful that the wound was not worse than it was.

Frank and Pete continue to glare at me from a few feet away, making my temper snap as I blurt out “The two of you look at me as if I’ve grown two heads. When will you grow up and act like adults instead of children? I’m willing to make amends for the sake of the family, why can’t you?” Frank strides up to me, stopping inches from me. “Why can’t you leave our mates alone? Why are you constantly trying to stick your ass where it’s not wanted? I mean, Jesus Christ, you raped and knocked up Tommy Joe, turned Trick against Pete’s wishes and now you’ve managed to drive a wedge between Gee and me. And you think that, since you’re our father’s new BFF, the rest of us should just get in line and fall in love with you? You’re out of your fucking mind!” Frank moves forward until his nose bumps my chest. “You may have won Bob over by saving his life, but Pete and I won’t rest until your fucking guts are strewn across the universe. You will pay for your sins, one way or another, motherfucker.” Then, in a quiet voice only I can hear, Frank continues with “Stay away from my mate, Damian. The last thing I need is my pups calling you dada. It’s bad enough my mate smells like you when you visit behind my back. Stay away from them or suffer the consequences!”

Pups? Gee is pregnant again? I simply smirk at Frank, turning my attention to Ray. “I have to go check on Tommy. Thanks for the fun! I’ll join you again tomorrow.” Ray warns me in a soft voice “Dam! You better not…” as I wink at him before heading for Luna’s castle.

The sight that I see before me when I arrive warms my heart. Tommy, Gee and Trick are all curled together on the couch keeping warm, their laughter filling the room. The three of them gasp at me when I arrive, Gee’s hand flying to their mouth in a gesture of distress. “Damian! Are you alright? Where are you hurt…”

I look down at myself and chuckle. It is then that I notice that I am covered with blood from head to toe, my sword covered in things I’d rather not mention. With a quick thought, my clothes and sword are instantly clean. “I’m sorry to upset the three of you, I should’ve changed clothes before I arrived. Gee, I’m perfectly fine!” Moving over to the couch where all three are sitting, I sit down to take Trick in my arms. “So, how are all of you this fine evening?”

Trick wraps his arms around me, holding on tightly. “We are fine, father. We missed you very much. Have you seen Ray? Is he alright?” I nod my head, returning Trick’s hug. “He and the others are just fine. Those cowards ran first chance they got; they were no match for us!” Trick laughs against my ear, giving me a final squeeze. “I’m glad everyone is okay. I worry about the family so much, wishing there was more I could do…” I pat Trick on the back a few times and lay a kiss to his cheek before letting go. “You are doing the most important job by being here with Tommy Joe.” I move to the other side of the couch, sitting down next to Tommy and taking her in my arms. “How are you, darling? Are the pups giving you lots of trouble?” At this question, I see the pup on the right side of Tommy’s abdomen give a hard kick. I place my hand over the pup, feel him kick again with all his might. “Well hello daddy’s little devil! You behave for mommy! There is plenty of time for you to cause havoc in the cosmos when you are born! Be gentle!” I softly stroke the other side of Tommy’s abdomen, feeling a gentle kick meet my hand. “Hello to daddy’s angel baby! I love you just as much as your brother, never fear! Always so good for your mommy…” Tommy pulls me in for a long kiss. When we part, I look up to see tears in Gee’s eyes. With a final peck to Tommy’s lips, I reach my hand out to Gee. “Come with me, love. We need to talk.” I pull Gee to their feet, making sure that they follow me out of the room and into Gee’s room at the end of the hall.

Once there, I pull Gee onto my lap. I quietly say “So I hear you are pregnant, darling. Congratulations!” Tears that they were trying to hold back begin to fall down Gee’s cheeks, causing me to cradle Gee’s head against my shoulder. “How…how did you know?” Gee stammers, collapsing completely in my arms. “Frank told me. He also warned me away from you.” Panic fills Gee’s body, causing me to rub my hands down Gee’s arms to calm them down. “Don’t worry, sweetheart…I’ve masked my scent. He will never know that I am here with you. The little shit should remember that my powers are greater than his are.” Gee sniffles softly, their hand raising to brush away their tears. “Darling, I’m sorry that you are so sad, I truly am. But you need to keep in mind that all this stress is dangerous for your pups.” I gently rub a hand over Gee’s flat stomach. “You and that bastard will patch things up soon, don’t you worry. Frank’s just jealous that I spend so much time with you. If he would just come down from his high horse, he’d realize that it is him that you love, instead of me.” Gee inhales sharply, moving to bury their head against my neck. When I try to pry Gee from my shoulder, they cling even harder against me. In a confused voice, I ask “You still do love Frank, right Gee?” Gee nods once as their soft voice adds “but…I love you, too.”

Oh, how in the holy fuck did I get myself into this…

I rub my hand down Gee’s back a few times. “You love me like family, right?” Silence from Gee ramps my anxiety higher and higher, Gee clinging to me as if I were their last hope. “You love me like a brother, or a cousin…”

Gee shakes their head as they shyly pull back to look into my eyes. “I…love you…like I love Frank. I…wish we could be together, like you and Adam and Tommy are. I want to lie in your arms, want to feel you touch me in ways Frank has forgotten to touch me. I want to fall asleep between both of you, want to wake with the two of you. Why do the two of you have to be enemies? Why does this have to be so hard?”

I let Gee cry until they have no more tears to shed. Cupping Gee’s chin in my hand, I quietly comment “Sweetheart, I’m flattered that you feel the way you do, truly. I am the luckiest vamp in the world to have so many that love me. But I hate to say this, a relationship between us can never happen.” I feel Gee shake their head in denial against my shoulder. “I am already committed to Tommy and Adam, Gee. Besides, your husband hates my guts, and would refuse to participate in a three-way relationship with me. Frank doesn’t share, baby. He wants his Gee all to himself…”

“Then WHY DOESN’T HE ACT LIKE IT?” Gee screams against my shoulder. “WHY does he act as if he hates me, when all I want to do is love him?” I run my hand up and down Gee’s back to calm them down. “Because he is stubborn and selfish in his actions. You need to have a one-on-one with him, get him to see your side of the situation, Gee. Frank is so used to being alpha that he doesn’t think beyond gaining your reverence. A relationship takes two, not one who can only lead by having others bow down to them.”

“But I LOVE YOU TOO!” Gee cries, one hand stroking my cheek. I take that hand in mine, holding it tightly. “Gee, I think you are mistaking fondness for love. I give you the attention that your mate lacks, and you turn to me in your loneliness. I am merely a stand in for your husband. When he returns his affections to you, I will cease to mean anything in your eyes…”

“NO!” Gee leans towards me, using both hands to frame my face. “I LOVE you, Dam!” In the next second, Gee’s lips descend on mine, soft but forceful. When I try to pull out of the kiss, Gee follows me, shadowing my movements. Gee slides a hand between us, cupping my dick with their hand, making me gasp into the kiss. That hand squeezes me, sliding up and down the outline of my dick, before moving to unbutton my pants. I feel the evil in me surge, urging me to strip Gee before lowering them on my dick, taking what Frank would not bother claiming. Gee reaches into my pants, pulling me out and slowly stroking me a few times, getting acquainted with the heft and feel of me in their hand. The next thing I know, Gee has slid down to their knees in front of me, taking me into their mouth with a low hum.

Jesus, Gee’s mouth feels so good! They slide their tongue along the underside of my dick a few times before hollowing their cheeks as they take me into their throat. I place my hands on Gee’s shoulders with the intent of pushing them away, but pull them closer instead, my stomach brushing against Gee’s nose. Fuck but they are good at sucking cock! My head falls back, mouth open on a low moan as Gee slowly finds a rhythm, sucking harder and harder while bobbing their head. The evil angel on my shoulder beats the good angel into submission, shutting out all doubts. Both my hands sink deep into Gee’s hair as I push and pull them the way I want, caring only for my release. Why shouldn’t I take what I can from this beautiful creature, who’s more than willing to surrender to me in their loneliness? I shut out all thought as Gee whines, pulling off my cock to lean back on their knees. Eyes blurry with tears, saliva dripping down their chin, they beg me “Please, fuck me, Dam. Fuck me hard and fast, make me cum on your lap. Please fill my hole and use me, make me yours.” Gee’s hands swiftly unbutton my shirt, their hands running up and down my chest, tweaking my nipples and scratching my stomach.

I try one last time to be logical, to be chivalrous. “Gee, we can’t. You don’t belong to me; you belong to Frank. This could forever break your relationship. I don’t want you to look back on this years from now and hate me for being the catalyst that ended your marriage. Please, Gee…consider what you may lose.”

Gee stares deep into my eyes before standing, hands tearing their dress from their body. I am suddenly pushed back into the chair as they climb on top of me, one leg dangling on either side of me. I feel Gee’s hand frantically grasp me, holding me still so they can sink down on top of me, my cock sliding into Gee with one hard push. Looking once again into my eyes, Gee leans forward to kiss me as I bottom out inside of them. “I will gladly take any consequence, just to be with you. Just love me a little, is all I ask, Dam…” Gee rises upwards on their toes until just the tip of my cock is inside them, before slamming down hard. I gasp at the friction that our bodies create, my hands reaching out to touch Gee’s soft skin everywhere I can reach. Gee throws back their head and moans out “Damian! I... harder! Harder, please!”

I grasp both of Gee’s hips in my hands, using them to push and pull Gee’s body. Gee looks wild eyed, their hair streaming out behind them as they ride my dick as hard as possible. I move a hand to tweak Gee’s nipples, earning a low moan from them as we pick up the pace. I grab Gee by the hair, pulling them in for a sloppy kiss, my tongue deep in Gee’s mouth. I feel a tremor run through Gee’s body as my dick brushes against their prostate. “Oh baby, please…” Gee cries in my ear, their way of begging me to brush against that sweet spot repeatedly, their legs wrapped around my waist. I angle my dick, pushing hard to hear more of those sweet, broken moans. I suddenly stand with Gee in my arms, backing them into the closest wall, using all my strength to pound that tight hole fluttering around me.

With a loud moan, Gee comes between our bodies without a hand touching their dick. I reach down, striping with my hand until they become oversensitive, shuddering in my arms. I then put all my strength into chasing my own high, not stopping until I have exploded deep inside Gee. I cling tightly to them, aftershocks running through both of us.

I move towards Gee’s bed, laying down so that Gee is laying on top of me, my dick still inside of them. I pull them in for another passionate kiss, my hands running over Gee’s back and sides. Gee manages to pull another blanket from the bottom of the bed, which I use to cover us up, trying to protect us from the cold. Gee lays their head down on my chest, eyes quickly closing in the first real slumber that they have had in quite a while.

What have I done?

After a half hour there is a light tapping on the door. I hold my breath as Luna enters the room, hands on her hips. Surveying the sight of our bodies intertwined, she clicks her tongue in disapproval. “Always getting into trouble, young King! I gave you a conscious to help you balance out good from evil, but you keep ignoring it, don’t you? Let your libido get in the way of your logic, have we? And how do you plan to get out of this one, hummm?”

Looking at Gee’s sleeping form, I sigh deeply. “I have no idea, Luna. I tried to stop them, I tried to back out of the situation, but in the end, my evil side once again took over my logic. Frank can never know what has happened, he would never forgive them. I fear I have condemned Gee to hell…”

Luna snorts out a laugh. “That’s one way to put it, Damian. You could not have found a way to make them cling to you more tightly if you tried. They will never let you go now. And what of Tommy Joe and Adam? Will they appreciate the fact that you have cheated on them, by sleeping with this young one? You have managed to open a huge Pandora’s box, darling. How will you close it?” I shake my head to clear it. “I will simply tell Gee that we can never be together again, for everyone’s sake. It will be difficult, but I will do everything in my power to keep my distance going forth. But…” I gently brush my hand down Gee’s back, causing them to moan softly in their sleep. “…the most important thing that I need to do is to get Frank to speak to them. How the hell do I do that?”

“Well, for one thing…” Luna gestures wildly with her hands “…has Gee actually tried to have a conversation with Frank? Without screaming and crying? It appears that those two are filled with too many emotions for their own good.” Tilting her head to the side, she continues with “Has Mikey tried to talk to Frank? It appears that she has the most patience in the family, along with a motherly air about her. Why not try that angle, see what happens? Or if that doesn’t work, I can try to talk to him, set him straight.” Luna smirks at me, hands crossing over her chest. “Have no doubt that I can make him see the errors of his ways!”

Gee’s eyes slowly open, going wide when they take in Luna standing at the side of the bed. Without missing a beat, Luna barks out “Good morning, fair Gerard! Rested from your exertions, are we?” Gee blushes as they try to hide their face in my chest. “You cannot hide from the light of day, little one. You must face what you have done and accept it.” Luna lays a gentle hand on the back of Gee’s head, running her fingers through the wayward locks. “Embrace each moment, for you may never have another like it. I’ll leave the two of you alone.” Giving me one last look of deep intent, Luna heads to the door. “You know where I am if you need me.”

I flip both of us on our sides, my hand cupping Gee’s chin. “Luna’s right. We must face what we have done. Gee…” Gee tries once again to hide their face. “…while what we did was amazing, we can never do it again. We have others to take into consideration. I care deeply for you, I truly do, but sneaking around in secret is not an option. We must make sure that this never happens again.” Gee looks deep into my eyes, a hand running down my cheek. “But what of my love for you, Dam? Am I simply to forget my feelings, my desires? Must I suffer because the world isn’t in our favor? Or for the sake of others?” Tears fill Gee’s eyes once more. “How can I let you go now that I’ve had you? Am I destined to only have this one memory to sustain me for the rest of my unnatural life? How can I move forward without you?”

I gently pull out of Gee, backing up until I am once again standing next to the bed. “You have to, darling. We have this one memory, and it must be enough for both of us. I…have feelings for you, but I must tuck them away. Your future is with your mate, not me.” I swiftly dress before I can pull Gee back into my arms. “Take care of yourself, dear Gerard, and those precious pups. They are what is most important.” With a last gentle kiss to Gee’s cheek, I close my eyes and head to the Dark realm.

Frank’s POV

I’m frustrated by the time mother has finished lecturing me about my relationship with Gee. By the time she has stopped berating me on my many failures as a mate, I cannot wait to fly to the furthest realm in the cosmos and stay until I calm down. Unfortunately, that bit of solace is not to be…

In a flash, I am standing in a dimly lit, empty room in some distant realm. Across from me stands an old woman, her face creased by the hand of time. Her long hair hangs over one shoulder, and a walking cane in her left hand. Her long, heavy gown covered with jewels cause small rainbows to appear from the available light.

Quickly giving me the once over, her voice cackles with glee as she exclaims “I thought you’d be wider, taller…considering how the others speak of you. And here you are, a simple werewolf, a shapeshifter! Yes, you have the powers that I bestowed upon you, but I thought that…there would be more…” Rage takes over me at her words. “And just who the fuck are you to talk to me in that tone? Do you always start conversations this way, berating those that you speak to? What makes you think that I want to stick around here, putting up with your abuse?” As I turn to leave, the old woman bites out “I’m the one that created the Toro clan, I’m the one that created your mate. And if you wish them to remain your mate, then you will stay and talk with me, listen to someone who can truly help you win your mate back. But then again…” the old woman taps her cane on the floor a few times, to ensure that she has my complete attention “…go ahead, use your usual hot-tempered rage to satisfy your own ego. What do you care if you lose them? I’m sure there are others that will suffice…”

I feel torn, wanting to leave this bitch to her own devices, but at the same time something is nagging at me to stay and hear her out. Mother did nothing but try to make me feel guilty; I have a feeling that this woman has information that I truly need to hear. “What is your name?” I ask, trying hard to get my temper under control. “Mistress Luna. I live in Antarctica, where Tommy Joe, Trick and your young mate are currently staying. When we are finished talking, I can take you there if you wish. But it would behoove you to hear what I have to say, in any case, dear Franklin. You may gain some insights by the time we are through.”

Sighing, I move a few steps closer to Luna. “Alright. What have you to tell me about my mate that I have no idea of Luna?” With a smile, Luna leans heavily on her cane, her voice jovial as she informs me “Your young Gee has fallen in love with Damian, young man. And if you wish to stop things from escalating, I suggest you speak to your mate immediately, before things wind up out of control.”

Gerard, in love with Damian? No…that can’t be! Before I can think another thought, Luna cuts in with “It’s true, Frank. Hone into your feelings, you will see the truth. Damian has offered affection and a shoulder to cry on, while you offer cold words. Every conversation that you have with Gee ends up in a fight. Your mate has changed over the years, but you refuse to acknowledge it. They have changed the way they dress, the way they act, but you prefer they stay stagnate, locked in time. You haven’t even tried to meet them halfway. You couldn’t have worked harder to push them into Damian’s arms if you tried. And you wonder how things have gone so wrong? What have you done to improve your relationship? When was the last time that you have taken your mate into your arms for a passionate hug? WHERE HAVE YOU BEEN ALL THIS TIME, SHIFTER? WHAT ARE YOU AFRAID OF???”

The force of Luna’s voice causes me to rock on my feet. Me, afraid? Of what? A voice inside my head quietly supplies “Of losing Gee. Of their changing, no longer wanting their mate. Of being all alone in the world, of dying alone. Of their wanting Damian instead of me…”

Luna moves forward, until she can gently place a hand on my shoulder. “Frank, I helped the universe mold you, gave you your powers. You mean as much to me as the rest of the Toro family does. I simply want to help you. You need to let go of your fears and reach out to your mate. Tell Gee how you really feel, admit your failings and your desires. Let them know what they mean to you!” I nod at her logic, telling Luna “You are right, I have been the cause of my problems, Luna. I let my fears stand in the way of my relationship. But…” I look down at my feet, afraid to look into Luna’s eyes as I comment “…what if they love Damian more than me?”

“Oh Frank!” Luna’s laughter causes me to look up at her in surprise. “After all you two have been through, after all the problems and issues that the two of you have survived, do you honestly think that Gee would forsake your love?” Luna pulls me into a tight hug. “Their love for you is as strong as ever, even stronger than you imagine. Believe and trust in that, young one. Now…” Luna takes my hand in hers, squeezing tightly “…it’s time to face the music, my boy. Hold tight to your temper and come with me…”

The next thing I know, I am suddenly freezing in the middle of a large room. To my left, Tommy sits on a couch, covered in blankets. With a squeal, Tommy throws back the blankets and bolts over to me, thin arms wrapping around my waist. “Frankie!” With a squeeze, Tommy kisses my cheek. “I’ve missed you so much! We all have!” As I wrap my arms around Tommy, I feel a sharp kick against my dick. “Well, well, seems the pups are active already! I’ve missed you too, Tommy!” Tommy laughs as she pulls away. “My god! You look four months pregnant! But you’ve barely been pregnant a week!” I chuckle as I place a kiss to her cheek. “Little mama, where’s Gee?”

Just then, the door to Gee’s room opens. I can’t help it; I smile when I see Gee walk over to us. It’s been too long…but Gee seems nervous to see me. I blurt out “Hello, Gee. Can we talk somewhere private?” Gee blinks at me, as if they have seen a ghost. “Uhhhh…let’s go to my room.” Without another word, Gee turns and walks back to their room. Tommy gives me a thumbs up and a smile as I follow in Gee’s footsteps.

“Well, Frank, I’m surprised to see you. What brings you to Luna’s home?” As I watch Gee sit down on their bed, I begin with “I came to talk to you, Gee. We have pups on the way, we’re going to be parents again. I was hoping we could set things straight between us before the pups arrive.”

Gee pats the bed next to them. “Seriously, what brought this on, Frank? I’ve tried to talk to you over the last year or so, and nothing has worked. Why the turnaround?” I look deep into Gee’s eyes as I comment “Luna searched me out. We had a long talk about us.” The color drains from Gee’s face until their skin looks white as marble. “You…talked to Luna? What did she tell you?” Confused, I tell her “The truth, Gee…she told me the truth about yourself and Damian…”

Gee reaches out a hand in my direction as I watch their eyes flutter before slipping shut. Gee’s body goes limp on the bed, passing out in a heap. It takes me a few seconds to realize what has just happened before taking one of Gee’s hands in mine. “Gee, baby! Wake up!” I gently slap both of Gee’s cheeks with the back of my hand, trying to arouse them. When Gee’s eyes finally open, they slowly reaches out their hand to me again, so I take their hand in mine. God, it’s been forever since I touched them…

“Luna…told you the truth…about Damian and me? That we slept together?”

“WHAT???” I scream at the top of my voice, shocked. “No, Luna only told me that you were in love with that bastard. And now I find out that you SLEPT WITH HIM AS WELL??!!” A look of shock and dismay crosses Gee’s face. I turn to leave…

“Frank, please WAIT!” A cold hand grabs my arm, trying to stop my forward motion. “I was going to tell you myself; I really was! I wanted you to hear it from me…”

“Hear WHAT? That I’ve been replaced? That you love Damian more than me? That you’d rather sleep with MY ENEMY than with me?” Gee stands on shaking legs, trying their best to keep me from leaving. “No, Frank, none of that is true!” When I grunt out in frustration, Gee continues with “I love Damian, but not as much as you, Frank! You are my mate, my love, the one I want to spend the rest of my life with! Why can’t you…”

“What, Gee? Accept Damian the same way Adam does? Have a three-way relationship with you in the middle? Are you trying to be Tommy Joe? Or would you rather just keep me around to use when you tire of your boytoy?” I slap away Gee’s hands. “You know I cannot abide with that type of arrangement. You have to choose one of us, cause I don’t share…”

Gee struggles to make eye contact with me, so I know I scored a point. “I figured you’d say that. I knew it would be impossible, I knew you would make me choose. But I can’t, I love you both…”

I give Gee a gentle nudge backwards. “Then I’ll choose for you. I’m out, Gee. I’ll find out what it will take to break our bond, and I’ll do it so you can be with Damian.”

“FRANK!” Gee screams, grabbing my arm tightly. “I don’t want you to break our bond! I want to stay mated to you, I love you! I’m sorry to do this to you, I really am! I just wanted to feel loved, the way I used to feel when we would make love. I’ve missed you SO much, I have felt SO alone without you! I don’t want to fight anymore; I want the pups to be with both their parents…”

“How do I know they’re even MINE?” I ask, my voice cracking. “For all I know, the two of you have carried on an affair behind my back all this time! How can I believe ANYTHING YOU SAY?”

Gee voice rises in panic. “They are yours, Frank! I never slept with Damian until yesterday! I made those babies with YOU, no one else!”

What the fuck do I do now? Turn my back on Gee, walk away from possibly the best thing that can happen to a man, fathering pups? But the thought keeps nagging me—what if they’re not mine? What else is Gee keeping from me?

I brush the hair off my forehead before saying “You know, I came here to apologize for giving you a hard time over your new pronouns. For making fun of your dresses, and your newfound freedoms. For refusing to give you the attention that you craved, for focusing all my attention on that fucker instead of on you. I was willing to say that I was sorry for all of it and more, that I wanted to start over, that I miss you beyond words and couldn’t wait until the two of us reconciled and live as the mated couple that we are. But…” I pause, trying to choke back tears that are threatening to leave my eyes and roll down my cheeks “…I find I am not up to the task. My broken heart is full of anger and distrust. Even though I love you, I’m not sure if we should stay together, considering all I’ve learned today. The only thing I truly feel is sadness.”

When I reach the doorway of the room, I hear Gee call out behind me “PLEASE, FRANK, DON’T LEAVE ME! Please, let’s talk it out! I know we can make it work if we just spend time talking. PLEASE! The pups need their father and I need my mate…” I cannot help one last jab as I leave the room. “If they resemble me when they are born, we’ll talk. If not, I hope Damian will step up for his pups. Goodbye, Gee.”

Fast footsteps take me back to the living room. Tommy is no long sitting on the couch, Luna is. “So…” She looks at my shaking hands, the tears coursing down my cheeks and continues with “…now you learn the truth, boy.”

Rage once again takes over me. I want to hit the old lady! “Is that the reason you brought me here, Luna? So I can find out that my mate cheated on me?” Luna nods her head, staring at me as if she is waiting for me to explode in her living room. “At last, you know the whole truth, Frank. You know what is going on behind your back, and you can make an informed decision going forward! Do you leave your mate, or wait until the pups are born to decide? Or do you choose to stay with Gee, knowing the truth of your relationship? So many things to think through for one so young!” Standing with a grunt, Luna slowly makes her way over to me, placing her arms around me in a tight hug. “One thing I can tell you—if you walk away now, you leave the door open for Damian to walk through it. Is that what you truly want? To turn your destiny over to fate? To leave behind what might have been, based on a desperate decision you could not control? Think, boy. The next thing that you do will determine the rest of your life.”

I return Luna’s hug, my arms squeezing tight as I ask “What should I do, Luna? What would you do if you were in my shoes?” Luna sighs as she gently kisses my cheek. “Keep the door open, love. Go back and tell them that you are not ready to move forward, but you are not backing away either. Just take some time for the two of you to calm down, then discuss what happens next. You will see it is all worth it.”

I nod my head, placing a gentle kiss to Luna’s cheek before turning to head back to Gee’s room. “Thank you, Mistress” I croak out, my entire body shaking at the idea of facing Gee again.

I knock on the door once before entering. I am momentarily confused to find the room empty before I hear vomiting coming from the bathroom. My mind travels back to Gee’s last pregnancy, to all the trouble that they had trying to keep food down. I head to the bathroom, my hand reaching out for a washcloth to wet in the sink. Once it is wet, I move next to Gee, holding the cloth to their forehead as they continue to vomit. Gee’s eyes connect with mine, confusion plain on their face. I then realize that I have been unconsciously humming the entire time, a trick I used to use to calm Gee when they were in this position before.

After a few minutes, Gee reaches out and flushes the toilet. As they pull back from the toilet, I take the cloth and gently wipe their face, my humming getting louder. “Uhhhh, Frank?” Gee sounds as confused as their face shows. “I…don’t understand. You walked out on me! Why are you back?” I take Gee’s hands in mine, pulling them up from the floor. “Let’s get you into bed before I tell you. C’mon, Gee.” I lead Gee to their bed, pulling the covers back and gesturing to them to get into bed. Once settled, Gee asks in a shaky voice “Are you…back for good?”

I shake my head, sadness in my eyes. “I’m not back for good, but…I’m not gone, either. I…just need time to process everything and decide what I want to do. I’m not doing this to hurt you, I promise. I just cannot…” My voice faulters, tears filling my eyes. “…get over the hurt. And betrayal. It will take me some time. At the same time, I hate the idea of having you face the rest of your pregnancy by yourself, especially if tonight is a glimpse into the future. Your last pregnancy was brutal, and…I couldn’t live with myself if you had to go through another nightmare by yourself.” I take their hand in mine, squeezing tight. “All I can do is apologize for everything that has come before this night, Gee. I truly am sorry for hurting you, for putting you through all kinds of hell. I know that I do not deserve your forgiveness for treating you like shit for so long. I have no excuse for what I have done. I hope someday you can find it in your heart to forgive me.”

Gee squeezes my hand. “I’ve already forgiven you, Frankie. And I understand why you need space to get over what I’ve done to you. I will give you all the space in the world, just please don’t, if you can help it, stop loving me and our pups. I swear on all that I hold dear that the pups are yours, Frankie…” Gee lowers their head, sadness blanketing their face. “…even if I went to drastic lengths to conceive them. I’m whole heartily sorry for tricking you, honey. I’m sorry that I used you to get more pups. I will never forgive myself for that.”

Impulsively, I lean down to kiss Gee on the forehead. “It’s forgiven, Gee. Now, why don’t you get some sleep? I’ll stay with you until you fall asleep.” Gee snuggles down into the blankets, trying to get comfortable without letting go of my hand. “Just…please tell me you’ll come back, Frankie. I couldn’t imagine a world where you are not there.” I squeeze their hand again, gently this time. “I will be around, Gee. Just give me space to work things out and get over this pain in my chest.”

Gee yawns, their other hand rubbing their face before their eyes close. “I love you, Frankie. I have never loved someone as much as I love you. I’ll be here when you get back.” We sit in silence, until I hear Gee snore in their sleep. It is only then when I let go of their hand, slowly making my way out of the room and down the hall to Tommy’s room.

“Come in” Tommy calls out. When I enter the room, Tommy takes in my red eyes and reaches out to me from their place propped up on their bed. “Come here, Frankie. What’s wrong?”

Do I have the nerve to tell her? I sit down on the bed, avoiding eye contact. “Gee and I have just…gone through another row, that’s all.” Tommy laughs, their voice soft and musical. “You and Gee have fought constantly since you first got together, honey. What is it this time?”

I clear my throat loudly. “Damian slept with Gee, Tommy.” Tommy absorbs this information without even blinking. For some reason, her lack of response instantly pisses me off. “Did you not hear me, TJ? YOUR PARTNER SLEPT WITH MY MATE!” Tommy nods once, not giving anything away. “I heard you, Frankie. I’m just not surprised is all.” Tommy sighs loudly. “When Damian is evil, there is nothing I would put past him. Truthfully, I’m surprised that he isn’t fucking the entire family by now.” I give TJ a shocked look. “Why the fuck did he have to go after my mate? To hurt me? Or does he love Gee?”

Tommy takes a moment to mull over her answer before saying “Damian loves Gee the same way we all do, Frank. He’s not IN LOVE with them. Gee’s love is not reciprocated by Dam. Knowing him like I do, Dam simply slept with Gee because he gave into his evil side, saying ‘fuck it, why not?’ Sometimes I even wonder if Dam loves Adam, the way those two seem destined to brawl every time they meet.” I shake my head, flipping my bangs over to the side of my head. “You’re right, TJ. The only vamp Damian truly loves is you. Mikey, too. The two of you are a soft spot on his evil heart.” Tommy smiles at me, eyes twinkling. “Dam loves the family, even you, Frankie. He just can’t help himself where you are concerned. It seems he must get his nails under your skin, fucking with you at every opportunity. I hate to say it, but you make it easy for him, ya know? Your temper doesn’t help the situation…” With a wry smile, I answer “I know, my temper is always out of control. I try to rein it in, but it doesn’t work. I guess I’m just destined to be a hot head the rest of my life.” Tommy smiles and nods. “And we love you regardless. Trust me, Frankie, Gee loves you more now than ever. You are their mate; YOU are the one that they want to spend the rest of their life with! And I believe Gee when they say that the pups are yours. You have to believe me…”

I look TJ deep in the eyes, seeing only sincerity and truth. “I hear you, TJ. Now if I could only believe you…”

Chapter Text

In touch with the ground, I’m on a hunt down after you
Scent and a sound, I’m lost and I’m found
And I’m hungry like the wolf
Strut on a line
Its discord and rhyme, I howl and I whine I’m after you
Mouth is alive all running inside
And I’m hungry like the wolf

Hungry like the wolf—Duran Duran

Athena and I become fast friends, a fact that does nothing but piss Mikey completely the hell off. Did I want Mikey to suffer? OF COURSE I do! And Athena is the perfect way to help me dig the sword deeper into Mikey’s back…

I visit the Copper realm shortly after the last conversation I have with Mikey about Athena. “She’ll dig her claws into you, Dam. She’ll destroy you. Don’t come running to me whining when she gives you a broken heart and a decimated realm.”

When I arrive, a court page dressed in dark blue moves instantly to my side, his back bent in a deep bow. “Welcome to the Copper court, my Lord.” I nod in his direction, and the lad silently leads me up a long walkway to the castle.

Gold is practically dripping from the walls of each outer room as we walk towards the throne room, the realm’s riches on full display for all to see. When the page opens the door to the throne room, I hear excited voices instantly surround me as we walk further into the room. Once again, my reputation proceeds me…

“King Damian Lavelli, my King” the page calls out. Even as I nod my head in greeting, my eyes cannot help but open wide as I take in the King before me. Robes of different colors of purple cover the muscular body of a wrestler. The king’s hair, black in contrast to Athena’s blonde locks, flows down the middle of his back. Brown eyes bore into my soul as I bow, my voice soft as I say “King Andros Cresus, it is indeed an honor to finally meet you. Your daughter Athena speaks of you so often that I feel as if I know you already!” Andros rises from his throne, one strong hand moving to pull me upright. “A King does not bow to another King, Damian. It is indeed a pleasure to finally meet you! Welcome to my home…” Athena suddenly appears to the king’s right, her hand reaching out to take mine. “Thank you so much for blessing us with your presence, Damian! I’m glad that you decided to visit.”

I receive a tour of the kingdom, as well as tour of their beautiful castle. My first impression is that the Copper realm is less populated than the Dark realm. Immortal humans preform everyday tasks with hardly a vampire in sight. What would it be like to live on this planet with humans? Would the desire to conquer them, to turn them into a meal drive a vamp crazy, even with synthetic blood available? I’m glad I will never know…

A banquet and dance are held in my honor. I sit on the dais between the king and Athena, a fine blood source made available for me to drink. When I inquire where it is from, Athena gives me a smile. “I’m glad you are enjoying it, Damian. I opened my veins for you. I wanted to make sure that your dinner came from the freshest source.” I raise an eyebrow at Athena in response. “YOU opened your veins, Princess? Why would you do that, when you could have simply served me synthetic blood, and I would’ve been fine?” Athena blushes, her eyes boring into mine. “I could have. But then, there wouldn’t have been a link between us, would there?” At this, the King throws back his head and laughs out loud. “There’s a lesson for you, Damian—NEVER underestimate my daughter! From the time she was born, she always went her own way, forged her own path. She became a warrior when her sisters were still playing house. She outfought my best warriors when she was sixteen years old. When she sets her mind towards a thing—or person—she always gets her way. Take care, young man! It seems that she has set her mind towards you…” I look at Athena, trying to dissect the determined look that meets mine. Maybe Mikey is right after all…

By the time the morning has rolled around, I am ready to rest. The King leads me to a beautifully adorned room, right across the hall from his rooms. “Sleep tight, Damian. I am glad that you decided to extend your stay with us. Later this morning I must leave to tend to some court business, but Athena will be here when you awaken. Pleasant dream, young King.” I nod in response, my hand gripping Andros’s arm in a tight squeeze of acknowledgement, bidding Andros a good night before sinking into the most luxurious bed I’ve ever slept in.

Through a sleep-laden haze, I feel a hand slowly inching its way up my right bicep to sink deep into my hair, tugging slightly. As I try to wipe the sleep from my eyes, the hand makes its slow way down my back to my butt cheek, slowly caressing. I growl loudly, trying to give my intruder a chance to back off, which they do not take, instead sliding across my hip to land on my dick, squeezing tightly. I quickly roll over, my hand reaching out and…

…making contact with Athena’s curls.

“What the…” I croak out, my other hand rubbing my eyes. “Athena?! What the fuck are you trying to…” Laughter fills the room, even as the hand on my dick tightens. “Dearest Damian! If it has been so long that you have no idea what I am doing, I feel sorry for you!” Athena’s thumb strokes across the head of my dick, gathering precum before pulling back to lick her fingers. “Funny…” I feel the covers stripped from my body as I watch Athena lick her entire hand before returning it to my dick. “…you taste of my blood. Does all of your cum taste of other people’s blood?” Before I can answer, Athena leans downward, taking my entire dick down her throat in one go.

My eyes close as Athena gives me one of best blowjobs I’ve ever had. She pays special attention to use her tongue in ways no one else ever has. I cannot move, cannot manage sound except to moan loudly, my fingers sinking into the silken sheets below me. Just as I am about to cum, she pulls off my dick, a trail of saliva connecting her chin to my dick.

In a husky voice, Athena moans out “I want you inside of me, Damian!…” When Athena crawls over me, one leg to each side of me, I try once again to move my arms. Regaining my voice, I bark out “NO, Athena! We’ve gone too far already. I thank you for…” Athena’s body quickly moves upwards and forward before sitting down on my dick. “ATHENA!” I scream out as she moves up and down on top of me, my dick sinking into her with one downward motion. “Please! I don’t want…”

Athena’s strength is superhuman. She pushes me down on the bed and takes over, riding me hard towards her completion. I feel the bed sway under me, feel Athena’s hips snap as she takes me deep for a second before almost pulling off all the way, then plunging down again, over, and over. Time seems to stand still, I feel my dick harden until I’m ready to explode, feel sweat drip down on me from Athena’s efforts. I want to scream, I want to cry, I want to throw her across the room, but I cannot. Even my spells seem to have alluded me, leaving me confused and upset. Why is this happening? Why can’t I fight her off, where did my strength go? I feel weak, I feel powerless for the first time since Mikey taught me my very first spell. Is this how my victims feel as I’m going in for the kill, when I take from them everything that makes them who they are. I hate this, I hate this, I…hate Athena…

Athena screams out, her body shaking above me. I gather my wits enough to scream “GET OFF ME!” even as I start to cum deep inside of her. How the hell does Athena know magic? And if she doesn’t—just who the fuck gave her the spell that she’s using against me?

My body shakes as I moan loudly, all motion stopping. Athena chuckles as she climbs off of me, and suddenly I can move again. Standing in one motion, I push myself away from the bed while holding the sheet in front of me as if that can hide what has happened. “Get OUT, ATHENA! I’m dressing and then heading home.” Now I know how those that I have taken advantage of over the years have felt. Athena has raped me, taken from me what I had no intention to give to her. I feel small, no longer powerful. I feel used in the worst possible way. I wish I can take it all away, but I can’t. “I’ve been raped” is the only sentence that my confused mind can create…

Athena rolls onto her back on the bed, her laughter booming off the walls. “Oh please, Damian! Stop acting as if I stole your virginity! The rumors about you fill the cosmos! How you take what you want, whoever you want, whenever you want! Why can’t a woman take what she wants? Don’t act as if you didn’t enjoy it!” I yank on my pants, feeling like a damsel in distress. “I thought you and I were friends, Athena! Do you always go around raping your friends?” Athena places a pillow under her hips, her ass high in the air. “Stop being over dramatic, Damian! Father told you that I always get my way. Well…” Athena reaches down between her legs, scooping up some of my cum that managed to leak out of her, shoving it deep inside herself again. “…I want a baby, and you are the vamp to supply it for me…”

A cold chill runs through my body. A baby? Is she crazy? A vampire is incapable of creating life, unless it’s through blood transfer. How the fuck can Athena think that I can father a child with her? It’s impossible! “You are daft, Athena! To think that I can father children! What makes you…” My thought is stopped in its track when I suddenly realize the truth. “Which witch or warlock did you visit, Athena? Which deity has dominion over my powers, over life itself? Who gave you the spell to take advantage of me, to give you life from nothing?” Athena places a hand on her stomach, rubbing gently. “A source greater than you, dear Damian. An old lady with a cane, one who seemed to know an awful lot about you. She said that, since you lost one child, you deserved another. She said your pride could handle it if I forced that child from you, it might even knock you down a few pegs in the process. Teach you to treat others better. And now I carry your child, a feat that even Mikey couldn’t do. You see, I know all about your love for Mikey. Mikey the bitch who doesn’t deserve your love, who never treated you right. The bitch that used you from the start, took all you had to give and then laughed in your face. The one who warned you against me, knowing full well what would happen between us. Mikey doesn’t want you to have a child with someone who is not her, yet she ran off and married a Toro!”

A dove enters the room through the open window, landing on Athena’s stomach. Athena laughs as the bird sings a tune before leaving the same way it arrived. “I’ve just conceived, Damian. Your son is on the way, our son. You will be an excellent father, and I will do my very best to be the best mother I can be…”

My brain reeling, I finish dressing in silence. Athena slowly stands next to the bed, her face glowing. “Dam…” A hand comes to rest on my arm, making me shiver. “…I know that this is a lot to take in. I’m so sorry for the way I conceived! If there had been another way…” I shake off Athena’s hand as if it were hot coals. “There was another way! You used me, Athena, and I will never forgive you for this.” I make my way to the door, calling over my shoulder “Thank your father for the kind welcome, Athena.” I close my eyes and head to the Dark realm…

“What did I tell you, Damian??? Why can’t you ever listen to me?” Mikey screams the second I open my eyes. I blink at her a few times, wondering if she’s real or an illusion. “How the hell could you…” I cut Mikey off by screaming “I was just RAPED, Mikey, so if you would be so kind as to GET THE FUCK OUTTA HERE…” Mikey moves even closer to me, a hand on my arm. “Raped? Athena had to have used a spell to hold you down! Fuck knows I’ve tried and failed countless amounts of times!”

“Mikey PLEASE!...” Then a thought hits me. “How the fuck did you even know what happened, Mikes?”

“There was a disturbance in the force” Mikey chuckles. “Everyone who has even a slight amount of magick in their systems was hit by a lightning bolt the second that bitch conceived. It appears someone is very invested in your having children, Dam. Who knew it was possible, a vamp and an immortal human? It seems that there is someone out there who is excited to have you procreate….” Mikey looks at me, really looks at me, and then takes me in her arms. “I’m sorry to be so flippant, Dam, really I am. I’m just…” I hear Mikey sniffle in my ear “…so damn upset that it isn’t me carrying your baby.” I pull back from Mikey in shock. “But…Ray…” Mikey wipes her nose on her sleeve. “The entire time we were together, I tried to get pregnant with your child. No matter how hard I tried, how many spells I used or how many magical sources I visited, nothing could make me conceive. Then along comes this bitch, taking advantage of you and conceiving a child with no trouble at all??? I can only stand here and wish…”

Mikey and I end up holding each other, trying to calm the other down as we both break down crying. Finally, I blurt out “I…I’m going to make a…horrible father, Mikes! Especially since I don’t particularly like the mother very much right now!” Mikey laughs, squeezing me tightly. “You were the best father in the world to Vin, who loved you without limit, Dam. You will grow to love the new baby just as much. I’m just sorry that you no longer have the same feelings for the mother.”

“My King, King Andros is here to see you. Shall I have him meet you here?” a page asks. Without raising my eyes from the financial report in front of me, I nod. “Send him in, Stephen. Then you may take a break. Tell the others that I do not wish to be disturbed.” Stephen nods his head once to my order, then turns to leave me.

I raise my eyes when I hear Stephen utter “King Andros, my King.” I wait for Stephen to close the door behind him before I bark out “What a surprise, Andros! I figured you would be the last person I’d see…” Andros walks over to me, reaching out to take my hand. I pull back in my chair to avoid contact. “Just why are you here? Come all this way to tell me that your daughter isn’t pregnant? Or are you on some other fun errand?” Andros’s eyes narrow sharply. “On the contrary, Damian. I came to tell you that through some miracle, Athena is already showing. She appears to be four months pregnant, even though you were with her only yesterday. I just thought that, at the rate the baby is growing, you would want to spend time with her and the baby before she gives birth…” I throw my head back and laugh. “And why should I care when she gives birth?” Andros’s face is a mask of disbelief. “Did your daughter tell you that she raped me to get her precious child? How she used magick against me to get what she wanted? Why should I give a damn about some pup that she forced from me? She can go to hell…”

Andros stares at me for a moment, at a loss for words. “I know you told me that your daughter is capable of anything, but I had no idea that she would stoop so low as to force me into fatherhood! Well, she wanted a baby and a baby she will have, but I don’t have to be a part of any of it. Go back to your kingdom and leave me alone…”

Instead of leaving, which I half expected, Andros pulls up a chair and sits next to me. With a deep sigh, Andros says “Damian, I AM sorry for the way Athena treated you. If I had any idea of what she was planning, I promise you I would’ve informed you straight away. I told you that she has always been headstrong, has always managed to achieve whatever she set out to do. I had no idea that she wanted a child, on the contrary, she always told me that the last thing on the planet that she wanted was to be a mother. I figured I’d never have any grandchildren by her. I am just as flabbergasted as you are with the way she went about conceiving. She must love you very much to go to such lengths…”

I brush the hair out of my eyes, my hand shaking. “Your daughter and I barely know each other, Andros. That is why I came to your realm, to get to know her better. As a FRIEND! Not as a lover, and certainly NOT as the mother to my child! I have never felt so used in my life, not even by Mikey, who is an expert at manipulation!” Andros nods his head in acknowledgement of my words. “Truthfully, Andros, I…” I take a deep breath before I continue with “…never want to see Athena again, nor the baby. She got what she wanted, but that is all she is getting. She is going to have to raise that baby alone…” Andros sighs in frustration, his hands flaying in the air. “Damian, the baby is the innocent one in all of this. I understand that you do not want to deal with my daughter any longer, but how can you turn your back on your own child? The baby is an extension of you brought into the world. Can you really deny your place in the child’s life?”

I sink back into my seat, suddenly lost in thought. What do I really want? I have been so miserable since Vin died, but was I ready to take on the responsibility of another life again? Be a father again? The whole situation makes me long for Vin, to see him, to hold him. Would another child help fill in the hole in my heart?

With a deep sigh, I tell Andros “Alright, Andros. I’ll speak to Athena. But don’t expect miracles! I make no promises as to how things will go.” Andros gives me a small, sincere smile as he wraps me up in hug. “I understand, Damian. Thank you for being willing to speak to my daughter. It means the world to me.” I grunt at how tight I’m being squeezed by the much bigger man. “Easy, Grandpa! You’ll break my ribs!” With a laugh, Andros pulls me out of my chair and the next thing I know, we are in the hallway outside of Athena’s room. “Good luck, Son in Law!” With a wink, Andros strolls down the hall, whistling as he goes.

Cheeky fucker!

I knock on Athena’s door, my heart in my throat. When I hear her answer, I fling open the door before I lose my nerve. When I do not automatically see her, I move further into the apartment until I am standing in the doorway of her bedroom. “Athena? I…do you mind if…”

“Damian!” Athena is propped up in bed, the covers covering her lap. I panic when I see that Andros is correct—Athena’s stomach has swollen to the size of a small basketball. Both her hands are propped up on top of her stomach, as if to emphasize the size. “I’m SO glad you came! I’ve been lying here, thinking of you…” When I refuse to move closer, she reaches out to me, a smile on her face. “Please, sit. We have much to discuss.”

I take a few steps into the room, but I fail to sit on the bed as she hopes that I will. “We have nothing to say to each other, Athena. You used me to get pregnant, and now you want me to play happy family with you. That’s not going to happen.” My eyes cannot move from her stomach, especially when I see the child kick a few times. “I may be the father of that child, but I’m nothing to you. Don’t get your hopes up.”

Athena shifts on the bed, once again patting the side of the bed closest to her. “Please, Damian! Have a seat and we can…”

“Why did you do it? And why me?” Athena, for the first time, looks guilty. “You could’ve had any immortal human knock you up! WHY DID YOU HAVE TO FUCK WITH MY LIFE?”

Athena throws back the covers and quickly stands up. The nightgown that she wears clings to her thin frame, making her stomach look even bigger than when she was sitting down. The baby must be unhappy with the quick change of movement or Athena’s changing emotions because it starts kicking up a storm.

“Damian, I really like you. No, that’s not true.” Athena moves closer to me, still reaching out a hand in my direction. “I have feelings for you. True, they are new and are still growing, but I couldn’t think of anyone else that I would choose to father my child. I was afraid that, if I told you how I feel, how much I want a child, you would simply laugh and dismiss my feelings.” I grunt in response to her statements, as if her simple answer explains everything. “How did you gain the magick to gain your wish, Athena? Who gave you the knowledge?”

Athena rubs her stomach, doing her best to calm the child down. “I don’t know, honestly, I don’t!” Once again, I grunt and shake my head, dismissing her words. “I mean it, Damian!” Tears begin to fill Athena’s eyes as she sees that I do not believe her. “I was lying in bed, thinking of you when that woman appeared in my room. She wouldn’t tell me who she was, she simply told me that she could solve my problem for me by giving me a spell to use to get pregnant. She told me that you desperately missed your Vin, and she wanted you to be happy, so she would help me. She told me that once you got passed the point that you could forgive me for the way the baby was conceived, the two of us would be able to raise our baby together. Happily. In peace.”

My head is spinning. Who is this mystery woman, who has nothing better to do with her time than to pass out spells to ensure a baby by me? “What was her name, Athena?” In response, Athena shakes her head, her eyes sad. “She wouldn’t tell me who she was, she was just an old woman with long hair and a cane. She did say that she is very vested in you, that she is responsible for your own conception. That is all she said to me, I swear on my life and the life of our baby, Damian!” Do I believe her? Is there really some cosmic mother figure out there trying to do things for my benefit? Or is she simply Athena’s way of trying to get out of trouble with me, to try and make me forgive her and love the baby…

“I know that you do not want to believe me, and I understand why. I hurt you, I took from you that which you didn’t want to give to me. I wouldn’t blame you if you never spoke to me again. But please, Damian, please do not turn your back on your son. Here…” Athena takes quick steps towards me, gently grabbing my hand and placing it on her stomach. “He belongs to you, Damian. He’s your son. Please do not let your hatred of me take you away from him. He needs his father in his life.”

At first, I do not move my hand. I simply let it lie on top of Athena’s stomach. Before I can pull my hand away, I feel a series of sharp kicks under my hand. I feel torn, not sure what to do. Experimentally, I wiggle my fingers. Athena smiles gently when the baby kicks again, this time directly at my fingers. I wiggle them again, and the baby kicks up a storm.

I hear a female voice in my head say “There is your progeny, Damian. Your child. I gave him to you, so you can be with him on his life’s journey, so you can be a father again. You need him more than you know. You do not know me, but I know you, Damian. You came from me; I was the one who created you. Trust that this child is your future, is your salvation. One day, this child will help save the world. Take your place in his life, and for once, truly be happy.”

I stare into Athena’s eyes, looking for any hint of trickery. Instead, I see nervousness, sadness—and longing.

Looking back down at her stomach, I tell Athena “I do not love you. I do not trust you. But I find I cannot deny the child in your womb. Do not get any wild ideas, such as me falling in love with you. That is NOT going to happen. If you play one more trick on me, I am out of BOTH your lives, understand?” Athena nods once, her eyes on the floor in shame. “Now, will you please sit down, so I may play with my boy?” Athena moves back to the bed, propping herself up against the headboard. I spend the better part of an hour playing with him, trying my best to get him play with me. At one point, I feel someone standing behind me, and I turn to see Andros standing in the doorway, a huge smile on his face.

Life becomes unbelievably busy for me over the next four months. Between spending time with my fast-growing son, I lead not only the Dark realm, but I serve as a lead advisor to Ray in the Light realm. Mikey, in a decision that surprises me, stays as far away from me as she can get, to the point that Ray starts making comments. “I have no idea what’s gotten into Mikey lately. I swear, it seems she has a psychic twinkle! Seconds before you arrive, she remembers something outside of the house that she must do, and she takes off! I don’t think the two of you have been in the same place for at least five months!” I laugh in response, trying to lighten the mood. “Mikey’s just busy, Ray. It must be taxing to be the wife of the King of the largest of all realms! I’m sure every day she is bombarded with requests for her time! Give her some credit, she is the perfect wife for a busy King such as yourself!” Ray wraps his arm around me, giving me a tight squeeze. “You always have praised Mikey, Dam. You are a wonderful friend, and the two of us are lucky to have you in our lives…”

Little does he know! Most of the time, I can barely stand the sight of them! I guess I’m a better actor than I thought…

“I understand, from Mikey, that you are going to be a father soon. Is this true?” With a deep sigh, I respond “Yes, it’s true, Ray. A woman who I thought was my friend used a spell to get a baby from me. I have claimed the baby, but I am keeping the mother at arm’s length. The last thing I want to do is to give her a chance to betray me again.” Ray grunts in response. “Makes perfect sense, Damian. I’m sure that you will make a perfect father.” When I thank Ray for his sentiments, he blurts out “Oh, by the way! I’ve heard from the King of the Copper realm. He wants to work out a treaty between his realm, the Dark realm, and the Light realm. Since we are the three most powerful realms, it makes sense. What do you know of King Cresus, Damian?” I swallow down the lump in my throat. “Andros has always treated me fairly, but it is his daughter that is carrying my baby. Could that just be a coincidence, or could he, like his daughter, be up to something?”

I hear a scream in my ear. “Damian, PLEASE come! I’m…having the…baby…”

Trying to stay composed, I say to Ray “Let me think on it, Ray, and I will get back to you. I can even talk to the King himself, see what he is up to. But for now, it appears I'm needed in the Copper realm. My child is on the way. I will see you soon, Ray.” I quickly leave the room, closing my eyes when I am alone in the hallway.

I find Athena lying in the middle of her bed, a midwife between her legs. “Please, Damian, please stay with me! I…” As a contraction takes her over, Athena reaches out for my hand, squeezing tightly. I hear her give out a moan, tears streaming down her face. “I’m…not going to survive…the birth. Take good…care of our son, Dam. Be…there for him…like I would be…” Blood gushes out of Athena, the bed turning red. The midwife moves forward, mumbling under her breath. I hear the old woman’s voice in my ear say “You don’t need her, son. You only need the child. She will only betray you if she lives. I chose her to be a vessel for your child, not to be its mother. You will take the child and raise it the way he should be raised, strong and talented. One day, this child will help save the world as we know it. Be there for it, be the best dad you can be, and all will be well…”

Athena gives out a low moan as I watch her body stretch and contract around the crown of the baby’s head. More blood soaks the bed, my very best spells no match for the blood loss. The mother of my child is dying right in front of me, and there is nothing anybody can do about it. Andros enters the room, screaming out instructions at the midwife, who can do nothing but shake her head. A doctor arrives seconds later, but even his experience and knowledge can do nothing to stop the flow of blood from Athena’s body.

The doctor reaches his hands inside of the birth canal, doing his best to coax out the baby as fast as possible. Before I know it, my son’s blood-covered face appears, this face a red mask of death. I lean down and take Athena’s hand in mine, squeezing it as I say “He’s beautiful, Athena! He has your hair, but he looks like me.” With tears in my eyes, I continue with “He’s going to make it, I know he will.”

The doctor wipes off the baby’s face. On instinct, I push the doctor away and lean down to cover the baby’s mouth and nose with my mouth, breathing into the baby’s lungs gently. After a few tries, the baby begins to shake under me, a soft cry released the second I move away. Athena smiles when she hears him, tears in her eyes. The doctor, realizing that Athena is too far gone to participate in the birth, moves out first one shoulder, then the other before gently pulling our boy out of Athena in one go.

The doctor quickly wipes the baby off before placing him in a towel and handing him to me. Andros moves closer to the bed, his eyes locked on Athena’s.

Athena looks from her father to me, tears flowing down her cheeks. “My job is done. Both of you, care for my son, and for each other. You’re his only family, you need to be there for him. Tell him…” Athena takes a final breath, a look of peace coming over her. “…that his mother loves him. I love you both.”

With that, Athena closes her eyes and dies.

Chapter Text

Pete lies in bed, his hands behind his head, staring at the ceiling. A deep sigh fills the room as his mind turns towards his husband.

“What the fuck is wrong with me?” Pete thinks. “Why can’t I forgive Trick for becoming a vampire? True, he went to that bastard Damian to do so, but…so much time has gone by, and I still cannot…”

“Petey?” Pete slowly turns his head to the side. Speak of the devil! Did he manage to conjure up his husband somehow?

Trick looks uncomfortable, his shoulders raised high around his ears, his hair flopping down on his forehead. He rambles, his eyes locked onto the patterns on the blankets instead of Pete’s gaze, “Is it…okay that I’m here? I mean, I want to talk to you, but if you’d rather I go…” Pete takes a deep breath, which Patrick takes to mean that he wants Trick to go. Trick stands up, panicked, quickly backing away from the bed. “It’s okay, Pete. Listen, if you want to talk to me, I’m here…” Pete talks over Trick, saying “No, I want to talk…” at the same time Trick says “Well, okay then, I’ll go…”

Pete sits up on the bed, his hand reaching out to Trick. “TRICK! I want you to STAY! Please, have a seat next to me.” Trick, moving gingerly, sits down on his side of the bed, leaving plenty of space between them. Pete leans back against the headboard, his hand running through his hair. “I…was just thinking about you, to tell the truth. I thought maybe I conjured you, since you just popped up next to me.” Looking deep into Trick’s everchanging eyes, Pete goes on to say “I’ve been thinking about you becoming a vampire, and how I can’t seem to get over my anger at you about it. I mean…” Trick looks as if he was just punched in the stomach this far into the conversation. “…I know that you wanted to become a vampire, and I’m sorry that I didn’t take you seriously. I was a jerk about it, and I can see how you would turn to someone else to make it happen. But Damian? Trick, why did you have to make our family’s enemy your mentor? I would rather that you have asked Mikey, or fuck, even Bob, over that bastard…”

Trick swallows his anger long enough to say “Pete, I want to thank you for your apology. It means the world to me that you said that. But as far as Damian is concerned, you have it all wrong. I’M the one who asked Damian. He didn’t come to me to ask if I wanted him to change me. I begged him; and he didn’t want to at first. The more I begged, the more he turned me down. But in the end, he gave in because he knew how badly I wanted to be a vamp. I wish you could’ve seen him; how careful he was with me! He was the one to ask Gee to join us, he was afraid that something might go wrong, and he didn’t want to lose me. He stayed with me afterwards, teaching me how to drink and everything that I needed to survive in my new life. He has been nothing but affectionate and kind to me, always checking in with me to make sure that I’m doing alright.” Trick’s face suddenly takes on a horrified look. “Wait, were you concerned that he would leave me the same way he did Tommy Joe?” Pete looks guilty, his eyes avoiding Trick’s for a moment. “He has been there with me since day one, Pete. I couldn’t have asked for a better mentor, unless it was you, Petey. I promise you, I’m fine.”

Pete takes Trick’s hand in his. “Yes, I was afraid that he would hurt you, or even worse turn his back on you. That is why that, even though I was mad at you, I still shadowed you in the beginning. I wanted to be there if he failed you. I’m just glad he didn’t.” Trick gives Pete a sweet smile. “That means a lot to me, knowing you were there. Believe me, Petey, you may have other reasons to hate Damian, not that I want you to have them, but how he treats me isn’t one of them.”

Suddenly, Damian appears in the room, shirtless. “Trick, are you okay? I got a vibe that you’re terribly upset and I…” Damian looks from Pete to Trick, his face turning red. “Oh, I’m so sorry! It looks as if I’ve interrupted a private conversation. Please forgive me.” As Damian closes his eyes to leave, Pete calls out “Hey Damian!” Dam opens his eyes and levels Pete with a questioning gaze. “Trick and I were just talking about you. He’s been telling me that you have been there for him since his turning. I…” Pete gives a quick glance to Trick before continuing with “…want to thank you for being there for him. Even though we have been fighting, I still love Trick, and I always want the best for him. You have proven to be the kind of mentor that he deserves. I’m sorry that I gave you such a hard time about everything.”

Damian stands still for a second, taking in Pete’s words. With a saucy grin, he says “Why Petey, I never knew you cared!” Turning serious, Damian takes a few steps closer to Pete’s side of the bed. “Seriously, I thank you for your words, Pete. I know you cannot stand me, but I have nothing but the very best intentions where Trick is concerned. I would do anything to keep him safe, believe me. I have grown to love him, and I am proud to be his mentor and father.” Damian reaches out his hand, which Pete takes, shaking it firmly in a first step towards peace between them. Pulling his hand back slowly, Damian glances at both vamps on the bed before declaring “Well, I’ll leave the two of you alone now. Sorry again to barge in. Pete, I’ll see you at the battlefield tomorrow. Trick, take care of yourself. You know I’m here if you need me.” With a nod of his head and a final smile, Damian disappears.

Without thinking, Pete blurts out “Why the fuck was he shirtless?” and Trick laughs. “He was with Tommy Joe. I heard laughter coming from Tommy’s room, so I know he was there. Damian has been doing his best to keep Tommy happy, even though he and Adam only can seem to fight these days. I hope things get settled between them before the pups get here.”

Pete pulls Trick into his arms, leaning in for a tentative kiss. “Does this mean that things are better between us, Trick? I don’t want to waste energy fighting anymore.” Trick answers Pete with his own kiss, his arms wrapping tight around his husband. When they take the time to come up for air, Trick answers Pete with “There’s no place I’d rather be than with you.”

Tommy immediately turns into Damian’s arms the second that he returns to Tommy’s bed. Placing his head down on Dam’s chest, he mumbles “Glad you’re back, I was wondering if I would see you at all tonight.” Dam runs his fingers through Tommy’s hair, his voice soft as he answers “I had to go make sure Trick was okay, TJ. It’s my place as his father…” Tommy chuckles, a huge smile on his face. “You are the most loving father, Dam. Trick is lucky to have you…”

Adam enters the room, blood covering him from head to toe. He growls loudly when he sees Tommy in Dam’s arms. “Do you mind?” Adam snarls, gesturing to his attire. Dam snaps his fingers and Adam is clean from head to toe. “Thanks.” Adam quickly strips and climbs into the other side of the bed, pulling the blankets over him.

Silence fills the room.

After a few minutes, Tommy has had enough. “All right! This silence is getting on my nerves!” Looking from one lover to the other, he says “Why can’t things be as they were before? Adam…” Adam looks over at Tommy, a look of longing on his face. “…I know that you have been shoved into the position of enforcer, but that doesn’t mean that you have to treat Dam like shit in the process. And you…” Tommy raises his head to look into Dam’s eyes. “…don’t need to snap at Adam all the time. It’s either that, or the two of you are as silent as the grave. Why can’t the two of you try to get along, if for nothing other than my sake, and the sake of the pups?”

Adam glances over at Damian then sighs. “I…cannot see past the rapist that forced pups into you, TJ. And now that rapist gets to coddle and cuddle you as if you were the most important person to him, which is bullshit! The only thing that matters to him is fulfilling his ego, which he feeds daily! You mean nothing to him, and you never will! He only wants his pups…” Tommy gives a heartbroken look to Damian, who immediately feels his rage growing. “You’re full of shit, Adam! I love Tommy, more than you could ever possibly understand! He’s not a pawn in a game of my ego, to be taken advantage of whenever I want! You want to own him as a possession, where I’ve given him my heart and soul, something you do not even have possession of any longer! I love you as well, Adam, but you no longer seem to want my love. You simply see me as your enemy…” Dam watches tears fill Tommy’s eyes, sees him turn his heartbroken look on Adam as he pulls out of Dam’s arms. Rolling closer to Adam, Tommy softly asks “Do you still love me, Adam?” Adam moves so quickly it startles both Tommy and Damian, reaching out and pulling Tommy into his arms, holding on tightly. “You mean the world to me, TJ. You are still the love of my life. Even though I can no longer feel like myself, I know that my love for you is my only constant.” Turning his head towards Damian, Adam growls out “As for you…” Damian waits, his chest suddenly tight. “…I’ll never trust you again, after what you’ve done. You mean nothing to me. You’re just a stranger in my bed.”

Tommy starts to cry on Adam’s chest, tears streaking down his face. “Adam, please do not hold what happened against Dam! He did what he had to, to protect the family. I’ve forgiven him…” Adam runs his fingers through Tommy’s hair, tugging gently. “I cannot forgive him for hurting you, TJ. You did not see what I saw when I entered the room that night. Your tears, your moans of pain, your constant begging him to stop. He hurt you badly, no matter how you try to spin it now. You have a huge heart, Tommy, you always see the best in people. When I look at Damian, I see your pain, your agony.” Tommy lays his head down on Adam’s chest, a sigh on his lips. “How are the three of us going to move forward as a family, if you cannot even be in the same room as Dam?” Adam runs his hand over Tommy’s stomach, feeling the pups kick at his hand as he answers “I love you and the pups, Tommy. I will be there for whatever the three of you need from me. But I cannot stand by and play happy family when there is no family. I’ll be there for the birth, but beyond that, I cannot promise anything.” Adam kisses Tommy on the lips before gently getting out of bed once again, looking for his clothes. Damian surprises Adam by moving quickly to his side, his arms encircling Adam, pulling him in close. “Please don’t leave, Adam. I love you. Please stay with the two of us. You are needed here by both of us. I’m sorry to have hurt you, I’m sorry to have hurt Tommy. Please let me…” While Dam speaks, Adam yanks on his clothes. Without looking directly at Damian, Adam says “I begged you not to hurt him, and you did anyways. I asked you to hurt me instead, I wanted you to focus your pain and frustration on me, not him. You went ahead and now I can’t even be in the same room with you. I’ll visit him when you are not around.” Adam turns to Tommy, calling out “I love you. I’ll see you soon” Adam storms over to the door, yanking it open and leaving a speechless Tommy and Damian behind.

“I want more pups.”

Bob’s ears suddenly burn, his eyes still focused on the book in front of him. Hoping that he heard incorrectly, he mumbles “Uh huh” in response, waiting to hear Robbie giggle and say “gotcha” or some other ridiculous saying. When several moments go by, and silence continues to fill the bedroom, Bobby sighs and puts his book aside. “What are you babbling about, love?” Robbie sinks an elbow into Bob’s side. “You heard me, Bobbert. I want more pups.”

Bob rolls over on his side, directly addressing his mate. “Why in the hell do you want more pups, Robbie? We already have four! Aren’t the children we have enough for you?” Robbie reaches out and places his hand on Bob’s chest. “I love our children, honey. But…” Robbie looks at Bob’s chest, refusing to raise his eyes. “…Tommy and Gee are both having pups, and I am…wanting them too! Besides, this group of youngsters can grow up together. Our pups can serve Tommy’s pups when they get older. You can teach them how to be bodyguards if it pleases you. I simply want us to be part of the next generation of this family…”

Bob sighs, his fingers linking through Robbie’s. “Does it really mean that much to you, to have pups to be a part of the next generation?” Robbie nods, his attention suddenly on Bob’s lips. “I have wanted more pups for a long time, but I was worried what you would say…”

Bob reaches out and pulls Robbie closer to him. “Then what say we work on making those pups, hum?”

Depression settles in on Ray, which is a new experience for him. As patriarch, he is always ready to take on the needs of his family, placing those needs before himself. He takes his position seriously. From the moment that he first laid eyes on Mikey, caring for his family is the only thing that he has ever wanted. That and his spouses, that is. Ray suddenly realizes what is truly bothering him—he misses his wife and husband…

The next thing he knows, he is standing naked in a room lit only by a blazing fire in the fireplace. Dark red walls reflect the movement of the flames, and the smell of burning wood fills his nostrils. From behind him, he hears the voice of his husband say “Now that’s a fine ass! I’m surprised that we have stayed away from it for so long…”

Ray turns slowly, the shadows in the room playing tricks on his vision. He sees Mikey and Andrew propped up against black pillows, a thick black comforter pulled up to their waists, their chests bare. Ray blinks a few times, confusion on his face as he watches Mikey raise a thin hand in his direction. “Come here, Ray darling, crawl in between us. Your wife and husband have missed you dearly!”

Andrew cocks his head to the side, at once taking in Ray’s bowed back, his slightly shaking hands. In an authoritarian voice, Andrew barks out “You heard what your wife said, Raymond. In this bed, now.”

Blinking, Ray slowly moves on shaking legs towards the bed. Climbing on the end, he slowly moves forward up the bed as Mikey pulls back the covers. Once settled in between his spouses, Andrew reaches over to brush Ray’s hair off his forehead. “It’s been too long, Raymond, since we’ve last seen you. You’ve obviously have been neglecting your needs. We are going to have to change that.” Ray leans into Andrew’s touch, a gentle whine escaping his throat.

Mikey and Andrew wrap themselves around Ray, holding on tightly to him for quite a long time, until Ray stops shaking. When it appears that he has calmed down, Andrew throws back the covers and barks out “Out of the bed, Ray. Bend over my knees, present yourself to your Dom. You need to be punished.”

Ray gives Mikey a searching glance. Mikey leans forward and places a kiss to the side of Ray’s face, her voice soft as she says to him “Go, Ray. You need this, you need to center yourself again. Go to Andrew and find yourself.” Ray nods once before placing a kiss to Mikey’s lips, then slowly slides off the side of the bed, coming to a halt in front of Andrew, who is sitting on the end of the bed. Andrew pats his bare thigh, a deep sigh bouncing off the bedroom walls. “Over my knee, Ray. I won’t say it again. The longer you hesitate, the longer the punishment. Or is that what you really want?”

Ray lays his naked body across Andrew’s naked lap. “Arms to your sides, Ray. I will take on your weight, hold you close. Now, I’m going to spank you, and you will count off. If you fail to count, I will start over. I believe forty hits will be enough to make you see the light. Ready?” Ray nods once, causing Andrew to sharply slap Ray across his shoulder blades. “Did you forget to use your words, husband? I will ask you again. Ready?”

Ray raises his head, turning it towards Andrew. “Yes, Master, I heard you.” “Good! Here we go…”

With each spank, Ray goes deeper and deeper into headspace. When he fails to count when Andrew reaches fourteen, Andrew once again slaps Ray between the shoulder blades, commenting in a disappointed voice “Start again, Raymond. We will do this until you get this right. Count.”

When Andrew spanks Ray for the twentieth time, he pauses, asking “Do you know why I’m punishing you, Raymond? You can answer me.” Ray raises his head, tears running down his cheeks. “I haven’t been taking proper care of myself, Master.” Andrew rubs his hand over Ray’s ass cheeks, feeling the heat under his fingers. “What else, Raymond?” The hand continues to caress as Ray answers “I didn’t reach out to you and Mikey when I needed care, Master. I was stubborn and selfish, keeping to myself, when I have two wonderful spouses to take care of me.” Andrew reaches into Ray’s hair, tangling his fingers in the curls so he can haul Ray upwards for a short kiss. “You are correct on both counts, Ray. But that does not excuse you from experiencing the rest of your punishment.” Andrew removes his hand from Ray’s hair, watches as Ray lays down once again. “Count from twenty, Raymond.”

By the time Ray manages to choke out through his tears the word “forty” Andrew pulls Ray upward by the shoulders, until Ray is properly sitting in Andrew’s lap. Andrew gently wipes away all the tears from Ray’s face before closing in to give Ray a passionate kiss, their tongues entwined.

“What about me?” Mikey crawls down to the bottom of the bed, pushing Andrew back so that she can give Ray a kiss of her own. When she finally pulls back, she looks from one spouse to the other. “Ray took his punishment beautifully, Andrew. Hasn’t he earned a reward?”

Andrew stands, turning Ray around until Ray is lying on the bed, his ass at the end of the bed. “Mikey, I’ve placed him on his back so we can both give him a treat. Do you wish to be the first to fuck him?” Mikey moans loudly at the thought. “I’d love to honey.” Mikey leans over Ray, giving him another kiss before pulling back and saying “Hey there, sexy. Hang on tight.” Mikey waves her hand from Ray’s stomach to his ass, a smile on her face. “I used magick so we don’t have to stretch him out, Andrew. He’s ready.” Mikey lines up, shoving into a moaning Ray with one push. Mikey manages to find Ray’s prostate without even trying. Ray gives a ragged breath when Mikey’s thighs push against his sensitive ass, making every sensation that much more intense. Mikey immediately starts pounding away into Ray, the bed bouncing under Ray’s body as Mikey pulls Ray’s legs over her shoulders. Ray reaches out, each hand searching out one of his spouses, pulling the three of them even closer on the bed.

Just when Ray thinks that the sensations that he is feeling are too much, Andrew leans down over him, taking Ray’s cock into his mouth and sucking hard. Ray’s back arches upward, a muffled scream leaving his lips. Mikey, sweat beginning to appear at her brow, calls out to Ray as she pounds him “Scream, Raymond! Let the whole castle know how good you feel! Don’t hold it in!”

Mikey gives a brutal thrust, which makes Ray scream as he shoots down Andrew’s throat. Eyes rolled back, toes curled, Ray reaches out both his hands to Mikey, who take them, gripping tightly. With a few more hard pumps of her hips, Mikey gives out her own guttural scream as she begins to shoot deep into Ray.

Ray loses track of time. Andrew takes his turn for his first round, followed by another round by Mikey. Ray is floating deep in headspace, lost to all sensation except for the cock that is currently slamming away deep inside him. He feels so relaxed, his body sinking deep into the mattress beneath him, his body feeling light as a feather. He blinks as he slowly lifts his head, bleary eyes focusing on Andrew, who has once again moved into place at the end of the bed. Andrew gives Ray a loving smile as his hands reach out to place Ray’s legs on his shoulders. “We love you, Ray. Come back to me, feel me give you what you need, feel me love you. Take what I have to give you and cherish it, like I cherish you. You’re mine Ray!” Ray softly calls out Andrew’s name as his nails sink into Andrew’s skin, trying his hardest to meld both their bodies into one. Andrew chases his high, words of ownership filling the air around Ray, who moans in response. Andrew runs his hands over Ray’s body, calling out to Mikey to do the same. “Our boy needs to know how much he’s loved and wanted…and owned. He needs to know we are here for him.” Andrew slams his body into Ray’s one more time, bringing both to finish at the same time.

Mikey walks to the bathroom, returning with a washcloth and towel to wipe Ray down. Once he is cleaned again, Andrew scoops Ray up in his arms and carries him back to the bed, placing him in the middle again, both spouses curling in around Ray. Silence fills the room as Ray takes turns making out with his husband and wife.

After an hour of silence, Ray speaks in a tired voice “Thank you both for taking care of me. I have been neglecting my needs to lead the family, on and off the battlefield. I’ve been so busy; I’ve barely had time to acknowledge how much I have missed the two of you. I…get jealous about the two of you here together, so far away from me. I wish…” Ray sighs deeply, his hair flopping down across his brow “…this fucking war was over so we could all be together again.” Mikey coos at him, moving the hair out of his eyes. “I know, Ray. We all feel the same as you do. I wish we could just crush this fucking family and be over them. I have a feeling that things are going to get worse before they get better.” Andrew reaches out to kiss first Ray, then Mikey. “All we can do is our best. I know that Mikey and I worry ourselves to death about you, Ray. The last thing we want to do is lose you. But just know that every moment of every day, you are not alone.”

Gee runs to the bathroom for the third time this evening. True, overhearing the argument between Adam, Tommy and Damian did nothing to calm their nerves, but it’s the pups that are causing all the trouble. Gee has never had an easy time carrying pups, and it seems that this pregnancy will be the same. If only Frank was here…

“You called?” Frank jokingly asks, already reaching for a washcloth to wipe off Gee’s brow. Gee raises their head slightly, surprise on their face as they reach to flush the toilet. “Did you think I couldn’t feel your distress, Gee? When we are linked through our bond, through these pups? I feel your emotions most of the time, in fact, there are times when I cannot manage to extract myself from them.” Frank helps Gee to their feet, holding them close for a few minutes until they can get their bearings. “Thank you, Frank” Gee sincerely says, their voice rough from hours of vomiting. “Of course, Gerard.” Frank leads Gee back to the bed, gently laying Gee down against the pillows before tucking them into bed.

Frank heads to the kitchen to get a large bowl to place next to Gee’s bed. “Here. This way, you do not need to run all the time. You’ll end up hurting yourself, and then where will you be? I’ll end up having to heal you and that won’t be fun for you, dear.” Gee gives out a small laugh, a smile on their face. “You know me too well, Frank.” Frank takes one of Gee’s hands in his, squeezing slightly. “No one knows you like I do, Gee.”

The two of them sit in silence for a few minutes, simply enjoying each other’s company. Finally Gee gets up the nerve to ask in a little girl voice “Does this mean that you forgive me, Frankie?”

Frank thinks his answer through for a few minutes before commenting “I’m not sure how to answer that, Gee. I…” Frank rubs a hand over his eyebrows before tucking his hair behind his ears. “…I want to forgive you, I really do. I understand that what happened is my fault, in the way that I treated you. It sent you straight into Damian’s arms. But it’s not that simple though, and I wish it was. The thing I cannot get past is your love for him.” Gee looks up at Frank, a guilty look on their face. “How am I to get past the fact that my mate has fallen in love with my enemy? Someone I wouldn’t trust in any circumstance, and here I’m stuck with the prospect of you being with him for eternity, your ‘side lover?’ The very thought makes me sick.”

Silence once again fills the room, neither one knowing what to say. Frank then stands abruptly, looking down at Gee as he comments “I guess the best thing to do is settle this now, before things go any further.” Turning on his heel, Frank strides out of the bedroom and down the hall to Tommy’s room.

Knocking on the door, Frank enters Tommy’s room before anyone can answer him. He finds Damian curled around Tommy, who is sleeping with fresh tears on his cheeks. “Oh, I’m sorry. I didn’t know that you were…”

Damian recovers quickly from his surprise, a small smile on his face, as if he were expecting Frank to visit him. “Adam was here. He stormed out, upsetting TJ. He cried himself to sleep in my arms, poor baby.” Frank nods in understanding. “What is it you need, Frank?”

Frank quietly responds “I was hoping that you and I could have a conversation with Gee, straighten things out. Our relationship is strained, and it isn’t good for them, especially with the pups making them sick all the time. But since you…”

Damian raises a hand to stop Frank’s words. Placing a gentle hand to Tommy’s forehead, Damian quietly slips out of bed, his hand reaching for his shirt. “It’s okay, Frank. I put a spell on him to keep him sleeping soundly. He will be okay for me to leave him for a while.” Damian circles the bed, saying to Frank “Lead the way, Frank.”

Frank and Damian enter Gee’s room to find them throwing up into the bowl Frank left them with. Both men move forward on opposite sides of the bed to offer comfort to Gee, Frank running his hand through Gee’s hair, Damian running his hand gently up and down Gee’s arm. Gee’s face appears ghostly white, no color at all as Frank takes the bowl from them and takes it to the bathroom. Returning with another wet washcloth and the cleaned bowl, Frank gently runs the cloth over Gee’s face and shoulders while carefully watching each emotion that crosses Damian’s face.

“Gee, I brought Damian here to talk out our situation. Are you feeling up to talking? If not, we can do this another time…” Gee places a hand over Frank’s hand. “No, I want us all to talk, hon. Thank you for setting this up. I will feel better when everything is settled.”

Damian clears his throat then begins with “Frank, I want you to know that I, in no way, set Gee up to start a romance. I was simply offering my help and support when they needed it the most. I am sorry that things got out of hand, that I interfered with your union by having sex with Gee.” Gee cuts in with “I was the one who pushed Damian into having sex with me, Frank. It was my fault…” Frank cuts in, his hand slicing the air as he says “It doesn’t matter who started it, the truth is that the two of you had sex. My question is, do the two of you wish to continue to be together in the future, and if so, where do I stand in all this?”

Damian answers with “Gee told me that they were in love with me. To be fair, I have to admit that I am very fond of Gee, that I care for them and love them but I am not ‘in love’ with them. I told Gee this, and their response was simply that they loved me. I hate to say it out loud, but it’s really a one-way situation. I would never do anything to intentionally hurt Gee if I could help it, Frank. I hope this answer is the answer of you are looking for.” Frank makes eye contact with Gee, looking for clues. Gee sighs dramatically before commenting “I know that Dam does not love me, Frank. Not the way that I love him. Every day I wake up and remind myself of this fact. It doesn’t make it hurt any less…” Damian pats Gee on the shoulder, his voice sad as he says “You already have a mate that loves you with all his heart, Gee. Most people would kill for that type of relationship. At the end of the day, it’s the two of you that will be a part of each other, and I would always be on the outside looking in. Besides, I have two others that I’m a part of, and they wouldn’t understand if I started a relationship with you.”

Frank moves forward to take Gee’s hand in his. “Damian’s right. I love you, Gee. I have always loved you, and always will. I’m relieved that I do not have to share you with another, it would destroy me to lose even a little bit of you to someone else.” Frank reaches across the bed, taking Damian’s free hand in his. “I want to thank you, Damian, for being there for Gee when I couldn’t be. You led him through some tough moments, and I’m grateful. I glad that they had you with them.” Damian grabs Frank’s hand gratefully, shaking it for moment or two. “I’m just glad that I can be there for them, Frank. I apologize for my part in hurting you, and I will do everything in my power to make sure that it never happens again.”

For the first time, Gee looks irritated. “What about me? Do the two of you get to dictate to me what my future looks like?” Gee turns to Damian, tears in their eyes. “Is that how you really feel, Dam? You can simply give up on the idea of us?” Damian gives Frank a quick glance before saying “Gee, I told you before that the two of us were never meant to be, in any form beyond family bonds. My feelings have not changed. If you wish, I will do everything in my power to stay away from you…” Gee chokes back a sob. “I know you told me that, but I was still hoping that you might change your mind…” Damian cuts in with “NO, Gee! This is how things are meant to be, accept it. The most I can hope for is the three of us remaining close, but I’m not sure how comfortable Frank would be about that…”

Frank levels Damian with a serious look. “Damian, it’s no secret that I do not trust you. You have never given me a reason to. I’ve tried hard to get over the things that you have done to me, but it’s difficult. Sometimes I close my eyes to sleep, and all I see is you raping me. You have in some way destroyed every member of this family at some time or another. While I may someday be able to get past everything you’ve done, I’m not sure if I can truly forgive you for them.”

Gee rubs their stomach, a look of frustration on their face. “So you are saying that you can never move forward, no matter what anyone does or says.” Frank gives a deep sigh, one that practically rattles his bones. “I’m trying, Gee. I’m sorry that my answer isn’t enough for you. I’ve made strides…hell, we are all in the same room, aren’t we?” Damian gives out a snort at this, his expression one of total agreement. “He’s right, Gee. Did you ever think that the three of us would be in the same room, without fists being thrown? I never imagined it.” When Gee’s expression does not change, Damian continues with “Look, Gee…things will not change overnight. Baby steps need to be taken, so Frank can be made to be at ease. If Frank will allow me to occasionally visit you and the pups, I make a vow that I will never, EVER have sex with you again, or do anything inappropriate.” Damian turns back towards Frank, extending his hand once again. Frank, who stares deep into Damian’s eyes for a few minutes, slowly extends his hand so the two of them can shake on Damian’s deal.

With a sigh, Gee brushes their fingers over their stomach, the pups wiggling under their hand. “I guess all unions have to have a beginning. Here’s hoping that yours survives whatever the future throws our way.”

Chapter Text

Light that smoke for giving up on me
And one just cause they’ll kill you soon than my expectations
To my favorite liar, to my favorite scar
“I could’ve died with you”
I hope you choke on those words, that kiss, that bottle—I confess
Now ash yourself out on the insides, when I said I loved you I swear I lied

Let’s play this game called “when you catch fire”
I wouldn’t piss to put you out
Stop burning bridges and drive all of them
So I can forget about you

So bury me in memory
His smile’s your rope
Wrap it tight around your throat

Tell that Mick he just made my list of things to do today—Fall Out Boy

I name my son Santino, calling him Sonny for short. Andros hates the name but loves his grandson with everything he is.

I take Sonny with me to the Dark realm as soon as he is a few days old, and the funeral for his mother is concluded. Following ancient tradition (that started before the humans on the Copper realm became immortal) Athena’s body is burnt on a funeral pyre, in a ceremony befitting royalty.

A constant fear takes over me as I search for the woman responsible. Who is this woman, and why is she interfering in my life? The more I try to search for answers, the less information I find. And why would she kill Athena, an immortal princess who (I believe) would’ve made a wonderful mother to my son? Why help Athena get pregnant in the first place, simply to leave my son motherless?

To think that there is someone out there pulling the strings to my destiny behind my back is infuriating to say the least! I always thought I was in control, that the world revolved around me. Has anything that has happened in my life been of my own choosing? Or am I caught in the web of someone else’s lies and deceit?

Mikey begins to hang around more and more often, without invitation. She instantly falls in love with Sonny, spending hours holding him in her arms, feeding and talking to him. This happens so often that Sonny begins to smile the second he hears her voice, which for some unknown reason does nothing but infuriate me. One day, when Sonny is a month old, I explode on Mikey. “Get your own baby, Mikey! You’re not welcome here any longer…” Mikey, calm as ever, simply laughs as she takes Sonny’s hand in hers. “Oh, shut up, Dam! You love all the free babysitting; I know you do!” I bristle, fighting back the urge to snatch my baby from her arms. “Don’t you have something to do? Start a book club, give Ray a blowjob? Why must you bother me instead?” Mikey simply throws back her head and laughs, the sound repeated by Sonny, his eyes wide with enjoyment. “Don’t you worry about my sex life, Dam. I blew Ray’s brains out of his ears with the blowjob I gave him this morning. What?” Mikey takes a few steps towards me, her eyelashes fluttering over her flashing eyes. “Want me to take care of you too, Damian? For old times’ sake?” I feel a stab in my heart as I sneer at Mikey. “That’s the last thing I want, Mikes, your lips touching me after they touched Ray. The very thought makes me want to throw up in my mouth.” Mikey laughs again, echoed by Sonny. “You never cared in the past where I put my lips, or any other part of my body. Is fatherhood making you pious? Or is it old age?” Mikey kisses Sonny’s cheek, proclaiming “We are going to take a walk around the castle, see if we can make him sleepy enough for a nap. That is, as long as your father agrees, Sonny.” Swallowing my anger, I nod my head once in agreement. “Just keep him warm. The castle has been a bit drafty lately.” Mikey stops to kiss my cheek as she exits the room, giving me an opportunity to kiss Sonny’s soft cheek. “Bye, my love. See you soon.” Sonny gurgles at me, his eyes lighting up as he waves a fist in the air as they exit the room.

I’m feeding Sonny one morning when I overhear two guards talking in the corridor outside my room. One whispers to the other “…and then Andrew said that the Light realm is going to attack the Dark realm as soon as their king finishes financing the venture. Andrew was quite certain that…” I startle Sonny when I call out “You two! In the hall! Come in here!” The door to my suite slowly opens, the two guards looking like whipped puppies caught doing something naughty as they enter my room. “What were you talking about in the hallway outside my suite?”

The one guard raises his head until our eyes meet. “I was just relaying what I heard Andrew say today, sire.” I nod once before asking “Andrew who?” The guard glances at the other guard before responding “The vamp that Queen Mikey banished from her court, Sire. He is a friend of my family; I have known him for years. I spoke with him in the village today, he is staying with my family. He was simply sharing information that he managed to learn from someone close to court in the Light realm.” I raise Sonny to my chest to burp him, my words sharp as I comment “You will find this Andrew. You will bring him before me. Now go.”

An hour later I am sitting in the throne room when Andrew arrives flanked by the two guards from earlier in the day. One guard clears his throat and softly calls out “Sire? Here is Andrew, who you called for.” I thank the guards, giving each of them gold coins then dismiss them. Standing, I walk towards Andrew, my arms held out to him. “Welcome, Andrew. I’m sorry that it has been so long since we last met.” Andrew gives a wary look around him as he slowly moves in for a hug from me. “I…where’s the Queen, Dam? I thought for sure that being called here was a trap…” After giving Andrew a tight hug, I pull back enough to look deep into Andrew’s confused face. “The Queen now lives in the Light realm, with her husband, King Toro. I am King here, the only one in charge. I welcome you to my court, Andrew.” With another hug, I whisper in his ear “Come with me to my suite. We can talk in private there.” Once we arrive, I dismiss the nanny and pour a glass of blood for both of us. “Please, have a seat. It seems so long since we have seen each other. How have you been?”

Andrew tells me of his years living in the Light realm after Mikey kicked him out of court and the Dark realm. “I have to admit, I was afraid of her wrath. You know how she can get.” I laugh in response. “Boy do I ever know! She is the worse type of harpy when she thinks she’s been crossed. I don’t blame you for never returning Andrew. She was furious when she sent you away, and her memory is long.” After we pass the time discussing our evening out (my first time torturing that slave onstage, before we visited the brothel where I got to enjoy and consume that delightful young man) and catching up on everything. Just as I’m ready to ask him about the information that the guard shared, we hear crying in the next room. Excusing myself, I leave to change Sonny’s diaper, and return with my screaming son who is looking for his meal. I make my way over to the refrigerator in the corner of the room, removing a bottle of milk and then taking off the top to warm the milk in the microwave. “Sorry about the noise level, Andrew. He’ll be quiet in a moment.” I return the top on the bottle and shake it, the movement catching Sonny’s attention, who screams even louder while holding out his hands. As soon as I place the nipple in his mouth, Sonny grabs at my hand which is holding the bottle, his screams lowered into soft gurgles as he drinks.

“He looks like you, Damian. What a sweet boy you have there!” Andrew reaches out a finger to Sonny, who takes it in his tight grip. “It’s hard to believe that the vamp that tore that slave apart that night so long ago is now gently holding his child in his arms!” I chuckle at his comment. “I never thought that I would be a father to a baby that I created myself, Andrew. He is truly a miracle.” Settling Andrew with a deep stare, I ask “I need to see to his safety, Andrew. Please tell me the information that you passed onto that guard today.”

Andrew takes a deep breath before standing to fill his glass. With his back to me, he begins “A friend of mine that has connections with the Light realm Council told me that King Toro is secretly planning to attack the Dark realm, as soon as the Council approves the funding. My friend told me that there will be a meeting on Wednesday to make the final approvals.” Andrew returns to his seat, one hand reaching out to grab my arm. “I had no idea that you oversaw this realm, Dam. I thought Mikey was in charge, and we know how much I would like to see her face the music for all the pain she has everyone, me included.” I place Sonny on my shoulder to burp him. “Well, to the rest of the realms, Alexandre is the King of this realm, Andrew. Between the two of us, he is a nice guy, but he lacks the ferocity to lead this realm. So, when there is interaction between the realms, I use a glamour and go in his place.” Andrew chuckles. “I’m not surprised that you have figured out a way to lead this realm, Dam. Does Ray know about your and Mikey’s past?” I return Sonny to my lap, so I can give him the rest of his bottle. “Hell no! That’s the last thing I want Ray to know about! He’s practically adopted me into the family, he doesn’t know that Mikey and I were a couple for centuries…” I excuse myself once again to lay my sleepy boy down in his crib, tucking him in carefully before returning to my seat in the other room. “Andrew, do you want to come home?”< /p> Andrew rises to his feet, his restless steps moving quickly across the floor as he paces for a few minutes. Turning once again towards me, he kneels in front of me and quietly says “I have very few connections to the Light realm, no family there. I would…love to come back here, start over. Do you give me permission? I will do anything for you, you simply have to ask.” I reach forward, running my fingers through Andrew’s curls as I stare into his eyes. “Come home, Andrew. I welcome you with open arms. All your lands will be restored to you, as well as your money. You can start over in style, darling.” A smile crosses Andrew’s handsome face, his eyes lighting up as I continue with “I do have to ask a large favor of you, though.”

“Let me guess. You want me to keep in contact with my friend that has connections with the Council, correct?” I throw back my head and laugh, the sound echoing off the walls. “See, my dear Andrew…” I take Andrew’s hands in mine, squeezing tightly. “…great minds really DO think alike!”

A gasp echoes through the Council chambers when I walk into the room, cloaked in my glamour to appear as Alexandre. A Council member in the front of the room is in the middle of saying “…so we now have the necessary money to attack the Dark realm at our leisure.” The speaker had his back to me while making his speech, which gave me the opportunity to make a beeline for the front of the room. For a moment my eyes lock on Ray’s, his shocked face drained of all blood, so he appears to be nothing more than a statue.

“Tell me more, Councilor! I would love to hear how and when you intend to carry out such a large mission on my realm, so I may prepare in advance for it.” The Councilor stumbles over his words as he tries to get himself out of the situation. “I…I mean we…well, it’s REALLY not an attack. It’s…well, a diplomatic maneuver…” Rage fills me, but I try my best to rein it in. “Oh, is THAT what it is! Well, how could I be so stupid? I simply thought that an armed military maneuver WAS AN ARMED ATTACK ON MY REALM! Silly me!”

Ray clears his throat to get my attention. I lock my eyes on his, my hands in tight fists as I address him with “King Toro, care to explain what is going on here? Or must I listen to more bullshit from the peanut gallery?” Ray looks around him, his hand reaching out for his gavel as he pounds it on the table a few times. “This session is in twenty-minute recess. King Alexandre, please come with me.” Everyone rises from their seats, the sound of grumbling reaching my ears as I follow Ray out into the hall.

We manage to find an empty room down the hall. The second the door closes behind us, I vent my spleen on Ray. “What the fuck is going on, Ray? Here I am thinking that the two of us are working closely together to bring peace to our realms, and I find out that you are meeting behind my back to plan an invasion on my realm???”

Ray’s hands try to grab my arms, but I back up out of his reach. “Alexandre, you don’t understand! I was outvoted, outvoiced. The Council believes that your realm is not being honest regarding the assets that you claim to have. Behind my back, a team was sent by the Council to secretly assess your natural resources, and not only did they find more than you claimed, but they also found even more vamps and humans than you reported to have when last met. Taxes are not levied fairly, based on this information. Members of the Council believe that you are trying to manipulate us into accepting less than our due…”

“YOUR DUE???” I push my hands into Ray’s shoulders, causing him to take an unsteady step back. “What makes you think that you are DUE anything???” I place my hands on my hips, to keep from swinging at him. “I built my realm up from nothing, after that last war we had. I was honest with you recently when the two of us sat down to compare notes on my realm. I told you about the natural gas and coal deposits that we have, I didn’t lie to you. We need all we have, considering the size of the population that we now have. I was honest about that too, Ray! I told you that the human birth rate was growing faster than I expected it to, so I stopped importing humans. I have been nothing but honest with you, and I have paid even more taxes than required each year to fill your coffers. AND YOU ACCUSE ME OF LYING TO YOU AND YOUR REALM! WHAT MORE DO YOU WANT FROM US? FROM ME?”

Ray stands silent, his face shocked at my admission of honesty. The two of us stare each other down for a moment. Finally, I take Ray’s silence as an indication that he doesn’t believe a word that I have spoken to him. I realize that I cannot make him change his mind, no matter how hard I try.

“I thought our friendship meant something to you, Ray. Were you simply going to wait until your troops had already arrived on my realm to tell me that I am being invaded? Or were you going to ignore that fact all together? Let me find out for myself?” Ray blushes, his eyes suddenly locked on the floor in front of him. “So much for friendship, Ray. Thanks for nothing.” I turn on my heel and head towards the door as Ray manages to grab my arm in his tight grip. “Alexandre, I AM your friend! I fought against the Council on this, I tried everything that I knew to do, but I was outvoted! I don’t know what more I could’ve done to convince then that this was not the way to handle this! I told them I would sit down with you, renegotiate terms with you, but they said that your dishonesty was only to be met with war, not words! That is the last thing I want…”

With a deep sigh, I remove Ray’s hand from my arm. “Then I am grateful for what you tried to do, Ray. But I thought you were the KING here, not simply a puppet to be pushed around by the body that YOU RULE OVER. Now, if you do not mind, we must return to the chambers before they carry out a vote without us.”

Ray and I enter the chambers just in time to hear a Councilor exclaim “That’s it then! We are to war!” The entire room erupts with screams and shouts of joy, while Ray stands next to me, a look of disgust on his face. I turn to him and say over the din “Goodbye, old friend. I am forced to return home to prepare for war. Maybe someday the two of us can be friends again. Tell Mikey I said goodbye.”

I immediately contact Andros so he can take Sonny to the Copper realm. The last thing I want is for my son to be injured or killed (that is, if he CAN be killed, we have no idea if he has inherited his mother’s immortality or not) in the upcoming war. When Andros arrives, he helps me pack up Sonny’s things in preparation for their departure. I pick up my sweet son, holding him close to my chest as I choke back tears. “Be good for your Grandfather, Sonny. Daddy loves you. I will see you as soon as I can.” I hand Sonny over to Andros, dread in my heart. “Andros, you best prepare for war when you get home, just in case. I have no idea if the Light realm knows about Sonny, or our connection to you. The last thing I want is for your realm to get brought into this nightmare because of us. You need to be prepared.” Andros nods his head in response. “I will do all I can to be prepared, Damian. Here’s hoping that it doesn’t come to that. You will be in my prayers, son. Keep me updated as to your progress in this wretched war. Goodbye, Dam.” With a smile Andros waves Sonny’s arm in a goodbye gesture, and the two of them disappear.

“I’ll miss him, Dam. You’re doing the right thing, though. His safety is the most important thing.” I turn to see Mikey standing behind me, tears in her eyes. “What are you doing here, Mikey? Don’t you have a war to prepare for?” Mikey walks over to me, her hands reaching out to grip my arms tightly. “If you think Ray and I are behind this mess, you’re sorely mistaken. Ray is beside himself with grief over the idea of war with this realm.”

I pull away from Mikey, crossing the room to stand in front of the fireplace, my arms crossed against a sudden draft. “When did Ray lose control of the Council, Mikey? I thought his word was law. How did things turn out so badly?”

Mikey walks to a window, her back to me. “You know Ray. He’s a diplomate to the very end. The Council doesn’t want a diplomate, they want a radical in charge, one willing to run roughshod over every realm in the cosmos. Ray is too bland, to wimpy for their liking.” Mikey turns towards me, humor making her eyebrow and her upper lip raise. “They want someone more like you, Dam.”

With a deep chuckle I comment “I’d gladly take over the Light realm. Right now though, I’d rather crush every single Councilor under my foot. I’m too old to run the cosmos, Mikey. I would rather settle for peace.”

Mikey walks over to me, taking one of my hands in hers. I suddenly feel dizzy from her beauty, and I want nothing more than to grab her face and kiss her deeply. “The Council won’t be satisfied until the Dark realm is destroyed, Dam. Please, don’t let that happen. Please save yourself for me.” Mikey takes her free hand and cups my cheek gently. “I can’t lose you.”

Fuck it.

I swiftly take Mikey into my arms, bending her backwards. I lower my lips to hers, taking her breath away. I gasp for breath when she deepens the kiss, her tongue sliding into my mouth to tangle with mine. I slip my hand under her shirt, sliding upwards until my fingers brush against a nipple. Mikey moans deeply, her hands clutching my arm and my back as I pull away from the kiss, my lips sliding downwards until I sink my teeth into the side of her neck. Drinking deeply for a moment, I pull back until my teeth retract, my lips plying the skin below them until a dark bruise appears.

I pull back far enough to yank Mikey’s shirt over her head, my lips leading a searing path down to the nipple I’ve been playing with. “Oh Gods” Mikey moans as I kiss a path to the other nipple, playing with it with my tongue before sucking hard, raising more bruises in my wake. Fuck Ray, fuck the upcoming war. I’m going to make Mikey mine while I can.

I pick Mikey up, carrying her to my bed. As soon as she is lying down, I unzip her pants, pulling them down and off her long legs. Mikey stares into my eyes, her lips struggling to stop me from taking things too far. Before she can say anything, I lean down and take Mikey into my mouth, her large cock hitting the back of my throat. Mikey closes her eyes, throws her arm over her face as she arches upright. I pull off till only the tip of her cock is in my mouth, before I slam my head downward, taking all of her this time down my tight throat.

Time seems to stand still. I hear Mikey choke out my name, hear her moan as I continue to do my best to bring her off. Before I know it, Mikey comes down my throat, a strangled cry filling the room.

Pulling back, I lick my lips as I stare down at Mikey. Her hair is mussed, lips swollen where she bit them. She stares back at me, glazed eyes trying to communicate what words would fail to convey. Without breaking our stare, I rise off the bed to remove my clothes, climbing again over Mikey until I can lean down to steal her lips in another deep kiss.

When I pull back, Mikey whispers “Please, Dam. As only you can.” I give Mikey a smile as I lift her legs over my shoulders, lining up with her hole.

After a late night of drinking, Mikey admitted to me that Ray’s lovemaking bordered on ‘tedious’ at times. She told me that he would spend hours prepping her, to the point that she would become bored. I, on the other hand, know what Mikey craves…and I intend on giving it to her.

I push forward with all my strength, shoving my entire length into her with one go, no prep. Mikey throws back her head and screams, her hands gripping my back, nails raking in as she tightens her hands against me. I pull back until just the head of my cock is inside her, slamming forward again and again until the smell of blood fills the air. Mikey always liked pain, the more the better.

The two of us cling to each other as I do my best to bring us towards completion. I lean down once more to sink my fangs into Mikey’s neck, feel her come between us with neither of us touching her. I continue to chase my high, only stopping when I throw back my head and scream out Mikey’s name as I come deep inside her.

I collapse on my arms, my body pushing down into Mikey, who wraps her arms around me tightly. “Dam.” I give Mikey a cocky look, which makes her smile. “I’m…still in love with you, Dam. I’ve tried to forget you, I’ve tried to ignore how I feel, but I…” I lean down and place my lips to hers, cutting off her declaration of love, which is the last thing I want to hear from her. Words come easy to Mikey, who rarely means anything she says when it comes to love and emotions. Why should I believe her? She’ll only use it against me somewhere down the road…

When the kiss ends, Mikey grabs my chin in her hand, forcing me to make eye contact with her. Tears fill her eyes as she strokes my hair. “I mean it, Dam. I know that I have been horrible to you. I’ve treated you like shit, I’ve used you in the past even as I felt your love for me. But under it all, I never stopped loving you. I lay in bed at night and think about you, about what we had. You will always be a part of me, a part I never want to lose. I will love you always, Dam.”

I stare down at Mikey, not sure what to say. Do I admit what has always been in my heart, under all the hatred and betrayal? Do I give her another chance to stab my heart when she feels like it, with all the ammunition she needs to destroy me?

I’ve never been smart when it counts…not where Mikey’s concerned.

“I love you too, Mikey. Even when I hate you, I love you. No one has ever destroyed me the way you have, no one has torn me apart the way you have, Mikes. I can’t get away from my love for you, no matter how fast I run from you. It makes me love and hate you at the same time, ever since the day that you turned your back on me and married Ray.” Tears course down Mikey’s cheeks as she runs her fingers through my hair. “I’m not sorry that I married Ray, Dam…” My spine stiffens in response to her words. “…but I love you more, darling. I made a huge mistake hurting you, leaving you behind. And now I’m scared I’ll lose you forever…” I feel my cock harden again. Mikey feels it too, the way that she arches her back against the bed. “You are a fighting king, Dam. I know that you will want to lead the war from the front lines. I’m scared that someone will kill you, and I’ll never get to see you again…”

I slam myself back into Mikey, making her cut off her words to moan loudly. I wrap my arms around her and head to the closest wall, where I bend her in half as I’m suddenly intent on destroying her from the inside out. Mikey rakes her nails down my back, the blood dripping down my back makes both of us scramble to bite each other, once again tasting each other’s blood in an act of completion. I feel the wall cave in under Mikey’s body, feel her grab my ass cheeks as she once again comes between our bodies untouched. This bit of information makes me tip over the edge, a scream on my lips as I finish pounding her over and over, my come filling her to the brim.

The two of us stare into each other’s eyes as we struggle to catch our breaths. I want to grab Mikey and take her far away from the impending war, from Ray and from our homes. I want to forget about everything except for Sonny. I want to find a place where the two of us can raise him in peace.

All which will never happen.

I carry Mikes over to the bed, gently pulling out of her as I lay her down. I then make my way to the bathroom, where I take a washcloth in hand before running cool water over it. I then return to the bed, tenderly running the cloth over her stomach and between her legs.

I should feel guilty, but I don’t.

I lay down next to Mikey, taking her into my arms as I cover us with a blanket. Mikey leans forward and kisses my lips, the passion from earlier turning into a soft reminder of what I have lost.

After the two of us make out for a bit, I fall asleep with Mikey’s head on my shoulder.

When I wake, the bed next to me is empty. Moaning in despair, my hand accidently knocks off the letter that Mikes left on her pillow. It reads:

“Dearest Dam.

I’m sorry that I did not wake you before I left. I couldn’t stand to see your expression when you realized that I had to return to my home. I’m so glad that the two of us had one more chance to show each other how much we love one another.

I pray that you will be safe in the upcoming war. I do not think that I could exist without you. I promise to do everything I can on my side to influence things to the best of my ability. I do have some friends on the Council, those that will not listen to Ray but will take my words into consideration. I promise that I will strive my best for you, darling.

Would you please do a large favor for me? Would you contact Andros, telling him that it is okay for me to visit with Sonny? I want to be there for him, even though you cannot be. I will miss him as much as I will miss you. This may sound a bit twisted, but when I am with him, I am with you. I promise to do everything in my power to help Andros take care of Sonny in your absence. Thank you in advance, darling.

Once again, please be careful. If you can manage to get away, even for a few hours, please do not forget to visit Ray and me. Ray will wonder what is keeping you from visiting us if you go too long in between visits. He really does love you, Dam, almost as much as I do. If he ever found out about our sleeping together, it would destroy him. We must keep the secret, for his sake.

With all my love,
Mikey”

I roll over onto my back, my arm across my forehead. What the hell were we thinking, sleeping together as if Mikey were single? Ray’s face floats before me, a smile on his face. Mikey is right—if Ray ever found out about us, he would be destroyed. How can I face him, knowing that it’s his wife that I crave?

A commotion in the hallway catches my attention. Before I can get out of bed to see what was wrong, the door to my suite bursts open, a young human slave entering the room. “Sire! The village of Orleans is under attack! Thousands of Light realm soldiers are transporting from ships in the harbor! What should we do?”

With a sigh, I stuff the letter under my pillow before I drag my ass out of bed, calling out “Send word to General Milan! Tell him I’ll meet him in the village, after I’ve alerted Alexandre. We are to war!”

Chapter Text

Tommy’s stomach continues to grow at an astounding rate. I try my hardest to make time to visit with her, but between fighting at the front lines, visiting Mikey to check on the Dark and Crystal realms, and handling little emergencies as they come up, I am so busy I barely have time to change my clothes. Frustrated, I walk over to Adam at the end of a bloody day fighting the enemy.

“The two of us need to talk, NOW” I bark out, my arms crossing my chest. When he doesn’t respond, I blink, sending the two of us to the closest planet.

Adam bellows at the top of his lungs at my trick. “I have work to do Damian! Send me back to the front lines where I belong!”

I try to keep my calm as I shake my head no. “There’s time for that later, Adam. Right now, you need to listen to me. I know that you are still very angry with me, that you would rather kick my ass than do anything else. I have tried everything that I know to fix things between us, but you insist on holding your vendetta against me, and the only one suffering is Tommy Joe.” Adam grunts, his hair falling into his eyes as he levels me with a blank stare. “Adam, I’m so busy between fighting and tending to the other two realms, I barely have time to spend with Tommy. She’s alone, she’s lonely and she’s scared. Her stomach has almost doubled in size, the pups are growing so fast it seems almost impossible. I want to spend more time with her, but I can’t. Can you please visit more often? Can the two of us set up a schedule of visitation, so you do not have to put up with me when you visit? I just want what’s best for her…”

Adam steps forward until the two of us are nose to nose. “What’s best for her would be for you to never have raped her in the first place! Now you want me to step up, be there for MY MATE, because YOU cannot spend the right amount of time with her? Who are you to tell me what to do? You can’t step up for your beloved, you leave me to pick up your slack for you? What makes you think that I want anything to do with this situation, huh? Want to try to rub some more salt in my wounds, Damian, over how you managed to breed Tommy when I couldn’t? How do you think it makes me feel when those pups kick against my hand, knowing who put them there? And to watch Tommy blindly idolize you, after all you have done? It makes me sick to my stomach every time she gives you goo-goo eyes, as if everything is fine! What happened to the vamp I loved, adored as much as I love Tommy? Why did you have to betray us? Why did you manage to destroy the best thing that has ever happened to me? Why…” Tears of frustration fill Adam’s eyes, his hand reaching out to wipe them away.

I carefully reach out my hand, placing it on his bicep. “Adam, I know you are going through hell, but you have no idea what I went through the night Tommy conceived. Yes, my evil was out of control, but for good reason. You have no idea how horrible it was to watch Andre rape Tommy over and over, to be able to do nothing while she screamed at the top of her lungs as that bastard brutalized her. Adam, he forced a baby into her. Luna removed that lump of cells from Tommy while I washed her body afterwards. Luna kept egging me on, demanding that I replace that mess with a baby that would save the family. She had me so hyped up, so convinced that I was doing right by the family that I raped our beloved Tommy. I didn’t want to do it; but at the same time, I thought that I was doing the right thing in the end. I’m sorry that you had to arrive to see what you did, I’m sorry it scarred you the way it did. But Luna is right, the pups DO need to be brought into this world, to save us going forward. I’m just sorry that by doing the right thing, I managed to lose you. I love you, I always will, no matter what. I just hope that someday you can forgive me for all I have done.”

Adam stares at my hand, a blank expression on his face. I try one more time. “In the end, it’s all about Tommy, Adam. We both need to be there for her, the best way we know how. Please, please help me do what’s right by her.”

I can see the struggle on Adam’s face as he fights his emotions. Since Luna released Adam’s evil side, it has been constant agony for him to put his evil on hold so he can deal with the family. This situation is by far the most difficult that he has had to deal with, and I’m to blame for it all. Even when Adam is at his gentlest, there is an air of aggression to his every movement, his every word. But at the same time, I haven’t really taken into consideration how he feels about the fact that I am the father to the pups. “Adam, I’m sorry that you and Tommy couldn’t have more pups. I know the two of you tried for a long time. It was inconsiderate of me to not realize how the pups are making you feel. I’m truly sorry that you must sit back while Tommy carries them, knowing that you did not put them there. Please, please forgive me, Adam. I did not do what I did to cause you pain, or to make you feel less than you are. I only did in the moment what I thought I had to do. I’m so sorry…”

“Alright, alright, ALRIGHT!” Adam barks out, his voice rough. Maybe I am making things more difficult for him than I realized. ”I’ve heard what you have to say, and even though it doesn’t make me feel any better, I…forgive you for getting Tommy pregnant. It’s time we put that shit behind us, for her sake. I will do my best to be there more often with her, whether you are or not. But Dam…” Adam levels me with a glare that scares me. “…I am NOT ready to forgive you for hurting Tommy Joe. I cannot simply erase the memory of you raping my mate, no matter how hard I try. If you were expecting a miracle, you’re not going to get it. Maybe someday I can forgive you, but not yet. That’s the most I can do.” With a small smile, I take a chance and slowly lean towards Adam to kiss him. When our lips meet, I hear Adam’s sharp intake of breath, feel his body tense under my fingers. I take another chance and deepen the kiss, my arms wrapping around Adam’s lean frame. In response he leans forward, our bodies touching from head to toe as he slides his fingers into my hair, yanking sharply. I moan, my breath swallowed by Adam’s onslaught against my lips as he thrusts his tongue into my mouth, our teeth clashing. As quickly as it has started, Adam pulls back, his voice gravelly as he demands “Get us the fuck out of here, Dam. Take me somewhere where I can tear you apart.”

I don’t need to be told twice…

I blink my eyes and the next thing we know we are in Tommy’s bedroom at Luna’s. I glance around, surprised to find the room empty. Adam doesn’t hesitate—he places his hands on either side of my chest and rips off my shirt. When I start to unbutton his shirt, Adam growls and yanks his own shirt over his head, his pants off seconds later. Our lips clash once again as I struggle to remove my pants, both of us desperate to feel each other’s skin.

I sink to my knees in front of Adam, my hand reaching out to wrap around his huge cock, my mouth lowering until I meet my hand. Adam throws back his head and lets out another growl, his hands sinking into my long hair as he tries to push my head downward. I remove my hand and fully take him into my mouth, saliva circling the beautiful dick intrenched within.

“Fuck, Dam, your mouth! Fuckin’…that’s it, choke on it slut. I can’t wait to stretch your hole out with my cock. Christ, what a fucking amazing…” I swallow and Adam moans loudly. “…you little bitch! So perfect…” I pull back, a line of saliva running from my bottom lip to tip of Adam’s cock. In a broken voice I whisper “Fuck me, Adam. Please fuck me.” Adam picks me up, laying me down in the middle of Tommy’s bed. I spread my legs invitingly, smiling when I hear Adam’s breath hitch. Seconds later, Adam is lying on top of me, his knees spreading my legs even wider. “Do you want stretched out, Dam? Or do you want to feel me for the rest of the week?” I cockily raise an eyebrow as I answer “Give it all to me, big boy. I want the pain. Fuck me good.”

My vision whites out as Adam slams his cock into my hole, in much the same way that I used to fuck Mikey years before. I gasp for air, the sound of Adam’s punched out moans drowns out all noise from me. I grip Adam’s shoulder blades, my nails sinking into his skin as he bottoms out inside of me. Without pausing, Adam begins to slam his cock into me as hard as possible, our motion shaking the mattress under us.

We hear a shocked gasp coming from across the room. We turn in unison to look at a startled Tommy, who obviously didn’t expect to find the two of us fucking in her bed when she returned to her room. I give Tommy a wide grin as I call out “Hey, baby. Bet you…fuck, do it again, Adam!!!! Bet you didn’t expect to find us…” Tommy nods once, a hand lowering until she cups herself, her dick hardening as she watches us. Adam calls through gritted teeth “Come join us, baby.”

Tommy gingerly climbs up on the bed next to me, her hand reaching out to run her fingers through my tousled hair. Adam leans over me until his lips take hers, his pace never slowing. By the time that Adam pulls back, Tommy’s lips are swollen and red, a beautiful smile gracing her features.

Adam quickens the pace even further, until the bed is creaking so loudly, I can barely hear Adam’s labored breathing. My toes curl, my hands roaming up and down Adam’s back as he hits my prostate over and over, my impending orgasm tightening my stomach muscles. He feels so fucking good! It’s been so long since the last time that Adam (or Tommy, for that matter) has fucked me. I know he is right; I’m going to be feeling him for a long, long time.

As my legs begin to shake, I reach out a hand to both my lovers, trying to convey how much I love them. Adam slams into me once more, and I throw back my head and scream. My entire body clenches, my eyes boring into Adam’s as I moan out his name. Tommy lowers her head and kisses me, her swollen stomach resting against my shoulder, the pups kicking me in unison.

After another few minutes, Adam slams even harder into me, his head suddenly thrown back as he bellows out my name as his orgasm hits him like a freight train. Long after he finishes, he continues to plow into me, his come seeping into the furthest recesses of my body. Adam throws himself down on me, his heart practically beating out of his chest as he wraps his arms around me, holding me close as he gasps for breath. I cling to Adam, never wanting the moment to end, afraid that the two of us will return to fighting with one another as soon as we part.

Adam gives me a rough kiss before pulling back. “I love you, Dam. No matter what, I love you.” Tears fill my eyes as I reach up to cup Adam’s cheek. “I love you too, with all my heart, Adam. I’ve never stopped loving you. I’m so, SO sorry that I hurt you! Please just keep loving me…”

The two of us hear sniffling next to us. We turn in unison and catch Tommy wiping tears out of her eyes. “What’s up, boo?” Adam asks, his voice as kind as a demon can possibly sound. Tommy waves a shaking hand our way. “I never thought that the two of you would ever declare love for each other again. I just glad that you both still love each other. I’ve missed the two of you together.”

Adam pulls out of me, his come soaking the bed as it leaks out of me. Adam shift on the bed, until he is lying on the other side of Tommy, taking her in his still shaking arms. “Baby, of course we still love each other! Love doesn’t simply end when you’re mad at someone, you know that. I may not have forgiven Dam for hurting you, but I can push that aside to show him how much I love him. I love you just as much, babes.” Tommy snuggles closer to Adam, the pups continuing to kick wildly. Adam reaches down and rubs his hand over Tommy’s swollen stomach, the movement causing Tommy to moan softly. I call out “Babes, do you want us to take care of you now?” Tommy laughs at my question, which makes me smile. “I’m fine, really. I tried to get hard last night thinking about the two of you, and the pups kicked harder than ever. Quite the little cockblockers.” Adam and I both laugh at this while Tommy smiles at us fondly.

The three of us spent the rest of the night cuddled up together. At one point, Trick brought us each a cup of blood, and we spent a few hours together just the four of us. At one point, Trick did give the three of us a sad look.

“Trick, what’s got you upset, hon?” I asked, reaching out to take Trick’s hand. “Oh nothing. I was just thinking that the last time I was with the three of you, we were in the mansion sitting with Mikey and Ray, all of us laughing and enjoying each other’s company. That seems like so long ago.”

I take Trick into my arms, pulling him close. “I know, sweetheart. We are really doing our best to end this war, so everything will go back to the way it used to be. Just be patient.” Tommy’s loud gasp makes the three of us turn towards her, fear on our faces. Tommy looks at me, asking “Dam? Clothes for us, please.” I snap my fingers and the second the three of us have clothes on from the waist down, Tommy pushes back the blankets. Her stomach has once again doubled in size. Adam and I reach out, our fingers bumping as we both rub our hand over the pups. “At this rate, Tommy, you will deliver in three weeks or so. I wonder if the pup’s growth rate will continue at this pace once they are born.” Tommy shakes her head, her hair hanging in her face. “Well, it would be nice if their ‘terrible twos’ only last a few minutes! But as for the rest…” Tommy shifts uncomfortably in her seat. “I would love to spend as much time with them as I can, before they become grown-ups and leave for a life on their own.”

The weeks fly by. Adam and I spend as much time as possible with Tommy, rubbing her back and singing her to sleep at naptimes. Ray manages to find replacements for us at the front line, and even stops by for a couple of visits with all of us when he can.

One evening Ray arrives to find Tommy crying in her bed, so he crawls on top of the covers and cuddles her close until she falls asleep. When Adam and I arrive later, we find Ray with tears running down his face. “She’s in such horrible pain. Her body cannot keep up with the pups, they doubled in size again tonight. I cannot believe that she is enduring all this agony without complaining. She’s a fucking saint.”

Adam slips his hand around Tommy’s. “Father, if you would rather go, Dam and I will take over. You fought all day; you must be tired as hell. You can come back tomorrow night…” Suddenly Tommy’s eyes fly open, a scream leaving her as she chokes out “My water just broke! Please get Frankie…” Ray runs to Gee’s room as I blink away the wet sheet from under Tommy, replacing them with fresh sheets.

When Frankie arrives, Tommy reaches out for him to come to her the second he enters the room. “Frankie, my water broke! I don’t…OWWW…understand! I was to have a C-section, what is going on?”

Frankie shoves his way through the three of us to get to the bed. “Please, I need room! Tommy, let’s get you naked from the waist down, then I will see what is going on.” A few minutes later, Frankie pulls back, shock and surprise on his face. “TJ, remember the first time you had pups, how we had to do a C-section?” Tommy nods frantically, her teeth biting into her bottom lip to keep from screaming out loud. “Well, Luna told us that you would deliver the same way, so I didn’t question it, therefore I didn’t do exams on you along the way. But…” Frank blushes as he tries to explain himself. “…while you carried this litter, your body changed. You now have a real female body, with a dick attached. Therefore…” Frank looks from Tommy to each of us, before finishing. “…you will deliver these pups vaginally, the same as any other female.” Tommy whimpers, a sharp pain taking over her lower half. “But…I’m scared! I never thought I’d…” Adam and I take one of her hands in ours, squeezing tightly. Frankie nods once. “I know, sweetheart, but you are not alone. We are all here for you, and we will get you through this, I promise.”

The next six hours are…well, calling them hell doesn’t exactly cover it. Tommy quickly dilates to five centimeters but then stops, frustration quickly taking over as she withers in pain to no avail. Adam, Ray and I end up taking Tommy for walks around Luna’s castle to try and push her labor along. When after a few hours there is no progress, Luna enters Tommy’s room, concern on her face.

“Princess, it appears you need my help. Hold tight.” Tommy barely has time to grab Adam and my hands before she is screaming in agony, her back pressed into the headboard behind her. Frankie moves forward, his hands reaching between Tommy’s legs. “Ten centimeters! The first pup should start to move into place soon, TJ. When you feel your first contraction, PUSH!” With a wide grin, Luna winks at Tommy and then heads back out the door towards her rooms.

Adam and I whisper encouraging things to Tommy as she begins to bear down, sweat breaking out on her forehead and down her face. Frankie reaches in to help the baby move the rest of the way through the birth canal. As soon as the head comes into view, Frankie gives a gasp of surprise. “Tommy! The…it’s a human baby, not a pup! Holy shit…” Tommy locks eyes on me as she bears down for another push, confusion in her eyes. When Tommy had her last pregnancy, she gave birth to her children in pup form. We all just assumed that she would do the same this time.

When the first boy is finally pushed out into the world, kicking and screaming, Frankie takes the baby across the room to wash him off and wrap him in a blanket before giving him to Tommy. Tears flow freely down Tommy’s face as we all look with wonder at the beautiful boy in her arms.

Twenty minutes later, Tommy feels another contraction. Ray rushes forward to take the baby from Tommy’s arms, sitting on the recliner in the corner of the room with his grandchild in his lap.

This delivery is quicker than the first. When our second son finally arrives, I take him from Frankie, cleaning him gently and then wrapping him warmly in a blanket. When I look down at my son, a shadow of a smile crosses his lips. Instead of crying, the boy makes a few mewing noises, his wide-open eyes staring at me. “Here mama, take your youngest” I comment, placing the baby into her waiting arms. Adam wraps his arms around me, pulling me in for a tight hug. “They are perfect, Dam. Congrats to you and Tommy.” I place a soft kiss to Adam’s cheek. “They belong to you as well, Adam, never fear. You are as much of a father to them as I am. The three of us will raise them together.” Tears fill Adam’s eyes at my words, knowing that I mean them with all my heart.

Frank finally pulls back from Tommy, a smile on his face. “You will heal perfectly, honey…though I want you to stay in bed for a few days. I’m sure the proud daddies will stay by your side, taking care of you and the babies. But there are a few issues that needs to be addressed. First off—I’m not sure that your milk supply will be ample, should the babies continue to grow as quickly as they did when you were pregnant. I’m sure Dam can help conjure up some milk if necessary or get it from someplace else. The other issue is security. I know that Luna has placed a spell on this castle to keep Andre and his men in the dark, but I’m still worried that it won’t be enough now that the children are here. Should we place some guards around, just in case? With Gee being pregnant as well, extra security means more than ever. We need to protect our children, as well as our spouses.”

Tommy looks to Adam and me for an answer, but it is Ray that comments. “I will gladly see to it that men are posted here in the castle, even if it means less men at the front lines. Frankie’s right: all the babies and their mothers need to be protected, especially when we are not here.” I chime in with “I will send some vamps from the Dark realm as well. We will make sure that this place is locked down tight, so our babies will be safe, never fear Frankie.” Frank nods at me, a smile on his face. “I trust you and papa with this, Dam. I know you will do what is best by all of us.”

Our youngest baby smiles gently up at Tommy, while his brother kicks up a storm in Ray’s arms. When Frankie asks, “What are their names?” Adam answers “Tommy has the honor of naming them. So, what’s it going to be, honey?” Tommy answers without looking up “Luna told us that I would give birth to opposites, one good and one evil. This little sweetheart’s name is Gabriel Mitchell Lambert Lavelli, after the angel Gabriel. He is the next and future ruler of the Light realm.” Tommy smiles when Gabriel coos and waves his arms, as if accepting his name from him momma. At the same moment, the other baby gives out a growl, kicking hard against Ray’s stomach as he waves his arms in the air. Tommy looks across the room, a small smile on her face. “That little demon over there is Draven Mitchell Lambert Lavelli, the next and future ruler of the Dark realm. The cosmos will bow at his feet. He will be fearsome indeed.” Draven growls again, sending chills up everyone’s spine.

Gabriel and Draven are indeed different as night and day. Gabe is patient, loving, and sweet. He hardly cries, spending most of his waking hours cooing and smiling. His brother, on the other hand, is short tempered, easily frustrated and rarely smiles. He takes an instant liking to Mikey when she visits, tangling his little fingers in her hair and staring deeply into her face as she holds him tightly to her. When she holds him, I cannot help but think of my other child Sonny, who was just as obsessed with Mikey as Draven is.

The children grow so quickly that we can barely keep them in new clothes. At six weeks, the two of them began to say simple words. At twelve weeks old, the two of them resemble one year old children, the two of them walking. At this age, their personalities really begin to show. Draven takes Gabe’s toys from him every chance he gets and hides them from him. Gabe smiles at everyone, even while Draven is being mean and hitting him. The two of them are handfuls for their mother, who is exhausted at the end of the day from trying to keep up with them.

Luna takes an extended trip god knows where, making Tommy and Gee nervous. I ensure that we have plenty of guards for protection, but even that is not enough to make the two of them feel secure. Gee gives birth to two pups named Michael and Anthony, with Gee having a c-section to birth them.

The family suffers defeat after defeat at the front lines, even with Adam, Frank and I joining the ranks. Ray begins to purchase troops from the Topaz realm, and Bobby manages to find enough humans to keep the vamps well fed.

One evening, Andre appears at the front line with his troops. He yells at us “So I hear your brats are born, Lavelli. You better hide that breeding sow well, or else I will simply have to take her again, make her my own. I so loved the way she moaned in pain when I raped her.” I throw a lightning bolt at Andre, which bounces off him. “Nice try, Lavelli. You’ll have to do much better than that.” Andre throws his own lightning bolt at Ray, which kills Ray instantly. Before his body can hit the ground, I resurrect him. “This is nothing but a stalemate, Andre. Why don’t you and I take this somewhere more private, a fight to the death. That way we can end this war for good.” Andre throws back his head and laughs. “And miss all this fun? I think not.” Andre throws a battle axe at me, which I deftly miss, a scowl covering my face. Andre smirks at me and barks out “Later, Lavelli” before disappearing.

I call out to Ray “I don’t trust this. I’m heading to the castle to make sure everything is alright. I’ll be back.” When I arrive, the sound of pounding on the front doors sends shivers up my spine. I make my way down the main hallway, calling out to Gee and Tommy, who run to meet me. “Grab the babies quickly. I’m sending you to the Dark realm to stay with Mikey. Hurry now, before they manage to break in.” I turn back towards the door, watching several guards lined up in preparation for battle.

Tommy hands me our children before turning to take one of Gee’s children in her arm. I wave my arm, and all of us end up in Mikey’s bedroom in the Dark realm. Once I make sure that all is safe, I lay our babies down on Mikey’s bed. “I’m going to go get Mikey. Stay here, you’ll be safe.” I turn towards the door, running as fast as I can through the corridors in search of Mikey. When I stumble across Andrew, I tell him that I left the others in their bedroom, and to please stay with them while I look for Mikey. He tells me that he will gladly do so, and that the last time he saw Mikey, she was headed towards the throne room.

When I finally find Mikey, she’s not surprised to see me. “I figured that eventually you would have to bring them here, Dam. We will make sure that they are safe and secure.”

When we enter Mikey’s bedroom, we find Andrew unconscious on the floor, with a gaping head wound and a sword sticking out of his chest. Blood surrounds his body, soaking into the carpet below him.

Tommy, Gee and the children are gone.

Chapter Text

The next five years are insanely busy for me. Not only do I have to deal with the constant onslaught of invasions from the Light realm but I continue to manage two realms and all that goes with that. I negotiate and supervise the importation of goods and humans from far away realms, as well as constantly looking for new locations in which to find what we need to survive. I fight at the front lines when I can, leading the troops into battle against Ray and his vamps on a regular basis, all under the guise of a glamour resembling Alexandre.

Whenever possible I visit Sonny. My boy grows up so damn fast! I curse the war that keeps him from me on a regular basis. Every time I see him, he grows more and more to look like his mother. Andros sees to his education, ensuring that he is well taken care of in my stead. Mikey visits Sonny constantly, doing her best to keep both Athena’s and my memory alive for Sonny as he grows.

I visit Ray and Mikey on a regular basis, hoping for war news. Whenever possible, Mikey ‘lets slip’ bits of information, sometimes even in front of Ray. Her favorite expression ends up being “Oh, I’m sorry Ray! I should’ve kept my mouth shut…” even as she fights to hold back a smirk.

Mikey takes to visiting me more and more often, trying her hardest to tempt me into bed with her. In the beginning I try my hardest to resist, Ray’s face constantly floating in front of me when Mikey runs her fingers over my skin, her soft voice begging me to fuck her into the mattress. Over time, I find it harder and harder to concentrate when she touches me. One night, after a long day in the battlefield, I come back to my suite to find Mikey naked, leaning up against my fireplace, her arms and legs sprawled in a sexy pose.

“You’re covered in blood, Dam. Come over here, run your bloody fingers over my skin.” I harden instantly at her words, a growl leaving my chest as I cross the room to take her in my arms. “We can’t keep doing this, Mikey. Ray…” Mikey places two fingers over my mouth, her other hand reaching out to stroke my dick through my clothes. “Ray only knows what we tell him, Dam. You know I want you, that I love you. Please, baby…” The next thing I know, Mikey sinks to her knees in front of me, my pants are wide open, and Mikey is reaching into them to pull me out. “…please let me. I promise to make it good for you…”

Three days later, I am sprawled across a recliner in Ray’s home, Ray and Mikey sitting across from me. “How much longer is this silly war going to last, Ray? Your realm must be struggling by now for supplies and soldiers! Can’t you simply put forth a decree to end the war, since you’re the King here?” Ray wraps his arm across Mikey’s shoulders, pulling her closer. “I have to contend with the rest of the Council, Dam. I do not lead alone; I must take their opinions into consideration. I was outvoted at the beginning of this war; I didn’t want it in the first place. Bringing it to an end will be even harder than trying to keep the war from happening. Trust me, Dam…” Ray’s face flushes red with his growing anger. “…I’d end it today if I could.”

“Seriously, Ray…” Mikey takes Ray’s hand in hers, lacing her fingers with his. “…Dam is right. How the hell is the army surviving, with such great losses?” Turning to stare at me with a smirk Mikey continues “Especially with only ten percent of your army left, and a depleted treasury. Isn’t it time to give up, darling?” Ray grumbles, his hand tightening around Mikey’s. “The Council is leveling higher taxes against all vamps, which is causing riots in the streets. I have no idea if the money they collect will be enough to keep the army in funds, Mikey. Anthony has been having trouble finding other realms that will allow us to purchase what we need on credit. I have no idea how the Dark realm has managed to do so well against our armies. That Alexandre is a genius at running his realm.” Mikey and I share a shadowy smile, both of us knowing the answer to the question that Ray poses.

“I hear he has managed to find the finest soldiers in the cosmos and has paid handsomely for them. I agree with you, that vamp is a genius” I say, casually taking a sip of blood from my glass. “Someday, I’d like to meet him.” Mikey chokes back a laugh, the sound causing Ray to turn to her. “Sweetheart, are you alright?” Mikey pretends to choke on her blood as she tries not to laugh. “I’m fine, darling, thank you. Guess I drank too fast is all.”

So, their numbers are down to ten percent, huh? And with no money to back them up? Nice to know! If we can just hold on a bit longer and do everything we possibly can to make sure that no one will take their credit, we might have a chance to win this war!

“Well, the realm is lucky to have you, Ray! Other rulers wouldn’t be so understanding of the political position and stay in their lane the way you do. I’m sure in the end, it will make you even more effective. You are a natural born leader.” Ray smiles at my words, never knowing that I’m basically insulting him instead of supporting him! “Thank you, Damian. I wish you were here to rule at my side! I’m sure we would accomplish much more with you working with us.” Little does he know!

“Well, I thank you both for dinner. I really must be getting back to my realm. I promise to visit you both soon.” With those words, Mikey tells Ray that she will walk me to the front door. As we exit, Mikey hisses to me “I was being generous for Ray’s sake, Dam. The army really is down to five percent or less. They are struggling to find money, so it looks as if we will be beaten sooner than later! I’m sure that’s the news you were looking to hear when you arrived.” When we reach the front door, Mikey kisses me on the cheek. “Thank you for visiting, Dam.” She whispers in my ear “You will see me soon, darling. I love you.”

The Light realm Council finds only one other realm willing to offer them money, at a fee so high that it would destroy the Light realm if they took the deal, so they ended up declining the offer. Riots become more and more widespread, and soldiers outright refused to fight, using the excuse that they are not being paid what was promised to them. The ones that do decide to stay and fight come up against something that they never expected—the Vampaire. I called them into action, determined to destroy what was left of the Light realm armies, and they did not disappoint me.

Three weeks later, the Light realm soldiers lowered their swords and surrendered to me and my men. The wretched war was finally over.

Ray immediately sends emissaries to our realm, each bowing lower than then next. I ask for a meeting with Ray at my castle, insisting that he meet with me in private. Regardless, I am not prepared for what I encounter when I enter the meeting room.

I find Ray on his knees, his eyes focused on the floor in front of him. The motion stops me in my tracks; so foreign is the sight before my eyes. This is not the vamp I know and love. I stare at Ray in silence for a few minutes, trying to decide my next move.

“Stand up, Ray. A dignified man such as yourself shouldn’t prostate himself in front of his enemy.” Ray raises his head to meet my gaze, confusion plain on his face. “I…am the losing side, Alexandre. It is my place to show reverence…” I take a few steps forward, cupping Ray’s elbow and pulling up to raise him to his feet. “I cannot bear to see a man of your station brought low by anything. Come, have a seat, share a glass of blood with me and let’s discuss our next steps.”

When I sit down opposite Ray, a feeling of guilt instantly washes over me. How many more times can I fuck his wife before he finds out? How many more times will she prefer me to him in the bedroom?

Once I finally manage to make Ray relax, I start with “Thank you for meeting with me, Ray. I appreciate your coming here. Knowing your Council the way I do, the last thing I wanted to do was to meet where they would have access to our meeting. I trust those bastards only as far as I can throw them, and even less than that! From now on, I deal with only you.” Ray nods his head in agreement. “You have no reason to trust them, Alexandre, especially the way that Council session turned against you. I’m here as the King of the Light realm, not as a Council member. I’m here because I want to discuss terms with you.”

We end up meeting for three hours. During that time, we establish complete freedom for the Dark realm. In an act of good will, I gift the Light realm 10,000 humans, as well as gifts of coal and oil. Ray informs me that the Light realm will release all hold on the Dark realm, and that the two realms will be considered equal from this day forwards.

“You know, Ray…” I cross my legs as I lean back in my chair, a picture of nonchalance. “…you should bring your lovely wife with you some evening for dinner and entertainment. I’ve heard so much about her from you over the years, I feel as if I know her. It would be great to finally meet her…” I hide my smirk behind a set face, practically choking back laughter at Ray’s expense.

“I’m sure that she would enjoy the experience, Alexandre. I’ll bring her whenever you wish. It would be nice to spend an evening together without having to deal with business.” I clap my hands together in glee. “What say next Saturday night, say around 10 pm? It will be an end of the war celebration. Feel free to bring your son Gerard as well. We will make a party out of the evening.”

Saturday night I send the real Alexandre to the Copper realm to spend the evening. Once my glamour is in place, I see to the evening’s entertainment. I already ordered the most expensive strain of blood that could possibly be purchased. When Ray and Mikey arrive, I take Mikey’s hand in mine, bending it until I can lay a kiss on her wrist. “It is an honor and a pleasure to meet you, Mikey. Thank you so much for coming this evening. I appreciate it.” Mikey gives me a secret smile, her eyes shining. “It is I who are honored, Alexandre. Thank you for the invitation.”

The three of us sip blood as we watch circus performers doing their routines in the throne room. Magicians and dancers manage to get Mikey to perform a few numbers with them throughout the night. It is wonderful to watch Mikey throw back her head and laugh, thoroughly enjoying herself. Ray hardly takes his eyes off her all evening, causing a stab of jealousy to take over me a few times. When will I ever be over her?

It is four o’clock in the morning when the two of them make to leave. Mikey grabs my hand and then pulls me into a kiss on the cheek. “Thank you so very much for having us, Alexandre. We had a wonderful time! I look forward to visiting in the future.” Ray wraps me up in a hug as he whispers in my ear “Thank you, Alexandre! I will see you in two weeks, when we sign our new peace treaty.” With a wave of my hand, the two of them make their way back to the Light realm, and I tuck myself into bed with a smile on my face.

Once my son turns five, his grow spurts begin. In a few short years, I have a fifteen-year-old son. At the age of ten, my son turns thirty years old. Every morning I am taken aback when a grown man greets me in the throne room, instead of a child.

One May evening Sonny, who is dressed in a dark suit, knocks on the door to my suite. When he enters, he gives me a pensive look. “Can we have a word, father?” I gesture towards a comfortable recliner, saying “Of course Sonny. You know your father is always here for you.”

Once settled, Sonny clasps his hands in front of him, his gaze settling on the floor. “I have been doing a lot of thinking, father. First, I want to thank you for always being here for me, the entire time I was growing up. You are truly the world’s best father, always putting me first, even during the war years. I am the man I am because of you, and I will never forget how much you loved me and cared for me. But it’s time that I think about my future, and what I want out of my life.”

“I received a visit from a little old woman the other night. I was lying in my bed and she suddenly showed up out of nowhere. She called me by my name, said that she knew you. She told me that she was responsible for my conception. When I asked her name, she declined answering me, instead asking me what I want out of life. I told her that people make me uncomfortable, and that I would rather spend my life living alone. I told her I am only comfortable around you, Mikey and grandfather. She said she knew of my magickal ability, and that she could help me develop it, if I wished. She said that she knew of the perfect place for me to live, and she said that she would help me settle in anywhere in the cosmos that I wanted to live if I so chose. She also told me that years in the future, there would be a great battle between my family and others, and that I would be needed in the end to help you win the war. She told me that, along the way, the right types of magick that I will need will become available for me to learn, in order to help you win the war. Father…” I take a deep breath and hold it, suddenly afraid of what he might say next. “...I want to take her up on her offer. I promise, I will always let you know where I am, so you can visit me. I will always be your son, and I will love you until the end of time and beyond. Please do not fight me on this, father. I know you are going to say that you do not want to lose me, but you will never really lose me, not if we love each other. Please, please understand that I am doing this because I need to, not because I am running away from you or anything in my life. I need peace of mind and soul, father. Please let me have it.”

I sit still in my seat, my heart hammering practically out of my chest. Over and over, my only thought is “My son wants to leave me…”

Clearing my throat, I shift in my seat a few times before responding “Sonny, you know that I love you, and I only want what’s best for you. I know how interacting with the outside world has always made you miserable and unhappy. I have known since you were a child that you were destined to live a life of solitude. But so soon? I was hoping that the two of us would have many more years together before you decided to leave. It feels like only yesterday that I held you as a baby in my arms. I’m reluctant to give you up.” I see tears shimmer in Sonny’s eyes at this comment. “Father, I will miss you beyond words, but I must do this for myself. Please tell me that you understand.”

I sigh, once again shifting in my seat. “Of course, I understand, Sonny. And with love I let you go, even though it is the hardest thing that I will ever have to do. Please just promise me that you will take care of yourself, and that you will say goodbye to your grandfather and Mikey before you leave. I will always be here for you, you only have to call to me and I will do anything you need.”

Sonny stands, moving forward until he is within arm’s length distance of me. I stand as well, wrapping my arms around him in a tight hug, holding on as if I never want to let him go, which I don’t.

Sonny whispers in my ear “Father, I thank you for letting me go. I promise I will always be here for you, and I promise that I will be there in the end for your family, whenever that happens. You can always rely on me.” Laying a soft kiss to my cheek, Sonny pulls away before I can cling even harder to him. With a gentle smile and a wave, my son walks out the door to my suite and out of my life for years to come.

Sonny is as good as his word. He visits his grandfather, who takes the news better than I do. When he visits with Mikey, she breaks down when he delivers the news of his leaving. She clings to him, hoping against hope that she can make him change his mind. In the end, Sonny leaves her in tears, a crumbled mess on the floor. She immediately searches me out to vent her feelings.

“How could you let him go like that, Dam? How could you let our boy walk out on the only family that he has?”

I take Mikey’s trembling body in my arms, my lips brushing her cheek. “I have no choice, Mikes! Even though he is technically a child, he has the body and mentality of an adult. You know how difficult it is for him to be a part of society! He was born to be a recluse, never really interacting with others except for us. We should be lucky that we had him a part of us for as long as we did.” Mikey lays her head on my shoulder, her body shuddering as she weeps. I gently run my fingers through her hair, pulling the strands enough that she meets my gaze. “We will always be able to visit him, don’t forget. We really are not losing him since he will always be in our hearts.” Mikey nods once, a shaking hand raising to wipe the tears from her cheeks. In a soft voice she asks, “What will we ever do with ourselves without him?”

I pull back harder on her hair, enough to bend her backwards at the waist so she looks deep into my eyes. “I can think of something, darling…”

Years fly by. I see Sonny from time to time, happy that he has managed to create a life for himself where he is content. He always seems pleased to see me, and we spend as much time together as he can possibly handle. I know that Andros and Mikey visit him as well, which makes losing him as comforting as it possibly can be.

The Dark realm has occasional run-ins with other realms, always winning through the sheer might of our armies. I become expert at negotiating with other realms, always managing to secure what our realm needs without bloodshed.

And then it happens.

For the first time in my undead existence, I become totally and completely bored. I end up turning over more and more realm responsibilities to Alexandre, and spend my time traveling throughout the cosmos, searching for…who knows what. Something to satisfy my curiosity, fulfill my time. Something to alleviate my boredom.

I find it in the most surprising place. After decades and decades of searching for anything to capture and keep my attention, I accidently trip over the very thing that I’m looking for—someone to make my very own.

My illicit relationship with Mikey did nothing but make me jaded. I wanted someone for my very own, who I could make mine and mine alone. I want to own something that for once could make me happy, truly happy. I’m tired of being alone.

When visiting the Emerald realm, I come across a poor village filled with dirt streets. Nothing really to see, to hold my attention. But all of a sudden…in front of me I see a youth of about fifteen years old. He is dressed in rags, and his blonde hair is dirty and hanging over one brown eye. He is haggling with a shop keeper, his hand on the halter of a calf. The man he is speaking with finally sighs and hands a handful of coins to the youth, who smiles happily at the man. As he turns to leave, he sees me from across the street. He takes in my blonde hair and green eyes, his eyes scanning my satin and lace clothing before turning away from me, heading towards the town square. I stand towards the back of the crowd, my eyes never leaving the youth as he slowly makes his way through the crowd, speaking to this one and that as he goes. A slave auction starts, and a man with a whip in his hand climbs up on a pedestal as two other men push a poor soul into place for the auction to begin. The youth stops next to another youth, laughing and joking, ignoring the auction taking place in front of them. Watching the two of them, I slowly move towards the side of the crowd, my eyes never leaving the beauty in front of me.

My breath catches in my throat as the youth turns towards me. Recognition passes across his face, and after a moment, he nods to me, in deference to my station. I see a slight shiver run through his body as he stares at me, noticing his breath catch. Suddenly the youth says his goodbyes to his friend, sliding through the crowd until his slight body brushes past me, his head once again nodding as he goes.

When he is a few steps past me, I call out “You may leave me now, babes…but you will belong to me, never fear.” The youth’s face changes into a mask of fear, and he turns away from me, quickly walking to the outskirts of town towards his home.

I close my eyes and watch his progress, watching him enter the farmhouse of his parents, see him turn over the money that he made from selling the calf to them.

With a smile on my face, I head towards the farmhouse in my vision. Time to make his parents an offer that they won’t be able to refuse—a nice fat offer of money in exchange for their son with the blonde hair and brown eyes. It’s time to make that sweet young piece of ass my bride.

Chapter Text

On the way to speaking to the blonde’s father, I receive a frantic message from Alexandre. With a sigh, I return to the Dark realm, frustration plain on my face.

“I’m sorry to bother you, Damian! But the ambassador from the Ruby realm is here with a declaration of war! I thought you better handle this…”

With a sigh, I motion for Alexandre to return to his room. As soon as he leaves, I put on the glamour which will disguise myself for the impromptu meeting. When I arrive, the pompous fool refuses to rise from his seat in respect of my position. “Do your knees bother you, Donavan? Is that why you refuse to stand at my arrival?” Donavan, a priest of some note in his realm, sneers at me. “I only rise for my own king, Alexandre. Why would I bow for a king that we are going to war with?” My eyebrow raises in irritation. “You rude oaf! You come here to inform me that your realm will shortly attack the Dark realm, and you have the balls to be curt with me? Maybe you won’t return to your precious king, maybe I’ll cut your balls off and feed you to my dogs!” Donavan laughs at my words. “Our realm isn’t the only realm ready to attack you, king. The Pearl and Onyx realms are joining in just for the fun of it. You will soon have your hands full and have no time for an idle threat against me. Ready your men, king…” Donavan stands up, laughter in his eyes. “…before my king destroys you and yours.” With contempt, Donavan turns and leaves the room.

Damn it!!! Just when I wanted to focus all my time and attention on my sexy little blonde, a war gets in the way! No time to speak to his parents, I need to immediately head to the Light realm to speak to Ray instead. His help is sorely needed if we are to take on three realms as once!

Ray eventually agrees to send us help, as does Andros in the Copper realm. Hoping that I am not too late, I head back to the Emerald realm to speak to the blonde’s father.

When I arrive, the blonde is already working in the barn milking the cows. When I knock on the front door, a weary looking woman with a child on her hip opens the door.

“Excuse me, ma’am. I am looking to speak to the man of the house on an urgent matter. Could you please get him for me?” I watch the woman’s eyes take in my leather and velvet clothing, my long blonde hair. She nods without saying a word, directing me into what I’m sure is the small living room of the hovel I’m standing in. While I am waiting, my eyes take in the old furniture, the unpainted unadorned walls. No personal effects can be seen anywhere, giving the house an almost unlived in feeling.

I surmise that the woman had to go to the fields to bring the man to the house, since she is gone for quite a while. When he finally arrives, his clothing is worn and dirty, his skin giving off the impression that he hasn’t taken a bath in a year or more. His expression is grumpy, as if angry that I have taken up his valuable time in the fields with something trivial—that is, until he takes in my clothing, my stance. Obviously, I am a man of breeding, a man of wealth—and I must be treated as such. I’m sure the idea of my money is what brings about such a congenial change in him…

Bowing low, the man utters “My Lord! What brings you to my humble home, sir?” When he stands back up, he asks “May I offer you a glass of wine, sir?”

I decline his offer politely. “I have come on a very important matter, sir. I would like to inquire after your son with the bright blonde hair.”

I see a flash of greed in the man’s eyes as he responds “You mean our son Tommy Joe. I see word of his beauty has traveled far and wide. All the rich men and many ladies in the area have bid for him over the last four years, my Lord. I am waiting…”

“…for the right amount of money to walk in your door. Well, sir…” I cross my arms and lean forward, until I am practically whispering in his ear. “…today is your lucky day.” The woman gasps, her hand coming to rest on her husband’s shoulder. “But sir! My Thomas…” The husband raises a hand to hush his wife. “The highest bid that we have had recently received is $40,000 crowns. Can you even begin to match…”?

“100,000 crowns.”

The blonde’s parents gasp in shock. I smile at them, enjoying myself immensely. “Under one condition.” The father nods, encouraging me to continue. Thinking of the upcoming war, I must ensure that my beautiful boy is in a place of safe keeping. The last thing that I want to do is to put him in harm’s way. “I insist that he stay with you for at least another two years. I want him to be fairly treated, and I want him well fed and clean. He is to eat decent food; no table scraps will be good enough for my boy. I will supply new clothes for your family, will send you workers that will help fix up your home and barn, will give you money on top of the amount mentioned to buy good food for your entire family for the next two years. In return, I expect you will keep my secret, never telling him about me beyond telling him that he has been made a purchased bride by a rich man who will come for him in two years’ time. I will give you $50,000 now, and $50,000 when I come to take him home. Do I make myself clear?” Tommy’s father walks up to me, placing his grubby hand in mine, shaking it as he says “We have a deal, sir. I promise your boy will be well fed and groomed, and he will be ready for you anytime you wish to take him. Thank you, sir.” I nod my head, and the money appears in the center of the table next to the mother. “Never fear, he will be cherished and loved. His future is assured.” When the mother asks, “Would you like to meet him?” I decline, saying “It would be better if my appearance stays a surprise for now, madame. Take care of my boy for me.” With a smirk and a bow, I walk out of the hovel and blink, heading back to the Dark realm.

Andros, Ray and I spend the better part of three weeks plotting and preparing for the war to come. My thoughts often wander to my bride, wanting nothing more than to travel to his parent’s house and ravish the hell out of him. Patience has never been my strong suit, and it seems now to be more of a curse than ever.

My mind even wanders to my bride while I’m in bed fucking Mikey, much to her frustration. Mikey has always been a greedy bitch, always wanting every part of me, my mind included. She wants to be the centerpiece of my life, even though she belongs to another. Mikey has never cared about fairness…as long as she gets what she wants…

“Where is your mind, Dam? You seem miles away tonight” Mikey comments drily, her nails digging into my back. “What great secret are you hiding from me?” When I do not respond, she rakes her nails down my back. “I’d tear you apart to gain your attention, darling. Tell Mummy what’s keeping you from me…” I sigh, slamming even harder into Mikey, gaining a sliver of satisfaction when I hear her grunt in response. “I’m simply thinking of war, dear Mikey. What…FUCK!...else would dominate my thoughts? I…damn it!...wish this fucking war was over with already!” I lie to Mikey, trying my best to take her attention off me and onto the activity at hand. “Now shut up and…let me pound you through the…mattress, slut…” I slam into her again, causing her to moan out in pleasure. It’s always easy to distract her with sex…

Laying in each other’s arms afterwards, Mikey surprises me by biting my ear. “That’s what you get for ignoring me, Dam. Let the war take care of itself, we spend so little time together as is, the last thing we need to do is be apart when we are together.” I grunt, rolling onto my back. “Some things are not that easy, Mikes. Pleasure doesn’t fix everything. The realms we are fighting may not be large, but they are strong and resourceful. I cannot take my eye off the situation for long. I’m sorry that you do not understand.” Mikey sighs, draping herself over me as she replies “I do understand, darling. But what we have is important…”

I push Mikey off me, instantly standing next to the bed. “And what DO we have, Mikes? Stolen moments between your passions with YOUR HUSBAND? Christ, Mikey! Did you ever for one moment think that I need, want more? That a few stolen moments with you are not enough?” Mikey reaches out for me, but I pull away, frustrated. “I still love you, Mikes. It kills me to watch you with Ray, playing happy family. I can’t continue like this.” I take a few steps backwards. “I need to find someone of my very own, someone who will be proud to be with me, someone who can walk freely with me at my side, not hidden away in shame. I need this in my life, Mikey…and you cannot give it to me.” Tears fill Mikey’s eyes as she hears the truth. She sits up on the bed, reaching out to me as she says “But Dam! We love each other, always have! I can’t give you up! You are too important to me to lose!” I blink once and I am dressed, my hands on my hips as I respond with “Love has nothing to do with it anymore, Mikey. I will always love you, but I want someone whom I can spend my life with. I’m sorry that you do not understand that.” When I turn to leave, Mikey yells “You will NEVER find someone to love more than you love ME, Damian! You will always be alone, and when you reach out to me to fill your lonely days I will turn my back on you, like you are turning your back on me now! You will spend your life lonely and alone, always pining for something you don’t have. That is my curse to you, Damian—loneliness. Enjoy eternity alone.” With that said, Mikey disappears back to the Light realm, taking my heart with her.

The war drags out for months, causing me to become short tempered and frustrated. I make as many trips to the Emerald realm as I can, observing my boy from afar. His parents are as good as their word—his hair shines in the sunlight due to continuous baths, and he appears to have put on a few pounds. His clothing is new and fits him well. Life on the farm has made the boy fit, muscles standing out on sculpted arms, his body lean. The house he lives in is now painted and repaired, new furniture sitting out on the large front porch.

I witness Tommy going to town, always stopping to talk to the same boy. If I didn’t know any better, I’d swear that Tommy was in love with him by the way that he constantly tries to brush up against this bastard brat when they speak. Jealousy blooms in my chest when I catch the two of them together, staring deep into each other’s eyes. This type of behavior needs to stop and fast!

I find out that the boy in question is named Robbie, and he is the same age as Tommy. Apparently the two of them have been secret boyfriends since the day I purchased my Tommy months earlier. This brat is the boy that Tommy was speaking with in the town square the day I first saw Tommy Joe. How dare that bastard think he has a chance with my bride? I’ll find a way to destroy him…

The perfect opportunity happens on the eve of a feast day. Robbie lives just outside of town, in a home with his parents and four brothers. The entire family is away at church, giving me the opportunity to soak Robbie’s bedroom walls and door with a flammable liquid, the outside walls of his home as well. Later that night, when the entire family is asleep, I strike a match and, standing outside Robbie’s window, light the house ablaze. His entire room goes up in flames automatically, trapping the little bastard in his room. “Good!” I think to myself. “…no more little shit.”

Just then, Robbie, covered in flames, bolts out the front door of the house. I disappear into the shadows as neighbors, hearing his screams, come out of their homes to help. The last thing I see as I leave is the neighborhood doctor tending to Robbie as he gasps what looks like his last breath.

I can’t get that lucky…

The little bastard survives his burns, even though all his hair is burned off in the fire. In a twist I did not expect, Tommy practically takes Robbie under his wing, carefully nursing him back to health. This infuriates me. I speak to Tommy’s father about the growing relationship between them, explaining my frustration at what appears to be a budding romance between them. Tommy’s father assures me that there is no romance, simply a youthful ‘dalliance’ between the two. This does nothing to calm my fury, instead I insist that Tommy’s father do everything he can to break the two of them up, reminding him of the upcoming money that he is still owed for our union. Tommy’s father goes on to assure me that he will do everything in his power to make sure that Tommy never sees Robbie again.

This works—until Tommy start sneaking out of the house to see Robbie in the middle of the night!

More and more time goes by. The war takes up even more of my attention, and Robbie and Tommy’s romance builds to a boiling point.

My mind begins to play tricks on me. I imagine that Tommy is out to hurt me, is laughing at me behind my back. I start talking to myself, pacing in my frustration to settle issues with the war so I can claim my prize. Mikey arrives to visit me and is shocked at the transition of my personality. I’m easily distracted, the smallest of issues causing me to fly off into a rage, my mind obviously elsewhere. Mikey begins to worry about me, visiting me whenever she can, which only serves to set me off worse. I do not want Mikey; I want only Tommy Joe.

Ladies and gentlemen, this is the beginning of my ultimate mental break. Those of you who may know the details of what happens in the years after I eventually make Tommy mine, know that there is a large period of time where evil seeps into the recesses of my soul and claims me, causing me to treat my love horribly. This is the beginning of that long chapter in my life.

With the Dark realm currently ravaged by war, I long for a place to take my bride without interruption. I become obsessed at the idea of taking Tommy away from Robbie at the first possible moment. So, I set in motion a plan that, while unexpected, will lead my bride firmly into my grasp.

Linking my mind with Tommy’s, I am furious at what I hear. One night, after Tommy’s parents have fallen asleep, he sneaks out of the house, visiting Robbie. Once there, he tells Robbie to pack his belongings, that the two of them would sneak off and start their lives together somewhere else. Robbie agrees to meet Tommy at a neighbor’s barn at midnight. Tommy then goes home to await the appointed time.

I contact a friend (we are so close, I called him “brother”) in the Dark realm named Frank. I asked Frank to come with me to the Emerald realm, and I fill him in on my plan. He agrees to go with me, so at ten to midnight the two of us set out for the barn to await Robbie. Robbie is the first to arrive, and he squeals like a girl when the two of us grab him from behind. I mumble a spell, making Robbie pliant and, of all things, horny! The boy starts moaning as Frank and I undressed him, and before we know it, Frank is naked, bent over in front of Robbie. I reach around Robbie and grab his dick, lining it up with Frank’s ass. I then unzip my pants, grab Robbie’s hips, slamming forward until I am deep inside the boy, which in turn pushes Robbie deep inside of Frank. As I slam forward Frank backs up, giving the boy plenty to moan about as we continue to rock him between the two of us.

We continue to fuck Robbie, the barn filling with moans. The barn door slides quietly open and Tommy steps into the barn, a duffle bag on his shoulder. He stops in his tracks when Robbie moans out to him, tears filling Tommy’s eyes instantly when he realizes what is going on. So my poor little bride feels betrayed by the love of his life! A smirk crosses my face as Tommy turns to go, stumbling over his own feet in his desire to get as far away from the situation as possible and back to his bed.

As soon as we are done having our fun with the brat, I redress him and send Frank back to his apartment in the Dark realm. I then grab Robbie and take him to a room in a Dark realm building which was the old meeting house of the Vampaire, which has fallen into disrepair. I say another spell, laying Robbie down on a marble slab in the middle of the room, using the spell to keep him still. Then I head to Tommy’s house.

Once there, I stand for a moment outside his bedroom window. Even though I am enraged at my bride, its finally time to make him mine. I will show him who he really belongs to…

I quietly creep into the window, moving to stand next to Tommy’s bed. The poor soul has cried himself to sleep in heartache, the thought very welcoming to me. The boy should suffer for what he tried to do, for trying to best me. He will learn his lesson before the evening is out…

I climb onto his sleeping body, my hand covering his mouth in case he screams when he awakens. I whisper in his ear “Wakie, wakie little Tommy! Time to experience eternity.” Tommy’s eyes bolt open, his screams muffled against my hand. I make eye contact with him briefly before I lower my head, my fangs slicing through the flesh of his neck.

The second Tommy’s sweet tasting blood flows over my taste buds, I become ravenous. I gulp down as much blood as fast as I can, the taste of my bride forever etched on my tastebuds. I feel him start to slip away, know that he is on the brink of death. Time to make him mine.

I remove my hand from over Tommy’s lax mouth, watching as his eyes roll back into his head before closing. Now to the part that I dislike the most. I wretch open Tommy’s mouth and then rip a hole in my wrist, instantly placing my wrist into Tommy’s open mouth. Nothing happens. I squeeze my wrist, encouraging more blood flow.

A gasp can be heard from Tommy as his eyes once again focus on mine, my blood feeling like liquid fire in his veins. I close the cut in my wrist and then lean down, taking Tommy’s lips in a searing kiss. Tommy freezes in place, both of his arms awkwardly rising to try to push me off him. My bride is finally mine!

Thinking back to the chaos in the Dark realm, it dawns on me that I need to take Tommy to a place that he will be safe. Knowing just the place, I move to stand, scooping my prize in my arms and then jumping out the window with him. Once again Tommy gasps, his face showing his fear.

“Welcome to the world of vampirism, Tommy Joe. I’m taking you somewhere you will be safe.” I blink, and the two of us head off to the Light realm.

Once there, Tommy looks around himself as I knock on the door to Mikey’s house. A few minutes goes by, and I knock again. Mikey’s face registers her surprise when she opens the door, looking from me to Tommy’s pale face. “Back up, Mikey. I’ve brought you another child to raise.” When Mikey clears the doorway, I walk Tommy into the living room, laying his now unconscious body down on the couch. Mikey’s shrill “What the fuck have you done, Damian?” fills the room as she makes her way over to Tommy’s side. “This is Tommy Joe, Mikey. He needs a safe place to live, and you are the only one I trust will take the proper care of him. He’s my bride.”

Mikey crosses the room, her voice showing her shock as she hisses out “BRIDE? Damian, what the…” I quickly explain how I paid for Tommy, how I’ve made him my own. “But Mikey, I’m afraid. My very sanity seems to be slipping away. I’m afraid that, if I keep him with me, he will get hurt. Can he live here with you and Ray? He will need training to become a vampire.”

“You turn a human and THEN expect us to care for him? What the fuck is wrong with you? How can you leave him, when in the most important time in his life he will be without his maker? I want to kill you for this…”

“MIKES, PLEASE!!! I need to get away from him, or I will destroy him! I will come back when I finally get myself under control, but for now please give him the love I cannot. And please do not tell Ray that I am the one that turned Tommy. He will never understand…”

Mikey kneels next to Tommy, her hand gently brushing the hair off his forehead. “Yes Damian, I will be a mother to him, poor soul. I still cannot believe that you are abandoning him like this. The boy will go through his undead existence feeling lost without his maker. It will take a lot for him to overcome this and trust people.”

Mikey stands once again, moving back to stand in front of me. “Go, Damian. Make yourself better so you can come back to all of us. We will be waiting.” I kiss Mikey on the cheek and thank her for everything before transporting myself back to the Dark realm.

Once I return to Robbie, a magician friend of mine enters the room, instantly chanting out a spell that will turn Robbie into a living statue. He drones on and on, taking his sweet time. The moment that the magician leaves after completing his task, I move to stand over Robbie, a smirk on my face. “You are my prisoner, and you will remain as you are until you can be put to “better use.” I know you can hear me. I know you can see me, Robbie. You will remain this way until I release you. But don’t worry about Tommy Joe. I turned him into a vampire earlier this evening. He will be quite fine, I assure you. As soon as he becomes acclimated to his new life, he will forget all about you, I’ll see to it. You see, Robbie…you are just a small part in my grand scheme. I will own Tommy and take over the entire Toro family before I am through. And you will continue to lie here, year after year…as long as I see fit. Enjoy your solitude Robbie.” And with that, I left him there, a prisoner of his own mind and body.

The war drags on for another six months. I spend every second of that time craving my boy, wanting to sink my teeth into his neck again and claim him. Mikey informs me that Tommy has, after a rough start, accepted the Toro’s as his new family. Angrily she berates me for being a lousy maker. “You rank right up there with Justine, Dam! Making vamps and then abandoning them! Just what the fuck were you thinking?” I lash out at her “What’s best for him, Mikey! I gave him a new life, a better life…one that’s better for him if I’m not in it right now. I can barely keep it together on a good day, do you want him to be stuck with me, as unstable as I am?” Mikey comes over to me, wrapping her arms around me. “Just come meet him, speak to him. I’m sure it will go a long way towards making him feel wanted. He keeps asking me why you didn’t care enough about him to stay. I told him that you had to go, that you were fighting in a war on another realm. Please, Dam…come back with me.”

After more cajoling, I accompany Mikey back to the Light realm. Fuck am I nervous! I feel like throwing up when Mikey unlocks her front door, motioning for me to follow her in. I hear two sets of giggles and the sound of a video game being played somewhere upstairs. As we pass the stairs, Mikey calls up “Hey Tommy Joe? Can you please come downstairs? There is someone I’d like you to meet.” I then follow Mikey into the living room, settling on her overstuffed couch.

A few minutes goes by before Tommy suddenly rounds the corner into the living room, stopping in his tracks when he sees me, eyes wide. Mikey moves to Tommy’s side, gently saying “I want you to meet Damian, your maker. Come say hi sweetheart. I promise he won’t hurt you.”

Tommy takes a few hesitant steps into the room, coming to a stop a foot away from me. When I gesture to the other end of the couch, Tommy slowly and gently lowers himself down on the seat, keeping plenty of distance between us. Christ, the boy is gorgeous! The light shines off the blonde hair that hangs over one brown eye, which is lowered to stare at the floor. I quietly say “Hello, Tommy Joe. I’m sorry that I had to leave you here with the Toros.” Tommy brushes the hair off his forehead, tucking it behind his ear as he turns his eyes towards mine. “I hope you like it here. Ray and Mikey are good people, I knew you would be safe here. See…” I slowly reach my hand in his direction, causing him to back up a bit. “…I’ve been fighting a war in the Dark realm where I am from. I swear, I only want what’s best for you…”

“You took me away from my parents. You turned me into a monster, and then you left. What makes you think I want anything to do with you?”

My mind supplies “Good question” as I struggle to find the right words. “You were destined to become a vampire, Tommy. I may have taken your human family from you, but I’ve given you so much more! A life of immortality!” When I continue to struggle with my words Mikey breaks in with “You now have Ray, and Gee, and myself! We love you; you are one of us. Tommy…” Mikey shoots me a panicked look before she says, “Show Damian what Ray did to you, Tommy.”

Hesitantly, Tommy cocks his head to the side, his hand pulling the collar of his shirt away from his neck. On the opposite side from where I bit him, Tommy shows me a set of fresh bite marks. In a soft voice, Tommy comments “He did this last night.”

Rage instantly takes over me. How fucking dare Ray bite my boy? What the fuck…

Mikey, seeing that I’m about to lose my temper, offers “Ray wanted Tommy to have the second set of bite marks to make him a member of the family. Ray shared his blood with Tommy, so Tommy now carries royal blood in his system. With two makers, Tommy will one day rule the Light realm, taking Ray’s place. Aren’t you proud of him, Damian?” Mikey levels me with a glare, causing me to take a step back from my rage for a moment. Tommy, on the other hand, looks at me as if he were caught with his hand in the cookie jar…

“That’s wonderful, Tommy. You are now a full-fledged member of the most powerful family in the cosmos! I’m proud of you!” Suddenly I feel as if I don’t make it out of the room immediately that I will lose it on everyone, so I gently take Tommy’s hand in mine. “I’m sorry, but I must go now. I will check in with you from time to time, to see how you are doing. If you need anything, tell Mikey and she will get you anything you need. I’m glad we finally got the chance to meet properly, Tommy.” I drop his hand and stand, turning towards Mikey and saying “Please walk me out, Mikes. I’d like a word with you before I say goodbye.” With a nod at Tommy, who looks sad that I’m leaving, I am aware of Mikey following me out the door of her home. The second we are outside I turn on her. “What the FUCK, Mikes?! You let Ray make Tommy a Toro? Are you crazy? You know that boy belongs to ME!” Mikey takes a step towards me, trying to calm me down with “Honey, this is a good thing! He has all of us, no one will be able to touch him with his family connections! The boy is safe and…”

“…a FUCKING TORO! You know that he really is a Lavelli!” Mikey gives me a scared look. “Damian, it doesn’t really matter what name he carries, he’s safe and sound just like you wanted him to be. All is well.” Placing a hand on my arm, Mikey softly says “You look tired, Dam. Why don’t you go back to the castle and take a rest? You can come visit us another day when you have more time.” Sensing that she realizes that I’m about to truly lose it on her, I spontaneously give her a kiss on the cheek. “Seriously, thank you for loving my boy. I will see you soon, Mikes.” With that, I take off for the Dark realm.

When the war drags on in a stalemate, the Ruby realm does the unthinkable. Rumors of werewolves have circulated through the centuries, but they have always lived on the outskirts of the cosmos, never within the realms populated by vampires. To this moment, I had never encountered one as far as I can recollect.

Early one evening I am sitting on my throne when a group of vamps run into the throne room screaming at the top of their lungs. “What the fuck has gotten into you? Is that any way to approach your King?” one of my guards yells as a young vamp approaches me. “Master, werewolves are attacking the village! Our weapons are having no effect on them! Please help us!”

In my ear, I hear Mikey’s shrill voice. “Werewolves, Dam! They are everywhere! How do we fight them?” I think back to a rumor that I heard once a long time ago. I address both the boy and Mikey by saying “Silver, that’s how to fight them.” I turn to my closest guard. “Send word to use only silver, either bullets or knives. That is the only thing that will kill them.” I stand, heading to the vault at the end of the room. Once I have it open, I use magick to turn our supply of silver coins into bullets. “Take these with you, more will be on the way soon.”

The next four years are the bloodiest that the Dark realm has ever seen. I devote all my time to killing werewolves, either on my realm or the Light realm, which has been infested with them. For some reason, they have decided to leave Andros’ realm alone, so Andros spends most of his time searching out silver deposits for Ray and I to turn into weapons. The Dark realm receives the brunt of the invasion, having to fight both enemy vamps and weres at the same time.

Mikey helps keep both the Dark and Light realms viable by constantly purchasing humans for us. Unfortunately, weres feed off humans the same way we do, so the supply of humans is always on the brink of running out.

I miss my Tommy Joe. Mikey and Ray, after much debate with me, end up sending Tommy and Gee to live with Andros in his realm. When I manage to sleep, I dream of my boy, of ravishing him, holding him under me while I take him. Damn this fucking war! I want to finally be able to touch my boy…

The Light realm finally manages to turn around their part of the battle with the weres, gaining the upper hand. Concentration camps for weres are created— females, the young and infirm of their ranks easily captured. Silver wiring keeps them in place, while guards walk among them with silver bullets in their guns.

My realm, which suffers worse attacks than the Light realm, is different. Hand to hand combat takes place in the countryside, with me leading the army in attack after attack against our enemy. Unfortunately, we cannot seem to gain a footing against them the way they did in the Light realm.

At one point in the war, I am bitten by a were in the middle of battle. Even though I can stop the bleeding, I end up with a raging fever. I place the army in the hands of my generals and head for the castle. “Mikey, I need you. Please come here! I’ve been bitten…”

Mikey arrives shortly after I have taken to my bed and stays with me overnight. I suffer from fever dreams, dreaming that I lose my Tommy Joe over and over to the enemy. When I finally awaken the next day, she is sitting next to me on the bed, concern on her face. “Dam! I’m so glad you are awake! You are the first vamp to be bitten by a were and survive! I thought I lost you…”

“Mikey, I feel…off.” Sweat breaks out on my skin. Suddenly I throw back my head and howl, my skin feeling as if wants to break open to expose my insides. I look down to see my arms turning a dark shade of grey, feel my vampire vision sharpen, feel my eyes turn black and watch the nails on my fingertips grow. What the fuck is happening to me?

I rise off of the bed, another howl breaking through the air as I jump out my bedroom window, my footsteps taking me towards the center of town. Mikey follows me, but at a more sedate pace, as if afraid I will turn on her without provocation.

My senses become heightened, the desire to destroy everything in front of me is all consuming. I feel my hair grow until it flows down to my waist, feel my face change, becoming leathery. My nose grows into a snout, and I feel a tail begin to grow behind me.

I am no longer just a vampire. I am now a combination of both species.

I wave Mikey back when I approach the werewolf encampment, making my way to the General’s tent. I barge in unannounced, stopping to watch the general morph into a were as soon as he sees me.

Using telepathy, I bark out “Stand down, General. I’m in charge here.” I tell him who I am, and what transpired since I was bitten by one of his own. “I outrank you, and all of your weres. I am the combination of both species, and I can make an army just like me with ease. Gather your troops and leave this and the Light realm tonight, or I will wreak havoc on your numbers. Go!” Looking surprised, the General tries to make a move against me, to no avail. I easily maim him, my claws carving a path across his chest. “NOW, General! Before I destroy you and yours!”

I watch the General give out orders for an immediate evacuation of both realms. Only then do I leave him, heading back to Mikey, who seems wary as I make my way over to her. Once in front of her, I close my eyes and slowly go through the process of becoming a vampire again.

“Dam? Are you…okay?” I laugh at Mikey’s hesitant question. “How can I be okay, Mikey? I’m now half vampire and half were! What the fuck do I do now!?” Mikey reaches out and takes my hand, walking by my side back to the castle. “We will find a way to make this right, I promise, Dam. There has to be someone out there with enough magickal talent to turn you back.”

I blurt out “I want to see Tommy again, Mikes. I want to try to make things right with us. I hate seeing him so scared of me…” Mikey squeezes my hand. “You will see him soon enough, now that the weres are headed back to their realms. But there may be good that comes out of this in the end, Dam. Being both means that you alone can conduct the peace treaty between the weres and us vamps. I’m sure that Ray and Andros would gladly help with the negotiations.”

It takes three days for the weres to return home. Ray informs the head were General in the Light realm that, as safekeeping, the weres would stay in the concentration camps until a peace settlement could be reached. Ray sets up a meeting with our enemy to hash out the peace agreement.

Tommy and Gee return home. Mikes, even more afraid of my temper than before (since she’s now afraid I might accidently transform into a wolf in a fit of rage) insists that I stay away from Tommy.

“Mikey, I’ll be fine! I promise that I will immediately leave if I feel myself start to lose my temper. I can’t stand being apart from him! I need to talk to him, assure him that I care about him. The poor boy has been through enough!” Mikey sighs and gives in, if only to shut me up on the subject. “I mean it, Dam. The second I see you start to lose it; I am yanking you out of there.” I agree, my pulse jumping at the thought of seeing my bride.

When we enter Mikey’s house, she calls to Tommy “Sweetheart, I’m home. Damian is here to see you.”

Tommy remains upstairs, ignoring Mikey’s call.

I start to pace the floor, trying to vent off my frustration. Mikey tries again, but Tommy remains upstairs out of sight.

Ignoring Mikey’s demand to stay downstairs, I take the steps two at a time, in search of my boy. I pass empty room after empty room, till at last I end up at a room at the end of the hall.

The door is shut.

I open the door slowly. There, on the bed, is my Tommy. He is clutching his pillow in his arms. He is upright, his back against the headboard of his bed. The blue of his tee shirt makes his eyes stand out, his hair gleaming in the glow of the bedroom lights. He looks scared, like a frightened doe.

“Hello Tommy Joe. I came to visit you.” Tommy shrinks even further against the headboard, his hands shaking. “I’m sorry that you are so scared of me. I promise you, there is nothing to be afraid of. I just want to talk.” I come to a stop next to the bed, fighting the desire to sit down next to him. Turning my attention across the room, I notice his gaming console. “Do you play?” I ask, my head tilted to the side. Tommy nods once, his grip tightening on the pillow. “I’ve always wanted to learn how to play. Can you show me how?” This seems to take Tommy by surprise. “You…” he swallows, as if confused. “…want me to teach you how to play. Really?” I nod in answer.

It takes some convincing, but Tommy finally agrees to teach me how to play a video game. He sits down in his recliner, while I take another chair and sit it down next to him. Tommy hands me a controller, pointing as he explains “These are your direction buttons. This button fires, and this button pauses the game. I’ll go first so you can watch what I do.”

Tommy plays for about ten minutes, then stops the game. “Okay, let’s start over. You are player one. Just keep an eye on the target and shoot.” I nod, leaning in my chair a little in his direction. I press the start button and begin.

It turns out that I’m pretty good at playing the game. Over time, Tommy becomes more talkative, even teasing me when I mess up. “You’re pretty good, Damian.” I thank him. “And thank you for teaching me. I will have to get one of these for home.” The mention of my home makes Tommy give me a wistful look. “When…” Tommy’s voice cuts off, making me prompt him to continue what he was going to say. “When…will you let me visit your home, Damian?”

I put down the controller and stare into Tommy’s eyes. “The war in my realm is almost over. The only thing left to do is create the peace treaty. But years of war has virtually destroyed my homeland. Humans are scarce, the countryside is destroyed, my castle severely damaged. It is going to take a while for things to return to normal.” Tears fill Tommy’s eyes. I reach out, placing my hand on his arm. “I promise, as soon as things are better, I will invite you to visit. In the meantime, it is safer for you to be here with Mikey and Ray. I hope you understand, Tommy.” Tommy takes a deep breath and sighs. “It always feels as if you hold me at arm’s length, Damian. Aren’t I supposed to be with you, learning from you, staying by your side? Why did you make me just to forget about me…”

I wrap my arm around him, pulling him against me. “Baby, I’m sorry that I cannot give you what you need, but trust that I have NEVER forgotten you!” Tommy sniffles, his head turned towards the wall. “You are my best boy, my only boy! I think of you all the time. If you were with me right now, you would be miserable, because I wouldn’t have time to spend with you. You would be bored and want to return here, where the family can fill your days. Trust me, Tommy Joe…” I reach out my free hand and cup his chin, turning it towards me. “…you’re better off here.”

Tommy sniffles, the back of his hand running over his face. He whispers “Ray wants me to learn the laws of this realm. He says that I will take his place when he finally turns to dust. I’m…” Tommy shrugs “…not sure if I want to be the next in line, or if I want to study law. I don’t know what I want.”

Fighting back frustration I tell him “You are young, you have many years to make up your mind. Do things at your own pace. Well…” I stretch my arms over my head “…I better get going. Thank you again for teaching me to play. Hopefully we can play again soon.” I pull Tommy into my arms for a moment, placing a kiss on his forehead. “If you need anything from me, have Mikey contact me. Bye, Tommy Joe.” Tommy says goodbye as I make my way out of his room and down the stairs.

Mikes meets me at the front door. “You’ve made him happy, I’m sure of it. You need to come back soon, he will be missing you. We all will.” I give a little snort. “I’m sure if he knew I’m half were he’d be scared to death. He cried when I told him he couldn’t visit me, Mikey. It almost broke my heart.” Mikey gives me a hug. “Then come visit him more often, Dam. You know you are always welcome.” I kiss Mikey passionately, not knowing that Tommy is standing at the top of the stairs, watching the two of us.

Chapter Text

Mikey and I try our hardest to find a shaman or magickal instructor who can help me with my werewolf issue. The problem? I destroyed so many individuals in my quest to have the most magickal powers that there are few technicians of the craft alive left to help me!

The full moons are the worse of everything that I must endure. I’m forced to stay away from everyone, afraid to hurt Mikey or Tommy by an accidental change. Not only is it a fear of the unknown, but it’s also horribly isolating. I must leave the kingdom in Alexandre’s capable hands so I can travel as far away from people as possible. Once I chose a location, I undress and let the transformation take over me, staying in wolf form until the full moon is over.

Finally, I find a magickal practitioner who gives me a spell to keep from having accidental transformations. While this doesn’t help much, at least it gives me some peace of mind that I won’t change on my loved ones. “You are now limited only to the full moon. That is the best I can give you.” Better than nothing, I guess…I’ll just have to continue to deal with the transitions when each full moon arrives.

The next time I see Tommy, he asks the ultimate question:

“Are you in love with my mother?”

The question hangs in the air for a heartbeat. How to answer? Do I feign innocence, or simply tell the truth?

Tommy drops his controller in his lap and turns to face me, his eyes accusatory. “I’ve seen the two of you kissing, quite passionately, the same way Ray kisses Mikey. Do the two of you have a history or is this some fling that can destroy my family? Tell me the truth, Damian.” Tommy continues to stare me down, as if he is daring me to look away.

“Mikey loves Ray, Tommy, with all her heart. She and I were in love years ago, long before they got together. That’s something that Ray doesn’t know about, so please keep it between us. Yes, I still love her, but she doesn’t belong to me any longer. Regardless of the kisses you have seen, I love someone else instead.” When Tommy asks me who it is, I simply respond with “You.”

Tommy responds to my declaration with a snort and a smirk. “You, love ME?” When I nod in response, Tommy bursts out laughing. “You don’t love me, Damian. I’m your fledgling! You simply feel responsible for me…” I reach over and take Tommy’s hand in mine. “You are mistaken, Tommy. Yes, I am your maker, but it goes much deeper than that. I love you! You must believe me…” Tommy cuts me off with “If you truly loved me, you would confide in me, tell me the truth. Why do you lie about who you are, what you do? You should be closer to me than anyone, yet you keep your secrets and refuse to answer my questions, you refuse to let me be with you. What kind of love is that?” I shake my head in frustration. “There are things about me that you really shouldn’t know, Tommy. You would hate me if you knew the truth. It’s better that things stay this way between us…”

Tommy throws his controller against the wall, quickly standing to move across the room to face me. “So, this is how it’s going to be, Dam? You give me half-truths, or no truth at all? If that is the case, why are you here? Maybe it would be better if you just stayed away…” I stand, reaching out for Tommy, who sidesteps my movements. “Just go, Damian! Just leave me be, stay away and let me live my undead life without you around. The last thing I need in my life is you.” Tommy yanks open the door, his footsteps clamoring as he runs out down the steps and out the front door past Mikey, running as fast as he can. When I get to the bottom step, Mikey grabs my arm. “Let him go, Dam. Obviously, you’ve upset him horribly this time. Give him some space, let him cool down. You have plenty of time to make up with him.”

I begin to pace the entryway. “You don’t understand, Mikey! I love him SO much, much more than you realize! How do I make him understand that there are things that I can NEVER share with him? I took a chance and told him about us…” Mikey cuts me off with “WHAT? YOU TOLD HIM ABOUT US?” I turn to her, placing my hands on her arms. “Mikey, he saw me kiss you! I had to tell him something, so I told him that in the past the two of us had a relationship, and that Ray doesn’t know about it. I’m sure he will keep our secret; he wouldn’t want to hurt Ray by telling him. I told him that, while you and I were in the past, I had someone else that I loved—him. He didn’t take that well, as you can tell by the way he ran out of here!” Tears fill my eyes as I give Mikey an imploring look. “How do I make him understand that I love him, Mikes? How do I…” My words are choked off as Ray walks in the front door. I hasten to wipe the tears off my face before turning to greet him. “Hello, Ray. Hope you don’t mind that I stopped by.” Ray walks up to Mikey and, leaning down, gives her a passionate kiss before answering “Of course not, Damian! You must stay for supper. It will be nice to be able to spend time together without a war getting in the way!”

I spend the evening with Ray and Mikey, but Tommy does not return home. When I comment on this, Ray gives a chuckle. “That boy is a free spirit! He does as he pleases. There are times when we do not hear from him for days. Mikey and I decided to give him his freedom, to not ask too many questions for fear of chasing him away. I’ve never met a vampire so skittish before! I would love to find his maker and strangle him for warping that boy so badly! I’m afraid he will never be the same…” Mikey gives me a frightened look when I begin to respond “Uh, Ray…”

It feels as if the entire world stands still when Ray gives me an inquiring look in response to the statement I start. With my heart in my throat and tears returning to my eyes, I stutter out “I…I am…Tommy’s…maker.”

The next thing I know, I am lying on my back on the floor, huge fists connecting over and over with my face. Over Ray’s shoulder I see Mikey desperately lean down and grab at Ray’s arms, trying her hardest to pull him away from me but failing. I raise my arms to try to cover my face to no avail.

“Stop it, Ray! Leave him to explain…RAY!” Mikey swings back her arm and hits Ray hard in the back of the head, finally causing him to stop to turn to her with a look of shock on his face. “You hit me! Why did you hit me?” Mikey gives Ray a wry smile. “To stop you! You wouldn’t listen to me, so I had to do SOMETHING!”

Ray stands up, his blood covered hands reaching down and grabbing my shoulders, pulling me upright and depositing me on a chair that is facing the couch. It is then that I realize that I am bleeding from many different cuts on my face and neck. Ray and Mikey sit down on the couch facing me as Ray nonchalantly says “Fine, Mikey, I’ll simply ask the question to get my answers. So, Damian…” Ray glares at me as his voice turns to ice. “…what the fuck caused you to turn Tommy, only to abandon him?”

I look towards Mikey with a defeated look. “It’s…not just that, Ray. I might as well come clean about everything.” Mikey’s eyes widen in fear at this comment, but I continue with “I’m sorry to say this, but I have been deceiving you for a long time, Ray. You see…” Ray raises an eyebrow, impatiently waiting for me to get on with it. “…Alexandre isn’t the King of the Dark realm. He was only posing as the king as a favor to me. In fact, you have never met the real king until today.” Mikey gives me a relieved look that this is the subject that I wished to admit to, instead of our longstanding romance. “I am the real King of the Dark realm.”

I go on to explain how I conceived a glamour to hide the truth from Ray. “You see, your father wanted someone weak to be king of the Dark realm, someone he could keep in line. I had been king for a long time prior to your father taking over, and I wasn’t about to let my realm be destroyed. So, I asked Alexandre to be the front for the position, while I was the one behind the scenes pulling the strings. I even invented the glamour to keep my secret. You see, I am a warlock, Ray. I have many powers, most of them evil. But that does not mean that I would use them against you, or your realm.”

Ray takes a few seconds to digest what I tell him, then he asks “But why did you continue to keep the charade up when I took over as King of the Light realm? You simply could’ve told me the truth, I would’ve understood. My father was a tyrant, he treated everyone like shit, especially you in the place of Alexandre. Wait…” Ray’s eyes practically bug out of his head as he says “…we fought a war against YOU? YOU led the Dark realm army? YOU were behind everything???”

“Yes, Ray, it was me. You faced ME on the battlefield, not Alexandre. It was ME that you stood next to in Council chambers when those assholes voted for war. And it was me that you worked with to create a peace treaty.”

“I’m still confused. WHY didn’t YOU tell ME?” Ray’s frustration levels are now spiking out of control, so I think to myself that I better come up with an answer fast… “The only answer that I can give you is that I was afraid that if you found out that I had lied to your father, you would lose trust in me, the same way you are doing now. I must admit, in the beginning I became your friend solely to get the information I needed to take over the Light realm. But over time, you became a true friend to me, someone who I value highly and have grown to love. I value our friendship way too much to let anything get in the way of it. I pray that you find it in your heart to forgive me.”

Without giving away his thoughts on my apology, Ray continues with “And what about poor TJ? How in the fuck could just turn him and leave him with us? The boy needs his maker!”

“Simple, at least to my mind. I saw Tommy on a distant realm, and I knew instantly that I had to have him, that I had to turn him. You can blame the evil in me for my possessive nature. I guess you can say that I wasn’t in my right mind, I didn’t think beyond making him mine, and I made a rash decision. When the opportunity presented itself, I turned him—but there in itself remained one problem—where to take him so he would be safe? We were in the middle of that war, and the Dark realm was basically destroyed, with no form of safety to be had for the boy. My castle was constantly besieged by the enemy, and the countryside was overrun by weres. As fledgling to the King, Tommy would’ve been a target. Once I realized what I had done, I immediately thought of the two of you, and the wonderful job that you’ve done with Gee. I knew that there was no place I would rather him be then here. I knew that you would give him the clarity, the lessons that I could not give him in the condition I was in. And I was right, you HAVE done an amazing job with him, even going as far as making him a Toro.”

Ray is silent for a few minutes before quietly asking “Does this mean that you wish to take him away from us, to have him live in the Dark realm with you?” I hear the underlying fear that hides within this question. I know that Ray and Mikey have, in a short amount of time, become close with the boy, and I’m sure that Ray is afraid to lose him.

“No Ray, I have no intention of taking him away from the two of you. You have created a home here for him, one that I could never hope to give him in the Dark realm. I do recognize that being here is best for him.”

“Today Ray I told Tommy that I loved him, and he ran away from me. I think it would be best for all of us if I backtrack on my words, instead simply try to be a maker and a friend to him. The boy will never love me, not the way I want him to. I guess I will just have to love him from afar.” Both Ray and Mikey give me a sad look at this statement, Mikey taking Ray’s hand in hers. I can guess the two of them are thinking about what life would be like without the other.

“Dam, I’m…devastated by your admissions. I thought our friendship meant more to you than this. While I understand why you deceived my father, I still cannot understand why you did not tell me the truth about everything. I love you like a brother; I would’ve understood. Hell, I would’ve LOVED to work closer with you, if I had only known the truth!” Tears fill my eyes as I stare at Ray, my heart truly broken. “Then I will leave you, never to return. All of you would be better off…”

Mikey suddenly stands, crossing the room to sit next to me. “You’ll do NO SUCH THING!” When I move to go, Mikey grabs my arms. “The last thing that Tommy needs is for you to completely turn your back on the boy! He may not know it, but he needs you more than he admits to. And as for Ray…” Mikey turns to Ray, giving him a loving smile. “…he will get over this, given time. He’s right, he loves you. The two of you just need space to heal, and all will be well.” When I look into Ray’s eyes, I see uncertainty and sadness. Time to leave…

“I will return to the Dark realm now, to give you both a chance to recover from tonight’s events. Know that I love the two of you very much. There are many things that I regret doing and hurting the three of you ranks right up there at the top. I can only pray that all three of you can someday forgive me.” I kiss Mikey’s cheek before standing, making my way across the room to stand in front of Ray. When he does not raise his head to look at me, I lean down and kiss Ray on the cheek, then disappear.

Mikey comes to visit me three days later. When I ask how things are, she rolls her eyes at me. “Tommy is acting like a spoiled brat, refusing to listen to Ray, who is trying to get him to accompany Ray to Council meetings with him. He instead spends all his time playing video games, speaking to no one. I’ve tried to get him to speak to me, but he only politely asks me to leave him alone. And Ray?” A feeling of dread descends on me as Mikey shakes her head. “Knowing how much he loves you, I thought that he would have come around by now. But I guess the hurt is deeper than you or I realized.” I sigh, pacing my suite. “Would it help if I were to talk to him, Mikey?” Mikey shakes her head. “Give him more time, Dam. He is a man pure of heart. It isn’t in him to see evil in anyone, especially those closest to him. More than anything, he is wounded that you kept the truth from him. He will come around, given time.” I turn on Mikey, my eyes wild. “You know that waiting is impossible for me, regardless of the situation! Maybe if I…” Mikes grabs my arms, forcing me to look deep into her eyes. “Trust me on this, Dam! He needs time! If you rush in there now, he will only get his back up once again. I’m his wife, I know what I’m talking about. By the way…” Mikey gives me a ghost of a smile. “…thank you for not telling him the truth about us, Dam. I’m sure if he knew the truth it would destroy him. I plan to keep that forever from him…”

“Of course, Mikes. As much as I love you, I could never hurt Ray that way, by telling him the truth. That is one lie that I plan to take to my grave…” Realization takes over me, forcing me to ask “Is my evilness the real issue with Ray? Because if that is the case, he will never forgive me.”

Mikey wraps her arms around me. “Babes, Ray takes people as they are. You have been nothing but kind and loving to him. Don’t worry about it, I’m sure that all will be well…”

Later that afternoon, I receive a letter from the Light realm. It is a formal request for a meeting with their king. I agree to the meeting, dread in my stomach. What could this possibly mean?

When I arrive at the Light realm Council house, all the lights are off except for the ones in Ray’s office. Knocking on the door, I enter to find Ray lost in a pile of paperwork. In an imperious voice Ray coldly says, “Come in, I’ll be right with you.”

Looking around the room, I see a scribe sitting in the corner, his eyes wide at the sight of me. I give him a small smile and he returns it, until Ray turns his gaze on the poor boy, glaring at him.

“Thank you for coming Damian. I believe it’s time that we set our peace treaty in stone, don’t you?” I give Ray a concerned look. “I thought we were over that, Ray. We have a peace treaty, one that I plan to honor.” Ray shakes his head in response. “That was verbal, since I thought I knew the ruler of the Dark realm well. You are a stranger to me, and I am not sure what your true motives are. We will review the treaty, ensuring that it is fair to both sides.”

I shake my head, a grim look on my face. “Ray, you know me! I have been nothing but fair in my dealings with the Light realm, and with you! THIS is what I was afraid of, that you never would be able to trust me again!” I move to stand in front of Ray’s desk, my hands extended towards him. “Nothing in my dealings with this realm will EVER change, Ray! I don’t want war, I want PEACE! I want the two realms to exist peacefully together forever! If you believe nothing else, please believe that!”

Ray looks at me for a moment, his face contemplative. When he finally speaks, he asks in awe “How are you EVIL, Damian? The man I thought I knew is nothing but good, kind, loving. I look at you and I cannot fathom you a monster. How can evil be so good?”

I place my hands on my hips and answer “Because I am neither all good nor all evil, Ray. I’m a combination of both. To you and Andros, I only want to show my good side. To the rest of the cosmos, I’m as bad as it comes. No one messes with me.” I take a deep breath before conceding “Come, let’s put our peace treaty in more concrete terms, to make you happy, Ray. I just want to give you peace of mind.”

Two hours later I stand to leave. “I would appreciate it if you can send me a formal printed version, Ray. I will share it with my subjects, give them the same peace of mind that your Council will feel when they read what we have created. Thank you for inviting me to meet with you.” When I stand, Ray reaches out a hand towards me. “Damian…” I give him a blank look, waiting. “…I want to make sure that you know that you are still welcome at my house, to spend time with Tommy. I know he is missing you very much. Please, why don’t you head over there now, speak with the boy? I’m sure he would enjoy it.” I nod in response. “I will do as you suggest, Ray. Thank you.” I blink and head off to Ray’s house, feeling even further away from Ray than when I first arrived for the meeting.

When I arrive at Ray’s, I hear Mikey and Tommy arguing as Gee lets me into the house. “I’m glad you’re here, Damian! They have been going at it for an hour now!” I thank Gee and make my way up the stairs, stopping in the doorway behind Mikey. “I don’t want to talk about this anymore, Mikey!” In response I blurt out “Then talk to me, Tommy. I’m the one you’re mad at anyways.”

Mikey turns to me, a look of surprise on her face. “I’ll just…” She brushes past me as she leaves the room, leaving me to face my fledgling.

“Save it, Damian. You’re the last person I want to deal with tonight…” I give the boy a sneer. “Well tough shit, Thomas! I’m going to speak, and you are going to grow the fuck up and listen to me!” The response I get is a shocked face as Tommy opens his mouth to speak. “I said SHUT IT! You have done nothing but throw temper tantrums since I changed you, and it’s time you act like an ADULT! You’re a vampire, like it or not, and you are going to have to deal with it!” I move forward until I am standing at the foot of Tommy’s bed, looming over him in much the same way that I did the night I changed him. “I fell in love with a penniless farm boy. I wanted to give him the cosmos, give him the love that he lacked from his parents. I wanted to give him everything, even though I am the least prepared vamp in all the realms to offer such luxuries. I thought with my heart, not my head, promising what I could not give. My heart was in the right place, no matter what you think. I wanted to give, but only managed to take. In the end, I’ve given you more than you could ever hope for, even if it comes with the stipulation that you cannot have me as you wish. I love you, Tommy Joe, with all my heart. But as you will never be able to return my love, I will simply be content in knowing that I have given you my heart, seeking nothing in return. We will go on as if nothing has changed, that I didn’t open my fat mouth and told you the truth. Let’s just suffice it to say that we can be maker and fledgling, friends instead of lovers, until the end of time.”

Tommy gives me a lost look as he says “So…you DON’T love me? I’m so confused, Damian. What do you really want?” I sit down on the edge of his bed, my hand reaching out until it touches his arm. “I want nothing more than to love you, Tommy. I know that you do not love me the way I love you. You are dearer to me than you know. But let’s just leave it at that, for both our sakes. The last thing I want to do is lose you because you have no feelings for me.”

Tommy bites his bottom lip before softly replying “I do not love you, Damian. I love you as my maker, nothing else.” I feel a quick stab to my chest, as if Tommy just stabbed me with a knife. “As far as where I am to live from now on, I take it that I will stay here, with Ray and Mikey?” I nod. “If you would like to visit my realm, I will gladly take you there now that the repairs to my castle are finished. I would love to introduce you to everyone, give you a tour of the countryside. But you have found a family here with Ray and Mikey, who love you very much. It would kill them to take you away from them. Instead, I will continue to visit you here.”

Tommy surprises me by moving forward on the bed, coming to a stop in my arms, his head on my chest. Tears fill my eyes when the thought crosses my mind that this is the only form of affection that will pass between us. I pull Tommy closer, my hand resting on the back of his head, my hand playing gently with his blonde strands of hair. I hear a contented sigh escape from Tommy, feel the tension in his body start to lessen…

“Come with me, Tommy. I’ll take you to my home.” Tommy pulls back in surprise. “Here, now? Are you sure…”? I nod once, a smile on my face. “I’ll go tell Mikey that you are going with me. I’m sure she won’t mind…” I quickly stand, walking downstairs to find Mikey sitting in her office. “Mikes, I’m going to take Tommy to visit the Dark realm. I promise to take good care of him.” Mikes gives me a bright smile. “I’m sure he will love it, Dam. See you when you return.”

When I reenter Tommy’s room, I hold my hand out to him. “Come, hold my hand. We will be there shortly.” As soon as Tommy clasps my hand I blink, taking us to the throne room in the Dark realm. “WOW!” Tommy exclaims, his neck craning to take in all the murals on the walls. When his attention is finally drawn to my throne, he ascends the stairs, turning to sit on down on it. “Like my throne, Tommy?” Tommy runs his hands over the arms of the chair, his fingers tracing the bones and leather. “It’s fantastic, Damian! It’s hard to believe that this belongs to you!” I laugh loudly. “You haven’t seen anything yet!” I exclaim, holding out my hand to him. Tommy takes it, a smile on his face as we set off to give him a tour of castle and the countryside.

When we return, we find ourselves in Mikey’s office. I offer Tommy a glass of blood, which he gladly takes. “This is sweeter than the blood in the Light realm! It’s delicious!” I inform him that our humans are kept on a special diet, which accounts for the sweetness. “You can only get this type of blood on my realm, Tommy. I’m glad you enjoy it.”

Tommy wanders to stand next to a bookshelf full of grimoires. “What are these, Damian?” I stand, making my way to his side. “These are grimoires, Tommy. Magick books full of spells.” Tommy looks up at me, his face full of innocence. “Are you a warlock, Damian?” I nod in answer, smiling when Tommy gasps as a rose suddenly appears in his hand. With a devious look on my face, I look towards the window, which opens to the night air. I take Tommy’s empty hand and the two of us are pulled out the window by invisible hands, the two of us floating through the air as if on a flying carpet. Tommy clings to me even tighter as laughter erupts from him, his eyes wide. We float over the countryside for a while before I gently return us to the room, the window closing shut behind us.

“That was fun, Damian! What else can you do?” I give Tommy a serious look as I answer “All things good and evil, my dear Thomas. I could make time stand still, float the castle in the air, kill a man with a single thought. I could make you fall in love with me if I wished.” When Tommy gives me a panicked look, I give him a gentle smile and place a kiss to his cheek. “No worries, dear. I would never do that to you.”

Tommy stays until dawn. It’s the first time that I see him happy since I turned him. As he is about to leave, he asks me a question. “Since you are King, does that make me your successor, since I am your fledgling?” I give Tommy a serious look, considering his question. “That’s an interesting question, Tommy. I haven’t chosen a successor to my throne yet. You, having been sired by evil, would make a prime candidate for the position. But I know that Ray has his heart set on you taking over his position in the Light realm. How do you feel about his training you?” Tommy sighs. “So much drama, so many laws and rules. Ray will not admit it, but his Council is the ones that really rule the Light realm, not him. Ray is more of a figure head. I’m not sure if I want to have to deal with that kind of mess. It seems as if here, you are the one really in charge.” I nod in agreement. “Yes, I do not have anyone to account for, I make my own rules and laws. It comes with its own challenges. But Ray is afraid that the Council will take over, that there will never again be a real leader in the Light realm. That is why he made you his heir. You come from royal blood; they must listen to you. His blood evens out my evil blood, there is nothing but good in you. It makes sense for you to follow in Ray’s footsteps.” Tommy sighs, brushing his hair back with his hand. “I guess. It’s not what I want though.” I take Tommy’s hand in mine, squeeze it tightly before letting go. “Just give it a chance, see what happens. You have many, many years ahead of you to worry about such things. You are loved by all of us, Tommy Joe—never forget it.”

I return Tommy to Ray’s house. When I turn to go, Tommy gives me a hug. “Thank you so much for everything, Damian! I truly enjoyed the trip to your home. I hope I can visit again in the future.” I nod, returning the hug before making my way to the door. “I’m glad you came to visit, Tommy. I’ll see you again soon.”

When I find Mikey in the living room, I fill her in on Tommy’s visit. “He really was impressed with everything. He wants to come visit again.” Mikey claps her hands in glee. “I KNEW he would enjoy himself, would love to spend time with you! I’m so glad that you took him with you! Maybe this is the start of a better relationship between the two of you!” I smile at Mikey’s enthusiasm. “Let’s hope so, Mikes. The last thing I want to do is lose him from my life.”

A month later I am sitting on my throne wrestling with a state issue when one of my guards approaches me. “My King, there is an old Gypsy woman here to see you. She said that she can help you with your ‘issue.’ Shall we let her in?” I think for a moment—is she referring to my werewolf problem? I think to myself “Might as well give it a try” and then tell my guard “I’ll see her, send her in.” The guard bows to me and then leaves the room.

An old woman slowly enters the throne room, her steps slow and her back bent over from years of hard labor. As she approaches me, she unwraps a shawl from around her body. It’s then that I notice that scars cover her arms and legs. When she gets close to me, I see a branding mark on her inner right arm.

The Gypsy woman is a slave from the Crystal realm.

“Good evening, young King. I come to make you an offer that you cannot refuse.” The woman levels me with a sharp stare, missing none of the emotions that cross my face. “Come now, my King! Aren’t you the least bit curious as to what I can offer that would be so important to you?”

I brush my hair out of my eyes before asking “What could an old Gypsy woman like yourself have to offer me?” In response to my question, the woman gives me a crooked smile, showing her cracked and broken teeth. “You would be surprised, young one! I understand that you suffer from a werevamp curse, one that has made your life a living hell. I’m sure that you would do almost anything to get over this curse, true? Well, I can help you, young King…for a price.”

I give the old woman my best smile. “And what could you possibly wish in return, madam?” The old woman laughs before responding “Oh, just a few of those years that you hold in abundance, young one. You see, my beloved granddaughter was attacked by a werewolf the other day. As we speak, she lays dying in my home. The wolf cursed her with death, there is nothing I can do to heal her. You, as a vampire, hold immortality in your hands. I will make you a trade—years of life for my granddaughter, and in exchange, I will suppress your werewolf side forever. What say you, young King?”

What DO I say to this exchange? The old woman is right, I have many years to spare, years that I won’t miss in the grand scheme of things. And if this woman can manage to suppress my curse, isn’t it a win for both of us?

“What guarantees do I have regarding your abilities? Everyone has some small degree of magick in them, how do I know that yours is strong enough to hold back my curse?” The old woman smiles at me, walking up the stairs to my throne until she is standing directly in front of me. Taking my hand in hers, she zaps me with a charge of power equal to Mikey’s abilities. “Does this impress you, King?” I nod my head, returning her smile. “Then let’s go to your granddaughter, old woman. Let the exchange begin…”

Seconds later I am standing in an old hovel, the walls are made from old boards. Sand is everywhere, blowing in the wind between the cracks in the outer walls. The woman leads me to a small back room to where a young woman lies shivering under covers on a narrow bed. Without thinking I comment “With your powers, why don’t you create a better home, old woman?” The response is something that surprises me. “We are slaves, King. To attempt to better ourselves would lead to our deaths. We simply take what we are given and are glad of it.”

“It’s a shame that I do not rule this kingdom. You would have your freedom.” The old woman wrinkles her nose at me. “In your kingdom there are human slaves. What is the difference?” Excellent question indeed…

The young woman opens fevered eyes. “Grandmother, who is this?” The old woman hushed her granddaughter. “King Lavelli will make you well, my darling child.” I nod at the old woman, who takes my hand and places it on top of the young woman’s hand. As the old woman mumbles strings of sentences together, I see a path of light travel from my hand into the young woman’s hand. I feel slightly drained, as if the very life is being drained from me—which it is. It seems to go on forever until suddenly the old woman stops, removing my hand. “There. I gave her sixty long years in which to live, thanks to you, young man. Now to give you what you long for.” The old woman places her hand on my forehead, whispering words in old world Romani. A few minutes goes by before a bolt of energy flows from her hand into my forehead. I cannot explain what it feels like, but a feeling of…euphoria…takes over me, a feeling of peace that I have never known before. It feels as if it goes on and on, captivating me in its thrall.

Suddenly the energy dissipates, leaving me feel temporarily bereft. As the Gypsy woman pulls her hand away, she gives me a sharp glance as she comments “It will happen. She will carry your children.”

I shake my head, trying to clear my thoughts. “Excuse me, what?” I ask, confused. The old woman gives me a small smile. “The one you love. She will give you children. She will love you.” SHE? “Whom do you mean, SHE?” I ask even more confused. “Mikey cannot give me children…” The woman cuts me off by saying “No, your fledgling. The he you know now is really a she. She will give you children when you least expect it. She will love you. The two of your fates are intertwined. You are soul mates.” I blurt out “But we are not a couple…” The old woman laughs loudly at my confusion. “She loves you; she just doesn’t know it yet. It will take many years for her to admit this simple truth to you. Believe in this prophecy.”

The next thing I know I am sitting on my throne, my head spinning. Tommy will love me. Tommy will have my children. How can this be possible…”?

A flash of light blinds me for a moment. When I can see, Ray and Mikey are standing in front of me. There is a sad look on Mikey’s face. “Damian, I brought Ray with me, he wishes to tell you something.” I turn from Mikey’s tear-stained face to Ray’s set-in stone expression, and a feeling of dread fills my body.

“Well Ray, what is it you would like to tell me?” Ray glares at me, his voice harsh as he says “I’ve made a decision regarding our relationship, Damian. You are welcome at my house to see Tommy, but I never want to see you again, unless it is on official business regarding our realms. I think it is best that we dissolve our relationship, effective immediately.” Mikey sniffles, a hand wiping her face as she says “I’ve tried to make him see reason, but he refuses to see things my way. I’m sorry that it must come down to this between the two of you, I really am. I love you both.”

Tears fill my eyes. I take a few steps towards Ray, coming to a stop a few inches away from him. “Please Ray, we can fix this. Please do not turn away from our friendship, don’t deny the love we have for each other. I promise you that we can rebuild the trust that we have lost if you only give it time. You will see that in the end, the only thing that matters to me is to be in your esteem, to have that love between us again. Please, Ray…” I stare deep into Ray’s sad eyes. “…please say you will give us another chance!”

Ray gives me a long look, then glances at Mikey. “I’ve come here to say all I wanted to say, Damian. Our relationship is over.” Ray looks at Mikey and says, “Take me home, honey.” Mikey gives me a sad glance, tears still streaming as she blinks her eyes and the two disappear.

Chapter Text

Ray’s refusal to speak to me slowly begins to cause stress in his home. Mikey shows up one day in tears.

“He’s being SO unreasonable!” She throws her hands up as she practically falls into a seat across from me. “I had to sneak out of my own house as if I were a common thief! He interrogated me, asking where I was going and what I was doing. I lost my temper and told him that I was coming to see you, and he told me that if I did, he would divorce me! Can you imagine it? Ray, divorcing me over such a small thing as seeing you? I told him that I was coming here, and he can pack my bags for me while I am gone, because I refuse to live with a tyrant like him! I hope he takes me up on my word.”

I lean forward, brushing my hair out of my eyes as I exclaim “Mikey! You cannot…you need to go home right now! I refuse to be responsible for your marriage dissolving!” Before I can say anything else, Mikey glares at me, a flash of the Dark realm Queen from her past taking over her eyes and demeanor as she snarls out “NO ONE will tell ME where to go or what to do, Damian! Not YOU, not RAY…NO ONE!” I cannot help myself; I smirk at Mikey in response to her outburst. “There’s my Queen! I’ve missed her.” Despite herself, Mikey’s eyes light up with mischief. “Some things never change, Dam. I am one of them.”

I blow a kiss across the room towards Mikey before solemnly commenting “Truthfully, darling. The last thing I want is to come between you and Ray. I couldn’t live with myself if I thought…” Mikey cuts me off with a deep sigh. “I know, Dam, and I love you for it. Ray just needs to understand that I am his wife, not a possession that he owns and can tell what to do. He is stressing everyone out with his attitude. Gee spends most of his time away from home as to escape the mayhem, but Tommy has become even more of a recluse than usual. He fights with Ray constantly over everything from learning law to attending Council meetings at Ray’s side. Tommy blames Ray for all the upheaval in the house, and Ray fights back by calling Tommy a lazy, inconsiderate excuse of a vampire. No wonder Gee stays away! The stress is getting to all of us…”

“Can I help in some way?”

“Yes.” Mikey brushes the hair out of her eyes. “Simply stay away for a while. Or if you come to visit Tommy, transport directly into his room. If you show up unannounced right now it will only lead to more stress. I’m not saying stay away, just be careful how and when you arrive.” Mikey sighs dramatically and stands, both hands on her slim hips. “I guess I better head home and have it out with my husband. I’ll let you know how it all turns out.” I stand, taking Mikey in my arms and kissing her passionately. “I hope all works out, darling. If not, you can move in here with me.” Mikey gives me a smirk in response. “Oh, you would LOVE that, wouldn’t you, darling?” I return her smirk and Mikey laughs loudly, her arms encircling my waist. “I love you, Dam. See you soon.” Before I can tell her that I love her in return, she disappears.

MIKEY’S POV

The second I arrive back at my house I hear Tommy yelling. “Please back off! I told you, the last thing I want is to do is go to the Council house with you! I’m not meant to be the next in line!” I then hear Ray say “Yes, you are, Tommy Joe. You are royalty, you are meant to lead…”

I throw my head back and scream “RAYMOND! Get your ASS down here RIGHT NOW!” Instead, Ray goes right back to harassing poor Tommy. So, I yell up the stairs “Enjoy your visit with Damian, Tommy!”

Ray storms down the stairs, his eyes wide and his face red. “Mikey! What the FUCK did you just do, sending Tommy to Damian! Why…”

I cut Ray off with “SO I CAN SPEAK TO MY HUSBAND! IS THAT TOO MUCH TO ASK?” Ray stops in front of me, his afro bobbing as he shakes in frustration. “I have to be at the Council house for a meeting, Mikey. Can we do this some other time when both of us are calm?” I place both my hands on my hips, my shoulders practically touching my ears. “We talk now, or I move out, Ray. You’re choice.”

Ray sighs dramatically as he marches to the closest chair and sits down. “Well, let’s get on with it then” he exclaims, arms crossed.

“Ray, you are nothing but a tyrant. You storm around here expecting everyone to fall in line at your every word. Tommy and I are vampires, NOT possessions! We are to be spoken to civilly, not commanded by you! You are losing your family and you don’t even know it.”

“I don’t trust Damian! The last thing I want is for you and Tommy to be spending time with him!” Ray stands once again, pacing the room in long strides. “He will be the downfall of this family, not me!” Ray stops in front of me, nose to nose. “I love you, Mikey, but the last thing we need in our lives his HIM! Why can’t we just pretend that he doesn’t exist, why can’t things just go back to where we were before?”

“Because he is a part of our lives, he’s a huge part of Tommy’s life! Damian has never been anything but a loyal friend and family member to us all. Sure, he has made some mistakes, but who hasn’t? You know what?” I look deep into Ray’s eyes. “I think your jealous.”

“JEALOUS!? What kind of comment is THAT?” I can’t help myself; I bark out a laugh. “Not only did Damian beat you in war, but he managed to keep his identity from you. Face it, he beat you, and your ego cannot handle it. You’re worried that he’s the better man.”

A murderous rage takes over my husband. He places each hand on one of my arms and shakes me sharply. “That bastard! Not only did he deceive me, but he’s won you and Tommy over to his side!” A look of shock covers Ray’s face for a moment when he realizes that he has shaken me, and he lets go of me abruptly, causing me to fall backwards onto the couch. Taking a few steps back, he continues with “He’s taken my family from me, he’s lied about his identity, he’s ruined any chance of a working relationship with him going forward. And I’M the bad guy?” Ray shakes his head in disbelief. “I only want to protect my family from this demon.”

I quietly respond with “He’s not a demon, Ray. He’s a guy that got caught up in an unenviable situation, with no clear idea how to handle it. It’s because he CARES about you that he held back the truth from you! Because he knows how upstanding you are, how much you value honesty, that you wouldn’t be able to understand his situation. Darling, he loves YOU! He values your friendship. He isn’t trying to take Tommy and I away from you, he would rather the five of us build a family TOGETHER!” Ray laughs at this last statement. “How can I build a family with a lying bastard such as him?”

I shake my head in disappointment. “Then you are going to have to face the fact that Damian is a large part of mine and Tommy’s lives, Ray. If you can’t handle that, then the two of us will move to the Dark realm and live with Damian. Your call, Ray.” With that, I blinked and ended up in my old study in the Dark realm, where Tommy and Dam were having a glass of blood. They both nod at my arrival, the two of them in deep conversation.

“…he needs to back off, Damian! I’m not the next in line, I’m just ME! Why can’t Ray realize that I don’t want to be head of the realm someday…”

“Because, by making you, he chose YOU to be his successor, Tommy. He could’ve left you simply as my fledgling, but he saw greatness in you. He knows that you are meant for more than simply being a normal vamp. He made you royalty, and with royalty comes great responsibility. He trusts you to be able to carry on in his place when he is gone.” I give Dam a look of appreciation and love for his words.

“I…guess you’re right, Damian. I know that Ray loves me, that he wants what’s best for me and his realm. I just…” Tommy shrugs his shoulders, his head lowering “…don’t think I can do it!”

I laugh at Tommy’s comment. “Do you think I’ve never made a mistake as ruler of this realm, TJ? I’ve made plenty of mistakes, Mikey can attest to that.” I nod at Tommy. “But I get up each evening with the attitude that I will do the very best I can for my realm and the vamps that trust me to lead them. That’s all you can do too, Tommy…your very best.”

Tommy turns the conversation to my argument with Ray. “Did the two of you finally make up, Mikey? I hate when the two of you fight…” I shake my head in answer. “No, Tommy, I left before things became too heated. But I did threaten him with the two of us moving here with Dam if he doesn’t change his ways! I’m not sure that he believed my threat, but I meant it when I said it…”

Dam looks from Tommy to me, a sad look on his face. “Of course, if the two of you felt that you had to leave, you would be most welcome here with me. But for your sakes, and Ray’s, I hope it doesn’t come to that! I hope that everything settles down soon. I’m so sorry that I started this whole thing by telling the truth. I should’ve kept my big mouth shut…”

I walk over to Dam, wrapping my arms around him in a tight hug, which he returns immediately. “You did the right thing, telling Ray about everything. I’m just sorry that he is being so stubborn about all of this. I wish he would just listen to the two of us and…” I look over at Tommy, who is giving the two of us a bright smile. “…what, Tommy?”

Tommy shakes his head, his smile growing. “The two of you just look so right together. It’s a shame that your relationship didn’t work out. It’s easy to see that you two still love each other dearly. I’ve watched you try to hide it in the past when I was around, but you can’t, it’s still there for all the world to see. I’m surprised that Ray hasn’t noticed.”

I walk over to Tommy, wrapping my arms around him in a tight hug. “Thank you for keeping our secret, Tommy. It would destroy Ray is he knew that Dam and I had been lovers. No matter what you might think, I love Ray very much and have no desire to hurt him.” Tommy returns my hug, kissing me on the cheek then replies, “I promise to keep your secret, Mikey.”

The two of us pass a peaceful evening with Dam, telling tales of my and Dam’s relationship. Tommy snorted blood out of his nose when Dam told him of the mean-spirited pranks that we would pull on each other. “…so I removed the throne from under Mikey when she went to sit on it!” Tommy laughs loudly, his face covered in a huge grin as he comments “I would’ve loved to know the two of you back in those days! You would’ve been so much fun to watch…”

There is a knock at the door. When Dam calls out a greeting, a guard enters the room. “Sire, there is an old Gypsy woman here to see you. Should I send her away?” Dam looks from Tommy to me before answering. “No, bring her to me. I want to hear what she wants.”

Moments later, an old Gypsy woman enters the study, her back bent from years of hard work. Dam seems to know who she is when he asks “Well, what is it now? Is your granddaughter in need of more time?” The old woman shakes her head. “No, young King, my granddaughter is fine, thanks to you. I am here for another reason. For you, this time.” The woman walks over to Tommy, stopping inches from him. “Ah yes, the beloved. Multiple children I see, heartache, pain, and loneliness taken over by love and fulfillment. The end of the rainbow is brighter than the beginning.” The woman then walks over to me. “Ah, the Dark Queen!” She bows low in front of me, her eyes locking onto mine. “Many years of love and happiness, a large family coming to you. You are the glue that holds this family together. They will need you, yes, they will. You will triumph in the end. Keep the faith.” She finally turns back towards Damian. “Young King, disaster is headed your way. Someone you trust will betray you when you need them the most. Take heed, you will not recover easily from this betrayal. It will take you down a dark, dark path for many years to come. Those you love will suffer for it, in more ways than one.” The old woman’s gaze returns to Tommy for a moment. “Some may not even survive. Those who know you will no longer know you. You will spread horror in your wake, until love finds you again far down the road. Prepare for this dark time, for it will come before you know it.” I watch a shiver travel through Tommy’s body at this news.

“Is there anything else you can tell me regarding this betrayal?” Dam asks, concern crossing his face. Obviously, he believes this seer and her abilities.

“This person has betrayed you once before, has turned you against yourself. Beware those closest to you, this person knows exactly how to manipulate you. Harden your heart or face the consequences.”

Tommy slowly stands, walking over to Dam and takes his hands in a tight grip. Dam turns sad eyes to Tommy, who tries to smile at Dam to make things better. Suddenly it hit me—betrayal, close to Dam, has hurt him before…

The old woman is talking about me.

I am going to bring about Dam’s destruction. I will be the one to cause irreparable pain and agony to many lives. I will finally succeed in destroying the man that I fell in love with so many years ago. I will be to blame for it all, and according to this old woman, there is nothing I can do to stop it.
Looking at the interaction between Tommy and Dam, only one thought keeps circling through my brain—“How can you hurt this man again, the one whom you say you love so much?”

The old woman locks eyes with mine, and I see that she spoke the truth. She nods once, her expression fierce as she acknowledges my thoughts. The future already has been written, and there is nothing I can do but draw a shaky breath.

The old woman moves to stand in front of Dam, bowing low in front of him. In a shaky voice, he thanks her for coming to visit him, and for her warning. Dam’s eyes narrow as the old woman says “I can see that a part of you will not believe me, and you will leave your heart open to the betrayal. The future is yet to happen, yet it starts right now, in this moment. I wish you peace, young King.” With those words, the old woman disappears from the room.

As Tommy wraps Dam up in a tight hug, Dam’s eyes meet mine. It appears that we are thinking the same thing. Life as we know it is going to change soon enough, and none of us want it to happen. In a soft, broken voice Dam says “Let’s just take it a day at a time. I never want to lose you, nor be the reason for either of you to hate me. No matter what, you have my heart, always. Please remember that.”

Damian’s POV

Gee is the first to move out. He finds a house in the country, not far from Ray and Mikey. He uses the excuse that it’s time to spread his wings and try out independence, but everyone can see that he is just trying to escape the insanity of his current living condition. Ray and Mikey fight constantly, to the point that Mikey seriously considers divorce. Following in Gee’s footsteps, Tommy finds his own home, a mansion ten miles away from Gee’s. This breaks Mikey’s heart. It’s easy to see that Tommy is her favorite, and that living away from him is the last thing that she wants. But she understands why he is moving out, even though putting distance between himself and Ray won’t stop Ray’s constant harassment. Ray is constantly at Tommy’s new home, pushing Tommy to share in his work as King of the Light realm.

Tommy becomes a fierce killer. He amasses a huge amount of money from his victims, preferring to stalk the rich. The boy makes me proud. It’s nothing for Tommy to destroy an entire family in one sitting, or kidnap humans to serve as servants in his new home. Mikey complains about this new side of Tommy, preferring to think of him as the lost little boy that she first met when I brought him to her doorstep. She had no idea what he would become.

Tommy’s a chip off the old block…or vampire.

One evening I take Tommy to the theatre in the Dark realm where I tortured those slaves. Once there, I instruct Tommy to put his name on a scrap of paper he was given when we arrived. When he asked why, I just gave him an evil look and replied “Oh, you shall see, my boy.”

When the curtain rises, the master of ceremony takes the stage, his eyes connecting with mine. I nod once in recognition. When it comes time for him to call out the first name, I blink once. Looking at the paper in his hand, the vamp calls out “Our first lucky participant is Tommy Joe Ratliff.”

Tommy turns to me in shock. I whisper to him “Go on Tommy, make me proud.” He replies “I can’t, Damian! You go in my place!”

Before we know it, guards show up in our box seat, one of them pulling Tommy with him as he heads for the stage. Tommy throws a pleading look back at me, which I meet with an encouraging smile.

Tommy Joe has many admirable qualities. He has a kind heart, he’s smart, he’s loyal. The one thing that he lacks is evilness. With a little finagling from me, here is the perfect chance to release the inner demon that I’m sure lies deep inside him, since he is my fledgling after all.

Once he is standing on the stage, his stage fright is palatable. When the vamp gives Tommy directions, he appears ready to bolt from the stage.

Time for a little helping hand from yours truly.

I blink and Tommy’s entire demeanor changes. He appears calm, focused. When the vamp leaves him alone on the stage with the slave, Tommy automatically walks over to the carts full of implements, as if he has done this a million times before.

I blink once more, and Tommy picks up a whip with razor blades attached to the ends. Pulling back his arm, he slashes at the slave. A look of excitement crosses Tommy’s face when he finally draws blood. He lashes out again and again, finding a rhythm.

Time seems to stand still. Tommy runs the gamut, from finger clamps to sledgehammer. The crowd gets behind him, cheering him on. I’ve never been prouder of him.

When the slave finally perishes on the stage, the crowd erupts. Tommy shoots the crowd a lope sided grin before taking a bow, then being led off stage by a guard; Once he is seated next to me again, the first thing he says is “That was all your doing, Damian. Why?”

“How do you feel?”

“Like I can take on the world! Like I can fight any battle and win! I feel powerful—alive.”

“That’s why I did it! To give you a taste of what’s in store for you if you should decide to become a king. A king needs to be fierce, needs to feel powerful. You needed to learn how to release your inner beast, the evil side that you inherited from me. You need to find the balance between that side and your kind, loving side.” Suddenly a thought crosses my mind. “Thomas…” Tommy gives me a look of expectation. “…have you lost your virginity?”

“WHAT?” Tommy replies, his face glowing red with embarrassment. “Why would you ask me that question?” With a snort, I answer “Well, by your response, you haven’t, or you wouldn’t be so embarrassed. I can fix that, you know.” Tommy practically chokes as he answers, “I’m not having sex with you, Damian!” I throw back my head and laugh loudly. “No, my dear. I know a place where you can experience ecstasy for the first time. It’s not far away.” Tommy looks at me as if I were joking as I stand to leave the theater, my hand on his arm to guide him to the exit. “DAMIAN!” Tommy hisses at me when we reach the street. “I don’t want my first time to be with some random prostitute! I…” When I turn to look at Tommy, he blushes. “I…was hoping that my…first time would be with…someone I love.”

“Love and sex? They rarely go together. Better to simply enjoy yourself when you get the chance, darling.”

I lead Tommy to Celine’s house, the woman that I visited with Andrew on my first night at the theatre. When she swings open the door, Tommy looks as if he is ready once again to bolt. “Damian! It’s been SO long since I’ve last seen you! And you brought with you such a beauty! Please, come in!” I drag Tommy across the threshold, his hand trying to push me away.

“Well, hello, Celine! It’s a pleasure to see you again! I have brought with me my fledgling, Tommy Joe. He is in need of some…attention.”

Celine leads us to the back of her house. “And what does the young one require? A daddy to keep him in line, or another young buck to give him a challenge? I can supply a wide variety…”

Glancing at Tommy, who’s face is bright red, I respond “This is his first time, Celine. Tommy, what age are you interested in, a daddy figure or a youngster? What interests you?” Tommy looks at me out of the corner of his eyes before staring at the floor. “I…” I notice that he is shaking with fear. “…guess someone around your age, Damian.” Celine leads us into a room at the end of the hallway, which is filled with slaves of all ages. Each of them wears only a loincloth over their privates. When we come to a halt in front of them, I tell Tommy “Choose one that interests you, Tommy…then I will choose.”

Tommy looks each of them over, his face even redder than before. “I…” When his gaze lands on a blonde slave around 35 years old, he blurts out “…I’ll take him.” I then point at a thin blonde of about 21 years of age. “I’ll take this one, Celine.” I pass over a bag full of coins to her, which she takes with a delighted smile when she feels how heavy the bag is. “Then take your choices to the backyard. Damian, you know the way.”

As we walk outside, I take Tommy’s hand in mine. “Don’t be afraid, sweetheart. Just have fun! And I paid for him in full, so if you wish to drain him when you are finished, you may. I will meet you back in the house, in Celine’s parlor.”

After a satisfying romp with my choice, I drain the boy dry then head to visit Celine. “So quick, Damian! Did you even have fun? And did you notice that the two of you chose the spitting image of each other to be with?”

I laugh out loud at Celine’s words. “I truly enjoyed myself, darling! And yes, I did notice that our choices mirrored each other. It’s just a shame that the two of us didn’t end up in bed together! It would’ve been convenient that way!”

Celine gives me a sharp look. “Why not sleep with the boy, Damian? It’s easy to see that he means quite a lot to you! The two of you would make a striking couple." With a sigh I answer “Alas, Tommy has no interest in me in that way. I am basically a father to him. But if I had my way, the two of us would be lovers.” I look up to see Tommy standing in the doorway, his hand raised as if ready to knock on the door frame, shock in his eyes. What could he possibly be thinking? The only thing I know is—I’m busted.

Celine comes to my rescue by asking “So, young Tommy! Did you enjoy yourself?” Tommy continues to stare blankly at me for a few more seconds before turning to Celine. “I did, Celine, thank you.” Tommy sits down in a chair next to mine, and Celine pours Tommy a glass of blood. The three of us then spend the next two hours chatting.

As soon as we leave Celine’s, Tommy starts up with the questions. “Did you really mean what you said to Celine, Damian? That you wish the two of us could be lovers?” I sigh. “I already told you that I love you, Tommy Joe. Of course, I would want the two of us to be intimate. But I know that is the last thing that you want, so I abide by your decision. That doesn’t mean that I don’t think about it sometimes, though.” Tommy stares at me silently for a moment, lost in thought. “So…” Time for me to change the subject. “…was your first time everything you hoped it would be? Are you sore?” Tommy’s eyes suddenly glue to the ground, his face turning bright red. “DAMIAN!!!” I find him to be adorable, so I push harder. “Or did you top?” Tommy shakes his head, a gentle smile crossing his face. “I…” I wait for him to finish. “…let him top. And yes…” a slight grimace crosses Tommy’s face. “…my ass is sore. But I did enjoy myself.”

“Good!” A pang of jealousy takes over me, knowing that I will never be Tommy’s first. “I enjoyed myself immensely. We will have to visit again sometime soon.” Before I can think of yet another change of conversation, Tommy blurts out “But if we did…” as we turn onto the main street that leads to the castle. I turn my head sharply towards Tommy, surprise on my face. I stop in my tracks and ask “Seriously, sweetheart…what DO YOU REALLY want?”

Tommy is silent as we continue to walk to the castle, his expression one of confusion. Once we arrive at the castle, I decide to put him out of his misery. “Well, I’ll say goodnight here, Tommy. I’ll send you home. I hope to see you soon…”

“Damian…”

I lean forward, my lips gently connecting with Tommy’s forehead. “If you want or need me, all you have to do is call out. I’ll hear you, never fear. Goodnight, darling.” Before he can say anything, I blink, sending him to the Light realm before I can change my mind.

I head back to my rooms, deep in thought. What could that boy possibly be thinking? He constantly tells me that he doesn’t want me, but then I get a collection of side eyes and lost looks. I wish the boy would just level with me…

Mikey suddenly appears in my room, startling me. Before I can call out a greeting, Mikey bursts into tears, blurting out “I’m done, Dam. Can I move in with you? I can’t live with him any longer…” I move forward, wrapping my arms around Mikey, pulling her close. “Of course, darling. Bring your things.” Mikey blinks and her entire closet full of black clothing fills one side of my closet. I hold her close as she cries, whispering in her ear words of encouragement. “Things will get better, Mikey. Just give it time.”

Towards daybreak, Mikey lies on my chest, her hair tickling my nose as her chest slowly moves. I tell her what happened with Tommy earlier in the evening. “Oh, our little boy is all grown up!” Mikey exclaims, making me chuckle. “I bet you wish it was you introducing him to sex, right darling? And it sounds as if Tommy is a bit confused himself…” I grunt before answering “Of course, I wanted to be his first! But short of forcing him, there was little that I could do about that! And the way he acted later! As if he’s…conflicted…” Mikey raises her head and kisses me for a moment. “Dam, the boy is just confused. He knows that you are his maker, that there should be nothing else between the two of you except for that relationship. I think that secretly, he wants more but feels as if he shouldn’t feel that way. I bet if you tried harder, he would give in.” I sigh deeply before replying “That’s the point, darling. The last thing I need to do is have him turn around later and accuse me of forcing him into being with me. That’s the last thing I want.” Mikey simply shrugs in response. “Then the only thing you can do is sit back and wait, and hopefully he will change his mind, Dam. Unless you want me to talk to him for you.” I grunt, tightening my arms around Mikey. “Unfortunately, you are right, darling. And you know me, I’ve never been patient. I will leave it to your discretion if you wish to speak to him on my behalf, Mikes.” Mikey laughs, burrowing her head against my chest. “Boy, don’t I know it! You are the last thing to patient, Dam.”

Mikey stays with me for three years. Mikey spends all her time with Gee or Tommy if she is not with me. The two of us continue to be lovers, lying each night in each other’s arms after repeated bouts of passion. The two of us grow closer than ever, Mikey making vows to me that once she has finished her relationship with Ray, the two of us would be together forever. And I am dumb enough to believe her…

Now, I know that you must be shaking your head by now. I mean, what good could Mikey’s words possibly be, since she has lied to me so often in the past, made so many promises that she refuses to keep. Let’s just say that, in many ways, I’m a clever vamp, but when it comes to love, I’m as stupid as they come! There’s just something about Mikey that makes me fall whole heartedly into whatever ‘love scheme’ she is trying to project at the time. I just keep stupidly believing that one day, she will see me for more than just a ‘replacement’, that she will see my true heart and want to spend the rest of eternity with me. A vamp can only dream…

So, as time goes by, I fall head over heels deeper in love with Mikey, believing all her honeyed words and whispered promises in the night. Just once, the old Gypsy woman’s words cross my mind when Mikey finally gives me her promise that she is through with Ray, and that she will stay with me forever. How stupid I am…

Then one evening, Mikey disappears. When she finally does comes home, she is full of some story about visiting a friend in the Light realm. Not wanting to appear as if I do not believe her, I simply accept her story. Over the next three weeks, Mikey disappears overnight quite a bit, raising my suspicions. Then one day she tells me that she was visiting with Tommy in the Light realm, when I knew for certain that Tommy was with a band playing a gig on the Ice realm.

History repeating itself. Why am I such a fool?

The more I try to get her to confess the truth, the more she digs in her heels, telling me lie after lie. It finally takes Tommy spilling the beans to me one evening, when he came to visit me. “Where’s Mikey, Damian? Is she visiting Ray?”

“Now, why would she be visiting him, when she told me that the two of them are over, Tommy?” Tommy gives me a confused look. “Just where did you get that idea from, Damian? She has been seeing Ray.” When I give Tommy a blank look in response, he continues with “I went to visit Ray a few weeks ago, and Mikey was there. She was sitting on Ray’s lap when I entered the room, and the two of them were playing kissy face with each other. When I asked if the two of them were together again, Ray enthusiastically responded “Yes, my baby has finally come home to me.”

I cannot explain what happens next. It’s as if time stands still but doesn’t. I feel all the blood in my system sink to my feet, making me feel lightheaded. My limbs become as numb as my brain, leading me to utter a few words that sounds like gibberish to my ears. Tommy’s eyes widen as he takes in my sudden demeanor, his right hand reaching out to me as if he can somehow pull me out of the stupor that I now find myself in. I shake my head at Tommy, trying to give him the idea that touching me in this moment would not be a good idea. The harder I try to speak, the further removed from the act I find myself.

“Damian? I’m so…PLEASE say something! Anything! Just let me know that you can hear me…”

My body suddenly feels as if, while I’m figuratively being splashed with cold water, I’m also feeling the fires from hell. My eyes dilate until all I can see is black, and my skin feels as if it’s encased in thick concrete, too heavy to move.

“Damian, PLEASE! I’m sorry to upset you! PLEASE talk to me! I…” An overwhelming urge to take Tommy into my arms, to force myself on him, take what he insists on denying me. I want to sink my fangs into his throat, make him mine in every possible way. With the last shred of sanity that I have, my voice breaks as I bark out “Thomas, you will go to your home and stay there, or stay and become mine. You have no other choice. Don’t make me do something that I won’t regret.” I step forward until the two of us bump noses. With an icy smile I gently brush the back of my hand down his cheek, my touch in direct conflict with my words. I see Tommy quiver with fear as he continues to stare into my dead eyes, looking for any sign of the ‘real’ me. When he doesn’t back away, I place a hand at the back of his neck and pull forward until our lips meet. I bend Tommy backwards a few inches, my tongue forcing itself between Tommy’s lips in a searing kiss of ownership. I hear Tommy whimper against my lips, which only serves to embolden me to pull his body flush against mine, so he can feel my growing erection.

Suddenly my lips leave Tommy’s to attach themselves at the pulse point in his throat. Without warning, I sink my fangs deep into his neck, my senses coming alive as soon as his blood touches my tongue. I pull my fangs out just far enough to suck sharply at Tommy’s throat, moaning as his blood slowly trickles down my throat.

When I’ve had enough, I pull back and then resume my attack against Tommy’s lips. This time, he opens up for me, allowing me to take control again. My hands begin to wander, running all over Tommy Joe, finally touching the skin that I have so longed to feel under my fingertips.

We continue this way for a few minutes longer, until reality sinks back in around the edges. What am I doing? Ruining the only good relationship that I have left?

I pull back enough to put space between us. The sight in front of me is one that makes me want to continue the ravishment that I was engaging in. Tommy’s eyes are blown, his expression conveying his desire to continue kissing me. If I don’t get him out of here right now…

“Tommy, you have to go home, for your own sake. I…” I want to say I love you, but something is holding me back. “If you don’t go now, I might hurt you. I hope you understand…” Tommy grabs my biceps, squeezing tightly. “Please! Don’t send me away, even for my own good! I…” I cut Tommy off by laying a kiss on his cheek, then pushing him away. “Goodbye, Tommy Joe.” I then blink and send him to the Light realm.

I remain this…thing…until Mikey arrives sometime around dawn. The second she sees me she knows that something is seriously wrong.

“Dam! What in the world…”

“Leave. Go back to Ray where you belong.”

Mikey stands still, contemplating her next move. She tries to act innocent. “What are you talking about, darling? I told you…”

“I know what you told me, Mikey. Another set of lies that I believed to be truth. I’m no longer your fool. Go home. I’m trying to be nice. Don’t make me regret it.”

Mikey moves forward to place her hand on my arm but thinks twice about it when she sees my eyes. I watch a chill travel down her spine and know that I have indeed caught her in a lie.

“But Dam! You mean so much…”

“ENOUGH OF THE LIES, MIKEY! YOU THOUGHT THAT YOU COULD KEEP BOTH RAY AND I ON THE LINE AT THE SAME TIME, GETTING THE BEST OF BOTH WORLDS! I DON’T WANT YOU ANYMORE, SO GO BACK TO YOUR HUSBAND WHERE YOU BELONG, BEFORE I HURT YOU!” I push Mikey backwards towards the door, the desire to hit her taking me over until I am trembling. “Before you leave though Mikey…take a good look at what you created. You are responsible for all I do from this moment on. You wanted a monster, you got one.” I then blink, sending Mikey home to Ray.

Years fly by. I continue to be King of the Dark realm. The only difference is my attitude—harsher, more prone to punish, to lash out more than before. I search out darker entertainment, anything that can feed my evil soul. I murder countless numbers of humans and vamps from different realms just for the fun of it. I spend a lot of my time partying in the Light realm vamp clubs. As time goes by, my soul becomes darker and darker, the evil growing until there is nothing kind or nice about me…or so I thought, until one day Mikey shows up in my suite of rooms.

“I’m not here to fight.” Mikey walks up to me, her hands out in front of her. “I’m here for Tommy, no other reason. He needs his maker, Dam.”

“He wouldn’t want anything to do with me now, Mikey. I’d hurt him if I spend time with him. I’d take him against his will and make him hate me.” Mikey shakes her head. “You won’t hurt Tommy, Dam. You love him too much…”

“Love? I once loved you and look where it got me! Do you honestly think I could love Tommy Joe? No Mikey, the only thing I can do is stay away from him.”

“Please Dam, I am begging you. For his sake. He misses you so horribly. Please stop by and visit him.”

“That’s enough, Mikey.” Before she can say another word, I send her back to Ray.

I sit on my throne, lost in thought. Do I want to see Tommy? Of course, I do, but for the wrong reasons. But still, it might be fun to simply show up and mess with the boy’s head a little.

I show up unannounced at Tommy’s mansion. My boy isn’t home—the slave that answers the door tells me that he is out catching his dinner. As I turn to leave, I notice a young boy around 8- or 9-years old standing at the top of the stairs. With a voice full of lust, I call out “What’s your name, boy?” The young boy (long black hair and deep green eyes) gives me a defiant look as he responds “Jay, sir.” Licking my lips, I call out “Tell your master that Damian visited, Jay. I’m sure to call again, with such a delightful piece as yourself to keep my attention.” With that, I head out the door.

Chapter Text

Visiting Tommy at his home becomes a regular thing for me. Tommy seems to adapt to the ‘new me’ even though I know that I make him nervous most of the time. He even gives me a bedroom to use when I visit, which I use to my full advantage whenever I can.

Tommy’s attitude towards me changes over time. He becomes more of a bad ass, much more confident. Every time I try to kiss him, he simply pushes me away, telling me to fuck off even though I know that he would love for me to kiss him again.

I have to admit that the slave boy Jay intrigues me. He acts humble in front of his master but acts cocky when he is alone with me. I’ve never felt any attraction to children before, but there is something about this brat that appeals to the evil side of me. I want to take him and ruin him in every way possible, wipe that smug smile off his little face.

Late one evening, I stop by Tommy’s on my way to the club. Jay informs me in his usual sarcastic tone that his master isn’t home. “He told me to tell you that he is visiting his parents this evening…sir.” Something about the twinkle in his eyes and his cocky smile makes me want to set my plan in motion to destroy him.

I take Jay’s arm and drag him to my bedroom. When we arrive, I throw the boy on the bed, my much bigger body towering over him as he tries to flee. “What is it about you, Jay, that makes me want to teach you a lesson that you will never forget.” For the first time the boy looks scared. I lean down, my chest crushing his as I place a hand at the back of his head. Lowering my head, I place my lips against his smaller ones. I hear his sharp intake of breath as I deepen the kiss, sticking my tongue deep into his mouth. The boy starts to fight back, pushing his hands against my chest to try and push me off. I can taste his innocence, and I cannot wait to ruin him.

I pull back far enough to kiss a trail of kisses down his chin to his throat. I then sink my fangs deep into his throat, moaning as I suck hard on his neck to get to his sweet blood.

I then rip the clothes off the boy, which causes him to whine and beg in fear. I repeatedly bite his chest and stomach, leaving a bloody trail as I go. At last, I reach down to grab the boy’s dick.

He’s big for a boy his age. “Please, sir…don’t…” I hush the boy as I continue to rub my hand over his dick, trying to make it hard. I lean down, taking his balls in my mouth as my hand continues to stroke until the boy is hard against my palm.

The thought hits me that this boy is now experiencing the same abuse that I suffered around his age. For some sick reason, this thought turns me on even more. I let go of the boy’s dick and balls and harshly bend the boy practically in half until his small hole is on display. When I look down, I realize that I pulled his leg out at an angle, breaking the leg in my excitement.

Time to have some real fun!

I lower my head, sticking out my tongue until it contacts Jay’s hole. I shove my tongue forward, shoving it deep inside the boy, who starts crying. I fuck the boy with my tongue briefly, using little to no saliva as I want to take the boy raw. After a few moments, I pull back, one hand reaching down to unbutton my pants. As I line up my cock with the boy’s small hole, I grunt out “Bet you’ll never treat me with disrespect again, boy.”

Seconds later I’m in heaven as I shove my cock inside the boy to the hilt. Jay screams in pain, making the experience that much sweeter. As I start to fuck him harshly, the bed slamming into the wall, the boy below me starts screaming in earnest, his hands slapping and scratching my chest. I grab both of his hands, pulling on his arms till they break, holding them over his head in a tight grip. The boy throws back his head and howls in pain, tears streaming down his face.

I quicken my motions, fucking Jay as hard as I can, taking the boy’s innocence. I lean down and place bites all over his hips and thighs, enjoying the taste of his skin.

Time seems to have no end as I take my time fucking this boy, who has closed his eyes against the onslaught his body is experiencing. I drag out the act, my motions as harsh as I can make them. When my orgasm finally starts to build, I moan out “Open your eyes, bitch. Let me see how much attitude is in you now. I bet you’ll never challenge me again.” When Jay finally opens his eyes wide, I give in to extasy, my cum shooting out of my dick to fill the child below me to the hilt.

I pull out harshly, watching the stream of blood covered come leak out of the stretched hole that refuses to close. The boy sniffles, his eyes bloodshot from crying as snot runs down his face. I stand up on shaking legs and look over at my handy work, staring at the numerous bites on the boy’s skin. I lean over Jay and slap him across the face as hard as I can, the skin around his eye closest to me immediately turning purple as blood starts to pour out of his small nose.

I fasten my pants as the boy stares off into nothing. As I turn to go, I hear his shaking voice softly say to me “Good evening, sir.”

I turn on my heel and head for the club.

Two weeks go by before I return to Tommy’s house, to find a furious Tommy Joe waiting for me. “Just what the hell did you think you were doing with MY slave, Damian? Why did you hurt him the way you did? What has the boy done to deserve that kind of abuse?”

I throw back my head and laugh out loud. “Just teaching the boy some manners, Tommy. You should keep him in line if you wish him to survive in a vampire’s home. The little shit had it coming, with that attitude! He’ll behave now, I’m sure.”

Tommy storms over to me, his hands balled into fists. “From now on, keep your hands off him! I mean it, leave him ALONE!” I throw up my hands in defeat, even though there is a smirk on my face at the same time. “All right, the brat is yours! I’m sure I’ve done a remarkable job teaching him a lesson in decorum!” My smirk grows as I ask, “Are you SURE I can’t have one more go at him? Make sure the lesson sticks?”

“NO!” Tommy places both of his hands against my chest and pushes. “I should never see you again for what you’ve done, hurting an innocent boy like that! I never thought you’d stoop that low, Damian!”

I step forward until Tommy and I are nose to nose. “Aww, Tommy Joe, don’t be like that!” I wrap my arms around him, pulling him close. “He’s just a slave, sweetheart. They are made to suffer for a reason. They aren’t worth the dirt they are made of, unlike us vamps. Maybe you should take a turn at him…”

Tommy pushes me away, his face red. “I would NEVER! I have more morals that you do, Damian! You have become a monster…”

Once again, I wrap him up in my arms. “You love me as a monster, admit it, sweetheart. I’m more fun this way…”

Mikey ruins the moment by showing up unannounced. When she sees me, she’s instantly appears nervous and scared. “Sorry to interrupt. I just came to check on Jay. I had no idea Damian would be here.”

“You’re not the only one, mother” Tommy coldly answers. “Jay is still up in my bedroom.” I throw back my head and laugh. “Now BOTH of you are coddling that little shit? No wonder he has such a shitty attitude! Next thing I know you will be bringing him roses and singing him to sleep!”

“DAM!” Mikey screams. “You broke the boy’s arms and leg! For that and more he needs constant attention, until he heals completely. I can’t believe you hurt the boy so badly!” I walk over to stand in front of Mikey, our noses touching. In an icy tone I snarl “Just be glad I didn’t do the same to you, Mikey.”

Tommy steps between the two of us, directing Mikey towards the stairs. “I appreciate your helping Jay, mother. I’ll be upstairs shortly.” Mikey nods and, stopping on the third step, turns back to me. “Ray wants to see you, something about the peace treaty between the realms.” I nod once, turning my back on her. With a sigh, Mikey gives Tommy a sad look and continues her way upstairs. When she is out of hearing, Tommy snarls at me “I would appreciate it if you would keep your attitude to yourself when it comes to my mother, Damian. I won’t hesitate to defend her. Keep your hands off her.” I laugh at Tommy, who gives me a pissed off look in return. “After what that bitch did to me, you have no right telling me how to act regarding her, Thomas. She deserves what I give her and more. I’m not going to kiss her ass to make you happy! She’s lucky I haven’t snapped her neck…” “Damian!” I place my hands on my hips and snarl “If it wasn’t for you, she’d already be dead! You are the only reason she is still alive!” I grab Tommy’s arm and lean forward, my lips brushing his. “I better go see what Mr. high and Mighty wants now. I’ll see you soon.” With that, I blink and head to Council headquarters, where I find Ray at his desk. In a cold voice I spit out “I’m here. What the fuck do you want now?”

Ray sits back in his chair, his face giving away his surprise at seeing me so soon. “One of the Councilors brought up a point in the treaty that we did not revisit when you were here last. I thought it might be important, so I asked Mikey…” I cut Ray off with “So what is it? Let me guess…” I place my hands on my hips, my lips curled into a snarl. “…it has to do with military might, correct? You still think you can tell me how fucking big of a standing army I’m allowed to have, when you can have unlimited soldiers at your disposal.” Ray responds with “Damian…” but once again I cut him off. “We are no longer under your fucking thumb, Ray. The Dark realm is a separate entity from the Light realm. We have the right to protect ourselves in whatever fucking capacity we see fit. You cannot tell me to limit anything any longer, King.” I turn to go, but Ray calls out my name to stop me. “I told the Council such, but they want to ensure that you…” I turn back, showing my fangs. “WE WILL NOT BOW DOWN TO YOU OR YOUR COUNCIL, RAY! If you insist on pursuing this line of conversation, I will simply go home and double my army…no, I’ll triple it! Don’t push me, Ray. You will lose.” Ray stands up, rage etched on his face. “Don’t threaten me, Damian! I’m trying to deescalate things, not make them worse! The last thing you need to do is make a stand against this realm! It will be seen as an act of war, which neither of us want or need right now!” I place my hands on my hips and laugh. “I’m not so sure, Ray! Remember who won the last war and tell me if you really want to start a war with ME!” Ray grunts in frustration at the truth behind my words. “By the way, why are YOU coming to me with this? You hate my guts…” Ray stands frozen for a minute, lost in thought. “Damian, I do not hate your guts. I simply do not trust you like I used to. And you’re not doing anything to improve that situation with your current attitude!” I give Ray an evil laugh at his words. “And I won’t if I can help it! No Ray, you need to go to your precious Council and tell them that I refuse to lower the number of soldiers that I currently have in my army. This includes the number of guards that I currently have protecting my castle and locations on other realms. Tell them that if they do not accept this as a legitimate answer, they are welcome to come to my realm and try and force me into submission. I guarantee they will not like the response that they get in return. You see, your soldiers do not train the same way mine do. Yours train only when there is a direct threat to you or this realm. My elite team practices all day every day to be the very best they can be, to stand up against any threat, no matter how small. They are just dying for a chance to show their skills. Do not make the mistake of finding out what they can really do, Ray. Stay away from my realm, or you’ll be sorry.”

As I turn to leave, Ray takes a few steps towards me. “Damian, what…what has happened to you? I’ve never seen you so…evil before. Your words cut like a knife; your very stance is terrifying. Was our situation…” Once again, I throw my head back and give an evil laugh. “No Ray, you have nothing to do with this. You did not set me on my current path. There is someone else to blame, and they are quite aware of the havoc they have unleashed, though they won’t take responsibility for it. Welcome to the new me, Ray. I’m not sure you will like what you see.” With that, I turn on my heel and storm out the door.

Gerard starts hanging out at Tommy’s place on a regular basis. My hatred of that bastard grows more and more over time. Just why in the fuck did Mikey and Ray create him for in the first place? He’s a sniveling wimp. I grow jealous at the amount of time that the two of them spend together. It’s as if he wants to take my boy away from me. Doesn’t Gee know that I own Tommy?

Mikey keeps trying to apologize to me for her betrayal. I respond by freezing her out, making sure that she feels my growing hatred for her. Tommy keeps trying to appeal to my kinder side (that I no longer have, thanks to Mikey!) by begging me to make up with her, for his sake. I simply tell Tommy that I love him, but I refuse to repair my relationship with Mikey, for any reason. The only thing I want right now is revenge.

I begin to plot a long-range plan to make Mikey suffer. The only way to make her hurt would be to hurt those she loves. Unfortunately, that includes Tommy Joe. But you’ve got to break some eggs to make an omelet, right?

I start hanging out in vampire bars, getting to know the local ‘bad’ guys. I slowly start making friends with the worst of them. I have a feeling that I will need them to carry out my plan.

One evening, Ray and members of his Council arrive without notice at my castle. I’m sitting on my throne, dealing with an affair of state when a guard informs me of their presence. “Invite them in” I call out to the guard, my arms crossing my chest in a gesture of disdain. The last thing I want to deal with is this bullshit…

“Damian! I’m sorry that we are here unannounced.” Ray calls out to me, his demeanor pleasant. With a scowl on my face, I belt out “What is it this time, Ray? Come for a head count on all our slaves? Or would you rather count grains of wheat in the fields, to make sure we’re not shorting you?” Ray gives me a grimace at my harsh tone. “No, Damian. But we would like a head count on your army…” I cut Ray off, turning my head towards the closest guard and bark out “Send for the Vampaire. They haven’t had a workout in a while.” The guard nods and rushes out of the room, while the members of the Council hiss their fear and frustration at Ray.

“Damian! We simply wanted to have a conversation with you…” I snarl at Ray’s comment, responding with “You can have a fucking conversation with the Vampaire, Ray. I’m through talking with you! You constantly try to push your will on me and my realm, and I’m not going to stand for it anymore! The only thing you recognize is military might, so I’ll allow my military to deal with you.” Ray gives me a sad look. “How did things come to this, Damian? We were as close as family once. Why can’t things be as they were?” I place my hands on my hips and reply “How can things be as they were? You told me you do not trust me. And with this recent accusation from your side, I have no choice but to terminate any friendship the two of us have left.” Members of the Vampaire rush into the room, swords drawn. I look over at the leader and bark out “Take them into custody, Captain.” With a nod, all eleven Council members and Ray are lead away, Ray yelling my name as he is dragged out of the room.

Two days later Mikey and Tommy arrive in my room as I’m ready to go to bed. Mikey is furious as she demands “DAMIAN!!! I WANT TO KNOW WHERE IN THE FUCK IS MY HUSBAND!” I fight back a smirk as I answer “Why? Have you lost him?” The next thing I know, I’m lying on the floor, Mikey punching me in the face over and over, a scowl on her pretty face. “Stop acting like you don’t know what I’m talking about! My husband came to visit you two days ago, and he hasn’t come home! WHAT DID YOU DO WITH HIM?” I throw Mikey off me, her head connecting with the corner of the bed post. Tommy instantly runs to her side, pulling her up off the floor. “Your precious husband is in the dungeon, bitch. I warned him what would happen if he came here. He’s simply is paying the price for his stupidity.”

“DAMIAN!” Mikey pulls back in surprise. “How could you…” I laugh in Mikey’s face as blood slowly drips down onto my shirt. “I am TIRED of being under insinuation and attack by those bastards! I’ve done nothing but run this realm in the most honest way possible, but they are constantly accusing me of all kinds of acts that I have not committed. If I wanted to cheat them, to fight them, they wouldn’t stand a chance! They needed to be taught a lesson…”

Tommy moves to stand in front of me, his hand reaching out to shakily brush the bloody hair off my forehead. “Damian, please. For my sake, please let them go. The longer that they are held in the dungeon, the greater chance that you will end up fighting a needless war. Please let father go…” I reach out and grab Tommy’s wrist, pulling his hand away from my face. “If I let them go, Tommy, then what’s next? What other petty argument will they come up with? I am not the one causing the issues here, they are. I am tired of living under what they believe is their rule. I’m done playing.”

Mikey then does something that I never thought she would do. She sinks to her knees in front of me, her head bowed, and her hands clasped in front of her in a perfect picture of submission. With tears choking her voice she begs “Please, King, I beg of you. Please release my husband and the men you imprisoned with him. Please look past their faults and see reason. To save both our realms the heartbreak of war, PLEASE do what’s right and let them go…” Tommy sinks to his knees next to Mikey, his head automatically bowed, hands behind his back. He joins in “Please, great King, hear our pleas and do what you know is right. Please…”

I reach out and run my hand through Tommy’s hair, pulling back until his eyes meet mine. “And just what are you willing to give to see me release them, fledgling?” Tommy’s eyes cloud over with confusion as Mikey makes a strangled noise. With sincerity in his voice, Tommy answers “Anything, Great One.”

Interesting situation! Here I have my fantasy come true. I have Mikey right where I want her, on her knees in front of me, groveling. I also have Tommy right where I want him, on his knees in front of me, submissive as hell and willing to do anything to keep Ray safe and home free. Do I take what I want now, or wait for until later to destroy Mikey’s world? Decisions, decisions…

I wave my hand in the air and send Mikey home. I then place a spell on her so she will not be able to return. That leaves me alone with Tommy Joe…

“Well, Tommy…” I place my hand under his chin and pull up, until our eyes meet again. “…what shall I do with you now, hum?” I see fear flicker in Tommy’s eyes as he silently waits for my next sentence. I place both my hands under his arms and lift Tommy to his feet. “If you stay on your knees any longer, I just may have to ravish you. Best you stand.” Tommy sways on his feet so I reach out to pull him close to me. “Should I ravish you, make you mine? Or should I simply let you go…” Tommy places a hand on my arm and waits to see what will happen next.

Tommy will feel my wrath one day, I’m sure of it. Mikey will cry tears of regret and anguish as I hurt him, the one she loves so much. But not today. No, there are plans to be finalized and set in motion first. When I find the perfect opening, I will strike out at Ray’s family…

“Guard!”

The door to my room opens and a guard comes to a stop a few feet from me. “Go to the dungeon and bring me our Light realm guests. Make sure they are unharmed.” The guard nods and leaves to carry out my orders.

When Ray and the others are finally standing before Tommy and I in the throne room, I turn to them and snarl out “Thanks to Tommy Joe here, I am sending you back to the Light realm. Let this be a lesson to you. The next fucking time you arrive here with an agenda as you did the other day, you will never see nighttime again. I’ll keep all of you locked up here until the end of time.” Ray opens his mouth to reply but instead I simply say “Goodbye, Ray” and send them all home.

Tommy gives me a grateful smile. “Thank you SO MUCH, Damian! I…” I cut him off by locking my lips on his, instantly deepening the kiss. Tommy stands stock still, neither fighting me nor kissing me back. I love seeing how much I can get away with, so I push Tommy up against the closest wall and press my lower body against his. I snicker as Tommy tries to push himself away from me to no avail. I’m much stronger than he is.

I pull back enough to say “Something the matter, Tommy? Something bothering you?” Tommy gives me an angry look then replies, “Stop teasing me, Damian, and let me go!” I innocently ask “What? You don’t like my body against yours? What are you, darling…shy? You’ve felt me against you before…” Tommy cuts me off with “But that doesn’t mean I like it! Please…” I throw back my head and laugh. “Those blushing cheeks, sparkling eyes! If I didn’t know any better, darling, I’d swear you were in love…” Tommy places both hands on my chest and pushes me back a bit. “Stop it, Damian! While I am appreciative of the fact that you released Father…”

I lean in one more time and lock lips with Tommy for good measure, before pulling away completely. I can tell that the boy is shaken up by the entire evening, so I lean in enough to kiss his cheek gently. “All is well in your world again, Thomas. It’s time for you to go home. Thank you for your visit.” Tommy barely has time to say goodnight before I am sending him home to his mansion.

The years fly by. Jay grows up to be a handsome young man, one I would dearly love to fuck again. He easily becomes Tommy’s favorite slave. The boy is horribly spoiled, not only by Tommy but by Gerard as well. Gee and Jay begin fucking every chance they get, which is every time Gee visits Tommy. Why Thomas puts up with this bullshit I’ll never know.

Over time, I put space between myself and Mikey and Ray. I rarely see them, which suits me just fine. When I do see Mikey, she continues to apologize to me for everything. I pretend I do not hear her, much to Tommy’s dismay. He keeps trying to patch things up between me and his mother, even though he knows in his heart that it is a losing battle.

It may seem impossible, but Tommy grows more beautiful. I spend very little time with him as well, much to his displeasure. When I do see him, I spend a great deal of time teasing him with kisses that lead nowhere. He seems to grow more depressed each time I see him, not only because of our distance, but by Ray’s constant insistence that Tommy learn to be the Light realm’s new heir to the throne. Tommy begs me to make him the heir apparent to the Dark realm, but I refuse his request. Underneath it all, Tommy is too kindhearted to be King of the Dark realm…

Even though I am impatient, I continue to make my plans, taking my time. I want to make sure that when I strike, it will be epic. Then one night, I find the perfect opportunity…

I arrive at Tommy’s house unannounced. I spend the next hour begging him to go to the club with me. “Come on, Tommy! You never go out unless it’s to catch a meal! Come out and have some fun with me…” Tommy pushes back, telling me that the last thing that he wants to do is spend the evening with me in a dark, crowded club. I continue to beg until he finally agrees to go with me, if only to shut me up. “Then go upstairs and put on your sexiest clothes, sweetheart. We want the boys to drool over you…” Tommy grunts and heads upstairs, ignorant of the shit eating grin that I give him behind his back. My plan is working perfectly…

Chapter Text

Mikey kneels next to Andrew, taking one of his limp hands in hers as she mutters a spell, fear on her face. Nothing happens. She tries again and again, reaching out her free hand towards me. I take it, reciting multiple spells which can’t even manage to stop the flow of blood onto the floor around Andrew’s body. Mikey chokes out “Dam, we…can’t heal him! Please for the love of God please…” I scream for Luna, who suddenly arrives at the foot of the bed, scaring Mikey. Luna runs her hand over Andrew, his body now void of blood. Lifting her piercing eyes, she simply says “He is gone. The spell placed on him is too strong. He cannot be saved.” Mikey screams, tears flowing down her face. “You have to be wrong! He’s…” Luna turns to me, her face severe as she comments “Andre has what he always wanted. He will win this war.” I sneer at Luna, my body moving forward to wrap around Mikey, holding her close. “Like hell he will! I’ll get them back Luna.” Luna laughs bitterly. “How, young King? You have no idea where they are, he has magick you do not possess. How do you intend to win?” I lift watery eyes to Luna, a prayer on my lips as I answer her “I have a plan, Luna…but I may need your help.”

“Why wasn’t I there with them? Maybe I could’ve…” Trick breaks down crying, falling into Pete’s embrace. Pete runs his hand up and down Trick’s back, trying his best to calm down his love. Pete looks up into Bobby’s set face, his expression trying to convey to Bobby to say something, anything to calm his love down.

“Trick, it’s not your fault. The family wanted you to spend time with Pete, to rebuild your relationship. No one is mad at you, trust me. We all love you honey.” Trick pulls himself out of Pete’s arms, rushing instead to lay his head down on Bobby’s shoulder. Bobby gives Pete a confused look, but gently wraps his arms around Trick, whispering soft words of encouragement and love. “Are you sure no one is mad, Bobby? I was meant to be there helping to guard them. I let them down! At the very least, I should be there suffering with them! How will I ever be able to look into their eyes when they are rescued?”

It takes both Pete and Bobby another hour to calm Trick down enough that he closes tear filled eyes to rest. As Pete gently strokes his hand over Trick’s back, he whispers to Bobby “We may never see them again, huh?” Bobby shakes his head no, sadness taking over his features. “I don’t think so, Pete. Unless something happens and fast, we are sure to lose this war.”

Tommy calls out to a guard to come to the dungeon room she is being held in. “Please! I need more milk for my babies! They are starving!” The guard laughs out “Then give them your tit, bitch! That should be enough…” The other guards laugh at this, making tears come to Tommy’s eyes. “Please help us! Ask your boss…” Just then Andre calls out “Shut up, bitch!” The door to the dungeon opens and Andre enters, hands on his hips. “What’s this bullshit that you need more milk? You’re worthless enough that you can’t even feed your children?” Andre looks from Tommy to Gee, who is breastfeeding one of her pups. “This bitch seems to have no issues feeding.” Draven growls at Andre, his small hand reaching out to claw him. “My children require more milk than I can make at once, considering their growth spurts, Andre. Please give me more milk for them.” With a sigh, Andre blinks and a small refrigerator appears next to Tommy. “Here, bitch. It will constantly be filled for your brats. Now stop your bitching.” When Draven growls again, Andre laughs. “Feisty little bastard! So this is the little shit that will take over the cosmos!” Tommy gives out a squeal when Andre grabs her by the arm, pulling her towards him. “Come with me, bitch. It’s time for you to make them some siblings.”

The force of the pull causes Tommy to drop Draven onto Gee, who barely catches the child before he hits the floor. Andre drags Tommy kicking and screaming across the room to a set of stocks which are standing open. Andre cruelly shoves Tommy face down onto the stocks, pulling the top down and locking it in place. Tommy screams out “Gee! Please watch my babies!” Gee calls out an answer, the sound of Draven growling almost drowning out the response.

Andre pulls down Tommy’s pants, letting them pool at her feet. Tommy thrashes around but cannot open the top of the stocks, no matter how hard she tries. Tommy lets out a whimper as Andre says “Today I killed your mother’s husband, Tommy. I’ll kill Ray next, but in the meantime…” Andre takes off his pants before lining up behind Tommy, laughing as he slams forward. “I’ll knock you up with my progeny, bitch. Take my cock and enjoy becoming pregnant again…” Tommy cries out in pain as Andre continues to plow into her, tears running down her face. “You’re mine, bitch. Better get used to being my breeding sow…”

Three months later…

“Where the fuck are they???” Adam screams, punching the closest wall. Frankie moves to stand next to him, taking Adam’s arms in his strong hands. “This isn’t helping, Ad. Trust me, I feel your pain. Damian left with Luna to find someone to help. Until then we just have to have faith…” Adam pushes Frankie back a few steps. “I’m trying, Frankie. But every second that Tommy is with Andre, there’s a better chance she will end up pregnant with that bastard’s babies. I just can’t…” Mikey enters the room with Ray, both their faces solemn and sad. “They’ve been gone forever. Why can’t we find them?” Ray is interrupted by Luna, who suddenly arrives at the far side of the room. Adam, growling out in frustration, descends on her. “What the fuck is going on, Luna? Where is Damian, what the hell is keeping him? We can’t just sit here and…”

Luna raises a hand, waving it at Adam to stop the flow of words coming from him. “Damian went to see his son, Adam. He is asking for his help. Be patient.” Adam erupts with “His WHAT? Son? He doesn’t have a son. And you expect me to just sit here and BE PATIENT??? How do I do that, Luna, when the love of my life is missing???” Luna gives her most stern look as she replies “You simply must, Adam. We all must.”

Damian’s POV

I enter a dark cave, the sound of running water in the distance somewhat soothing to my soul. A light source bounces at the other end of the tunnel, and my feet set to walk the path in that direction. The cave feels damp and cold, the perfect place for a hideout.

When I arrive at the other end of the tunnel, I rub my hands around the outside of the closed doorway in front of me, looking for a latch or a button to gain entrance to the room beyond. Nothing happens. I sigh in frustration, closing my eyes against the darkness to focus on the hidden latch to the sliding door in front of me. I hear a creak, feel a slight breeze as the door slowly slides open. Bright light from the room in front of me blinds me for a moment, causing me to blink my eyes repeatedly as I struggle to see. When my eyes finally focus, I take a single step through the doorway, wind at my back as the door slowly slides shut again.

“Father. What a nice surprise. I’m impressed you found me.” I give a short laugh at this comment. “I just followed the clues that you left me with the last time we talked, Sonny. I bet you thought I would’ve forgotten after all this time.”

Sonny takes a few steps towards me. “I’m impressed, truly I am, Father. Welcome to my home.”

As I look around me, I am surprised by the sheer opulence that greets me. Works of art by some of the cosmos’s most famous artists cover the walls, while rich colorful woven rugs and wall hangings from centuries prior vie for my attention. Soft furniture from other realms fills the space, while many bookcases filled with grimoires and books line the walls. The overall feel of the room is homey, as if one could sit in front of the room’s only fireplace for hours and comfortably read the time away.

My son has turned out to be the spitting image of his mother, the only thing giving him away as my son is his eye color. Most of Sonny’s body is covered in muscles, his long blonde hair fluffed out around his shoulders in an exact imitation of his mother’s hairdo. I move forward to take him in my arms.

Sonny clings to me for a moment. It’s been quite a while since we last saw each other, my son preferring to live out his life as a recluse, in a sanctuary away from the cosmos.

When he releases me, Sonny pulls back to arm’s length distance. “Please, Father, make yourself at home. I will get some blood for you.” As I sit down in a recliner, Sonny makes his way over to his cupboard, pulling down a cup. With a wave of his hand, the cup fills with blood, which he hands to me. “Actually, I was expecting you. The family that you are obsessed with is in trouble. I knew you would come to me for help.”

My son didn’t need to learn magick, he was born with it. Sonny knows more magick than I ever will know, he is more powerful than I. The difference between us is that Sonny refuses to use the power that he has, preferring to live as a simple human.

“I see that you have grimoires on your bookshelf. Have you been practicing new magick on your own, Son?” Sonny picks up a cup off the table, choosing to sit across from me.

“Only a few books. I knew that someday someone would come to me needing my help. Little did I know that someone would be you, Father.” Sonny takes a sip of his drink. “Your partner is in trouble, and because of this, you come to me for help. You want me to rescue her. Well, father…” Sonny stares at me, a sad look on his face. “…I cannot. But I can tell you where she is being held.”

“Cannot…” I ask, my temper rising. “…or will not?”

“Cannot.” Sonny gives me a calm look. “I will have other roles to play in this before all is finished. You will have to rescue your love if that’s possible. In the meantime, I will be working on the ending.”

“The ending?” I give Sonny a confused look. “What part do you have to play in the ending, Son?” Sonny shrugs his shoulders. Always talking in riddles… “Luna came to me last night, telling me that I have a large part to play in the final battle, to get prepared. Your new children are the future, I am the present. I will meet you at the end.” An address flashes in my mind, a nightclub in the Topaz realm. “There is where you will find your love, Father. I hope you will be able to succeed. I will see you when the time is right.”

I reluctantly stand to go, my hand reaching out to take Sonny’s in mine. My son stands up, once again wrapping his arms around me in a tight hug. “You know, Son…” tears fill my eyes as I stare at my first-born son. I wish Athena could see him now. “…I love you more than I can ever tell you. I just wish the two of us…” Sonny gives me a squeeze before commenting “No end of time speeches, Father. I couldn’t stand it if this were our last time to speak. Let’s suffice it by saying goodbye for now and leave it at that.” Sonny gives me a large smile and then waves his hand, sending me to the address that he gifted me with.

Once there, I kill three guards standing outside the club by using magick. The second they are killed, I blink to bring Adam, Frankie and Bobby to my location. “Tommy and Gee are here. Just let me get the door open and…” As soon as I fill them in on what’s going on, I open the door to the back of the club, Adam rushing past me before I can stop him. I hiss out “ADAM!” to stop him in his tracks, but he won’t listen to me.

In front of me I see guards being flung left and right as Adam snaps their necks, throwing them against the walls of the hallway. When we make it to the door to the basement, I surround Adam with a white light of protection, which makes him grunt. “I don’t need that shit, Dam!” He then swings open the door which leads to another closed room, with six guards posted outside the door.

Adam and Bobby decimate the guards in quick order, blood splattered everywhere on the walls and door. When I use a spell to open the next door, nothing happens. Bobby tries to pry it open with a crowbar, but nothing. Frankie and I try every spell that we can think of but no dice. Finally, I call out “Sonny, a little help for your old man, please.”

The door swings open on its own.

“Thank you!” I bellow, rushing into the room into a group of guards. When they turn to us, Adam rushes them, knocking most of them off their feet. In no time, the four of us destroy the guards as Gee and Tommy call out to us from across the room.

Frankie is the first to rush to their sides, scooping up his pups in one arm, while lifting Gee to her feet. Within a few seconds, the four of them are gone.
Bobby stays by the door, in case more guards show up. When Adam and I stop by Tommy’s side, the two of us gasp loudly when our eyes lock on Tommy.
She is at least three months pregnant.

Our kids reach out to us to be picked up, happy smiles on their faces. I scoop them up in my arms, holding them close to my chest. Tommy weakly smiles at us, struggling to stand up from her place on the floor, her eyes downcast as if embarrassed at her condition. When Adam reaches out to help her up, she avoids touching him as if he were diseased, using the wall to pull herself up into a standing position.

Bobby calls from the door “Hurry! More are coming!” Bobby runs to my side, and I call out “Please send us home, Sonny!” The air around us turns chilly as the room begins to slip away. The next thing we know, we are at the living room of the mansion.

Bobby looks from one to the other of us, calling out “Thank fuck you’re safe, TJ! I’m gonna go check on Frank and Gee.” Bobby practically runs out of the room, sensing that we need some private time.

I blink and Tommy and the children are clean, all of them wearing clean clothes. Adam, sensing that Tommy doesn’t want to be the center of attention, picks up Draven and Gabriel, holding them both tight against him in an affectionate hug.

Adam asks “Dam, who is Sonny? Why were you calling out to him?”

I continue to stare at TJ, who will not make eye contact with me. “Sonny is my oldest son.” I proceed to fill Tommy and Adam in on Sonny’s and my history. “When he reached the age of thirty, he left to find his own way. He always was a recluse, living as if the world caused him pain to live in it. He inherited immortality from his mother, and my magick skills, which we soon found out surpassed my ability. Sonny is the sweetest man I’ve ever met, there isn’t an evil bone in his body—and that’s saying something coming from me! He’s just like his mother…” Tears fill my eyes as I think of my son, who has always meant the world to me. “Mikey has always been close to him too, only losing contact with him about two years ago. But he and I were estranged for a while. I think he fears the evil in me, what I’m capable of, even though he loves me.”

Tears fill Tommy’s eyes, a gentle cascade of them flowing down her face. “To think that you have had a son all this time, and we didn’t know anything about him.” I look from Adam to Tommy, a sad look on my face. “I swear to the two of you, I didn’t intend to hide him from you. It’s just that we haven’t seen each other in so long, and it hurt to talk about losing him.” With a sigh, I comment “He mentioned that he will be at the end of this war, whatever that means. He wouldn’t explain what he meant by that. I just hope that the two of you will have a chance to meet him, get to know him. I know that the two of you will like him.” Adam nods once in response. “I’m sure that we will, Dam. I can’t wait to meet him, and I’m sure Tommy feels the same way.” Tommy nods once as she reaches out to take Gabe from Adam. “The children will be hungry soon. Can we go to our rooms, please?” Adam nods, and the five of us head upstairs to our bedroom.

An hour later, with Tommy and the children fed and sleeping, Adam grabs my arm and drags me out of our suite. The second we come to the threshold to the library, he hisses out “WHAT THE ACTUAL FUCK?” I nod, dragging Adam further into the room. “I understand trauma, and I understand why she will not look at us, but how much the fuck longer will she take to acknowledge the fucking bastard she is carrying???” I try to wrap my arms around Adam, but he pushes me off him. “You heard me! I tried to bring the subject up more than once and she changed the subject every single fucking time! I watched her react to her stomach moving, rubbing her belly as if she loved the brat! What in the fuck are we going to do about it?!”

I try once again to wrap my arms around Adam, and this time he lets me. “Ad, the girl was only just rescued an hour ago! Pushing her to talk will only cause her to push back, clam up. Give it some time.” Adam grunts in frustration. “TIME??? By the looks of her stomach, we are running out of time! She will give birth soon enough, and THEN what do we do? Welcome the child of our enemy with open arms? How in the fuck can we do that, Dam?” I squeeze Ad, trying to get him to focus on me and calm down. “Ad, you are too wound up to speak to Tommy. Let me give it a try, talk to her in private.” It takes a half an hour to get Adam to agree with my plan. “But if she doesn’t talk to you, she will have to deal with me! I’ll FORCE her to talk to me!”

The following afternoon I nod at Adam, who takes it as his cue to leave me alone with Tommy. “I’m going to the front lines. I’ll see the two of you later.” With a look that tells me to get to it, Adam leaves Tommy and I alone.

As the kids take their nap, I sit down next to Tommy on the bed, taking her hand in mine. At first, she resists, trying to get me to let go of her, but I hold on tightly. “Tommy, honey…we need to talk.”

Tommy looks down at my hand, a shiver running through her slight frame. When she fails to respond, I go right for the jugular. “It’s about the baby you’re carrying, Tommy. We need to discuss it, before you go into labor.”

Tommy pulls back from my touch as if I burned her. “I…don’t know…” One hand ends up on her stomach, as if protecting the baby from my grasp. “…what you want me to say. I’m pregnant, Dam. There’s little to be done about it but have the baby.”

I gently brush the hair out of Tommy’s eyes. “How do you feel about it? I mean…” Tommy’s hand moves across her stomach as the baby kicks sharply. “…do you love the baby? Do you want to keep it? Or do you simply want it to go away, never to be spoken about again?” When Tommy finally makes eye contact with me, her expression is one of disbelief and anger. “Not want the baby? What makes you think that I wouldn’t want the baby? Besides…” Tommy’s face lights up, her eyes gleaming. “…it’s a girl, I just know it is! Wouldn’t it be wonderful to have a little girl, to put in pretty dresses and braid her hair? A sister for the boys to grow up with? You would like a daughter, wouldn’t you, Dam?”

Would I? Could I grow to love Andre’s offspring, knowing that he raped my Tommy to create such a…creature? Or could I open my heart, take in the baby as mine simply because Tommy loves it and wants me to? What about Adam? Could he possibly do the same?

Before I can answer, Tommy grows angrier. “Your silence says it all, Damian. I accepted your children that you raped into me, but you cannot accept a child who is fathered by someone else? Even if it does turn out to be a boy?” Tommy pushes at me, trying to shove me off the bed. “And Adam? Does he feel the same? Does he want to kill my child, who is innocent in all of this?” Tommy pushes back the blankets, exiting the bed on the opposite side from where I am sitting. Standing slowly, Tommy circles the bed to face me head on. With her hands on her hips, she snarls at me “So much for loving me, right Dam? So much for being there for me, no matter what. So much for the vows between us. And so much for my love for you.” Turning on her heels, she heads towards the bathroom, the sound of her sobbing following behind her as she slams the bathroom door…

Later that evening I pull Adam from the front lines to speak to me. “What’s so important, Dam? I’m needed…” I cut him off with “You are needed here more, Ad. I spoke to Tommy…” I cross my arms, my expression grim. “…and you’re not going to like what she said.”

Crossing the room to stand in front of the fireplace, Ad growls out “Let me guess. She loves that little bastard she’s carrying, and she wants us to love it, too. I’m so not ready to put up with this shit, Dam.”

I move to stand in front of Ad, hands on my hips. “She is convinced that it’s a girl, Ad. And she became furious with me when I didn’t immediately say that I would love the kid. She said that, since she accepted Gabe and Draven, we should simply accept her child because it comes from her. But I’m not sure that I can do that. One thing I know for sure…” I level Ad with a serious look. “…is that, if we do not accept the baby as ours, she will never love either of us again.”

Adam throws up his hands over his head in frustration, a growl reverberating from his chest. I quickly take a step backwards to escape his fist as it punches a huge hole in the closest wall. I gingerly reach out, placing my hand gently on Ad’s shoulder. “This is not the way to handle this, Ad!” Adam turns towards me, rage covering his face as he flexes his hand, his arm pulled back to once again slam into the unforgiving wall next to him. “I’ve been doing a lot of thinking about this, and…” I shake the hair off my forehead, my eyes meeting Ad’s. “…I think Tommy is right.”

“RIGHT???” Adam bellows, his hands balling into tighter fists. “How the fuck can she be right about this? How can she take in an enemy’s bastard, love it like she loves the boys? Every time that fucking brat kicks, doesn’t it remind her of her rape? Why isn’t she begging us to kill it when it is born?”

ADAM!” I bellow just as loudly as he did. “What if she is right? What if it is a girl? Could you love it if it is a girl? And could you learn to love it if it is a boy, if only to keep from losing TJ?”

Adam crosses the room to sit down on the couch, and I follow suit. My eyes find the wall that Adam punched, drywall and wiring showing through the jagged holes. “I love Tommy with everything I have, Dam. She is my mate, my first love. I would do anything she asks, would be there for her in every way she needs but this? I…” Tears start to flow down Ad’s face. “…will tolerate the brat, simply because I cannot live without her. But don’t expect me to love it, Dam. She can’t force me to love it. I’ll put on an act if I must, but nothing beyond that.” I take Ad’s hand in mine, pulling until he makes eye contact with me. “She’ll see right through it, Ad. She’ll see that you’re not sincere, and she will hate you for it. We need to speak to her together, make her understand where we are coming from. Hopefully she will meet us halfway.” Adam nods at me, pulling me to my feet. “Then let’s go speak to her, while I’m somewhat calm. Hopefully we can get through to her…”

When we enter our bedroom, Tommy looks up from feeding Gabe, her face set and her eyes challenging us. I smile at her, even though her eyes seem to lock on Adam. “Hey baby. Do you mind if the three of us have a talk?” Remaining silent for a moment, Tommy finally nods at us, gently laying Gabe down next to her. “I have a feeling I know what you want to talk about, Dam. Did you bring Ad in for backup? Or have you both changed your minds?”

Adam snorts loudly, startling poor Gabe. The babe begins to cry, causing Tommy to pick him back up again. “It’s okay, honey. Your father seems to have lost his manners, that’s all. Momma’s here, go to sleep sweetheart.” Gabe rubs his eyes and sniffles a bit, settling back down instantly as soon as Tommy lays him back down next to her.

Ad starts with “Dam spoke with me, Tommy. He told me that you love the baby, that you want to keep it. Why do you want this baby, after what happened to you? Aren’t you afraid that every time you look at the child, you will remember the rape?”

Tommy gently runs her hand down Gabe’s back as she bites back “I got over Dam raping me, what makes you think I couldn’t get over another?” Adam responds with “Why not remove the reminder from your life? That way…”

Tommy slowly rises from the bed, her face white as marble. “So, you’ve made up your mind, huh Adam? You’ve decided that you can’t love this baby, even before you’ve seen it? It will always be an enemy to you, no matter what I say or do. What if it is a girl, Adam? Will you hate it as much if it were a boy?”

Adam reaches out to pull Tommy into his arms, but she steps back out of his reach. “I’ll love it if it is a girl, Tommy. I cannot make any promises about how I will feel if it is a boy. I’m just being honest with myself about my feelings. You cannot hold that against me babes. Hell, I’ve still haven’t forgiven Dam for hurting you! How can I simply pretend that all is well if it isn’t?”

Tommy stands still for a moment, both hands on her stomach. In a quiet voice, she asks me “Do you feel the same, Dam? Would you hate the baby if it is a boy? Or could you see past everything and grow to love it?” I pause for a moment before responding “I hate to say it, but I feel the same way Ad does. But who’s to say that my feelings might change in the future? Once the baby’s born…”

Tommy shakes her head. It seems the three of us are at an impasse. “At least the two of you are willing to love the baby if it is a girl, that’s something. But I won’t lie; my feelings are severely hurt that you wouldn’t just accept the baby regardless. I expected you to love it based on the idea that you love me. The baby comes from ME, regardless of who the father is! That should be enough for you to love it, no questions asked. Maybe the two of you simply do not love me as much as I thought.” Tommy turns to return to our bed, but Adam stops her by grabbing her arm. “Tommy Joe, Dam and I love you more than you will ever know. You are our everything, my mate, and the love of both our lives. No one could love you more than we do. It’s BECAUSE we love you so much that the two of us are scared to bring that baby into our lives. We don’t want you hurt by it, by your memories. We just want you happy and healthy, emotionally, and physically. We want the best for you.”

Tommy sighs, slowly raising a hand to wipe tears from her face. “And what if the best thing for me would be for me to keep the baby? Have you even considered that? How much it would destroy me to have the baby torn from my arms, seconds after giving birth? Simply to make the two of you happy?” Tommy’s chest shakes with tremors from crying so hard as the baby kicks her repeatedly, as if reminding her that it is still there, the topic of conversation. “So…” She moves towards me, reaching out to take one of my hands, drawing it toward her stomach. When my fingers touch her night gown, the baby kicks at my fingers, as if trying to communicate with me. “…the best thing to do is to get acquainted, don’t you think? How else will the baby mean something to you if you do not get to know it. Ad…?” Tommy turns towards Adam, beckoning him to come to her by reaching out to take one of his hands. “…please come here. Just try, that’s all I ask of you.” Adam stands still for another moment, lost in thought. Just as Tommy begins to give up hope, dropping her hand to her side, Ad steps forward, placing gentle fingers alongside mine. The three of us remain frozen in place while the baby continues to try to get closer to our touch.

I look into Tommy’s happy face, and the only thought that I have is that no matter what the future brings—I can never lose the love of my life.

Ad and I spend as much time with Tommy over the next three weeks as we can. Security is tightened, not only outside but inside the house as well. The addition of so many guards seem to make Tommy nervous, so she decides to spend as much time within our bedroom/nursery as possible.

The boys, taking after their half-brother Sonny, continue to grow in leaps and bounds. Tommy weans them earlier than she wishes to, a certain sadness settling over her about our babies growing up so fast. I tell Adam that, since Tommy is spending less time with the boys as babies, maybe it’s the real reason that she wants the baby she is carrying so badly. She wants to slow down parenthood.

The next thing we know, the boys are five years old. The evening it happens, Draven walks up to me, asking to be picked up. The second I do, he recites “Advra macrodia advis unvecumn” and proceeds to grow another foot or so in my arms. I hear Tommy squeal from the next room, suddenly realizing that she was giving Gabe a bath when Draven uttered his words. I look down at Draven, asking “Where did you get those words, Draven?” Draven giggles, reaching out his hand to tangle it in my long hair. “Luna, papa.”

So, Luna was behind Sonny’s growth spurts, and the boy’s as well!

Frank comes flying into my room, his face a mixture of fear and incredulousness. “Damian, our children! They’re now five years old or so! What the fuck?” When his eyes land on Draven, Draven gives a giggle and says in a sly voice “Fuck!”

“That’s enough out of you!” I reply, my voice stern. Draven responds by throwing back his head and laughing loudly, his eyes twinkling.

“Draven recited a spell that Luna gave him, and all four boys aged instantly. I’m sorry, Frank. Luna must have a reason for aging the kids so quickly. I’m just sorry that your boys are involved.”

Frank just shrugs his shoulders in response. “Tell that to Gee. She’s freaking out right now, moaning how she is going to lose her babies faster than she’s ready. Let’s just hope Luna knows what she’s doing, because I want my little boys back!”

Just then, there is a pained cry from the bathroom. Frankie and I rush to the doorway to find Tommy leaning against the bathtub, Gabe standing naked behind her. “Dam, my water just broke! Please help me!” Frank reaches out to Gabe, saying “Come with Uncle Frank, Gabe. We’ll go visit Auntie Gee, see what we can find for dinner.” Frank turns to me and says “Don’t worry about them, Gee will take care of them! I’ll be back shortly.” I thank him profusely as he makes his way out the door with both boys in tow.

“C’mon babes, let’s get you changed and then go for a walk. Let’s move this labor along, shall we?” She nods at me, pain on her face. I have a feeling that this baby will come sooner than the boys did.

Forty-five minutes later, Tommy is lying in the middle of our bed, her contractions a minute apart. Ray was currently helping Gee keep track of the four boys, and Mikey and Frankie are in the room with us. Adam is nowhere to be found, even though I have repeatedly reached out to him through magick, trying to bring him to us. I begin to worry, trying my best to keep my thoughts from Tommy, who is doing her best to try and keep calm as her labor progresses.

“You’re doing so well, sweetheart. Soon you will have that darling babe in your arms! One more to love…” I shoot Mikey a dirty look, which she ignores. “I can’t wait to see him or her!”

Suddenly Tommy gets the urge to push, and Frankie gives her the go-ahead. She makes eye contact with me as I smile at her. “I’m here, honey. Scream all you need to, squeeze my hand. I love you.” Tommy gives me a small smile before her face wrinkles up in pain, her breath coming in short gasps.

Another ten minutes goes by, and Frankie gives a loud sound of surprise. The baby is covered in a thick material, which covers its entire body as it slowly appears. “The sac is covering it completely, much like a large cowl. We will have to cut it off the baby so it can breathe.” Frankie grabs the baby tightly, pulling so that the baby is pulled out of Tommy and placed on the bed. Frankie then reaches into his first aid kit and takes out a sharp pair of scissors, trying to cut the sac off the baby. Mikey lays towels down to catch the amniotic fluid when the sac opens.

Tommy cries out “Help my baby, Frankie!” when it becomes apparent the material will not be punctured. Suddenly appearing next to my side, Adam reaches down and somehow manages to grasp the material in his hands, pulling it apart. A rush of fluid covers his hands and arms as he grasps the baby and pulls it out of the sac, cradling it to his chest.

It’s a girl.

“Adam, where the hell have you been? I’ve been trying to reach out to you!” Adam ignores me, spanking the baby to make her cry, then crossing the room to the makeshift table that Frankie set up. He clears the baby’s nose and mouth, immediately washing her all over to remove as much moisture as possible from her skin. Once dry, Adam wraps the baby in a clean towel, moving across the room to place the baby on Tommy’s bare chest. “Here Mama! Here is our daughter!” Tears begin to pour down Tommy’s face, her little nose turning red as she sniffles, a huge smile on her face.

“Babies born within a sac like this are said to hold special powers. Maybe our little girl will be a witch, Dam?” Adam asks, his huge hand reaching out to play with the newborn’s curls. Frankie and Mikey clean up the bed and remove the towel, after cleaning between Tommy’s legs. I blink, redressing Tommy to keep her warm, then pulling the blankets all around her. Frankie and Mikey leave quietly, allowing the three of us to have a private moment.

“Seriously, Ad…” I wrap my arms around Adam, holding him tightly. “…what the fuck happened to you? I tried so hard to bring you here…” Ad looks deep into my eyes, a small smirk on his face. “I met your son, Dam. He saved my life.” Ad goes on to tell how he was severely injured on the battlefield, left for dead. “The next thing I know, I am in a beautifully furnished room, and a handsome young man is reading a grimoire while kneeling over me. When I try to talk, he hushes me. “I’m Sonny, and you are here for me to save you.” I look next to me, and Bobby is lying there, bleeding from the chest. Sonny lays hands on him, and the wound closes. I feel dizzy for a few seconds and then he lays hands on me, and I am healed.”

“Sonny sent Bobby immediately home, but he pulls me up off the floor, seating me in a comfortable chair. He pours me a cup of blood and sees to my comfort, telling me about his relationship with you. He was so calm, so kind. It took me a while to gain my strength back, and the whole time he talked to me, trying to keep me calm. The moment I felt better he pulls me to my feet, enveloping me in a firm hug. “I’m glad I could help you, Adam. It was a pleasure meeting you. Please send my love to my father. Your baby is being born, and they will be needing your help. I hope to see you again soon.” The next thing I know, I am here.”

Tears fill my eyes. “I love that boy so much! I need to visit him and thank him for saving you.” Tommy softly comments “I’d like to meet him too, give him my thanks. He truly is a god send.” I throw back my head and scream “Sonny! PLEASE come here! I promise it will only be for a moment.” There is a blinding light, and Sonny arrives in our bedroom, a small smile on his face. “Father! I…” he looks around at Adam and Tommy, and I can see him…change. He looks scared, nervous. Tommy, seeing this, uses her mothering skills to calm Sonny down. “Sonny, my name is Tommy Joe. Adam…” she points at Ad, who nods at Sonny, a large smile on his face. “…you already know. We all just wanted to say thank you for saving Adam for us.” Tommy reaches out a hand towards Sonny. “Come, meet our new daughter! You sent Adam here to help her be born just in the nick of time.”

Sonny takes the few steps towards the bed, reaching down to run his hand over the baby. “She will grow up to be a powerful witch. She will help her brothers rule the cosmos, will heal and protect all that need her. She will be great indeed.” Tommy smiles at Sonny, thanking him for his prophecy. “You are a part of our family, Sonny. You are not alone. We are here for you.” Sonny gently sits down on the side of the bed, tears in his eyes. “I’ve been praying you would accept me as part of your own. As much as I need to be alone, it is lonelier than I expected it to be. I hope there is a place for me amongst your large family.”

Adam moves towards the bed, wrapping his arms around Sonny. “You are one of us, Sonny. You always will be. I am so happy that our children will grow up to know you.” Sonny returns Adam’s hug. After a few minutes, I take Adam’s place. Embracing my son and pulling him close to me, I kiss his cheek. “I love you, Son. Thank you for everything.”

Sonny stays with us for an hour, taking his turn at holding his half-sister. He whispers words foreign to us, but they cause the baby to smile and laugh at Sonny. It appears that they feel a connection towards each other already. When the baby gurgles nonsense at Sonny, he turns to Tommy and exclaims “She wants to be named Alondra, Tommy.” Tommy leans forward, gently placing a hand on Sonny’s arm. “Then Alondra she shall be.”

Suddenly the door to the room opens and Mikey stops in the doorway when she sees Sonny. “SONNY!” she cries out, practically running in her haste to get to his side. Sonny gives Mikey a blinding smile, turning into her arms. “Mikey! I’m so glad you’re here! I’ve missed you!” Tears begin to flow down Mikey’s cheeks, her arms tight around Sonny. “I’ve missed you SO much, my loving boy! I’m so glad you are here, meeting your family. We are all here for you, honey.”

Sonny decides to stay for another hour before declaring that he should get home. “I promise to visit again soon, but it’s time I get back to my grimoires. There’s much to learn before the end, and I want to be ready to help. I love you all.” We each take our turn hugging Sonny, none of us wanting to let go of him. I am the last to pull him into my arms. “I love you, Sonny, more than you will ever know. Thank you for everything. See you soon, promise.” Sonny returns my hug, nodding in response to my words. “I love you too, father. Take good care of yourself.” With a smile and a wave, Sonny disappears.

An hour later, Adam and I are each laying on either side of Tommy, watching her nurse Alondra. When I call out a response to a knock at the door, Ray enters the room, tears flowing down his face.

“Damian, we just received news that Devlin is dead.” A cold chill fills the room, and Tommy gasps out loud in shock. “How did…where did you receive the news from, Ray?” Ray walks over to me, wrapping his arms around me. “Devlin was killed on the Pearl realm, where we were hiding him. A group of rebels led by Andre found him and dismembered him. There isn’t even enough of him to bury. I’m so sorry.”

Fate is a funny thing. In one day, my oldest son and new daughter have joined our family, and at the same time I lost my younger son. We hid Devlin to protect him, but we failed. A sense of panic makes me want to bring Sonny back to us, to hold onto him and never let him go.

How much more does this family have to lose before this nightmare is over?

As I watch Adam wrap his arms around Tommy, both crying, a feeling of hatred and a desire to kill like I’ve never felt before takes over me. There must be a way to end this nightmare…and I’m going to find it.

Chapter Text

I cannot believe that my son Devlin is dead. Thinking that he was to be the one to take over leadership of the Dark realm after my demise (and therefore be a family leader), we decided to put him somewhere ‘safe’ when the war started. Little did we know that he would end up a casualty of this fucking war…

Word of Devlin’s death affects each of us differently. Ray and Mikey, who have both lost first Andrew, then Devlin, become quiet and ghost-like, keeping their grief to themselves. Adam responds with continual rage, scaring poor Tommy and the children with his constant pacing, fist slamming, and cursing. He spends most of his time at the front lines, trying his hardest to get out his frustrations in battle.

Tommy, as Devlin’s mother, takes the news the hardest. She focuses all her time and energy on Draven, Gabriel, and Alondra. She rarely speaks to the adults in the house, no matter how much we try to get through to her. Permanent dark circles surround her eyes, and she loses weight. I try my hardest to convince her to drink, but she pushes glasses of blood away from her, having little to no interest in drinking. Frankie tries to get through to her in his role as her healer, insisting that she needs her strength to care for the children, but she ignores him. I’m so worried about her, fearing that one day I will awaken to find her dead in our bed.

I try my best to keep my grieving to myself, preferring instead to reach out to help my partners in any way possible. Adam pushes me away every time I try to touch him, and Tommy rarely registers that I’m there, even though we sleep in the same bed each night. I end up frustrated as fuck, having no way to help those that I love, so I do the next best thing—I focus on revenge.

After a little digging, I find out that Andre has a fledgling. According to rumor, she is the closest bond that he has. Upon hearing this, I immediately set out to kidnap her.

I find her one evening leaving a club with a few friends. As I follow her, she veers off from her friends, heading towards her home all alone. That’s when I strike…

I take her to a deserted warehouse in the Dark realm, chaining her to a table in much the same way I did to Tommy so long ago, the same way that Andre chained Tommy down when he first raped her. The light from the one overhead lamp shines down on the chains surrounding her limbs. When she finally comes to, the first thing she does is try to spit on me. “How…why am I here? Who the fuck are you? LET ME GO!” I laugh as I watch her struggle to free herself. “Relax, little Stephanie! You’re here because your maker killed my son and raped my mate. Since I cannot make him pay, I will make you pay in his place.” I circled to the front of the table, my fist pummeling the girl’s face until blood drips steadily onto the tabletop below her. I then blink to bring Adam to join me.

“Dam, what the fuck? I was at the front…” Ad stops, his face showing his confusion as he drops his sword on the floor. “Who is this? And why do you have her chained to the table?” I throw a punch, connecting with Stephanie’s nose, breaking it, her strangled moan of pain filling the air. “This little bitch is Andre’s fledgling, Ad. I figured since we cannot seem to find the bastard to make him pay for his crimes, the least we can do is punish his bitch for what he did to Andrew, Tommy and Devlin.”

I have known my Adam for a long, long time. I was the first one to turn him into a vampire, I was the one to give him the evil that he carries in his soul. Over time, I have seen the best and the worst of him. I know that there is a part of Ad that is a good man, a fair vampire who wouldn’t harm a soul. No wonder they chose him to take Ray’s place as King of the Light realm Council.

Since Luna released the evil that lurks deep inside of Adam, except for the love that he holds for Tommy, the children and I, I have seen nothing from him but pure evil. As Ad stares down at the young girl in front of him, an evil grin slowly takes over his handsome face. “Heal her, Dam. Let me play with her.”

I don’t think I’ve ever been so proud…

The moment Stephanie’s face is healed, Adam punches her, blackening both her eyes. One more swing breaks her nose, blood and snot raining down on the table below her. I watch Ad unzip his pants and pull out his dick as he sinks a hand into her hair.

“Bite me, bitch, and I’ll pull out all of your teeth. Open your fucking mouth.”

Stephanie gasps for breath seconds before Ad sinks his dick deep into the girl’s mouth, his balls hitting her chin. Tears fill her eyes as Ad starts a brutal pace, her struggles becoming weaker as she tries and fails to keep up with him.

I must admit—I get a thrill watching him punish the little bitch. It turns me on to see Ad lose control, to be nothing but violent and vicious, to leave his ‘good guy’ persona behind for once.

“Fuck, what a mouth! You need to take a turn Dam…” Ad picks up the pace, his hand pinching the bitch’s nose closed until she passes out. The moment she does, Adam slaps her face to wake her up. When she comes to, Ad repeats the process, an evil smirk on his face.

Vampires can go a long, long time without having an orgasm. Deciding he wants to try something new; Ad pulls out of Stephanie’s mouth and circles behind her. I hear what sounds like a death rattle coming from the bitch, her shallow gasps slowing down to next to nothing as her head droops forward, her hair covering her face. Once again, Ad yells out “Heal her, Dam” before yanking down her pants to her ankles, moving forward to slam into her with one go. I do as he asks, and Stephanie screams out in pain as Ad bottoms out deep inside of her.

Never in my wildest dreams…or nightmares…did I ever think it would be possible for my sweet Ad to rape an innocent. I stand there in shock as Ad grabs the bitch by the hips, slamming in and out of her at a rapid pace. Stephanie screams at the top of her lungs, immediately irritating Ad, who yells at me “Shut her the fuck up, Dam!”

I move to stand in front of Stephanie’s face, lifting her chin until she makes eye contact with me. With a sneer, I comment “I hope you try to bite me, bitch. It would give me an excuse to rip your jaw off…” I sink my fingers into the corners of her mouth, forcing her to open her mouth wide. I then move forward to shove my cock down her throat, feeling her tongue try to block my progress. I grab her by the ears and shove forward, enjoying the broken sounds she makes as she continues to try and break free of her chains as she gags.

Adam smirks at me over Stephanie’s back, obviously enjoying himself. He leans forward so he can capture my lips with his, Ad’s tongue ravaging my mouth. Our kiss deepens, the two of us reaching for each other as our thrusts inside the bitch increase.

After what feels like forever, Adam’s movements shudder to a stop as he comes deep within the bitch below us. Stephanie moans around my cock as she feels Ad’s come flooding her insides. Adam rocks his hips a few more times before stilling within her body, refusing to pull out. I pump my hips a few more times before coming down her tight throat.

“Best fucking idea you ever had, Dam! Want to change places?” I nod in response. “There won’t be much left to her by the time we’re through with her.”

Ad and I spend the next six hours marathoning the bitch before Ad turns to me and says “I guess we better head home to Tommy, Dam. Will it be safe to leave her here, all alone?” I wave a hand and three members of the Vampaire suddenly appear. “They will make sure that she stays where she is, babes. You’re right, we need to be with our mate. We can have more fun with this bitch later.”

When we arrive at the mansion, we find Tommy bathing Gabe and Draven together in our huge bathtub. Adam leans down and kisses Tommy, who immediately pulls away from him, her eyes glowing with rage. “So…” Tommy stands, hands on her hips. “…who is she, Ad?”

I try to cut in and explain, but Tommy turns towards me, her nostrils flaring. “You too, Dam? Here I am taking care of your children, and the two of you…” Adam reaches into the tub to pull out the plug, while I grab a towel and begin to dry off Draven. “It’s not like that, Tommy! You see, I kidnapped Andre’s fledgling…” Tommy grabs another towel, wiping down Gabe with firm, quick strokes that show her anger. “…so, you hurt her? HOW COULD YOU?” Tommy yanks Draven out of my grip, scooping up Gabe as well and then storming out of the bathroom. I blink and the children are dressed and ready for bed. Tommy ignores us until both children are tucked into the nursery next to our bedroom. We all kiss and hug the children before turning out the light, saying goodnight to them.

Storming back into our room, Tommy faces us with her hands on her hips. “After what happened to me, how could you possibly hurt her? After seeing what it did to me, you should’ve just left her alone! Does EVERYONE have to hurt before this fucking war is over?” Alondra starts crying in her crib, her hands reaching out for Tommy, who picks her up before Ad and I can even get near her.

Ad’s voice raises as he replies “It’s because of you, and Andrew, and Devlin that we hurt her, Tommy! Andre needs to pay for what he has done…”

“…NOT BY HURTING AN INNOCENT, ADAM!” Alondra cries harder, her back stiff and her eyes closed as she kicks, trying to escape Tommy’s wrath. Tommy bares a breast and places Alondra onto her, but the babe resists, instead practically throwing herself out of Tommy’s arms in protest. Tommy sighs and lays the baby down on the bed next to her, trying her best to gain her composure.

“Tommy, we didn’t want you to know. I’m sorry that you are so upset, darling, but we were…” Tommy cuts me off by snarling “Dam, I know what you were trying to do! But don’t you see? You hurt this girl, and then Andre feels that he has to repay the damage by hurting someone else in our family! Before you know it, every member of our family will pay for one thing or another, all of us suffering! What if he comes back after me as a way to punish the two of you…”

“NO!” Adam screams, causing Alondra to jump, her cries louder. I reach down and pick her up, rocking her against me, trying my hardest to calm her down. Adam glances at Alondra and lowers his voice, snarling out “That bastard will NEVER get to you again, Tommy Joe!” Tommy laughs, her tone harsh. “That’s what we thought the last time! He can hurt any of us at any time! He told me so much while he was raping me! He’s just looking for an excuse to destroy each of us…” Tears fill Tommy’s eyes. “He already destroyed our son, what is to stop him from killing Ray, or Mikey, or even the two of you…” Adam looks at me, and I blink, masking his scent. I nod, and he walks up to the bed, taking Tommy in his arms, rocking her back and forth. Tommy lays her head down on Ad’s chest, crying for the first time since Devlin was murdered. She closes her eyes and, in a shaky voice, barks out “What if you’re next, Ad? Or Dam? I couldn’t stand it, I wouldn’t survive without you…”

Ad hushes Tommy, his arms tightening around her. “I’m here, baby, and so is Dam. We are with you, always honey. We’ll do everything in our power to survive this war, to spend eternity with you. You’ll always be ours, babes, always with us. Just have faith.” Tommy gives a small nod in return. “I’m trying, Ad…but our boy…”

Tommy cries twice as hard, bringing tears to both mine and Ad’s eyes. Thank fuck she is finally breaking down, instead of holding it in…

I gingerly sit on the side of the bed, taking one of Tommy’s hands in mine. In a soft voice I say “Baby, it was my idea to kidnap that girl. I’m sorry that, by doing so, I have upset you so badly. I was so enraged by what Andre had done, the only thing that I wanted to do was to make someone pay for the pain we all felt. Please forgive me for my actions, honey. But I will be truthful with you…” Tommy opens tearful eyes, focusing on me as she waits for my next words. “I do not regret what I have done. I hope you understand.” Adam places a finger under Tommy’s chin, gently raising her head until their eyes meet. “I feel the same way as Dam, darling. I regret nothing.”

Tommy sighs deeply, her hand reaching out to wipe at the tears streaming down her face. “I long ago gave up leadership of this family, back when Devlin was born. I’ve accepted that the two of you and our father are the real leaders of this family. My job is to raise our children and love my mates, be here for all of you. I do not control what you do, or what your evil makes you do. If you really thought that you were doing the right thing for our family, then there is nothing more I can say except that my heart goes out to that girl, since I was in her place. I know what she’s feeling right now. I hope no more innocents are hurt in this wretched war.” With that, Tommy completely breaks down in Ad’s arms, hiding her face against Ad’s chest. I stand up and pace the room, rocking Alondra as she drifts back to sleep before laying her down in her crib.

Over the next three hours, the three of us take turns crying in each other’s arms. By the end of the evening, we feel that much closer to each other, our bond finally rejuvenated.

Just as I think that Tommy has finally fallen asleep between us, she quietly says “I can’t help it, I have to say it one more time. I beg both of you to release her, set her free to go home and try to rebuild her life. The only one who is paying is the girl, Andre will never suffer as she does. Please know that I love the two of you with all my heart. I’m scare as to what will happen next.” Adam curls up behind her and wraps his arm around Tommy’s middle as she lays her head down on my chest, all three of us drifting off into a restless sleep.

Ray surprises Ad and I with his response when he finds out what we have done to Stephanie. “I hope she suffers the same way Devlin did.” Mikey takes Ray’s hands in hers. “No, Ray. That’s not the way to gain an advantage. It will only make him choose another victim.” Ray turns on Mikey, his voice raised. “HE HAS TO PAY for his CRIMES, Mikey! It’s about time that he suffers the way we are suffering!”

Ad and I play with Stephanie for a few more days, beating and using her within an inch of her undead life. We videotape it and send it out to the cosmos, hoping that Andre sees it. The last thing the bitch whispers to me is “My maker will make you pay.” I laugh in response, tweaking her broken nose before slicing her throat and blinking her home.

Tommy and Mikey quietly accept what Ad and I do, neither making another comment. Bobby, Ray, Pete and Frankie all defend us to their mates, who are as shocked as Tommy and Mikey at our violent acts. One evening I accidently overhear a conversation on the back porch between Tommy, Trick and Gee.

“How could they do that?” Gee asks, their voice shocked. “I mean, I know that Dam is capable of it, but Adam? I’d never in my wildest dreams think that he would rape an innocent.”

“My mate has changed, Gee. He’s not the same vamp I fell in love with. Ad’s is still gentle with the children, but he scares all of us with his attitude most of the time. He explodes in a rage at the smallest things, making the children cry and jump when he is near. The Adam that I first met would never hurt anyone, would hardly even raise his voice! For all this and more, I blame Dam.”

Tommy’s words bring a smirk to my lips. Little does she know…but wait a minute…she does know me well, so…

“Ray was grumbling the other night about how many holes Adam has punched into the walls since the war started” Trick interjects, his voice soft as if afraid that Adam would come around the corner any minute and overhear them. “When Ray told Adam that he was going to make him pay to fix the walls, and Adam answered by punching another hole in the wall and walking away.”

“How does he get along with Alondra, Tommy?” Gee asks, concern flooding their voice. I hear Tommy sigh before answering “Better than I expected Gee. He really seems to love her, volunteering to rock her to sleep and change her diapers. I’m beginning to think that she is the only one in the house not afraid of him.” Tommy gives a little laugh before continuing with “I’m sure our lack of sex is playing into the situation as well, adding to his rage.”

Gee gasps softly. “No…nothing? I mean, I know what you went through, I experienced it firsthand. But I thought by now…” Tommy cuts Gee off with a sad laugh. “…no Gee, nothing between us. Not by his lack of trying, Dam too. I just can’t…” Trick, ever the considerate and enthusiastic one of the group says “Well, that makes sense, considering all you have been through! Just give it time, Tommy! I’m sure that…” I can practically hear Tommy shaking her head in denial. “…no, Trick, I’m not…”

There is silence for a moment as Mikey joins the group on the porch. After hellos are said, Trick fills Mikey in on the topic of conversation. “Tommy says she’s not ready to have sex with Adam and Damian yet.”

“Well, give it time, Tommy. It’s only been two months since Alondra was born! I’m sure you will…” Tommy cuts off Mikey, her voice firm. “…I don’t think so, Mother. I’d be happy if I never have sex again! We have plenty of children, no need to have sex to create any more. No, I’d just be happy if Ad and Dam would just leave me alone for eternity…”

I can’t let this challenge go without a fight!

I walk out onto the porch. “Evening, ladies, my darling Trick.” I walk over to Trick, wrapping my arms around him and gently kissing his forehead. The hug I receive in return makes me smile. “Hello, papa” Trick smiles at me, his eyes wide. I love this boy SO much!

I turn my attention to Alondra, lying wide awake in Tommy’s arms. I give her a kiss on the cheek, whispering “How’s daddy’s baby?” as I suddenly pull her out of Tommy’s arms and turn, placing her into Trick’s arms. Just as Tommy goes to make a complaint, I pick her up and place her on my lap, her ass rubbing against my hard dick as I sit down. I place a hand at the back of her head, pulling her in until my lips lock on hers with enthusiasm. As she moans out a complaint, I use my tongue to part her lips, deepening the kiss. I hear Mikey and Gee moan softly as my hands begin to run over Tommy’s back and side, my lips devouring hers as the kiss turns passionate. I feel Tommy’s hesitation mellow into acceptance of my actions, even as she fights my will. Pulling back a few inches, and without looking at the others, I ask “Ladies, Trick? Will you please watch over our little angel for a while? Her mother and I have…things to do…” All three agree to watch over Alondra, as Tommy gives me a destressed look. “Dam, it’s not fair to drop her on everyone at the last second! Let’s take her upstairs and…”

I stand with Tommy in my arms, thanking everyone as I walk into the house and up to our bedroom. Once there, I lay Tommy down on the middle of our bed, my body coming to rest over hers. “Hello, lovely” I comment, pulling back just enough to pull my shirt up over my head, throwing it on the floor. Tommy’s eyes register panic as I lean down and devour her lips again, my hands gently cupping and squeezing her breasts. Pulling away, she says “Don’t! I’ll leak…” I gently tug Tommy’s shirt up over her head, my lips gentle as I lean back down to kiss her chest all over.

“Dam…” I hear frustration in her voice as she continues with “…I don’t want…” I cut in with “…me to love you, darlin? I just want to show my appreciation to the mother of my children…” I kiss her again, watching her eyes close as I lick the inside of her lips. This isn’t about me winning the battle (but at the same time, it still is) but instead it is my chance to show Tommy just how much she means to me.

I slowly kiss my way from her lips, down her neck where I gently slide my fangs into her neck, causing her to arch her back as a moan escapes her lips. I suck gently for a moment before pulling away, my lips returning to her swollen breasts, giving them my full attention a moment before pulling away again.

I tower over Tommy, my hands roaming over her skin as I watch her bite her bottom lip. “Baby, I just want to love you. I want nothing in return, I just want to show you how much you mean to me. Please let me…” I wait for a moment, stilling all motion. I watch multiple emotions cross Tommy’s face, from fear to repulsion to…love? She tries her hardest to hide them from me, but I can read her as easily as if she were hiding behind a pane of glass. I want my baby to feel loved, the last thing I want to do is push myself on her…

“Tommy, do you trust me?” Tommy hesitates a few seconds before giving me a small nod, fear still taking her over. “I promise that I won’t ask anything from you, darling, that you are not willing to give. Just let me love you, show you how much I care…” When I receive no further push back, I place my hands on the waist band of Tommy’s jeans and panties. I hear her gasp in shock as I slowly pull them down, throwing them on the floor next to the bed. My eyes slowly take in all of Tommy as I softly say “Baby, you are SO beautiful!” I can see that she doesn’t believe me, so I gently run my fingers over the lower half of her body, stroking softly till Tommy arches off the bed slightly.

“Just relax, baby.” I stick my tongue into her belly button to make her laugh. Then with my left hand wrapped around her length, I pull softly. “I love your body, your male and female parts. Every inch of you is so beautiful, so special.” I pull Tommy’s cock until it is flush against my lips, hear her gasp as I open my mouth and suck on the tip before taking in the first few inches.

Tears fill Tommy’s eyes as I lower my head, taking every inch of her beautiful cock into my mouth. I reach up to brush the tears away before taking one of her hands in mine. I start a slow rhythm, bobbing my head up and down as I suck on her length, my tongue brushing against the underneath. I continue to suck until I get an idea. As I pull back, I hear Tommy’s strangled moan of disappointment.

I make eye contact with Tommy as I say “Baby, I’ve had an idea. Ad and I haven’t really…well, we’ve let you down, I think. We don’t pay enough attention to your lady parts! So…” Tommy looks at me in complete confusion as I say “…honey, please spread your legs and pull them back. I have a surprise for you…”

Tommy does as I ask, spreading her legs and bending her knees back until I can see between her legs. Since acquiring lady parts, Tommy has always been adamant about not letting Ad and I touch or even look between her legs like this unless she is giving birth, preferring to allow us to only play with her back door and her dick instead. It’s almost as if she is embarrassed about the way she looks. I lower my head and look and…there it is! My baby has a sweet little clit, hidden away in her folds! It’s time that she loses the shyness so she can have a little fun…

I smile at Tommy as I reach down between her legs. Using my forefinger, I gently rub her clit, watching as her eyes bulge in shock. When she doesn’t protest, I rub a bit harder. Tommy moans loudly, her hand covering her mouth as she tries to be quiet. With a chuckle, I say to her “let it out, darlin! I want to hear what you’d sound like when I do this…” I lower my head, my tongue making contact with Tommy’s clit, rubbing back and forth as I rub my hands over her parted thighs. Tommy gives a little squeal as I sink my tongue down into her slit, moving forward until it is deep inside her.

I spend the next ten minutes or so alternating between stroking her clit and tonguing her pussy. I feel her slowly tensing up, coming to a peak as I lean my head back, looking into her eyes. “C’mon, baby, let go and come. I know you want to. Just relax and let it happen…”

I dive back in, stroking my fingers in time with my tongue. Suddenly, Tommy grabs the sheet under her, her head tossing side to side as she begins shivering, a loud moan leaving her lips as her sweetness flavors my tongue, her length shooting onto her stomach and chest, coming through both sex organs at the same time.

I continue with my ministrations until Tommy’s moans begin to sound strangled with stress, knowing that I have pushed her too far. With a kiss to each thigh, I lower Tommy’s legs back down on the bed. Raising my head, I lean in and give her a deep kiss, letting her taste herself on my lips and tongue.

“How was that my love?” Tommy’s eyes fill with tears as she softly says “I…how did you know to…” I give a short laugh, my eyes locking onto hers. “Baby, I understand the female body. I know that you acquired your lady parts when you had the boys, that it was Luna’s gift to help you adapt to carrying them. But you have ignored that part of your body for too long, sweetheart. You refuse to let Ad and I touch you there, as if you are ashamed of that part of your body. Baby, your lady parts are beautiful, and you have nothing to be ashamed of.” Tommy raises a hand to stroke my cheek as she asks “But Dam, how did you know…” I pick up Tommy’s hand and lay a kiss to the back of it, smiling as I say “I’ve lived a lot longer that you have, my love. I’ve had a variety of experiences with both sexes. But let me say, you by far are my favorite.” I smile even broader as Tommy blushes, her eyes refusing to meet mine. “I told you that I expect nothing from you tonight, and I meant it. I just wanted to make you happy, to show you there is more than one way to achieve an orgasm, and you should not be ashamed of your body. Hell, someday if you’re game, we can even fuck the old-fashioned way…” Tommy gasps, her hand covering her mouth as she stutters out “You mean…” I laugh out loud, my hand reaching out to brush the hair off Tommy’s forehead. “Yes, I mean “holy shit he put his dick in my pussy” sex! Isn’t that what the hole is there for after all, darlin?” Tommy gives me a half intrigued, half horrified look. “What? Hasn’t it ever crossed your mind to try it? I’m not sure how good Ad will be at cunnilingus, but I’m sure he could rock your world the old-fashioned way…” “DAM!” Tommy squeals out, her face red. “Baby, you are too innocent to have three children! We will have to work on that…” I lean down and capture her lips with mine, wrapping her up in a warm embrace that she melts into. When I pull back, I ask “Are you mad at me? Upset? Did I push you too far?” Tommy gives me a sigh of surrender. “No, I’m not upset or mad. It was just embarrassing to know that you know more about my body than I do, Dam.” I lean back in to kiss the tip of her nose. “That’s why you have to trust your partners to help you figure things out, love. There is more for you to explore if you simply let yourself. I know what has happened to you is horrible, darlin…” Tommy’s eyes once again fill with tears at the thought of what she suffered at Andre’s hand. “…but if you just let us love you, you will find that the good times outweigh the bad.”

Once we dress, we head back to the porch where the ladies are laughing at Trick, who is making funny faces at Alondra to make her giggle. Tommy sits down on a chair near Trick before I take a seat next to her. “I thank all of you for watching the baby while her mother was…occupied.” Everyone chuckles as Tommy leans over and slugs me in the side, her face once again bright red.

“It’s nice to see her relaxed, Dam” Mikey says, mischief in her eyes. She more than anyone else knows that I know how to wear someone out in bed. “It’s also nice to see the color return to her cheeks” Mikey chuckles, watching Tommy’s face turn even redder.

Bobby interrupts our banter, a note in his hand and a solemn look on his face. “I found this note, which has been shoved under the front door. It’s addressed to you, Dam.”

I thank Bobby before opening the note and then read the contents out loud to everyone. “I have taken Ray as my prisoner. He will remain in my custody until such time as you turn your freedom over to me, Damian Lavelli. Ray means little to me, it is your blood that I want to shed. Meet me at Castle Domont in the Dark realm tomorrow at eight in the evening. Come alone or Ray dies.”

Mikey and Tommy immediately burst into tears, clinging to each other. I tuck the note in my pocket and lean down in front of them, taking their hands in mine and squeezing tightly. “I will go tomorrow, Mikey. Ray will come home I’ll see to it. Baby, I’ll be fine. I still have the magick that Luna gave me. I’ll be home before you know it.” Tommy cries even harder, pulling on my hand. “No, you won’t be! I’ll never see you again! I’m gonna lose you…” I lean forward and kiss Tommy to stop her flow of words, hearing Mikey’s sobs grow louder next to me. Alondra, upset at everyone’s tears, begins to wail as well. I stand, taking her in my arms and rocking her against my chest, hushing her as she kicks and punches her little hands and feet against me, as if in protest to my going away.

Gee leads everyone into the house, staying by Mikey’s side. I stop them before they head to Mikey’s bedroom. “I promise, he will come home to you, darlin. Just have faith in me.” Mikey leans forward and kisses my cheek, fresh tears in her eyes flowing down her face. Gee directs Mikey towards her bedroom, saying “I’ll stay with her tonight.” I thank Gee as the two of them head down the hall.

I carry Alondra to our bedroom, Tommy tagging along behind us, her sobs growing louder as I place the baby in her crib. Before I can say anything, she cuts me off by blurting out “I want you to do it.”

I brush back Tommy’s hair as I softly ask “What, babes? Do what?” Her face glowing red with embarrassment, Tommy lowers her eyes to the floor as she asks “I want you to…you know. With my pussy? You said…” I can’t help the sudden smile on my face as I say “You want me to fuck your pussy, baby? Is that what you want me to do?” Tommy quickly nods her head a few times. Before I can say anything else, Ad arrives, scaring both of us.

“I’m starving! Do we have any blood…what’s wrong? Dam, what did you do to her to make her cry like that?”

Without a word, I hand the note to Ad before turning back to Tommy. “Baby, you sure? I mean, we can always another time…”

“YOU MAY NOT BE HERE EVER AGAIN! I WANT TO FEEL YOU INSIDE ME LIKE I’VE NEVER HAD BEFORE, AND I WANT YOU TO DO IT! PLEASE! I’M BEGGING…”

I hush Tommy over Adam’s cursing, taking her in my arms. “Okay, okay babes. I’ll give you want you want. Ad is here with us now, the three of us will have some fun and forget about tomorrow, okay?” Tommy gives me a little nod, a fake smile gracing her face as she tries not to think beyond this minute. “Just give me a minute to catch Ad up on things, hum? Why don’t you get undressed and get into bed, and I’ll join you in a moment, darlin.”

It only takes me a few minutes to fill Ad in on what he missed. “I hope you are not mad, but since I have to go away, Tommy wants me to make love to her. Will you stay with us? This is going to be a new experience for her, and she’s a little nervous. Please hold her hand, love her?” Ad gives me a tight hug, tears in his voice. “Of course, Dam. I’ll be here for the two of you.”

When the time comes to reach between Tommy’s legs, I say “Come look at how beautiful our baby is between her legs, Ad. Come see what delights she’s been hiding from us.” I gently slide two fingers into Tommy’s pussy, feel her tighten down on my fingers as I move them slowly in and out. Ad’s look of amazement makes Tommy blush again. “Honey! You’ve been hold back! Dam and I didn’t realize that you are so amazing, so beautiful down here! I’m glad I got here in time to experience this…” Ad moves back up the bed to take Tommy’s hand as Tommy gives me a frightened look. I smile at her as I say “Baby, don’t be scared, I’m not going to hurt you. Just relax and let me lead the way.” Tommy nods at me, and I move forward, slowly entering her. Without breaking eye contact I pause, giving her time to get used to the feel of me inside her. When she nods, I place my hands on her hips and push the rest of the way inside, bottoming out. I stay still until Tommy gives me another little nod, her dick beginning to harden under Ad’s hand.

As I set an easy rhythm, Adam leans down and takes one of Tommy’s nipples into his mouth, sucking hard. Tommy entire body gives a little jolt, which causes a smile to cross both mine and Ad’s faces. I pick up the pace as Ad begins to stroke his hand on Tommy’s dick in time with my movements.

Tommy tosses her head back and forth, her forearm thrown across her eyes. “Oh God, shit…Dam!...go faster, harder! PLEASE…” I double my efforts, watching my baby fall apart under me. Ad can’t take his eyes off of where our two bodies meet, watching in awe.

Suddenly Tommy comes, screaming, her body shaking as comes shoots out of her dick all over Ad’s hand and arm. I pump a few more times before I stop and pull out.

“NO!” Tommy yells. “PUT IT BACK IN ME! COME INSIDE OF ME, PLEASE DAM!” I place two fingers over Tommy’s lips, shaking my head. “I’m fine, baby. I can’t come in you; I might get you pregnant…”

“I DON’T CARE! COME INSIDE OF ME, DAMMIT! PLEASE, PLEASE, PLEASE…” I look up and lock eyes with Ad, who nods once, tears in his eyes. I know he is thinking the same thing that I am, that there is an excellent chance that I’ll never return to the two of them again. Ad chokes out “Do it, Dam, make her happy. Give her a baby…”

How can I say no to the two vamps that are my entire world, who mean everything to me? With a sigh, I sink deep into Tommy, setting a harsh pace until I feel the pressure to come rise deep within me. I look into Ad’s eyes and he nods once again, I then look into Tommy’s pleading eyes and let loose, a growl filling the room as I come deep inside my baby. I pump my hips a few more times before stilling, leaning forward to take Tommy’s lips in a searing kiss of ownership.

When I finally pull out, Tommy surprises me by lifting her hips and placing a pillow under her. “…So it sticks” she jokes, rubbing her hand over her stomach for good luck. Ad ruffles her hair and kisses her as I stumble my way to the bathroom, wetting two towels and grabbing another as I make my way back to the bed. I hand a wet towel to Ad before gently cleaning off Tommy’s stomach and between her legs, getting her as clean as I can before lying down next to her.

With a smirk, I ask “So, baby…what did you think?” Tommy gives a little laugh as she responds with “I think I’ve been a stubborn ass keeping the two of you away from me for so long.” Ad leans down and kisses Tommy before saying “Hey, you went through hell. Dam and I would’ve waited forever for you if necessary. I’m just glad you are content now, honey. The two of us love you very, very much.” Tommy looks from Ad to me, tears returning to her eyes as she says “I’m just glad that we had this time together before tomorrow…” I lean down and take my turn kissing her, commenting “Now, now, don’t get upset again, love. I told you I will be fine; you need to believe me. Let’s just spend the rest of the night cuddling and let tomorrow take care of itself.” Ad gently removes the pillow from under Tommy before helping her shift into the middle of the bed, one of us on each side of our girl. The three of us cuddle as close as possible, even as sleep eludes the three of us...

Before I am scheduled to leave the next day, I visit Luna. When I arrive, I send a message to Sonny, asking him to join us. When he does, I quickly fill them in on what they missed over the last couple of weeks. “…so, I’m heading to the castle shortly. Between us…” I give them both a serious look. “…I don’t think I’ve ever been so scared.”

Luna gives me a sad smile. “I don’t blame you, youngster. The last thing you want to do is face that bastard, considering the fact that you still have no idea exactly how powerful he truly is. I wish I can help you more.”

Placing my hands on my hips, I comment “Well, there is one thing that I would like the two of you to do for me if you are willing. Adam is always at the front lines, and Tommy will be spending most of her time alone with the children. See, Tommy may be carrying my baby.” Both Sonny and Luna raise eyebrows at me in surprise. “I know what you are thinking. Let’s just say that it was a little going away present, totally Tommy’s idea. Would the two of you look in on her while I’m gone? I’d appreciate it.” Both agree to keep an eye on Tommy for me, making me feel that much better about the situation. At least my baby won’t be all alone…

“Father, I have an idea. Please give me your hand.” I do as Sonny asks and a bolt of electricity shoots up my arm and through my body. “Ouch!” Luna laughs at me when Sonny replies “I’ve just low-jacked you, father. If Andre moves you, I will know where you are. That way, Adam and I can come to your rescue…”

“NO, Sonny! I do not want you involved! I do not want you hurt in anyway…” Sonny cuts me off, his voice harsh. “YOU ARE MY FATHER! I will do ANYTHING to see you home safe and sound with the ones you love!” Tears fill my eyes as I step forward to take Sonny into my arms, hugging him tight against me. “I love you, Sonny. No matter what, never forget that.” I feel a pinch in my side and turn my head towards Luna, who is holding out her arms to me. “What, I don’t rank a hug from my favorite son?” I kiss Sonny’s cheek and pull away from his arms, turning into Luna’s. I kiss her soundly on the cheek, squeezing her tightly. “I suppose I should start calling you mama, since you created me. I’m just sorry that it took so long to get to know you.” Luna sniffles in my ear before pulling away from me. “You have always been with me, my boy. I have always been proud of you, no matter what you have done with your life. Never forget me.” I kiss her again before pulling back from her. “Let’s hope for a quick reunion…” I blow a kiss to each of them and head back to the mansion.

The going away scene at the house is filled with tears and kisses. Tommy and Ad cling to me as I hug and kiss everyone else, even Bobby. I tell everyone about Sonny using a locater spell on me, much to Adam’s and Tommy’s surprise. “Well, at least I will know where to go to kick that fucker’s ass! I’m not going to simply sit at home and…” I cut Ad off by saying “No, your main job is to see to the protection of Tommy and the children. They come first, no matter what. Promise me that you will set them above me, Ad. I mean it.” Adam stares into my eyes as he grumbles out “Of course I’ll take care of them! But…” I step forward and kiss Ad to stop the flow of his words. We both know where his priorities lie, and they are not with me…

I give Tommy a look next. She is doing her best not to break down in front of me. I take her in my arms and kiss her, then say “I love you. Take care of those rug rats upstairs, baby. And please, take care of yourself. I’ll be home before you know it.” Tommy softly replies “I love you, Dam. Come home safe to me and the babies. We all need you.” I wink at her and step back, taking in the scene in front of me. This is the first time that the entire family has gathered in support of me, and it warms my evil heart to no end. Why does it take a tragedy to bring people together? I call out “I love you all” and blink, heading to the Dark realm to my fate.

From the outside of the castle, the building looks long abandoned. No lights shine from the windows, no one seems to be about. The door creaks as I enter, looking around at the barren rooms. “Andre? I’m here…” I search the castle and find no one, not even in the dark, damp basement. What kind of trick is this?

When I reenter the first floor, I hear creaking coming from the front parlor. When I enter, Ray is tied to a chair in the middle of the room, his head down, blood dripping down his neck in a steady stream. I run over to him and call out his name, pulling back his head enough to see a large puncture wound in the middle of his throat. From behind me, I hear Andre laugh. “Remind you of someone, Damian? My fledgling, the only vampire in all the cosmos that ever meant a thing to me? Don’t worry, I’ll send him home to his family now. I made sure that there is no way to heal him, he will die in Mikey’s arms. Maybe I should do the same to you, send you to Tommy in the same condition when I’m through with you? That’s an interesting idea…” With a wave of his hand, Andre sends Ray home, leaving the two of us standing face to face in the middle of the room. “Alright, Andre. You got what you wanted; I’m here paying for my crimes. When will you pay for yours?” I feel electricity shoot through my body, my feet suddenly anchored to the floor. Bolt after bolt reverberates though me, my skin beginning to smoke. When it feels as if I cannot take it any longer, Andre waves his hand, and the current stops flowing through me. I cough a few times, trying to get past the burnt taste in my mouth. “You like electricity, Damian? It’s just a taste of the things I’m going to do to before you die. You are going to beg me to kill you before we are through.” I smirk at Andre. “I’m no weakling, Andre. You will find I can take more that you expect.” Andre laughs, an evil smirk on his face as he replies “Oh, I hope so, Damian. You see, all my foes give in too easily. They die before I can have any real fun. But you? No, I intend to keep you around for my own amusement, until I decide I’m sick of you. Then I will kill you…” Another current of electricity shoots through my body, my back arching with stress as Andre laughs out loud. “This is fun…”

I come to God only knows how many hours later. Electricity has caused my skin to crack open in places, blood clots drying my skin to my clothing. My feet are still bolted to the floor, my body upright in the middle of the room. I struggle to open my left eye, which is stuck shut with dried blood. I’m thirsty, but I realize that it will be a long time, if ever again, that I will receive fresh blood to drink.

Andre enters the room carrying a table. He sets up the table in front of me before blinking my clothes away. Cold air sends chills up my spine as I am shoved forward, my stomach meeting the edge of the table. I find I cannot move, no matter how hard I try. Andre moves behind me, his left hand yanking my hair as his other hand scratches down my back.

“Remember my ancestor? The one that introduced you to cruelty, to BDSM? The one responsible for all the agony that you suffered at their hand? Well, that was just a slight introduction to the cruelty that I’m going to show you, Damian. You will beg for me to set you free before your death.” I feel hands on my ass cheeks, pulling them roughly apart. I cannot move as I feel Andre push his dick into me, the lack of prep causing my hole to rip. I feel blood slowly drip as Andre slams himself in and out of me, his moans filling my ears. I take the pain without comment, which seems to bother my captor. “C’mon, Damian! Let me hear you scream! You’re mine now, bitch!” I feel my stomach slam over and over into the table, feel Andre’s hands as they roam my body. It’s been a long time since I’ve had a dick inside of me, preferring to top with Tommy and Adam. My thoughts drift to Tommy, realizing that I’ve now taken her place, which unfortunately is under the bastard now fucking into me with wild abandon.

It feels like forever before I hear Andre moan, feel his come fill me to the brim, dripping down the backs of my legs and onto the floor beneath me. I feel disgusting, feel used. As Andre pulls out of me, I feel a whip slice my back open. Andre laughs at the shiver that shoots through my body as he hits me again and again with his whip. As I try to bite back a scream, I hear Andre laugh, hear him comment “Oh, I’m going to enjoy this…”

Chapter Text

I thought of angels
Choking on their halos
Get them drunk on rose water
See how dirty I can get them
Pulling out their fragile teeth
And clip their tiny wings
Anything you say can and will be held against you
So only say my name it will be held against you
Anything you say can and will be held against you
So only say my name

If heavens grief brings hell’s rain then
I’d trade all my tomorrows for just one yesterday
For just one yesterday
I want to teach you a lesson in the worst kinda way
Still, I’d trade all my tomorrows for just one yesterday

Just One Yesterday—Fall Out Boy

Damian’s POV

With my vision gone, I feel rather than see a blade slice through the length of my side, feel the blood slowly flow down my naked body and drip onto the floor. The wall that I’m chained to is cold, sending shivers up my spine. I struggle to open my eyes, but I cannot, fear suddenly overtaking me. I hear Andre’s pulse quicken as he steps closer to me, another slice causing an involuntary gasp to leave my lips. My broken legs and arms throb with each passing second, and I can feel each cut and bruise as if they are alive on my skin.

“Am I finally getting through to you, Damian? Are you finally feeling enough pain to give into me? Or will you continue to let your pride get in the way?” I feel Andre brush up against my front, feel his hands slowly run over my skin, smearing my blood. “I can see why my ancestor was so taken by you. You’re beautiful in your agony. You’re mine, Damian…” I feel a blood covered hand stroke my dick slowly. “…all mine. Surrender to me. Give me your surrender and I will make all your fantasies come true. Say you’re mine, Damian…” I shake my head, not trusting my voice. “You know, you’ve been here with me for over two years now. I’ve only heard your voice once, and that was to tell me to fuck off! Let me hear your sexy voice, Damian…” Once again, I shake my head. I hear a sigh of frustration as my sight returns in time to see Andre lean forward to take my lips in a searing kiss. I wish the fuck I could move my head…

When the kiss ends, Andre takes a step backwards and sighs once again. “I’ll make you give in to me if it’s the last thing I do, Damian. In the meantime…” Andre swipes his hand through the air and I’m completely healed. “…I think it’s time to start all over again, don’t you?”

“How are you today, Tommy?” Sonny asks as he picks up Alondra from where she is playing on the floor.

“I’m well, Sonny. How are you?” Tommy asks as she reaches into the playpen to pick up her son. “I’m well, but frustrated. The last batch of spells are useless. I’ve tried everything that I can think of to break through the fortress that Andre has set up around that castle, and nothing works. Adam is furious with me. He keeps screaming at me to “make the fucking magick work.”

Tommy nods once. “I know. Ad doesn’t understand how magick works. He thinks it’s easy to do. When you had trouble healing Ray when he was sent home that night by Andre, Ad couldn’t understand how hard you struggled to save our father. He thought that you should’ve known what to do right away. I blame Dam for Ad’s misunderstanding of magick because he became too comfortable with Dam’s skills, thinking that magick is always an instant thing. He has no idea how hard you, Mikey and Dam worked to hone your skills.” Sonny gives Alondra a kiss and a hug before returning her to the floor to play with her toys. “Mikey and Luna have been trying their best to help me, to no avail. I feel as if I’m letting everyone down. I miss my father, and I’d do anything to rescue him. I just wish I was more talented.

"Don’t say that! You are the most talented warlock that ever existed! I’m sure that you will come up with the right spell to set Damian free.” As Tommy changes the baby’s diaper, she continues. “You know, it was hard to give birth to Dante without Damian here with me. I hope he is still alive. I want him to meet his new son. I miss him beyond words.” Sonny gives Tommy a sad smile. “I miss him too, Tommy. This damn war has been going on too long. Your family has suffered too much…” Adam suddenly arrives, blood flowing from his forehead and onto his shirt. Sonny, without a word, walks over to Adam and lays a hand on his head, muttering a few words. In an instant, Adam is healed, all traces of blood gone.

“Thanks, Sonny. Hello baby.” Adam walks over to Tommy and gives her a kiss before kissing Alondra and then Dante. “How’s daddy’s little boy doing?” Dante smiles and says “Dada” as he reaches out for Adam, who picks him up for a hug. Turning to Sonny, Adam grumpily says “I want to apologize to you, Sonny, for the way I’ve been treating you. I know that it isn’t your fault that Damian isn’t with us. I just get bitchy sometimes…” Tommy chuckles at Adam’s words. “That’s an understatement, Ad! Unfortunately, we’ve all been paying for your temper…” Adam leans down and places another kiss to Tommy’s forehead, muttering a soft “Sorry, love” before turning back to Sonny. “The family and I appreciate all you do for us, Sonny. I just…” Tears fill Adam’s eyes as they lock onto Sonny’s gaze. Sonny responds by pulling Adam and Dante in for a tight hug. “I get it, Adam, I do. It’s okay, we all miss him. I promise you I’m doing my best…” Adam nods a few times. “I know you are. We are grateful to have you with us. I’m sure that you will be able to find the right spell to break Dam free.” Sonny gives a sigh in response. “I hope you are right, Adam…”

Damian’s POV

I hear something very heavy being dragged down the hallway towards the room I’m in. Andre suddenly comes into view, his voice harsh as he barks out “Don’t scratch it! It’s worth a fortune!” My eyes bulge in horror as three guards drag an iron maiden across the threshold and place it on the opposite side of the room from where I hang on the wall. Panic fills me, memories of the past practically choking me as Andre opens first one heavy door then the other, the sound of rusted metal filling the room.

Andre turns to me, a look of glee on his face. “What’s wrong, Damian? I know you know what this is. I’ve been accessing your memories. You made such a production number about my ancestor hurting you in your youth but look what you’ve done to poor Tommy Joe! There’s no comparison! You raped that bitch over and over, sliced her open from throat to crotch and hung her upside down on a wall, had countless men fuck her until she was barely conscious! You tried every single way possible to degrade her, to destroy her. But my favorite thing that you did was placing her in a rusted iron maiden! You almost murdered her with that stunt. Well…” Andre laughs at the terrified look I give him. “…I’ve decided to let history repeat itself! But with a little twist…” Andre waves his hand and Trick suddenly appears. “Guards! Hold him…” Two of the guards grab Trick’s arms, holding him tight between them. Another guard leaves the room for a moment, returning with a few bags of blood and an IV machine, tubing attached to the machine.

Trick frantically yells to me “Father! Please help me…” I scream “Andre, leave him alone! This is between the two of us! Put ME into the maiden, I deserve it…” Andre grabs Trick’s chin, squeezing tightly until Trick looks at him. “Damian is a bit tied up at the moment, little one.” Andre leans down and places his lips against Trick’s, kissing him fiercely. Trick tries to struggle but cannot move. When Andre pulls back, he chuckles. “You made one with spirit, Damian! Adorable, too. You did a fine job with this one…” Andre blinks away Trick’s clothing and moves to the IV machine, picking up a length of tubing and a needle, feeding them through the maiden. With a quick stab, he places the needle into Trick’s neck, taping it in place before hooking up a blood bag to the machine then turning it on. Standing back, he motions to the two guards holding Trick. “Hold him tightly.” Andre blinks and a sledgehammer suddenly appears in his hands. I scream “NO!” as Andre swings, the hammer connecting with Trick’s leg. Trick screams in pain as the sound of breaking bones is loud in the room. A frenzy takes over Andre, swing after swing breaking Trick’s body until he sags limp in the guard’s arms, most of his bones broken.

“Put him in the maiden.” The two guards drag Trick’s broken body backwards, shoving him onto the spikes in the back of the maiden as I scream “NO STOP! ANDRE! YOU FUCKING BASTARD! DON’T…” Trick’s screams of pain continue to fill the room as the guards push against Trick, the spikes threatening to come out his front. Andre moves forward, running his hand down Trick’s chest. “Awww, poor little Patrick! I bet you are wishing that you picked someone else to be your maker! Too late, little one. You are destined to become the next Tommy Joe!” As Trick struggles on the spikes, his face red and tears flowing down his face, I scream “TAKE HIM DOWN! I’LL TAKE HIS PLACE!! SEND HIM HOME, ANDRE!”

Andre laughs as he turns towards me. “Well, well! It seems that all I had to do to get you to talk is to hurt your fledgling! If I had known that was all it took, I would’ve done it a long time ago!” Andre turns back to Trick, a smirk on his face. “It’s time to shut you in the maiden now, Patrick. As you can see, there is a hole where your mouth will be. The hole is so you can suck me off whenever I shove my dick through the hole. If you refuse, I’ll get a second maiden for your husband, and a third for your maker. Let’s practice, shall we?” Andre grabs the maiden’s doors in both hands. “Say goodnight, Patrick.” One by one, the doors are shut on Trick, a loud scream chilling my bones as my boy is impaled by the spikes on the maiden’s doors. Blood begins to pool at the foot of the maiden, trapping all of us in blood lust. Andre waves off the guards before taking off his pants. “Have you tried him out, Damian? Or are skinny blondes more your thing?”

“YOU…”

“Oh, come on, Damian!” Andre moves to stand on a box in front of the maiden, his dick in his hand. “You know you’re jealous! You wanted to be the first with this little bitch, and I’m taking your glory...” Andre feeds his dick into the hole in the front of the maiden. I hear Trick grunt, hear a muffled yell as Andre shoves his dick forward. “Oh, his mouth is AMAZING! You’ve GOT to try it…” I hear Trick gag as Andre shoves forward forcefully.

I close my eyes to the scene in front of me, but I cannot close my ears to the sounds of Trick’s suffering. Andre moans and groans out his lust, taking his time to cause Trick more agony. The act goes on and on as tears slowly make their way down my face. My poor darling Trick, in a maiden because of me. I will never forgive myself…

Finally, Andre grunts as he comes down Trick’s throat. When he pulls back, he laughs as he reaches for his pants. “Tears, Damian? I didn’t think you were capable of them! Up until now you’ve taken your punishments so stoically…” I tense up as Andre walks over to me. “…I wasn’t sure if you had any emotions in that body of yours at all. You know, I think I’ll leave him in there! Maybe knowing that he is here with us will make you behave…”

I hear Luna’s voice in my head saying “Don’t do it, son. I know you want to use the magick I gave you, but you know that you will need it later in this damn war! If you use it now…” I internally answer “But my Trick! I can’t let him suffer this way! I need to rescue him!” Luna sounds fierce as she comments “Son, Trick will survive. If you use the magick now, all of you will end up suffering in the end. I know it’s hard, but you need to hang in there…”

I lower my head as I ask “What exactly would I have to do to save Trick, Andre? I will do anything…” Andre throws back his head and laughs in response. “So now the big, tough Italian will grovel and beg to save his fledgling! How interesting!” I lock eyes on Andre’s, my voice soft as I say “Anything, if you would only send him home. I’ll stay with you for an eternity, I’ll happily be your slave. The boy is innocent, he deserves to be home with his husband. C’mon, Andre! Let him go.”

Andre gives me a searching look. “You would turn your back on your mates, on your children, to let him go? How touching! Poor Tommy Joe! Does she know that you think so little of her? But then again, you seem to misunderstand, Damian. I plan to destroy every member of your family, picking them off one by one. There is no better way to destroy you, than to hurt those you love. Trick is only one in a long line to feel my wrath. There is no bargaining, only pain. Next, I think I’ll focus my attention on your other mate, the one with the bad temper. He helped you destroy Stephanie; he deserves to be destroyed for what he’s done.” Andre grabs my chin, yanking my head until our eyes meet. “You will be the last to die, Damian. I plan to keep you with me for a good, long time before I turn you to dust. I’ll make you my lap dog…” I hawk back and spit in Andre’s face—probably not the smartest stunt I’ve ever pulled. Without wiping his face off, Andre snaps his fingers and smoke starts coming out of the cracks of the maiden, Trick’s high-pitched screams leaking though the rusted metal. I immediately feel contrite for my actions.

Just what the fuck am I going to do? I’m trapped in this prison with no way to save anyone else, much less myself! I have never felt so scared, so alone. I can’t just sit back and let him hurt those I love!

Andre smirks as he comments “As a matter of fact…” There is a flash of light and Adam appears next to me, chained to the wall. Adam immediately begins to throw a fit, swinging his body back and forth to try to break free from his bonds. When he glances at me, I see rage as well as a flash of fear in his eyes.

“Welcome, Adam! You are the latest in my collection of Toro family freaks! As you can see, Damian is next to you, and Patrick is in the iron maiden.” I hear Ad’s sharp intake of breath in response to this statement. I’m sure he’s thinking of what I put our Tommy Joe through in the past, about how I killed his children when I placed Tommy in the maiden…

Andre gives me a smirk as he asks “Damian! What would you do to keep me from hurting your mate?” I shudder as I shake the hair out of my eyes and reply “Anything, Andre.” Andre steps closer to me and, laughing, comments “Prove it.”

The chains holding me to the wall suddenly open, my legs almost buckling as I’m suddenly free. I give Andre a wary look as I take a few stumbling steps forward. I turn back to see Ad staring at my naked body covered with cuts and bruises, see the concern on his face as I stumble into Andre, my legs refusing to work. Andre catches me, pulling me towards a chair in the middle of the room. Once we are there, Andre lets go of me, his clothes disappearing as he sits down on the chair, his legs spread.

“Kneel down, Damian, and suck my cock.” I give Andre a blank look, standing stock still. Out of the corner of my eye I see smoke begin to pour off Ad’s skin, see his body tense up as electricity flows through him. As my eyes lock back on Andre’s, a smirk covers his face as he repeats the order. “GET ON YOUR KNEES, DAMIAN! Before I TURN UP THE VOLTAGE!” I hear Ad moan in pain, which propels me to my knees. Andre leans forward and runs his fingers through my hair, brushing it back from my shoulders. “You’re so pretty, Damian. If you wish for me to stop hurting your mate, you will bend down and follow my directions. I want to see those pretty lips wrapped around my cock.” I glance over at Ad before taking a deep breath, my head lowering as I wrap my hand around Andre’s cock and pull it to my lips. I fight nausea as I open my mouth, placing the head between my lips and closing my eyes. Ad gasps once more as I take Andre deeper until he hits the back of my throat. I then hear Ad’s moans of relief as Andre stops the electricity running through him.

“Mmmm, suck me, bitch. Let me see what you’re like with your mates, how you make them come. C’mon pretty boy…” Andre yanks me by the hair until tears fill my eyes, causing them to open. “…keep those beautiful eyes open and on me, baby. Let me see your soul…”

I hear Ad’s growl, see him once again struggle with his bonds out of the corner of my eye. The sound makes Andre laugh. “He’s like a bulldog, never backing down from a fight. Take me deeper, bitch.” When I feel Andre’s hands grip my hair and pull my head downwards, I gag. I try to get this over with as fast as possible, but Andre keeps his hands in my hair, controlling my actions. Suddenly I’m being shoved backwards. “Climb up on my lap, Damian. Ride me.” I look over at Ad before slowly standing, my legs shaking as I crawl onto Andre’s lap, facing him. “That’s it, bitch. Hold still.” Andre lifts his cock, lining up with my hole. With both hands on my hips, he yanks me sharply backwards, his cock impaling me. I give out a startled cry as I feel Andre bottom out inside of me with one push. He slaps my ass then pulls on my hips, setting a rhythm that I struggle to keep up with. Ad screams out “I’ll see you pay for this, bastard!” Andre laughs at Ad, his hand continuing to spank my ass hard as I ride him.

Time seems to stand still. I hear Ad growl as I speed up my rhythm, trying hard to put an end to this hell. Andre says all kinds of disgusting things to me as he pulls my hair and spanks me, enjoying every moment of my rape. Suddenly, I hear Andre moan loudly as he comes deep inside my ass. I slow down and prepare to dismount his lap, but Andre holds me in place. “I like you on my lap, Damian. Don’t move.” Over his shoulder Andre says to Adam “Isn’t he beautiful, Adam? I’m so lucky to have such a slut at my disposal. He no longer belongs to you; he is mine to do with as I please.” Ad growls once again in frustration. “What? Would you rather I bring Tommy Joe here to take his place? An interesting idea…” Ad’s voice cracks as he snarls out “Leave Tommy alone, bastard! You’ve hurt her enough!”

Time starts to blur. Andre makes me ride him over and over until he gets bored with me. “Let’s see…I know!” He shoves me onto the floor at his feet before standing up, making his way to the iron maiden. “Damian, you’ve been missing your little fledgling. What say I set him free? Then you can take a turn at him…”

What? I couldn’t have heard Andre correctly! He’s going to make me rape Trick? A cold breeze raises goose bumps over my body as I watch Andre walk over to the maiden, opening both doors. The sight before me brings tears to my eyes. Trick is slumped downwards on the spikes, his broken bones making his body appear boneless. The boy has passed out, the pain too much for him to bear.

Andre snaps his fingers and Trick’s bones mend, his spine straightening. With a turn of a wrist, Trick’s body floats across the room to land in a heap at my feet, still unconscious. The marks of the maiden are now gone, smooth pink skin covering his entire body.

Andre circles around me, his foot reaching out to kick me sharply in the side as he barks out “Fuck him, Damian…before I destroy him even further.” Ad yells “NO, DAM! YOU CAN’T…” A thick square of metal appears, clamping itself over Ad’s mouth, screws drilling it into place with a loud screech over Ad’s squeal of pain.

I look down at my beautiful, darling Trick, my sweet boy. I can’t…

Mikey suddenly appears, chained across from us on the opposite wall. She struggles against her bonds the same way that Adam did, her voice harsh as she yells “Damian! Andre, what the fuck…”

Andre laughs, his face a mask of glee. He turns to me, bending down to stroke my hair and whisper in my ear. “Or would you rather I slowly slice Mikey to pieces, slice by thin slice. What would you rather have happen, Damian? The decision is yours.”

How can I make a decision that will cause harm to someone I love? Trick is my fledgling, my own child. Mikey, my first love, the dearest to my heart (besides Tommy). How can I choose one to hurt, when the last thing I want is for neither of them to ever feel an ounce of pain?

Mikey calls out “Let me take the pain, Dam. Leave Trick alone, you cannot destroy your relationship with him…” Andre throws back his head and laughs. “What a brave little bitch, Damian!” Andre blinks and a huge carving knife is in his hand, gleaming in the light. As he blinks Mikey’s clothes away, he looks back at me. “Last chance, Damian. Tick tock. Pick one.”

I look down at Trick’s prone body. “I…” Trick’s eyes suddenly fly open, a loud gasp echoing across the room as he makes eye contact with me. “Oh Damian! Haven’t you learned anything yet?” I look up at Andre, confusion on my face. “Did you really think I would let you fuck his unconscious body? No, I want the boy to know what is going on when you take him, I want him to have the memory for a lifetime, no matter how short that life will be…”

Trick looks from his naked body to Mikey hanging on the wall. He must read from my expression that I am meant to hurt one of them, so he says in a small voice “Hurt me, Dam. Please don’t let Mikey feel any pain. Please, I beg you…”

I stare at Trick for another minute then turn towards Andre. “I’ll…do it. I’ll take him. Just please leave Mikey alone…” With eyes filled with tears, I flip Trick around until I am blanketed over his backside. When I lick my finger and move it towards Trick’s hole, Andre grabs my arm, holding it back. “Take him dry, Damian. Dry or nothing. If you disobey, I’ll hurt them both.” Trick whines at the thought of my taking him without lube of some kind. Even so, he spreads his legs to give me better access to his hole, bending over so his forehead is on the floor. Ad grunts and groans around his gag, his voice mixing with Mikey’s screams as I line up with Trick’s hole and shove forward with all my strength. Trick screams as I bottom out inside of him, feeling each tear of skin as I do so. I pause for a second, but Andre grabs my hips, pulling me almost all the way out of Trick before shoving me back in, blood trickling out of Trick’s tight hole. “Fuck him harder, Damian! Don’t stop!”

Once again, time has no meaning. It feels as if it goes on forever. I try to block out each moan of pain, each uncomfortable shift of shoulders and twitch of head. Andre remains behind me, his hands on my hips, forcing me to slam full force into Trick repeatedly. Every time I try to stare at the wall, at Mikey, anywhere but at my beautiful boy, Andre yanks my head by the hair until I’m looking back down at Trick. Andre won’t let me escape from the moment, from the act that he has forced on me.

Andre laughs when I finally come deep inside Trick, my body shaking as I fill him up. Trick’s moans of pain grow even louder, his shoulders shaking as he cries silent tears. When I start to pull out, Andre grabs my hips and holds me in place. “Again, Damian. Don’t pull out, stay where you are. Fuck him until I tell you to stop.”

I cry until I have no tears left to shed. Blood-stained come begins to pool on the floor under Trick as I continue to pound into him, orgasm after orgasm taking me over until I finally collapse in a heap on the floor behind him, completely spent.

“Nice job, Damian! Don’t tell me that you didn’t enjoy yourself, I know you did!” Andre takes Trick’s chin in his hand, pulling upwards until he is looking into Trick’s tear-stained face. “I know you enjoyed it too, little one! You finally got your daddy to tear you apart, just like all good little fledglings deserve. You should feel fortunate that I let him have you.” I continuously stroke my hands gently down Trick’s sides, trying to calm him down. Andre notices the gesture and smirks. “Aww, isn’t that sweet! Your daddy loves you!” I growl out “OF COURSE I LOVE HIM! A beast like you couldn’t POSSIBLY understand that!” Andre snarls “I loved my fledgling, Damian! She meant the world to me, and you and your mate DESTROYED HER! She did nothing to you! She was an angel. I should rip apart Patrick’s body until it turns to dust, just to even the score! But I have other plans for him…” Andre smirks as he waves his hand in the air. Trick gives a startled squeal, his lower half changing right before my eyes.

My sweet little Trick now has a vagina—and boobs.

Andre looks at me and begins to laugh. “Yes, Damian, your fledgling is now a carbon copy of your mate, which means he can have children. Think of it—all that come floating around in there, looking for a place to go. That new womb is just waiting for an egg to plant itself deep inside, a little baby growing until Patrick is bulging with pregnancy. What a treat! Another Toro to destroy! And you knowing that it was you that impregnated him—or rather, her! Won’t that just make her husband overjoyed to find out that you are the father?” Andre blinks and Trick moans out “Damian? I’m…am I pregnant? I feel something happening…” I rub my hand up and down her back, trying to calm her down. Trick gives out a strangled sound even as she tries to rock back against me, seeking both warmth and comfort. I turn her around and pick her up, sitting her down on my naked lap, pulling her close to my chest. Andre watches the two of us carefully as I run my hand through Trick’s hair, pulling it away from her face, then placing a gentle kiss to her forehead. “I’m sorry, Trick…so damn sorry! I never wanted you to get hurt in any way. I’m sorry that I impregnated you! I love you…” Andre laughs once again. “See, daddy loves you Patrick. But I think it’s time for you to go home and face your husband with the news of your pregnancy. I will be watching you from here, keeping a close eye on you. I’ve placed a spell on you—you neither can kill the baby or yourself, should you become depressed and wish to end it all. No, darling…” Andre lifts Trick’s head by the chin, staring into Trick’s eyes. “…you will survive this pregnancy, even if your husband turns his back on you for being a little whore. You will return here to have your baby.” Trick looks up at me, saying “I love you, daddy” seconds before Andre sends him back to the mansion.

Andre claps his hands together, looking at each of us in turn. “Well, well, well…” He turns to me last, his eyes twinkling. “…who’s next?”

Chapter Text

“…do SOMETHING! He’s been gone…”

In a flash of light, Trick appears naked in the middle of the foyer floor, in front of her husband, Bobby and Ray. Trick immediately curls up in a ball to try to cover herself, her whole body turning red with embarrassment. Without thought, Ray takes off his shirt and passes it over to Trick, who takes it from him with a nod and a small smile.

“Oh my god baby we missed you! All I could think of was what that bastard could be doing to you…” Trick looks at Pete and bursts out crying, hands flung over her face. Ray quietly mumbles “Nice one, Pete” before lowering himself to the floor next to Trick. “Sweetheart, please look at me.” Trick slowly lowers her hands from her face, blinking when she realizes that Ray is sitting next to her. Ray says “Honey, why don’t you pull that shirt on. I’m sure you will feel better once you are covered.” A few seconds goes by before Trick struggles to pull the long shirt over her head. Ray reaches out and helps her, then says “Do you want to sit on my lap?” Trick nods profusely, her arms reaching out to Ray, silently asking to be picked up. Ray obliges, gently placing Trick on his lap then stroking her hair as Trick lays her head down on Ray’s shoulder. Trick continues to cry, large shudders wracking her body as she tries to get her breathing under control. Ray whispers words of love and comfort in Trick’s ear as he continuously strokes his hands down Trick’s back, just as Damian did earlier.

Twenty minutes goes by in this manner, until Trick finally raises her head, her eyes unfocused. Ray leans down and places a gentle kiss to Trick’s forehead. “We are here for you, Trick. We all love you. If you feel like talking, go ahead. If not, we understand. Whatever makes you comfortable, love.” Trick takes another shuddering breath before blurting out “He put me in an iron maiden, Ray.” The others gasp in shock at her words. “It was so horrible! He…” Trick grabs onto Ray’s hand, holding it tightly. “…shattered my bones…before putting me in it. Now I know what Tommy went through.” Pete curses loudly as he begins to pace the room. Trick continues “And that was not the worst of it! When he took me out of it, he healed me, then forced Damian to rape me.”

“WHAT?” Pete screams. “Andre forced Damian to rape you? How could he…” Ray raises a hand to quiet Pete, so Trick can continue. “Damian didn’t have a choice. It killed him to hurt me. But then after Damian raped me over and over, Andre turned me into a girl! And now I’m PREGNANT!” Trick throws her head back and screams in frustration. “I’m a damn girl, and I’m going to have a BABY!”

Ray doubles his efforts to calm Trick down, but Trick turns hysterical, clinging to Ray and howling as she cries. Bobby is shocked into silence, and Pete can’t stop the flow of curse words and threats that flow from his mouth as he continues to pace the room.

“Fucking Damian! I knew he would destroy you one day! This is all his fault!” Trick turns her head towards Pete, rage suddenly on her face. “IT’S NOT HIS FAULT! HE WAS FORCED! I AM NOT GOING TO BLAME HIM FOR WHAT HAPPENED! YOU HAVE NO IDEA WHAT WE WENT THROUGH! ADAM AND MIKEY ARE CHAINED TO THE WALLS…”

“MIKEY?” Ray yells, his face a mask of horror. “Not my Mikey!” Trick gives Ray a look of sympathy, squeezing his hand tightly. “I’m sorry Ray. So far, he has not touched her. I hope it stays that way…” Ray gives Trick a tight squeeze, laying another kiss to her forehead. “I just pray she will be alright. I was afraid that she would be high on Andre’s list, his wanting to destroy her because of jealousy. Andre has always despised Mikey.”

Trick nods in agreement. “Damian has gone through so much; you have no idea! The tortured look on his face…” Pete cuts in with “I’ll torture him when I get my hands on him! Hurting you like that…” Trick waves a hand at Pete, her tone icy. “DID YOU NOT HEAR ME? I’M PREGNANT! I have TITS! I’M GOING TO HAVE A BABY! DID YOU GLOSS OVER THAT FACT, PETE? I have a VAGINA and TITS and I’m going to give birth to A BABY!”

Bobby kneels on the other side of Trick, taking both of her hands in his. “Baby, we all love you, regardless if you are a woman or a man. And we will all love your baby. We will be here for you.” Trick gives Bobby a small smile before locking eyes on Pete. “I’m not sure about everyone, but thank you, Bobby. I love you, too.” Ray looks over at Bobby and says “I think it might be best if we leave the two of them alone, Bobby. Trick, come find us if you need us. Let’s go.” First Ray and then Bobby kiss Trick on the forehead then leave the room.

Trick stands on shaking legs, pulling her shirt down and sitting on the couch. “Petey? Can we just…” Trick takes a sharp, shuddering breath. “…talk?”

Pete remains standing still for a minute, trying to calm down. He then moves to take a seat next to Trick on the couch. “Okay, baby. You go first.”

Trick brushes the hair out of her eyes. “Do you…hate me…now that I am a woman?” Pete takes a moment to think before answering “It doesn’t matter to me if you are male or female, Trick. I love YOU, the real you that is inside. The packaging means little to me.” Patrick accepts Pete’s words before continuing with “Does that mean that you would be willing to…you know…sleep with me as a female?”

Pete looks at Trick’s lap. “Baby, you still have a penis. As far as I’m concerned, this just gives us more to do, you know? Just like with Tommy and Damian. More of you to love.”

Trick seems to digest Pete’s words before continuing with “And the baby? Could you possibly love the baby?”

Pete takes a deep breath, his face grimacing as he says “I’ve never considered myself capable of parenthood, Trick. Look at me—rage issues, dumb as a box of rocks. What could I offer a child? You’ll make an amazing mother, but me, a father? How could you possibly want ME around a baby?” Trick gives Pete a tender smile, squeezing his hand in hers. “Petey, you would make an amazing father! You have a huge heart, and you have a huge capacity to love. That is what a baby really needs—love.”

Pete’s eyebrows knit together as he asks “But what about Damian? He’s the real father. Am I going to be in constant competition for the baby’s attention and affection?” Trick watches a look of jealousy cross Pete’s face. “Well, I cannot speak for Damian. We don’t even know if he will live through this war, or if any of us will. He may wish to be a part of the baby’s life, but that doesn’t mean that you won’t be daddy too. Look at Damian’s relationship with Tommy—Adam is also daddy to the children, and they make it work. I promise that we can make this work, Petey…if you want it to.”

Pete slowly reaches out and places his hand on Trick’s stomach, rubbing gently. Trick places her hand on Pete’s, enjoying the tender moment. Suddenly, Pete says in amazement “After the baby…” He gives Trick a shocked look. “…you’ll get a PERIOD! GROSS!” Trick returns Pete’s shocked look and starts to laugh. “You sound as if it will be happening to you! Don’t you think I’m the one who should be grossed out?” Pete gives a loud laugh, shaking his head. Turning serious, Pete comments “I’m sorry that you were put in the maiden, Trick. I’m also sorry that you were raped. If I get the chance, I’ll tear Andre’s heart out and eat it.” Trick leans over and kisses Pete on the lips. “Thank you, Petey. Thank you for loving me. It means the world to me.”

Adam’s screams fill the room, bringing fresh tears to Mikey and Damian’s eyes. Through a hole in the ceiling of the castle, a beam of sunlight is being controlled by Andre. The beam, while small, is white hot. Andre currently has the beam pointed at Adam’s bare chest, the heat rising from his body as it burns through layers of skin, large blisters forming. When Andre thinks that an area has been burned thoroughly enough, he moves the beam to an untouched area to start over again. A pattern of broken skin and blisters crisscross Adam’s body, blood slowly dripping from the wounds and onto the floor.

Mikey is still chained to the wall, but Damian is sitting on the floor at Andre’s feet, his head down and his arms crossing his naked chest, as if trying to find warmth. Andre has one hand in Damian’s hair, gently stroking through the long curls. Damian’s body is a mass of whip marks, cigarette burns and cuts, large purple bruises covering his entire body. His left arm is broken in three places. A black collar surrounds his neck, pulled tight enough to cut off oxygen. He keeps his mouth shut, knowing that if he even attempts to raise his voice in protest, Adam’s punishment will grow tenfold.

“What’s wrong, darling? Can’t handle watching your mate suffer? He watched earlier as I tore you apart this evening! But then again, you seem to be squeamish when it comes to other’s pain. You pretend to be all big and bad, but you really are a marshmallow inside, aren’t you, baby? Poor thing. I’d prefer to hear you beg and scream.” Damian keeps silent, his eyes on the floor. “I guess I’ll just have to find another way to make you scream, Damian.”

Damian raises bloodshot eyes, his voice quiet as he says “Please, Andre. I’ll do anything. Please stop hurting Adam.” Andre takes a second to consider Damian’s words, then grins. “Sure, baby. I’ll stop hurting him for now.” Damian gives a sigh of relief only to find himself the one chained to the wall in Adam’s place, Adam’s healed body in a heap on the floor. “You can take his place, Damian.” There is a loud click, the hole in the roof opening again. Damian has no chance to respond before he feels the beam of light hit the center of his chest. Warmth quickly turns to pain as the beam brightens, smoke rising off Damian’s chest as the first layers of skin are burned off. Mikey gives a loud scream as the beam glows brighter, Damian’s lungs instantly incinerated as the beam grows. Damian tries to take a breath but cannot, his face turning purple as the beam slowly moves to the side, instantly frying his heart. The thought crosses Damian’s mind that he wished he was human because he would be dead by now. As the beam slowly lowers, he feels his intestines cook, feels his penis fry until it hangs loosely, smoke still rising from it.
Andre flips Damian over so his backside is now on display. He takes his time, burning designs on Damian’s back and ass cheeks. Thanks to a spell, Damian is still wide awake, feeling each second of the torture that Andre is putting him through.

The room reeks of burnt flesh. When Andre finishes burning the backs of Damian’s legs, he throws water over Damian’s back, laughing as steam rises from his wounds. “You’re so pretty, Damian! All burned to the bone like that. I can see your insides. Adam isn’t nearly as beautiful as you! You are my special boy!” The chains open and Damian drops into a pile on the floor, Adam immediately chained to the wall in his place.

Andre kicks Damian in the side. “Sit up and suck my cock, Damian. C’mon, I know your throat still works…” Damian continues to lay on the floor in a heap, coughing. Andre leans down and picks Damian up from the floor by his hair, pulling until he is on his knees. There is a large hole straight through the middle of Damian’s chest. Andre grabs Damian’s ears, pulling forward until his dick hits Damian’s bottom lip. “Suck bitch, or I’ll do the same to Mikey.”

Damian opens his mouth, taking Andre down his throat in one go. As he picks up the pace, Andre runs his fingers through Damian’s hair, commenting “You’re my favorite broken toy, Damian…”

“Will I have my baby as early as you have yours, Tommy?” Trick asks, watching as Tommy picks up Dante from his play pen. “No, Trick. I only gave birth so early because Luna placed a spell on me. My werewolf side has a lot to do with it, too. Weres tend to deliver early on a regular basis.” Tommy smiles as he watches Trick rub her flat stomach. “Before long, you will be showing. I have some pregnancy clothes that I can give you.”

Trick’s eyes light up with delight. “Really? That would be amazing, Tommy! Thank you!” Tommy chuckles, her hand reaching out and squeezing Trick’s. “You’re welcome! So, tell me…” Tommy tries to keep her voice calm as she asks “…how are things between yourself and Pete? I mean…” Tommy shoots Trick a side eyed look as she moves to change Dante’s diaper. “…you told me that Dam is the father…”

Trick returns Tommy’s look with a look of confusion. “Are you…upset that he fathered my baby? I would understand if you were…”

“No, Trick. When it comes to Dam, I always expect to be surprised. I never know what will happen with him next. Besides, what happened was out of both of your control.” Trick gives Tommy a look of relief. “Well, in the beginning, Pete wanted to kill Damian.” Tommy throws her head back and laughs at this bit of news. “Once again, not surprised. How does Pete feel about being a daddy?” Trick gives Tommy a smile. “In the beginning, he was against it. He said he wasn’t good enough, wasn’t smart enough to be a father. I told him that he would make a wonderful father. He’s mostly worried about where he will stand when Damian comes home. He’s afraid that we three cannot share parenthood. I told him simply to take a look at how well you, Adam, and Damian parent together. I’m not exactly sure he is completely sold on the idea of sharing baby time with Damian.” Tommy chuckles. “Well, Dam is an overwhelming character on a normal day, I’m sure Pete is afraid that he will get lost in the shuffle. He needs to keep in mind that Dam has a family here as well, so his attention will be divided. Pete will be with the baby full time. He will get plenty of time to spend alone with you and the baby.”

“I know but convincing him will not be easy. I mean, he just starting liking Damian, and now this!” Tommy lifts Dante from the changing table, giving him a kiss before laying him down for a nap. Trick chuckles “Damian will be busy when he gets home! He hasn’t even met Dante! There will be two babies that he will have to get to know!” Tommy nods her head in agreement. “Yes, he will be busy for sure. So, Trick…” Tommy sits down next to Trick on the couch, taking one of Trick’s hands in hers. “…are there any other questions you would like to ask me?”

Trick takes a moment to gather her thoughts together. “Is labor as horrible as it seems? I mean, look at what happened with Gee when she had her first pups…” Just then, there is a knock at the door. When Tommy rushes to answer the door, she finds Gee on the other side of the door. “Perfect timing, Gee! Trick was just asking if labor is as bad as it seems.” Gee enters the room, heading straight to Trick, leaning down and kissing her on the cheek. “You are thinking of my first set of pups, aren’t you? When I almost died giving birth?” Trick nods her head. “No, sweetheart, it isn’t always that bad. Sure, there is pain involved, but it is all worth it when you hold that sweet baby in your arms. The memory of that pain disappears right away. What happened to me then was influenced by Damian, who at the time wanted me to die in childbirth. That was a long time ago when Dam hated the family and was trying to destroy all of us.” Tommy notices that Trick still looks a bit upset, so she adds “We have Sonny now. I’m sure that he will be there for you when your time comes, as will Frank…” Trick cuts Tommy off by saying “Andre said that he will call me back to him when I’m ready to deliver. I’m so scared! He’ll leave me there to suffer with no help at all, I know he’d let me die if something goes wrong. What if he takes my baby from me?”

Tommy and Gee spend the better part of an hour trying to calm Trick down. They share stories of childbirth and their mates, trying their best to make Trick laugh. “…so, Dam fell asleep in his chair with Draven on the changing table, diaper off, and Draven pissed in Dam’s face.” Trick snorts with laughter at the thought of Damian covered in piss, cursing at the top of his lungs. “Ad and I laughed so hard when he returned to us, his hair dripping on the carpet. He never repeated that mistake, I tell you!” Gee and Trick burst out laughing at this, leaning on each other as they try to breathe through their laughter.

After a few moments Trick asks “By the way…” Tommy and Gee give a nod to Trick as a way of telling him to continue. ”…do the two of you get your period? If so, what’s that like?” In unison, Tommy and Gee reply “Messy” which sets Trick into another set of giggles. “You’ll need to stock up on tampons. Pads get in the way of our dicks, as you will find out.” Gee adds “Yeah, it chafes my dick! Tampons are better.” Trick nods her head then asks, “What about bras?” Tommy and Gee both give Trick a grimace. “Uncomfortable. We can take you bra shopping, and I’m sure the two of us have maternity bras that you can have. Anything else you would like to talk about?”

Trick turns bright red, her eyes lowered to the floor. “What’s it like to…you know…” Tommy and Gee turn to each other and smile. Tommy decided to take Trick off the hook, so she asks “You want to know what it is like to have sex as a woman, right?” Trick turns redder, her head nodding in agreement. Tommy answers “Amazing! You will love it honey, trust me. Dam and I only had those two experiences together, and they were better than I could ever imagine! I had to train Ad on what to do, but he is an expert now. If you wish, we can go over everything with you, so you know what to expect, and you can help Pete.” Trick gives another nod then says “Thank you! That would be great…”

The three of them spend the next hour discussing what it is like to have sex as a woman. Trick blushes a few times, but by the end of the conversation she seems eager to start. “I’m sure I won’t have any trouble getting Pete to cooperate. He said that he doesn’t care that I’m a woman, that it just means that there is more for us to explore. I can’t wait to tell him what I’ve learned! Thanks to both of you!” Trick stands up, placing a kiss first to Tommy’s cheek and then to Gee’s. The two call out their goodbyes as Trick waves to them, eager to find her husband.

“We won’t see them for a while” Gee jokes, turning her attention on Tommy. “Poor Pete! I hope he is up to the challenge!”

Tommy laughs at Gee’s comments. “Well, I wore Ad out the first time we tried it. He complained that his jaw hurt for two days. I told him to suck it up, and I made sure he got plenty of practice!” Gee chuckles at Tommy’s comments before continuing with “I didn’t want to say anything to Trick, but Frank hates going down on me. He still does it to make me happy, but he would rather pin me up against the wall and fuck my brains out. You’re lucky that Adam enjoys it, you get it so much more often than I do. Frank jokingly calls it my ‘birthday present’ cause he’s willing to do it once a year…” Tommy chuckles “Poor you! I guess I’m just lucky…” Tommy hands Gee a glass of blood. “Did you hear? That bastard now has Mikey along with Ad and Damian! I miss my mates and mother so much…” Tears fill Tommy’s eyes, her hand reaching out for Gee to take. “I keep thinking what they must be enduring. I wish Andre had taken me in their place…”

“Don’t think like that, Tommy! Ad and Damian will survive whatever that piece of shit puts them through, Mikey too. They will all come home to us…”

“Gods, I hope so, Gee. I cannot live without my mates. I love them so fucking much!” Tommy breaks down in tears, causing Gee to lean over and take Tommy in their arms. Tommy wails “I cannot sleep. I keep having these horrible dreams about Andre torturing everyone, and I’m forced to watch as each of you die a horrible death. When everyone is dead, he makes me his sex slave, raping me over and over. I…” Gee tries to hush Tommy, but she goes on with “…would do anything to bring them home! Why can’t he just hurt only me? I’d take the pain for everyone…”

Gee rocks Tommy until she has cried herself out and falls asleep on Gee’s shoulder. Gee gently strokes Tommy’s hair, wishing that they could take away all of Tommy’s problems. Gee figures that the stress of raising four children on her own is beginning to get to Tommy. Gee makes a silent vow to be there more for Tommy, to help her in any way possible. After all, that’s what family is for…

“What the fuck did you say, Damian?” Andre shrieks. Damian softly repeats himself, muttering “Fuck off, bastard” when Andre demanded that Damian present himself to Andre. Shaking with rage, Andre sinks his fingers in Damian’s long hair, pulling roughly. “It seems that you need more lessons in decorum, little bitch. I’ve been wasting too much time on these two others; I’ve neglected your lessons. So…” Andre turns towards Adam, their eyes connecting as Andre swipes his arm through the air. Adam instantly starts gasping for air, his face turning purple. Werevamps like Adam need to breathe more than regular vampires do. Turning towards Damian, Andre says “Say goodbye to your lover, Damian.” Before Damian can say anything, Adam disappears. Andre and Damian both turn their attention towards Mikey, who starts to struggle against her bindings. “Let’s see…” Suddenly Mikey is turned upside down, her hair hanging in her face. “Your son can only heal one at a time, can’t he? So why don’t we give him a conundrum…” Andre materializes a carving knife out of thin air, holding it tightly in his grip as he slams the knife into the area next to Mikey’s dick, at the apex of her legs. Mikey screams, her head thrown back as Damian screams to Andre to stop. “PLEASE DON’T! ANDRE PLEASE…” With a smirk, Andre tightens his grip on the knives’ handle and yanks downward, slicing a path down Mikey’s middle, all the way to and through her throat. Not satisfied with the damage done to her throat, Andre pulls back and begins to saw through Mikey’s throat from side to side, a large gaping hole big enough to hide a fist right in the middle. Blood flows in red rivers down Mikey’s body, soaking her face and hair, as well as the floor below her.

Andre turns towards Damian, walking until he is crowding into Damian’s personal space. “See what you’ve done, little bitch? You’ve made me do this, made me destroy the cunt you used to call your very own lover. I know all about your past with Mikey, know that she was the one you loved the most, before your little bitch Tommy came along. Mikey deserves to be destroyed.” Andre crosses the room once more, stabbing and slicing Mikey’s prone body repeatedly. All that can be heard from Mikey is a loud gurgling sound, her vocal cords cut. Andre doesn’t stop until Mikey’s intestines are hanging out of her body.

“Time to say goodbye, Damian. Then you and I are going to have some personal time, time for you to reflect on the damage you’ve caused.” Andre swipes his arm through the air, sending Mikey to the mansion. Andre laughs, knowing that Sonny won’t be able to save both of them…

Damian whimpers when he sees the whip in Andre’s hand. “Oh, come on, my sweet bitch! You love when I focus all my attention on you! It’s time to make you my perfect little slave…”

For the first time since Damian has become Andre’s captive, he does something he never thought he would ever do. Damian leans forward until his forehead touches Andre’s foot, his lips moving forward until they kiss Andre’s toes. He mumbles “Please, master. Please do not hurt me anymore. I’ll be so good for you…” Andre laughs, not only at Damian’s submission but at his lie. “That’s it, baby. Keep kissing my feet. I like seeing you bent over like that, showing me your submission. If only it were real, that you would totally surrender yourself to me. No Damian, you are too proud to lower yourself permanently to my will. So, we will have to keep practicing until you get it right…”

“Damn it, Adam…BREATHE!” Sonny, losing his temper, screams at Adam, as if that will make everything better. He tries spell after spell, but nothing works. He calls upon Luna, but she doesn’t respond. Adam lies on the floor, his hands around his throat, his face purple. Suddenly there is a flash of light, and Mikey appears on the floor at Sonny’s feet, blood dripping everywhere. What the fuck is he going to do now?

Desperate, Sonny blinks and Frank appears in front of him, bloody sword in hand. “Frankie, HELP ME!” Sonny screams, pointing to both Adam then Mikey. Frank grabs Sonny’s wrist, saying in a soft tone “I’ve got Adam, you go take care of Mikey.”

Frank moves to take Sonny’s place at Adam’s side, his hands running over Adam’s arms. “I’m going to try to heal you, Ad. Just hold on.” Frank mumbles a few spells before yelling “Absolmbo Aurora Dumongo!” There are a few seconds of silence and then Adam gasps and chokes, taking air deeply into his lungs. Frank sits Adam up, thumping on his back as Adam begins to gag a few times before finally taking a deep breath. “Easy, Adam. Are you hurt anywhere else?” Adam shakes his head, his breath unsteady. “Then I’m going over to help Sonny. Take your time, slow breaths. Don’t try to get up yet. Call if you need us.” Adam nods once, a small smile on his face. Frankie smiles back and then heads over to Sonny, where he is struggling to heal Mikey.

“Sonny, I’m the one who healed Tommy Joe the first time around. Let me try, please.” Sonny nods and moves back, giving Frankie room to work. Frankie closes his eyes and concentrates, mumbling the same spell over and over as his hands make sweeping motions over Mikey.

When a few minutes goes by without much change, Frankie opens his eyes and says to Sonny “Sonny, help me! Chant with me.” Frankie says “Eclisip Santory Leamirda Altum.” Sonny joins in, his smooth voice louder than Frankie’s.

Ten minutes later, sweat is pouring off Sonny and Frank as they continue to chant. A soft glow begins to engulf their hands, and Frankie begins to shake. Frank says “Son, go to the fridge and bring back all the blood bags you can find. GO!” Sonny gets up and leaves, running down the hall to the kitchen to do Frank’s bidding. When he returns, he is surprised to find that the glow is now encasing Mikey’s body, Frank shaking even harder.

“Sonny, paint blood around the throat wounds, then slowly pour the rest down her throat. Hurry…I can’t hold on by myself much longer!” Sonny carries out Frank’s orders, rejoining the chanting. The glow grows brighter as the hole in Mikey’s throat begins to slowly close until it’s healed. “Sonny, pour more blood down her throat until she wakes up.” Sonny, amazed by Frank’s skills, rips open a bag and begins slowly pouring the blood into Mikey’s open mouth. This continues for another ten minutes or so, until Mikey’s eyes shoot open, scaring both Sonny and Frank. A look of terror slowly covers her face as reality returns to Mikey.

“Mikey, it’s ok, it’s Frank and Sonny. Just lie still, let us get more blood into your system. Try to breathe…” Mikey begins to shake as Sonny continues to pour blood and they continuing to chant. Adam gets up and stumbles from the room, returning with wet towels, using them to wipe the blood off Mikey’s face and body before leaving to find Ray.

Mikey slowly tries to sit up, her movements unsteady. Frankie places a hand on her arm, saying “No, Mikey. You are going to have to stay in bed for a while, you are not strong enough. Adam went to find Ray. He will tuck you into bed.” The door flies open and Ray charges in, leaning down to scoop up Mikey into his arms. “Baby, I was so worried about you! I’m so glad you’re back!” Ray turns from Sonny to Frankie, saying “Both of you, thank you so much for saving my baby!” Both boys mumble their “your welcomes’ to Ray as they watch him stand, lifting Mikey off the floor. “I’ll take her to bed now, thank you again!” All three boys watch Ray and Mikey leave.

Adam gasps out “Thank you both! I would’ve died without your help. I’m going to go see Tommy and lie down for a bit, I’m feeling a bit weak. Love you both.” Adam then turns on shaking legs to go to the bedroom he shares with Tommy.

Sonny asks Frankie “How did you do that, Frank? I mean, I couldn’t help in the least bit. Where do you get your healing powers from?” Frank gives a short laugh as he wipes Mikey’s blood off his hands. “My werewolf heritage. I was blessed with healing powers from birth. Mikey helped me develop those powers in my youth. I wouldn’t be the healer I am today without her. Don’t sell yourself short, Sonny. I’ve seen what you can do, and I’m mightily impressed. This family is going to need you throughout this war, do not doubt your abilities. Hopefully, between the two of us, we will be able to keep the family healthy.”

Adam enters his bedroom to find Tommy pacing with a crying Dante in her arms. He stands in the back of the room, listening to Tommy softly say to their son “I know those toofers gotta hurt, honey. Before long, you will have another new tooth! I can’t wait to see your new smile!”

“Hello, baby.”

Tommy whips around so fast she almost drops the baby. Her mouth drops open, speechless. Adam slowly walks forward and scoops Dante out of Tommy’s arms, holding the baby in one arm while he wraps his other arm around Tommy, pulling her in for a tight hug. Tears begin flowing down Tommy’s face as she lays her head down against Adam’s chest, wrapping both arms around Adam and squeezing tightly.

“Cat got your tongue, baby?” Tommy shakily replies “How…where…you’re here!” Adam chuckles, leaning down to take Tommy’s lips with his, momentarily deepening the kiss as Dante continues to cry in Ad’s arms. Releasing Tommy, Adam goes instantly into father mode, pacing the room and rocking Dante to his chest. “Daddy gonna spend some time with his baby, then lay him down for a nap. Daddy needs a nap too.”

After twenty minutes, a tired-out Dante finally falls asleep in Ad’s arms. He slowly makes his way over to the crib, laying Dante down on his back before covering him with a blanket. Ad then stumbles over to the bed, where Tommy is waiting for him. “Hey baby” Ad says, a smile on his lips. Tommy opens her arms, which Ad takes as the perfect invitation to lay down next to his love. Placing his head down on her chest, Adam lets out a deep sigh. “I’m exhausted, honey. I never thought that I would be able to come home. I missed you so much!” Tommy gently runs her fingers through Ad’s tangled hair. “Rest in my arms. We’ll talk later.” A few minutes later Ad is deep asleep, his snores assuring Tommy that Adam is indeed home where he belongs.

When Adam wakes six hours later, he finds Tommy giving Alondra a bath. “Good evening, Ad. I thought you would sleep all night; you were snoring so loudly. I’m surprised you are awake.” Adam leans down and kisses first Tommy then Alondra. “DADDY!” Alondra cries out, a huge smile on her little face. “There’s daddy’s girl! You’re growing up so fast, daddy didn’t recognize his baby! What a big girl!” Alondra laughs, clapping her hands in glee as Tommy rinses her off, pulling her out of the tub. “Do you mind dressing her, so I can put the clothes in the dryer?” Adam takes Alondra from Tommy’s arms, wrapping her in a towel to dry her off. “Daddy gonna get you dressed and then feed his little baby! Daddy missed you!”

Once all the children have had a reunion with Adam, and are fast asleep, Tommy and Adam cuddle up in their huge bed, curled around each other. “Honestly, I never thought I would see you again, Ad. What caused Andre to change his mind?”

Adam sighs, his hand brushing Tommy’s hair behind her ear. “Andre sent Mikey and I home, so he could focus all his attention on Damian. Of course, he tried to kill the two of us in the process. Thank heavens for Sonny and Frankie, if it was not for them the two of us would be dead. Now it’s poor Damian that I’m worried about.”

Tommy reaches out to touch Adam’s face, as if still trying to convince herself that her mate is lying next to her. “I’m worried about him too. I’m afraid that Andre will never let Dam go.”

Adam reaches out to link fingers with Tommy. “Baby, I have no idea how Dam has held out so long. Mikey and I were simply there for Andre to toy with, but Dam…” Tears fill Adam’s eyes at the thought of his lover. “…he’s been torn apart and put back together so many times, I’m surprised that he is still sane. Andre constantly has him on his hands and knees, begging to be left alone. He’s has raped him countless times now, trying to destroy his spirit. He’s obsessed with Dam. I’m so proud of Dam for being so strong, a lesser vamp would’ve been broken a long time ago.”

Tommy pulls Adam closer. “Our Dam will survive, Ad, the same way you and Mikey did. We will find a way to break through Andre’s defenses and save him. We just need to hold on a bit longer…” Ad gives a deep sigh. “But that’s the thing, Tommy…how much longer will our Damian survive?”

Damian ends up face planted on the floor, his ass high in the air. Countless cuts, whip marks and bruises cover his entire body, his face unrecognizable. Marks from the iron maiden cover his entire body. Blood and come trickles out of his ass and onto the floor under him, making him feel sick to his stomach. His entire right side is broken, his limbs hanging to the side loosely. The ever-present collar is tight around his throat, a constant reminder that he is owned. Now he truly knows what hell he put his beloved Tommy though in the days that he hated the family so long ago…

“What do you mean, you can’t find it? I told you…” Damian tries to follow the conversation surrounding him, but he cannot concentrate, his vision threatening to white out.

“ALL RIGHT THEN! I’LL GO AN FIX YOUR MISTAKE! BUT YOU BETTER BELIEVE THIS IS THE LAST MISTAKE YOU WILL EVER MAKE!” Andre crosses the room, viciously kicking Damian in his side, causing Damian’s body to flatten on the floor beneath him. “I have to take care of a small problem. I will be right back. Lie there and be a good boy, hum?” Andre kicks Damian again before leaving the room.

Silence. Deafening silence.

Tears that he has been holding back start to slowly trickles down Damian’s face. This last episode has finally done it—it has destroyed him. Damian feels a disconnect, a shell of himself, as if what was left of his soul has been irreparably broken. He feels a stranger to himself, a ghost in a familiar body.

He tries to drag himself onto his side but doesn’t have the strength to move. Damian’s long hair hangs in his face, a section having been pulled out due to Andre’s rough handling.

As Damian lays his head back down on the floor, a deep sigh rattling through his chest, he closes his eyes against the pain and shame...

“Damian.”

He must be hearing things. If he didn’t know any better, he could’ve sworn he heard his name…

“Damian! Wake up! I’m here to rescue you!”

Damian slowly opens his eyes and turns his head to the side. A shadowy figure moves closer, leaning down to gently brush a hand down his arm. “All will be well, Damian. I’m here to take you home.”

Chapter Text

“No.”

The shadowy figure sounds surprised when he replies “No? Why would you wish to remain here when you can go home?”

Damian thinks his response “If…you leave me here…he will leave the family alone. He will focus on me, not them.” The figure gives a little laugh. “That’s not true, Damian. He will fight your family, no matter where you are. It’s time for you to go home, to rest for the battle to come. You will be needed to fight soon enough. Come, I’m taking you home.”

There is a flash of light.

Tommy screams when Damian suddenly appears on the middle of their bed naked, a tall fairy standing next to him.

“I brought Damian home. He will need lots of care, he is broken in more ways than one. Be kind to him.” Before Tommy can ask exactly who the fairy is, he disappears into thin air.

Tommy stands at the foot of the bed. “Dam? Baby, it’s Tommy. I’m just gonna go get Frankie and Sonny, so they can heal you. Just lie still, sweetheart, I’ll be right back.” Tommy then runs out of the room as fast as she can, looking for Frank and Sonny.

When they return with her to the bedroom, they find Damian staring off into space, as if lost in thought. “Hello, Father! We missed you so much! Frank and I are here to heal you, just be patient with us.”

An hour later, Frank and Sonny finish their work. They ask Tommy to join them in conversation in the hallway.

“We’re finished. He is healthy again, as least physically. He didn’t utter a sound, even thought it was easy to tell that he was in pain the entire time. I’m worried that Andre has broken his mind, on some level. We will have to wait to see what happens as time goes by.” Frank coughs, then continues with “And by the way, we tried to get that fucking collar off his throat with countless spells, but it wouldn’t budge. It’s Andre’s sick little reminder that Damian belongs to him. We will keep trying to find a spell to break it, but for now it remains. I’m sorry.” Tommy shakes her head then says “Thank you both for what you have done! I’m sure he will improve once he sees the children and spends some time with me and Adam. Please, check on him tomorrow?” Both nod in response. “Of course, we will keep an eye on him. Go, I’m sure you are anxious for a reunion!” Tommy thanks the two of them again and then returns to their bedroom.

She finds Dam under the covers in the middle of their bed, staring at the ceiling. She slowly approaches, sitting on the side of the bed as she says “Baby? I’m so glad to have you home! We missed you more than you will ever know! Is there anything you want, anything that will make you more comfortable?”

Silence.

Tommy hears Dante begin to cry, so she makes her way over to him, picking him up and laying him down on the changing table. She quickly changes his diaper, then goes to make him a bottle. When she returns to the bed with the baby in her arms, she softly says to Damian “Honey? Look, we have a son! His name is Dante. Look, babes.”

Silence. Damian continues to stare at the ceiling.

A silent tear makes its way down Tommy’s face. This is not the reunion she was expecting.

Later that evening, Adam returns home to find Tommy crying in the library. When she sees Adam, she jumps up from her seat, quickly making her way to his side. “Ad! Dam’s home! He’s…physically okay, but he won’t speak. Frank and Sonny think his mind is broken! I tried bringing the children to surround him on the bed, and he only stared at the ceiling, never acknowledging them! I can’t get him to speak, no matter what I do.”

Adam wraps his arms around his mate. “Give him time, honey. I’m sure he will come back to us. We just need to be patient with him.” Adam kisses Tommy fiercely then says “I need some blood. Let’s get dinner and then head to the bedroom. Maybe if the two of us cuddle with him, he will respond.”

A half an hour later, the two of them crawl into bed with Damian, both cuddled close around him. They are shocked to find Damian’s body temperature has lowered, until it feels as if they are sleeping with a corpse. Adam moves his hand gently towards the center of Damian’s chest, stroking up to the side of his face. “Baby, please come back to us! We miss you very, very much! Please, let us know that you hear us.

Silence.

Days turn into weeks, which turn into months. Every member of the family takes turns spending time with Damian, talking to him and doing everything they can to get a reaction out of him. No one is successful. The children jump up and down on him, Dante even throws up on him, but there is no change.

Late one night, when both Adam and Tommy are curled around Damian’s body, snuggled up in bed, a flash of light scares them. Standing at the end of the bed is the same fairy that brought Damian home. He stares in silence for a moment, as if surveying the situation.

“Damian. It’s time to join your family. You have been silent too long. Come, close the door on the past and move forward.”

No one moves or speaks for a moment, all three with their eyes locked on Damian. The fairy makes a motion in the air, and Damian sighs deeply, his eyes blinking. The fairy begins to sing, his sweet voice filled with fairy speak floats through the room. After a few minutes, Damian looks from Tommy to Adam, then to the fairy who continues singing to him. Suddenly Damian reaches out and grasps the collar around his neck with both hands, trying desperately to pull it off to no avail, his eyes wild. The fairy reaches out, grabbing both of Damian’s hands in his, pulling them away from his throat.

“Speak, Damian.”

Tommy gasps when Damian, tears flowing down his face, asks “Where am I?”

The fairy comments “You are home, Damian. This is no illusion. You are with your mates, where you belong. Andre is not here. You are safe.” Damian shakes his head no. “I still hear his voice, telling me that I belong to him, that I will always be his little bitch. He tells me that if I return, he will leave the family alone. He wants only me. He will end this war if I were to simply return and stay with him for eternity.”

Tommy and Adam voice their displeasure. “You can’t go, Dam! We need you; the family needs you here. He will never end this war, even if you return to him. Stay here with us, please! The children need you; we need you!”

The fairy agrees. “Your place is with your family. Trust me, Damian. You trusted me at one time, remember? Remember our past? I never lied to you then, and I am not lying to you now.” Tommy asks the fairy “You knew Damian years before? Please, what is your name?”

“My name is Aurora. Many years ago, Damian saved me from an evil ourk. We became friends, and I vowed that I would one day save his life. He has always been nothing but kind to me. I just want to see him happy, with his family. He is a wonderful person.”

Damian shakes his head once, his eyes focusing on Aurora. “Thank you for bringing me home, Aurora. I’m still not sure if being here is the right thing, but I am glad to be back.”

“You are welcome. I hope you and your family can help us fairies. Our Queen Celeste has been kidnapped by Andre. He wants us to use our magick against your family, but we would rather side with you in the battles to come. We hope you will allow us to be a part of your war.”

Hearing this, Adam calls an emergency family meeting, and Tommy, Adam and Aurora lead a weak but healed Damian to the foyer. Everyone gives greetings to Damian, hugging and kissing him, so happy to see him. Once assembled, Adam introduces Aurora to the family, and once again, Aurora gives his plea. Ray, happy to hear of reinforcements, immediately shakes Aurora’s hand. “We welcome you and yours, Aurora. We will gladly have you as allies! Tell us more about yourself.”

Aurora tells the family of his homeland. “There are at last count sixty-eight million of us, on our home planet of Riandoc, with others spread throughout the cosmos. We fairies come in different sizes and shapes. Most of us have some form of magick, some more powerful than others. I am the healer to the Queen. I miss her very much, we are very close, she is like a mother to me. I hope we can rescue her soon.”

When Ray offers to show Aurora a room for the night, he politely declines. “I must go home, to inform every one of our alliance. We use telepathy, but there are many that I must reach out to in person. I promise you will see me soon, so we can come up with a plan to move forward. I will bring King Caspian with me. I know he is looking forward to meeting all of you.” Aurora says his goodbyes and disappears.

The family spends the next hour or so discussing the new turn of events. Mikey, carefully watching Damian from across the room, smiles at Ray and then stands, crossing the room to sit on the coffee table in front of Damian. She takes Dam’s hands in hers and squeezes tightly. “How are you, sweetheart?” Damian gives Mikey a small smile. “I should be asking you the same question. The last time I saw you, your intestines were hanging out of your body. You’re looking good, babes.” Mikey returns Dam’s smile. “The two of us have enough nightmare fuel to last a lifetime, Adam too. I’m just glad that we are all here together again.” Damian leans forward, so he can whisper in Mikey’s ear. “He won’t leave me alone, Mikes. He constantly whispers to me, calling me back to him. I wish he would leave me alone.” Mikey squeezes Damian’s hands tighter. “Ignore him, Dam. Your place is here with us. We will do everything in our power to keep you here. Your mates and your children need you, so does Trick. We need you to be the leader that we know you are.” Damian stares at Mikey for a moment, before leaning forward to give her a kiss on the lips. “I love you, Mikey. I’m so glad to be here again.” Mikey gives Damian a light kiss on the cheek, whispering “I love you, too” before standing and returning to Ray’s side.

Tommy leans over to Damian. “Babes, are you tired? Do you need to go to sleep? The children will be up early tomorrow evening, and they are all going to want to spend time with you.” Damian gives a long sigh before answering. “I would love to go to bed with you and Ad, but there is something that I need to do first. Meet you there?” Tommy nods, a smile on her lips. She knows where Damian is headed. “Of course, sweetheart. See you later.” Tommy taps Adam’s shoulder, and Adam calls out “It’s getting late. Tommy and I are going to bed. We will see all of you tomorrow.” The rest of the family calls out their good nights, and Damian stands, heading towards Trick, who is standing with Pete. “Uh, Trick? Can I have a word with you before you go to sleep?”

Pete looks as if he wants to interfere, but Trick turns to him, placing a gentle hand on his arm. “I will meet you in our room in a moment, darling. I’m just going to have a quick word with Damian.” When Trick realizes that Pete isn’t moving, Trick squeezes his arm. “I will be safe, Pete dear. Please, give us a moment.” Pete places a kiss to Trick’s cheek before running his shoulder into Damian’s chest on his way out of the room, his face grim.

Damian gives Trick a raised eyebrow. “So, I see that he knows I’m the father of your baby.” Trick gives a short laugh, her head shaking as she says “Yes, he’s aware. Frankly, he is taking your return better than I thought he would. He hasn’t tried to hit you yet.” Damian laughs loudly. “I would like to see him try. I’m quicker that I look, that’s for sure.” Damian reaches out and places his hand on Trick’s stomach. “So, how are you, little mama? Is there anything you need from me? Anything you want?” Trick takes Damian’s hand and leads him to the library, where they will have some privacy. Once there, Trick gives Damian a shy grin. “Can I sit on your lap for a bit, Dam?”

Damian sits down on a recliner in the corner of the room, patting his lap. “Of course, darling. Come here.” Trick climbs on Damian’s lap, cuddling against him. Damian runs his fingers through Trick’s hair, brushing it back from her face before slowly rubbing her belly. “How has the pregnancy been so far, my love?” Trick sighs totally enthralled by Damian’s touch. “I’m fine so far. Just a little evening nausea. I’m four months along today.”

“And Pete? Has he been taking good care of you? Or do I need to kick his butt?” Trick’s laughter is muffled against Damian’s shirt. “He’s been wonderful. He cuddles with me every night, rubbing my belly while I sleep. I’ve even caught him talking to the baby.” Damian smiles down at Trick. “Good! I’m glad he wants to be a part of the baby’s life. I promise, I will have a conversation with him, assure him that I am not trying to take over here. By the way…” Trick raises an eyebrow at Damian, waiting patiently for his question. “…how much do you want me to be a part of the baby’s life? Do you want me to bow out, let the two of you raise the baby, or do you want me to be a ‘third parent’ of sorts?”

Trick looks up at Damian, giving him a searching look. “I was hoping that the three of us could raise the baby together, like you do with Tommy and Adam. That is, if you want to be a part of the baby’s life.” Damian looks down at Trick for a moment, then says “Then why don’t we go talk to Pete, get this over with? I’m sure he is in your room right now stressing over the fact that I’m back. Let’s do this.” Damian gives Trick one more hug, then stands with her in his arms, gently placing her feet on the floor. Trick leads the way to her rooms, her stomach swimming with apprehension.

When they arrive, they find Pete watching soccer on television in the front room of their suite. Damian notices how Pete instantly tenses up the second he walks into the room. Time to get this settled…

“Hello Pete. I hope you don’t mind, but I would like to have a talk with you about the baby.” Pete reaches out and turns off the television, gesturing to Damian to have a seat on the couch next to him. Trick sits across the room from them, her body tense as she watches the exchange.

“Pete, I know that I am not your favorite person right now. I know you hate me for hurting Trick. Believe me, if there had been a way to keep from hurting her, I would’ve done it, but there wasn’t. The two of us will have to live for the rest of our lives with that nightmare. If I could take it back, I would. The question is, where do we go from here? Trick would like for the three of us to raise the baby, and I am all for it. I would like to know what you want.”

Pete shoots Trick a look before turning to Damian. “I…have no problem with the three of us raising the baby. My question is, how much do you wish to participate? You have another family, with multiple children. How often do you see yourself here with this child?”

Damian recognizes jealousy when he sees it. He also knows that Pete is scared to lose the main spot in Trick’s life. “Pete don’t worry. You will be spending the majority of the time with the baby, and Trick as well. Hell, it’s not as if you will have to disappear when I show up! You are the main father here, never fear. I promise, we can work this out.”

Trick leans forward in her seat. “If I’m here for the birth, I want both of you with me. Everything else will work out for the best, I’m sure of it.”

Damian shakes his head in agreement. “We can talk out any rough patches along the way. I learned, being a part of my relationship with TJ and Ad, that talking is the most important part. Without communication, it all falls apart.” Damian can tell that he has worn his welcome out with Pete, so he stands up, sticking out his hand out for Pete to take. Pete, hesitant for a moment, takes Damian’s hand in his, shaking it for a moment before letting go. Damian then circles the room, leaning down to place a kiss on Trick’s cheek. “I will see the two of you later. Good night.”

Damian stops at the kitchen for a bag of blood before heading to bed with his mates. He finds Tommy pacing the floor with an upset Dante, who is cutting a tooth. Damian walks up to Tommy, hands out. “Let me see this little stranger! It’s time he gets to know his other dada!” Tommy hands over Dante to Damian before laying down on the bed with Adam. “Well, hello Dante! I’m your other dada! Let’s take a walk.” Damian surprises his mates by taking the baby from the room, walking the halls with him. “You cutting a new tooth, sweetie? Is that toy fun to chew on? Let’s get to know each other, shall we?”

Twenty minutes later, Dante falls asleep in Damian’s arms. Damian returns to the bedroom, laying the baby down in his crib then covering him with a blanket. When he lays down next to Tommy, Damian gives a deep sigh. “That’s a fine boy, Tommy. You have done an amazing job with him while Ad and I were away, all the kids, really. You should be proud of yourself.” Tommy leans over and kisses Damian. “Thank you, honey. That means the world to me.”

Damian sits up, his body blanketing both his mates. “So…who’s up for a little fun?”

Later that night, while Damian is sleeping, he feels himself being transported to a large, dark room. He immediately tries all the doors, but they are locked. Feeling nervous, Damian slowly paces the room, looking for clues as to where he is. From outside the doors, male and female screams and moans fill his ears. Wherever he is, he is not the only captive.

“Hello Damian.”

Damian turns around to face Andre, who is standing with his arms crossed, a smirk on his face. Andre reaches out and yanks hard on the collar around Damian’s neck, pulling Damian to him. “Welcome to my menagerie, Damian. You may belong to your family during the daytime, but every night you belong to me, here in this room. This is where your family will end up, at the end of the war. My own private collection of freaks, to keep forever. The only difference is you will stay by my side, my broken little toy forever. I will strip you of your magick, make you live on your knees at my feet. My sweet little slave.” Andre points to his feet, and Damian sinks to his knees, against his will. Andre opens his pants and yanks Damian forward by his collar, his hard cock slamming into Damian’s lips. “Suck, bitch. Show daddy how much you love him.”

Damian feels weak, sapped of all powers. Andre yanks on the collar again, and Damian opens his mouth against his will. Andre slides his cock all the way to the back of Damian’s throat, smiling when he gags on it. “That’s my boy, suck daddy’s cock. Show me you love me. That’s my good boy.”

From outside the room, Damian hears a loud scream. He raises an eyebrow to Andre, who laughs. “Suck harder, baby. As you can hear, we are not alone. One day you will meet the others, but not today. I am not ready to give up all my secrets just yet.”

Ten minutes later, Andre shoots down Damian’s throat, causing him to choke. As Andre pulls up his pants, he looks down at Damian, a look of glee in his eyes. “Each night, I will bring you to me, Damian. While your body is asleep in your bed, I will ravish you, make you submit to me. When you awaken, you will remember everything, feel everything. You will know who you belong to.” Andre runs his fingers through Damian’s hair, tugging lightly. “Good night, little bitch.”

Damian’s body shoots upright in his bed, awakening both Tommy and Adam. When they ask what is wrong, Damian tells them what happened. “It was real. Even though my body was here, everything was real. He had total control over me. I tried to fight back, but my powers were gone. And the screams! They were horrifying, so many voices in agony! He told me that the family will be there, as part of his collection at the end of the war. Except for me, I’m to serve him for eternity at his feet.” Looking from Tommy to Adam, Damian says “I’m so scared, for all of us. What if it is all real? That our future is set, that we lose, that we pay the ultimate price? I can’t spend eternity apart from you, I can’t…” Damian breaks down in tears. “I can’t go through this every night, I’ll go insane!” Adam wraps his arms tightly around Damian, whispering softly in his ear. “We are here for you, sweetheart. We love you so much, we will be there for you every step of the way. Tommy, I and the children all love you, Dam. You are not alone.” Tommy leans over and gives Damian a kiss, brushing his long hair out of his eyes. “Ad’s right, Dam. We are all here for you.”

The next evening, Adam meets with Ray and Mikey in the library. He fills them in on what happened to Damian. “He said he heard screaming and moaning coming from outside the room. Could that be Queen Celeste? Or could he have others captive, the way we were?”

Ray ponders the question, then adds “I’ve spoken to six other realms over the past few days. Important members of society, royalty or those with special talents have gone missing in each realm. So yes, that’s a possibility. Since our family is a collection of unique individuals, it makes sense that he wants to ‘collect’ all of us. We must find a way to fight him, to counteract his magick. There has to be some power out in the cosmos that he has yet to acquire!” Mikey mumbles “Not unless he’s already captured it all, darling.”

Just then, Gee runs into the room, tears streaming down their face. “Momma, Daddy!” They come to a halt in front of the three of them, their features clearly showing hysteria. “I was talking to Frankie in our suite, and suddenly he disappeared! At first, I thought he was playing a joke on me, but I’ve looked all over, and I can’t find him! Please help me! What if Andre took him? I can’t live without my Frankie!” Mikey stands, pulling Gee into her arms, holding on tightly as Gee wails. Ray and Adam look at each other, fear showing on their faces. Adam whispers to Ray “It seems it’s our turn to lose someone, Ray.”

The first thing that Frank notices when he opens his eyes is a dull headache right between his eyes. He tries to move, but finds his arms and legs chained to a stone wall behind him. As he shakes the hair out of his eyes, he says a spell to dissipate his headache, but the spell does not work. Frankie then tries a few others before realizing that his magick is no longer working.

He is in a large oval room, an iron maiden pushed up against the wall opposite him. Shelving units with all types of torture devices sit against the walls, with a rack and a St. Andrew’s cross sitting in the middle of the room. The lighting is low, casting long shadows everywhere he looks.

The door to the room opens. Andre enters, accompanied by three large guards.

“Frankie! Welcome to my chamber! I’m so glad you’re here!” Andre claps his hands in anticipation. “I thought I would welcome you to your new home in the same manner that I welcomed Trick. Damian loved being in there as well. Boys…” Andre flicks a finger, and the locks holding Frank open, dropping him to the floor in a heap. “…hold him up. Thomas, the maiden.” Frankie begins to fight, but two huge guards grab his arms, hauling him across the room to stand in front of the maiden. The third guard opens the maiden’s rusted doors, while Andre selects a sledgehammer from one of the shelving units. “Hold him tight, boys. Welcome to your new existence, Frankie.” Andre swings the sledgehammer, hitting Frankie’s right leg. The sound of breaking bones is loud in the room, and Frank gives out a loud scream. Andre takes his time, breaking one bone at a time, until Frank is sagging between the two guards. Andre doesn’t stop until the only things that Frankie has that are left untouched are his jaw and his head.

Andre calls out “Alorium Benegial Pastorium!” then yells “Put him in the maiden, boys.” The two guards move in unison, pushing Frank’s body backwards onto the rusted spikes. Andre laughs over Frank’s screams of pain. One of the guards picks up a box and steps forward, placing the box under Frank’s feet, to help hold him upright. The three guards step away, and Andre moves to stand in front of Frank, his hands on the doors.

“As you probably have guessed by now, Frankie dear, the spell I conjured is keeping you from bleeding out. I’m not here to drain you of blood, no, I’m here to teach you obedience. There is a hole in the doors of the maiden in which I will feed you my cock when I want your attention. You will suck me off any time I demand it, or I will bring your mate and your children here. Can you imagine, those adorable little ones of yours in their own little maidens? Those little brats I WILL let bleed out, all over my clean floor. Of course, I’d have my way with your mate before putting her in her own maiden. So, if I were you, I’d focus on my cock sucking skills. Say goodnight, Frankie.” Andre shuts one door, then the other, the sounds of Frank’s screams filling the room.

Andre turns to the three guards. “Since you have done such an amazing job today, the three of you may take turns with 3A. Just don’t permanently damage the goods, got it?” The three guards give Andre a huge smile, with one of them replying “Thank you, boss” as they leave the room.

Andre turns back to the maiden, enjoying the soft whines he hears from the other side. “Time to call for Damian” he thinks as he leaves the room, locking the door behind him. Andre crosses the hall and opens the door to find Damian on his knees in the middle of the room.

“Andre, where’s Frankie?” Damian asks. Andre crosses the room to stand in front of Damian, his hand running through Damian’s long curls before tugging on his collar. “Frankie? Why are you asking about him? This is our time together.” Damian begs “C’mon, Andre! Tell me the truth! Frankie is missing, and he must be with you! Where is he?” Andre chuckles. “Why? Are you, my little bitch boy with no powers, planning to rescue him? Good luck with that, baby. If you really must know, I have him in the same maiden that you and Trick enjoyed so much time in before. In case you are wondering, I haven’t made him suck my cock yet, but I did threaten his family. Can you imagine those little brats in a maiden? I know they make them that small.” Andre laughs when Damian’s eyes grow huge at the thought. “I’m sure he will fall into line. Speaking of falling in line, my little bitch…” Andre yanks hard on Damian’s collar. “…strip. Then on your hands and knees.”

Damian follows orders, cursing under his breath when he hears Andre removing his clothes behind him. As Andre pushes into him, he hears him say “So, how’s Tommy? Is she ready for more pups yet?”

“Leave her be, Andre! You have me to satisfy you! You don’t need Tommy!” Andre laughs, pulling out and then shoving back into Damian harshly. “What? Are you afraid that I’ll knock her up? She’s got you for that, obviously. She’s your little whore, isn’t she? I bet all you have to do is look at her and she’s pregnant! All she’s good for is making pups! As a matter of fact…” Andre gives another evil laugh “…let’s prove the theory…”

Andre blinks and Tommy appears in front of Damian. “Andre? Where…am I?”

“Say hello to Damian, Tommy. He’s playing the part of my little bitch this evening. We’ll be with you shortly.” Tommy, seeing Damian’s distress, moves forward, brushing the hair out of Damian’s face. “Baby, I’m with you. Just hold on to me. I love you.” Tommy bends down and takes Damian’s hands in hers, kissing his cheek.

“Awww, you two are adorable together! Maybe I should bring the two of you here together more often!” Andre grunts loudly, unloading inside of Damian, who whimpers in response. When Andre pulls out, Damian collapse on the floor, panting.

“Come here, Tommy Joe.” Tommy looks at Damian, panic in her eyes as she lets go of Damian’s hands. Damian says “No, don’t Andre! Please leave her alone! I’ll do anything you want, just don’t touch her!” Andre laughs at Damian. “You’ll do anything I want you to anyways, bitch! Now let me speak to your mate.” Andre stands then offers a hand to Tommy to take. Tommy stands and walks over to Andre, who leads her to a chair in the corner of the room. “Sit on my lap, darling! Let’s have a chat.”

Tommy hesitates but climbs up on Andre’s naked lap, feeling him wrap his arm around her. Stroking her hair gently, Andre asks “So Tommy, how have you been? How is our child? What did you name it?”

Tommy looks down at the floor, scared to make eye contact with Andre. “I am…fine, thank you for asking, Andre. We had a girl; her name is Alondra. She is very pretty, a very good little girl.”

Andre smiles at Tommy. “I’m glad to hear it! I would like to meet her one day. Let’s see…you have four children now, correct?” Tommy nods in response. Andre leans down and quietly asks “Would you like to try for five?”

“ANDRE! LEAVE TOMMY ALONE!” Damian screams, trying his hardest to rise from the floor but failing. Andre laughs at Damian. “Bitch, when will you ever learn that you can do nothing without my orders? Keep your ass on the floor and enjoy what comes next!”

Tommy tries to climb off Andre’s lap, but Andre waves his hand and Tommy stops moving, her will broken. “You’re under my control now, honey. Stand and take your clothes off, then kneel in front of me. We are going to have a lot of fun…”

Tommy does as she is ordered, kneeling between Andre’s open legs. Andre looks down at Tommy, a smirk on his lips. “Take my cock in your mouth, sweetheart. Get me hard so I can fuck a baby into you. C’mon, be a good girl.” Damian whines as Tommy wraps a hand around Andre’s cock, pulling it towards her lips. Before swallowing it, she licks the tip, running her tongue all around it as if she were sucking on a lollipop. Tommy ducks her head, taking the entire shaft down her throat. “No gag reflexes! Damian, she’s a keeper!” Tommy slowly builds a rhythm, sucking her cheeks in as she moves.

Fifteen minutes later, Andre gently pulls Tommy off his cock. “Come, sit on my lap, face me baby.” Tommy slowly climbs up on Andre’s lap, staring into his eyes. “Reach back, baby. Grab me and sit down on it. I want to hear your moans as I fill you.” Tommy does as instructed, tears in her eyes. Andre glances at Damian, who looks totally destroyed. “Damian, come over here. Kneel at my feet. I want you to have a close-up view of what happens next.” Damian does as he is instructed, kneeling next to the couple.

Andre runs a hand through Tommy’s hair. “Ride me, bitch. Take me into your womb so I can fuck a baby into you.” Tommy looks at Damian as she starts to rock back and forth, tears flowing even faster. Damian tries to reach out a hand to her, to reassure her, but he finds he cannot move.

The scene continues for over twenty minutes, with Damian having a close-up view of everything. Andre rubs a hand down Tommy’s back, pulling her closer as he starts to unload deep inside her. They repeat the process until Tommy’s stomach is distended from the loads inside her. Suddenly, Tommy’s scent changes, a signal that she is now carrying Andre’s baby. Tommy hides he head in shame against Andre’s shoulder, until he cups her chin and pulls her head up till their eyes meet. “I’m a daddy again! I bet your mates won’t want to touch you now! You’re nothing but a dirty little whore.” Andre rubs his hand over Tommy’s stomach. “I can’t wait until you’re showing! It will be so much fun to play with the baby.” Damian growls his displeasure, which makes Andre laugh. “See? He’s already upset with you! I’m sure Adam will grow to hate you, since you manage to have everyone’s babies but his! Poor boy.” Tommy wails then begs “Please, Andre! Let me go! I want to go home with Damian! Please release us!”

Andre waves a hand, and both Damian and Tommy stand. “Put your clothes on, both of you. It’s time I go play with the werewolf.” Once they are dressed, Andre kisses both Tommy and Damian, his hand rubbing Tommy’s stomach one more time. “Good night, little bitches. Damian, see you tomorrow night.”

When Tommy opens her eyes, she sees Damian lying next to her. The bed is empty on Adam’s side, since he is still at the front fighting the war. Damian opens his eyes, and Tommy throws herself into his arms, crying in earnest. “Dam! I’m…” Tommy cannot even begin to say the word. “…not again! Five babies?! I can’t…” Damian pulls Tommy down into his arms, resting her cheek against his chest. “I’m so sorry honey! I tried to move, but I couldn’t! I felt so helpless watching…”

Just then, Adam returns. He is covered with blood, a nasty cut on his forehead. Damian gestures to him to come closer, and he heals the wound, changing Adam into clean clothes and removing the blood from his skin. “Thanks Dam. What’s wrong? Why is Tommy crying?”

Damian looks down at Tommy, who is now crying hysterically. “Tonight, Andre pulled Tommy into our night session. He raped her, over and over, and there was nothing I could do to stop it. She’s pregnant again.” Rage takes over Adam’s features, which causes Damian to whisper “No Ad! Please, she feels bad enough that it happened! Please do not make things worse!” Adam looks from Damian to Tommy, and takes a deep breath, trying to dispel his anger. “Honey? Please look at me.” Tommy shakes her head no, burrowing her face deeper into Damian’s chest. “Please? I want you to look into my eyes when I speak to you. Please look at me.” Tommy makes a deep sigh and then raises her head, turning it so she is looking at Adam. “I love you, Tommy Joe. I will love any baby from you, regardless. You mean the world to me; you are my precious mate. Damian and I love you.” Tommy whines, her tears flowing harder. “I don’t want his baby! I want your baby, Ad! I want it to be yours!” Adam brushes the hair out of Tommy’s face. “It IS mine, and Damian’s! It belongs to the three of us, no matter what he says about it! We are the ones raising it, it is ours!” Damian, trying for humor, asks Tommy “Are you finished drowning my chest, love?” Tommy looks into Damian’s eyes, sees the humor there, and reaches out to tweak one of his nipples. Adam reaches out and picks up Tommy in his arms, heading to the recliner at the far end of the room. Tommy immediately cuddles into Adam’s chest, hiccupping. Damian gets out of bed and joins the two of them, pulling up a chair to sit next to them.

Damian and Tommy hear Andre’s laughter in their ears, causing them both to shudder.

They stay like this until the sun goes down, cuddled close. Draven, who is now ten years old, comes into the room, asking for dinner. “What’s wrong with Mommy? Is she sick?”

Adam asks Draven to come closer to the recliner. “No, your mommy is just a little sad, but she will be better soon. Daddy Damian will fix all of you something to eat, sweetheart. Mommy and I will be with you soon.” Draven nods, reaching out a hand for Damian to take. The two of them leave the room hand in hand, heading for the kitchen.

Andre’s POV

Weeks go by. Frank stays in the maiden, left alone to ponder his fate. It would be ideal if his mind would be as broken as his body, but the little bastard is strong. I’m only holding off on the inevitable.

One day, after a long session with Damian (which I thoroughly enjoyed!) I decide that it is time to start my session with Frank. I open the doors to the maiden, to find him glaring at me. This is going to be fun!

I lift my hand and Frankie’s body floats off the spikes in the maiden and crosses the room, to end up in front of the St. Andrew’s cross. Another wave and Frankie, who growls loudly, is chained to the cross, his arms above his head.

“Hello, little Frankie! Did you enjoy your time in the maiden? I figured a little solitude would do you good. Here…” Andre waves his arm and Frank’s body is healed; his bones knitted back into place.

“There, that should make you feel a lot better! What, have you nothing to say to me?”

Silence.

“Well, since you refuse to speak to me, I’ll do all the talking.” Andre crosses the room, stopping in front of one of the shelving units. It takes him a few minutes, but he selects a riding crop and returns to Frank. “Such an innocent instrument. Meant to give more enjoyment than pain. In your case, it’s the latter. Let’s start off slowly, shall we?” Andre calls out “Reument Callum” and Frank’s clothes disappear. Andre whistles his approval. “Compact, lean, muscular. Built for speed. Like the other werewolves that I’ve had under my control in the past.” Andre swings back his arm, aiming for Frank’s left nipple. Frank jumps but keeps quiet. “I know from experience that weres like you can take a hell of a lot of punishment before they crack. I am going to enjoy this immensely.”

Another swing, connecting with Frank’s dick. Frank jumps again but manages to keep quiet.

“So far, I have only been playing with your family. The war is just a diversion, to keep you busy, to keep you from learning my real agenda. You are the first in the family to experience my entire process. Aren’t you the lucky one?”

Another swing. Silence.

“There is so much that I want to learn from you, about YOU. Your heritage, your linage. What makes you tick. You see, Frank, you are my latest test subject. Let’s see how much a werewolf can take, shall we?”

Another swing. A grunt.

“Come on, Frank! Let’s hear you! I won’t stop until I hear your voice, no matter how long it takes. I will break you. You will tell me what I want to know, or you will feel my wrath. Trust me, that’s the last thing you want.”

Swing. Moan of pain.

“You are unique, Frankie. Your healing skills set you apart. How is it that a were like you inherited such amazing abilities? And your time with Mikey. How did you meet her? What did she teach you? How did she manage to manipulate the skills that you already had, into the skill set you have today? Come, Frankie…”

Swing. Shuddering breath, slight moan.

“…tell me your secrets.”

Chapter Text

All day staring at the ceiling
Making friends with shadows on my wall
All night hearing voices telling me
That I should get some sleep
Because tomorrow might be good for something
Hold on, feeling like I’m headed for a breakdown
And I don’t know why
But I’m not crazy, I’m just a little unwell
I know, right now you can’t tell
But stay awhile and maybe then you’ll see
A different side of me
I’m not crazy, I’m just a little impaired
I know right now you don’t care
But soon enough you’re gonna think of me
And how I used to be…me
Unwell—Matchbox 20

Damian knocks on Gee’s door. They answer, their face covered in tear tracks. They throw their arms around Damian, tears falling on his shoulder. “Oh Dam, you came at the right time! I’ve just been sitting here, missing my Frankie.” They lead him to a recliner in the corner of the room. Damian sits down and pats his lap, and Gee climbs up to sit with him. “It’s so lonely when the kids are asleep! All I do is sit here and cry…” Damian brushes the hair out of Gee’s eyes, rubbing his hand down Gee’s back, pulling them close. “Cry it out, sweetie. I’m here, I’ve got you.”

Two hours goes by this way, until Gee finally raises their head, wiping at their eyes. “Thank you so much for holding me, Dam. It’s been so long since I’ve been held! I miss it.” Damian kisses Gee gently on the lips. “I hate the idea of you being so lonely. I wish I could rescue Frankie! The minute I go to where he is held, I lose all will, all powers. Andre has made sure that there is no way for me to rescue him. I’m sorry, sweetheart.” Gee kisses Damian on the cheek. “It’s not your fault, Dam. Who knows? By now he may not even be alive.” Damian hushes Gee, enveloping them in a tight hug. “Don’t say that, sweetie! Frankie’s tough, he will survive. If I did, he will too.” Gee sighs loudly. “I hope so, Dam. I can’t live without my mate. I haven’t said anything, but I’ve been fighting separation symptoms since he was taken. I’m not sure how much longer that I can stand this.” Dam kisses Gee again, this time for longer. “Think of your kids, honey. They need you even more now that their father is gone. Hang in there, Gee. You have the entire family here for you, you know that? We all love you and would do anything for you. Lean on us, we will get you through.”

Damian stays until he feels a pull from elsewhere. “Andre wants me, love. I must go. I will see you soon.” With one more kiss, Damian stands, placing Gee’s feet on the floor then saying goodbye, leaves for his room.

As soon as Damian lays down on his bed, he is transported to the room where he always meets Andre, to find himself alone. Nervous, Damian paces the room, trying to ignore the pained noises that he hears coming from other parts of the building.

“Hello, my little bitch. Want to see Frankie? He misses you.” Damian turns towards Andre. “Of course I want to see him! Please, take me to him.”

Andre opens the door and escorts Damian across the hall. As soon as the door closes, Damian see Frankie, who is chained to the St. Andrew’s cross in the center of the room, a puddle of blood at his feet. His body holds the evidence of hundreds of hours of torture.

“Where are your manners, Frank? Say hello to Damian. He been so worried about you, so I brought him to see you.”

Silence.

Damian calls out “Frank! We all miss you! Gee and the kids love you more that you know, hold on to that! The entire family loves and misses you, including me!” Frankie does not respond, but his eyes shine brightly, and he gives Damian a slight smile.

Andre turns towards Damian. “Werewolves! Stubborn things! He refuses to speak, no matter what I do to him. He is more willful than even you are!” Damian whimpers as he says “Please, Andre! Hurt me in his place. You’ve done so much damage already, please leave him alone! Take me back, hurt only me. Please let him go.” Andre takes a few steps towards Damian until they are face to face. Andre reaches out, running his hand through Damian’s hair. “That’s kind of you, darling. But no, there is nothing that will keep Frank from his fate.” Turning back towards Frank, Andre continues “You see, with all the weres that I have ever had in my grasp, I never was able to turn them. But recently, I found an old spell. It will allow me to force Frank into his werewolf form.” Looking back at Damian, Andre calls out “Kneel, Damian.” Instantly, Damian knees give out and he sinks until he is kneeling.

Andre walks up to Frank, a huge grin on his face. “Ontropuo Leanifol seritos ceasium. Folito allum deaandro iuputro sallum.” Frank throws his head back and growls in pain, his body shaking. Andre turns back to Damian. “You see, Damian, I am a collector of sorts. I have many relics and body parts from different creatures. I have the wings of fairies, the femur of a lemex, and so on. But there is one thing that I am missing…” Andre smirks down at Damian, as Frank’s body begins to turn behind him. “…a werewolf pelt.”

Realization crosses Damian’s face. “NO, ANDRE! YOU CAN’T! It will KILL HIM! LEAVE HIM ALONE!” Andre laughs in Damian’s face. “Be quiet, and enjoy the show, Damian.”

Hair begins to sprout out of Frank’s skin, his body wracked with pain at the forced turning. As part of Andre’s spell, he made sure that Frank can still stand upright on human hind legs. Before Damian’s shocked face, Frank completes the transition. Andre twists his hand in the air, and the chains above Frank open just long enough for Frank’s body to flip around, the chains closing once more.

Andre moves forward, his hand gently rubbing down Frank’s back. “Ever see a wolf stand upright on human legs before? There a first time for everything.” Andre steps around Damian and makes his way towards a closet at the other side of the room, returning with a large silver knife. “I know you can understand me, Frank. If I were you, I would hold as still as you can. You wouldn’t want my hand to slip, now would you? Just think, when I am finished, I will always have a part of you with me. What a wonderful idea!”

Andre pushes the knife into the top upper left quadrant of Frank’s back, near his shoulder. Taking his time to drag out the experience and Frank’s pain, he slowly saws the knife back and forth across the top of his back, right below his neck. The silver in the knife causes Frank’s skin to burn and smoke, adding to his agony. When he gets to the right side, he stops. The entire time, Frank has been howling in agony, blood dripping down his back.

Damian continues to kneel on the floor at Andre’s feet, bile rising upward in his throat. If he could talk, he would be screaming at the top of his lungs in frustration. He feels useless, unable to help Frank in any way.

Andre saws slowly down both sides, until the sides are even with the crack of Frank’s ass. Damian can see Frank’s muscles through the blood that won’t stop dripping down his back.

Andre makes another horizontal cut across the bottom of Frank’s back, pulling the pelt from his body. “Aolumn necitel qourtium.” Frank’s back suddenly stops bleeding, but the huge open wound does not close. Frank snaps his jaws together, his howls growing even louder.

Andre turns to Damian, the pelt hanging over his arm. “Touch it, Damian. Feel how soft it is.” Against his will, Damian reaches out his hand and sinks his fingers into the pelt, running his fingers through the fur. “I will use salt peter on the back once it dries, to preserve the skin. It will last forever this way.” Tears slowly leak down Damian’s face, knowing that he is touching the result of Frank’s agony.

“Allurum tesus.” Frank’s body slowly turns back to human. The moment that the change is complete, Andre repeats the process of turning Frank back around with his back against the cross. Frank cries out when his injured back contacts the wood of the cross.

“Look, Frank. See how beautiful you are? I get to keep you forever.” Andre carefully places the pelt backside up on a table in the corner of the room, before returning to Frank. “You will no longer bleed, but I have no intentions of healing your back. The skin will have to grow back on its own. It seems that you are in for a long healing process. Now, I’m taking my little bitch back where he belongs. Good night, little Frankie.” Andre raises his arm, and Damian stands, falling in line behind Andre to the other room. Once they arrive, Andre waves a hand and says “Speak, Damian.”

“How…” Damian tries to search for words, but he is still in shock. “…how could you do that to him? To strip him of his dignity that way! What if that skin never grows back? What if he gets an infection? What…”

“Damian, my sweet boy! Such concern for a filthy animal! Now Frank is a part of my collection, for me to do with as I please! Do you think he is the first creature that I have handled in such a way? Did you think that when I spoke earlier of creatures that I collected parts of, that those creatures were DEAD?” Andre throws back his head and laughs. “No, my innocent boy! They were all alive, or were, shortly after I took what I wanted! Others I kept for my own amusement. You have much to learn, Damian. Luckily for you, I already have my fill of vampire fangs.” Andre yanks on Damian’s locks. “Get undressed now, on all fours. I’ll enjoy your body before I send you home.”

When Damian’s eyes open in his bed, tears begin to pour down his face. Turning to Adam, he gently shakes him awake. Reaching out a hand, he strokes Adam’s cheek. Quietly whispering, Damian says “Ad? Please I need you! Can we please go somewhere else to talk?” Adam shakes his head in agreement and the two of them quietly leave Tommy in their bed and make their way to the library.

“I’m sorry to bother you, but I need to get this out or I’ll go insane!” Ad takes Damian in his arms, pulling him onto his lap. Damian lays his crying head down on Adam’s chest and proceeds to tell him of what he just witnessed.

“I’ll never forget his howls! They were so broken, so horrific. And I couldn’t do anything to help him! There I was, kneeling at Andre’s feet, without power to speak or stand, while Frankie suffered just inches away! I can’t get the scene out of my mind!”

Adam holds Damian tightly in his arms. “Babe, I’m sorry that you are going through hell every night like this. Poor Frankie! All he’s been through! I’m sure the pain alone is driving him insane. I wish we could rescue him.”

“So do I. Every night I end up in the very place he is being held captive, and there is nothing I can do to rescue him! It’s bad enough having to give Andre my body every night, but I’m useless when I get there! What use am I if I cannot help anyone, much less myself?”

The two of them are silent for a while, simply holding on to each other. Damian whispers “Ad, we have to tell Ray what I’ve seen, but Gee cannot find out what I witnessed. It would kill her…”

“What would kill me?” Adam and Damian raise their eyes to see Gee standing in the doorway in their nightgown, arms crossed. “I just came here for a book, and I find the two of you are trying to hold back information. What would kill me, Damian?”

Damian looks up at Ad, who gives a slight shake of his head. Damian then turns his gaze on Gee. “Tonight, I ended up with Andre as usual. He asked me if I wanted to visit with Frankie, and of course I said yes. He did it to tease me, knowing that there wasn’t anything I could do to rescue Frank. He took me to the room where he is being held prisoner. He was chained to a St. Andrew’s cross, and it was apparent that he has suffered much torture.”

Tears begin to slide down Gee’s face. “And his spirits? How did he seem?”

Damian stands up from Adam’s lap, reaching out a hand to Gee, who takes it like a lifeline. Damian pulls Gee until they are sitting between Adam and himself, both reaching out to comfort her. “I told him that you and the children love him, and that the entire family loves and misses him. He gave me a smile and his eyes lit up. It was easy to see that his spirit is not broken, no matter what Andre put him through.” This brings a slight smile to Gee’s lips, knowing that their husband was surviving through the torture. “And then what? What else did you see?”

Damian avoids looking at Gee as he says “That was all. Andre took me back into the original room that he keeps me in when he forces me to visit.”

“Then why are you weeping like this? There must be more to the story.” Gee then quietly says “Dam? Look me in the eye.” There is a pause, and Damian finally raises his head to look directly into Gee’s face. “He was extra rough with me when he had sex with me, before he returned me home. I can’t take much more of this nightly nightmare. That’s why I was crying.”

Gee stares into Damian’s eyes, searching. Seconds turn into minutes. Finally Gee cries out “NO! There IS more, and you are holding back from me! Dam, I love that you love me, and you want to protect me, but I am Frank’s mate, he is MY husband! We are as one! If he is suffering, I deserve to know what he is going through!”

Dam breaks eye contact to look at Ad, who whispers “only if you can go through it again, love.” Damian pauses for a second, before nodding. “There is something that you need to understand first, Gee. When I am with Andre, I have no will power, no powers. Every word he utters I must obey.” Gee nods in understanding. “I have been begging Andre to take me to Frank since he was taken, but he has always said no, until tonight. I had no idea why, until we walked into the room. Andre wanted a witness, someone to tell the family the events of the evening, to scare us even more. That witness had to be me.” Damian pauses, and Gee, stress in their voice, says “Go on, Dam. I’ll go crazy if you don’t go on!”

Damian continues with “He forced Frankie to change, and then he carved with a silver knife a pelt the size of his entire back. He said a spell to stop the bleeding, but when he changed Frank back, he refused to heal him. He said that Frank will have to wait until the skin of his back heals closed naturally. That can take forever! Frank is now hanging on a St. Andrew’s, with his bare back against the wood.” Gee gives out a sound of despair, tears flowing harder. Damian looks down at his lap, refusing to make eye contact with Gee. “Andre made me kneel and watch the whole thing. I couldn’t even speak; he had taken my voice away so I couldn’t scream. But the worst thing was he…made me touch the pelt he cut off, made me run my fingers through the fur. I felt like throwing up, knowing that I was touching a part of Frank. I wanted to vomit but couldn’t. Andre told me that he was going to treat the skin, then place the pelt in his collection, to keep forever.” Damian tries to say something more, but his voice breaks.

Gee wraps their arms around Damian, holding on tightly. Damian wraps his arms around them, a broken cry leaving his lips. “I’m so sorry, Gee! I tried so hard, I couldn’t rescue him, no matter what I did! It tears me apart that I couldn’t rescue him for you! I watched the hell he suffered but couldn’t raise a finger! What good am I if I can’t save my family? I just wanted to be the one to save him!”

Gee hushes Damian. “Sweetheart, what you went through was horrible, watching Frankie suffer the way you did. I know my baby will survive, he’s tough, he’ll hang in there no matter what. But what you keep experiencing is horrific. You should not feel ashamed that Andre is keeping you from rescuing Frankie! It’s not your fault!” Damian lays his head down on Gee’s shoulder, wailing as if he were one of their own children. Adam leans over Gee, rubbing his hand up and down Damian’s arm, trying to show that he is still there for him.

“I feel like such a baby. Big brave evil vamp I am! The family has given me a heart, and now it feels as if it’s breaking.” Damian looks into Gee’s eyes. “I love you Gee. How can you love me, knowing what a failure I am?”

“DAM STOP!” Gee reaches out and shakes Damian, then kisses him on the cheek. “I love you, no matter what! This family could not survive without you!

Adam leaves the room, returning with three glasses of blood. “Here, drink you two. I think you are dehydrating yourselves with all those tears!” Once everyone had drank their drinks, Adam takes one of each of their hands in his. “Come, to our bed. Gee, we cannot allow you to lie in your bed alone, after what you have just heard. Our bed is plenty big for the four of us. You can awake in time for the children tomorrow night.” Gee starts to protest, but Damian agrees with Adam. “Come on, Gee. I’ll hold you all night. You can cuddle up on my chest.” The three of them leave the library, heading towards the bedroom.

They find Tommy awake in their bed, a look of confusion on her face. “Where did you go? I’ve been worried…” Adam lies down next to Tommy, pulling her into his arms. “I’m sorry to worry you, love. Damian and Gee have had a bad night, so Gee is going to sleep with us tonight. Their kids know to come here if they can’t find mommy, in case they wake up. Cuddle up with me, babes.” Gee climbs in the bed, saying hi to Tommy before turning with her back to her. Damian lays down, and Gee cuddles into his chest, a deep sigh leaving her lips as Damian wraps his arms around Gee, holding her tight. The two couples whisper good night to each other in the dark.

Gee wakes up early the next evening. They know that they should go to their children, but Damian feels so good wrapped around them. Gee thinks back to when they had sex with Damian, how good he felt inside them, around them. They shift their leg and accidently rubs up against Damian’s dick. They hear and even feels his response, as he moans in his sleep. They want to brush against him again, but that wouldn’t be fair to Damian. Still, as much as they love her husband, Gee can’t help to admit to themself how much they miss sex. They can’t help it if Damian is one sexy vamp!

Damian opens his eyes and smiles at Gee. “Well, good evening, sweetheart! Did you get any sleep?” Gee smiles back. “I did, thanks to you! Where are Adam and Tommy?”

“Ad woke me up a while ago to tell me that he and Tommy were taking the children out for a while. They are giving me some time off from daddyhood!” Gee shifts again and Damian freezes. Realizing their mistake, Gee puts a hand to their face in shock, saying “I’m sorry, Dam! Maybe I better…” Damian tries to shift from under Gee, only to get tangled up against them. Both freeze this time, now sure how to handle the situation they have found themselves in…

Damian tries once again to pull away, but this time Gee holds on tight. “Don’t, please! Just…” They move forward until their lips meet Damian’s, Gee holding their breath as they push forward to deepen the kiss. Damian stays frozen, not sure how to respond. Gee takes it a step further, wrapping their arms around Damian, pulling him closer. When Damian pulls back, Gee’s lips follow his, looking to connect again. “Please, Damian! Please let me kiss you! I want to feel your lips on mine…”

Damian pauses before climbing out of bed. His arousal is plain to see through his clothes—Gee leans forward and practically drools when they see it. Damian puts both his hands out in front of him, trying his best to get through to Gee. “Please, Gee! I know you are looking for love and affection, but we can’t do this! I can’t in good conscious make love with you while Frankie is locked away in Andre’s madhouse! I could never live with myself…”

“But Dam! It’s because he is gone that I’m so lonely, need love so badly! Please? I promise that Frankie will never know…”

“…But I’ll know! How will I ever look Frank in the face again, much less Ad and Tommy, if I were to be with you? There are too many that will hurt if we cheat again! I can’t allow it to happen…” Just then Michael, one of Gee’s children, enters the room, rubbing sleep out of his eyes. “Momma? What are you doing here? Anthony and I have been looking all over the house for you! It’s time to eat with us.”

Gee gives a sad look to Damian as she says “Go on to your brother, dear. I will be right there.” Michael smiles at Damian and leaves the room.

Gee gets out of bed, stopping next to Damian. “Thank you again for last night, Dam. I will see you later.” Before Gee can pass him, Damian reaches out and places a soft kiss to Gee’s cheek. “The three of us are here for you, no matter what. I love you, Gee.” Gee gives Damian a crooked smile and strokes Damian’s cheek. “And that is why I wanted to make love with you. I love you, too.” Without looking back, Gee leaves the room.

The very next night, when Damian is sent to Andre, he arrives in the same room where Frank is. Looking around, he realizes that this is his chance to speak to Frankie without Andre around. He walks up to Frank, who opens his eyes in surprise.

“Damian? How?...” Damian shakes his head. “Andre called me here. Gee and the kids are fine, they miss you and love you very much. The family is taking good care of them.”

“Damian? I want you to…take my place with my family. Teach my children all they need to know. Take my wife into your arms and your bed and make her happy in my place. Make her happy as only you can. You have my permission. But never let them forget me. Promise me.”

“Frankie…”

“PROMISE ME, DAMIAN! BE THERE FOR MY FAMILY IN EVERY POSSIBLE WAY SINCE I CANNOT BE THERE WITH THEM! PROMISE ME!” Frank’s voice takes on a hint of hysteria, so Damian leans forward, placing a gentle hand on Frank’s arm. “I…I promise you, Frankie. All will be well…”

“Now isn’t that interesting?” Both Frank and Damian turn towards Andre, who walks up to them smiling. “All I had to do to get Frank to talk was to give him a moment alone with you, Damian! And I’m sure the two of you have a lot to talk about. But today is a special day! Frank gets to move to his new home, and you Damian will get to see it firsthand! Exciting! Guards!”

A set of double doors in the back of the room open, and three guards enter the room, heading straight for Frankie. Andre unlocks the locks holding Frank to the St. Andrew’s cross, and Frank falls onto his knees. Damian takes a step forward to catch him, but Andre waves a hand. “Stay still, Damian, till I tell you to move.”

Two of the guards lift Frank from his knees, dragging him out of the room. “Follow, Damian.” Damian falls into line behind Andre as they all walk through the open doors.

The sight that Damian sees in front of him steals his breath. They enter a huge space (*dear reader—think of the Roman Coliseum, ten times in size with a huge dome over it) filled with glass fronted rooms and free-standing glass boxes circling around the outside of its different tiers. The center of this space (the ground floor) is filled with torture equipment acquired from across the cosmos, with hundreds of guards walking all the floors. Looking into the glass boxes, Damian sees guards having sex with inmates, creatures from different realms.

The group travels to a separate set of glass boxes located in the back of the floor. “Here your entire family will reside. There is one box for each of you, except for you Damian. You will by my side for eternity. Guards, put him inside.” As the guards struggle to push Frank through the door of his glass box, Frank turns to Damian and says, “I love you, Dam.” Damian, so shocked that he almost fails to answer, replies “I love you too, Frankie! I’ll take care of your family, never fear.” The third guard helps the other two, and Frankie is shoved through the doorway, the door pulled shut and locked behind him.

Damian cannot believe what he is seeing—Frank behind a wall of glass. The small room contains only an unmade bed and a toilet. Damian places his palm on the glass, and Frank pushes his palm against the glass on the other side.

“Aww, aren’t you two sweet?” Damian turns towards Andre, who steps up next to him. “Frank, I hope you like your new home.” Frank sneers at Andre and in return, and a bolt of power shoots through Frank’s body. Damian, always trying to convince Andre to hurt him instead of the family, places a hand on Andre’s arm. “Please, focus on me, Andre. I know you want to hurt me. Please do.” Andre laughs at Damian’s attempts. “My sweet bitch, always trying to get me to focus my wrath on you. In a moment, sweetie.” Andre turns back to Frank, saying “If you behave, the guards will leave you alone. If you do not, expect them to take turns with you. Hell, they may even make you their favorite after a time or two! So, if I were you, I’d behave. Goodbye for now, Frankie.” Andre grabs Damian by the arm and propels him away from the glass box, even as Damian turns back to blow a kiss to Frank.

Once back in their familiar room, Andre strokes the side of Damian’s face. “So beautiful. If I placed you in a box, the guards would never leave you alone. Aren’t you glad that you will spend eternity at my feet instead?” A shiver runs through Damian, but he decides to try and mitigate the damage for once. He sinks to his knees and kisses Andre’s bare feet, his hair pooling on the floor all around him.

“Aww, trying to get me to be lenient, Damian? And here I was going to put you on the rack facedown and whip you!” Another shiver runs through Damian. “Stand and strip. Let’s see how long it will take until all I can see is your back muscles…”

The entire time that Andre rips apart Damian, Damian finds that his thoughts remain with Frankie. How can he be rescued? Could he really survive in that box? What of the rest of the family? What does each family member have that Andre can ‘collect?’

“DAMIAN!” A particularly harsh slash tears more skin from his back. “PAY ATTENTION! If I didn’t know any better, I’d think your sympathy for that mange animal has taken over your senses! You are to pay attention to ME, not a useless member of my collection! Unless you would like me to make you a member right now…”
“NO! Please, Andre! I’m yours! I’m sorry that I disappointed you! Please let me do what I can to make it up to you!” Andre lays another stripe down Damian’s already carved up back. Damian feels a hand ghost its way up his back, stroking the muscles that are showing through broken skin. “So contrite when the occasion calls for it, aren’t you, bitch?” Damian begins to feel dizzy from blood loss. “Please, Andre! I feel like I’m going to pass out. Please stop the bleeding.” With a sigh, Andre pulls back his hand. In the next second, Damian’s back is healed, the ropes holding him in place to the rack loosen. “On you knees, bitch. Thank me for being so considerate to your needs. Suck my cock.”

As soon as he can finally open his eyes on his own bed, Damian calls out to Adam who is lying next to him “We need a family meeting, NOW!”

Fifteen minutes later, the entire family is sitting or standing in the foyer, listening to Damian tell what he experienced. “There is a group of glass boxes just for our family, one for each of you. I will not get a box; instead, I have the displeasure of spending the rest of eternity at Andre’s feet.” Damian shudders at this thought. “Andre told me that he is collecting body parts from different creatures, then those that survive are housed in his grotesque living cabinet of curiosities. And the guards! They spend all their time hurting and raping the inmates! And Andre turns a blind eye to their actions! The whole thing makes me sick.”

Ray leans forward in his seat. “I spoke to members of three more realms who have lost individuals to Andre. That brings the total to 29 realms who have reached out for our help. They are all willing to join our sides in the fight against Andre. Word is traveling through the cosmos that our family is the one to beat Andre. Hopefully they are right.”

After the meeting, Damian asks to speak to Tommy and Adam alone. Once they are in the privacy of their rooms, Damian begins to pace. “I left something out of the meeting. Frankie made me promise that I would take care of his family. He wants me to be a father to his sons, and he wants me to…” Damian looks at the floor, a blush coloring his cheeks. “…sleep with Gee, be a real husband to her.” When neither Tommy nor Adam respond right away, Damian looks up at them. “I know! I tried to get out of it, but the poor guy was desperate! He wanted to make sure that his family would be cared for! But…to ask me to sleep with Gee…” Damian flings his arms in the air, his voice rising higher as he begins to freak out. “…I know he was just trying to comfort Gee the only way for me to do so, but what the fuck do I do now? I can’t sleep with them again!”

Tommy stands up, walking to Damian and taking his hand in hers. In a gentle voice she says “Then you do whatever you need to, to make the nightmare more palatable. If they want you to sleep with them, then you do so. Ad and I will understand…”

Damian cuts Tommy off with a loud “No! I already have a pregnant Trick who is constantly needing attention! I am tired of always being apart from the two of you! Especially since we are running out of time, and we have no idea who will be taken away next…”

Adam walks up to Damian and takes him in his arms. “Dam, you cannot ignore Frankie’s request. Gee and the boys will need you. We, of course, will do everything we can to help with the boys, but only you can help Gee. Tommy and I will understand…” Damian squeezes Adam tightly, kissing his cheek. “But I only want my mates. Is that too much to ask? I miss the two of you, even more now that I am taken away from you every night. I love the two of you.” Adam answers “And we love you, sweetheart. It is not your fault that everyone wants and needs you, darling. All you can do is your best…” Damian sighs, then kisses Adam. “How did I ever get so lucky to have both of you for my mates? C’mere Tommy.” Tommy reaches out to Dam, hand on her growing stomach. Damian kisses her, his hand joining hers. “How are you, love?” Tommy shrugs, saying “I’m fine, Dam. The nausea seems to be over. I have a craving for pizza, though.” Ad and Damian both groan in answer. “The last time you tried pizza, you were up sick for two days! Maybe not a good idea honey.”

That night Andre doesn’t call for Damian, who finally gets to enjoy a full night with his mates. When he arises the next evening, he gathers all the children together for breakfast. “Let’s surprise your daddies! Daddy Damian will make you something to eat, so they can sleep in!” The children all respond happily, so they head to the kitchen in a group.

Once there, they meet Gee and their two children. Damian kisses Gee on the cheek, saying “Good evening, Gee, Michael, Anthony.” Everyone responds, and the two adults set out to feed the children. Once the kids set out to play, Gee and Damian take Alondra and Dante to Gee’s room. Once there, Damian says “Gee, I have something I want to talk to you about.” When Gee agrees, Damian sits down next to them. “When I saw Frankie, he made me promise to take care of you and the boys. He wants me to be a daddy figure to them, but he…” Damian pauses, causing Gee to place her hand on top of his. “…wants me to treat you as if we were husband and wife. He wants me to sleep with you.”

Gee gasps out loud, startling Damian. “He wants…” Gee stutters, trying to form a thought. “…the two of us to…sleep together?”

“He doesn’t want you lonely. He wants you well taken care of, in every way. The only thing that he insisted on is that I never let the three of you forget him.” Gee gives a nervous laugh at that. “How can we? He is my husband, the children’s father. We will NEVER forget him! But…” Gee squeezes Damian’s hand. “…how do YOU feel about his request?”

Damian takes a moment to gather his thoughts. “Of course, I will help you with the children, Tommy, and Adam, too. As far as the two of us are concerned…” Damian stares into Gee’s eyes. “…I’m conflicted. I know you are lonely, and I know that you are looking for love and affection. I’m worried how it will affect my relationship with my mates. I have already told them about Frankie’s request, and the two of them are being very understanding. But with Trick needing me from time to time, and Andre pulling me out of my bed every night, I have only so much time to spend with them to begin with. Another thought—what if you were to become pregnant? I seem to have quite the track record at getting women pregnant! That would be the last thing that you need…”

Gee interrupts Damian with “…if you want to say no, then say no, Dam. I would understand.”

“But I gave my word, and that means the world to me! I’m so conflicted, Gee! Listen…” Damian leans forward, running his fingers through Gee’s hair. “It’s not that I wouldn’t want you, Gee. This really has nothing to do with my feelings for you, or if I’m attracted to you. I’m just worried about destroying my relationship with my mates…”

“…which is a good thing that we entered the conversation where we did, right darling?” Tommy asks Adam as they walk into the room after knocking. Tommy and Adam take turns kissing Gee good evening, and then they kiss Damian. Tommy cuts right to the chase with “I see our Dam is conflicted. Adam and I have no such issue. We are fine with whatever arrangement that the two of you come to. Hell, who says that four of us couldn’t have some fun? But we will leave that up to the two of you. If you wish to be together, you will get no argument from Ad and I.”

Damian gives his two mates a surprised look. “A foursome, huh Tommy? Have you been thinking of this for a long time, or is it your imagination simply running wild, darling?” Tommy simply laughs. “That night we all shared a bed made me do some thinking, love. Can you blame me? A good time could be had by all…”

Adam and Tommy leave the two of them alone for a while. Gee turns to Damian and kisses his cheek. “We will do whatever you decide, Dam. I’m just grateful to have the opportunity to spend time with you. I know you are very busy. Thank you for fitting the boys and I into your busy life.” Damian gives Gee a kiss in return. “I’m glad to be there for you, darling. Come on, let’s go see what the boys are getting into.”

Aurora brings King Caspian to visit with Ray, Bobby, Damian, and Adam. The king is thin and tall, middle aged and serious. “We thank your family for letting us be a part of the current war. Andre threatened us with destruction, but we would rather focus on our alliance with you. He holds my dear wife in his prison, a few members of the royal household as well. He is obsessed with the idea that we come in all shapes and sizes.” Ray nods. “One of our very own, a werewolf, is now held prisoner as well. He has already threatened to kidnap each member of our family and place us in one of his boxes.”

Aurora comments “The war as we know it is only a diversion, a way to keep his true schemes hidden. He has made it quite plain that Damian is his ultimate prize. The question is, is there any magick in the cosmos that he has not consumed?”

Damian replies “My son Sonny is currently out in the cosmos searching for magick as we speak. I hold a special kind of magick, but I am forbidden by the witch Luna to use it until the end of the war, when she says we will need it the most. Hopefully Sonny will find what we need.”

Ray comments “I heard from King Landry this morning. His realm is being overrun by Andre’s soldiers, and he needs backup from us. If you have any spare soldiers, please send them his way. Bobby here will be leaving soon to lead our army in battle against Andre’s men.” King Caspian agrees to send troops as well. Ray continues with “We also need to set up a Council to discuss our next steps. Can we send out a message to the other realms to meet on Monday, here at our mansion? It would be nice if we could all get on the same page.”

After the meeting, Bobby goes home to say goodbye to his mate. “Robbie? Are you home?” After a short reunion filled with hugs and kisses, Bobby tells his mate that he is leaving for the front lines. When Robbie complains, Bobby says “Honey, I have to go! I’m the only one with experience leading an army of this size. Adam and Ray will join me, but I must do this! Please understand honey…”

“But why can’t they find someone else? I’m afraid that you will never come home! Why must you go?”

Bobby spends the next fifteen minutes calming down his mate. “I must leave now sweetheart. Please give me a kiss and tell me that you love me. I will be home as soon as I can be.” Robbie, tears flowing down her face, leans to kiss Bobby one last time. “I’ll be here, waiting for you. Please take care of yourself for me.” Bobby kisses Robbie on the cheek and leaves.

“General Kopsburg! What is so important that it cannot wait until I am out of surgery?” Andre barks out, frustrated. He stops sawing the wings off the balmack that he has strapped down on the operating table. He hopes that his latest specimen doesn’t bleed out before he can finish…

“I wouldn’t have bothered you if it wasn’t important, sir. But we are in a true predicament! There are enough guards to guard your collection, but we are running out of soldiers on the battlefield!”

Andre thinks for a moment, then waves his hand through the air. “There, General. You now have the latest in fighting soldiers! I have outfitted sentient jackal-like creatures to serve in your ranks! Long claws, fangs. They will be near impossible for the Toro clan and their ragtag army to defeat. Simply give them orders and they will obey you. Now let me return to my work.”

Ray calls Damian into his home office, a distressed look on his face. “I just received word that Sampule, the vamp that you placed in charge of the Dark realm, was murdered last night by a band of Andre’s soldiers. All the soldiers were killed, but now there is no one in charge of that realm. You will have to speak to Mikey, see which one of you are going to step in.” Damian nods, giving Ray a hug before leaving the room to seek out Mikey. He finds her holding Dante in the garden.
“Look which little one I stole from his mama!” Mikey calls out, smiling. The smile slips from her lips as soon as she sees the concerned look on Damian’s face. “What’s wrong, Dam? Is it…” Damian cuts her off, giving her the bad news. “This means that one of us will have to go head the realm. The problem is, which one of us?” Mikey kisses Dante on the cheek, then hands the baby over to Damian. “I will leave at once. It is my place as Queen to lead the realm. I am just grateful for the time that I got to spend here with the family…” Damian places a hand on her arm, squeezing tightly. “What about Alba? I would trust her with my life…” Mikey smiles once again at Damian before giving him a deep, lasting kiss. “No, sweetheart. It is my duty. I will go.” Damian says “This feels…wrong, Mikey. It’s a set up. Andre knows that we will not leave the Dark realm without a true leader. It’s his way to split us up, split up our armies and take us down.”

“But Dam, with you being gone with Andre at night, I am the only true candidate to run the realm. For now, we will just have to take things a day at a time and pray. I love you, Dam. Take care of everyone for me.” Damian locks lips with Mikey, wrapping one arm around her and squeezing tightly.

With a broken smile, Mikey stands up and quickly leaves to speak to Ray. Damian suddenly hears Andre’s laughter floating on the breeze.

Chapter Text

“Bring the prisoner here.”

Mikey shifts uncomfortably on her throne. Members of the Vampaire move closer to their Queen, surrounding her in case of a sneak attack by the enemy. Then four of her guards bring in a man that takes Mikey’s breath away.

The young man is the spitting image of Andre. Without thinking, Mikey blurts out “Just who in the fuck are you?”

The young man laughs. “Quite a queenly way you have there, majesty! My name is Paulo. I am Andre’s son. My father spawned me when he was a human, then turned me when I was twenty-six. He has many sired children, but I am his only true son.”

“It appears that my guards caught quite a prize! Your father has done nothing but wreak havoc on my family, and here is my chance for payback. Guards, give this young man our best cell, and keep him on 24-hour watch.” As he is lead away, Paulo calls out “Wait until he finds out that I’m your prisoner. If you thought things have been bad so far, just wait…”

Mikey immediately sends a message to Damian, who arrives a few minutes later. “Mikey, my beautiful Queen! What can I do for you?”

Mikey tells Damian about Paulo. “I was thinking. When you visit Andre next time, tell him we have his son. See if he is willing to make a trade, his son for Frankie. It may not work, but it’s worth a try!”

Damian shakes his head. “The first thing he will do is set all his troops on the Dark realm. I know you are well protected, but you are not ready for a fight of that size, especially with his new soldiers! Adam almost lost an arm before he figured out the way to beat them is to sink a sword in the base of their neck and twist! I’m afraid that you will be Andre’s next target, Mikey. Please, let me take over this realm, let me deal with it. I don’t want to lose you!”

Mikey shakes her head. “I cannot let you take over, Dam. This realm is my responsibility. You have your hands full with the family, they all need you. I will be fine here. Just talk to Andre, he might be willing to make a trade. If not, we gave it our best shot. Please, Dam…for me?”

Damian stares at Mikey for a moment before answering “Alright, Mikes. I’ll give it a try. Just be prepared for anything.”

Later that night, Damian feels the familiar pull to Andre’s chamber. Once he arrives, he finds Andre staring out the window, lost in thought. Damian stands behind him, contemplating how he will tell Andre his news.

“I know my son is being held in the Dark realm, Damian. Your bitch of an ex has him in her dungeon. Do you really think I will make a trade? No, Damian, I will simply take him from her, and you will pay for her disobedience. I have my own plans for Mikey, they will have to wait for now.” Andre turns around, sinking his fist into Damian’s hair and pulling. “Maybe this time I’ll keep you, little bitch! Maybe I won’t send you home, maybe I’ll start your eternity with me now. Never to see your mates, or your children. Sink to the floor, Damian. Let’s get started…”

Andre keeps Damian with him for three days. He destroys his body repeatedly. He practices surgery on him while he is awake, taking time to heal him in between sessions. Damian becomes despondent, keeping his eyes on the floor and staying silent. This seems to infuriate Andre, who doubles his efforts to make Damian scream. Finally, on the third day, after spending ten hours in the maiden, Damian begins to beg and scream. “Please Andre! Let me out! I will do whatever you wish, please set me free! I…you know I’m claustrophobic! I can’t take any more! Just PLEASE set me free! I promise…” Andre opens one door on the maiden, then the other. “And what will you give me, if I set you free?” Damian gasps for air, the pain too much to bear. “I’ll do anything, anything Andre! Just please…”

Andre laughs. “Breaking you is too easy, Damian. I know all your triggers. And of course, you will do what I ask. If I let you go, will you go to the Dark realm and bring my son to me?” Shocked, Damian can only shake his head. “Too bad. Guess you will just have to stay in the maiden.” Andre shuts the doors, the rusted squeaking barely heard over Damian’s screams.

Andre leaves Damian in the maiden for two more weeks. When he finally opens the doors again, he finds Damian passed out, his skin white as marble. Andre pulls Damian off the spikes, placing him on his knees in front of the maiden. He slaps Damian awake, then says “It’s about time you joined me, bitch. I have a surprise for you. Look at the wall.” When Damian’s eyes finally focus on the wall in front of him, he sees a picture of Bobby lying on his bed, Robbie holding his hand. Bobby is unconscious, a huge gash on his forehead. “He’s been like that for two weeks. No matter what the family has tried, he will not awaken. I’ve enjoyed watching everyone scurry around, trying their best to save him. Seems he received an ugly jackal bite on the battlefield. He won’t wake up until I release him, and I won’t wake him until my son is released to me.”

Damian clears his throat, his eyes boring into Andre. “Then it appears that Bobby is in for a long nap. No one is going to release your son to you. You can do whatever you want, but he stays in the dungeon.”

Andre grabs Damian’s chin. “Open up, my little bitch. Prove you’re good for something.” When Andre finally finishes, he grabs Damian by the throat and stands him up. “Go tell your family my deal, Damian. I will see you soon.”

Damian wakes up next Tommy in their bed. When Tommy opens her eyes, she bursts into tears. “Oh Dam, I’m so glad you are back! Ad and I missed you so much!” Damian wraps his arms around Tommy, squeezing tightly. “I missed you too, darling. But right now, I need to call a family meeting, including Mikey. C’mon babes.” Damian moans when he gets out of bed, his head suddenly hurting. When Tommy looks at him, Damian shakes his head. “Just a little hangover from spending two weeks in the maiden. I’ll be fine.”

The family circles around Bobby’s bed. Damian tries a few spells on Bobby, but nothing happens. Damian says “I didn’t think it would work, but I had to try. Where is Sonny?” Ray supplies “He was here in the beginning, until it became evident that his skills are useless in this case. He went back out, looking for more magick. He said to tell you that he will stay in touch.”

Damian tells everyone what Andre told him. “Andre is holding Bobby hostage. He wants a trade, his son for Bobby. I told him that we wouldn’t do that, and he asked me what Bobby’s life means to us. I told him we love Bobby, but there is no way we can release a dangerous criminal such as his son. He simply laughed and said “I’m the one you should be careful of, Damian. Tell the family, I’m anxious to know what they say.”

Robbie breaks out in tears. Mikey and Gee move forward to hug her, to hold her in their arms. Damian moves in front of Robbie, a hand on her arm. “Honey, you do understand why we cannot allow that monster to go free? If Bobby could talk, he would agree with us. Even though we love Bobby, we cannot allow this to happen. We are sorry that you are suffering, but it has to be this way.” Robbie nods her head once, tears flowing faster. “Bobby wouldn’t want anyone to pay the price but himself. He loves us all too much. I understand, Damian.” The family surrounds Robbie, whispering words of love and holding her close. Damian says over the ruckus “We will continue to do everything in our power to wake Bobby, honey. Just have faith.” Damian feels a pull, so he heads over to Tommy. “Andre wants me, I have to go. I hope to be able to come back soon, sweetheart.” Damian rubs Tommy’s stomach gently, then heads to their bedroom.

Once in bed, Andre transports Damian to him. “Well? What did your family decide?”

Damian places his hands on his hips and says “Bobby will stay in a coma, Andre…and your son will remain in prison, where he belongs. He is scheduled to be executed tomorrow morning at 11.” Andre surprises Damian by walking up to him, sinking a hand in Damian’s long hair and pulling him in for a long, passionate kiss. Damian unintentionally gives a small sigh, and Andre takes this as a sign to thrust his tongue into Damian’s mouth. Damian freezes in place, neither returning the kiss nor trying to pull away. After a few minutes, Andre gives Damian a smirk before saying “Against the wall, little bitch. I think it’s time for you to experience what I am truly capable of. If you refuse to return my son, let’s see whom I decide to destroy next.”

Against his will, Damian crosses the room and stands against the wall. “Arms over your head.” Damian complies, the feeling of cold steel closing around his wrists sending chills down his spine.

Andre steps close to Damian, asking “Your son, what is his name? Draven?” A feeling of dread fills Damian’s chest. “I understand that according to Luna, he is going to be the ruler of the cosmos when he grows up? I know that bitch has placed a spell on your boys, aging them quicker than they should be. So, Draven should be, what, around fifteen now?” When Damian doesn’t answer, Andre smirks at him. “The perfect age, don’t you think?”

Draven appears in the middle of the room. When he sees his father, he runs up to Damian, calling out “FATHER! We have missed you so much!” He places his hands on Damian’s arms, trying to release him from the wall. Damian says “Draven! I love you!…” Andre waves a hand, and Draven turns towards him, freezing in place. “Over here, boy. Stand in front of the table.” Draven appears to have fallen into a trance. He crosses the room to stand in front of a table that Andre had placed in the middle of the room. With another wave of his hand, Draven’s clothes disappear, leaving the teen naked in front of his father and Andre. “Nice body for a boy his age, Damian! This is going to be fun!”

Damian begins to scream. “NO! LEAVE MY SON ALONE! DON’T TOUCH HIM YOU BASTARD! SEND HIM HOME NOW!”

Andre walks up to Draven, slowly running his hands all over the boy’s body. “Soft skin under growing muscles! Just how I like my boys!” Andre pinches Draven’s nipples, pulling them away from his body and then letting go, over and over. Draven lets out a pained noise. Andre takes first one, then the other nipple in his mouth, biting down harshly until he draws blood. Andre then pulls back, asking “So, Draven…” Draven looks at Andre, a defiant expression in his eyes. “…has anyone kissed you yet?”

“NO, LEAVE HIM ALONE! DRAVEN’S INNOCENT! STOP TOUCHING HIM!”

Andre laughs at Damian. “Innocent, hum? Well, it’s time I take care of that!” Andre leans forward, taking Draven’s lips in a fierce kiss as his arms wrap around the youngster. He shoves his tongue between Draven’s lips, tasting him, shoving his tongue down the boy’s throat. Draven gives a choked sound, his eyes closing against the nightmare he has been dragged into. The kiss goes on and on, tears streaming down Draven’s face. Andre laughs when he sees them. “Tears, son? I haven’t even achieved my goal and your crying! I’ll give you something to cry about…”

Damian tries his hardest to fight the handcuffs that hold him to the wall, screaming his outrage at Andre and the world. Andre sinks to his knees, taking Draven’s soft cock into his mouth, sucking hard. The teen makes a strangled noise, his eyes focused on the floor in front of him. Andre pulls back and looks up at the boy, saying “Enjoy your first blowjob, Draven, before I tap that sweet ass of yours! You should feel lucky that I’m giving you any pleasure at all. Your father never feels any.” Andre continues to bob his head on the boy’s dick until he comes, Andre swallowing every drop. Pulling away, Andre then stands up, his hand brushing through the teen’s hair gently. “Now, I want you to do the same to your father, Draven. I want you to take him all the way down your throat, and then I want you to make him come the same way that I made you come. Understand?” Draven nods his head, his tears continuing to flow. “Now, do as I say.”

Andre waves his hand and Damian’s clothes disappear. Draven walks over to his father, sinking to his knees in front of him. Draven says, “I love you, father” and Damian answers “I love you too, son.” Andre claps his hands in glee. “What a sweet moment! Go on, boy…” Andre grabs Draven by the back of the head, pushing forward. “…suck your father off.”

Draven slowly wraps his hand around the base of Damian’s cock, pulling it towards his open mouth. Damian closes his eyes, refusing to watch. He feels his cock slide into his son’s mouth, feels Draven choke on it. Draven pulls back, but Andre grabs him by the hair, hauling him downwards until he takes his father all the way down his throat, holding him in place. “I bet that virgin throat is tight, Damian! I can’t wait to have a turn with him! You will not hold back; you will give him all your come. C’mon, boy! Make your father feel good! Suck on that cock the same way you would a lollipop! Rock back and forth, rub your tongue along the bottom of his cock. Put more effort into it, boy!” Draven rocks his head back and forth, refusing to look up at his father. He feels the cock grow in his mouth, tries to follow the instructions that he is given even as he struggles against his orders.

“Let your boy know what a good job he is doing, Damian! Let’s hear your moans! The boy needs to know you are enjoying yourself.” Damian throws back his head and moans, thrusting his hips forward until Draven chokes loudly. “That’s it, Damian! Shove that cock down your son’s throat! Teach him what it’s like to be a man!”

After a few more minutes, Damian comes down Draven’s tight throat. “Clean that cock, Draven! Make sure you suck all the come off it.” Draven sucks in his cheeks, using his tongue to remove every bit of come off his father’s cock before pulling off it with a pop. Damian moans in shame, staring at the wall across from him instead of at his son.

“Such a good boy! Did daddy taste good? You’ll get plenty of chances to suck more cock, son, before I send you home. Now, walk behind the table and lay across it, feet on the floor.” Draven does as he is asked, laying down on the table. “Spread your legs wide.” When he spreads his legs, Andre runs his hand between the tight cheeks. “What a sweet little virgin hole! All mine for the taking!” Draven places his arms out in front of him, clasping his hands together, stress flowing off him in waves.

“Please, PLEASE let him go, Andre! I’ll do anything you ask but let him go!” Andre laughs at Damian. “It’s too late for that, bitch! Your son will pay for your refusal to release my son! He belongs to me now!” Andre places his hands on Draven’s hips, lining up his cock with the boy’s hole. Andre spits on Draven’s hole. “That’s all you’ll get for lube, little boy. Be glad I’ve allowed you to have that!” Draven screams as Andre shoves forward, breaking through the boy’s tight rim and sinking as far as he can go in him. “Fuck you’re tight! You feel so good around my cock, little bitch! Just like your daddy!” Andre snaps his hips back and forth as Draven fights to push himself off the table, tears returning to his eyes. “Please father! I beg of you! Please help me! It hurts SO BAD…” Andre laughs. “I love your screams, little one! Too bad they are for nothing! Your little ass belongs TO ME now!”

Damian’s tears fall down his cheeks as he watches as his son rocks back and forth under Andre. Draven’s nails scratch the table, his head turning side to side as he tries to escape his fate. Andre quickens his movements, slamming his cock into the young boy below him. Blood slowly drips on the floor at Draven’s feet. Damian calls out “I love you, Draven! I love you so much! Please try and hang on, it will be over soon.” Andre laughs at Damian’s words. “That’s what you think, bitch.”
After ten minutes or so, Andre comes deep inside the teen, causing him to scream. Andre stills his hips, staying inside the boy. “Did you think I’m through, little bitch? No, I’ve just begun…”

Andre comes inside Draven seven more times before pulling out, come and blood leaking on the floor between his legs. Andre takes a deep breath as he runs his fingers through the boy’s hair. “What a great fuck you are, Draven. I think it’s only fair that your father gets a turn taking that tight ass.” Andre swipes his hand through the air, and the cuffs holding Damian snap open. “Come here, Damian. I want you to fuck your son.” Damian slowly moves towards the table, even as he begs Andre to stop his order. “Please, don’t make me! I can’t take my son, I can’t! Please stop this madness!” Damian stands behind Draven, his hands on the teen’s hips just as Andre did before him. Draven begins to beg. “Please father, I beg of you! Please don’t hurt me! Don’t listen to him, please let me go!” Damian lines up his cock with his son’s hole, pushing forward until he is deep inside. “Fuck him good and hard, Damian. Make him yours. Make him take your come, make him happy to have such a good father! Take your boy and make him yours…”

Damian slowly begins to rock his hips, quickening the pace until he is slamming as hard as he can into his son. “Take from him, Damian. Give him something to remember this night.” Damian sinks his hands in Draven’s hair, yanking the boy’s head back until his neck is bared to his father. Damian sinks his teeth into the boy’s neck, leaving a claiming mark which delights Andre, who calls out “Stroke his dick, Damian! Make him associate the pain with pleasure!” Damian reaches under the table, taking his son in his hand and stroking while keeping his teeth in his neck. Within seconds, the boy explodes all over his father’s hand, his body shaking. Damian bites even harder, making sure that the marks will forever be on his boy’s neck. The very thought has him exploding deep inside of Draven.

“Stay inside him, bitch. Take him until I tell you to stop.” Andre rubs his hand up and down Damian’s arm. “Nice move with the claim bite! Now the boy will go through his life, knowing that he belongs to his father, that he is his father’s plaything! I bet he spends the rest of his life craving you, wanting you to stay inside him forever, daddy’s special boy! Continue…” Andre moves in front of Draven, grabbing the boy’s face in his hands. “Open up, boy. Take me down your throat. If you don’t open, I’ll make you…”

The two spend the next four hours fucking Draven over and over, Damian begging the entire time for them to stop. The boy’s tears have long since dried up, his total surrender a treat for Andre to experience. Finally, Andre calls out “Pull out of the boy, Damian. It’s time we give him a rest.” Damian pulls out, his cock dripping on the floor. Andre walks over to Damian, rubbing his hand up and down his back. “I’m proud of you, Damian. You helped make your son a man today! He will never forget his father fucking him, marking him as his!” Andre kisses Damian on the lips before saying “I’m sending you home now, Damian. Your boy I will keep a while longer. Until tomorrow night.”

Damian opens his eyes to the darkened room. Tommy is sleeping next to him, Adam still at the front lines. Damian slowly gets out of bed, heading to Draven’s room. He finds his son in his bed, appearing deep asleep. The claim bite that Damian made is visible on his neck, purple and black marks surrounding the bite. Damian bit deep enough that he broke the veins surrounding the bite, ensuring that it will never fade over time. Tears well up in Damian’s eyes as he heads towards the Dark realm.

He arrives in Mikey’s chambers to find Ray curled around Mikey, both appearing to be asleep. Ray suddenly bolts up in the bed, his hair wild around his shoulders as he moves to protect his wife from whatever predator has entered the room.

“I’m sorry, Ray. It’s just me. I didn’t know you were here. I will leave.” Ray takes in Damian’s disheveled clothing, the tears coursing down his face, and says “No, Damian. Please stay. I will wake Mikey.”

Mikey and Ray join Damian on the couch in Mikey’s bedroom. “How could I have done that? How could I have hurt my son the way I did? He will never forgive me! It was bad enough that I was forced to rape Trick, but now this? All because we did not release his son! We tried so hard to fight him, but he had total control over both of us! How in the fuck am I going to tell TJ and Ad that I RAPED OUR SON! And worst of all, my poor boy is still under his control! I don’t know how much longer I can take this…”

Mikey pulls Damian into her chest, rocking him as if he were a baby. Ray leans over and rubs his back, whispering words of love and understanding under his breath. Damian sobs loudly, holding on to the two of them tightly as if they were a lifeline.

Ray looks over at Mikey and says “Send me home, sweetheart, then send Adam home from the front. I will tell Tommy and Adam what has happened. You keep Damian here with you.” Mikey gives Ray a determined look. “You do that, and I will order that bastard’s execution be moved up! I want him dead as soon as possible! I love you, Ray.” Ray responds in kind, and Mikey sends him to the Light realm.

Mikey screams “GUARDS!” Three guards enter the room, coming to a stop in front of Mikey and Damian. “I want Andre’s son taken to the torture chamber! I will be there shortly. Send for the Vampaire, I will need them to guard the room while I murder that bastard! GO!” The three guards bow then leave the room.

Mikey turns to Damian. “Babes? You with me?” Damian nods once. “Come with me. I want you there when Paulo’s head leaves his body.” Damian pulls back, using his hand to wipe his face free of tears. “But Mikey! Andre will vow personal revenge on you and this realm! Let me be the one to kill him, please!” Mikey begins to argue, but Damian holds strong. “He will hurt Draven regardless, there is nothing that I can do to stop it! I want to be the one! Let’s go and be done with it!”

The two of them head to the torture chamber. When they enter, they see that the Vampaire has made a circle around the outskirts of the room. Two guards hold Paulo between them in the middle of the room. Mikey calls out “Tie him to the St. Andrews. Strap his head down against the wood.” After the guards have done their duty, Damian kisses Mikey on the cheek, then makes his way to a closet in the back of the room. He selects a large broad sword, throwing it onto his shoulder he makes his way over to stand next to Paulo. Damian makes eye contact with Mikey before turning to Paulo. “You must pay for your crimes. Say goodbye, Paulo.” Paulo laughs then says “You think my father won’t save me, won’t help me survive this? He knows what you are doing, and you will all pay for this deed.” Damian swings the sword, connecting with Paulo’s neck, cleaving it in two. Blood begins to pour onto the floor, as well as all over Damian’s feet.

An earthquake begins to shake the castle, sending everyone into each other. Damian makes his shaky way across the room to Mikey’s side, taking her hand in his. Damian yells “He knows, Mikes! We are all in for it now!”

Paulo’s head and body disappears.

Damian begins to feel as if he is fading away. The last thing that he is aware of is staring in fear into Mikey’s startled face before he collapses unconscious on the floor.

When he wakes up, he is chained to the wall in Andre’s chamber. Andre is in the middle of raping Draven, a cruel smile on his face. “Hello, Damian. So, you decided that it would be you who would murder my son?!” Damian does not reply, his vision locked on the floor. “Well, I hope you enjoy what comes next. Just keep in mind that it is all your fault.” Andre comes deep inside of Draven, who whimpers pathetically under him. Andre then pulls out, wiping his cock on the boy’s back. “Over to the cross, boy. Face it, arms out to the side.” Draven walks over to the cross, following directions perfectly. Andre crosses to the back of the room, selecting a bullwhip from a wide array of implements. “Stand still, boy.” He then unfurls the whip, snapping it on the ground as Damian screams and begs.

Twenty minutes later, the boy is covered in crisscross marks, blood dripping on the floor. Andre stops, going to the closet to select a cat o’ nine tails with razors at the ends of each strand. Swinging the cat over his shoulder, he swings forward sharply, the metal slicing paths down the teen’s back, laying him open. Draven’s head lowers slightly as he passes out due to the pain. Andre lays strike after strike on the boy, carving open his back and ass cheeks.

“Arium oplearnum” Andre calls out, stopping the blood from flowing from his wounds. Turning his attention to Damian, Andre comments “You know how I always heal you before I send you home each time? I know that you went to visit your son when you went home. I know that you saw the bite mark on Draven’s neck.” Andre crosses the room, picking up a metal container before returning to Draven. “If I refuse to heal him, the injuries that he experiences here will stay with him for the rest of his life. Now, I know that you wouldn’t want your boy to have to wake up and suffer from what I have put him through here. But I’ve decided to take a page out of your very own book, Damian. I’ve been accessing your memories again, and this time I found something that I’m sure you will remember. You used it once on Tommy Joe.” Andre opens the lid on the can, and a faint smell reaches Damian’s nostrils. “I wanted to leave him with a little reminder of me that will last a lifetime. That is, if he survives that long.” Andre then calls out “Awaken, Draven.” Draven’s head lifts, his eyes opening. “Just a goodbye gesture, boy.”

Andre pulls back his arm and throws the liquid all over Draven’s backside.

Acid.

Draven’s skin begins to burn off immediately, leaving his muscles in plain sight. His hair turns to ash where the liquid lands on it. Draven’s screams are louder than his father’s, his body convulsing on the cross. Andre leans forward, gently placing a kiss to the boy’s cheek.

“Goodbye, Draven. You were fun while you lasted.” Andre gives Damian a smirk then waves his hand in the air, sending Draven back to his bed.

Damian gasps for breath, his voice broken. He knows he must live the rest of his unnatural life, knowing that Draven’s sufferings were his own fault.

Sonny arrives at the mansion to find chaos as usual. He heads to Bob and Robbie’s room, where he finds Robbie sitting on the side of the bed, tears flowing down her face.

“I’m sorry to intrude, Robbie, but I think I might have found something to help.” Robbie stands, moving away from the bed. “I appreciate the help, Sonny.”

Sonny leans over the bed, his hands outstretched. A stream of bright light emanates from his hands to Bobby’s forehead. Sonny begins to chant loudly, his hands beginning to shake. Suddenly Bobby opens his eyes, looking around as if trying to assess if he is under attack. Robbie happily says “Bobby! Thank you so much Sonny…” Tears of gratitude flow down her face as Bobby makes eye contact with his mate. Sonny stops chanting, dropping his arms to his side with a huge grin on his face. “Bobby, I’m so glad you are back! Now excuse me, I have to go see if I can help Draven.” Robbie wraps her arms around Sonny, thanking him again profusely. Sonny kisses her on the cheek and then heads to Draven’s room, where he finds Adam and Tommy surrounding the bed.

“Sonny, you’re back! I’m so glad you are safe!” Tommy says.

Sonny acknowledges Tommy and Adam then moves towards the end of the bed. Someone had turned Draven, so his bare, injured back was on display. Sonny repeats the same pattern that he used with Bobby, chanting over Draven, his hands outstretched. Before Tommy and Adam’s eyes, Draven’s back begins to heal, the marks disappearing. Draven turns his head and stares into Sonny’s eyes. “…Thhh…thank you” Draven stutters out, sitting up slowly.

Adam wraps his arms around Sonny. “Thank you for saving Draven, Sonny! I don’t know what we would’ve done without you!” Sonny hugs Adam back, watching Tommy wrap a blanket around Draven’s body. “I’m just glad that I can finally help! He healed well, except for the bite mark on his neck. For some reason, that is refusing to disappear. Andre must have cursed the bite.” Draven says in a shaky voice “I’m just grateful for all you have done!”

There is a knock on the door followed by Ray entering the room. “Draven, thank heavens you’re well! Family meeting in the foyer. Welcome back, Sonny!”

Ten minutes later, everyone had gathered in the foyer. Bobby walks into the room, his legs shaky but otherwise appearing to be in perfect health. Tommy won’t stop hugging Draven, her mommy mode making everyone smile.

Damian walks into the room at the last second. Tommy and Adam visibly tense when he arrives, so Damian sits down with Mikey, who wraps her arm around him. Draven looks at Damian, his eyes sad but there is a small smile on his face. Damian nods at him, whispering “I love you” as Ray begins to speak.

“At the current time, we have well over three hundred realms willing to fight with us against Andre. More contact us every day. I have spent as much time as possible with each delegate, which is taking up so much time that I am finding it impossible to be at the front lines very often. As a solution to this problem, I suggest that I train Draven to be the family’s representative, so he can meet with each delegate that comes our way. It only makes sense, since he is, by Luna’s prophecy, destined to rule the cosmos eventually.”

Tommy hugs Draven to her side, fear taking over her features. “Won’t that place Draven directly in danger, Ray?” Ray answers “Not necessarily. He will have nothing directly to do with the fighting, he will only oversee contact with the realms, calling for meetings with other delegates and the like. I will still oversee the army, with Adam and Bobby as my second in command.” Tommy looks a bit more reassured. “What do you think, Draven? Are you interested?”

Before everyone’s eyes, Draven ages. He now appears to be around eighteen years old. Draven squeezes his mother’s hand as he answers, “Of course I am willing to help, Grandfather, in any way I can.”

The meeting goes on for the next hour or so. At the end, Draven whispers to Adam and Tommy that he would like to speak to Damian. “I’ll see you in a bit. Don’t worry mom, I will be alright.”

Mikey kisses Damian and heads over to Ray, leaving Damian alone. Draven walks up to him, placing a hand on Damian’s arm. “Can we speak alone, Father?” Damian nods, leading his son to the library. Once they are there, Draven surprises Damian by throwing his arms around him, hugging him tightly.

“Father, I love you! I want you to know that I do not hold you responsible for what happened to me. You had no control over what you were doing…”

Damian stares into the eyes that are a carbon copy of his own. He cuts Draven off, saying “I hold myself responsible! I should’ve been able to fight him, but…”

“…no, it’s all HIS fault! I know you love me; I know that you would do anything for me! I do not want you to forever bear the brunt for what happened...”

“…Son, you wear my bite mark on your neck! You will never be able to look at yourself in the mirror without remembering that it was your FATHER who bit you, who took you against your will! I cannot tell you how sorry that I am…”

“You don’t have to say a word, Father. I know you love me and am there for me, regardless. Please, can’t we do our best to put everything behind us? I just want to forget…” Damian hugs Draven, holding his son as close as he can. He rocks Draven in his arms as if he were a little boy for a moment, savoring the closeness that they are sharing. To lighten the mood, Damian pulls back and asks “So, you are going to be the family representative! Are you looking forward to the assignment? I’m sure with a little training from your Grandfather, you will be wonderful in the role! I am very proud of you for taking on the assignment.”

Draven comments “I am happy to be of service to the family, in whatever way I can. I have wanted nothing more for a long time now. I’m proud that Grandfather trusts me with such an important assignment.”

They talk for a few minutes more, before Damian gives Draven another quick hug. “I’m glad you wanted to talk, Draven. I now must go and make peace with your other parents. I understand they are not being as understanding as you are about everything.” Draven shakes his head. “Be gentle with them, Father. They are both in over-protection mode now that I’ve been hurt.” Damian kisses Draven on the cheek, his eyes bright with pride as he says goodbye to his son.

When Damian enters his bedroom, Adam punches him first in the stomach, then in the side of the face. Damian freezes in place, not sure what to do. Tommy slowly approaches him, tears in her eyes. “We have forgiven a lot where you are concerned, Dam. But this? I…” Tommy swings back her fist and punches Damian on the other cheek. Stepping backwards, Damian looks from one mate to the other, quietly stating “There is nothing you can do to make me feel worse than I already do. I will never forgive myself for what I have done to Draven, even though he himself forgives me. If beating me up will make you feel better, then go ahead, I’ll stand here and take it. Since Andre has come into our lives, which I know is all my fault, I have done many things that I’m ashamed of. I don’t blame you for feeling this way, I’m sure I would feel the same.” Tommy punches Damian again, this time connecting with his nose, blood flying everywhere. Adam steps forward, his hand restraining Tommy from doing more damage. “I think it would be a good idea if you lived in the Dark realm till this war is over, Dam. You may come and visit the children anytime you wish, but Tommy and I do not want anything to do with you. We have run out of patience with you, so it’s best you go.” Tears fill Damian’s eyes as they focus on Tommy’s large stomach, knowing if he leaves, he will miss the baby’s birth. “Fine, I’ll go. But know that no matter what, I still love the both of you, the children too.”

Damian blinks and heads for the Dark realm.

Mikey finds him sitting in the throne room on her throne, all alone. “Dam! What brings you here in the middle of the daytime?” Damian kisses Mikey on the cheek before filling her in on what transpired with Draven and his mates. “My mates want me gone, Mikes. Not that I can blame them! I’ve been nothing but misery to everyone since before the war began!” Mikey flies into a rage. “Don’t they know that you are not responsible for what has happened since the war began? They have both been in the thrall of Andre, they both know what it is like to be out of their own control! How can they judge you so harshly? You have suffered far more than any of us, dealing with him every single night, having no will of your own! I should go and…”

“NO, MIKES!” Damian grabs both Mikey’s arms, holding on tight. “They have suffered enough having to deal with me! Just let me live here in the Dark realm with you. I’ll take the bedchamber next to yours. The last thing I want to do is interfere with your time with Ray! It’s bad enough that I ruined your last visit with him!” Mikey does not look satisfied with his answer, but she gives in none the less.

The next time Andre calls Damian to him, he is surprised to find both Tommy and Adam chained to the wall in Andre’s chamber. Andre appears next to him, grabbing his arm tightly. Addressing both Tommy and Adam, Andre says “I understand that you two think that Damian has been a bad boy lately. The two of you are too stupid to realize that everything I make Damian do is ultimately my fault, I’m to blame. While I think that the two of you are being ridiculous in the way you are treating him, to please you, Damian will be punished. Who better to do so than me?” Tommy opens her mouth to say something, and Andre cuts her off with “Damian, take your clothes off. Face the cross.” Damian does as Andre says, his face touching the wood of the cross.

Andre walks to the back of the room, picking up the cat o’ nine with the metal hooks at the end, the same one that he used on Draven.

Tommy calls out to Damian, saying “Fight him, Dam! Save yourself!” Andre laughs at Tommy. “The two of you remember…” Andre swings the cat over his shoulder “…that what I do now is your fault.” Andre lets the cat fly over and over, flesh and blood flying through the air. Damian screams rival Tommy and Adam’s. When he is finished, Andre calls out “untalrund dalfoncus” and blood stops flowing down Damian’s back.

“Damian, I want you to give both your mates a blow job to apologize to them for hurting Draven and Trick. Say you’re sorry. Start with Adam. Then stand in front of the maiden.” Damian turns and walks over to Adam, his bare feet leaving bloody footprints on the floor. Andre nods and Adam and Tommy’s clothing disappears.

“Apologize to each of them in turn, Damian.” Damian kneels in front of Adam, whispering “I’m sorry” as his shaking hand gently wraps around Adam’s length. Adam whispers “I love you” to Damian, who gives him a ghost of a smile in return. After Adam finishes, Damian moves on to Tommy, who shakes her head. “No. I don’t want this! Please, please stop!” Damian hesitates and Andre grabs a handful of Damian’s hair, pulling harshly. “Go on, Damian.” With a soft “I’m sorry” reaching Tommy’s ears, Damian gently swallows Tommy’s cock until his head grazes Tommy’s swollen stomach, the baby kicking him in the forehead. “Give mommy here a treat, Damian.”

When finished, Damian stands and makes his way over to maiden, facing Andre with fear in his eyes. Andre looks back at Tommy and Adam, smirking. “Damian hates this the most, don’t you, bitch?” Damian nods, eyes on the ground. “Do either of you know that he is claustrophobic? Nothing terrifies him more than a few weeks in this little lady.” Adam calls out “His punishment is over! Let him go!” Andre walks over to stand in front of the two mates, hands on his hips. “But you were the ones that wanted him to pay for what he’s done! I overheard you talking in bed, how you were tired of always forgiving him! I’m simply helping you accomplish the punishment that you wanted! But little did you take into consideration that it is really me that is behind every move he makes; therefore, the little bitch technically is innocent of his crimes! You would rather hurt the one you supposedly love, instead of me! If I were Damian, I’d hate you forever for the thoughts held against him! It’s surprising that all he feels for you is love.” Andre returns to Damian, walking around him and opening the maiden’s doors. Damian whimpers, his eyes begging Tommy and Adam to help him. When Andre returns to stand in front of Damian, he smirks at him. Damian whispers “Please, Master...” Andre’s eyes light up at the title that Damian has bestowed on him. “…please send me home. Please release me from this hell.”

Andre places both his hands on Damian’s chest and pushes backwards until the spikes have entered his body. Taking the doors to the maiden in both hands, he laughs at the fear on Damian’s face. “Enjoy your time in the maiden, Damian.” Andre slams the doors shut one by one, turning to the two mates still hanging on the wall. Andre waves his hands and the two are suddenly dressed, as if nothing ever happened.

Andre crosses the room to stand in front of Tommy. He gently rubs his hands over her large stomach, which causes Adam to growl. “You must be due any day now, Tommy. You look so beautiful, so big and round! I can’t wait to meet our child…” Tommy sniffles “Please, PLEASE let Damian out of there, Andre! I want him to be there when the baby is born! PLEASE!” Andre laughs. “You won’t be alone, darling! I’ll be there to hold your hand!” With a wave of his hand, he sends the two mates home, leaving them to ponder the birth of their child.

Draven finishes his meeting with the delegate from Iglandia, smiling reassuring to her as he leads her to her vehicle. He turns quickly, his footsteps leading him to his grandfather’s office. Bursting in on Ray’s meeting with Bobby, Draven cuts in with “Grandfather! I just received news that Luna has been kidnapped by Andre!”

Chapter Text

“Well, well well! If it isn’t the great and powerful Luna! I’ve waited so very long for the two of us to meet!” Andre calls out as he enters his chamber. Luna is chained to the wall, her hands over her head. Andre stops a few steps from her, surveying her from head to toe. “You’re a lot older that I thought. Maybe the rumors about you are true after all…”

Luna smirks at Andre. “I may be old, but I am more powerful than you are, Andre.” With a laugh, Andre crosses his arms over his chest. “Try me.”

Luna blinks and nothing happens. Andre claps his hands together in glee. “This coliseum of mine is protected from magick, witch. I am the only one with any power here. Frankie has practically turned himself inside out trying to make just one little spell work. Damian and Mikey’s spells fail when they are here as well. Speaking of Damian…” Andre steps closer, a smirk on his face. “…do you miss your favorite son? He will be here in a moment. Then the two of you will have the reunion of a lifetime!”

Luna scowls at Andre. “What you have done to him makes me sick! Especially since it was I that killed your relative so long ago…”

“WHAT?” Andre screams. With a laugh Luna continues with “Yes, it was me. I took over Damian’s body, kidnapped and killed those useless pieces of shit that were hurting my son. Believe me, it filled my heart with glee to do so! Damian was an innocent before Justine got her hooks into him, before your relative decided to ruin him. All Damian wanted to do was to please his king. They took advantage of him, and I did what was necessary to even the score! All this time you have been punishing an innocent!” Andre scoffs “I don’t believe you! You are just trying to get me to leave Damian and his family alone! Well, you may have been the one to kill my relative, but Damian and the Toro’s will still suffer my wrath for eternity for what you have done! Damian is mine to do with what I wish, to be my slave until the end of time! That will be your punishment, seeing your precious son at my feet!” There is a blinding light in the room and Damian appears, kneeling at Andre’s feet, his head bowed. “What is your wish, Master?”

Andre gives Luna another smirk. “See how obedient he is, Luna? Just a puppy dog on my leash. Look up and say hello, Damian.”

Damian raises his head, making eye contact with Luna. “Hello, mother. I’m sorry you are here with us. Hopefully Master will change his mind and let you go soon.” Luna gives Damian a soft smile. “Hello, my son. Mother loves you very, very much. You have always been my favorite. I’m sorry that this bastard has been hurting you.” Damian shrugs his shoulders. “Nothing less than I deserve, Mother. I am less than nothing, so I deserve to be treated like nothing.” Luna shakes her head. “No, son. You are my treasured boy, my most precious of all. You are innocent as the day you were born. It is this bastard that is responsible for what you have suffered…” Andre runs his hand through Damian’s long hair. “Innocent, hum Luna? Damian, on your knees. Let’s put you through your paces and show your bitch mother how wrong she is…”

An hour later Damian lays naked across the very table that Draven was raped on. A guard interrupts Andre, telling him that there is an emergency elsewhere in the building. As Andre leaves the room, he calls out “Don’t move, Damian.” Once he is gone, a flash of light fills the room, blinding Damian for a moment. Luna calls out “Dam? We don’t have much time! I just sound proofed the room.” Shocked, Damian asks, “But how?” and Luna laughs. “That bastard thinks he’s the best magician in the world! He has a lot to learn! Listen to me, son. Andre is planning on taking Tommy and Trick’s babies, raising them himself. He also plans on kidnapping Trick for his own personal slave, so he can continue to breed her. Andre is expanding the war boundaries, planning to fight the war on many fronts at the same time. His new plan is for complete domination of the cosmos. It’s time for Draven to come into his own, he is equipped with the skills that he needs, but he needs to be trained to be a great leader, so he can fight Andre on his own terms. Draven will face Andre on the battlefield sooner than you realize. You and Ray need to take the boy in hand now, so he is ready. Andre plans on permanently breaking your will, Damian, so you will serve at his feet for eternity. Sweetheart…” Damian struggles to look at his mother from his place on the table. “…hang in there. I know that you wish that your mind would simply break, so you didn’t have to deal with this anymore. You, Draven and Sonny will be the saviors of this story, we need the three of you strong in the end. Please do not lose hope. Regardless of what you might think, the entire family, including your mates, love you. Be strong for them. All will be well in the end.” Damian says “Thank you, Mother, I love you” right before the doors open and Andre reenters the room. Looking from Luna to Damian, Andre calls out “Let’s continue where we left off, shall we, Damian?” Luna gives Damian a sad smile. “Mother loves you, Damian. NEVER forget that!” As Andre looks back at Luna, she disappears.

As soon as he is released, Damian enters his bedroom in the Light realm to find Tommy in labor. “I…was trying to call for…” A stabbing pain cuts off Tommy’s words, her loud gasp filling the room. Damian wraps his arms around Tommy. “I’ll get Adam.” Seconds later there is a flash and Tommy ends up in a small, dark room. She is lying on a table naked as she breathes through a contraction. Suddenly Andre walks into the room, a smile on his face. “Well, hello there, little mama! Looks like it’s time for my child to be born! Let’s see…” Andre parts Tommy’s legs and feels between her legs. “It appears that you are around five centimeters! Let’s rush this along, shall we?” Andre blinks and Tommy screams at the top of her voice, her face turning purple. “There! Ready for the birth! And the child is pushing into place, perfect! It won’t be long now.”

It only takes Tommy twenty more minutes to push out the baby. Andre cuts the cord before scooping the child up in his arms, his face full of wonder and happiness. “A boy! We had a son, Tommy! Isn’t it wonderful?” Andre blinks and Tommy is dressed and standing next to the bed, looking as skinny as she did before the baby was conceived. “I’m happy enough with our child to heal you for carrying him. Here…” Andre waves the child’s hand in the air towards Tommy “…wave goodbye to Momma, little man.” Andre then waves his hand in the air and Tommy reappears in their bedroom, standing next to Damian, her arms empty.

“I WANT MY SON! WHY…I WANT HIM HERE WITH ME! THAT BASTARD HAS MY SON AND I WANT HIM BACK!!!” Tommy begins crying, slamming her fists into the bed, her face red. Damian blinks and Adam is standing at the end of the bed, staring blankly at Tommy’s temper tantrum. He turns to Damian, a question on his face. “Tommy delivered the baby at Andre’s. He’s stolen the baby from her, and she’s freaking out.” Damian tries to wrap his arms around Tommy, who pushes him away, her wails threatening to bring down the mansion. Adam moves closer to Tommy, reaching out to her. “Honey, I know that you…” Just then Pete bursts into the room, making a bee line to Damian. “Trick has disappeared! We were watching television and she disappeared right in front of my eyes! Help me…” Damian grabs Pete’s arm. “Has Trick been showing any signs that she was going to give birth today, Pete?” Pete nods his head. “She has been feeling pains on and off all day! Why?” Just then Tommy wails once again, tears streaming as Adam tries his hardest to rock Tommy against him to calm her down. “Andre took Tommy’s baby just a little while ago! And now he has Trick…”

Trick finds herself lying on a soft bed, many pillows propping her up. The long gown that she is wearing is hiked up to her hips, her pelvis on display to the room. A guard stands at the door of the room, trying his hardest not to look at Trick, who is blushing at the entire situation. Suddenly the door opens, and Andre enters the room, clapping his hands together when he sees Trick.

“Ah, what a busy day! First Tommy has my son, and now my precious Trick is here to have her baby!” Trick gasps for breath as another contraction wracks her body, making her moan. “Don’t worry, darling! I am here to help you deliver, just the same way I helped Tommy Joe earlier. Let’s see how far along you are.” Andre steps to the end of the bed, reaching between Trick’s legs. “Why, you are only three centimeters! Let’s move this along, shall we? But first, a little something for the pain.” Andre takes his free hand and brushes it across Trick’s forehead, the coldness of his fingers making Trick pull away. The pain she feels begins to fade. Trick struggles to sit up as she feels pressure between her legs. After a few minutes Andre says “There now! Ready to give birth! Too bad Damian isn’t here…” Trick blurts out “Please, bring him here! I want him here!” Andre makes a ‘tisk tisk’ sound at Trick. “But what about your husband? Don’t you want him with you?” Trick bears down with the next pain, feeling the baby moving downwards. “Of course! I want them both! But Damian is the father…”

Damian appears next to Trick, on his knees next to the bed. Andre calls out “Take her hand and talk to her, Damian, but that’s all. You can watch me deliver your son.” Damian grasps Trick’s hand, smiling at her. “It’s going to be alright, honey. You and the baby will be just fine.”

When the baby’s cries fill the air, Trick starts to cry. “Please, what is it? May we see it…” Andre lifts the baby in the air so both Trick and Damian can see it. “It’s a boy. Damian has made another son.” Andre wipes the baby off, wrapping it in a baby blanket and placing it on Trick’s chest. “I’m going to heal you now. The three of you may have a moment together before Damian goes back home.” Damian thanks Andre for delivering the baby, a sentiment that is repeated by Trick. The baby coos at Trick, who smiles at Damian. “He looks just like you, Dam! Do you want to hold him?” Damian nods, looking at Andre for permission, who gives Damian a nod in return. “Hold your son, Damian.”

Damian gently takes the baby from Trick’s arms. “Well, hello there, little one! I’m your daddy! I love you very much.” The baby coos again, making all three adults in the room smile. “Too bad you won’t be here as he grows up, Damian.”

After a few moments, Andre says “Give the baby back, Damian. Say your goodbyes to Trick. You will not be seeing her for a long time.” Damian leans forward and kisses Trick on the lips, whispering “I will find a way back to you, love. I love you with all my heart. Thank you so much for our beautiful boy.” Trick’s tears fall faster as she says “Send my love to Pete, Damian. I love you too. We will miss you.” Andre swipes his hand through the air and Damian returns to the mansion.

Trick turns terrified eyes to Andre, who says in a calm voice “This room has everything you will need for you and the baby, Trick. He will stay with you for the first few weeks, then I will move him to the nursery next door. I want to make sure you and I have plenty of alone time for the two of us to have sex. I plan on getting you pregnant again as soon as possible.” A visible shiver runs through Trick’s body. “You have free reign to wander this part of the building. There is a kitchen down the hall with blood bags in the refrigerator. Take all you need. The guards will leave you alone if you behave yourself.” Trick gives a little nod of understanding. “Then I will leave you to get to know your son! If you need anything, call for a guard. They are posted throughout the building. Good night, dear Trick.” Andre smiles at Trick once more and then leaves the room.

Sonny uses a spell to put Tommy to sleep. Even as she sleeps peacefully, tears still flow down her face. Damian and Adam lie next to her in bed, neither speaking to each other. Damian feels nothing but sadness, missing both Trick and his son. As he tries to sleep, he thinks over his recent conversation with Ray…

“Andre plans to hit us on all fronts at once, Ray. Luna told me that his next plan is to take over the entire cosmos. Draven was born ready to lead our army, but he still needs some direction from you and me. We are running out of time before Andre attacks.” Ray nods at Damian in agreement. “The two of us need to spend more time with the boy, see what it is that he needs from both of us. He is doing a wonderful job as the family representative. If Luna helped create him, I’m sure that he is ready to face anything. I will step down and let him lead the army when the time is right.” Damian nods his head. “I will spend time with him tomorrow, ascertain if he has any magickal skills that we are not yet aware of. We need to know what the boy is capable of, before we set him free to save the world!” Ray shakes his head. “Too much responsibility on such young shoulders, Dam.”

Damian can’t stand it anymore. He rolls over and quietly says “Ad? Are you awake?”

Adam sighs then answers “I am now, Dam. What is it?” There is a moment of silence before Damian says “I’m sorry for everything. I wish I could take it all back, wish I could…” Adam cuts him off with “Don’t, Dam. I know that you are sorry for hurting Draven and Trick. I understand that it was Andre who caused you to do the things that you did. I’m sorry for holding it all against you. Tommy and I were just frustrated, and we blamed you for everything. Please forgive me for everything, Dam. I’m sorry that Andre punished you because of Tommy and I.” Damian reaches his hand across Tommy’s body, rubbing Adam’s arm. “Of course, I forgive you! Andre was hoping that the three of us would hold grudges against each other, but we are better than that! Our love is too strong for that to happen.” Adam lays his hand down on top of Damian’s, patting gently. “You own my heart, Dam, you and Tommy. There is nothing that he can do to change that…” Adam squeezes Damian’s hand. “I’m sorry about Trick and your son, Dam. I know that you and Pete are heartbroken. I wish your little boy was here with us.” Tears fill Damian’s eyes at Adam’s words. “Thank you, Ad. I wish they were here, too. But what are we going to do with poor Tommy? I’m afraid that her mind will crack if we can’t find a way to get through to her! She is inconsolable, rightfully so, considering our poor boy has been stolen!” Adam sighs once more. “The only thing we can do is be there for her, every step of the way. I wish that there was a better way to be there for her, though. I felt like such a failure earlier.”

The two talk in the dark for another hour or so, until Andre calls for Damian. The moment he arrives in the room, he calls out “I want to see Trick and my son, Andre.” Andre places his hands on his hips and laughs. “Trick is unavailable to you, Damian. If you are a good boy, you may get to see your son. That is…” Andre walks over to Damian and runs his hand over his chest “…if I’m in the mood to show him to you. You should feel lucky that I am allowing Trick to keep him with her. I could simply slaughter the brat and throw him to my dogs.” Damian draws a ragged breath, his eyes locked on Andre’s. “You do that, Andre, and I will slaughter you in your sleep!” Andre thumps his hand against Damian’s chest a few times. “I’d like to see you try, bitch.”

Draven gestures towards a seat which has been placed opposite of him. “King Thomas, it is indeed a pleasure to meet you.” The king stops before the chair, his hand reaching out to take Draven’s, his lips brushing the back of Draven’s hand. “No, my young man…” The king looks Draven up and down before licking his lips “…it is MY pleasure to meet you! I’ve heard many great things about you! I’m glad to finally meet you in person!”

Draven surveys the young king in front of him. Ray told him that the king’s realm, Navarre, holds plenty of resources that the Light and Dark realms needed to be able to stay relevant in the current war. He is going to have to do his best to stay calm, even as the king flirts with him, which is something that Draven is totally unfamiliar with.

“I understand that your realm needs more troops, as well as absanth and tornatum. These are resources that we have in abundance. We also have many slaves, in case you have need for them…”

Draven nods his head. “That would be wonderful, King Thomas! We appreciate the help! This war has already dragged on too long, and our realms are finding themselves close to depleted of resources. We will take any help that you have to give.” The king leans forward in his seat, placing a hand on Draven’s once again. “Tell me, Draven. I have heard that you are under the protectorate of the witch Luna. Is that true? Some say that you will become the leader of the cosmos, once the war is over.” Draven looks down at the king’s hand. “It is true that Luna has played a special part of my life so far, King Thomas. As far as the rest is concerned, who knows? I can only do the very best for my family, and for the entire cosmos.” King Thomas squeezes Draven’s hand. “Then I would say that the cosmos is in good hands then! Say, do you have a boyfriend?” Draven shakes his head. “No, Sire, I do not have a boyfriend. I am quite single.” The king squeezes his hand again. “Would you like one?”

Draven blushes. “I’m not sure that I would be worth the trouble, sire. You see, I’m damaged goods. No one would want me. I appreciate you…” King Thomas leans forward, placing a finger to Draven’s lips. “So, someone has hurt you, and you think that you are unworthy! Quite the opposite, Draven! You are very precious, no matter what has been done to you. If you would simply give me a chance, you will see that I will treat you with the upmost care, giving you the love and respect that you are due. Think about it and let me know what your answer is. In the meantime, I will send the resources that your realms need immediately, as well as our soldiers.” Draven, stunned into silence, smiles at Thomas, placing his hand out for the king to take. The king places a kiss to the back of Draven’s hand, standing and bowing as he gives Draven one more once over before taking his leave.

Later, when Ray stops by to speak to Draven, he gives his grandson a smile. “Someone made your day today, Draven! I haven’t seen you smile like this in a long time! So, who was it that brought my grandson such joy?”

Draven explains to Ray his interaction with King Thomas. “He asked me if I were single. He flirted with me the entire time that he was here! I explained that I would be too much for him to take on, and he basically told me that I was worth fighting for. I think I blushed the entire time he was here! Oh, and by the way, he said that his realm will supply us the resources that we need.” Ray laughs. “I love how you just snuck that bit of important information in at the end, Draven.” Draven blushes at his grandfather, his eyes on the floor. “So, are you going to accept the King as your new mate? Or do you plan to string him along for a while, make him wait.” Draven blushes again. “Grandfather! I don’t even know if I am gay! What if I decide to be with him, and them I realize that I’m straight! Or even worse—what if what I have suffered at the hands of Andre causes me to never be able to be with ANYONE!” Ray reaches out and takes Draven’s hand. “Reach out to the king. Tell him that are unsure of your sexuality, that you want to spend a little time with him, to help you make up your mind who you really are. If he wants to get to know you, if he wants to see where a relationship can lead you both, then he will spend time with you. If not, then you will know that he is not worth the effort.” Draven gives his grandfather a hug. “Thank you, Grandfather! I should’ve known that you would know what to do!” With that, Ray smiles and leaves Draven’s office.

Draven drafts a note for King Thomas, then goes back to work. He is surprised four hours later when a courier arrives with a large box. “For Draven Lavelli” is handwritten on the top of the box. When Draven opens it, balloons with colorful ribbons attached float to the ceiling, the smell of chocolates taking over Draven’s senses. He reaches in and pulls out a large box of the most expensive chocolates that can be purchased in the cosmos, along with two boxes, one larger than the other. When Draven opens the larger box, he finds a thick gold chain. Lifting it with his hand, he notices how heavy that it is, realizes how expensive it is. Upon opening the smaller box, Draven finds a matching bracelet, the gold inlaid with expensive gems. At the bottom of this box is a gold ring, it too inlaid with gemstones. A note in the bottom of the big box says “Please accept these gifts as a token of my esteem. I value you higher than anyone else in the cosmos. I am willing to wait for you as long as it takes. I look forward to spending time with you, getting to know you better. Please have dinner with me tomorrow night at seven pm at my castle. Yours respectfully, Thomas.”

Draven picks up a sheet of paper and writes to Thomas, thanking him for his gifts and accepting his invitation to dinner. As a guard takes the letter to be delivered, Draven puts on the jewelry, a huge smile on his face.

The next evening, Draven stares at himself in the mirror as he combs his hair, his stomach sinking with nervousness. Suddenly there is a knock at the door. “Come in” Draven calls out. Mikey opens the door, a smile on her face. “Ready for your date?” Draven nods as he places the comb on his dresser. “I’m scared, Grandmother. What if I panic, what if I freak out if he tries to touch me? I’m scared I’ll…” Mikey gathers her grandson in her arms. “Stop overthinking! You are going to talk yourself out of the date before it even begins! You said he is willing to be patient. Just tell him what you need, and all will be well. Now, do you remember the instructions that I gave you to transport?” Draven nods his head. “Yes, thank you so much! I was worried how I would get there…” Mikey cuts him off with “No, you were worried you wouldn’t have a quick escape!” Draven blushes, his eyes suddenly on the floor. “It’s alright, sweetheart. Just remember what I told you, and all will be well! Now go have fun tonight! The last thing you want to do is be late on your first date!” Mikey gives Draven another hug and a kiss, then leaves him.

Draven sighs and takes a deep breath, focusing on Thomas. He blinks and finds himself in a large room decorated in gold and red, a table set for two next to a roaring fire. The door to the room opens, and Thomas steps inside, dressed head to toe in purple satin and lace. “Draven! I’m so glad you made it!” Thomas walks up to Draven, his hands gently landing on Draven’s upper arms, squeezing as he kisses Draven on the cheek. “Please, have a seat. I will tell my servant we are ready to eat. Or would you rather have a tour of my castle first?” Draven, feeling his anxiety rise, blurts out “A tour, please, Thomas.” The king gives Draven a gentle smile. “Of course, darling. This way.”

The two wander throughout the castle. Thomas introduces Draven to the courtiers and servants that they pass in the hallways. Thomas even takes Draven to the kitchens, where each snatch a cookie off a cooling rack.

When they arrive at the throne room, Draven gasps in awe at the splendor surrounding him. Shades of purple and gold bring life to the walls, deep black velvet curtains draping the doorways. The throne itself is made of solid gold, shining brightly under a hanging chandelier. Thomas gestures to his throne. “Have a seat, darling.” Draven sits down, looking up at Thomas with a blinding smile. “So, this is what it’s like to be king!” Thomas laughs gently. “Get used to it, Draven. When you are the ruler of the cosmos, you will have a finer throne than this one! My throne will seem mundane next to yours!” Draven gives a small laugh. “Thomas, that day may never come! I’m quite content being the son of the Light realm’s king.” Thomas looks confused for a moment. “I thought that your father used to be the king of the Dark realm! Or am I mistaken?” Draven stands up, turning towards Thomas as he says “I have two fathers. I was speaking of my father Adam. My other father Damian was the King of the Dark realm, which is now being overseen by my Grandmother Mikey. The Light realm Council disbanded when the war began, so my Grandfather Ray took back control of the realm for the time being. When the war is over, Adam will once again become king and lead the Council. It is all rather confusing. They decided that it would be easier this way, since Ray has experience leading a realm during wartime.” Thomas nods once. “Makes sense to me. So, darling, are you ready to eat yet? I figured we could have our meal, and then we can have a glass of wine and spend the evening getting to know each other better.” Draven, butterflies back in his stomach, nods his head in agreement. “Then lead the way, Thomas.”

After a delicious five course meal, Thomas leads Draven to his chambers. “Not for what you think, darling! Simply, my chambers are the most comfortable in the entire castle. See?” The door opens to a room with overstuffed couches and tables holding food and drink, a fire burning in the fireplace. “My bedroom is through there, but I do not intend that we should visit it tonight. No, I want to take the time to get to know you better, do my best to make you feel safe and secure in our new relationship. Please, have a seat, my dear.” Once seated, Thomas hands Draven a glass of wine. Taking a quick sip, Draven gives a little moan at the rich taste, which causes Thomas’s eyebrows to raise. Sensing his mistake, Draven reaches up to take the chain Thomas gave him in hand. “Thank you again for the beautiful jewelry, Thomas! You were more than generous…” Thomas sits down next to Draven, their thighs touching. “Not as beautiful as their intended, Draven! I saw them and immediately thought of you. I would send you a thousand more presents, if only they would make you smile like this!”

The two talk late into the night, sharing stories of their childhood. Thomas tells Draven that he is descended from a long line of Anthrops, which appear to be human but live for thousands of years. “We specialize in healing magick, but I have a few other types of magick thrown in as a bonus.” Thomas then makes Draven laugh with stories of his courtiers and guards. Thomas asks “So, was your upbringing similar to mine, special schooling and classes on becoming a king?” Draven surprises Thomas by answering “No. I had a regular childhood, nothing special except for my aging. Luna set it up that we pups in the house were on a accelerated growth pattern. I should be seven right now!” Intrigued, Thomas asks “Are you finished aging at such a high rate?” and Draven answers “No, I will have one more growth spurt in about three months, which will bring me to 21. That will be the end of my growing up so fast! Frankly, I can’t wait to get it over with.”

Thomas raises one eyebrow. “You said pups. Is that how you categorize yourself? What does that mean?” Draven sighs. He hopes that when Thomas hears the truth about himself, he won’t turn his back on him. “I…am a half breed, like two of my parents. I am a werepire, half vampire, half werewolf. Today I was given another gift by Luna—for protection, I now have a layer of shielding on top of and under my skin. My top layer of skin is also now harder than most vampires.” When he notices Thomas looking him over, he says “Please, pass me that sword on the wall, over the fireplace. I will show you.” Thomas fetches the sword and Draven attempts to cut his arm. Nothing happens. Thomas is visibly impressed. “As you saw tonight, I can eat human food as well as drink blood. I have fangs that are larger than a vampire’s, which I inherited from my wolf side. I have retractable claws that are longer than vampire claws. My vision is better than a vampire, and I am faster than one as well. Here…” Draven reaches out and grabs Thomas’s hand, placing it on his lower chest. Thomas feels movement, like a baby would move under its mother’s skin. “That’s my wolf. He is the other part of me. If he were to die, I would die. That is why I have the armor, to protect the two of us. My parents do not have this armor. Luna is always looking out for me.”

“You are quite impressive, sweetheart. Do you have any other wolf traits?” Draven nods while taking a sip of wine. “If you are asking if I howl at the moon, I do so when I am in wolf form. Each full moon my family goes out running in the moonlight together. It’s fun! Even my father Damian changes into a wolf and runs with us.” Thomas takes Draven’s hand in his, playing with his ring. “So, I take it that the rest of your family are vampires?” Chills run down Draven’s spine when Thomas links their fingers together. “Well, my uncle Frankie, he’s a real werewolf. He is married to aunt Gee, who is a werepire. My grandparents are vampires, as are Aunt Trick and Uncle Pete. Another thing—Damian is testing me, to see if I have any magikal skills. Currently, the only thing I know how to do is transport.”

Looking from their linked fingers to Thomas’s eyes, Draven says “Look, Thomas. I think it might be…important if I tell you what happened to me.” Thomas squeezes his fingers, commenting “Only if you are ready to do so, sweetheart.”

Draven finds that he cannot meet Thomas’s eyes. “Andre has set out to destroy my family. He eventually wants to house all of us in his cabinet of curiosities, with my father Damian serving as his personal sex slave for the rest of eternity. Andre’s son was a prisoner in the Dark realm, and Damian cut off his head, which infuriated Andre. He decided to take it out on me. He…” Draven struggles not to cry, tears flooding his eyes. “…raped me in every way possible, even making me suck Damian! He made Damian rape me, and the bite mark on my neck belongs to him as well. Later Andre whipped me and threw acid on me. My stepbrother Sonny healed me but could not take the bite mark away.”

Silence.

Draven begins to pull away, but Thomas tightens his fingers even tighter. “No, please don’t pull away from me, darling! I…it took me a minute to catch up, I was so overwhelmed by your tale! The hell you have been through, it’s amazing that you have survived so well. A lesser person would be completely devastated by what has happened! You are so strong, darling, to survive as you have. I hope you are proud of yourself because I am proud of you!” Draven smiles at Thomas, then says “Now do you see why I said I need to take things slow? I was a virgin when Andre raped me. I had absolutely no experience, I hadn’t even been kissed!”

Thomas takes both Draven’s hands in his. “Draven, listen closely to me. I am so sorry that you were raped and abused, sweetheart. I couldn’t be there for you then, but I can be here for you now. I understand that you are hesitant to place your trust in a stranger, but I promise you, I will be there with you each step of the way. I know that you cannot guarantee that the two of us will end up together, but if it doesn’t happen, I will still be here for you, in whichever form you need me to be here, if only as a friend. You are such a special person; I simply wish to be a part of your life.” Tears overflow Draven’s eyes, and Thomas reaches out to wipe them away as quickly as they fall. “I know it will take time for you to feel comfortable, for you to believe but I am willing to wait.” Thomas opens his arms and says in a soft voice “Can I hold you, Draven?”

Draven hesitates a moment before nodding his head, shifting in his seat to move closer to Thomas, who wraps his arms around him. Thomas holds on tightly for a moment before gently taking Draven’s head in one hand, encouraging the teen to place his head on Thomas’s chest. The two of them stay entwined for a long time, watching the logs burn in the fireplace. Finally, Draven mumbles into Thomas’s chest “Thank you, Thomas, for your understanding and your kindness. It means the world to me. It’s nice to feel normal for once, it’s nice to let down my guard with someone. I’m glad that someone is you.” Thomas surprises Draven by placing a gentle kiss to Draven’s forehead, then replying “You are welcome, darling. I wish I could hold you forever.” Draven looks at the clock on the mantle over the fireplace. “Unfortunately, I must go. Thank you for a wonderful evening, Thomas, and thank you for holding me. I hope to see you soon.” Thomas releases Draven somewhat reluctantly. “What about Friday, darling? We are having our annual summer festival. There are games, food, entertainment. What do you think? Say, two pm?” Draven replies “I would love that! I will see you then.” Draven gives Thomas one more smile and then heads home.

In the middle of the night, Damian heads to the kitchen to get a bag of blood. When he arrives there, he finds Gee’s son Michael. “Thank heavens, Damian! I’ve been looking all over for you!” Damian puts the bag back in the refrigerator, asking “What’s wrong?” as he shuts the door.

Michael, eighteen years old and the splitting image of Frankie, says “It’s my mom. Today was her and Dad’s anniversary. They have cried all day without a break. Anthony and I are so worried about them. Damian, I know that Dad has made you the head of our family, and Anthony and I appreciate your being here for all of us. But I also know that Dad told you to treat Mom as your wife. Mom needs more than just a casual encounter with you, she needs much more. Can you be here for her like she needs? She needs to be in your bed and in your arms. Please, Damian, I’m begging you—be my mother’s lover.”

Damian is stunned speechless. He had no idea that the boys knew exactly what Frankie said to him. “Michael, I spoke to your mother about this. There is no way that I can be there for her full time. I barely have time to be with my own mates, with everything going on. I can go to her now, but I can’t guarantee that I will be there every time she needs me. I will do my best.” Michael thanks Damian and goes to walk away, but Damian stops him. Staring deep into Michael’s eyes, Damian says “You and your brother have grown into amazing young men. You father is proud of you, and so am I. Not many young people would take into consideration their parent’s needs as you have. Thank you for reaching out to me.” Michael thanks Damian and then heads towards his bedroom.

Damian knocks on Gee’s door and walks in. He finds Gee in a fetal position on the couch, crying into a tissue. Damian walks to the couch and leans down, taking another tissue and wiping Gee’s face. Gee looks up into Damian’s eyes, a low whine coming from her chest.

Without a word, Damian lifts Gee into his arms and walks towards Gee’s bedroom, gently laying Gee down in the middle of their large bed. Damian gives Gee a long, passionate kiss before slowly unbuttoning the buttons on Gee’s nightgown. When Gee doesn’t protest, Damian pulls the gown over Gee’s head, throwing it on the floor in the corner.

Four hours of love making later, Damian is trying to catch his breath. Gee is laying against him, their head on Damian’s chest. Gee reaches out and takes one of Damian’s hands, lacing their fingers. “I thank you, Dam, for being here with me tonight. It hurt so bad to be alone. It kills me, knowing that my Frankie is alone in a glass box, somewhere in agony. Having you here with me somehow makes it all bearable.” Damian gives Gee a smile. “I wish I could be with you more often, Gee. I know you are lonely. If only Andre would leave me alone!” Gee rolls over, placing her head on Damian’s side. “Dam, I’m so sorry about Trick and your baby! I felt horrible when I heard of it. And poor Tommy! Adam tells me that she is so lost.” Damian sighs dramatically. “Ad and I try everything that we can to keep her spirits up, but nothing works. Even the children do not bring her joy the way they used to. Adam almost hit me when I told him what I think she needs most.” Gee gives Damian a confused look. “I told him to get her pregnant. She has always wanted a baby from him. I told him it would be the only way to make her smile again.”

Gee laughs. “Damian, I think you are on to something! You’re right, she wants Adam’s baby, she used to talk to me about it all the time! But how the hell can you manage to pull it off if Adam hasn’t managed to knock her up in ages?” Damian tickles Gee’s side. “Magick, my dear love, magick.”

Trick hands her son over to the nanny that Andre assigned her. She had three glorious uninterrupted weeks with her son, whom she named Damon, after his father. He looks just like Damian. A stab of loneliness brings tears to her eyes. She missed Pete and Damian, wishing they were with her.

A guard appears in the doorway. “Andre is ready for you now.” Giving her son one more kiss on the forehead, Trick straightens her shoulders and follows the guard out the door.

The guard announces her when they reach Andre’s suite. “Enter, Trick. Benjamin, you are free for the night. See you tomorrow.” The guard wishes Andre a good night, leaving Trick standing just inside the doorway. “Darling! Please come join me.” Trick looks around the room as she makes her way over to Andre, who is sitting on an overstuffed couch, throw blankets tossed across the back. Trick notices a decanter of blood sitting on a tray on the coffee table, two silver goblets sitting to either side. The room is richly decorated, with a blazing fire in the fireplace.

Trick sits at the opposite end of the couch from Andre, as nervous as a girl at her first school dance. Andre’s chuckles make Trick blush, her eyes on the floor. “Sweetheart? Would you like a glass of blood? I promise I didn’t poison it.” Trick’s eyes glide across the couch to encounter Andre’s as she softly answers, “That would be nice, thank you, Andre.”

Acting as the perfect host, Andre pours a glass of blood and warms it between his hands before handing it to Trick, who whispers thank you. After pouring himself a glass of blood, Andre sits back to observe Trick.

“Sweetheart, you do not have to sit so stiffly! I invited you to my suite so we could get to know each other better. Now, I know that you were Andrew’s slave in the Dark realm. Did you ever know your parents?” Trick takes another sip of blood and then shakes her head. “My parents died shortly after I was born. I lived with my grandmother, who died when I was eight. That is when I was picked up by the slave traders. They found me on the street begging for food. I took many beatings until Master…” A sad look suddenly takes over Trick’s face “…I mean Andrew bought me. He treated me very well, better than a slave deserves.” Andre hums to himself for a moment. “And while you were with him, you met Pete, is that right?” Trick nods. “He was a friend of Andrew’s.” Andre nods, his expression pensive. “So how did you end up in the Light realm?”

Trick tells the long story that led to her eventual arrival in the Light realm. “The Toro’s took me in, took me to their hearts right away, Pete too. I’m proud to say that I am a part of the family.” Andre leans forward, gently taking the goblet from Trick’s hand and placing it on the table. “Correction, dear Trick. You WERE a member of the family. Now you belong to me, and only me! I have shone you true favor, darling, which is something that I want you to never forget. You and Damian will spend eternity with me, he at my feet and you in my bed.” Trick cries out in fear as Andre reaches out and takes her by the arm. “And it’s time I introduce you to my bed, Trick. You will be spending most of your time there…” Trick, doing her best to pull away from Andre, blurts out “But my son…” Andre stands, dragging Trick with him. “You are being nothing but obstinate. You will see your son only if you behave, little bitch. Keep that in mind in the future.”

Andre leads Trick to his bedroom, his hand still on her arm in case she starts to fight again. Trick quickly takes in the huge bed, comfortable bedding and furniture. Such pleasant surrounding for such a horrid vamp such as Andre to live in.

Andre removes Trick’s dress and then lays her down on the middle of the bed. Once naked, he joins her, lying down on top of her. Trick wants to fight back, but she worries for her son if she gets out of line or disobeys. Andre looks down at Trick, using a hand to brush the hair out of her eyes. “You are beautiful, Trick. I’m going to enjoy having you for my lover. Spread your legs for me.” Trick does as he asks, opening herself to the bastard holding her captive. “I hope to get you pregnant right away. If not, then we will just keep trying until we know you are.” Trick feels Andre slip inside of her, feels him lift her legs over his shoulders so he can go as deep as he can. “I could use magick to get you pregnant, but I prefer doing it the old-fashioned way.”

Three hours later, Andre finally climbed off Trick and placed a pillow under her bottom. “That was immensely fun, but I think it’s time to give you a little break, huh sweetheart?” Trick nods her head, words completely gone. Andre rubs her right breast, a smirk on his face. “You look so sweet and innocent, darling, for someone who is so debauched. You will lay on that pillow for the next half an hour, then you may return to your room. You may dismiss the nanny for the rest of the night, I will no longer need your services for the evening. Remember, only get up when the guard tells you to. Hopefully we made a baby tonight.” Andre covers Trick before leaning down to take Trick’s lips in a fiery kiss before calling for a guard. “She may leave for her room in a half hour, no sooner. Have someone bring her a bag of blood.” With a last look, Andre leaves the room.

The summer festival that Thomas invited Draven to turns out to be so much fun. Thomas introduced him to his parents, who immediately took a liking to him. Thomas’s mother took Draven under her wing, seeing that he had enough to eat, introducing him to the rest of the family. Thomas and Draven played games, with Thomas winning Draven a life size purple teddy bear that Draven immediately names Berry. They listen to a band, the two of them dancing together at the front of the crowd.

As the festivities were closing for the night and the two were headed back to the castle, Mikey suddenly appears in front of them. Looking frantic, Mikey reaches out and takes Draven’s hand in hers. “Draven, your grandfather has been seriously injured. The army is without a leader. We need you to take over immediately.” Mikey steps forward and places a kiss on Draven’s cheek. “Please be careful, darling. We all love you very, very much. I must go be with your grandfather. Come back to the house and meet with Bobby, he will take you to the front lines.” Mikey turns toward Thomas. “You must be Thomas. I am Mikey, Draven’s grandmother. I am sorry that we are meeting under such circumstances.” Thomas nods. “It is a pleasure to meet you. I hope you husband heals quickly and we meet again in a much more pleasant situation.” Mikey nods then returns her attention back to Draven. “Talk to Luna before you leave. Maybe she can age you quicker than she intended. I know she has a sword she wishes to gift you. I hope she stays with you in spirit. I love you, sweetheart.” Draven says I love you and then watches his grandmother leave.

Thomas turns to Draven. “My thoughts and prayers will be with you, Draven. Please be careful and keep in touch with me. I will keep Berry here.” Draven leans forward and takes a deep breath, his panic rising as he gently places his lips on Thomas’s in their first kiss. Thomas holds still for a minute before returning the kiss, his arms sliding around Draven, pulling him closer. They stay like this for a few minutes, until Thomas slowly begins to pull away. “If you don’t leave, sweetheart, I’m going to keep you here forever! Thank you for the kiss, and the wonderful day. I hope to hear from you soon.” Draven sighs, his lips kiss swollen and his hair a mess. “I will let you know how I get on, Thomas. Until we meet again.” With a small smile, Draven closes his eyes and leaves.

Instead of arriving at home, he ends up at Luna’s castle. “I pulled you here, so we can have a word before you go. Hold still.” Draven stands still, and Luna says a few words. Draven feels himself grow taller, his chest broader, his hair growing until it reaches his shoulders. “There. Now you are an adult, you are ready to face what is ahead of you. I aged your sibling and your cousins; in case they are needed at the front they will be ready. Now, I have a sword for you.” Luna holds out her hands and a sword appears. “It is shatterproof. You will never need to sharpen it. Take care of it, Draven.” Luna walks over to Draven, placing a hand on his arm. “You are ready to take Ray’s place at the front. I am so proud of you.” Draven quietly begs “Please Luna, please take care of my grandfather. He needs your healing.” Luna nods. “This is your first step towards ruling the cosmos.” Draven gives a little chuckle. “I would rather be with Thomas, but I will serve as needed.” Luna laughs “There is plenty of time for that, young one. You have a full future ahead of you, with plenty of time for love.” Luna kisses Draven’s cheek. “Away you go, young one. You have my love.” With a wave of her hand, Draven arrives at the mansion.

After many kisses and goodbyes from the family, Draven picks up his sword and turns towards Bobby. “Alright Bobby…” Draven nods at his uncle, a smirk on his face “…let’s head to the front.”

Chapter Text

Draven is knee deep in dead bodies. Standing at the head of the army, he is the first target for the enemy. He sighs as another wave of jackal-like creatures make a run right at him. Draven concentrates hard until a circle of protection surrounds him; his sword held high in the air. Throat after throat Draven stabs and slices, adding to the pile at his feet. He hears screams behind him but cannot take the time to turn around, he needs to pay attention to the fight that is taking place in front of him.

Draven suddenly yells out “Decontante!” and the dead bodies piled up on the ground all disappear. He then yells out “Incendeo!” and the living creatures all incinerate, smoke filling the air. Bobby runs up to Draven, out of breath and covered with blood. “How the hell did you do that?” Bobby yells over the cheering soldiers behind them.

“I have no idea!” Draven answers, a surprised frown on his face. “I’ll credit that one with Luna’s help.” Draven notices Bobby’s arm bleeding and automatically says “Honshue Oscula” and the cut heals instantly.

“Thank heavens for Luna then! You obviously have the skills; she is just helping you use them. I’m glad she is on our side!” Draven laughs. “I agree with you! I feel as if I am fighting this war on autopilot! But as long as we win, who cares!” Mikey suddenly appears before them, her hair mussed and a bloody sword in her hand. “Did you do that, Draven? Make them all disappear? Incinerate them? One minute I was on the ground with a jackal over me, and the next thing I knew, they were all gone!” Bobby nods enthusiastically. “Yep, that was Draven! He keeps astounding us with his talents!” Mikey leans over and kisses Draven’s cheek. “I’m proud of you, grandson! Keep listening to Luna and all will be well.” Draven smiles at Mikey. “Thanks, grandmother. How are you and grandfather?” Mikey’s smile slips a bit. “I’m fine, but your grandfather is healing slower than I thought he would. He is back behind his desk in his office, but it will be a long time before he shows any real improvement. He is frustrated that he cannot fight at the front lines. I told him that he has done enough fighting, the realm needs him to be the king we all know he is.” Mikey gives Draven a small smile. “While things are quiet, why don’t you head to Navarre to visit your king. I’m sure he would like to see you, if only for a minute.” Draven looks towards Bobby, expecting an argument. Bobby surprises him by saying “Mikey’s right. I think I’m going home to say a quick hello to my wife, and I’m sure Mikey will stop by to say hello to Ray. Might as well since we have a minute.” Draven nods his head in agreement, a thrill running through his body at the thought of seeing Thomas. “Alright, I will be back directly. Call for me if you need me.” Draven steps forward and kisses Mikey on the cheek. “I’m glad you visited. Please, send grandfather my love. Bobby, send my love to Robbie. Goodbye.” Closing his eyes, Draven pictures Thomas in his mind and the next thing he knows, he is in the throne room at the castle in Navarre.

“That is my final ruling.” Draven opens his eyes and feels the breath leave his body. Thomas is dressed all in red and is sitting on his throne, a look of rage on his face. “Take him to the dungeon. He will die at noon tomorrow.” Thomas looks up and sees Draven at the edge of the crowd. He immediately stands, and the entire room, including Draven, bow before the king. “You are all dismissed.”

As the crowd slowly files out, Thomas’s face beams in a smile as he walks over to Draven, who gives a small bow as they meet. “Sweetheart! You do not need to bow to me! It is I who should be bowing to you!” Thomas takes Draven by the hand, leading him to his chambers. When they arrive, Thomas wraps his arms around Draven, who drops his sword, pulling him in for a passionate kiss.

When the two of them finally come up for air, Thomas blurts out “I never thought I’d see you again, it’s been so long! I’ve missed you so badly!” Draven goes to say something and laughs. Over Thomas’s shoulder, he sees Berry sitting on a stool in the corner. “I see you have taken good care of Berry.” Thomas laughs, his body moving forward until his lips meet with Draven’s. As the kiss deepens, Draven moans when Thomas’s tongue licks his bottom lip, looking for entry. Draven opens his mouth, and Thomas takes over the kiss, his tongue dueling with Draven’s as Draven runs his hands over Thomas’s chest, feeling the hard muscles under his clothing.

“Stop, Draven! Please…” Draven pulls back, gasping for air. “What? Did I do something wrong?” Thomas pulls Draven back in for another hug. “No, of course not! I love it when you touch me! But I think the two of us are moving too fast…” Draven smiles at Thomas. “I want to feel your arms around me. I want to feel you kiss me, want to feel your body against mine. Is that too fast for you?” Thomas shakes his head. “No, darling. But I’m afraid that it is too fast for you, after all you’ve been through.” Draven shakes his head, his eyes shining with unshed tears. “It’s all I have been thinking about, Thomas. I want you…” Mikey’s voice reverberates through Draven’s head. “Before you go back, visit your grandfather!” Draven thinks “Yes, grandmother!” before leaning in to kiss Thomas once more. With a sad look on his face, Draven sighs then says “I’m so sorry, Thomas, but I must leave. I just couldn’t let another moment go by without seeing you. I promise I will come back as soon as I can.” A sudden chill, a feeling of doom shoots its way down Draven’s back. “Thomas, please do me a favor. Double the guards in and around your castle. I’m afraid the jackals will attack you next, since you are seeing me. Andre will stop at nothing to destroy me and my family. Tell your guards to remember to insert their swords in the neck of those monsters and twist the head off. That is the only way to kill them.” Draven leans in for one more kiss, his hand gently tracing its way down Thomas’s face to his chest. Pulling away for the last time, Draven gives Thomas a broken smile. “I’ll miss you and be thinking of you all the time.” Thomas squeezes Draven’s hand. “I’ll be thinking of you. Please be safe for me.” Draven nods, picks up his sword and heads to his family’s mansion.

Once there, Draven has a quick visit with his parents before going to meet with his grandfather. When he enters the room, Draven notices how gaunt and pale Ray looks. “Hello, grandson! Come, tell me how things are at the front. I have missed you.” Draven gives Ray a hug, kissing him on the cheek. “Luna has been helping me every step of the way, grandfather. If it weren't for her, I don’t know how I would be alive right now. How are you?” Ray shrugs “As fine as I can be. That bite almost killed me. If it weren’t for the skills of Mikey and Sonny, I wouldn’t be here right now.”

The two talk strategies and catch up until Draven hears Bobby calling for him. “Another wave is arriving. Hurry!” Draven stands up and hugs Ray. “I must go; the fighting is starting again. I will keep in touch. Love you.” Ray tells Draven he loves him and Draven heads for the front.

Damian pulls Adam aside. “I can’t take much more of this, Ad! You must have sex with Tommy! I will make sure the two of you conceive…” Adam brushes off Damian’s hand. “She hasn’t slept with either of us since she had the baby, Dam. What makes you think that she will want to have sex with me?” Damian gives Adam a smirk. “Just approach her, I will do the rest! Please, Ad! She will be so happy to find out that she is carrying your baby! I’m begging you, help me help her.” Adam sighs as if he is heading off to war instead of having sex with his mate. “Alright, alright! I’ll head to our room now.” Damian gives Adam a fierce kiss, his hand brushing through Adam’s hair. “I’ll be visiting Gee. Don’t worry, I’ll take care of everything.” Adam shakes his head and heads off towards their bedroom.

Gee opens the door to find Damian standing in the hall. “Mind some company? I’ve been kicked out of my own bed for the night.” Gee laughs at Damian, moving out of the way to allow him into their suite. “Are you fighting with Tommy and Adam again, Dam?” Damian gives Gee a smirk in return. “No, they are having sex, and for once there is no room for me.” The two curl up on the couch while Damian fills Gee in on his plan. “I set the plan in motion, the two just need time to conceive another baby. The last thing they need is me standing over them while they have sex. I’m not in the mood for a threesome tonight.” Gee leans over, her hand brushing Damian’s chest. “Then what are you in the mood for?” Damian pulls Gee closer, his hand cupping Gee’s face. “You, darling. Just you.”

Adam enters his bedroom to find Tommy already laying down on their bed. Adam walks over and gingerly sits down on the bed next to Tommy. “Hello, glitterbaby. I’ve been thinking of you all day. How are you?” Tommy links her fingers with Adam’s. “I’m sad, Ad. I can’t seem to get over this sadness. I wish I could find a way to make it all better.” Adam leans down and captures Tommy’s lips in a fiery kiss. Pulling back, Adam says in a deep, sexy voice “I know something to take your mind off of it…”

Tommy initially fights Adam, pushing back against him. After a pause, Tommy begins to give in, returning Adam’s kisses, pulling him closer to her until Adam is lying on top of her. Their kisses grow more passionate, their hands fumbling as they frantically remove clothes. When they are both naked, Adam leans down over Tommy, whispering in her ear “I want you, glitterbaby. I want to fill you up, to make you mine.” Tommy spreads her legs, pulling Adam until he is once again lying on top of her. “Take me, babyboy. Make me yours.”

Their lovemaking seems to go on forever. Tommy cries tears of happiness as Adam’s come fills her, somehow knowing that she is now carrying his baby. Adam pulls her close, covering every inch of her with kisses, a secret smile on his lips. His baby doll is now carrying his baby, and he couldn’t be happier.

Thomas leads the charge as the jackals attack his castle. He can hear the struggle behind him, hears some of his men screaming as they are murdered by the enemy. Thomas hears a voice in his ear, one he has never heard before. “Surrender to me, Thomas, and the jackals will leave your realm, never to return. Save your men, save your family—surrender yourself to me.” Just then, Thomas sees his little brother, barely big enough to drag a sword, heading towards the head of the front line. He must act fast.

“I will surrender to you, if you will only make them leave first.”

The jackals disappear. Thomas’s chest rattles with a deep sigh of relief. He turns to his father and says, “You are in charge of the realm, until I return.”
Thomas disappears.

He arrives in the same chamber that Damian visits Andre in. Wandering around, looking at all the torture devices, fear begins to take over. Is he now captive to the same bastard that raped Draven?

“How intelligent you are, Thomas. No wonder Draven is attracted to you. Brains and a nice body as well! He is a lucky boy.” Andre steps forward, running his hand down Thomas’s chest. “My name is Andre. And yes, I am the owner of Draven’s father Damian, as well as the one who took Draven’s virginity. I understand the two of you are a couple now. So, I figure, why not sample the wares, see if you are worthy for such a fine creature as Draven. If you are worthwhile, I may even place you into my collection.” Fear shoots down Thomas’s spine. What if he never gets to see Draven again?

“Take your clothes off, boy. Let’s see what you really have under there.” Thomas, ever stubborn, crosses his arms across his chest, his chin jutting forward. Andre laughs. “If I can make Damian and Draven do whatever I wish, what makes you think that I couldn’t make you do as I wish as well? Undress, Thomas.”

Feeling his willpower fading, Thomas does as Andre asks. Andre runs his hands over Thomas’s body, whispering “Nice! But this really should be shared, don’t you think?” Andre blinks and Draven appears, chained to the wall across from them. Draven begins to yell his frustration at Andre. “Let him go! Take me in his place!” Andre laughs again, this time louder. “I’ve already had you, little boy. And while you were worthwhile, I think I’d rather have this delicious young man. Thomas, to the table. That way, you and your lover can make eye contact while I fuck your brains out.” Thomas circles the table, standing behind it. “Bend over. Spread your legs.” Thomas obeys, his eyes locking on Draven’s, fear on his face.

Andre spends the next four hours raping Thomas. Tears continuously flow down Draven’s face, his inability to rescue his love making him feel like a failure. Now he knows how his father felt when Andre was raping him.

Andre raises his head, a sly smile crossing his face. “Come here, Draven.” The chains holding Draven prisoner open. Draven feels himself moving against his will, stopping next to Andre who abruptly pulls out of Thomas. “I’d like to witness your first time together, Draven.” Andre blinks and Draven’s clothes disappear. “Rape him, Draven. Make him yours.” Draven’s feet move on their own accord, bringing him to stand behind Thomas, who begs Draven not to hurt him. “Please, baby. Please do not hurt me.” Draven places his hands on Thomas’s hips, leaning forward until his dick slides into his love. Draven snaps his hips and fucks deep into Thomas, who cries out at the intrusion. Draven, tears continuing to run down his face, says “Please forgive me, Thomas. I’m so sorry. Please, don’t stop wanting or loving me. Please, I’m begging you…”

Draven fucks Thomas until Andre gives him the go ahead to stop hours later. Thomas is now shaking from head to toe, his tears long dried. Draven pulls out, stepping back from his love. Andre says “Very good, Draven. Now make him clean you off. I want to see how good he is at deep throating.” Draven makes his way around the table, placing a hand on Thomas’s chin and pulling up. Their eyes meet as Thomas opens his mouth, accepting Draven.

“What an obedient boy! I bet his throat is nice and tight. Maybe I should give it a shot myself…” Draven turns to Andre, murder in his eyes. “You’ve done enough to hurt him! Set him free! Keep me in his place!” Andre laughs “Like father, like son. Damian is always begging me to hurt him instead of someone else.” When Draven comes down Thomas’s throat, he pulls out. Andre says “Wall, Draven.” Draven returns to the wall, the chains tight around his wrists again. “I release you, Thomas. Put your clothes on, then kiss your little boy goodbye. You may return home. I can’t wait to see what your reunion will be like, knowing that the boy you love has just raped you. Go now.” Thomas walks over to Draven, his eyes on the floor. Without a word, he places a kiss on Draven’s cheek, turning towards Andre. “May I leave, Andre?” Andre laughs, then waves his hand in the air. Thomas disappears.

Andre walks over to Draven, a grin on his face. “Seems like there is trouble in paradise! I made sure that he will continue to feel everything that we have done to him. I want the memory of this day to live in him, such as the memory of your rape is alive in you. So much for your relationship, little boy.” Andre dresses Draven again, then releases him. “You are more fun when you are free, Draven. Till we meet again.” Andre waves his hand and Draven ends up in Thomas’s suite. Thomas is curled up in a blanket on his couch, tears coursing down his face.

“Thomas? I’m sure you do not want me here. Andre sent me to you. I’m sure this is all a big joke to him, but you mean the world to me. The last thing I want is for…”

Thomas cuts Draven off with “Please, can you just leave me? I want to be alone.”

Draven panics. “Please, Thomas, please do not turn against me. I’m so sorry that I hurt you, I had no control over…”

“PLEASE, DRAVEN! Just leave me be. I just want to be alone. Can’t you understand? LEAVE ME ALONE!”

Draven quietly says “All you need to do is say my name out loud, and I will be here. I love you, Thomas. Please remember that.” Draven takes one final look at his broken lover and heads towards the front lines.

Luna arrives at the mansion’s library, scaring Tommy who is standing on a ladder, trying to reach a book on the top shelf. Luna grabs onto her legs so she doesn’t fall. “Careful! The last thing you need is to lose that baby, Tommy Joe.” Tommy grabs the book and carefully climbs down. “You scared me, Luna! I didn’t expect you to arrive so unexpectedly! I’m glad you are here. Is there something you need from me?” Luna rubs her hand over Tommy’s stomach. “No, little mama. I came to see Ray. I understand he is feeling unwell.” Tommy gives Luna a quick hug. “I believe he is in his office. That’s where he spends most of his days lately.” As Luna turns to leave, she says over her shoulder “The baby in Andre’s custody? He will be strong, he will grow up to be just like his mama, not a bit of Andre in him. He will return to you one day. Keep your arms ready to hold him, Tommy Joe. You will be his mother again before you know it.” Luna leaves a happy Tommy behind her, heading to Ray’s office.

Ray tries to stand when Luna arrives, but she pushes him back down into his chair. “Save your strength, son. You are needed once again at the front lines. I am here to help you.” Luna places her hand on Ray’s forehead, pressing lightly. A bright light surrounds Ray, filling him with energy. When Ray is healed, Luna sits down in a chair opposite him.

“Your family is doing well in battle. Draven is proving himself to be a wonderful general. I’m glad that the other realms have decided to fight with you. Now if we can only find a way to defeat Andre, this entire nightmare would be over. Has Sonny found any more magick?”

Ray nods his head. “Yes, he has found an amazing amount of healing magick, which has helped our family. He told me that he has found other types, but he is being tight lipped about them. I think he’s afraid that Andre will find out what he is truly capable of and exploit it. Mikey has been conducting her own searches as well.”

Luna looks deep into Ray’s eyes. “You are afraid that you will lose your family to that monster. I can tell you that you will lose more than you keep in the long run, that the mourning will run deep. But this family will survive in one form or another. Keep this in mind in the coming months.” Ray asks “What about Draven? Will he survive to run the cosmos? Will he lead the next generation of the family?” Luna gives Ray a grim smile. “He will lose much in the end as well, but he will stand strong. He will be the hero of this story.” Ray nods, sadness taking over him. “I wish this war was over! This waiting is abhorrent. I would do anything to bring things to a close.” Luna pats Ray’s hand. “Now, I must go, I have another stop to make. I’m glad you are feeling better, Ray. Please be careful from now on.” Ray kisses Luna’s cheek and, thanking her, watches her leave.

Luna arrives in Thomas’s suite to find him still wrapped in a blanket, staring at the fire in the fireplace. Luna taps her cane on the floor. “Young man, my name is Luna. I am the witch who is protecting Draven. I’ve come to help you.” Luna walks over to Thomas, sitting down on the couch next to him. She runs her hand over Thomas’s forehead, then concentrates a moment. Opening her eyes once more, she turns to Thomas, who stares at her with wide eyes. “I’ve taken your memories of that horrible experience away from you, taken the physical pain away. I have instead left you with memories of Draven, good ones filled with love. The fact that you were raped will never go away, but I have done my very best to make everything more manageable. Andre made Draven hurt you, he would never do such a thing on his own. He loves you. Please keep this in mind in the future.”

Thomas quietly thanks Luna. “I know that Draven loves me, I love him too. I just needed some time to adjust to what has happened to me. Thank you for making things easier to deal with. I have questions for you, Luna.” Thomas wipes his eyes, then leans over to take Luna’s hand. “Will Draven survive the war? Will he take over the cosmos when all is said and done?”

Luna squeezes Thomas’s hand. “Draven will indeed survive the war. As far as taking over the cosmos, who knows? It all depends on who wins in the end. The end is too fuzzy for even me to make out. We will all have to experience it together to get the answer. I wish I could tell you that everyone will survive, but I cannot. But I do see much love between the two of you. Hold onto that, Thomas. Draven will need to lean on you heavily before this war is over.” With that, Luna leans over and kisses Thomas on the cheek, leaving him alone.

Thomas says Draven’s name out loud, and Draven arrives just as he promised he would. Thomas reaches out his hand towards Draven as he says “Luna visited me. She took away my memories, made me physically well. She told me that you love me.” Draven sits down next to Thomas, taking both his hands in his. “I’m sorry I hurt you. I would never do that on my own! I love and adore you too much to let anything happen to you like that. Please believe me…” Thomas hushes Draven with a kiss. “I want to put it all behind me, Draven. Can the front lines spare you for a bit? I want to spend time with you.” Draven nods. “Things are peaceful for the moment. I can spend time with you.” Draven curls up under the blanket with Thomas, holding his hand. After a while Draven says “I want you to meet my family. I have told them all about you, and they want to meet you.” Thomas nods. “I want to meet them, too. I look forward to it.” Draven’s face lights up. “Why don’t we head there now?”

Upon arrival, Ray ends up speaking to Thomas alone, the two of them commiserating about the joys and hardships of leading a realm. Mikey intervenes eventually, pulling Thomas away so the rest of the family can spend a little time with him.

Not surprisingly, Damian grills Thomas the hardest. Tommy walks over to him, placing a hand on his chest. “Sweetheart, leave the poor boy alone!” Damian looks down and gives Tommy a smile. “If he’s joining the family, I want to know everything about him! It’s plain that Draven is in love with him, I just want to make sure that he is the right one for our boy.” Thomas smiles at this. “I promise you, sir, that I will treat Draven right. He has all my love. I will do everything in my power to give him the best life possible.” Tommy caresses Damian’s cheek. “That’s the perfect answer, as far as I’m concerned! We can’t ask for anything better for our son. Now, quit hounding him and let’s have dinner! Thomas, you do eat human food, do you not? Will it bother you to be in a room with vampires drinking blood?” Thomas shakes his head. “No, ma’am, I will be fine. I understand that your children eat human food as well?” Tommy nods in agreement. “They can have either, but they prefer human food, so there’s always plenty in the house.”

The family spends the evening together in the library, laughing and sharing stories. Thomas shares stories of his upbringing, and of those who live in the castle with him. During the middle of the night, Damian excuses himself, heading to his bedroom. Conversation comes to a halt, everyone suddenly looking uncomfortable. Thomas asks Draven what is wrong.

“Andre is calling my father to him. Out of all of us, he suffers the most at the hands of that bastard. I wish I could find a way to save him…” Mikey reaches over, brushing the hair out of Draven’s eyes. “We know, sweetheart. We all wish we could rescue him.” Draven reaches out and takes Mikey’s hand, squeezing tightly. “That bastard will pay, grandmother, I will see to it.”

Damian lays on the floor in his own blood, his voice broken. Andre stands over him, a smirk on his lips as blood flows down the whip in his hand. “Tired, Damian? Did your legs give out on you? I thought you were a big bad vamp. Did the last five hours of fucking wear you out? Should I call for a replacement?” Damian shakes his head no. “There are so many family members that I have yet to meet, Damian. Let’s see…” There is a flash of light and Damian hears “What the fuck? Where the fuck am I?”

Damian squeaks out “Bobby” as he tries to drag himself up off the floor.

Andre dresses, then walks over to where Bobby is hanging on the wall. Looking back at Damian, he says “Now this one I’m going to enjoy!” Bobby spits at Andre, a large glob hitting his cheek. Refusing to wipe his face, Andre backhands Bobby a few times, commenting “The last thing I want to do is fuck you, Bryar. No, you are going to be too much fun to physically destroy.” Without looking back at Damian, Andre calls out “Stand, Damian. Say your goodbyes to your friend. He’s going to be with me for a good long time.”

Damian feels himself suddenly healed, feels clothes cover his body. He walks over to Bobby, sadness showing on his face. “I’ll tell Robbie that you love her, Bobby.” Bobby nods, thanking Damian. “Tell her I’ll be back before she knows it, to take good care of our pups for me.” Damian agrees just in time for Andre to send him home.

“You think you’re a tough bastard. Let’s see how tough you really are.”

Three hours later, Andre calls for his guards. They untie Bobby from the rack, every bone in his body broken, his arms and legs stretched out beyond their capacity. Bobby has knuckle breakers on his fingers, and a Pearl of Anguish down his throat, the sections open as far as they will go. They place his body in the maiden, pushing him hard against the back to ensure that every spike enters his body. Andre takes the doors to the maiden in his hands, laughing at Bobby who is still growling around the pearl in his throat. “Enjoy your time of reflection, Bryar. If you’re a good boy, I won’t send for your wife.” Andre slams both doors shut, Bob’s growl of pain filling the room.

The pups of the family meet in the library. Draven looks at his brother and cousins, content to have all four of them in the same room together. Each of them has been in a different location, leading the charge for the army, with Draven as acting general. “It feels as if it’s been forever since the four of us could meet in the same place. It’s hard to believe that we are all now twenty-one years old!” Anthony laughs. “You’re just happy to drink legally, cousin!” Draven laughs along with him. “I want to thank all three of you for the hard work that you have been putting in, leading your armies. Grandfather is proud of all of us. He says he couldn’t do this without us there to help him.” Michael asks, his face pensive. “Is Grandfather planning to lead the army again? I thought he wanted to focus on his kingly duties…” Draven shakes his head. “No, I take my orders directly from him, he is leading the army, even though now he is doing so from his desk most of the time. With me at the front lines, there is no one here to interact with the other realms except for Grandfather, who has a lot on his plate, that’s for sure.” Gabriel says “I’m surprised that no one else in the family has stepped up to help him. Aunt Gee would be perfect for that role! They are charming and friendly, just what is needed in a diplomatic position such as that.” Anthony supplies “Mother tried, but Grandfather turned them down. He said he can handle everything, but Grandmother isn’t so sure. She is constantly hounding Grandfather to stop being so silly and take on help. Our Grandfather is a stubborn old man.” The other three agree, smiles on their faces.

Anthony then asks “How is your father, Draven? I hear he is called to Andre every night.” Draven’s expression turns sad. “Yeah, he is still in that bastard’s thrall. I wish I could kill him for what he has done to my parents, your father, too.” Just then Ray enters the room. “My oldest Grandsons, all in one place! Are you all plotting against me?” Michael laughs. “Even if we did, you’d still win the day! There’s no one better than you, Grandfather!” Ray gives the four boys a bright smile.
The five of them talk for an hour, discussing strategies and trading stories from the battlefield. Mikey eventually arrives, sitting down next to Ray to give her own battle stories.

Suddenly, a young woman around twenty-five years old enters the room, her long flowing brown hair billowing around her as she walks. She is wearing a long dress with short sleeves, its bright blue reflected in the blue of her eyes that take in the others in the room.

Mikey stares at the girl for a moment before blurting out “Alondra? How…why…” Alondra walks up to her grandparents, giving both hugs and kisses before moving on to her brothers and cousins. “Luna came to see me last night. She is worried that Andre will kidnap Sonny for his powers. She wanted me to age, so I can help the family by using what powers I have. I am to start training with Sonny immediately.” Mikey moves to take Alondra in her arms. “I bet your mother is upset that you are all grown up, sweetheart. I know she was hoping to have at least one child that will grow up naturally. She was hoping that would be you. Dante is already ten years old; I know she must be frustrated.” Alondra nods her head. “Mother screamed when I walked into her room last night. I felt bad, but what is there to do? We are all needed to participate in this war, one way or another. Hopefully the baby that she is carrying will be able to grow up naturally.” Alondra turns back to Mikey, a grimace on her face. “I just hope that I can help the family somehow.”

Ray takes her hand in his. “No worries, darling. There is a place for everyone in this nightmare we are facing. You will find your niche.” Alondra smiles. “As long as I can play a part, I will be happy knowing I’m doing my best for our family.”

Andre calls for Damian, who arrives in Andre’s suite shirtless, his hands behind his back. “You wanted to see me, Andre?” Slowly circling Damian, Andre smirks, a thoughtful expression on his face. “I’ve been thinking, Damian. The two of us will be spending eternity together. Don’t you think that is the perfect reason to get bound to one another?”

Damian looks at Andre as if he has gone completely mad. “Me, bound to you? That is for couples that love each other!” Damian’s mind wanders to Pete and Patrick, who were bound for life as marriage partners before they wed. “The last thing on this cosmos that I am is in love with you! Why would you even think that I would want that?” Andre continues to look at Damian as if he is considering his options. “You want me for a slave, you said so yourself. Slaves are NOT marriage partners! There is no way that the two of us would EVER be a real couple!”

Andre raises a hand to stop Damian’s rambling. “Quiet, Damian. Listen to what I have to say without interrupting me! Hold still.” Damian closes his mouth, a look of panic on his face. Andre reaches out and takes one of Damian’s hands in his, squeezing the palm tightly. “Damimin Ascesdra Yallumin Secuda Allurm Otherra Optum. Belelandra Demoninon Secuda Jerimum Trachum. Unfantum Wereamble Induim.” Damian feels a rush of power run from Andre to him through their clasped hands. Damian opens his mouth, but nothing comes out. He knows what the Vampirese words that Andre has just recited mean. Andre smirks at Damian as he says “Nondra Kelemum Wonrenda Zorem Frankensorum Verbena.” Andre moves towards Damian, taking him in his arms, holding tightly. Andre lowers his head, his fangs bared. Damian feels Andre’s fangs pierce his skin, feels the pressure as he sucks on Damian’s throat. Damian feels his blood leaving the wounds on his neck, feels as if Andre is sucking the very life out of him. He is then too shocked to move when Andre tears open his wrist with his fingernail, placing it between Damian’s lips so he can taste Andre’s blood. A wedding pact sealed forever in blood.

Wed to a monster. For life. The words keep running through Damian’s head, shock taking over his system. A binding such as this is irreversible, it is for life, for eternity. Damian’s thoughts wander back to Tommy and Adam, the loves of his life. Will they understand? Will they turn their backs on him when they learn that he is now bound to his captor? The three of them have never even considered binding, they love each other enough without the old-fashioned vow to prove their love to the cosmos. And now Damian is wed to another.

Andre pulls his fangs out of Damian’s throat, a satisfied snarl filling the room. Damian continues to stand still, tears beginning to flow down his face. “To my bedroom, love. I want to consummate our union.” Damian turns towards the bedroom, a wedded zombie. Andre leads Damian to his bed, Damian’s hand in his.
When Damian is naked, Andre’s nude body hovers over him, Andre says “Speak, love. Let me hear you while I make you mine forever. I free your body for you to hold me close to you, to run your hands over me. Treat me as you would your lovers back home. Pretend I am them.” As Andre enters Damian, he hears Damian moan, feel hands begin to roam all over his body. Andre closes his eyes and pretends that Damian loves him, that what he is feeling is real. He knows that Damian hates him, knows that the only way to make him have sex with him is to rape him. Andre quickens the pace, feels Damian wrap his arms around him in a tight grip, feels his legs wrap around Andre’s middle. He tries to hold on to the feeling of closeness, of the fake affection. He knows that, where Damian is concerned, this is the best he will ever get.

When the act is complete, Andre pulls out of Damian, rolling over onto his back. Damian pauses for a moment before rolling over, gently placing his head down on Andre’s heaving chest. Andre entangles his legs with Damian’s, pulling him even closer to his body. “This sure beat getting the hell kicked out of me” Damian thinks to himself.

As if sensing Damian’s thoughts, Andre laughs. “Don’t get too comfortable, Damian. If you think I’m going to be nice to you in the future, simply because we are wed, you have another thing coming! I am simply being kind because it is our wedding night. Tomorrow I will go back to kicking your ass. So, close your eyes and enjoy the cuddling.”

Andre thinks to himself, it’s too bad that things must be this way. Why can’t Damian want him, the same way he wants Damian? Why must he take what he wants from that gorgeous vamp, instead of being offered what he wants and needs? And most of all, why must he always be alone? He started collecting different species to always have someone else there, someone to fill his time with. Now that he has collected almost every species in the cosmos, he must find a way to fill his time, fill his loneliness.

Damian.

The vamp is perfect for his needs. Damian breaks so beautifully, either below him or chained to a wall. He obeys every command perfectly, regardless of if he is within a thrall or not. He is the perfect mate in every way, even if he must be controlled to get him to cooperate.
Damian is all that he craves.

Andre feels Damian relax, feels his breathing even out as Damian closes his eyes and falls asleep in his arms. Andre wishes that every night could be this way. That is why he took Trick as his own. It is now Trick’s job to fill Andre’s world, fill his time. But deep down inside, Andre knows that he prefers Damian.

As Andre closes his eyes, he dreams of a perfect life with the one he loves. Too bad it will never come true…

Damian opens his eyes to find Tommy and Adam making out in the bed next to him. He stares at them for a moment before rising off the bed, mumbling an excuse as he makes his way out of the room and down the hall to the library. Once there, he heads to the Dark realm in search of Mikey.

“Place him in the dungeon. If he refuses to fight in battle, he will forfeit his life. His demise is at noon tomorrow.” Damian watches as Mikey carries out her duties, looking regal on the throne. When her eyes lock onto Damian’s, she calls out “Is there anything else for today?” When she receives silence to her question, she stands. “You are all dismissed. We shall meet again tomorrow.” The crowd disperses as Damian makes his way towards the throne, bowing low before Mikey. “My Queen! Do you have a moment?” Mikey smiles at Damian, taking his hand and leading him towards her private suite. “For you, I have the world, Dam. I’m so glad you came to visit, even though it is plain to see that you need me for something. What is it?”

When they arrive at Mikey’s private chambers, Damian begins to pace the floor. “I…cannot believe that I have to say this out loud, it just doesn’t seem possible!” Damian looks at Mikey, who makes a hand gesture telling him to continue. “Last night I was called to Andre, the same as every single night. When I arrived, he seemed different, lost in thought. He was almost kind to me. Then he told me that I was to be bound to him! Can you believe it, ME bound to HIM? I thought he was joking but he was serious. He told me to stand still, to be silent. I struggled to no end, trying to fight against what he was going to do. And then he recited the binding ritual! He sank his fangs in me and drank my blood, making me taste his blood, linking me to him for ETERNITY! Mikey, I’m now his—mind, body and soul! He then took me to his bed and made love to me, as gentle as if I were his loving bride!” Mikey takes in this information silently, a shocked expression on her face. “He told me that he was only nice to me because it was our wedding night, that he will go back to treating me like shit tonight.” Damian stops pacing, turning back to Mikey. “What am I going to do? I can’t tell TJ and Ad, they will wig the fuck out! I’m not even bound to them, for fucking sake! How can I tell the ones that I love that I am bound to that MONSTER for ETERNITY?”

Mikey reaches out her arms towards Damian, who practically runs into them. She rocks Damian’s head on her chest, whispering to him, trying to calm him down. “Dam, the boys love you! They will understand! They will not hold it against you. They will love you regardless of what has happened. There is nothing that can tear you away from the boys, they are yours forever.”

Damian pulls back, tear tracks on his face. “Mikey, why me? Why is he obsessed with me? Why can’t he just leave me alone? I just want things to go back to the way they were before this nightmare began. I want the family whole, I want my mates, I want to be LEFT ALONE! I’m so tired of being called to his chamber every night and RAPED!” Mikey runs her fingers through Damian’s hair, kissing him. “I know, baby, and I wish I could wave my hand and make things better for you! I’m sorry that that bastard has been focusing his hatred of the family on you. I would give everything to stop this nightmare, and I know that the others feel the same way.” Mikey pulls back, looking deep into Damian’s eyes. “Why don’t you go home, tell them what happened? You need to get it off your chest. Trust your mates, they will be there for you.”

After another twenty minutes, Damian gives Mikey a hug. “Thanks for being here for me, and for listening. You are always there for me, and I am grateful. I love you.” Mikey answers “I love you too, Dam. Let me know what happens…”

Damian arrives back in his bedroom to find Tommy and Adam in the middle of having sex. Damian sits on the side of the bed, watching intently. Tommy reaches out and takes one of his hands in hers, holding on tightly.

When the two are finally finished and have pulled apart, Damian leans in and kisses them both. Adam, ever watchful, pulls back and says, “What’s wrong, Dam?” Damian quietly says “The last thing I want is to ruin the moment, Ad. I’ll tell you later.”

“Nonsense! We want to hear what is on your mind. Has something happened?” Tears once again fill Damian’s eyes. “I feel like such a failure!” Damian then goes on to explain what happened during his time with Andre. “I…don’t want him! I tried to stop it, but I couldn’t! I just stood there like a fool while he made me his bride! I only want to belong to the two of you for eternity, not that bastard! Now I have a vow that I cannot break, I’m stuck belonging to him and there is no way out of it! I’m so sorry…”

Tommy wraps her arms around Dam, pulling him down on her pregnant body. Adam wraps his arms around the two of them, blanketing them. They stay that way for a while before Adam whispers “It doesn’t matter, Dam. We still belong to each other, always will, no matter what. You are our mate; you are ours for the rest of eternity. He may think he owns you, but he is wrong. We love you, never forget that.” Tommy agrees with Adam. “You will always be a part of us, no matter what happens. We love you, darling.” Damian agrees with them, mumbling his love and devotion to his two mates that he loves more than life itself. When they separate, Damian rubs Tommy’s stomach, watching the pups respond to his touch. “Two this time! What a blessing! This family is growing so quickly! Pretty soon, our pups will be having pups of their own!” Tommy laughs “Grandpas and grandma, surrounded by pups! I hope the family survives to see the day.”

In his suite, Andre sneers, jealousy and possessiveness taking over him. Those assholes think that Damian belongs to them? Damian is HIS, no one else’s! He will just have to find a way to make them understand that…

Chapter Text

Trick wanders through the empty halls of Andre’s coliseum. She cannot sleep. Nightmare after nightmare wakes her from her slumber, pulling her from her bed. She dreams of Pete and Damian, their bloody bodies strewn across the yard of the mansion, Andre standing over them, his laughter scaring the birds in the trees. Her nightmares are filled with visions of Andre taking her, filling her and making her pregnant with his sons.

A guard nods to her as she passes through the doorway to the kitchen. “I just filled the refrigerator with blood bags.” Trick smiles, making her thanks to the only guard nice enough to speak to her, to inquire on her health on a regular basis. “That’s kind of you. Have a nice night.” The guard nods at her, leaving her alone.

As she reaches into the refrigerator to grab a bag, the voice that she has long dreaded to hear fills the room.

“Hello, Trick.”

Trick straightens up and turns to see Andre standing in the doorway to the room, clad only in his jeans. “Why does he have to be so handsome?” crosses Trick’s mind. “If only he were ugly…” Nodding, Trick answers “Good evening, Andre. Would you care for a blood bag?” Andre shakes his head. “Gather what you need, Trick, and come with me.” Trick does as Andre asks, tensing as he places an arm around her as she passes him. “And how are you on this fine evening, darling?” Trick nods her head. “I am well, Andre. How are you?”

When they reach Andre’s suite, Andre directs Trick to sit on his couch. “I am wondering why you have yet to get pregnant, dear Trick. Damian isn’t the only one who can manage to get a lady pregnant! But it seems that the two of us have yet to create another life, and that is frustrating me. Tell me, dear…” Andre takes one of Trick’s hands in his, squeezing tightly “…you do not know any of that magick that is floating around your family which could keep you from reproducing? Because if I find out that you are scheming against me…”

“Me, scheme against you? Why would I do that? You’re the one holding my son hostage, why would I do anything that would chance his safety?” Andre puts up both hands in front of him, showing his protest. “Trick! Your son isn’t my hostage! He is here so you may raise him! Would you I rather send him to live with his father? Damian has more than enough children, he doesn’t need to be bothered with another! No dearest, your son is only here for your comfort and pleasure. If you tell me that you are not scheming against me, then I must believe you. We must simply spend more time working on conceiving…” Andre nods towards the blood bags on the table. “Finish your meal, darling, so we can spend this evening in each other’s arms. You are the highlight of my day, Trick.” Trick slowly picks up a blood bag, opening it. As she takes sips of blood, she asks Andre questions. “Tell me, how is my husband? And Damian? Are they here?” Andre plays with Trick’s hair as he answers “They are both well, Trick. No, they are not here. Damian is fighting at the front lines, your husband is crying in his bed, missing you. How did you ever manage to marry such a waste of space, darling? He isn’t worthy of you.” Trick tries her hardest to keep her temper. This happens every time Andre speaks of Pete, resorting to calling him all kinds of names. “The family doesn’t even want Pete at the front lines, they’re afraid that he will end up losing the war for everyone. The only thing that bastard is good for is playing bass…”

“Stop it! Pete is a good vamp. He is kind and loving! He was a soldier in the Dark realm, he knows how to fight! He has been to the front lines with Ray more times than you know! You don’t know him so you cannot judge him!”

“Darling, I’m simply stating what I know of the vamp! If you say he is worthwhile, then he must be! You would never wed a loser. And as far as Damian is concerned, you know how much I desire that vamp! He is delicious in every way! Did you hear the news? Damian and I are now bound for life! That sweet boy belongs to me for eternity now!” Trick drops the blood bag she’s drinking from in shock. “What? But what about Tommy and Adam? They are mates! You can’t separate them, there will be consequences if you do…” Andre cuts her off with “Nonsense! The three of them are not bound together! They simply live together! No, Damian is mine, body and soul, for all eternity.” Noticing the empty blood bags piled on the table, Andre stands. “Time for the two of us to enjoy the rest of the evening, darling. This way…” Trick stands, placing her hand in Andre’s, holding her breath as the two of them head to Andre’s bedroom.

Almost three hours later, Andre tucks pillows under Trick’s bottom, lifting it off the bed. ”I need to do my best to knock you up, darling. Just lay still and think good thoughts. All will be well.” Andre gently strokes Trick’s lower limbs, trying to keep her calm.

Ten minutes later a guard bursts into the room. “Sir, the werewolf in 3B has escaped again! This time he made it out of the building. I sent guards into the countryside to look for him.” The guard gives a bow and leaves.

Andre’s hand tightens on Trick’s thigh. “That bastard! This time he will pay with his life! How dare he escape me!” Trick, scared for her own life, pats Andre’s hand. “All will be well, Andre. Maybe it is for the best that Frankie is gone. He is nothing but trouble to you…” Andre leans over Trick, his fangs bared. “NO ONE ESCAPES ME AND LIVES TO TELL THE TALE, LITTLE BITCH! HE WILL DIE FOR DISOBEYING ME! YOU WOULD DO WELL TO KEEP THAT IN MIND…” Andre stands, yanking the pillow out from under Trick. “TO YOUR ROOM, NOW!” Trick scrambles to move quickly off the bed. Grabbing her clothes, she hurries past Andre and back to her rooms, terror covering her features. She hopes she conceives soon, so she will never have to see this side of Andre again…

“Why the fuck did you call for me to come here, Mikey? You know that I’m a wanted were! The last thing I can do is go home, and I shouldn’t be here! Andre will attack your realm simply for taking me in! I don’t want that bastard attacking you again because of me…” Mikey brushes the hair out of Frankie’s eyes. “My realm can handle any attack from that shithead! Now, will you PLEASE lie face down on the bed so I can heal your back…” Frankie protests but lies down as Mikey asks him to, groaning as he moves.

After a few minutes Mikey’s curses fill the air. “Let me call for Sonny. Your back has a spell on it, I cannot heal it. Maybe he can.” Sonny appears behind Mikey, his face concerned. “Hey Frank, Mikey. Let me see what I can do.” Sonny examines Frank, who whines when Sonny touches him. After trying a few spells, Sonny says to Mikey “Chant with me, please Mikey.” The two of them chant a spell together, and skin begins to appear on Frank’s back.

Twenty minutes later, the two step back from a healed Frankie, who stands up and hugs them in turn. “Thank you! Now I really must get out of here! I will find someplace secluded to hide.” Frank takes Sonny’s hand in his. “Please, Sonny, tell Gee what has happened. Tell her I love her and the boys, that I will try to contact her in the future but for now it isn’t safe. I love all of you, but I won’t let you suffer because of me.” Frank kisses both Mikey and Sonny on the cheek, then disappears.

Tommy waddles down the hall to her bedroom. She cannot see her feet, she has grown so large over time, larger than she has ever been while pregnant. She can feel the twins kicking inside of her as she walks, a smile on her face.

Two cradles are set up in the bedroom, the rest of the supplies piled up in the back of the room. Tommy is prepared to take care of the twins from this very room, always keeping them close to their mommy and their daddies.

Both Damian and Adam are fighting at the front. Tommy lies down on the bed, taking a rest before they come home. She grows tired easier these days, two weeks away from giving birth. As she closes her eyes, she feels a shift in the air, feels the room grow colder.

“Hello, Tommy Joe.”

Tommy opens her eyes to find Andre standing at the foot of her bed. Terror takes over her, her hands encircling her stomach as if to protect her children from the bastard who has been torturing her family for so long.

“Aaaandre! What are you doing here? Are you looking for Damian?”

Andre walks over to the side of the bed, his hand reaching out to gently stroke Tommy’s stomach. “No, I’m looking for Frank. Little did I know that I would end up in your bedroom! How are the babies, Tommy? When are you due?” Tommy stutters out “Innn two weeks. They are fine, thank youuuu.” Andre looks around the bedroom as if expecting someone to suddenly arrive. “So, this is the room that you share with Damian and Adam? I can smell Damian on the sheets, his scent is strong in this bed. So, this is where he lays when I send him to me.” Tommy nods cautiously. “Yes, this is our room. I have laid near Damian many nights while you have kept him in thrall.”

Andre smiles at Tommy, removing his hand. “Relax, dearie. I have no intention to hurt you. But I will search this mansion top to bottom to find that prick werewolf that belongs to me. Good evening, dear Tommy.” Andre turns and leaves a shocked Tommy on her bed.

Andre searches his way through the mansion until he literally runs into Gee in the hallway on her way to the kitchen. Andre takes one of her hands in his, placing a kiss to the back of it. “Well, if it isn’t Gerard! I’ve heard so much about you! You wouldn’t be hiding your husband in your rooms, would you now, little one? I’m in search of him…” Gee’s face turns pale. “Why are you looking for him here, Andre? He hasn’t turned up at all.” Andre peers into Gee’s eyes, as if looking for the truth. “Still, I will search your rooms, and those of your children. I will leave no stone unturned until Frank is back where he belongs!” Anger takes over Gee, who says “He belongs HERE with ME, Andre!” Turning towards Gee’s suite, Andre laughs. “Not quite, darling.”

After searching the upper floors of the mansion, Andre arrives at Ray’s office on the first floor. He finds Ray sitting behind his desk, talking on his phone which he hangs up the second Andre enters. “Hello, Ray! Remember me? I’m Andre, the vamp that has caused so much trouble for your family these past years. I’ve held quite a few members of your family as guests in my chambers. Maybe you should be my next guest? I understand that your wife found it quite entertaining…” Ray stands, his rage showing through his stance as he snarls out “What the fuck are you doing in my home, asshole? If you are looking for Frankie, he isn’t here.” Andre laughs at Ray. “How welcoming you are, Ray! If I were you, I’d be careful how you address me. I’m the one here with all the powers…”

Seconds later Ray finds himself chained to a wall in Andre’s chambers. Ray panics—that bastard is still there, in his home, while Ray is held captive! How can he protect his family now?

Andre finishes his search of the mansion and then arrives back at his chambers. Once there, he waves his arms open wide as he smiles at Ray. “Welcome to MY home, Ray! You will find it less comfortable than your own. I envy you! You have a beautiful mansion filled with people who love you. You are a lucky vamp! I’m sure that they will all miss you while you are here with me.” A look of fear crosses Ray’s face. “Now Ray, I invited you here so you can become familiar with the way I operate. Beyond those doors are creatures from every realm, from across the cosmos. Some of them I have torn apart, some are whole. Those that I dismantled; I keep their parts in a special part of my cabinet of curiosities that I call the ‘collection.’ Frank’s pelt is there, along with vampire fangs, orge’s claws, etcetera. If you are a good boy, I’ll take you for a tour.” Ray sneers at Andre. “You are a madman! So many have suffered at your hands. Do you intend to destroy me as well?” Andre smirks back at Ray. “As I told Damian, you have nothing to worry about—I’ve my share of vampire fangs.” Andre runs his hands over Ray’s raised arms. “No dear, I’ve brought you here for an entirely different reason. But before I tell you all about it, it’s time for Damian’s nightly visit! At least you won’t be lonely, Ray.”

Damian suddenly appears in front of both vamps, covered in blood. Andre wrinkles up his nose at the sight. “Must you always arrive so dirty, Damian?” Andre waves his hand, and the blood disappears, as do Damian’s clothes. Damian adverts his eyes, his cheeks pink with embarrassment. “Oh, stop being so shy, Damian! I’m sure Ray has always wanted to know what you look like naked! You are a beautiful vamp; we all want you.” Andre moves forward, sinking his hand into Damian’s hair and pulling his head back. “Kneel in the center of the room, face the maiden.” Damian does as Andre instructs; his full attention focused on the maiden.

Andre walks over to the maiden and opens both doors. Bobby comes into view, his body sagging in the maiden, the pear of anguish in his throat threatening to burst through his neck as he growls loudly. Ray calls out to him, his voice sounding broken with emotion. Andre takes the knuckle breakers off Bobby’s hands before removing the pear. Bob growls again, his own voice broken as he calls out to Ray and Damian.

Andre turns towards Ray and Damian, his shoulders shrugging as he says “In the beginning, I wanted to torture Bryar within an inch of his life, but I grew bored with the idea. This one has too much of a stubborn streak in him. There is nothing that I desire from him, he isn’t like other members of your family whose gifts I could collect. No, there is nothing that I need from him, so the two of you get to witness what comes next.” Andre turns back to the maiden, his hand raised in the air. Bobby’s body floats off the spikes, his broken body coming to a stop a foot away from Damian, sinking to his knees. Andre holds Bob’s body upright by taking ahold of one of his shoulders. Looking into Bobby’s eyes, Andre says “Say goodbye, Bryar.”

Bobby makes eye contact, first with Damian and then with Ray. He calls out, his voice barely above a whisper “Tell my Robbie and my children I love them.” A sword suddenly appears in Andre’s hand, and in the next second he swings the sword as hard as he can, decapitating Bobby, his head bouncing on the floor. Blood flows from the stump of Bobby’s neck, flowing over to where Damian is on bended knee, the blood turning his knees red. Bobby’s headless body sags to the floor. Tears fill both Ray’s and Damian’s eyes, both with a shocked look on their faces as their screams fill the air. Andre waves a hand and Bobby’s body disappears. He picks up Bobby’s head, setting it on a table in the corner of the room.

As if nothing happened, Andre then walks over to Ray, staring deep into his eyes. “Interesting! How have you managed to keep your secret for so long, Ray?” Still in shock, Ray gives Andre a confused look. “What depth of lust you have carried around with you all this time!” Ray gives a shrug as he answers “You bastard, I have no idea what you are talking about! I have no secrets!” Andre throws back his head and laughs. “So, Damian has known all this time how much you lust over him? How much you want him under you, how you have always wanted to fuck him while Mikey watched?” Ray’s face begins to turn bright red, his eyes staring at the floor even as he chokes out denials. Andre walks back to Damian, a look of glee on this face. “Your long-time friend has always lusted over you, Damian! What say we make his dream come true?” Damian begins to beg Andre “Please! Don’t make him! I’ll do whatever you ask but leave Ray alone! The last thing I want is for you to ruin our relationship! Please, Andre!” Andre turns to Ray. “Open.” The locks holding Ray open, the chains falling away. “Walk over here, Ray. Kneel behind Damian. Damian, on all fours.” Ray’s clothes disappear as he does as Andre commands. Andre pulls Ray’s head up by the chin, a smirk on his face. “I’m about to make your dreams come true. I want you to fuck Damian while I watch. Enjoy yourself, Ray.”

Ray grabs Damian by the hips as he lines up behind him. Damian calls out “NO, RAY! PLEASE DON’T…” Ray pushes forward, shoving his dick deep inside of Damian, who screams in pain. As Ray begins to slam himself into Damian he cries out “I’m sorry, Dam! I’m so sorry.” Andre sits down on a chair in the corner of the room, calling out “Fuck him good, Ray! Enjoy yourself!”

Mikey appears next to Ray and Damian, a shocked look on her face. Andre calls out “Mikey! I thought you would like to make Ray’s dream come true! He has always dreamed of taking Damian while you watch. Here, come sit next to me and enjoy the show.” Mikey ignores Andre, turning her head towards Ray and Damian. “Ray, pull out of him! Leave him alone!” Ray looks over his shoulder and says “I’m trying to, Mikey, but he has me in thrall! I can’t stop…” Andre stands, taking Mikey by the shoulders and slamming her down on a chair before sitting next to her. “You are a willful one, Mikey. Follow my instructions and no one will get hurt. Well…” Andre smirks “…no more than necessary.”

Time goes by. Ray fills Damian over and over until there is a puddle growing below him. Andre carries out a conversation with Mikey as if the other two are not having sex just a few feet away. “How many members are in the Vampaire, Mikey? I thought it was an elite group, not a standing army! Or are they simply bodyguards?”

“You think I’ll answer your questions? You know more than enough about the running of my realm already, why do you think I’d fill you in on the rest? It’s just a ploy to get me to give away something important. I’m not that stupid, Andre!” Andre laughs, his face lighting up with enjoyment. “You really are something, Mikey! So, how have you enjoyed our afternoon entertainment? Your husband certainly enjoyed himself!” Mikey gives Andre side eye. “Why are you being so kind to me, Andre, especially after just killing Bobby.” Andre’s face suddenly becomes unreadable. “Bryar was just a waste of space, Mikey. An uncouth vampire, to be sure. Not sophisticated, not like us. Even though you have always managed to frustrate me in some fashion, I know you and your family are high class, such as myself. The cosmos is filled with such classless individuals, those who will come under my leadership eventually. Your family is the key. If I can only manage to bring your family under my management, the rest of the cosmos will fall in line.” Echoing Ray, Mikey responds with “You’re a mad man, Andre. Our family will never give into you, we will fight you till the end.” Andre, with a flick of his wrist towards Bobby’s severed head comments “Looks like it won’t take much, Mikey. I merely keep you all alive so I can play with you for my own amusement. Ray!” Ray turns his head towards Andre, never ceasing his movements. “Stop now. Pull out and have Damian clean you off with his mouth. Fuck his throat. You might as well enjoy him thoroughly.” Ray does as Andre instructs, circling in front of Damian and taking his chin in hand. Damian, lifting his head with a sad look on his face, opens his mouth. Ray sinks his cock down into Damian’s throat, moaning loudly. The sounds cause Andre to laugh. “I love when I force someone to do things they wouldn’t normally do! It’s so much fun!”

Ray comes down Damian’s throat three times before Andre commands him to stop. “Well, it’s been fun hanging out with the three of you, but it’s my turn with Damian.” Ray’s clothes appear, his face burning with shame. Andre waves a hand in the air and the two vamps disappear.

Andre walks over to Damian. “You did well, Damian. Now it’s my turn.” Damian whimpers as Andre circles around him, a smirk appearing on his face.

“One more moment, sweetheart” Adam says, Tommy’s hand tightly holding his. Sonny reaches into Tommy’s incision, wiggling his fingers until he finds the pup waiting to be born. Sonny pulls the pup out, laying it on a towel and passing the pup to Tommy. Adam gives a growl of approval as the pup opens its eyes, beginning to mewl softly. Tommy lowers her head and licks the pup clean, her soft growls echoed by the pup in her arms. When a sharp pain eventually makes itself known, Tommy hands over the little girl to her father, who talks softly to the pup while holding one of its paws between his fingers.

Tommy moans as the pains come faster and faster, the second pup moving downwards within the contractions to be born. Sonny reaches for the second pup, pulls it out of Tommy and repeating the process of placing the pup on Tommy’s chest, then closing the incision on Tommy’s lower left side.

Tommy cleans this pup as well. A boy and a girl, both healthy and strong like their father. Tommy is so proud, so happy. She makes eye contact with Adam, sees the same pride and happiness that is mirrored on her face. It’s about time that the two of them had more pups!

Sonny finishes sewing Tommy up. After spending a few minutes with the happy couple, he quietly leaves the four of them alone.

A flash of light fills the room.

Andre stands at the bottom of their bed. Tommy whimpers as she stares at Andre, asking “What do you want?”

Andre walks up to stand opposite of Adam on the other side of the bed. “I’m intrigued. So, this is the outcome of two werepires mating!? They truly are pups, aren’t they? Covered in fur as if they were little werewolves, those eyes bright and their voices loud! How sweet! One of those would make a fine addition to my collection…”

Tommy begins to whine, the pups following suite as they imitate their mother. Andre yells “Undalata Ostperia Allumnus” and Tommy and Adam find they cannot move or speak. Andre leans down over Tommy, picking up the pup that lays in her arms and walks to the end of the bed. “I’ve decided, Tommy, that I’m trading this one for Vincenzo, the child that I took from you.” Suddenly a sleeping boy who looks around two-years-old appears on the bed. He looks just like Tommy. Andre snarls out “Thanks for the exhibit addition, both of you.” With that, he waves a hand and disappears.

Tommy’s wail of anguish wakes the little boy on the bed. He sits up, looking around himself in confusion. He turns to Tommy, who has tears flowing down her face. “Mama?” He turns and investigates the shocked look on Adam’s face, his nose scrunching up. “Daddy?”

Trying to choke back his own tears, Adam leans forward, placing a hand on the boy’s arm. “Hello, Vincenzo. I’m daddy Adam. This is your mama. She is sad right now, but she loves you, we both do. You will stay with us from now on.” Vincenzo looks from one to the other, a look of confusion on his face. “Daddy? Mama?” He looks around the room. Adam realizes that the boy is looking for Andre. “Andre is gone, you will live here with us. We love you.” The boy gives one more look around, then leans over to wipe the tears off Tommy’s face. “No cry mama.” Tommy throws the used towel the pup was in on the floor and reaches out to the boy, who lays down on Tommy, snuggling her. Adam looks down at the sleeping pup in his arms, suddenly realizing that Andre took his son from him.

Damian arrives in Andre’s chamber a while later from the front lines. Tired and cranky, the last thing he wants is to spend the evening satisfying the bastard’s lust.

Damian, alone in the room, begins to pace. Out of the corner of his eye, he sees a lump under a towel on a table in the corner of the room. He walks over to the lump, his hand on the towel just as Andre enters the room. “Ah, Damian! Just the vamp I was hoping to share this experience with! You see, I had to go find a glass display box just the right size!” Andre places the box on the table behind the lump, opening the glass top. Damian’s curiosity gets the better of him, and he moves closer to the towel, wondering what is under it.

“A one in a million find! I’m sure no other collector has one of these in his collection! I’m lucky indeed.”

Damian steps back in horror as Andre removes the towel. There, laying on its side, it’s eyes wide open, its lips open as if crying out, is Tommy and Adam’s son. The eyes are devoid of life, the limbs curled up against its chest stiff with death. A blue baby blanket is folded up under him, as if blanketing him from the hard tabletop.

Tears flow down Damian’s face, his hands moving to cover his face. “How could you! He was an innocent; he didn’t do anything to you! How could you kill this baby? What have you set out to do, collect all of Tommy’s children?”

Andre places a hand on Damian’s arm. “Oh no, Damian. I’m not as cruel as you think I am! I returned Vincenzo to Tommy, in exchange for this child. She still has a son to raise! And I have a unique acquisition for my collection! We both win!”

“YOU’RE SICK!” Damian screams, his fist connecting with Andre’s face over and over. “You play with people as if they were toys!” Andre grabs Damian’s arms in a tight grip, leaning forward until his lips meet Damian’s in a fierce kiss. When the kiss finally dies off, Andre pulls back, saying “And you are my favorite toy to break, Damian.”

“Forget what you just saw. I don’t want it to impact the rest of our evening together.” Andre reaches out, brushing the hair off Damian’s shoulders. “I want something from you, Damian. I know that every single time we are together, I destroy you in every way that I can. I live to destroy you! But tonight, I will not be the one in control.” Damian gives Andre a confused look. “No, I want you to be the one on top tonight. I’m tired of always being the dominate in every situation. You will take me this evening.” Damian gives Andre a look of horror. “Why me? Why don’t you have one of your guards…”

“…because I would rather like to see you disturbed by what I am asking you for, Damian. I have never let you be in control while you are here. I will keep control, but you will be the dominate one this evening. If I like it, I will ask you for it more often. Let’s see how the evening goes, shall we?” With a sweep of Andre’s hand both are naked. “Get behind me, Damian. Treat me as if you were fucking Tommy, not me. I’m sure Adam doesn’t let you top him too often, he’s too alpha. You, my dear boy, are a switch…”

Damian places his hands on Andre’s hips, moving carefully. Without prep, he lines up behind Andre, slamming into him. Andre moans out in pleasure as Damian begins to tear him apart, trying to pay back pain for pain. The only difference is that Andre is enjoying the pain, enjoying the rough movements.

When they are finished hours later, Damian pulls out of Andre, moving towards his face. “Open up, Andre. Clean my cock the way you always want me to clean yours.” Andre opens his mouth, deep throating Damian immediately. Damian moans in satisfaction as he feels Andre swallow around him, getting him hard once more. Without pausing, Damian thrusts as far into Andre’s throat as he can, exploding into his stomach.

When Damian finally pulls away, Andre stands up. There are growing bruises on his body, he is shaking from the hard riding, and he is smiling from ear to ear. Waving a hand, they are both dressed again. “What an amazing job you did, Damian! I’m very happy with the effort you put into it, so I have a little surprise for you. Come with me.” Damian follows Andre out of the chamber and down the hall, coming to a stop in front of a door at the end of the hallway. “Enjoy the rest of your evening, Damian. I will send you home in four hours.” Damian gives Andre a wary look before knocking on the door, surprised to hear Trick’s voice answer. He opens the door, calling out “I hope it is alright for me to visit you, Trick.”

Trick runs into Damian’s arms. “I’m so glad you are here! I was just thinking about you!” Damian kisses Trick, his arms tightening around her. “I want to see my son as well. I missed both of you so horribly!”

The three spend time together, finally getting to be a real family for once. Damian plays with his son, enjoying fatherhood. When Trick finally puts their son down for a nap, she says “I’ve a question to put to you, Damian, but I’m not sure of your answer.” Damian raises an eyebrow towards Trick in answer. “Andre has been trying his hardest to get me pregnant, to no avail. I’m terrified! What would happen to me if I can’t become pregnant? Could you…” Trick lowers her eyes, staring at the floor as her face flames bright red. “…have sex with me? See if you can get me pregnant? Can you help me?”

Damian shakes his head no. “What happens if the baby turns out to look like me? He will know that we slept together. I’m afraid of what will happen to you, Trick.”

Trick places a hand on Damian’s arm. “I’ll take that chance, Dam. Please help me! I’m afraid he is going to kill me.”

Damian takes Trick in his arms. “I will gladly help you, Trick! Let’s just hope the baby looks like you!”

When Damian arrives back at the mansion, he finds Vincenzo and Tommy curled together on the bed, Adam holding his little daughter. Damian looks at his mates, not sure how to tell them that their son is dead.

Tommy wakes up and gives Damian a hollow smile. “Meet Vincenzo, Damian! He is going to live with us from now on.” Damian moves towards the bed, taking the boy into his arms. “Hello Vincenzo! I’m daddy Damian. I’m going to take you to visit Aunt Gee. I’m sure you will like them.” Over Tommy’s protest, Damian takes the boy to Gee’s suite. Once Gee hears what Damian has to say to his mates, they gladly take the boy from Damian’s arms. “Come with me, sweetheart. I will get you something to eat.” Damian thanks Gee and then heads down the hall to his bedroom.

Once there, he takes the pup from Adam, placing her gently into the cradle nearest Tommy. He pulls Adam onto the bed, sitting next to him.

“I…” Damian stares at the floor, avoiding eye contact. “…don’t know how to tell you this. Andre pulled me to him as usual, and I found a…lump…sitting on a table, covered with a towel. He showed me what it was. It…was your son, lying on his side. Andre killed him and is now going to display him in his collection. I’m so sorry.” Tommy’s wail fills the room, scaring the pup in her cradle. Damian goes to her, rocking her gently until she falls back asleep to Tommy’s wails. Damian turns back towards the bed and finds Adam with his arms wrapped around Tommy, tears flowing down both their faces. Damian can see that Adam is trying to be strong for Tommy, holding his rage inside for now. Tommy becomes hysterical, her body rocking side to side. Damian moves back towards the bed, wrapping his arms around both his lovers to try and take their grief away.

The three of them stay wrapped together on the bed until the pup whines for food two hours later. Tommy breastfeeds the pup then cries herself to sleep.
“I’m so sorry, Ad. I wish I could’ve done something. I’ll go to Gee’s and help them keep Vincenzo busy, so the two of you can get some sleep. I’ll check on you later.” Adam reaches out, taking hold of Damian’s arm. “I’m going to make him pay for this, Dam, somehow. He will pay for everything he has done, to all of us. There must be a way to kill him!” Damian wraps Adam up in a huge hug, squeezing tight. “I will help you accomplish that, darling.” Now try to get some rest. Tommy will need you when she wakes up.” Damian takes Adam’s lips in a soft kiss, then leaves to make his way to Gee’s rooms.

Damian finds Vincenzo asleep on Gee’s lap, her arms tight around him. “He’s rather well adjusted, considering the circumstances. He asked if he could sleep on me, and I agreed. He just wants to feel loved.” Damian sits down next to Gee, thanking them for everything. “It’s the least I can do! You have all been here for me when I needed you, it’s no hardship to hold this little one while he sleeps. I’m glad I can help.” Gee glances at Damian, who looks exhausted. “This is a stupid question but how is Tommy?” Damian sighs. “Hysterical, as expected. Adam’s barely holding in his rage, his eyes are solid black. I wish I could do something to help them, make everything better but I can’t.”

Vincenzo slowly opens his eyes, sighing softly. “Daddy!…” Damian reaches out and takes the boy into his arms, pulling him to his chest. “Hello, Vincenzo! Daddy Damian and Aunt Gee are here to take care of you! You are safe now.” Vincenzo sighs, bringing a smile to the faces of both adults. “Ant G…” the boy struggles with his words “…nnnnice!” Damian gives Vincenzo a serious look. “Yes, Aunt Gee IS nice! Now, would you like something to eat? Are you hungry?” The boy looks confused for a moment, then rubs his stomach. “Yes, hongry daddy!” Damian smiles at the two of them. “Then let’s go get you something to eat!”

Andre arrives at Trick’s suite to bring Trick some blood bags. “Here. These are all we have right now. More will be here in the morning. I…” Andre’s nostrils wrinkle, as if he’s caught a whiff of something repulsive. “You’ve had sex with Damian!” Trick’s cheeks flame, her head dropping in embarrassment. “I give the two of you a few hours alone, and this is how you repay me?” Trick opens her mouth to respond but is cut off by a harsh slap across the face. “YOU BELONG TO ME AND ME ALONE, BITCH! HOW DARE YOU GIVE YOURSELF TO THAT PIECE OF SHIT I CALL MY SLAVE? NOW HOW WILL I KNOW IF ANY CHILD YOU HAVE BELONGS TO ME?” Trick cries out as Andre slaps her a few more times. “If I wasn’t so concerned with breeding you, I’d place you in the maiden until you learned to behave! I’ll just have to find another way to punish you!” Andre leaves the room and returns with Trick’s son. “Until you learn to behave, I’ll just have to take your son away from you! Say goodbye, mommy.” Trick cries out, standing to rush over to Andre’s side, but Andre and her son disappear.

Later, when Damian appears, Andre greets him by slamming his fist into the side of Damian’s face. “Fucker! Taking what is mine! How dare you have sex with Trick?” Damian makes to protest but Andre cuts him off. “Your son is now on the other end of the cosmos. If you and Trick want him back, the two of you are going to have to do some serious apologizing to me for the act you pulled. As for you, you will NEVER see Trick again! I will keep her locked up until the end of time, away from all of you. You betrayed my kindness, Damian, and that I will never forget.” Andre continues to beat up Damian, punching him over and over until blood starts to flow down his face. “If she has your child I will kill it, then give it to you. And since I cannot place her in the maiden as I would like to, I’m putting you there instead. Damian, head to the maiden.” Damian immediately begins to whine, fear taking over him. He heads to the maiden as asked, shaking all over. Andre opens the doors and shoves Damian in face first. A few of the spikes sink into Damian’s face and neck, causing him to beg to be released. Andre, standing behind him, laughs. “A month this time, Damian. Maybe by then my anger will have ceased. If not, then longer. Enjoy the silence, bitch. I’m going to go spend my time knocking up my other bitch.” Damian screams out apologies as the doors to the maiden close on him, leaving him to contemplate what will happen to his son and Trick.

Vincenzo ends up being everyone’s favorite. He settles in right away, enjoying getting to know each member of the family. Everyone spends time with him, trying their best to make him feel at home. He takes to Mikey the moment he meets her, enjoying every moment that he spends with his “Gma” then asking to go with her when she leaves for the Dark realm. Mikey tells Vincenzo that she will visit him soon, telling him that she is needed at home. The poor boy cries when she leaves, with only daddy Adam being able to calm him down. He promises Vincenzo that he will take him to visit soon.

The new pup (which they decided to name Maria) settles into the family routine right away. She seems sensitive to Tommy’s moods, so Tommy tries hard to rein in her emotions but fails. She misses her other pup, longs to hold him in her arms again. Adam suggests that they try again, but Tommy shoots his suggestion down, saying it would be too painful to relive. Adam tells Gee in secret that he will continue to try and change Tommy’s mind, believing that another pup will go a long way to making Tommy happy.

Tommy wakes one morning with Adam inside her. She tries to wake him, but he is sound asleep. Tommy cannot help herself; she moans when she feels how hard Adam is. Without conscious thought, she begins to rock back and forth, enjoying the sensations that take over her body. Without allowing Adam to pull out, Tommy shoves Adam backwards so he is on his back. Tommy then settles herself on top of Adam, continuing to rock on him, taking his dick deep inside.

Adam wakes up to find Tommy sitting on top of him, facing away from him. He realizes what she is doing, and his moans mingle with hers. Adam places his hands on Tommy’s hips, pulling her down hard on top of him. “Baby, you feel so good! Please don’t stop…”

Tommy rides Adam to completion, smiling to herself when she feels his come deep inside of her. She crawls off Adam, lying down next to him, wrapping her arms around him. “I hope…” Tommy doesn’t finish her thought, feeling Adam’s arms tighten around her. Adam comments “I know, baby, so do I. If not, maybe Dam can help us when he gets back…”

“…If he gets back! He’s been gone forever! I miss him.”

“Baby, I miss him, too. I wish he were here with us. But until he gets back, the two of us can practice, right?” Tommy giggles at Adam’s words. “Of course we can! Practice makes perfect…” Adam smiles at Tommy, leaning down to place a kiss on her lips as their pup begins to cry in her cradle.

Gee rolls over and connects with something solid. When they open their eyes a cry of joy leaves them when they realize that it is Frankie lying next to them. Frankie opens his eyes, staring at Gee’s face as he watches them joyfully wrap their arms around his body, then placing a kiss to his lips. Frankie throws his arms around Gee, returning the kiss for a moment before pulling back. “Baby, I do not have very long. I just couldn’t wait to see you any longer! I have missed you so much!” The two of them kiss again, their hands wandering all over each other. When they finally break apart Frankie says “Are the boys well? I miss them too.”

“They are at the front lines with their troops. You would be proud of them; they are leading the army with Draven and Ray’s guidance.”

“I AM proud of them, Gee! They have grown up to be wonderful weres, all thanks to you! I just wish I had more time…” Gee tightens their arms around Frank. “I don’t care about time! You are going to make love to me before you leave! I can’t stand the thought of being alone. Please, Frankie, please make love to me! Give me something to think back on, while you are hiding from that maniac! I’m begging you…”

They spend the next two hours making love. When Frankie says that he must leave, Gee begins to cry. “Please, promise me that you will come back! I can’t go through life never seeing you again! I will risk any punishment to have you with me, even if for a little while.” Frankie replies “I cannot make any promises, sweetheart. I will see you when and if I can. Just know I love you and always will.” Gee replies “I will always love you, darling. Take my love with you. I will always be here.” Frankie kisses Gee one more time and then leaves a broken-hearted Gee behind.

Gee gets up out of bed and gets dressed. As she heads downstairs to the kitchen, she suddenly appears in Andre’s chambers, chained against the wall. Looking around her, she notices that Andre is standing across the room, a smirk on his face.

“Gee! Welcome to my chamber! It’s nice to have you with me!” Andre walks up to Gee, laughing at the terrified look on their face. “I know that Frankie visited you. That gave me an idea…” Andre claps his hands together in glee “…why not have you as my prisoner! Then Frankie will have to surrender to me for me to set you free! The last thing he would do is to let you rot here in my dungeon! So, get comfy, Gee. You’re going to be here for a long time.”

Chapter Text

Gee screams as Andre whips her, her body tied to the St. Andrew’s cross. The marks from her previous whippings break open again, blood trickling onto the floor. He laughs as he says “Looks as if your Frankie doesn’t care about you, Gee. You’re just a cheap piece of ass to him. If he loved you, he would be here, putting you out of your misery. When I sent out my message to the cosmos, I told him that I would send you home the second that he surrendered himself to me. Seems he wants you here to be tortured! What kind of love is that? Making you suffer because of him? He’s not worth it, Gee! Looks like you are going to be here with me forever…”

From across the room, there is a noise coming from the maiden. With a surprised cry, Andre puts down his whip, making his way over to the source of the noise. He pulls both doors open, exclaiming “DAMIAN! I’VE FORGOTTEN ABOUT YOU!” Andre reaches in and pulls Damian off the spikes, commenting “It’s been two months since I placed you in here!” Andre waves his hand and the marks from the maiden disappear from Damian’s body; his clothes are suddenly whole again. “Please, Andre, I’m dizzy and lightheaded. May I have some blood?” With a wave, a bag of blood appears in Damian’s hand. “Drink, then say hello to my newest slave! Gee will be staying with us until that bastard Frankie decides to return and rescue them! So far, he’s decided to let poor Gee suffer through my torture sessions! It appears that the two of you will be spending a lot of time together here with me.”

Draven, exhausted and grumpy, shoulders his sword and heads back towards his grandfather. Another successful round of fighting ended with the family winning another battle. Draven knows that he should be happy, but his mind is already on the next round of fighting.

Before he can reach his grandfather, he disappears. Panic takes over, wondering if Andre is calling him back for another bout of rape. Draven instead is quite surprised to find himself in an empty castle.

As he wanders from room to room, he wonders who sent him there. Draven tries to leave, but he finds himself a prisoner. Expecting Andre any moment, he is quite surprised when a young man (the spitting image of Andre) appears in front of him.

“Hello, Draven. My name is Paulo. I am Andre’s biological son.” Draven can’t believe his eyes. He blurts out “But you’re dead…”

Paulo throws back his head and laughs. “Do I look dead to you?” He crosses the room until he is inches away from Draven, reaching out and picking up one of his hands, placing it on his arm and squeezing. “Flesh, right? No, Draven…” with a smirk Paulo takes a few steps back “…I’m quite alive, thank you very much!”
Draven gives Paulo a confused look. “So, what are we doing here?”

“My father has given me permission to speak to you. You see, if he had his choice, he would rather be raping you.” Draven’s cheeks begin to turn red at the reminder of what he has been through. “But at the moment he is busy with others. I asked if I could speak to you, and he agreed.” Paulo tilts his head to the side, as if contemplating something. “I have to say that he is right, you ARE beautiful! Quite a treat for the eyes if I do say so myself.”

“Say whatever you brought me here to say and let me go home. My family will be looking for me…”

“Oh, I’m sure they will miss you, Draven, either them or that boring King that you’ve taken up with. But they are no matter. When you hear what I have to say, you will surely forget all about them.” Paulo waves his hand and suddenly the room is furnished with the finest furniture and tapestries, a fire burning in the fireplace. “Please, have a seat, Draven. Let’s be civil towards one another. No need for hostilities.”

Draven remains where he is. “No need? Considering all that your father has done against my family, myself, my very own father? What, did you expect me to simply give in to you, to lay down and beg you to do as you please? No, that’s not going to happen, Paulo. State your case. I’ll stand right here.”

Sighing, Paulo takes a seat in the middle of the overstuffed couch, his arms spread out across the back of it. “Oh Draven! You are as dramatic as your father! I wish to have a simple conversation with you! Must you make a big deal out of it?” Paulo tries again, patting the couch next to his leg. “I promise to behave, if you’d just take a seat…”

“No thank you, Paulo. Simply tell me what you have in mind, so I can get back home.”

Paulo sighs again, this time in defeat. “Fine, I will get to the point.” Paulo leans forward, staring deep into Draven’s eyes. “I brought you here because I have a proposition for you. I know that you have been looking for a way to end the war that our families have been fighting.” Paulo gives Draven a ghost of a smile. “I spoke to my father about you. You see, I’m intrigued. You are beauty beyond compare, and I want you. You want the war to end. So how about this…” Paulo gives Draven a smirk. “…my father has agreed to end the war. All his soldiers will disappear for good, and peace will once again ring through the cosmos. The kicker? You give yourself to me, body and soul. Father will bind the two of us, not a lover’s bind but a marriage bond. The two of us will be tied to each other for eternity. You will forsake your king for me. Father further vows that he will give up his quest to take over the cosmos, if you stay by my side. So, what do you think about my proposal, Draven? How badly do you want peace?”

Draven throws back his head and laughs. “Me, trust your father? He is too power hungry to give up his quest for total domination. If I gave into you, he would simply turn around and pick up where he left off! He wants my family dead…”

Paulo claps his hands together, a smirk on his face. “That’s the best part, Draven! Father will swear off his vengeance for your family and will no longer seek to place everyone in his cabinet of curiosities. He will be content with a cease fire, if you agree to be mine forever.”

Draven shakes his head in disbelief. “You’re full of shit! Your father is too invested in my own father to simply give him up, to give up my whole family. I’m not worth that much. Send me home NOW!”

Paulo stands up, a look of rage on his face. “What, you don’t believe me? You think I’m lying, that my father is lying? I promise you that my offer is sincere. The cease fire begins the moment that the ceremony is over. Don’t you want to protect your family, your father…the entire cosmos?” Draven is suddenly quiet, his arms crossing his chest as if hugging himself. “Look, why don’t you go home and talk to your family about this. I’m sure you will want to consult Luna as well. But know something, Draven…” Paulo crosses the room to stand inches away from Draven “…if you refuse my offer, the hostilities will double. Your family will not stand a chance against my father when he feels as if he’s been betrayed. The viciousness that you have seen so far will seem like child’s play compared to what will be in store for you and yours. Every member of your family, apart from your father, will find themselves in a glass box. Is that what you really want, to spend eternity staring at your mother across the room, never to touch her again? Listen…” Paulo places his hands on Draven’s shoulders, squeezing tightly. “Your king will understand that you have forsaken him for the peace of the realm. He will let you go, to let you do the right thing. I look forward to hearing your answer, Draven.” Paulo leans forward, gently placing his lips against Draven, who does not respond. Paulo deepens the kiss, his tongue seeking entry. Draven tries to pull back, but Paulo’s grip is too tight. Draven sighs in frustration, his lips accidentally parting. Paulo takes control, plunging his tongue into Draven’s mouth. The moment seems to go on forever, until finally Paulo pulls back, his tongue licking Draven’s lips. Paulo gives Draven a smile as he pulls away. “Just as sweet as I thought you’d be! I cannot wait to hear your answer, Draven. Don’t take too long.” With a wave of his hand, Draven is transported to Luna’s castle, where she is waiting for him.

Once Draven fills her in, she motions him to sit down next to her. “Draven, you have already sacrificed for your family. There is no way that I would believe a word that that bastard said! Andre’s mad, he will never give up his plans for domination of the cosmos, much less let your father and Trick go. The moment that you said your vows, Andre will simply go on as before, but this time he would have you under his thumb as a member of his family. Please, consult with your family before making up your mind, but you have my decision on the matter. Turn your mind away from this foolishness and hold on tight to your king.” Draven comments “I’m just afraid that my refusal will cause even more destruction. The realms are stretched now, in both resources and men. I have no idea how much longer we will be able to fight against Andre’s armies. And what about my family? Can I live with myself if I’m forced to stare at my family through a glass box, knowing that it was me that put them there?” Luna takes one of Draven’s hands in hers. “What will happen is not your fault, Draven. It will happen if you are there or not. It will happen as long as Andre is alive.” Luna leans over and gives Draven a kiss on the cheek. “Stay as brave as you are, the family needs you. In the end, you will lead the family to victory. Just have faith.”

Draven goes home and calls a meeting with every member of the family, including Mikey, who arrives from the Dark realm. Once he tells everyone his news, then respond in one voice “NO! You will NOT say yes! We will find another way!”

Mikey comments “Andre is hoping you will say no, so he can double his efforts to take us down. It will happen if you say yes or not. You need to stand firm and tell Paulo that you refuse his offer. We will all stand behind you in this, we will face whatever comes next together. Please, Draven, do not agree with Paulo’s proposition.”

Damian stands up, walking over to Draven. He takes one of Draven’s hands in his, squeezing tightly. “I know you want me safe; you want the entire family to find peace from this bastard. It will not happen, Draven, not this way. Say no.”

Draven softly says “I’d give my life for my family. I would do anything to make each of you safe. But you are right, this is not the way. I will tell Paulo no and face the consequences.”

The following evening Draven is speaking with Ray when he feels a pull from another location. The next thing he knows, he is back in the very castle where he spoke to Paulo. This time the entire castle is furnished, fires burning in each fireplace he passes as he makes his way to the highest tower where Paulo is waiting for him.

“Well, have you spoken with your family, Draven? What is the consensus? What conclusion have you reached?”

Draven stops just inches away from Paulo. “I’ve decided to turn down your proposal, Paulo. I will not marry you. The war will have to continue. My family and Luna agree that this is not the solution to the war. Please send me home.”

Rage takes over Paulo. “So, you prefer to be annihilated instead of marrying me! My father will not take kindly to your refusal. You are simply playing into his hands!” Reaching out to run his fingers through Draven’s hair, he gives Draven a grim smile. “I will not allow him to destroy YOU! You are made for better than to be a pawn in this game. FATHER!” Draven begins to internally panic as Andre appears in the room, his hands bloody. “Yes, what is it, son?”

Paulo faces his father. “Draven has refused, father. Your plans can move forward, precisely as you wished. I have one favor to ask of you.” Paulo continues to run his fingers through Draven’s hair. “I want to keep this one for my very own.”

Andre sneers at Draven. “He’s not worth keeping, son. Come, join me as I attack yet another realm! I’ll make you head of the army. Just forget this nonsense…”

“BUT I WANT DRAVEN! YOU WILL MARRY US RIGHT NOW!” Paulo fists Draven’s hair, pulling him with him to stand directly in front of Andre. “YOU SAID I CAN KEEP HIM! NOW MARRY US!”

Draven grabs Paulo’s fist, pulling it loose from his hair. Andre reaches out and runs the back of his hand down the side of Draven’s face. “I thought to keep this one for myself, son. He’s a mighty nice piece of ass, just like his father! I’m sure you will find someone else to marry…”

Draven takes a step backwards from the two of them. “Send me home. My family will be worried…”

Andre laughs. “You are just like your father, always worried about others. No, Draven…” Andre sneers at his son “…you’re going home with me. I have plans for you…”

Paulo grabs onto Draven’s arm. “You’ve had your fun with him, father! It’s my turn! You promised!”

The next thing Draven knows, he is sitting on Luna’s couch, with her standing across the room. “I thought I’d rescue you from those assholes, Draven. At least for the moment. I’m sure you will have more run ins with them in the future. You’re a popular young man! Both father and son want you.” A chill runs through Draven which has nothing to do with the cold in Luna’s castle. “Here, I have a surprise for you…”

Thomas appears next to Draven on the couch. Draven gives a shocked sound, then leans over to kiss Thomas’s lips. Luna laughs. “I thought you would be happy to see him! I have filled Thomas in on everything that has been happening with you, to save time. I will now leave the two of you alone.” The two youngsters thank Luna as she makes her slow way out of the room.

“So, you’ve become popular, hum? Both father and son want you! I’m not surprised. I know how delectable you are! Come, give me another kiss.” Draven moves closer to Thomas on the couch, his lips moving to cover Thomas’s lips in a searing kiss. Thomas wraps his arms around Draven, pulling until Draven is sitting on his lap. “I’ve missed this.”

Time goes by. Draven pulls a blanket off the back of the couch, covering the two of them. They take off each other’s clothes, taking time to explore each other’s bodies. Thomas lays on top of Draven, asking “Is this alright?” Draven nods his head, suddenly aware of what Thomas is asking. It will be the first time that he would give himself to another since his rape. He feels nervous but knows that he is in good hands with Thomas.

When Thomas finally enters Draven, he whispers words of love and praise to Draven, who tenses under his lover. Thomas begins to thrust his hips. “Look into my eyes, sweetheart. He is not here, I am. I love you very, very much. You do not belong to them; you belong to me. I will love you until the end of my days…”

Tears fill Draven’s eyes when he feels Thomas come inside of him. He finally belongs to the man that he loves, body and soul. Thomas pulls out of Draven, rolling them on their sides, pillowing Draven’s head on his chest. “Are you alright, sweetheart?” Draven nods his head. “I’m fine, Thomas, thank you for your concern. I’m so glad that we got to spend this time together. I love you beyond words. I just hope that the two of us get to spend eternity together.”

They lay like this until they hear Luna shuffle into the room. “Draven, your needed at the front lines. Both your fathers and Ray have been injured in battle, and there is no one else to lead the army. I’m sorry you must go, and I’m sorry to interrupt such a beautiful moment between you.” Draven lifts his head off Thomas’ chest. “Thank you for everything, Luna. I will go right away.” Luna smiles at the two of them. “Both of you, please be safe. I will miss you both.” With that, Luna turns and leaves the room.

As Draven pulls on his clothes, Thomas says “Hold on, Drave. I’ll come with you.” Draven pulls up his pants and sits down on the couch again, turning towards Thomas. “No, I want you safe. Please, go home. I will visit you the very first chance I get.” As he pulls on his shirt, Thomas sits up. “I mean it, Drave. I’m coming with you! I want to fight at your side. I want to help you lead the army.”

Draven stands up, staring down at Thomas. “I can’t stop you if you want to go. But promise me that you will be careful. I can’t lose you!” Thomas pulls on his pants, his voice gruff when he answers “The same to you, Drave. I love you too much to lose you, in battle or to those bastards. You’re mine! Let’s go.”

When they arrive, they see Paulo leading his soldiers into battle on the other side of the field. Thomas tenses up as he moves closer to Draven, completely in protection mode. He makes a silent vow to cut that bastard’s head off.

The battle begins, Paulo leading the charge. He strides up to Draven, sword drawn. Thomas steps between the two of them, his own sword raised. Paulo laughs out loud. “So, this is the weakling that you’ve fallen in love with! Easy enough to dispatch!” Thomas growls as Draven attempts to sidestep him. “You leave your hands off him, he belongs to me! It’s me you must deal with now.”

Swords clash, the sound of metal against metal loud in Draven’s ears. Every time Draven tries to interfere, he is pushed back by one of the combatants. Thomas fights bravely but suffers a few wounds, Paulo in much the same condition. The stalemate continues until Paulo, frustrated, reaches around Thomas to grab Draven’s arm. “Another time, Thomas.” The next thing he knows, he and Paulo are standing next to each other in Paulo’s castle tower.

“Send me back! I have a war to fight!” Paulo laughs. “No. The war will go on without you. Thomas will fight in your place, will lead the troops, and win the day. I am not concerned about that. You are the one I’m concerned about. You have been spending too much time with that asshole of a king when you obviously belong to me!” Paulo walks over to Draven, placing his arms around him. “You smell like that bastard! How dare the two of you have sex!” Draven tries to struggle out of Paulo’s arms but fails. “I’ll have to see to it that it never happens again!” Paulo pushes Draven backwards until Draven’s back contacts the wall behind him. Paulo whispers a few words in Vampirese and a tall, pale creature with long hair appears. “You called for me?”

Paulo cuffs Draven to the wall, then turns towards the creature. “I wish the two of us to be married. I will pay whatever price you wish, if you will marry us right now.” The creature does not hesitate, he says “I want my son released from your father’s prison.”

“Done. Your son is now home waiting for you. Start the ceremony.”

The creature takes a few steps toward them. Speaking in Vampirese, he motions for Paulo to take Draven’s hand in his. Draven struggles against the cuffs holding him to the wall. “I DON’T WANT THIS! SET ME FREE! I’m NOT YOURS!”

The creature, after reciting the marriage vows, motions to Paulo. “Now exchange blood.” Paulo leans forward, his teeth grazing Draven’s neck seconds before biting down hard on the teeth marks already on Draven’s neck. Draven swears in frustration. Paulo sucks on Draven’s neck for a few moments before pulling back, his teeth covered with blood. He then uses his teeth to open his wrist, shoving it between Draven’s teeth, squeezing his wrist to ensure that the proper amount of blood is administered. When he finally pulls back, Draven spits in Paulo’s face.

The creature says a few more words, then waves his hand in the air over the couple. “There. Now you are wed. Please send me home.” Paulo says a few words and the creature disappears.

Paulo smirks at Draven. “We are now wed. You belong to me forever.” The handcuffs holding Draven to the wall begin to glow, even as they separate in half. “Those cuffs are now enchanted. You cannot leave. You will live here with me, you will turn your back on your family and that fake king, you will live to serve me. You are mine for eternity.” Draven tries to transport home, but the cuffs keep him grounded. He runs to the front door of the castle but finds that he cannot cross the front threshold. He is indeed a prisoner in Paulo’s castle.

Paulo calls out to Draven “Come here, darling. It’s time that the two of us consummate our relationship.” Draven, panic on his face, continues to try and leave the castle. Suddenly he is picked up by Paulo, thrown over his shoulder like a bride on her wedding night.

Once in the master bedroom, Draven is thrown down on the bed. Paulo covers his body, leaning down to capture Draven’s lips with his. When the kiss ends, Paulo rips the clothes off them, eager to consummate his marriage.

Draven rocks under Paulo as he is taken by his new husband. He cries as he thinks of Thomas, how he will never see him or his family again now that he is Paulo’s prisoner. Draven has never felt so alone.

Three months go by in a heartbeat. Paulo leaves Draven alone for long periods of time, the boredom driving Draven insane. Meals automatically arrive three times a day like clockwork, with all his favorite foods. If he could only have someone to talk with…

One day there is a flash of light which lights up the bedroom. When his eyes adjust again, Andre is standing in front of him. A chill of fear runs down his back. This is not the someone he was hoping to see…

“Well, hello, Draven! I thought by now you would be a little lonely. My son was wicked to leave you all alone like this. Looks like you need a little company…”

Backing away from Andre, Draven says “Uhh, good morning, Andre. What brings you to visit me?”

“I’ve been thinking about how my son took advantage of you, Draven. You must accept my apologies, he’s a bit like his mother, he has a wild streak in him. I like you better when you are free, doing your very best to take me down. You’re more fun that way! Having you locked up here is very boring…”

“If you are planning to set me free, what’s the catch? You never do anything without expecting something in return.”

Andre struggles to hold in a smirk. “Oh, don’t worry, there is a catch. One that I find very interesting. You see, while you have been locked up here, your mother gave birth again. One pup this time, so I understand. Your mother is quite the little slut! Always spreading her legs for someone! Well, I think it’s time that the scene comes closer to home…”

Draven steps back in horror. “You want me to have sex with my own mother? In front of you? NEVER!” Andre raises a hand, cutting in with “You are missing the best part! You know how I’m the master of mind control? How I choreography every scenario? In this instance, YOU would be in control! I would simply sit back and watch you rape your mother!” When Draven is stunned stupid, Andre continues. “You had better take one thing into consideration. Your family is losing the war without your guidance. Your mother is even fighting at the front lines, since you are low on men. Your family members are constantly injured, causing them to be sidelined. The other realms have lost faith without you as a leader and have backed out of the fighting. It will not take long for your family to lose the war without you. You are needed if nothing else than to boost morale. Take all of this into consideration, before you turn me down.”

Draven knows in his heart that Andre is right. But to hurt his mother, the one he loves? How can he do that?

“I don’t have all day, Draven. Make up your mind. Do I get to watch a show or what?” Without thinking, Draven nods his head. Andre walks up to him and says “Remember, you run the show. Good luck, kid.” He then makes his way over to the window seat in the corner of the room, crossing his arms over his chest as he nods once.

Tommy arrives at the foot of the bed, a confused look on her face. “Draven! Oh, thank the realms that you are safe! I have been so worried about you!” She turns and sees Andre seated across the room from me, a chill running down her back. If he is here, it can’t be good…

Draven gives his mother a pleading look as he walks over to her. “I’m sorry” is all he says as he pulls her over to the side of the bed, pushing her down on top of it. Tommy looks back at Andre and sees the smirk on his face, sees how much he is enjoying himself. Suddenly what is about to happen to her settles in, shocking her. Her very own son is about to rape her. This is all Andre’s doing…

Draven, who has never been in charge in bed, struggles as he tries to strip his mother of her clothing. She ends up helping him, if for nothing else but to get this over with. Draven pulls back to strip his own clothes off.

Once they are naked, Draven immediately takes himself in hand and tries to enter his mother. Nerves cause him to fail, fumbling around until Tommy must take Draven in hand, leading him inside of her. Draven stares at the wall as he quickens his pace, pounding his mother. Tommy reaches out and brushes the hair out of Draven’s eyes, a soft “It’s okay, I forgive you” floating through the air.

Andre cannot help himself; he calls out “come in her, Draven!” Draven tries to hold back but ends up finishing deep inside the very womb that housed him for so many months.

As he tries to pull out Andre yells “Again, Draven!” Tommy grabs Draven’s arms, holding him in place as Draven becomes hard again. “Obey him, Drave. Hopefully he will let you come home.” Draven’s tears fall on Tommy as he quietly begs her for her forgiveness. “You have it, son. I love you so much. I understand this is out of your control. All is well, trust me.”

An hour later Draven pulls out of Tommy. Andre stands, clapping his hands. “Quite the show! I’m proud of you, Draven!” Andre blinks and the two of them are dressed again. The handcuffs fall off Draven’s wrists. “You both are free to go home. I will keep Paulo from following you. See you soon, Draven.”

The two end up standing in Tommy’s room, the pup in the cradle screaming for a feeding. Tommy rushes to his side, picking him up and placing him on her breast. “We will never speak of this again; do you hear me? I do not want your fathers to know what happened. It’s our secret.” Draven nods his head. “I’ll reach out to Luna, have her do something so you do not end up pregnant. That would be the last thing you would need.” Draven sits down next to Tommy, reaching out to take her hand in his. “Mother, I’m so sorry! I had no control over the situation. If only there was a way not to hurt you…” Tommy leans over and kisses Draven on the cheek. “You do not need to explain, when Andre is concerned. I love you, Draven.” The pup in Tommy’s arms makes a growl as she switches him to the other side. “I love you too, mom. Thank you for understanding.”

Draven immediately finds out that Andre is right. He spends considerable time convincing certain realms not to pull out of the alliance. He leads the army in battle after battle, taking the place of other family members who are recuperating from surgeries and injuries. He leads family meetings, comes up with strategies to fight the war. He is so busy that the only thing that he can do is to send messages to Thomas, having no free time to see him in person.

When he is asleep, Draven has nightmares of Paulo coming to take him away. He jumps at shadows, he loses weight. The family begins to worry about Draven, each of them trying their best to comfort him, to get him to confide in them, especially Damian.

Eventually all members of the family are healed of their injuries and return to the battlefield. This gives Draven a chance to finally visit Thomas. The moment he is in Thomas’s arms, the stress he is under shows itself in unstoppable tears.

“Baby, I’m here for you. I’ve missed you so much!” Draven fills Thomas in on what he has missed so far. “I’m married to that bastard! What the hell am I going to do now? I only want to be with you! I do not want to ever see him again!” Thomas rocks Draven on his lap like a little child. “You are mine, Drave! You are NOT married to that freak; he forced the bond on you! You belong only to me!” Thomas reaches into his pocket and pulls out a ring, which he slips on Draven’s ring finger. “A token of the love I carry for you. Luna placed a spell on it. No matter what happens, you will always be my sweetheart. Say you’ll be mine forever, Drave.” Draven looks down at the diamond ring, feels a rush of love and emotion fill his very being. “I love you, Thomas. Thank you for the ring! I want to spend the rest of my life with you.”

When Damian awakes, the Fairy Aurora is standing at the foot of his bed. “Wake up, Dam! I have something for you!”

The two retire to the library to talk. “Don’t worry, I’ve placed a spell on the mansion. Andre will not be able to hear anything that is said. I know that your son has been searching the cosmos looking for magick to help fight against Andre.” Damian, sipping on a blood bag, nods his head. “I have been researching Fairy magick and I think I might have something that will help.”

“Shall I go fetch Sonny for you?”

“That might be a good idea. Maybe he can combine my magick with his.” Damian finishes eating then says, “I’ll go get him.”

The three of them spend the afternoon plotting and planning. As evening approaches, Damian calls a meeting of the entire family, Thomas and Luna included.
“Aurora has found some old Fairy magick that will be helpful in taking down Andre. We now can place him in thrall. Sonny has developed a spell that will allow us to break through the defenses of the coliseum, so we can rescue everyone. The problem will be timing. We will need to coordinate the different realms so that a standing army will be ready to fight the guards inside the coliseum.”

“I can coordinate the realms. It will be a challenge, but it can be done. Father says that there are more human guards than jackals in the coliseum, so that will be helpful. The key will be placing Andre in thrall. I think I know the exact person to help set him up” Draven says.
When the family asks who he means, Draven smirks.

“Frankie.”

Three weeks later, plans are in place to attack Andre. On the night of the coup, Damian visits Andre as usual. “Another fun evening together, huh Damian?” Andre asks, a smirk on his face. Damian pretends to be slightly afraid of Andre, not wishing to give anything away. About three hours into their time together, a guard bursts into the room. “We found the werewolf, sir! He is in the Certar realm. Should we attack? Or would you rather be the one to bring him in?” Andre looks at Damian, another smirk on his face. “I knew we would find him eventually! I want to be the one to take that bastard down! We shall leave at once!” Andre turns to Damian. “Wait for me here, Damian. We shall celebrate together.” Damian nods, his eyes on the floor.

Andre and a few of his men arrive in the Certar realm. One of his guards breaks down the door of an abandoned building, clearing the way for Andre to enter. In the rear of the large building, Frankie is standing, his hands on his hips.

“Thought you could run from me, were. You had to have known that someday I would find you. Now is the time for you to come back to your glass box where you belong.” Frankie throws back his head and laughs. “Over my dead body, Andre.”

“That can be arranged! GUARDS!”

Frankie waves his hand and the family’s soldiers appear, their screams loud as they rush Andre’s men. Frankie barks out “Jedularius Alcumen Ifortus Callum Equarium Bevardous Keharium Opumperes Zorum LEQURIUOS APROUMBUS WIROUR GEMEMBLE KUMTUM SESBURUS PORKATEUM!”

A look of horror crosses Andre face. He stands still as a statue, as if waiting for an order to move. Frankie crosses the space between them, yelling over the sound of fighting all around them. “You are under my control, Andre. You will take orders; you WILL obey what you are told.” Looking around himself, Frankie notices that the soldier have dispatched all the guards. “Your men are dead; they will not help you. Soon you will lose all that means anything to you. Come with me, Andre.”

Frankie places his hand on Andre’s arm, and the next thing they know, they are standing in the basement of the mansion. There is a metal cage set up in one corner. “Walk into the cage, Andre, and await your fate.” Andre does as commanded, a look of distain on his face. “I will be back to visit you soon. There is much to do, now that you have been captured.” Frankie locks the door to the cage and then heads to Andre’s coliseum.

When he arrives, he finds chaos. Soldiers and guards are fighting in the hallways, blood everywhere. Frankie finds Damian, who is untying Gee from the St. Andrew’s cross. “Damian! Where is Trick? We must hurry if we are going to rescue everyone!” Damian sends Gee home, and the two of them run down the hall to where they find Trick, her round stomach surprising them both. Damian sends her home as well.

Mikey and Sonny join Frankie and Damian, each of them running from box to box releasing prisoners. Once they are free, they immediately send them to their home realm. The fighting around them intensifies, causing them to hurry.

When they reach the last box, they find a dead Orge. Sonny sends him to his loved ones in his home realm.

“What about his cabinet of curiosities? It needs to be destroyed as well.” Frankie leads the way to the back room which holds Andre’s collection. “I have an idea. When the fighting is over, let’s burn the place down.” The family stands against the wall, watching the last of the fighting take place. As soon as the last guard is killed, Mikey raises her hand, and the soldiers disappear to their home realms.

Damian turns to the others and says, “For all the pain I suffered, let me be the one.” He waves a hand and the collections room bursts into flames. Mikey takes Damian by the arm, saying “I’ve got the rest, love.” She mumbles a few words and flames shoot out all from all directions, the sound of burning glass exploding filling the air around them. Damian looks around, taking in the burning building, a sense of peace taking over him. “Let’s go.” The four of them hold hands and take off for the mansion.

Once there, they find Gee and Tommy freaking out on Ray. “What do you mean that that asshole is in the basement! Couldn’t you have come up with a more appropriate place for him? No one will be able to sleep a wink in this house, knowing that he is here! Once upon a time we couldn’t keep Damian in thrall, what makes you think that you can do the same with Andre?”

Ray waves his hands in the air, trying to cut off Gee and Tommy’s tirade. “The two of you need to calm down! We will not be keeping him there for long. We didn’t have enough time to find another place for him! Now that he is in thrall, we can safely move him elsewhere. I know that the two of you are upset, but we really had no other opportunity.” Mikey moves next to Ray, taking his hand in hers. “Is it done, Mikey?” Mikey responds “The coliseum is destroyed; the creatures have been sent home. We are going to send out a message to everyone, telling them if their loved ones need healing, we will send someone to help. With Andre in thrall, the jackals will stop attacking so we can focus on other matters.”

Two weeks goes by in peace. Many realms have asked for help with their injured, keeping Damian, Sonny, Frankie and Mikey busy. Representatives from all realms gather in the main auditorium in the Light realm to decide not only how to proceed in peace, but how to destroy Andre.

Ray makes it his responsibility to daily check on Andre, to make sure that he is still in their custody. Every evening, he holds his breath when he walks down the basement stairs, not knowing what he will expect. The night after the meeting of the realms, Ray slowly walks down the stairs as usual to find the cage empty.
He cannot believe it—Andre has escaped.

At that very moment, Draven is planning to visit Thomas at his castle. As he raises the bag that he has packed for a long visit onto his shoulder, there is a blinding light which makes him blink. There in front of him stands Paulo, a large smirk on his face.

“So, you thought you’d never see me again, huh? Well love, you are sadly mistaken! I’ve come to take you home. It’s a good thing that you’ve already packed! Come with me, darling.” Paulo throws Draven over his shoulder, grabs his bag and the two of them appear in the castle tower, where Paulo’s bedroom is. From the corner of the room, Draven hears “You found Draven! Let’s play with him!” Draven turns his head and his stomach drops as Paulo places him on his feet.

Andre is standing with his arms across his chest, a smirk on his lips. “After all…” Draven feels a chill run down his spine as Andre steps closer, his hand reaching out to run through Draven’s long hair. “…he is my second favorite play toy.”

Chapter Text

“Father, he belongs to me! You have Damian! Leave us alone!” Paulo begs, his hands reaching out to grab Draven and pull him closer to him. He sounds like a whining little boy. “Draven will NEVER belong to you!”

Andre throws back his head and laughs. “When will you learn that I am in control here, son? You get what I give you! If I want to fuck your husband, I will! Just remember that I own ALL THREE OF YOU!”

Draven feels dazed, as if he was trapped in a dream. He says to Andre “How are you here? How did you escape?” Andre ignores Draven’s questions, instead focusing his attention on Draven’s hand. “What have we here? A WEDDING RING? I know my cheap ass son would’ve never given you that!” Andre grasps Draven’s hand, yanking it upwards so he can examine the ring closer. “I bet that pathetic king of yours gave it to you!” Andre tries to pull the ring off, but it will not budge. “It’s bewitched! I bet Luna was the one to put a spell on it. That old bat is always trying to interfere in shit. Well, we could always cut off his finger…” The hair on Draven’s neck stands up. Paulo cries out “NO, father! I like him the way he is! I’ll just ignore the ring; pretend it was from me. Now husband, take your clothes off! We need to make up for lost time. And since father refuses to leave, he’ll just have to watch.”

Draven stands still in silent protest, even as Paulo takes his own clothes off. Andre sighs and waves his hand through the air. “Remember, boy, I can make you do anything I want you to do. Now take your clothes off! You are wasting my time.” Draven, against his will, takes his clothes off. “Lie down on the bed. Paulo…”

The second Draven lies down, Paulo is on top of him. Draven stares at the wall across from him as he feels Paulo reach between his legs. “He’s already prepped! He made himself ready for that piece of shit! Well, Draven, thanks for the effort! It will make things easier for me…” Draven sniffles as Paulo pulls his legs up over his shoulders. “Time to make you mine again…”

Draven tenses as he feels Paulo slide into him. Draven’s wolf howls out in frustration, Paulo’s sudden movements causing Draven to reach down and stroke his chest, trying to calm his wolf. He jerks when he feels Andre petting his hair, feels him slide his hand down Draven’s arm until he is holding onto Draven’s hand. Draven tries to pull away, but Andre holds on tighter. He says to Draven “Your wolf seems upset. He never responded when I raped you before, Draven. Is he trying to get out to protect you? Or is he excited by what is happening, wants to participate however he can? You and I must have a conversation about this later, darling.” He leans forward and whispers in Draven’s ear “Why are you always trying to make everything so difficult, Drave? You’re just like your father! Just give in. You are such a beautiful young man, no wonder everyone wants you! I’ve decided to share you with my son, even though he is not yet aware of my plans. You and your father will make the perfect pair for my son and me. As soon as I am established again, your father and you will live with us. The four of us will live happily ever after together…”

Paulo unloads inside of Draven, making him shudder in revulsion. When Andre reaches down to take Draven’s dick in his hand, he finds the boy soft. “What, no pleasure, Draven? Why are you holding back? Take your pleasure where you find it, boy.” Andre pumps his hand hard on Draven’s dick until he becomes hard. As Paulo pulls out, Andre lowers himself over Draven and takes him down his throat. Draven stares at the ceiling when Andre finally makes him come minutes later.

“You and Damian will live with father and I, Drave. Imagine the fun we could have! I plan to make you a full-fledged vampire, so we could live together for eternity!”

“…so, the baby belongs to either Damian or Andre” Trick tells an astonished Pete. “I’m sorry, honey. I wish the baby belonged to you…” Pete walks across the room, gently placing his hand on Trick’s stomach. “One day we will get lucky, Trick. In the meantime, I will welcome any baby that you have. I just wish our son was with us.” Trick’s eyes well up with tears at the thought of their son living away from them on the other side of the cosmos.

Suddenly there is a knock at the door. Pete opens it, taking a step back in surprise. Sonny is standing in the doorway with a young child in his arms.

“Look who I found! Andre didn’t hide him very well.” Trick lets out a squeal of surprise as she waddles over to Sonny, taking the child from his arms. “Oh Sonny, I don’t know how I can thank you!” She places a kiss to Sonny’s cheek, her face aglow with happiness. Sonny replies “I couldn’t stand to watch you sad one more day! I knew I had to do something.” Pete steps forward, wrapping his arms around Sonny in a fierce hug. “Thank you, Sonny. You made our day!” Sonny gives the couple one last smile and heads out the door.

Trick turns towards Pete, her expression shy. “Petey, do you want to meet your son?” Pete walks over to Trick, his hands out. “His name is Damon.”

Pete takes the child from Trick’s arms. “Well, hello Damon! I’m your daddy Pete!” The boy smiles at Pete. “Trick, why don’t you go get Damian. I’m sure he will want to know that his son is here. I’ll watch this little one while you’re gone.” Trick gently kisses first her son and then Pete before heading down the hall to find Damian.

Tommy yells “Come in!” when Trick knocks on the bedroom door. As she enters the room, she sees Tommy nursing her son on top of her bed. “Hey Trick! How are you? Are you looking for Damian?”

“Yes, Tommy. Sonny found our son and I was hoping to fill him in on the news! Is he around?”

“No, he went to visit Mikey in the Dark realm. Call out to him and tell him it’s important, he will come see you.” Tommy shifts the pup around until he is attached to her other nipple. “That’s great news! I’m glad he is home where he belongs.” Trick thanks Tommy and then heads back to her room.

Damian arrives to Trick’s call. “Hello, Trick. Is there anything you require of me?” Trick points across the room to where Pete is playing with their son on top of the bed. Pete sees Damian and moves out of the way so Damian can see his son. “Well, hello big boy! Daddy Damian is happy to see you!” Damian offers his hand to the boy, who grabs on tightly with both hands. “I see Daddy Pete has been taking good care of you! All three of us love you, sweetheart. I’m glad you’re back.”

The boy looks from Damian to Pete before blurting out “Dada!” at the top of his lungs. Pete laughs. “He learned that quick! He’s smart.” Damian smiles. “That’s because he has a smart mama!”

The three of them spend the rest of the day taking turns playing with Damon, until finally the boy begins to yawn. Trick says in her most strict momma tone “It’s time for this little one to be in bed!” She picks Damon up and heads towards the crib at the opposite end of the room, laying him down gently. Damon turns his head and waves to the three of them before closing his eyes to sleep.

Damian looks at Pete. “Thanks, Pete, for not minding my spending the day with the three of you. It means the world to me. And I hope that you can see fit to except my apology for sleeping with Trick while we were at Andre’s. She asked me to sleep with her. We were afraid he would hurt her if she didn’t get pregnant. You never know what that monster is capable of.” Pete shakes his head. “I’ve long concluded that you will forever be in my life, Damian. I’ve come to terms with our relationship. I just hope we can grow closer as the years go by.” Looking over at Damon, Pete continues. “We have a good reason to work at it lying over there in that crib, with another on the way.” Damian surprises Pete by giving him a hug before kissing Trick on the cheek. “I’ll see the three of you soon.”

Gabriel’s arrival in the Dark realm is a surprise to Mikey. “Hello, sweetheart! I was just thinking about you!” Gabriel gives his grandmother a hug. “Oh really? I thought I would visit you; I miss you so much!” The two hug then Mikey leads Gabriel to her office. Once they are seated, Gabriel says “I have plenty of free time on my hands, now that the war is over. I tried to talk to grandfather but he is too busy to see me. With Draven gone, he oversees communication with the other realms as well as his kingly duties. My father tried to take back his crown, but grandfather refused. He is sure that Andre is setting up another wave of soldiers to attack us. I sent him a message asking if I could take over Draven’s position, but he turned me down. He doesn’t believe that I have enough experience to head the army, even though I had my own corps. It’s almost as if he doesn’t trust me.”

Mikey gives Gabriel another hug. “That’s not true, Gabriel! Ray’s just sure that Andre will attack again at any moment. He and Adam plan to lead the army if anything happens. If it wasn’t for Luna’s tutelage, Draven wouldn’t have risen so quickly in his position. Don’t feel bad, Gabriel. Ray is just being overly cautious. It has nothing to do with you. The old man just believes that he can do everything, that he doesn’t need help. Believe me, I have dealt with situations like this for centuries! Most of the time, he won’t even allow me to help him!” Gabriel still looks concerned. “How is he going to keep in touch with the realms from the battlefield? He is going to have to trust SOMEONE to help!”

The two of them spend a pleasant afternoon together until Luna arrives. “Have either of you seen Draven?”

Mikey, suddenly concerned, answers “No, neither of us have seen him. What is going on, Luna? I thought you were watching over him?”

“I was! But this morning he just disappeared! I have no idea where he is, he is not responding when I reach out to him. The last thing that he told me was that he was going to spend a little time with Thomas, but Thomas hasn’t seen him in weeks! I’m frightened…”

Draven slowly opens his eyes to see Andre sitting next to him on his bed. The vamp is staring at him with intensity, like someone would study something through a microscope. Andre continually runs his hand gently over Draven’s chest, trying to antagonize his wolf.

“Good evening, Draven. Paulo is assembling his men so the fighting can begin again. This time, we will focus only on the Light and Dark realms. I’m done playing games with your family. It’s time to destroy them and all they hold dear.”

Draven pulls the sheet up to cover his naked chest. “No, Andre! Please…” Andre gives Draven a raised eyebrow, as if he is curious over what Draven will say next. “…I will do anything you say, please call off the attack! Focus all your attention on me! I’m begging you…”

Andre laughs. “Little boy, it amazes me just how much you are like your father! He is always trying to get me to give all my attention and punishments to him, instead of those that he loves! But this time it will not work. I have a score to settle with your family, and I will not stop until they are dust under my feet!” Suddenly Damian arrives to stand at the foot of the bed. “Damian! Come join us! We were just discussing the demise of your family…” Damian stays silent even as his eyes move from Draven to Andre. “Father, Paulo has kidnapped me. Andre wants the four of us to live together.” Damian’s face remains impassive, his stance one made from stone. Andre says “Oh Damian, say something to your son! He’s been waiting for you to join us! The four of us will live in this castle together, one big happy family!”

“Send us back, Andre. Draven and I are not yours. We belong with our family.” Andre stands, walking until he is nose to nose with Damian. “Take off your clothes, Damian, and lay down with your son. He has been missing you. Make him feel your love.” Draven shakes his head. “No, father, not again! I couldn’t stand it…”

Damian stares down Andre, who waves his hand in the air. “I said take your clothes off! Your boy is waiting!”

Damian takes his clothes off and climbs into bed with Draven, pulling him close. Draven lays his head down on Damian’s shoulder, and Damian wraps his arms around him. “Aww, father and son so sweet together! I’m going to love spending the rest of eternity with the two of you!” Draven whines in the back of his throat as a collar appears around his neck. Andre reaches out and tugs on it, making sure it is tight and secure. “There, son! You have a collar just like your father’s! The tag on it says, “Property of Paulo.” The collar your father wears has my name on it.” Draven tries to pull the collar off but fails. “The two of you will be very happy here. I have an idea! Since Paulo won’t be back for a long time, why don’t you take your father, Drave? Think of it as payback for his raping you before, placing that bite on your neck. Go on, take him, no lube, nothing. Damian can take it; he has taken it from me countless times. Now, Drave.” Draven looks into his father’s eyes, his voice sad as he comments “I’m sorry, father.” Damian nods his head once. “It’s alright, Drave. Do as he commands.”

Draven and Damian roll over until Draven is perched over his father’s back, Damian on all fours. Andre growls out “I haven’t got all day, son. Rape your father.”

Draven sinks into Damian, who whines out in pain. “Take it, Damian. Pretend it’s me tearing you up, if that is the only way that you can get through it. That son of yours is a real keeper! It will be fun to spend the rest of eternity with the two of you. Faster, Drave.”

Draven pumps his hips harder, chasing his high. Damian continues to whine, causing Andre to reach out and hold his hand, squeezing tightly. “Fight through the pain, Damian.” Andre then reaches and takes Damian’s cock in his hand, pulling harshly. “Let your boy get you off, Damian. I’ll help you fight through it. Drave, find his prostate, pound it! Make your dad come.”

Minutes later, Damian screams out as he comes on the bed below him. Draven’s movements become stilted as he blows his load deep within his father.

“Beautiful, both of you! Draven, pull out. Damian, clean your boy, then cuddle.” Damian follows Andre’s orders, his arms circling Draven as he rests with his head on Damian’s shoulder. “I’m sorry, father.” Damian kisses Draven’s brow, sighing. “It’s fine, son. I love you.” Andre’s eyes gleam with joy as Draven answers “I love you too, father.”

“The two of you will belong to my son and I forever. You will never see your family again. My troops will destroy the Toros, then I will take over the cosmos.” Suddenly there is a flash of white light, and Draven and Damian disappear.

The next thing they know, they are lying in Mikey’s bed in the Dark realm, Mikey standing at the foot of the bed. “Welcome home! Luna found a way to bring the two of you here to hide you for a bit.” Mikey blinks and both are dressed. “We have heard rumors that the war will begin shortly. We are going to need both of you at the front lines. For now, rest and eat. The two of you will need your strength.” Damian thanks Mikey, who brushes off his thanks. “We’re family. We help each other.” Mikey blinks and blood bags appear on the table next to the bed. “I will check on you later.”

After a meal and a nap, Draven and Damian make their way to Mikey’s office. They encounter three guards circled around Mikey’s desk, each of them agitated.

“My Queen, this plague arrived with such swiftness! So far, we have lost over five thousand vampires in less than an hour, many members of your own Vampaire. The physicians are clueless as to how to battle this disease! We need to get you to safety…”

Mikey turns to Damian and Draven, concern on her face. “The two of you need to go home immediately. The family cannot afford to lose you, and neither can I. I will reach out to Sonny for help. Hopefully this plague won’t spread to the Light realm…”

Damian steps forward until he reaches out, placing his hand on Mikey’s arm. “I won’t leave without you, Mikey. Draven can go home. I will stay here with you.” A soft, loving look crosses Mikey’s face. “I love the two of you, Dam, but you must go. I must stay here, but you are needed at the front lines when Andre attacks. By the grace of the Goddess and Sonny’s help I will get through this. Now go, both of you. I will see you again soon.” Mikey turns to her guards and commands “Evacuate the castle, leave me one page to help communicate with the army if necessary.” Mikey walks over to Draven and Damian, kissing and hugging the two of them. “I love you. Please send my love to Ray and insist that he doesn’t come here. I want him safe. Now go.” Mikey waves her hand and Draven and Damian end up outside Ray’s office. Without knocking the two of them enter to fill Ray in on the latest news.

“Mikey insists that you stay here. She is afraid that you will come down with the plague. She evacuated the castle and has asked for Sonny’s help. She wants us to prepare for war. What better way to win the war then by wiping out your enemy with an illness? It worked during the Creathean war.” Ray absently nods his head in agreement. “I hope she will be alright, and that Sonny can help her find a solution to this mess. The question is, will Andre attack us or the Dark realm first?”

The answer to this question arrives the next morning. Ray opens his eyes to find Mikey lying next to him in their bed. “I had to escape, Ray. The population of the Dark realm has been decimated. Paulo’s soldiers attacked us last night. I fought as long as I could before I realized that most of my army was dead. I brought with me the archives of the Dark realm, to keep it safe. I’ve failed, Ray.”

Ray takes Mikey into his arms, pulling her close. “You have not failed, sweetheart. You held on to the very end. We will fight to regain the realm, never fear.” Mikey sighs, burrowing as deep as she can into Ray’s arms. “My last two dozen Vampaire soldiers came home with me. I have set them up with rooms here in the mansion. They will now fight for the Light realm and the family.” There is a knock at the door. Ray yells “Come in” as Sonny bursts into the room.

“Grandfather, Grandmother, I have news. I finally managed to place a forcefield around the Light realm! It will keep Andre’s illness from spreading here. Now he will not be able to use illness of any kind to destroy us. I’m just sorry that I couldn’t save the Dark realm.” Mikey gives Sonny a fond look. “You managed to save us, that’s all that matters. We will gain control of the Dark realm again, it’s only a matter of time. Thank you, sweetheart, for all you do for this family.” Sonny gives the two of them a smile and then heads out of the room.

“What would we do without him?” Mikey asks. “I shudder to think” Ray replies before leaning down to take Mikey’s lips in a passionate kiss.

“WHERE IS SHE?” Andre screams. He arrived with a few of his men to take Mikey into custody. “You TOLD ME she was here! The only thing here is a stinking pile of dead vamps! WHERE IS MIKEY?”

A guard gives Andre a terrified look, fearful of what will happen next. “She was just here, Sir. She was fighting at the front lines. I came to get you as soon as possible…” Andre waves his hand and the guard gasps for air, clutching his throat and sinking to his knees. “You were TOO LATE! I wanted that bitch under my control! Now I will have to kidnap her from the Light realm! Why must you be so useless?” Andre waves his hand again and the guard disappears.

“…and then Andre made me rape father” Draven says, his voice filled with sadness and regret. When he doesn’t look directly at Thomas, he feels a hand gently run through his hair before playing with his collar. In a soft tone Thomas says “Babe, your father understands. He doesn’t hate you for it. Andre is the one that deserves the hate.” Draven moves even closer to Thomas on the bed, his body curling into Thomas’ side, his head on his shoulder. Draven knows that this may be the last time he sees Thomas, with the invasion on the brink of happening. “By the way, I have a question for you.” Draven raises his head, nodding once as a sign for Thomas to continue. “The last time I saw Luna, she made a comment about you turning evil. She said it’s in your blood. What is she talking about?”

Draven sighs. “When momma was carrying Gabe and I, Luna said that one of us would be born evil and take over the cosmos, the other good, the leader of the Light realm. I was hell on wheels as a baby, so they automatically assumed that I would be the evil one. So far, I have no evil traits that we know of. As far as we know, they could be hiding, but after all this time? I think Luna’s wrong on this one.” Draven raises his head to stare into Thomas’s eyes. “If I were to turn evil, does that mean that I’d lose you? Cause that’s the last thing that I would want.” Thomas shakes his head. “No, Drave, I’m not going anywhere, no matter what. You are stuck with me if you like it or not!” Draven smiles in return. “And you are stuck with me! I’m not going anywhere, Thomas. You know, sometimes I sit and think how things would be different if I let loose some evil, how much would it help the family?” Thomas replies “You will learn the answers when the time is right, sweetheart. Until then, you will simply continue to be the kind-hearted, precious Draven that attracted me to you.”

Draven lays his head back down on Thomas’s chest. “Good or evil, I love you, Thomas. I always will.” Thomas kisses Draven’s forehead. “And I love you, no matter what. We will simply take the future the way it unravels, sweetheart.”

Leonardo Aprile paces the first floor of Andre’s castle; his growing frustration shows on his face. Andre promised to meet with him well over an hour ago…

“Sorry I’m late, Leonardo. Plans to take over the Light realm have taken up most of my time. What is it that you wanted to see me about? Please make it quick, so I can…”

“You have kept me and my family in the shadows for far too long, Andre. Your obsession with your collection took your eye off the ball. That…” Leonardo wrinkles his nose in a show of disdain “…and your obsession with Damian Lavelli! If you spent as much time killing the Toros as you did playing footsie with that bastard, they would be eliminated by now!” Andre raises a hand to interrupt, but Leonardo continues. “You promised me that everyone would be dead by now! What the fuck have you been doing instead of killing those bastards?”

Andre’s temper rises. “For your information, we have destroyed the Dark realm. I just found out that Mikey has fled home to the Light realm. I sent another round of illness to the that realm, but so far there hasn’t been any results in our favor. If you would just be patient…”

“PATIENT? How much more patience do you think I have, hiding in the shadows? I was a fool to listen to you, to agree to this insanity! It would take nothing for me to put together an army, to bring the situation to an end!”

“NO! What makes YOU think that you have it in YOUR power to end the situation, Leonardo? I am going to be the one to destroy the Toros, NOT YOU! I’m going to make Damian my slave, destroying Mikey and the rest of that ridiculous family!” Leonardo looks into Andre’s eyes, sees insanity in their depths. Nothing Leonardo can say will change anything, short of killing Andre. Now there is a good idea…

“I will give you two days to destroy the Toros. If by then you have failed, me and my family are taking over. I want this issue solved IMMEDIATELY!” Leonardo walks up on Andre until the two are nose to nose. “I’m not kidding, Andre. You have two days.” Leonardo turns on his heels and heads for the front door.

“Fucking bastard!” Andre screams, punching a hole in the wall. Who is he to tell Andre what to do? It looks as if he is about to lose a partner…

“You were a werepire, father?” Draven asks, a shocked look on his face. The two had been sitting together in Draven’s room, sharing a pitcher of blood. “How did you manage to turn yourself back into a vampire?”

Damian gives a chuckle at Draven’s shocked expression. “Let’s just say I ended up that way and leave it at that. There was a Gypsy woman whom I did a favor for, and she suppressed the werewolf side of me. Technically I am still a werepire, if I were being honest. Truthfully, I do not miss those days of changing under the full moon! I’d rather use a spell and run with you at that time of the month…”

“Is there anything else I need to know about you, father?” Taking a moment to consider the question, Damian shakes his head. “No son. I think you know the most important parts of my life. But if I think of anything, I will fill you in, promise!”

Draven takes a moment to consider before asking “If it would help the family, would you set your wolf free?”

Damian leans forward, brushing the hair off Draven’s forehead. “I would do anything to help the family, son.”

Just then there is a knock on the door. Gabriel enters the room, a look of excitement on his face. “I’m so glad I found the two of you! I have exciting news!” Gabriel sits down opposite his brother and father. “Grandfather told me that he will start training me to take over the Light realm, when father Adam steps down of course! He told me that we can start right away! I hope to make the family proud, the same way you have, Drave.” Draven and Damian give Gabriel a hug and a kiss on the cheek, their excitement mirroring Gabriel’s. “Congratulations, son! I’m sure that you will make a perfect king someday.” Gabriel comments “I’m a bit nervous, but happy.” Gabriel rubs his hands on his thighs in a nervous gesture. “But what about you, Drave? When do you begin classes to take over the cosmos?” Draven gives a chuckle, his eyes darting towards Damian. “I’m not sure there is actual training for that, brother. If the day comes that I must take the roll, I’ll wing it. Of course, I’ll have grandfather, both our fathers and Luna to help me get started. But that day may never come, so for now I simply put the idea out of my mind. Right now, my attention must be on the front lines, if the fighting begins again.” Another knock sounds in the room and Mikey rushes in. “Andre’s men attacked the north side of the city a few minutes ago. Everyone to the front lines!” The four of them share a quick hug before heading to the front lines to their troops. When they arrive, they see Andre and Paulo at the head of the enemy’s army. Andre calls out “Surrender, Damian, and be my prisoner. I will call off my army if you would only bow down in front of me and show obedience.”

Damian swings his sword in front of him, growling out “Go fuck yourself, Andre!” which makes Andre laugh. “Just how I hoped you would respond, Damian! Now I have the pleasure of destroying you and yours…” Andre raises his hand and a band of jackals, led by Andre and his son, charge the family’s troops.

Andre sneers as he watches Damian slice through one jackal after another. He finally stands toe to toe with him, their swords clanging loudly in their ears. Andre growls out “You belong to me, Damian! Give in. You know you want to.” Damian makes a slash at Andre, tripping over a dead jackal. “Dream on, bastard!” The two rush at each other, swords raised high in the air. Just as Andre is about to pull out a handheld blade to stab at Damian, Andre disappears. In his place is Leonardo, lunging at Damian who must dodge to get out of his way. Over the din, Damian hears “You will find I’m more of a threat than Andre, Damian.”

“Leonardo! I’ve wondered where you were! I thought you gave up on the idea of killing me…” Damian thrusts his sword repeatedly at Leonardo, who manages to dodge each stroke. Leonardo laughs. “Me? I’ve been in the shadows, waiting for the right time to strike! It’s time that you learned your lesson, bitch! I run this game…”

Damian and Leonardo continue to fight as Paulo charges at Draven. “Husband!” Draven growls and Paulo laughs. “It’s high time I taught you a lesson! You should be home waiting for my return, like the good little bitch you should be! But if it will keep you in line…” Paulo swings his arm and his sword connects with Draven’s arm, causing him to curse loudly. The sound catches Damian’s attention, leaving him wide open for Leonardo to strike. As Leonardo turns his body to thrust his sword into Damian, Mikey suddenly appears behind Leonardo, running her sword straight through him. Leonardo’s body quivers as blood begins to pour onto the ground, his body sinking to his knees, his face distorted in agony. Mikey then pulls out her sword, swinging her arms wide, decapitating Leonardo with one swipe. Both Mikey and Damian turn in unison on Paulo, who smirks and disappears.

“Thank you, Mikey” Damian says as the three of them continue to fight jackals. Mikey yells “One bastard down, two to go!”

The day drags on. Just when the family is thinking that the push of jackals will never end, they suddenly disappear, leaving their dead and injured comrades behind.

“Incendeo!” All the dead jackals incinerates, causing Mikey to give Draven a fond look. “Luna taught you well, Drave! Now let’s regroup.”

Andre opens his eyes to find that he is standing in an empty room. As he steps forward, a wave of electric shock shoots through him. He tries spell after spell to escape the forcefield but fails

The door to the room opens, catching Andre’s attention. He notices a handsome young blonde walk into the room, coming to a stop in front of him.
“Hello, Andre. My name is Sonny. I am Damian’s son.”

Andre smirks at Sonny. “So, you are Damian’s lost boy! We were all wondering what happened to you! Some said you were dead, others said you were living as a recluse on another realm. I was beginning to believe that you were made up, like so many other individuals that were reported to be made by your father. It’s about time that we met, don’t you think? I was beginning to think you were afraid of me…”

“Not afraid, Andre. I simply had no role to fulfill until now. Your friend Leonardo is dead, Mikey killed him on the battlefield. I pulled you out of the fight so he would meet his fate. You, on the other hand, are destined to remain where you are, stripped of all powers. That leaves only your son for the family to deal with. Since he has only a fifth of your magick, he will be easy enough for the family to dispatch. Welcome to your new home, Andre.” Sonny turns to leave but Andre calls out “And what makes you think that you can so easily beat me, brat? You don’t have half the powers I possess! I will find my way out of here, and I will kill your family! DON’T YOU TURN YOUR BACK AND WALK AWAY FROM ME! I’M ANDRE DANTE! YOU WILL CURSE THE DAY YOU WERE BORN WHEN I GET MY HANDS ON YOU…”

The door to the room slams shut immediately as Sonny walks through it.

After another round of fighting, the family gathers at the mansion. Once all are seated in the library, Sonny appears. “I have Andre behind a forcefield on the ice realm. He is screaming his head off, vowing vengeance. I’m not sure how long I will be able to hold him. We need to take advantage of this, kill Paulo as fast as possible before he escapes.”

Without hesitation Draven says “I will be the one to set him up. I’ll let him think I’m surrendering to him, and then I will take him down.” The family begins to mumble their displeasure of this plan. “It must be me! We have no idea how long it will take for him to attack again, and he will be looking for a trap. He’s stupid enough to think that I am serious about surrendering to him. That will be my chance to strike.”

Mikey says “But we are not sure exactly how much magick he has Drave. If you try to attack him with a weapon, he will be looking for it and will deflect any attack you make. It will be one hell of a gamble you are taking! If you fail, you may be stuck there with him until the end of time.”

Draven squeezes Mikey’s hand, a grim smile on his face. “It’s a chance that I am willing to take. I will visit Luna, see if she can equip me with some spells. Or maybe it’s simply time that I become the evil self that has been proclaimed before my birth. Anything for the family.”

Luna appears in the center of the room. She walks up to Draven, tears running down her face. “It’s time for the prophecy to be fulfilled, young one.” She places her palm against Draven’s forehead. A blue beam of light fills the room, enveloping Draven. Everyone watches him quiver with the power that is being absorbed through his skin from the beam. Draven’s eyes begin to glow dark red as the evil power settles under his skin, his fingertips turning black. He turns towards Damian, an evil grin covering his face as his eyes meet his father’s. Suddenly Draven understands the feeling of freedom and power that his father has always said evil can bring. Draven feels as if he can take on the world…

When the light dissipates, Draven growls loudly “Thank you, Luna. I now feel complete. I am ready to take on Paulo and anyone else who gets in my way.” Mikey’s face turns pale as Draven turns her way. “What’s wrong, Grandmother? Do I frighten you now?”

Mikey gives Draven a lopsided smile as she slowly stands, walking over to Draven. She looks deep into his red eyes and sighs. “No, darling, you do not frighten me. You are now complete, the way you were meant to be before you were born. You have finally come into your own, and I’m proud of you.” Draven turns to Tommy, who is staring at her son with wide eyes. “And you, mother? Do I frighten you?”

Tommy stands as well, wrapping her arms around Draven’s middle. “No, you are my son, I will always love you. I just hope you can find happiness and completeness the way you are now, love. Your family loves you and will always be here for you.”

Draven looks at each member of the family before saying “Then it’s settled. Thank you, Luna, for giving me peace at last. I will take what you have given me and use it to defeat our enemies. I love you all.” Draven kisses Luna on the cheek before taking off to find Paulo, wanting nothing more than to end that bastard.

Draven arrives at the castle to find it abandoned. He stands in the middle of the living room, calling out “Paulo? Where are you, husband?”

Silence.

Draven closes his eyes, focusing on his husband. He feels a vibration, following it to the room in the Ice realm where Andre is being held. He finds Paulo standing with his back to him, trying to release Andre from his icy prison.

Draven’s icy voice calls out “Husband, I’m home!” as Paulo turns around to stare into dark red eyes.

Chapter Text

“Draven?” A shocked look takes over both Paulo and Andre’s faces as they take in Draven’s red eyes, his black fingertips. “What…happened to you?”

Draven drops his eyes to the floor, acting contrite. “What? Don’t I turn you on this way, husband? I’ve just come into my own, the person that I was meant to be since birth. Don’t you like my red eyes? The black of my hands? You sadden me, husband. And here I thought you accepted me the way I am! Maybe I should leave for good…” Draven turns to go, but Paulo’s hand grabs Draven’s arm to stop him.

“No, wait! Don’t leave! We must rescue father! He’s trapped inside a forcefield, and I cannot free him!” Draven glances at Paulo before he steps closer to Andre, a look of concern on his face. “Hello, father-in-law. Looks like Sonny has been up to no good…”

“Free me, Draven! My powers are not working! You must know someone who can help me…”

Draven locks eyes on Andre, an evil smile growing on his face. “And why would I do that, Andre? After all you have done to me and my father! I’d prefer you rot in hell for all time!” Turning back to Paulo, Draven says in a sexy voice “Come, husband, let’s go. I have a bed ready for the two of us. You can deal with your father later. I’d rather you fuck my brains out instead of waiting a minute longer…”

A horny look crosses Paulo’s face. He turns to his father and says “I will find someone to release you, father. Please be patient. I will be back.” Andre howls in frustration, his hands bouncing off the forcefield, pulling back as a shock runs through him. “YOU LITTLE SHIT! YOU JUST WANT TO GET LAID WHILE I’M IN HERE SUFFERING! HOW DARE YOU…” Paulo takes Draven’s hand, smiling as the two of them leave for their castle bedroom.

When they arrive, Draven avoids eye contact with Paulo, acting shy. He reaches out his hand, his voice soft. “I want you, husband. It’s time we get to be alone, just the two of us.” Paulo steps closer to Draven, his arms circling around him as he whispers “I want you too, darling. Let’s take advantage of the privacy and spend time together.”

After the two of them make out for a while, Paulo reaches out and pulls Draven’s shirt over his head. Draven does the same to Paulo, a slight smile on his face. They make out some more before removing each other’s pants, Paulo pulling Draven onto the bed with him.

Draven waits until Paulo has entered him before a small sword suddenly appears in Draven’s right hand. He stabs the back of Paulo’s neck, the blade running through the base of his skull and through the front, the tip sticking out of his throat a few inches. Paulo gasps in pain as Draven pulls out the sword, yanking Paulo’s head upwards by the hair so that their eyes meet, until he has room in the front to slice Paulo’s neck wide open from ear to ear.

Blood rains down on Draven, who smirks as he stares at his prey. He flips their bodies over until he is sitting up on Paulo, Paulo’s dick still inside him. Paulo reaches out to Draven, who reaches down and pulls Paulo’s arms up over his head until weakness takes over Paulo.

Draven says “Entanto Allumnio Striudum Plurdrum” as he decapitates Paulo, watching as his life force leaves his body, his eyes turning lifeless. “Allum Estro Untrio Scatruium.” With an evil growl leaving his chest, Draven continues to ride Paulo’s body until his completion, his come mixing with the blood already flowing off the side of the bed.

Draven catches his breath and then pulls off Paulo’s dick, standing next to the bed. He snarls out “Decontante!” and Paulo’s body incinerates, catching the room on fire. Draven dresses quickly and heads to the Ice realm to see Andre.

Andre screams when he sees Draven covered in blood. “YOU BASTARD! YOU KILLED MY SON! I WILL DESTROY YOU FOR THIS!”

Draven walks as close as he can to the forcefield, a smirk on his face. Waves of his power hit Andre through the forcefield, making him realize just how powerful Draven’s evil has become. “Your son deserved to die, just like you do! You will both rot in hell for your crimes! I used magick on him, he cannot be resurrected by anyone, including you!” Draven reaches behind him, yanking the collar off his neck and throwing it on the floor. “I’m free, and so is my father. We will find a way to destroy you once and for all. Enjoy your time in solitude, Andre.” With those words, Draven heads back to the library, where the family is sitting around lounging.

Tommy gasps out loud when she sees Draven covered in blood. Draven smirks at his mother. “Sorry, mom. I quite enjoy being covered in blood.” Draven turns his eyes towards Damian, who give him an evil grin. “Welcome to the dark side, son. I’m proud of you!”

Draven looks from one family member to another. “Paulo is dead. I used two spells to ensure that he can never be resurrected by anyone, including Andre. I quite enjoyed decapitating him.” Frankie stands and gives Draven a hug, Damian reaching out to squeeze Draven’s hand. Frankie says “We are all so happy you destroyed that bastard! Now if we can only find a way to destroy Andre…”

Everyone chatters amongst themselves as they head off to bed. Draven stops Damian, asking “Can we speak in private, father?” Damian silently takes in Draven’s stance for a moment before nodding his head. “Let’s get some blood and head to the living room.”

Once there, Damian recites a spell, and the blood disappears off Draven’s skin and clothes. “In case Tommy comes looking for us for some reason. I think you freaked her out by arriving covered in blood.” Draven gives Damian a smirk. “Would it surprise you if I said that I liked the shock value?” Damian shakes his head, his own smirk on his face. “That’s the evil in you. You are going to find out you enjoy quite a variety of things that you never thought you would before. Does that thought bother you?”

Draven reaches out and places his hand on Damian’s. “Not at all. Maybe that is what is bothering me, the fact that I don’t mind it. I can see why you are so comfortable within your own skin, father. The evil makes me feel as if there is nothing I cannot do, nothing I won’t do! And the magick running through my system! I have no idea how to use it, so I will have to wing it, but I feel so powerful! Do you feel that way all the time, father?”

Damian squeezes Draven’s hand. “Yeah, I do, son. But the power is different for each of us. Mikey hates to kill, she always has, unless it is in battle. She would rather use magick to punish those who deserve it. Me, on the other hand, I quite enjoy killing. Especially when the person or vamp truly deserves it, like Andre. That was my favorite part of being king of the Dark realm, passing out death decrees. I carried out as many deaths personally that I could. No, I’m not surprised that you find killing to be something you like. Like father, like son.”

Draven gives Damian a smile. “And what about relationships? I find that all I want to do is possess Thomas fully, make him mine so no one else will touch him. Is that the way you feel about mother?”

Damian nods his head. “The feeling of possession that I feel when I think of your mother takes my breath away. It took me a long time to be able to share her with Adam. Luckily, he understood, and was patient with me. I still get moments where all I want to do is scoop her up and fly to some deserted realm, focus all my attention on her. I’m sure you will have a similar experience with Thomas.”

The two of them talk for another hour, until Draven says “I will leave you now, father. I am headed to Navarre to see Thomas. I can’t wait to see his reaction to the new me! Thanks for spending time with me. I love you.” Damian pulls Draven in for a hug. “I love you too, Drave. Enjoy your time with your boyfriend. I’ll call you if we need you.”

Draven arrives in Thomas’s bedroom. The dim light from the fireplace plays over Thomas’s face and body, the covers pulled down to display his bare chest. Draven slowly approaches the bed, pulling the covers the rest of the way off of Thomas’s body. He stares down at his love, wanting to possess him fully. Draven then slowly lowers himself down on the bed, his head even with Thomas’s dick. Leaning forward, he licks a stripe from Thomas’s balls to the tip of his dick, licking and sucking on the tip before picking up his dick and deep throating it in one movement. Without hesitation, Draven sucks hard on Thomas’s dick, hoping to wake his love up from his sound sleep.

Thomas’s eyes practically bug out of his head as he bolts upright in the bed, wiping a hand across his eyes to brush the sleepiness out of them. His voice heavy with sleep, Thomas mumbles “Love? Where…” Thomas’s eyes then connect with Draven’s in the light of the fireplace, his own eyes widening when he sees a blood red gaze staring back at him, blackened fingers holding his dick at the base.

Draven moans as he quickens his pace, eyes staying locked on Thomas, who is moaning loudly, his hands gripping the sheet below him. In a broken voice Thomas calls out “Fucking love you, Drave!” as he shoots down Draven’s throat.

Draven pulls back and licks his lips, a huge smirk on his face. Thomas, his hands shaking, reaches to pull Draven up in the bed until they are lying next to each other. Thomas places a hand under Draven’s chin, pulling upward until their eyes meet.

“My God, Drave! Your eyes are so…” Draven tenses as he waits to hear what Thomas will say. “…beautiful!” Thomas links his fingers through Draven’s, staring at the blackened fingertips. “I see you have come into your own, love. Do you still want me?”

Draven leans in, his lips meeting Thomas’s in an intense kiss. When he pulls back there are tears in his eyes. “Of course I want you, Thomas! I want you more than ever. But it’s more than that. The evil in me wants to possess you fully, make you mine so that no one will ever touch you again. I will kill anyone who tries to get near you, keep you with me until the end of time. I have never felt this way about anyone except you. I must possess you fully.”

Thomas blushes under Draven’s words. “I belong to you and only you, Drave. I will never want anyone else.” Draven sinks his hand into Thomas’s hair, yanking back until he bares the side of Thomas’s neck. Thomas looks scared, which turns Draven on as well as thrills him to no end. Draven then growls and sinks his teeth into his lover’s neck, biting sharply until blood flows over Draven’s tongue. Thomas gives out a whine of pain, which excites Draven even more. When he finally pulls back there is blood on his teeth, an evil grin covering his face. “There. Now everyone will know you are claimed, Thomas. You are now my mate. There is no doubt that you belong to me.” Thomas laughs “Looks like I’m now the bottom of this relationship, huh?” Draven pulls Thomas’s hair with a fierce tug, a smirk on his face. “And trust me, you will learn to love it!”

Andre’s temper rises as time goes by. How dare that fucking family place him in this shity forcefield? He, who ranks above the rest of the creatures in the cosmos! If only he could find a way to escape this nightmare that they put him in, he’d get his revenge! He’d make each member of that fucking family pay for their insolence!

Andre’s thoughts turn towards his son. Paulo never was the smartest individual, but he was loyal. How dare that fucking Draven kill his boy! If he can believe what Draven said, there will be no way to resurrect him once he manages to escape. First Leonardo, then Paulo. For the first time Andre feels totally alone
…

Sharp feminine laughter fills the room. Andre looks around but doesn’t see anyone. A voice, dark and foreboding, cackles “Got yourself in quite the pickle, huh, Andre?”

Andre, his patience running thin, screams out “SHOW YOURSELF!” Laughter rumbles once more. “Just who do you think you are, servant, to yell at me that way? You should be prostrating yourself in deference to my superiority over you! You need to lower yourself a few notches there, buddy!”

Andre, never one to back down, places his hands on his hips and huffs out “And who in the fuck do you think you are, bitch? Don’t you know that I am the most brilliant warlock in the universe?” Laughter peels once again. “Then how in the fuck did you manage to get yourself locked behind a forcefield, genius?”

Andre, his face red with rage, barks out “I’ve had enough of your insolence! Just who are you, and what do you want? The last thing you want is to raise my ire…”

”…And the last thing you want to do is to raise mine! Do you want out of that electric cage you’re in, or do you want me to leave you all alone again? Your choice, Andre…”

Andre reconsiders his situation. While he would rather not be beholden to anyone, there is no one coming to his rescue any time soon. Choosing the lesser of two evils, Andre crosses his arms across his chest and orders once again “Show yourself!”

There is a flash of lightning seconds before Justine appears in the center of the room, hands on her hips. “Well, hello there, Andre! Seems you’ve gotten yourself into quite the predicament! Who placed you in that forcefield? And it appears that they have stripped your powers! They must be powerful indeed!”

“Justine! But you were killed!” Justine throws back her head and laughs wildly. “As if I can be destroyed! No, I’ve been in hiding until the right time to strike. You are not the only one who has issues with members of the Toro family! Now, who was it that managed to place you in there, Andre?”

Andre sneers “His name is Sonny; he is Damian Lavelli’s brat. Damian’s other son Draven killed my boy Paulo after I was placed in here. How have you managed to find me, Justine?”

Justine stares at her nails as she answers nonchalantly “That’s easy. I used an old scrying spell, one that hasn’t been used in centuries. I also use it to keep tabs on the Toros. Seems they have been very laid back since your capture. I think it’s time to change that, don’t you?”

Andre, always suspicious of others, asks “And what is in it for you, Justine? You’re not planning on making me a partner, are you? Because the last partnership that I had ended badly. I prefer to work alone.”

Justine laughs again. “And what makes you think that I would EVER partner with you, Andre? You are as trustworthy as a snake! You would turn on me the first chance you get! No, I will set you free as a kindness, a good deed if you will. You see, I know that you want to destroy the Toros. But if I do this, I do have a request.”

Andre’s eyes narrow in distrust. “And what would that request be, Justine?”

Justine moves even closer to the forcefield. “I want you to leave Mikey and Ray alone.”

It’s Andre’s turn to laugh. “And what makes you think that I will agree to such an outlandish request? Mikey has been my enemy since the day I was turned! I want the satisfaction of tearing her apart slowly. And Ray? You ask for too much. They are central to the family and therefore must be destroyed…”

“…and Mikey will be, but at my hand. See, she took Ray away from me a long time ago and she must pay for her actions! Once she is gone, I will be free to make Ray my own again, without any distractions. He’s mine and it’s about time he remembers that! So, you see, the fate of those two lies within my hands! I will destroy Mikey and make Ray my lover again!”

Andre is silent for a moment. He knows that Justine is powerful, but he is not sure exactly how powerful. Would he have a chance to destroy her after he is released from the hell he currently is in? Is it worth the chance?

In the end, Andre decides to take that chance. “Alright, Justine, release me and we can talk out the details. I’m sure that the two of us can come up with some accommodation that will make us both happy.”

With a smirk on her lips, Justine raises her arms in the air and recites multiple lines of a spell. Andre begins to feel power coursing throughout his body, feels the power bouncing off the inside of the forcefield. When his evil power has completely returned to him, Andre recites a spell and the forcefield shatters into a million pieces. Andre then takes a deep breath, returning Justine’s evil smirk as he steps closer to the vamp that set him free.

“Let’s head to my place. If you return to your castle, they will find you. Let’s lay low for a while and plan out our next move.” They head to an apartment in the Emerald realm. When they arrive, Justine heads to the kitchen to pour the two of them glasses of blood.

“I’ve chosen the two that I want to destroy, which Toro is at the head of your list? Are you still planning to make Damian your sex slave?”

Andre accepts his glass, a soft ‘thank you’ heard before he takes a long sip. “Of course. He belongs to me; we are bound together. He will spend the rest of eternity at my feet where he belongs. It’s the least he can do to pay back what has happened to my family.” Justine makes a noncommittal noise. “Making Damian was one of my greatest achievements, as well as one of my greatest problems. He has been willful from the start, a real handful. He influenced Vin, another vamp that I made, to turn against me. But I forgo the vengeance that I hold against him, for you to have him all to yourself. Simply promise me that you will make him pay for his insolence.”

Andre nods his head in agreement. “Oh, never fear, I will make him suffer! There will never be a day when he doesn’t feel my wrath. But he isn’t the only one that will pay. I will make Sonny pay for putting me in that forcefield, and Draven for killing my son. Damian will have to face eternity without his beloved boys.” Andre’s eyes meet Justine’s over the top of his glass. “And what do you have in store for Mikey?”

Justine smirks, her eyes lighting up at the very thought of dealing with Mikey. “Oh, never fear, dear Mikey will suffer my wrath. I plan to torture her very, very slowly, all the while I will hold Ray captive until he accepts the idea of the two of us together again. If he refuses to cooperate, I will simply have to brainwash him, so he forgets that bitch. Then he will be my slave, and I will own him FOREVER!” Andre looks deep into Justine’s wild eyes, takes in her crazed expression and wonders exactly what he has gotten himself into. ”Well, I know where I want to start. I am going to make Draven pay for killing Paulo. And the best way to punish him is to hurt his lover.” Justine nods her head in agreement. “That’s better than trying to punish him directly. If you wish me to help you in any way, please let me know! I delight in ripping people apart…” Andre shakes his head. “I think I’ve got this one, thanks Justine. I just need to find a place that has what I need…”

Peace and quiet fills the mansion for the first time in a long time. Instead of making everyone relax, it sets their nerves on fire. They are always looking for the other shoe to drop, waiting for the next attack.

The family takes to spending long evenings together in the living room, enjoying each other's company after being separated for so long due to the war. On this night everyone is animated, discussing current trends and the latest news from other realms. The younger members of the family are sitting together playing cards.

“C’mon, Draven! How long can it take to decide which cards to keep or throw? You’ve taking FOREVER!” Michael yells, throwing his hands around in frustration. Draven ignores him, continuing to study his cards. Finally, Anthony kicks Draven under the table, causing Draven to growl out his frustration. “Why won’t the three of you give me the time I need to…”

Draven disappears.

The next thing he knows, he is in a room like the one in Andre’s coliseum where Draven was raped. He is chained to the wall, arms over his head. More ominous torture devices fill the room, the ever-present St. Andrew’s cross in the middle of the room.

A door opens and Andre enters, coming to a stop inches away from Draven. “Hello, my little bastard. Welcome to my new shop of horrors. As you can see, the toys have grown larger, and I am excited to try them out. But whom shall I start with?”

Draven’s eyes almost bug out of his head. “How the fuck did you get loose? Sonny made sure to use multiple spells! You should still be behind that forcefield…”

Andre slaps Draven across the face. “Does that feel like I’m still locked up, bitch? No, I’m here to exact punishment. And I know just who to start with!” There is a flash of light and Thomas appears in the back of the room, his ankles and wrists tied to a rack. Draven starts reciting spell after spell, trying not only to release himself but Thomas as well.

Hours go by. Andre hurts Thomas over and over, healing him between sessions simply to hurt him again. A particularly harsh episode of reverse hanging leaves Thomas’s arms pulled out of their sockets, blood seeping through the pours in his skin. Andre is more demented than ever, more set out to do damage than any time in the past, all for Draven’s benefit.

Growing tired of the abuse, Andre unbuckles Thomas from the cross and drags him across the room to stand in front of Draven. Terror fills Thomas’s eyes as he struggles to remain on his feet, leaning heavily on Andre to stand upright. Andre looks from one lover to the other, an evil smirk on his lips. “Thomas, say goodbye to your lover. Draven, take a final look on your beloved. It’s time you both met your fate.” Thomas looks into Draven’s eyes, the love he feels for Draven shining brightly. “I love you with all my heart, Drave. I will miss you. Take care of yourself for me.” Draven, tears flowing down his face, fights the chains holding him to the wall as he replies “I love you, Thomas! I will always love you! You are a part of me…” Andre, pretending to yawn, growls out “All this love is making me sick to my stomach! Goodbye, Thomas.” A sharp blade appears in Andre’s hand. He starts to recite the very same spells that Draven used against Paulo as the blade slices through Thomas’s neck, decapitating him. Draven’s screams bounce off the walls, his thrashing against his bindings increasing as he takes in the death of his beloved.

Blood continues to flow out of Thomas’s severed neck and onto the floor at Draven’s feet, his head bouncing off the floor and rolling a few feet away. Thomas’s body crumbles to the floor.

Andre takes a deep breath and smiles even wider. “There, now we are even, brat. You took from me, and I returned the favor. You won’t be able to resurrect him, I saw to it. He will always be your lost love, one that you are forced to live without. I’m just proud that I’m the one that made that happen.” Andre calls out “Incendeo” and Thomas’s body burns away to ash, even as his head remains on the floor.

Andre walks up to Draven, placing his hands on either side of Draven’s head to hold it still, and places his lips in a searing kiss of ownership on Draven’s lips. Draven’s tears rain down on Andre as he deepens the kiss, shoving his tongue into Draven’s mouth. Draven tries to move his head but finds he cannot, frustration growing within him. The kiss seems to go on and on, Andre sucking the very breath out of Draven, who struggles even more against Andre.

Once the kiss ends, Andre pulls back just enough to look into Draven’s red eyes. A thrill shoots up his spine as he sees total devastation in the boy’s eyes.
“Time to send you home, brat. Here, I have a little souvenir for you.” Andre walks over to where Thomas’s head is resting on the floor. He picks up the head and walks back to within a few inches of Draven, calling out “Here, CATCH!” Draven’s arms drop just in time to wrap around Thomas’s head, and Andre immediately sends Draven home to his room in the mansion.

Draven is hysterical. He runs into his parent’s bedroom, grabbing onto Damian’s arm and without a word pulling him out of bed, dragging him down the hall to his room as a constant wail fills the air. When Damian arrives in the room, his eyes take in Thomas’s head which is now resting on Draven’s bed, the eyes staring off into nothingness.

“Lllllloookkk at wwwhhhattt Andre did, ffffathher” Draven chokes out, his hand gently resting on the top of Thomas’s head. “Hhheee killllled my mmman! Cause I killllled Paaaulo.” Wordlessly Damian pulls Draven to the couch, sitting down and pulling Draven down with him. He wraps his body around his son, holding on tightly. Draven begins to shake with sobs, holding on just as tightly to his father.

“Luna? Can you PLEASE come here? Draven needs you!”

Luna suddenly appears in front of them, leaning heavily on her cane. “Just what do you need, youngster?” Luna takes in Draven’s sobbing and Thomas’s head in one glance. “I was afraid something like this would happen. Andre was close with that piece of shit he called his son. I should’ve known that he would do something like this.” Luna walks over to Draven’s bed, gently picking up Thomas’s head. She concentrates for an hour, mumbling spell after spell while Damian continues to hold Draven. Finally, Luna gently places the head back on the bed, and approaches the two on the couch.

“There is nothing I can do. Maybe Sonny might be more help to you. I’m sorry Draven. I am also sorry that you are in pain as you are. This is tragic for one so young to go through.” Damian thanks Luna for trying to help, a sad look on his face. “We all liked Thomas. The entire family will feel this loss when they find out. But the main question is, when will Andre strike again? And to whom?”

Luna places a kiss to both of their cheeks, quietly taking her leave. Damian, rubbing his hands down Draven’s back, asks for Sonny within the depths of his mind. After a few minutes, there is a knock on the door. Sonny opens the door, his eyes taking in father and his brother on the couch. “What can I help you with, father?”

Damian nods towards the bed. “Is there any way to heal him, make him whole? Poor Draven…” Sonny stares at the bed for a moment, before sitting down next to Draven on the couch opposite his father.

“Drave, is it alright if I…borrow Thomas for a bit? I will be respectful. I just need to look up some things in my grimoires. I promise I will return him to you soon.” Draven, at a loss for words, nods his head and softly cries out “Thank you!” Sonny pats Draven’s arm, softly commenting “I’m so sorry you are suffering, brother. I promise to do my best to help you.” Draven nods, mumbling another word of thanks as Sonny heads for the door with Thomas’s head in his arms.

Draven refuses to let Damian let go of him. The two of them stay locked in a tight embrace, Draven’s head on Damian’s shoulder as tears continue to flow. In this moment they are more than father and son, they are as one formed by grief. Damian wonders if what the two of them had suffered together under Andre’s watch had permanently morphed their relationship into something more than just the typical father-son relationship. They are closer now than they have ever been.

Draven eventually cries himself to sleep in Damian’s arms. Damian lifts Draven and carries him to the bed, gently laying him down. Draven clings to Damian in his sleep, so Damian lays down next to his son, who cuddles into his father’s side, his head pillowed on Damian’s chest. Damian lies on the bed, staring at the ceiling as if it holds all the secrets to the cosmos.

Damian wishes that Mikey were with them, and she suddenly appears. Damian whispers to her what happened even as he pulls Draven closer to him. “What do I do, Mikey? He’s hysterical, it took forever for him to cry himself to sleep. I have no idea how to help him through this!” Mikey leans over from her seat on the bed next to Damian, placing her hand on Damian’s arm. “All you can do is what you are already doing, Dam. Just be there for him. You have a special bond with that boy, he needs you more than anyone else. Just be by his side and let him know you love him. You will get him through this eventually. To think, watching the one you love to die right in front of you! I hope this is the last time any of us must experience that!” Damian nods his head in agreement. He and Mikey talk for another hour before Mikey gently kisses the side of Damian’s face. “I must be getting back to the Dark realm. Please keep me updated as to how he is doing love.” Damian nods, thanking Mikey for visiting him.

Sonny returns six hours later with Thomas’s head in his arms. Draven wipes the sleepiness out of his eyes as he stares at the severed head of his love. “Brother, I’ve tried all I know. I will continue to try to find a solution, but in the meantime, I placed a spell on Thomas’s…head…so it will not deteriorate in any way. I also managed to collect Thomas’s ashes from the cosmos. I placed them in this small box.” Sonny places the head on a small table next to the bed, the box next to it. “I’m sorry that I couldn’t be there for you, Drave. I promise that I won’t stop until I find a solution.” Draven bursts into tears again but thanks Sonny for trying to help him.

As Damian goes to say something to Draven, he feels a pull and the next thing he knows, he is toe to toe with Andre. Damian takes a swing at Andre, who easily dodges out of the way. “I see you’ve heard the news, Damian. Has your little boy been crying on your shoulder? Does he miss his mate? TOUGH SHIT! I MISS MY SON JUST AS MUCH, BUT YOU DON’T SEE ME WHINING LIKE A BITCH! I’m taking it like a man!” Damian swings again, this time connecting with Andre’s face. Andre swings back his arm and connects with Damian’s stomach. “You are still my little bitch, brat! Bow at my feet and show me how much you missed me.” Damian digs his bare feet into the carpet, his hands coming to rest at his sides. “No, Andre. I’m tired of being your slave. Go fuck off.” Andre waves his hand and Damian feels a burning sensation throughout his entire body. He shakes his head, and the feeling intensifies, as if he had been dropped into flames. Andre circles behind Damian, kicking him in the back of his knees until they give out, Damian collapsing to the floor in a heap.

“Kneel up, bitch. Show me how you beg for my forgiveness.” Damian stays on the floor, so Andre grabs Damian by his long hair, hauling him up on his knees. “Now open your mouth, slut. Make me feel good. I know you missed this.” Damian clamps his jaw, his eyes showing defiance. This only makes Andre laugh. “Oh, little bitch, you are so adorable! You forget that I can make you do anything that I wish! Now OPEN YOUR MOUTH!” Damian gives another few seconds of rebellion before his mouth opens automatically, his face showing his disgust. Andre opens his pants and slaps his dick on Damian’s cheek. “Suck me off, whore.” Damian lowers his head, taking Andre’s dick into his throat with a resigned sigh of frustration.

“I see Draven managed to take off your collar when he took off his own. He may be free, but you are not.” Andre waves his hand, and another collar appears around Damian’s throat, pulled tight. When Damian pulls on it, it tightens even more. “Now you will remember that you are bound to me, bitch. You will never spend a moment in your life without me, one way or another. At the end of the day, I will be the only one left…” Andre comes down Damian’s throat, causing tears to enter Damian’s eyes. When Andre pulls back, Damian sinks to the floor in a heap, trying to catch his breath.

Mikey is sitting alone on her throne in the Dark realm when a cold chill fills the air. Mikey pulls her sweater closer around her as Justine appears before her.

“JUSTINE! We all thought you were dead!” Mikey calls out, her face showing her shock and surprise.

Justine laughs. “Did you really think that someone could kill me, Mikey? You tried countless times before, as I remember, and you failed every time! No, Mikey, I’ve simply been waiting in the shadows until the right time to strike. And since you are my biggest enemy, I thought I would start with you!” Mikey laughs, her hands on her hips. “Are you still angry that Ray chose me over you, Justine? That was ages ago! I thought you moved on…”

Justine takes a few steps towards Mikey. “Move on? Why would I want to forget about my man? You were the one to step in and distract him! Ray has ALWAYS belonged to me, and its high time I take him back!” Before Mikey can stand up from her throne, Justine blinks, sending Mikey to the Ice realm where she is placed in a cage. Mikey looks at the torture equipment surrounding her, each one more lethal than the others. Mikey tries spell after spell to break herself free but finds that her powers have been stripped.

Once satisfied that Mikey is detained, Justine arrives in Ray’s office. Ray, in the middle of writing a letter, doesn’t look up until he hears “Well, hello, husband! It’s been a long time since we’ve seen each other! You are looking as handsome as always…”

A cold chill runs down Ray’s back. “Justine! What in the…we all thought you were dead!” Justine throws back her head and laughs. “Just what I wanted you to think! Did you miss me? I missed you, husband…” Ray growls out “I am NOT your HUSBAND! I am married to Mikey, have been for eons! I forgot all about you! I never loved you, Justine…” Justine waves a hand and Ray cannot speak. He waves his hands in frustration, trying to get his point across. Justine circles around Ray’s desk, pushing him back in his chair. “I see you are still in love with that insufferable bitch, Ray. But that’s ok! It will be easy to make you forget all about her, to make you fall in love with me!” Ray shakes his head frantically, fear and frustration apparent on his face. “Come with me, Ray. I have a nice apartment in the Emerald realm. The two of us will make it a cozy love nest! You will forget Mikey, forget your family, focus your love and attention on me and me alone! What a nice life we will have!” Ray shakes his head no over and over. “Come with me, Ray.”

The two of them arrive in Justine’s apartment. Ray looks around him for an escape but finds none. Justine, noticing how frantic Ray is becoming, reaches out and runs her hand through Ray’s curly hair. “It’s going to be alright, love. All it will take is a spell or two…” Justine waves her hand and Ray can speak again, so he blurts out “I WILL NEVER LOVE YOU, BITCH!” Justine laughs again, waving her hand once more.

A look of confusion takes over Ray’s face. He looks around the room, his eyes finally falling on Justine, who rubs her hand up and down Ray’s arm. “Hello, love. Remember our apartment? I missed you today. How have you been?” Ray glances around again then replies “I’ve been well, Justine. Have I been here all day?” Justine answers “Of course, darling! You said you were going to wait for me, remember? I brought with me an entire case of your favorite wine. Let’s have a glass, after all, it’s our wedding anniversary! I’ve spent the day missing you and I want to spend the night in your arms.”

After sharing a bottle of wine, the two curl up together on the couch. Ray once again looks around the room, confused. “I feel as if I’m missing something, Justine. What could it be?” Justine gives a light chuckle as she comments “Trust me, Ray, there is NOTHING you are missing, except for a kiss.” Justine leans forward and places her lips against Ray’s, immediately deepening the kiss. Ray returns the kiss, his sigh of satisfaction loud in the still room.

Justine has never been happier.

Chapter Text

"Lick my boots, bitch.”

Mikey is on her knees on the floor. Her uncombed hair is billowing around her, blood and dirt covering her entire body. She is dressed in rags, her skirt (or what’s left of it) barely covers her ass. She has a busted lip and a black eye, bruises and cuts of different shapes and sizes covering her entire body. The shackles on her wrists and ankles are cutting to the bone, rivulets of blood soaking the floor.

“Fuck off.”

Justine kicks Mikey in the side of the head repeatedly, a smirk on her face. She grabs a handful of Mikey’s hair and slams Mikey’s head into her boot, smashing her face downwards until Mikey grunts loudly. “I said lick it, bitch! Show me some gratitude for putting up with your sorry ass! DO IT!” Justine waves her hand in the air, and Mikey immediately begins to lick the side of Justine’s boot.

“Ooohhh! Looks like you finally have her in line, Justine! Let me play with her!” Justine looks at Andre, trying to decide if she should let Andre have a turn at Mikey. “How can I trust that you won’t break her? I’m not ready to destroy her yet.”

Andre laughs. “I can have fun with her without destroying her! Please, Justine…” Andre gives Justine a pout. “…let me! I’ll put her together again when I am through!”

Justine leans down and grabs Mikey by the hair, making her kneel up. “Behave for Andre, Mikey. Or I’ll just have to hurt Ray…” Justine glares at Andre. “AND DON’T RAPE HER! The last thing I need is her knocked up!”

Andre walks over to Mikey, hauling her up off the floor. “Walk to the table, bitch.” Mikey, ever willful, drags her feet until she has to be dragged to the table. “I see you are looking for punishment. I’m just the vamp to give it to you!” Mikey growls at Andre, who backhands Mikey a few times. “Never mind, I’ve decided to strap you onto the cross instead. You need a good whipping.”

Once chained to the cross, Mikey calls out in a broken voice. “Justine, leave Ray alone! I’ll take any punishment so you will not harm him!” Andre waves his arm and a stringed whip with razor blades at the end appears in his hand. Mikey, turning her head to the side, whimpers when she sees what will happen.

Andre lays lash after lash on her bare back, tearing open long strips of flesh. Andre mutters a spell, and the dripping blood disappears. Once Mikey’s entire back is laid open, Andre uses his favorite trick—he throws acid on Mikey’s wounds. The smell of burning flesh fills the room, and Mikey passes out from the pain.

Andre plays with Mikey for another day or so, being as cruel as he can. When he is finally finished torturing her, he changes her body by giving her a vagina, the same way he did to Tommy and Trick. He rapes her, smashing her face into the floor as he rides her harshly. Mikey’s tears mix with the dirt on her face, leaving streaks on her face and neck. The first thought that comes to Mikey’s mind when Andre finishes is “Now I’m pregnant.”

Andre finally returns Mikey to Justine and thanks her for the fun. “You better go spend some time with Ray. The spell that you placed on him is wearing off. Soon he will know the truth about his situation. I’ll bind the bitch for you.” Justine nods and heads off to her apartment.

Ray is pacing the living room floor when she arrives. He seems agitated and sad, as if something were missing in his life.

“Sweetheart, I’m home!” Justine walks into the room, a huge smile on her lips. “I’ve missed you so very, very much darling! But what’s wrong? Why are you pacing?”

Ray stops in his tracks, a look of confusion crossing his face. “Justine? Why am I here? And what is it I’m missing? I feel funny…”

Justine waves a hand and approaches Ray slowly. She takes both of his hands in hers, squeezing lightly. “You are here because you live here, sweetheart. With me. You were waiting for me to come home to you.” Ray’s eyes glare at Justine as if he doesn’t believe her. “But what about Mikey, Justine? Where is she? Why am I not with her?”

Justine takes a second to think of her next move. Once again squeezing Ray’s hands, she gently says “Don’t you remember, Ray? Mikey died a few years ago! It was after she died that we ran into each other again, started our relationship. We have been happily married for two years now! Don’t you remember me, your wife?”

Ray looks as if he is struggling to believe Justine, who gently places a kiss to Ray’s cheek. “Sweetheart, why don’t the two of us sit down and have a glass of wine? I’m sure everything will come back to you in time. Let’s watch some tv together and cuddle up. All will be fine.”

An hour goes by before Ray begins to relax. Justine curls up next to him on the couch, running her hand up and down Ray’s chest and laying kisses on his cheek. Eventually Ray pulls Justine closer, placing a kiss to her cheek as well. “I’m sorry, honey, for not remembering. I don’t know what is wrong with me! I keep thinking that Mikey is missing, that I need to look for her. I’m didn’t realize that she is dead! I will try to remember in the future…” Justine turns Ray’s head until the two of them are staring into each other’s eyes. “It’s alright, darling. I understand your confusion. But Mikey is gone, and the two of us are a couple. Remember that. I love you, Ray, more than anything.” Looking at the clock on the wall, Ray sighs. “I suppose it's time for bed, it’s almost daybreak.” Ray stands, but Justine pulls on his arm. “Wait for me, darling. I feel like making love with my husband.” The two head off to bed, Ray still feeling a bit unsettled.

“I can’t believe that our parents are still missing!” Gee cries out, frustrated. Tommy shifts the baby to her other side, cuddling him close as he nurses. “I know. Sonny and Frankie have been looking nonstop, with no luck. Damian said that, as far as he has been able to figure out, they aren’t with Andre. Where could they possibly be?”

Frankie enters the room, moving to wrap his arms around Gee. “Hey you two. I came back to the mansion to have a meeting with Sonny. Neither of us have been successful so far. I’m getting frustrated.”

Gee asks “Has anyone reached out to Luna? Maybe she can help…” Frankie places a kiss to Gee’s cheek. “That was the first thing we did. Luna says that there is a blind spot in her vision, as if someone is deliberately trying to block her from seeing something. I bet it was Andre who did this. If he didn’t directly kidnap our parents, he is participating in the act with someone else.” Tommy, a look of concern on her face, asks “Are we SURE that Paulo is dead? Could Andre have resurrected him somehow?” Frankie replies “Not according to Luna. She gave those spells to Draven to use specifically, since they are foolproof. No one will be bringing him back.”

Sonny walks into the room, followed by Alondra. She walks directly over to Tommy, leaning down to kiss her mother on the cheek. “Hello, mother. I’ve missed you.” Tommy gives Alondra a huge smile, replying “I’ve miss you too, babydoll. I’m glad you came to visit.”

Frankie and Sonny discuss the last places that they have looked for Mikey and Ray. Sonny comments “I’ve been thinking. I wonder if whomever has kidnapped our grandparents has placed them behind a magikal curtain of some kind. The two of us have contacted at least 90% of the cosmos with no luck. They could be right under our very noses, and we wouldn’t be able to know.” Alondra, a look of concern on her face, asks “Then how in the hell we’ll you ever find them?” Frankie answers “Maybe Luna can help. She has lived longer than any of us. She might have some ideas.”

FOUR MONTHS LATER

“ANDRE!” Justine bellows, her hands clenched with rage. “YOU BETTER SHOW YOUR ASS HERE RIGHT NOW!!!” Minutes tick by. “I’M NOT JOKING, ASSHAT! GET YOUR UGLY FACE HERE NOW!!!!”

Andre shows up, his face showing his irritation. “What in the FUCK is so important, bitch? Don’t you know that my time is valuable? What could possibly be so important?”

Justine plants both her fists on her hips, her bottom lip pulled back in a sneer. “YOU, YOU FUCKING IDIOT! When you raped Mikey YOU GOT HER PREGNANT! SHE’S STARTING TO SHOW! I TOLD YOU NOT TO DO IT, BUT YOU DID IT ANYWAY!” Andre claps his hands in glee. “I’m going to be a father again! How exciting!” Justine walks towards Andre until their noses touch. “And I suppose that you’re going to want to keep the baby!”

“But of course! I’ve already lost a son, I’m not going to chance that it is a boy and I lose it to some stupid stunt that you pull! Give me the bitch. I’ll take care of her until the brat is born, then you can destroy her. It’s only another five months or so…”

“FIVE MONTHS! YOU WANT ME TO WAIT FOR FIVE MONTHS FOR A BRAT THAT YOU ARE HOPING IS A BOY? WHAT IF IT’S A GIRL, GENIUS? DO YOU REALLY THINK I WANT TO SIT AROUND AND WAIT FOR YOU TO DECIDE IF YOU WANT TO KEEP SOME PIECE OF SHIT, INSTEAD OF DESTROYING MIKEY LIKE I WANT!”

“YES! THAT’S EXACTLY WHAT I EXPECT YOU TO DO! YOU WILL STOP TOUCHING HER THIS VERY INSTANT, UNTIL SHE GIVES BIRTH! AND TO PROVE THAT I AM SERIOUS, I’M KEEPING HER WITH ME UNTIL SHE GIVES BIRTH! NOW WHERE IS SHE?”

Justine shoves Andre. “She’s in safe keeping until she has the brat. I don’t trust you to take my fun away! You can see her, but she belongs TO ME!” Andre waves his hand through the air and then laughs. “It would seem that we are at a standoff, dear Justine. You see, I’ve just removed Ray from your apartment and placed him in hiding. If you want him back, you will hand over Mikey to me, until the brat is born. NOW, JUSTINE…”

Justine flies to her apartment to find that Ray is indeed gone. She flies back to Andre, rage coloring her face. “GIVE HIM BACK!”

“NO! Not until I get Mikey!”

Knowing that she has been had, Justine waves her hand and Mikey appears at Andre’s feet. Andre picks her up bridal style and says “There. Your little hubby is back where he belongs! Later, Justine.” With a nod of his head Andre and Mikey disappear.

Justine heads back to her apartment to find herself alone. Just as she is about to scream at Andre, the door to the apartment opens and Ray walks in.
“Honey, we ran out of blood bags. I went to the store and…what’s wrong? Are you mad at me?”

Justine quickly rearranges her face to take on a gentle smile. “Why, no, sweetheart! I’m so glad that you made that trip out for us! I’m sorry, I forgot to buy some when I went to the store the other day. You are so wonderful, darling!” Ray gives Justine a smile in return. “I also bought you these.” He hands Justine a bouquet of roses.

“Oh Ray! They are SO beautiful! You are so sweet! Thank you, sweetheart!” Ray walks over to Justine and places a kiss on her cheek, before sitting down on the couch. “Once you get them in water, there is something that I wish to speak to you about.” Justine stares at Ray for a second before heading into the kitchen to put away the blood bags and to take care of the flowers. “I’ll just be a moment, dear.”

When she arrives back in the living room, Ray reaches out his hand and pulls Justine down next to him. “I have something to ask of you, but it might upset you.” Justine takes a deep breath and smiles once again. “Now sweetie, there is nothing you cannot ask me! What is on your mind?”

Ray clears his throat before asking “I know you told me that Mikey died, Justine. But what of the rest of the family? And why can’t I remember where our home was? I remember Tommy, and Gee, as well as Damian, but I have no idea where they are! Why don’t I know? And most important of all…” Ray looks distressed, the look on his face sending a bolt of regret through Justine. “…WHERE ARE THEY?”

Justine takes both of Ray’s hands in hers, squeezing tightly. “Baby, don’t you remember? Andre wiped out your family, Mikey included. You were the only living member of your family left! You were badly injured when I found you, I thought you were sure to die! I brought you here and nursed you back to health. As time went on, you realized that you had fallen in love with me, the same way that I have always loved you. You asked me to marry you, and I said yes! We wed in a simple ceremony. We have been happy for the last two years, living here. Listen Ray…” Justine squeezes Ray’s hands again to get his attention. “…I know that you miss your family. Every so often you want to reach out to them, to find them and spend time with them. But baby, they are long gone. I know this hurts, and I’m sorry that you are suffering this way, but I am here for you every step of the way. You have me, sweetheart, for eternity. Never doubt that.”

Tears filled Ray’s eyes as Justine spoke. “Everyone? Even my grandchildren? There’s no one left?”

Justine fights to keep in a sigh. “No one, darling. Andre wiped everyone out, even Damian whom he vowed to keep for all time. He went on a rampage after Draven killed his son. Andre set your mansion on fire, burned it to the ground. You were found in the garden, burned over 90% of your body. It took all of my skills to heal you. The mansion is long gone, and so are everyone from your past. You only have me, darling, and I promise to stay by your side for the rest of time.”

Ray’s head drops and tears fall on their interlocked hands. Justine pulls Ray into her arms, holding him close. “I love you, Ray.” Ray nods in return, words escaping him in the moment. Justine cannot help but feel sorry for him, since he is feeling so alone. It’s the closest thing to empathy that Justine has ever felt, and she feels guilty that she has made the man that she loves hurt so deeply. But most of her doesn’t care, since she finally has what she has always wanted—Ray all to herself.

Ray’s tears eventually dry. He looks up at Justine, and in a broken voice says “I want us to go to the mansion site, Justine. I want to give my respects to my family. I never want to forget them.”

Now what is Justine going to do?

Thinking quickly, she says “But Ray, darling…do you really want to open those wounds again? After all the healing that you have done?” Ray nods his head. “It’s the least that I can do, Justine. I want to remember everyone while they are fresh in my mind, while I can.”

Justine thinks things over again before trying with “But the mansion is gone, and there is nothing but a barren wasteland where it was.” Ray shakes his head. “NO, THERE ARE THE GRAVES OF MY GRANDCHILDREN, THE TWINS THAT TOMMY LOST! I WANT TO GO SEE THEIR GRAVES MYSELF!” Justine pulls Ray until his head is resting on her chest. “Alright, sweetheart! Tomorrow we will go visit their graves! You need to relax! I promise I will go with you tomorrow. Now, it’s getting late, we need to go to sleep. C’mon, love.” Justine pulls on Ray until he stands up, following Justine to bed. Once they are there, Ray says “Thank you, Justine, for understanding how important this is to me! Goodnight, dear.” Justine, a look of frustration crossing her face in the dark, answers sweetly “Goodnight, love.”

Once Ray is asleep, Justine heads to the Onyx realm (which is deserted) to find a plot of land that she can pass off as the location of the mansion. Once she finds one, she heads to the real mansion, walking outside until she finds the graves that Ray was talking about. Staring at them for a moment, she heads back to the Onyx realm to make duplicate headstones.

The next evening finds Ray excited to visit the site of the mansion. “C’mon, let’s go, Justine!” Once there, tears immediately fill Ray’s eyes. “The entire realm was destroyed, Ray. There’s nothing left here, except for funeral markers. Is this what you are looking for?”

Ray walks up to the two small tombstones engraved with his grandchildren’s names on them. “Yes, this is it! My poor dead babies, left alone here on this wasteland.” Ray walks between the stones, placing a hand on each one. “Justine, is it possible to move them to where we live? I know that you know magick. Can you make that happen? I can’t stand the thought of leaving them in this desolate place all alone! Please, Justine?” Justine considers it for a moment. If the stones were closer to Ray, maybe he wouldn’t want to ‘visit’ this godforsaken place again. “If you promise me that you will never return here, Ray. It isn’t good for you to keep ruminating on this. You will have the graves close to you, so you can visit them anytime you wish, but as for the rest, leave it alone. Leave the past in the past, where it belongs.”

Ray agrees, saying “You’re right, dear. Thank you for moving them for me.” Justine nods and the graves and the two of them head home. When they arrive, Justine says “I’ve placed them in the garden outback. I’m sure that no one will complain, since there are other headstones out there. You can visit them anytime you wish, love. I’m happy to do this for you.” Ray leans down and kisses Justine. “I’m grateful, Justine. I’ll visit them every day.”

Mikey cringes as Andre rubs his hand across her stomach. “Already looking pregnant, Mikey. Just think, I am the only one who managed to knock you up! Ray couldn’t do that, neither could Andrew! It took a real man like me to make it happen.” Mikey tries to move out from under Andre’s touch, but she is wearing a metal collar around her neck, the short chain keeping her in place. “It’s MY baby, Andre! You’ll never have it! I’ll raise it with Ray…”

“And how will you do that? You don’t even know where he is! No, sweetie, you are destined to live here with me until that brat is born, then I’ll send you back to live with Justine. The brat is mine! You will never get to spend even a second with it…”

Tears flow down Mikey’s face. Her new lady parts are aching as the baby grows, her body not accustomed to the new changes. Andre reaches down between her legs and rubs his fingers against her lady parts, causing her to shiver. She feels repulsed that he is being so gentle with her, expecting nothing but rape. When he sinks his fingers into her, an unwanted moan escapes her lips.

“That’s it, Mikey. Enjoy the pleasure that I’m giving you. Accept any bit of kindness that I give you, since you won’t get much from me.” Andre sinks in another finger, and Mikey withers on the bed. “Find your pleasure, girl. Make it happen.” Suddenly Mikey’s body shoots as far upright as her bonds will allow, moans practically dripping from her lips. Andre pulls his hand back once she is quiet, removing his clothes and laying on top of her. “My turn. Don’t disappoint me, baby.” Mikey lays still while he rides out his pleasure, afraid for the baby if he is upset with her.

Andre leaves her after he is finished with her. The chain attached to her collar is just long enough for her to roll over on her side. She lays on the bed, her hand gently rubbing over her stomach.

Andre’s baby. The very thought sends shivers down her spine. What would Ray think? Mikey’s eyes fill with tears at the thought of her beloved husband, held in Justine’s clutches. Andre has reveled in giving Mikey details as to what Ray is suffering at the hands of Justine. Love? That bitch doesn’t know that word love!!!

Mikey tries for the millionth time to reach out to Ray and to the family, to contact them in some way. The power she sends out bounces back, giving her a headache. Will she ever be able to reach them? She is beginning to lose faith…

Damian tries to roll over in bed, but an arm is weighing him down. Wiping the last bits of sleep out of his eyes, he tries again to move to no avail. When he glances over his shoulder, his chest fills with dread.

Damian is pulled back tightly against Andre’s naked body. He was hoping it was Adam or Tommy holding him tightly, so he is extremely disappointed when he realizes that it’s Andre instead. Damian reaches his hand to grab Andre’s wrist, picking up his arm and pulling it so he can slide out from under it.
“Where are you going, Damian?”

Trying desperately to hide his sigh of disappointment, Damian mumbles “To the bathroom.” Andre grunts, his voice exasperated as he replies “Then hurry. I want to go back to sleep.”

Damian slowly makes his way to the bathroom. He does his business then looks in the mirror, shocked at what he sees. There is dried blood on his face and neck, the blood vessels in his neck standing out where Andre bit him. He takes a washcloth and wets it, rubbing at the blood stains with gentle strokes.

“DAMIAN! HURRY UP!” Damian growls in frustration as he throws the cloth into the sink, looking in the mirror one more time before heading back to bed. Once there, Andre pulls him back into the bed, his hand curling around Damian’s wrist. “On your back, bitch. I want to take you again before I go back to sleep.” When Damian begins to whine, Andre laughs. “If you didn’t want sex, you shouldn’t have woken me up!” Damian lays on his back, replying “I had to pee. It’s not my fault that you are horny as hell! Why don’t you jerk off while I fall back to sleep…”

Andre climbs on top of Damian, spreading Damian’s legs wide. “Why don’t you tell the truth? You love it when your husband fucks you…” Damian gives a snort. “You are NOT my husband! You are merely my keeper. My husbands are home in bed, missing me. You are not that lucky, Andre.” Andre slides inside of Damian, a sigh leaving his lips as he begins to pound himself deep inside Damian. “You ARE my…husband. Never…forget it!”

When they are finished, Damian risks pissing off Andre by asking for the third time this evening “Where are Ray and Mikey, Andre? I know you know where they are. The thing that I don’t understand is, if you had them, you would be bragging about it. Who are you working with?” Andre pulls his hand back and connects it with Damian’s jaw. “I told you a million times, I have no idea what you are talking about! Now be a good little wifey and go to sleep! I’m tired of hearing all your theories and your questions! SHUT UP AND GO TO SLEEP!” Andre wraps his arm tightly around Damian, pulling him back into his chest again. Damian sighs and settles in for the rest of the night, unhappy that he couldn’t find any more information.

Draven lies in his bed, staring at Thomas’s severed head that is sitting on the table next to his ashes. So far, no one has been able to find the right spell to heal Thomas, and Draven is becoming more and more frustrated as time goes on. He has reached out to individuals in the cosmos who claim to have magickal abilities, but they have all been failures.

Staring at Thomas’s head has become an obsession of sorts for Draven. It’s almost as if he believes that if he stares at it long enough it will come to life. Doing so has brought him peace, in an odd way. But the nights are still lonely, and his life is still solitary, so staring at his love’s remains is all he has left.
As Draven moves to turn out the light and go to sleep, he hears Thomas’s voice echo through the room. “I miss you, Drave. I love you more than ever. I wish I was with you.”

Draven sits up in bed, irritated. “Alright, Andre! Cut it the fuck out! It’s not funny!”

The voice returns, this time stronger. “It’s not Andre. Don’t you remember me, the sound of my voice? I’m the love of your life. I know that you haven’t forgotten me, so why do you doubt me? Is it so strange that I would come to visit you, Drave?”

Draven doesn’t know what to believe. He has never believed in life after death, so how could this be happening? He still thinks that it is a joke played by Andre to get even with him for Paulo.

“If it really is you, how do I heal you?”

“Contact Lela Cobel in the Amethyst realm. She knows how to heal me. Take my head and my ashes with you. Tell her Tommy sends his love.” Draven gets out of bed, pulling on his clothes. “Alright, I will do as you request. I hope this works.” The voice says “It will, never fear, love. I will see you soon.”

Draven ends up in front of a large log cabin in the Amethyst realm. There is light shining from the front window, so he walks up to the front door. It takes a few minutes for someone to answer his knock at the door, frustration taking over him while he waits.

The door finally opens, and a young woman asks “Yes? How may I help you?” The woman is so beautiful it takes Draven’s breath away. She is around the same height as him, her long flowing black hair ending at her knees. Her delicate feature show surprise and curiosity when her eyes take in Thomas’s severed head.

“Tommy!” Her expression turns into one of horror. “How…what happened? And who are you?” Draven, tears filling his eyes, says “My name is Draven Lambert Lavelli. Please, may I come in and explain everything? I was told to come here, that you could help.” Lela moves back to allow Draven to enter her home.

An hour passes as the two of them talk, Thomas’s head resting on the table between them. “…and a voice, either Thomas or someone posing as him, told me to come here, that you could help me. Please, if you can, do so! I so desperately want Thomas back in my life.”

Lela reaches out and gently runs her hand through Thomas’s hair. “I believe I can help you, Draven. And I must ask for your help in return.” Lela stands, picking up the head and the box of ashes. She heads to her dining room table, placing the head in the center of it. She then opens the box of ashes and pours them in a circle around the head. Lela begins to chant in a language that Draven has never heard before. She waves her arms above her head and chants louder, the ashes moving in a circle around Thomas’s head. Draven feels a chill fill the room, sees his breath as he breaths out.

The ashes begin to multiply, moving off the table and forming into the shape of a man. Chanting louder and louder, sweat begins to pour down Lela’s face. Thomas’s head begins to float in the air, coming to a stop just above the ashes.

Time has no meaning. Flesh begins to grow within the ashes, clothes appearing out of nowhere. The eyes within the head begin to move, the lips trying to form words. A sudden breeze fills the room, and the head attaches itself to the body. Draven cannot believe what he is seeing—his Thomas, standing in front of him once again.

“Hello, Drave. I’m glad to be with you again.”

Draven steps forward, wrapping his arms around the man that he loves. He cries harder as he feels strong arms encircle him, pulling him close. Draven cups his hand against Thomas’s cheek, pulling him in for a deep, lasting kiss.

Lela’s laughter fills the air. “The fairy tale is complete again! Welcome back, Tommy!” Thomas pulls back just enough to thank Lela, who brushes off his thanks. “You would’ve done the same thing for me, if you could. I just wanted to see the two of you together. Draven looked so sad when he showed up here! I’m glad the two of you are once again happy together.”

After the two of them stop kissing, Draven turns to Lela. “You wanted a favor from me. What is it? I will do anything to repay you for what you have done.”

Lela looks from one man to the other. “I was wondering if you and your family could take me in. I am all alone, and I fear Andre. He took my entire family for their magick skills, I am the last of my kind. Could I possibly live with you? I will help you in any way I can to fight that bastard.” Draven steps up to Lela, taking her in his arms. “Of course you can live with us. Bring what you need. I’m sure my family will welcome you with open arms.”

While Lela packs, Thomas whispers “If Lela helped you heal me, what makes you think that Andre won’t kidnap her to heal Paulo?” Draven answers “That’s why I want her with us. Maybe there is a way for Sonny to mask her powers, so Andre won’t find out. There must be a way.” Once Lela is packed, the three of them head to the Light realm, where Draven takes Lela to a room in the mansion. “I hope you will be happy here. I will go and tell the family that you are here.” Lela thanks Draven and goes to unpack.

The family is overjoyed that Thomas is once again alive. They all agree to welcome Lela into the family. Damian takes Draven into his arms, whispering “I’m so glad that you are happy again, son. Go, take that boy to bed and wear him out! We will see you whenever you come up for air!”

Thomas and Draven spend the rest of the night together making love. Finally spent, Draven turns into Thomas’s arms. “I will be forever grateful to Lela for healing you! I missed you SO much, you have no idea! I never gave up hope, though, I thought that we would find someone to heal you eventually.” Draven runs his hands all over Thomas, as if convincing himself that he is truly alive. “So, what was it like, being dead?”

Thomas places an arm behind his head and answers. “Cold. Dark. Everything echoed. Lonely. I was beginning to worry that I was dead for good. I’m glad you never gave up on me. But the thing that was the most upsetting was watching you mourn my passing. That was hell, to see you so sad and upset. All I wanted to do was to hold you, to wrap my arms around you and tell you that everything would be okay, but I couldn’t. I hope to never go through that again. Next time, I want to go straight to either heaven or hell, the last thing I want to do is hang around.”

Draven looks closely at Thomas’s neck. “The bite marks that I gave you have disappeared.” With a saucy grin, Thomas replies “Then you better make another set, hum?”

Draven takes a deep breath and leans forward, his fangs sinking deep into Thomas’s neck. Thomas gives out a pained moan, the sound sexy to Draven’s ears. He bites even further, making sure that the marks will be easily seen from far away. He wants to leave no doubt that this amazing man belongs to him.

When he pulls back, blood on his teeth, Thomas moans out “Take me, Drave. Make me yours in every way possible.” Draven moves over Thomas, his hand reaching between Thomas’s legs. “So tight for me. I won’t last long.” He pulls Thomas’s legs up over his shoulder and slowly sinks into his body, both making moans of satisfaction.

Draven begins to rock back and forth, his rhythm failing him. The two whisper words of love to one another as they reach completion. They lay in silence for a while, just reveling in the love they feel for one another.

“I want to stay.” Draven raises his head, a look of shock crossing his face. “But I thought you would want to go home, take back your throne. Are you SURE you want to stay here with me?” Thomas takes one of Draven’s hands in his own. “My family has replaced me on the throne in my absence. A little while longer won’t hurt anything. No, I want to stay here, spend time with you. We have so much lost time to make up.” Draven stares into Thomas’s eyes, at a loss for words. He instead shows his thoughts through a deep, lingering kiss of thanks.

The next evening, Thomas and Draven introduce Lela to the family. After everyone introduces themselves to Lela, she looks around the room and says in a far-off voice “Two are missing. One is pregnant, the other is lost within his own mind. I feel sadness them both. They miss each other very, very much.” Frankie, excited, asks “Can you help us find them, Lela?” Lela looks around the room, scanning faces. “I feel a curtain between them and us. Someone is trying desperately to hide them. I see a woman with wild long hair. She is behind this deception. She wants revenge on the female, wants the male for herself. She is working with Andre; he is the father of the baby the female is carrying.” A gasp is heard from everyone at this news. Andre the father of Mikey’s baby?

“I should’ve expected Justine was behind this” Damian growls out. “That bitch has hated Mikey since Mikey became a vampire. And it’s not surprising that she is working with Andre with all this. But the question is, how can we find them?”

Lela says “I see two gravestones with the names Bridget and Ray Jr. Does that help?”

Everyone shares a look of confusion. Tommy says “But those stones are right outside in the garden! Are you saying that they are here?”

Lela shakes her head. “No, these stones are not weathered, they are brand new. They are out in a garden, not the garden outside this mansion. They appear to be a copy of the ones outside.” Everyone’s confusion grows. Why are there two sets of stones? “I see an apartment; this wild hair woman lives there with the man. The captive woman is in a dark, cold place. I see chains holding her to a wall. She looks about four months pregnant.”

Growing frustrated, Adam growls out “How can you see everything BUT WHERE THEY ARE?” Lela turns to Adam, amused. “My first werepire. You certainly have the temper of one! There is a veil covering my vision, Adam. It’s only allowing me to see certain things. Whomever conjured the veil is a skilled practitioner of magick. I think I know who might help us, though. She owes me a favor…” There is a flash of light and Luna arrives in the room. Her expression is startled as she leans on her cane next to the fireplace.

“Hello everyone. This is a surprise.” Luna takes in Lela standing in the middle of the room, her expression turning soft as their eyes meet. “Well, hello daughter. I see you have moved in with the Toros. I’m glad.”

Lela smiles at Luna as she walks over to join her. “I hope you can help, Mother. I have an idea. Do you remember the spell that you used on Elias? If the two of us recite it, I’m sure that we can break through the veil covering everyone’s vision.” Luna nods in response. “Please, take my hands, Mother. Let’s chant.” Lela turns to Sonny, Alondra and Frankie, commenting “You three may join in as well. The more the merrier.” Luna and Lela start the chant, the others joining in. It takes almost ten minutes of chanting before Lela gasps. “I see it! Justine placed it there. Just a little bit longer.” The chanting continues. After a few more minutes, a bolt of lightening shoots through the room. “It’s gone! We must hurry if we are going to rescue them!” Luna squeezes Lela’s hand before turning to Sonny and saying “We need a protection spell on the mansion IMMEDIATELY!” Sonny nods, heading to his rooms where his magick books are located. Lela turns to Frankie and says “I’ll take care of the female. You go after the other. I’ll meet you back here.” Before anyone can say anything else, Lela disappears.

She appears in front of Mikey, who looks up in surprise. “I’m Lela. I’m here to rescue you.” Lela concentrates on the chains holding Mikey to the wall. They melt away, leaving Mikey free to stand. Lela takes her hand and the two of them disappear in thin air.

When they arrive at the mansion, Tommy moves to take Mikey in her arms. “Oh, Mikey I’m glad you’re here!” Looking confused, Mikey turns to the others. “But what about Ray? Where is he?” Tommy replies “The others went to rescue him.”

Frankie and Alondra arrive at Justine’s apartment. They find it empty. Frustrated, Frankie looks out of the window and sees Ray kneeling in front of two tombstones in the back garden. They run outside to approach Ray.

“Ray! You have to come with us…”

Ray turns to Frankie and Alondra, a look of terror covering his face. “NO! YOU’RE GHOSTS! My family is DEAD, these are the only family I have left. Begone! Deceive me NO MORE!” Frankie turns in astonishment to Alondra, who looks as confused as he does. The two know that they have very little time to accomplish their mission, so the two of them reach out and grab one of Ray’s hands, pulling him forward. Alondra says a quick spell and the three of them arrive in the mansion.

“Father!” Tommy yells with glee, so happy to see Ray, who looks around him in shock. He begins to stutter “Hhhhow did yyyou all…NO! This is a TRICK! YOU’RE ALL DEAD!” Ray turns to Mikey, sees her pregnant stomach and becomes hysterical. “THIS IS A PLAY, A FANTASY! YOU ARE ALL DEAD! Otherwise, how could Mikey be here, and PREGNANT! Andre did this, he’s to blame! He killed you, KILLED YOU ALL…” Mikey slowly moves towards Ray, her hands outstretched in front of her. “This is no trick, Ray. We are all here. Your family missed you; we all love you! We are all real…” Ray steps backwards, as if afraid to touch Mikey, to find out that she is a trick of his mind. “The mansion! It burned to the ground! Andre killed all of you! Justine saved me, she married me…”

Rage takes over Mikey. “YOU ARE NOT MARRIED TO THAT BITCH! YOU ARE MARRIED TO ME, RAY! She is tricking you! Look outside, the tombstones are right where they have always been, out in our garden. Our grandchildren are buried there. This mansion is real. Everything that Justine told you was a lie. We have all been here the entire time, waiting for you. Please Ray, fight what she told you. Accept us as your family again, come home to us.” Ray looks at Mikey’s growing stomach. “That isn’t my baby. How can this be real if you are pregnant with a baby that isn’t mine? How can I believe you, when you’ve never been able to have children before this, Mikey? How am I ever to believe you?”

Mikey moves forward once again and takes both of Ray’s hands in hers. “Sweetheart, Andre raped me. He got me pregnant against my will. I promise you, everything I’m telling you is the truth. You are home with those that love you, in your mansion that you love and built from scratch. We are real. Justine gave you an illusion to keep you in line, to keep you with her. You belong here with us, baby.” Mikey notices that Ray is beginning to believe her, so she tries another tactic. “After all we have been through, baby, please trust me. Why don’t the two of us head out to see the children, Ray. I’m sure they would appreciate some company from their grandparents.” Mikey links her arm through Ray’s, leading him towards the back door.

Once they are outside, Ray looks around him in astonishment. “It’s real! It’s all real! The mansion, the tombstones! Our garden!” The two of them walk up to the weathered tombstones, roses blooming all around. “This is how I remember them! Hello, children! Your grandparents are with you now. We love you so much, and we miss you.” Mikey tears up at Ray’s words. “I never thought I would see you again, Ray. Justine hates me, she would do anything to make me suffer. She has always wanted to make you her husband. But you belong to me, to the family that you love.” Ray looks from the tombstones to Mikey, tears in his eyes. “I belong here. It never felt right when Justine told me that we were married, that you were dead. I just went along with her because I didn’t know what else to do. But it all felt like a lie. I’m glad to know that it was.”

The two return to the family, who are all waiting for them. Ray takes his turn hugging each member of the family, holding them close as he whispers words of love to each one of them. Mikey, on the other hand, seems standoffish, as if she doesn’t want to be touched. The family obeys her wishes, instead taking time to talk to her without touching her, letting her know that they love her and are there for her.

Suddenly the walls of the mansion begin to shake, as if a massive earthquake was responsible for the movement. Sonny runs into the room, his voice panicked as he calls out “I put up a protective spell on the mansion. That’s Justine showing us how pissed she is that she cannot reach beyond the barricade I’ve put in place.” The shaking finally stops, but a loud shriek can be heard echoing through the mansion. “Seems she’s really pissed now!”

Damian pulls Tommy and Adam into his arms. “I’m sure Andre is just as pissed, if he is waiting for Mikey’s baby to be born. There must be a way…” Lela nods, saying “I think I can help with that. I know a forcefield that I can place around Mikey, if she agrees.” Lela turns to look at Damian. “I can place it around you, if you wish.”

Damian looks from Mikey to Tommy to Adam. “No thank you, Lela. If he is focused on me, that’s less time he will have to focus on the rest of the family. I’ll take my chances with him.” Tommy and Adam protest, but Damian stands by his decision. Lela shrugs and says, “If you change your mind, you need only to tell me.” Damian looks from one lover to another, commenting “It’s the only way I can truly help the family.”

The family each takes turns hugging Lela and thanking her for rescuing Ray and Mikey. She blossoms under their kind words, happy to be a part of a family once again.

Mikey looks out the window and says “It’s almost daylight. We should all head to bed and get some rest. Goodnight, all.” She takes Ray by the hand and leads him to their bedroom. Once there, she shyly says to Ray “Are you sleepy? Or would you rather…” Ray cuts Mikey off by leaning down and kissing her, reaching out to pull her close. Even though Mikey is nervous, she responds to the kiss, wrapping her arms around Ray’s middle. When the kiss naturally ends, Ray pulls back and looks into Mikey’s eyes. “If you would rather not, I’d understand. You have been through hell at Andre’s hands, I would hate to push you into something that you are not ready to give, honey. We can wait…” Mikey gives Ray a ghost of a smile. “No, honey, I want to be with you. I want you to erase the feeling of that bastard from my skin, replace it with your touch. I want to feel loved by you. But before we begin, I have to ask…” Mikey’s nervousness intensifies as she asks “…what about the baby? Can you…accept it? Maybe someday love it?”

Ray gently rubs Mikey’s stomach. “The baby is a part of you, honey. I will love it as much as I love you. Never fear, I will be the baby’s father.” Tears fill Mikey’s eyes, which fall down her cheeks as the baby kicks Ray’s hand. “We will be a family, love. Never fear.”

The two make love until they grow too tired to continue, then drift off to sleep in each other’s arms, the baby kicking between them.

Lela lays in her bed, happy and satisfied that she helped her new family. They all seem kind and loving, just the environment that Lela needs to thrive in. She misses her own family. It seems like forever since they were with her.

“If you hadn’t left that day, we would all be alive” the voice in her head echoes. Sad and frustrated, she calls out “That’s not fair! Mother Luna needed me! I cannot take back my decision to visit her that day! After all she had done for our family, I owed her! You cannot blame me for not being there when Andre arrived! I had no idea that he would show up! Please, please leave me alone!” The sound of laughter fills Lela’s ears. “You expect me to forgive you? To leave you alone? No, we are here to haunt you for eternity, make you pay for what you have done. You will never, ever be alone, you will have us as your companions for the rest of your life, and beyond! We will never stop blaming you for what you have done, sister.” Tears flow down Lela’s cheeks as she curls into herself, trying to tune out the voice in her head. She may be helpful to her new family, but she will always be haunted by her own.

Chapter Text

“Come in.”

Damian opens the door to Sonny’s room and enters. He finds his oldest son sitting on the floor, a pile of books surrounding him. When Sonny finally looks up at him, Damian gives him a huge grin. “Hello, Son. You’ve been locked up here for what seems like forever. I just wanted to check on you.”

Sonny grins back at his father. He looks so much like his mother Athena that Damian’s heart gives a leap. “Lela and I have been working on a few spells together. We managed to place a stronger forcefield around Mikey and Ray, as well as extended the shield around the mansion, as well as encompassing the entire realm. Andre now knows that Lela is here, and he wants her for his own. I placed a shield around her as well.”

Damian sits down on a chair near Sonny. “How are we going to be able to fight those two assholes? Justine won’t give in until Ray is hers again, and Andre wants his child. The family cannot hide forever! We must find a way to fight back.”

Sonny nods his head in agreement. “Lela has some ideas on how to do so. She really is talented, dad!” When Damian asks if Sonny is interested in her, Sonny blushes. “DAD! She just a friend! How could you…” Damian throws back his head and laughs. “I think you protest too much, Son! But that’s alright! It would be fine if you are interested in the young lady. But I won’t pick on you about it.” Sonny nods, his entire face bright red. “Please, dad…just don’t.”

Mikey lays on her bed, running her fingers across her stomach. The baby kicks at her movements, making Mikey smile.

At a knock at the door, Trick enters with an arm full of clothes. “Hello, Mikey. Here are the maternity clothes that I told you about. I borrowed them from Tommy and Gee, now it is your turn to wear them! I think you will like them.” Mikey thanks Trick, who smiles at her words. “I see you are looking bigger than the other day! I take it the baby had a growth spurt?”

“Well, my clothes got tighter, so I’d say yes. Thank you for the clothes. Trust me, I will put them to good use!” Trick surprises Mikey by reaching out and running her hand over Mikey’s stomach. “How is Ray? Is he supportive to your needs?”

Mikey nods. “He has been amazing, considering he is not the one to get me pregnant. He is going to make a wonderful father. He is already looking into buying what we will need for when the baby comes.” Fear takes over Mikey, making Trick grab her hand and squeeze. “I hope it’s a girl, so Andre will leave us alone. I know he wants it to be a boy to replace Paulo.” Trick comments “I was so terrified when I had Alex. I kept having nightmares that Andre would come and take him from me. But it’s as if he just forgot about us. Believe me, I’m grateful! I wonder if it’s because Alex looks more and more like Damian everyday…”

Mikey laughs. “That vamp just keeps fathering children! I’m surprised that he didn’t get Gee pregnant when Frankie was being held by Andre. He must’ve used some really strong magick to keep a pregnancy from happening with them!” Trick gives a chuckle. “Yeah, I thought sure that Gee would show up any day rubbing their belly! Damian must’ve finally found some serious birth control!” The two of them share a chuckle as there is another knock at the door. Frankie answers Mikey’s call to come in, looking from one lady to another. “You wanted to see me, Mikey?” Trick turns to go but Mikey reaches out a hand and grabs Trick’s sleeve. “Please stay, Trick. Thanks for stopping by Frankie. I have been having pains on and off in a certain spot and I want to make sure that everything is alright.”

Frankie examines Mikey before closing his eyes to concentrate for a moment. He turns serious eyes towards Mikey. “The pain you are experiencing is caused by your pelvic bone beginning to separate. You are going to have to be careful how you move. For now, the bone is only slightly separated, but around seven months when the baby is larger it will begin to put pressure on that bone. If it snaps, you will end up in traction, regardless of your ability to heal quickly. It takes forever for a break like that to heal. So, from seven months on I want you on total bed rest. Hopefully you will deliver the baby slightly early. Depending on the situation, you may have to have a C-section.” Mikey looks upset so Frankie takes her hand in his. “We are just being cautious, sweetheart. For now, you are free to get up and move around, just do not make any sudden moves.” Mikey asks Frank “What about sex?” and Trick blushes bright pink. “Fine until the seventh month, as long as you do not put undue pressure on that area. I’m sure that you and Ray can get creative with positions! Lord knows Gee and I did!” Mikey thanks Frank, who leans down to kiss her cheek. “I will check on you again in a month. If the pain is unbearable in the meantime, I can give you something to help.” Mikey shakes her head. “I don’t want the baby to have drugs if I can help it, Frankie. Thanks anyways.” Frank shakes his head. “If you change your mind, let me know.” Frank places a kiss to Trick’s cheek and leaves the room.

“Thanks for staying with me, Trick. Scary news! I am going to have to be careful about the rest of my pregnancy. I guess Ray is going to have to get used to plenty of blow jobs!” Trick laughs, shaking her head. “Only you would be thinking of such a thing at a time like this, Mikey!”

Later when Ray arrives, Mikey tells him the results of the examination. “So, I must be careful. No more jumping on me when we have sex! Frankie says no putting pressure in this location, darling.” Mikey rubs her hand along her lower quadrant. Ray nods his head, a serious expression on his face. “We will do everything possible to take care of you, sweetheart. The last thing I want is something to happen to you. But can you stand the pain?” Mikey takes Ray’s hand. “I will have to. I do not want to drug the baby. I want to make sure that she has a chance to be born without drugs in her system. Imagine it, Ray. I’ve lived so long, longer than most vampires. I never thought that I would become a mother. It is the one thing I’ve always wanted, and now it’s happening.” Ray takes Mikey into his arms and says “Just please promise me that if the pain becomes unbearable, you will consider it. I’m just worried about you is all. I want my sweetheart well taken care of, as well as our baby.” Mikey leans in and kisses Ray. “I will do my best, Ray, promise.”

Damian, asleep, is pulled from his bed. When he wakes, Justine and Andre are standing in front of him. “How did I…why am I here? How did you manage to bring me here?” Justine laughs. “You think the only ones who can wield magick are on that pitiful realm you live on, Damian? No, Andre and I have a few tricks up our sleeves. So, how are you, Damian? I hear that you and Andre tied the knot recently. I bet those two lousy assholes you sleep with are upset that you belong to Andre.” Damian snarls at Justine. “I do NOT belong to Andre! I have two mates at home waiting for me!” Justine snaps her fingers and Damian bends over in pain, clutching his stomach. “Are you going to let him talk to me like that, Andre? To dismiss me like he just did? The little shit needs discipline! Do you want me to take over, or will you be the one to put him in his place?”

Andre walks over to Damian, grabbing a handful of hair and yanking him upright. “For the last time, you piece of shit, we are WED! You are my little bitch! And it’s time you become subservient to your mate!” Andre shoves Damian on his knees, reaching to unbutton his pants. “Open your mouth and show Justine what a sweet little cock sucker you are! OPEN UP!” Damian shakes his head, a defiant look on his face. Justine laughs. “Is that how you teach him to obey, Andre?” Andre waves his hand and Damian opens his mouth against his will. Andre grabs a handful of Damian’s hair and pulls him forward, moaning as his dick slides down Damian’s throat. “Suck me off like a good little bitch, Damian. If you are lucky, I may let you satisfy Justine as well.” Andre repeatedly shoves himself into Damian’s mouth as harshly as he can, Damian making a strangled noise as he takes the abuse being given to him. Justine chuckles as she runs her hands over Damian’s body, causing him to try and pull away from her touch.

After a certain amount of time, Andre pulls out. Damian gasps for air, saliva dripping down his chest. Andre barks out orders. “Justine, take your clothes off and get on all fours on the bed, Damian get behind her. I will climb on behind Damian.” Justine positions herself as Andre says, and Andre forces Damian to get behind Justine. Waving his hand, Damian’s clothes disappear. When he climbs behind Damian he reaches around to grab and line up Damian’s dick, pushing him forward until Damian enters Justine. Andre then reaches for his own dick and, shoving forward harshly, enters Damian without any form of lube.

The three of them rock back and forth until Justine screams under Damian. Andre waves his hand again and Damian comes in Justine, his grunts loud in the room. Damian’s tensing causes Andre to lose it deep inside of him, Damian’s whimpers from over stimulation loud in the room.

Damian ends up being sandwiched between Justine and Andre in the middle of Andre’s huge bed. Justine reaches out and runs her fingers through Damian’s sweaty hair. “I like this, Andre! Why don’t the two of us keep him here with us? We can make him our sweet pet. I’m sure that the two of us can keep him busy…” Damian gives a shudder at the thought. Andre looks over at Justine and growls out “Because he belongs to ME, bitch! Feel lucky that I shared him with you tonight. Besides, aren’t you focusing all your time and attention on getting Ray back? What makes you think I need your help keeping my bitch busy? He’s plenty worn out since I’ve decided to focus all my attention on him. Damian…” Damian looks up, making eye contact with Andre. “I’ve decided that it’s time to keep you here for good. Tommy and Adam are bad influences on you. You will be by my side when I am here, and in a cage when I’m away. That way I can ensure that you will not escape.”

Damian does his best to ignore Justine, who is running her hand over his chest and downward to cup his cock. “PLEASE, ANDRE! PLEASE send me home! Think of my children, who need their father! Tommy and Adam aren’t bad influences! Thanks to you, I barely see them at all anymore. Please let me be with my family…” Andre looks into Damian’s desperate eyes and laughs. “I’m your family now, bitch, and you’ll do well to remember that! You do as I say when I say. You will spend the rest of your life here with me.” Andre slaps Justine’s hand away, taking Damian in hand, stroking lightly. “I give you pleasure when I see fit, not a moment before. You will learn to appreciate me, bitch.” Damian grits his teeth as Andre’s hand makes him hard against his will. “Roll over on your back, Damian. Justine, ride the poor boy. He’s in need of some relief.” Justine grins from ear to ear as she climbs over Damian’s body, grabbing his dick so she can slide it into herself. Once she bottoms out, she gives a loud moan as she begins to pump her hips.

“See, Damian…I can be nice when I want to be.” Andre runs his fingers over Damian’s chest, pinching his nipples as he goes. “You better have some energy left over to suck me off, bitch. I get my share, too.”

Later in the evening, Damian lays between the two vamps he hates most in the universe, tears flowing down his cheeks as he thinks of his family, which he will never see again…

Gee brushes Frankie’s hair off his neck, leaning forward to plant kisses on the back of his neck. “Babe, I’ve been thinking.” Frank gives a satisfied moan as Gee’s fingers stroke Frank’s chest. “Mikey’s pregnancy makes me want another litter. What say the two of us go to bed and make some more pups?” Frank’s head shoots up, a sudden tension running through his body. “But Gee…” Frank turns around in Gee’s arms, his serious eyes meeting theirs. “…why do you want more pups? Aren’t you happy with just the two of us? We’ve raised two large litters already. Are you simply envious of mother’s pregnancy? Or do you feel as if something is missing from your life?”

Gee runs their fingers through Frank’s bangs. “I miss being pregnant, and I love raising pups. I won’t be able to have pups forever, so why not take advantage of the situation now? Yes, I’m jealous of mother. If we have pups now, they can grow up together, along with Tommy and Adam’s brood.” Frank places a hand under Gee’s chin and looks deep into their eyes. “But baby, is it really safe for the two of us to be having pups while Andre and Justine are waiting to destroy us?”

Gee shrugs their shoulders. “When has there ever been a safe time to have pups? I was pregnant with our first litter when Damian was out to destroy the family. Now it’s Andre and Justine! If we wait until it’s safe, our family members will never have another baby!” Gee gently runs the backs of their fingers down Frank’s face. “Honey, what do you want to do? Do you want more pups?”

Frank crosses the room, sitting down on the couch. Gee stares at him, unsure if they should join him. Silence takes over the room for a few minutes, before Frank turns to Gee and says “Honey, please sit. I have something to say.”

Gee crosses the room and gingerly sits down next to their spouse. Frank takes Gee’s hands in his, squeezing lightly. “Babes, I don’t know how to say this, but there’s something I’m worried about. I, more than anyone else know how rough pregnancy is on your body. During your first labor, we almost lost you and our daughter. This last time? You threw up the entire pregnancy, losing lots of weight in the process to the point you became extremely sick. Pregnancy has never been gentle with you. The last time, I thought I would lose you. Do you really want to go through all that again?”

Gee leans forward and places a kiss to Frank’s cheek. “I understand your concerns, sweetheart, but I am ready to face the chance of another difficult pregnancy, if it happens. You got me through the last one, I know that you will be there for me if things get bad. Is there something that we can do to prepare in advance for any eventuality?”

Frank shakes his head. “We would have to see how your body would react first, darling. I have no way to prepare for anything in advance. Now do you see why I am concerned? The last thing I want to do is lose you…”

“Baby, I’ll be fine, I’m sure of it. Besides, I will have you with me! There is no one I want other than you, love.”

Frank levels Gee with another stare. “Can I think about it, Gee? Do I have to give you my answer right now?” Gee, looking a little disappointed, nods. “Of course, darling. But can we practice in the meantime? I really want my husband…” Frank smiles at Gee. “Of course we can, love. I want you as much as you want me. I hope you are not mad that I want to take a little time to think about everything.” Gee takes Frank’s hand, pulling him upright. “No, love. Let’s forget about it for the moment.” They give each other a short kiss, then head off for the bedroom…

“You what?”

Draven stands in the middle of his bedroom, a set of clothing in his hands. Thomas is kneeling next to the bed, both hands holding a small box with a diamond ring in it.

“I want to marry you, Drave. Will you be my husband?”

Draven looks from the ring to Thomas’s face. “But we are mated. Why do we actually have to get married?”

Thomas’s arms drop to his sides, a look of disappointment on his face. “Paulo managed to remove the ring I gave you. Yes, you bit me, but that doesn't mean that we are wed in the eyes of the law. I wanted to make sure that the two of us are legally wed. But if you would rather…” Thomas’s head drops until he is looking at the floor at Draven’s feet.

Draven feels a stab of regret. He has never seen Thomas so upset before. He reaches out a hand and runs it gently down Thomas’s face. “Baby, I didn’t realize just how much getting wed in a real ceremony means to you! I will gladly marry you, honey. I’m sorry if I ruined your proposal with my stupidity. I will gladly be your husband.”

Eyes brightening with glee, Thomas reaches out and takes Draven’s right hand in his, placing a ring on his third digit. “The wedding ring will go on the other hand. Just think of this one as an engagement ring.” Thomas then stands, his arms reaching out and wrapping around Draven, pulling him into his arms for a huge hug. Draven rocks back and forth in Thomas’s arms, a large smile on his face. He’s managed to make his mate happy.

Thomas leans in and kisses Draven. When the kiss naturally comes to an end, he asks “Do you think the family will welcome a wedding? You told me the last wedding this family had was decades ago.” Draven smiles at Thomas. “I’m sure that everyone will be happy, especially the ladies of the family. I have a feeling we will have a hard time keeping them from taking over the wedding plans!” Thomas replies “Then maybe you and I should plan out the wedding before we tell them, huh? That way they have no choice than to respect our wishes.” Draven laughs. “You underestimate the ladies, darling. You can plan all you want, and things will ultimately change in the end. We just must remember that at the end of the day, the important part is we are getting married.”

The family is overjoyed with their news. Immediately, Tommy, Mikey, Trick and Gee sit down together to go over plans. Draven gives Thomas a look of “I told you so” from across the room.

“I think they should get married in the foyer” Gee comments. Mikey turns pale at the thought, her eyes searching out Ray. Memories of Ray being impaled by the chandelier cross everyone’s mind. Tommy leans forward and places a hand on Gee’s arm. “Not the foyer! Remember what happened to father…” Gee blushes, their head down as they whisper “I’m sorry for bringing up bad memories, mother.” Mikey gives Gee a small smile. “It’s okay, love. What about the garden?”

By the end of the day, most of the plans for the wedding are in place. Thomas and Draven spoke up when it meant most to them, otherwise staying silent as they cuddle each other on the couch, whispering to each other. Suddenly Draven looks sad. “What’s up, my love?”

Draven shakes his head, tears coming to his eyes. “I wish father was here. I cannot believe that he has just disappeared. Father and mother are so upset! He’s been missing for a month now; this time Andre took his body when he kidnapped him. I’m afraid that we will never see him again.” Thomas pulls Draven against him, his arms tightening around Draven. “I know you miss him, sweetheart. Hopefully he will come home soon. You share a special bond with him, you feel his loss more profoundly than anyone else, even more than your parents.” Draven places his head on Thomas’s chest and sighs. “I just hope he is hanging in there. The last thing I want is for Andre to destroy him.”

Damian sits naked in the corner of his cage, his arms wrapped around his middle. After trying to open the cage repeatedly when Andre left, he finally sat dejected, waiting for him to appear again. Stockholm syndrome has settled in on Damian, with him feeling depressed every time Andre leaves him alone.

Hearing a sound outside the door to the dungeon, Damian sits up, expecting Andre. He is surprised when Justine walks into the room, a huge smile on her face. She immediately walks over to the cage. “Well, hello, puppy! Don’t you just look dejected without your husband?” The door to the cage swings open, and Justine walks up to Damian. Reaching out, she runs her hand through Damian’s hair, tugging when she feels a knot. “What say I keep you busy until your master returns?” Damian shakes his head, but Justine leans in, placing her lips on his in a searing kiss of ownership.

Andre returns twenty minutes later to find Justine riding an very upset Damian, his back connecting with the cage floor. “JUST WHAT THE FUCK IS GOING ON HERE?” Andre bellows as Justine’s moans drown out his words. Damian shoots Andre a look of fear, immediately responding to Andre’s anger. Justine rides Damian faster, chasing her completion. Andre storms over to Justine, yanking her off Damian, who curls into a little ball while awaiting his punishment.

“HOW MANY TIMES DO I HAVE TO TELL YOU THAT HE BELONGS TO ME! YOU ARE NOT TO TOUCH HIM UNTIL I TELL YOU THAT YOU CAN! NOW GET THE FUCK OUT OF HERE WHILE I TEACH MY LITTLE BITCH A LESSON!” Justine screams her frustration at Andre, who throws her across the room. When Justine rushes Andre, he waves his arm, and she disappears.

Damian whimpers as he tries to move out of Andre’s touch. Andre grabs Damian by the arm, yanking him out of the cage and slamming him into the cross in the middle of the room. “Stand there, bitch.” Shaking with fear, Damian begins to beg “Please, please, Andre! I didn’t want her, she made me! Please do not whip me, I’ve done nothing wrong. I promise to do better next time, I do! Please let me show you how much you mean to me…” Andre waves his arm and a whip appears in his hand. He shoves Damian’s face into the wood of the cross, stepping back just enough to swing his arm. When the first strike hits Damian’s bare back, he screams out “I’M SORRY, MASTER!”

An hour later, there isn’t a single place on Damian’s back that hasn’t been damaged by Andre’s whip. Damian begs to Andre to let him make it up to him, but Andre has another idea. He grabs Damian by the arm and yanks him across the room with him, until the two stand in front of the maiden. “NO, MASTER, PLEASE! I LOVE YOU, MASTER! PLEASE DO NOT PLACE ME IN HERE! I WANT TO BE WITH YOU! DON’T PLACE ME IN HERE…” Andre swings open both doors and then turns Damian around, slamming him backwards until the spikes sink deep into Damian’s back. Andre snarls out “This will teach you to touch that bitch without my permission! You are as much to blame as she is! The next time, the two of you will suffer my wrath in ways neither of you can imagine!” The maiden doors swing shut, Damian’s screams filling the air at the very thought of being locked inside this torture chamber with no way out.

Justine returns, hands on her hips. “What did you do with Damian?”

“I’ve placed him in the maiden. He will stay there until he learns to keep his hands to himself. And you! Taking my husband without my permission! You are as guilt as he is! I should put you in your own maiden!” Justine steps up to Andre, a smirk on her lips “I’d like to see you try!”

Changing the subject, Justine asks “Have you managed to break through the forcefield that those bastards have put in place?” Andre grunts. “No. Whomever did so really knows what they are doing. I found out that Lela, that little bitch whose family gave me so much trouble, is now living with the Toros. She brought that whining brat Thomas back to life! I must get my hands on her, so I can force her to bring Paulo back to life.” Justine laughs. “You think it will be that easy? Obviously that bitch is the one who is behind the forcefields. Damian’s son isn’t that talented on his own. No, I can see that there will be quite the battle ahead of us, if that bitch is with them.”

Tommy cuddles into Adam’s side. She had been lying there, thinking of Damian, tears flowing down her cheeks. She missed him something terrible. It felt as if a large part of her was missing.

Adam opens his eyes, confused. When he went to bed, Tommy was sleeping on the couch in the library. He decided to leave her there, since she looked so comfortable. His voice rough, he asks “Baby? Are you okay?” Tommy cuddles even closer to Adam, who feels tears fall on his chest. “What has you crying, love?”
Tommy mumbles something intelligible. Adam reaches down and pulls up on Tommy’s chin until the two of them look into each other’s eyes. “Baby, I miss him too. I wish he was here with us.” Tommy gives a loud sob, her hands reaching out and clinging to Adam. “There is nothing we can do but miss him. But at least we have each other to lean on.” Tommy blindly nods, another sob leaving her. She blurts out “I can’t lose you too, Ad. You are all I have left. Please don’t leave me, please.” Adam wraps his arms tightly around Tommy. “I’m not going anywhere, love. I’m here with you and the babies. I love you, TJ. You’re stuck with me for life.” Tommy sighs as tears continue to fall. “I’m sorry. I just can’t seem to calm down. I just keep thinking of him and worrying that you will be the next target.”

Adam chuckles. “Baby, it’s your hormones. They have been wacky since you had our last baby. I promise you, I’m here to stay. But there is nothing we can do about Dam except worry about him. It’s all going to be alright, love.” Adam lowers his head, kissing Tommy on the cheek a few times before brushing his hair out of tearful eyes. Adam lets Tommy cry it out until she finally sighs again and falls asleep in Adam’s arms.

Adam stares at the wall in the dim light of the room. He listens to Tommy’s deep breathing, finally satisfied that she is truly asleep. He himself has been worried sick about Damian, but he has been trying to keep it to himself to not to worry Tommy even more. Adam thinks to himself “When will he be back? Ever? Or are we doomed to live the rest of our lives without him?” Adam sighs as he closes his eyes.

“That should work, Sonny.” Lela places a hand on Sonny’s arm, which causes him to blush bright red. “If only we had a way to test our theory, without bringing harm to anyone in the family.” Sonny thinks for a moment before responding “Well, there’s always me. I could be the guinea pig.”

“NO, SONNY!” Lela reaches out and shakes him, as if trying to remove the thought from his head. “You are too important to the family to try taking on Andre! What if you fail, and then he has the opportunity to suck all of your powers from you? The family wouldn’t survive that. No, someone else will have to take on Andre. I’ll do it.”

“NO! You will NOT face that bastard alone! I won’t have it!” Without thinking, Sonny leans forward and grabs Lela by the arms, pulling her towards him before giving her a fierce kiss of ownership. At first, Lela stands perfectly still, just accepting the kiss, before leaning into it, wrapping her arms around Sonny’s waist, clinging tightly. The kiss goes on and on, each experimenting as they run their hands over each other’s bodies. Lela stops her exploration at Sonny’s ass, squeezing him lightly, eliciting a moan from Sonny who returns the favor by squeezing Lela’s ass. The two pull apart for a moment, staring into each other’s eyes before diving back into another kiss.

The door to the library opens and Pete walks in, ending the moment between the two lovers. Pete, instantly embarrassed, mumbles a few apologetic words, backs out of the room, his face red. Sonny, usually shy, boldly asks “Shall we take this to my room?” Lela, looking unusually shy, nods her head. Sonny takes her hand and leads her through the hallways to his room.

Once there, Lela blushes bright red. “I…” Lowering her head, she mumbles “…never been with…” Sonny, sensing how uncomfortable she is, reaches out and brushes the hair off her forehead. “Can I tell you a secret, Lela?” Lela nods, her eyes returning to his. “I’ve never been with a woman before. I slept with a man, found out it’s not really for me, you know? It answered a bunch of questions for me.” Lela nods her head, her face still in a deep blush. “Does it bother you that I’ve never been with anyone?”

Sonny steps forward and pulls Lela into his arms. “So, we are both virgins! We will simply have to learn how this goes together.”

After some embarrassed shuffling around, Sonny gently enters Lela. A look of concern crosses her face. “What if I become pregnant? I’m not on birth control.” Sonny runs the back of his hand down the side of her face. “I’ve already taken care of it, sweetheart. Magick is good for some things, and this is one of them. I promise you will be fine, love.” Lela gives Sonny a smile, even though she is feeling the pain of making love for the first time.

Afterwards, they lay in each other’s arms, a feeling of contentment taking over both of them. “I hope I didn’t hurt you as badly as I think I did, love.” Lela shakes her head. “I expected pain my first time, Sonny. You were wonderful, so gentle with me. I thank you for making my first time so beautiful.” Sonny smiles down at Lela, his hand tracing patterns on her skin. “I thank you as well, my love, for such an amazing experience. I feel like never letting you go.” Lela sighs, burrowing her body deeper into Sonny’s side. “I like that idea, honey.”

When the two finally get out of bed, they call a meeting with the entire family.

“…so in theory, it should work.”

Adam gives Ray a glance before repeating “IN THEORY? You want us to go up against Andre with only a theoretical idea? That would be suicide! What if it fails? Then whomever is left to stand in front of Andre is totally defenseless. Which one of us has a death wish?”

“I do” Lela replies, her face set in stone. Sonny reaches out to pull her closer to him, but she stands her ground. “It’s my theory, I will be the one to test it out. I would not put the family in jeopardy. You have taken me in by the kindness of your hearts, and I thank you for it. I will face Andre, so no one else must pay the price if it does not work.” Sonny begins to protest, but Lela lays her fingers over his lips to stop his words. “My mind is made up. I will leave tonight. I still have my protection forcefield in place, in case something goes wrong. We must try; we simply cannot ignore this opportunity.”

Sonny’s arm snakes around Lela. “I think the two of us should go, Lela. That way, I can distract him while you work the spell.” The entire family burst out in protest at this idea. Frankie blurts out “But what if Andre kidnaps you? Then half of our family’s abilities will be gone. We do not want to lose you, Sonny—we cannot afford to.”

Lela turns to Sonny, shaking her head in agreement. “I will be fine, Sonny. Just let me go do this. I promise to return to you.” The family watches as Sonny struggles to agree with Lela, knowing full well that she may not return. He just found her; the last thing he wants to do is lose her so soon.

Later that night, Lela kisses Sonny for what may the last time. “I will see you soon, love. I’ll be thinking of you.” Sonny responds “I still think I should go with you. What about Justine? How can you take on both of them?” Lela leans forward and places a gentle kiss on Sonny’s cheek. “I will be fine. Take care of yourself, Sonny.”< /p> With a flash of light, Lela disappears.

Lela finds Damian’s giving Andre a blow job, kneeling naked on the floor. Her first thought is how beautiful Damian is, his blonde hair shining in the dim lighting of the room. What an odd thought to have about Sonny’s father! She should be focusing on the task at hand…

Andre’s top lip curls back in a snarl. “So, the little orphan comes to visit us! What balls you have, young lady. You have…” Andre throws back his head and growls as he shoots down Damian’s throat “…caused me considerable trouble over the years, Lela. What exactly are you doing here, besides turning yourself over to me to be destroyed?”

Lela watches as Damian pulls back from Andre, his body staying in a kneeling position, his hands clasping behind his back in submission. What she wouldn’t give to set him free…

“You know why I’m here, Andre. You killed my entire family, and now you must pay. You’ve turned this poor man into a slave for your own satisfaction. Set him free, Andre.”

Andre sneers once again. “Damian is my husband, Lela. I can do whatever I wish to him. You should mind your own fucking business and go back to fucking Damian’s son. I have little to no interest in discussing my personal life with you.” Lela opens her mouth to speak, but Andre counters with “While you’re here, Lela, you might as well get to resurrecting my son Paulo. I won’t let you leave until he is human again.” Lela raises her hand and multiple bolts of lightning hits Andre square in the chest, sending him into the closest wall. Lela marches over to him, mumbling spell after spell, her hand extended towards Andre. Damian lets out a gasp as Andre’s face slowly begins to melt, his mouth wide open as if caught mid-scream. Lela continues to mumble spell after spell as Andre’s body dissolves, until there is nothing left except for a pile of ashes on the floor, which blow away in a sudden breeze.

Lela crosses the room to Damian, who looks up at her in astonishment. Lela waves her hand and Damian is dressed. If she honestly were to assess him in this moment, she would have to admit that he looks lost and a little sad as he stares at the place where Andre was. She reaches out and pulls Damian up from the floor, saying “It’s time we return home, Damian.” He nods, and the two of them head back to the mansion.

The family is seated in the library, enjoying an evening together. They gasp as Lela arrives, her arm around Damian’s middle. She helps him sit down on the couch next to Tommy, who instantly pulls Damian into her embrace. “He will need a lot of blood bags. It appears it’s been a long time since he’s been fed.” Trick runs out of the room towards the kitchen, in search of said bags.

Sonny quickly crosses the room and wraps his arms around Lela. “Are you alright? Did he…” Lela shakes her head. “No, he was overly confident, his ego was his downfall. He couldn’t believe that I came to him simply to kill him. It was quite easy, considering. I just hope it works, and he stays dead.” When Tommy asks if Justine was around, Lela shakes her head. “No, thank heavens. We still must deal with her, and she will be harder to kill. One baddy at a time.”

Damian slowly lays his head on Adam’s chest, his own chest heaving. Tommy gently runs his hand through Damian’s long hair, whispering words of comfort to him. Trick arrives with a handful of blood bags, leaning in to place a gentle kiss to Damian’s forehead. With shaking hands, Damian takes one of the bags and tears open a corner, guzzling down the contents.

Frankie walks over to Damian, taking one of his hands in his. After concentrating for a few minutes, he softly says “I think it would be best if the two of you tuck Damian into bed. He needs lots of blood and rest, as well as plenty of loving care. I will check on him in the morning.” Adam and Tommy thank Lela for rescuing Damian before helping him stand up from the couch. Adam picks Damian up, carrying him out of the room with Tommy close behind, blood bags in hand.

Lela kisses Sonny, her arms tightly wrapped around him. She whispers in his ear “That was too easy, Sonny. He will be back, and he will be out for blood. But at least we have some time to come up with a plan to remove Justine. But right now, I just want to lie in your arms.” Sonny gives Lela a gentle kiss before announcing to the room that the two of them are headed to bed. They leave the room to the sound of the rest of the family mumbling goodnight to them.

Tommy and Adam manage to remove Damian’s clothes before tucking him in the center of their bed. They hand him bag after bag of blood, watching carefully as he takes large sips. Tommy whispers “We are so glad you are back, darling! We have missed you so very much! It will be so good to sleep with you tonight!” Adam doesn’t say much, instead showing his love with little touches. His eyes are glowing black, showing his rage at all his love had gone through.

Damian finally shoves the last bag away from him. “Please, no more. I couldn’t drink another drop. I love you both, but I can’t…” Tommy hushes Damian, saying “Alright, love. Why don’t you try to go to sleep? The two of us will cuddle you. Just close your eyes and rest.” Tommy nods at Adam, who says “We love you, sweetheart. We will be right here with you. Goodnight, love.” Damian looks from one to the other and sighs. “Goodnight. I love you both.” As the three of them snuggle down for a long night sleep, they do not realize that they are being watched by Justine.

“Enjoy your time together, you pieces of shit. You will all pay for your sins soon enough. I will resurrect Andre and the two of us will destroy the Toro family. You are all on borrowed time…”

Chapter Text

Damian slowly paces the mansion while everyone is asleep. His fingertips brush the furniture, he stops to stare at paintings with a blank expression. Ever since Andre was destroyed, he has been feeling adrift and lonely. Damian realizes that the majority of what he is dealing with is Stockholm syndrome, but he cannot shake the feeling of loss that he is currently under.

Frankie encounters Damian in the library doorway. Seeing his sad countenance, Frankie pulls Damian in for a hug. “You look so sad, Dam. What’s wrong? I thought you would be happy to be home with your mates.”

Damian returns the hug before stepping back to look Frankie in the eye. “I have no idea what is wrong with me, Frankie! I thought that, with Andre gone and I’ve returned home to my family, that I would be happy. Instead, I’m lonely and sad. This feeling that I have a void in my life is driving me crazy. Please help me, Frankie!”

Frank pulls Damian down next to him on the couch. “Dam, you DO have a void in your life! You must remember, you were bonded and married to that freak. Now that he is gone, that bond is broken. That is why you feel lost, that’s why you are suffering so many different emotions at once. It doesn’t matter that you hated Andre, over time the bond became stronger and stronger. Were there any times when the two of you were separated for a short while that you began to notice withdrawal set in?” Damian thinks for a moment and then nods. “The distance was too much for you, even for small amounts of time. Now that he is gone, your soul is reaching out for his. Yes, I do realize that he didn’t have one, I’m just being hypothetical! But the concept is still the same. You do not miss him, but your soul does.”

Damian gives Frankie a confused look. “But will this whole situation get better with time? Will I be able to put this behind me, and start feeling like myself again?”

Frankie thinks for a moment. “I know the perfect way to fix this situation. You must marry Adam and Tommy right away.”

Damian looks at Frankie as if he’s lost his mind. “How will taking on a new marriage help?”

Frankie reaches out and runs his fingers through Damian’s long hair. “A new bond will take the place of the old one. Over time, the feelings that you have now for Andre will fade. But you better do it soon. If Andre resurrects himself somehow, your current bond will become active again if you do not replace it. You need to marry your mates right now.” Frankie stands, reaching out to pull Damian to his feet. “I can help you. I know a priest from the Dark realm that speaks old Vampirese, he can marry the three of you. C’mon, let’s go.” Frankie places his hands in the center of Damian’s back and pushes him forward towards the suite that Damian and his mates share.

Once there, Damian quickly explains to Tommy and Adam what has been going on, and Frankie’s solution to the situation, while Frankie goes off to contact his friend. Tommy claps her hands together in glee. “You mean, the three of us will finally be married? It’s what I’ve always wanted, Dam! Ad, what do you think?” Adam nods his head as he wraps his arm around Damian. “I will gladly marry you, Dam. It’s about time the three of us make it official.”

Frankie returns with the priest from the Dark realm, who asks “Who wishes to be married today?” Tommy, Adam and Damian all raise their hands, Tommy blushing a beautiful shade of red. “Then the three of you need to link hands. This will take but a moment.” They take each other’s hands, and the priest begins to chant in old Vampirese. After a few minutes, he nods his head. “The three of you will have to exchange blood now.” Adam smirks and says “Gladly!” as he leans forwards, his fangs sinking deep into Damian’s neck. Once he takes a few sips of blood, he pulls out his fangs and then leans to the other side, sinking his fangs into Tommy’s neck.

After the three of them share blood, the priest continues to chant, his hands in the air over the three of them. With a smile on his lips, he says “You may now kiss each other.”

Adam and Damian turn to each other, a short but deep kiss passing between them. Adam then turns to Tommy, repeating his actions. Damian clasps his hand behind Tommy’s head, pulling her until he can bend her head back, his lips devouring hers. Adam and Tommy kiss, and the priest recites a prayer over all three of them. “May you three continue to find love and joy together!” With those words, he nods at Frankie and disappears.

The three of them hug Frankie, thanking him for finding a priest for them to wed. With a devious grin on his face, Frankie comments “I better get out of here before the honeymoon starts. Gee will be jealous if I stay.” Frankie kisses each vamp on the cheek and heads out of the room, saying goodnight.

As the door shuts, the three turn to each other with shy smiles. Adam chuckles “I’ve never known you to be silent, Dam. Are you happy?”

Damian looks from Adam to Tommy, a wide grin on his face. “My dreams have just come true. I’m finally married to the two people I love more than anyone in this cosmos. So, what say we spend the rest of the night celebrating our nuptials? And who knows? Maybe it’s time for Tommy to have another baby…”

Two days later, Tommy is heading to the kitchen to get some blood bags for her and her husbands. As she heads down the hall, there is a knock at the front door. She makes her silent way down the hall, swinging the door open and saying “Yes? May I help you?”

Tommy holds her breath as she stares at the vamp standing at the front door. He is truly gorgeous, better looking than both of her husbands, if she is honest with herself. He must be at least 6’ 4” tall, with long black hair framing the face of a model. Tommy’s eyes wander to the muscled chest and arms covered only by a thin tank top. Glancing downwards, she takes in muscled thighs in skintight jeans, a large bulge catching her attention. For a second, Tommy wishes that she could look at the backside, to see if it is as amazing as the front.

The man gives Tommy a seductive smile, leaning forward to take Tommy’s hand and kissing the back of it. “Well, who do we have here? What is your name, beautiful?” Tommy gives herself a little shake to recapture her attention in the moment, then responds with “My name is Tommy Joe. The real question is who are YOU, and what do you want?”

The man puts up his hands to show he comes in peace. “My name is Kensi, sweet thing. I’ve come to speak with Damian, if he is at home. If not, maybe you can spare some time to keep me company? It gets awfully lonely out here in the cosmos all by myself…”

Tommy, refusing to back up to let this stranger into her home, answers “He’s still in bed. If you can come back later…”

Kensi takes a few steps closer, until the two of them are practically touching. “You may not believe me babydoll, but I do come in peace. I just want to see my old friend. I have some news for him that may change the course of this fucking battle with Andre.”

Tommy stares into Kensi’s eyes for a moment before taking a few steps backwards. “I will go wake my husband and see if he wishes to speak with you. If you would be so kind as to wait in the library until I return?” Kensi looks Tommy up and down before replying “Husband, huh? Damian still has good taste! You are beautiful, Tommy Joe.” Tommy blushes but points to the library at the end of the hall. “I will return shortly. Please, make yourself at home.” She turns on her heels and heads towards her suite, a feeling of dread taking over her.

Tommy enters her suite to find her two husbands making out. “Damian, there is a man down in the library asking for you. He says his name is Kensi.” Damian pulls away from Adam, who gives out a moan of protest. “Kensi, huh? It’s been a long time since I’ve heard that name. Babes, you’re blushing! I take it that the King of Flirtation is still on his game?” Tommy shrugs, trying to appear nonchalant. “He kissed my hand and called me beautiful. It took me by surprise.” Damian shakes his head with a laugh. “Nothing has changed! He’s still a rascal. I’ll get dressed and visit with him.” Adam throws back the covers and says with a growl “I’ll join you as well. If he can flirt so easily with Tommy, I want to see what else this asshole is up to!” As her husbands get dressed, Tommy goes to rejoin their guest in the library.

Once there, she says “Damian will be with you momentarily. Is there anything that I can get you?” Kensi cocks his head to the side and smirks. “I’d ask for a kiss, but that might be overstepping my welcome. I’ll settle for your company until he arrives, love.” Tommy blushes once again, this time she keeps her eyes on the floor, as if trying to escape the situation.

The door to the library opens and Damian enters, followed closely by Adam. Both notice that Tommy is blushing again, which causes Adam to growl loudly before reaching out and pulling Tommy to his side.

“Damian! Looking sexy as always! How do you manage to make it through life looking so good?” Adam growls again, which brings another smirk to Kensi’s face. “And who is the hostile one behind you? I take it that he is not happy to have me here flirting with his spouses!”

Damian reaches out for Adam’s hand, pulling him forward so the four of them are in proximity of one another. “This is my husband, Adam. Tommy here is my wife. You need to stop flirting, or Adam will not be responsible for his actions!” Kensi simply laughs in response. “You know me, Damian! I simply cannot stop myself from flirting! It’s in my DNA. If Adam here has a problem with it…” Adam’s entire body stiffens, his claws coming out of his fingertips. Damian moves to stand between them. “I thought you came here to give me some information, not upset my mates, Kensi! Just what is it that you would like to say to me?”

Kensi moves backwards a few steps then sits down on the couch as if he had been invited to. With a casual shrug of his shoulders, he starts with “I have been keeping tabs on you, dearest. I know the hell that you have been through, having to deal with Andre and Justine. I’m sorry that I have not been able to come here sooner. But I’m here now, and I think that you will be very interested in what I have to say.” Adam growls once again, blurting out “If you knew Damian was going through hell, why didn’t you arrive sooner to help him?” Kensi sits forward and stares at Adam with a disgruntled look on his face. “Because, I hate to say it---but your family isn’t the only ones going through hell. I’ve had plenty of hell myself, keeping me away from the ones I love. You were here and look how little help you were to him! Did you stop Andre from hurting him? Did you end his pain? No, he was left to suffer all on his own. What does that say to me? You don’t care as much as you let on…”

Adam snarls, pacing over to Kensi, murder in his eyes. Kensi returns Adam’s glare with a self-satisfied look, as if he scored a point against Adam. Damian moves to stand between the two of them, placing his hands in the middle of Adam’s chest and pushing him backwards a few steps. “Babe, let me deal with this, please.” Adam glances at Damian, who gives him a level look. Adam finally backs down, sitting on the couch next to Tommy.

“Is he always so volatile, Dam? That must be exhausting! I was just making a point. You suffered in silence; I know you did. You are the type to never complain, you would take on or do anything so that others do not suffer. You and I have always taken care of each other in the past, before you left me this last go round. Speaking of, how’s Mikey? I miss her. She was always good to me.” Damian quickly gives an overview of Mikey’s situation before asking “Did you come here simply to rehash old times, or to accuse my husband of neglect?” Kensi glances at each of them before answering “No, darling. I came here because I can finally be of service to you. The mere fact that I am surrounded by beauty is simply a bonus.”

Tommy grabs Adam by the arm before he can react. Damian ignores Adam, asking “Then what is it?”

“Don’t you want to call the entire family together, before I start? Or do you simply wish to repeat everything to them later?”

Damian stares at Kensi for a moment before sighing and heading to gather the others to the library. In his absence, Adam pulls Tommy into his arms and sets her down on his lap, with a look that dares Kensi to say something. Kensi simply sits and stares at Tommy, pointedly ignoring Adam all together.

Once everyone is gathered into the library and introductions have taken place, Damian asks “Alright, Kensi. What is this all about?”

Kensi looks from Damian to Ray. “I know everything that your family has suffered at the hands of Andre and Justine. I’m sorry for all the pain those assholes have caused you. I wish I could’ve been here sooner to help. You see, I was held in a dungeon by Andre’s friend Michael. I escaped recently and the first thing I did was start gathering intel on Andre. You see, you believe that you murdered him. You are mistaken. One of his minions, a bastard named Ortho resurrected Andre. He is in hiding at the edge of the cosmos in an abandoned mining town. He and Justine have acquired slaves which they turned into killing machines. They have an entire army now, human and humanoid. They are simply waiting for the right time to strike.”

There is silence in the room as everyone digests what they heard. Ray, ever the leader, asks “Do you have any intel on when they plan to attack?” Kensi shakes his head. “I heard that the holdup is the shield that you have placed around this realm. Obviously, whomever did so is very talented, because they cannot find a way to break through. It is your only saving grace.” Lela sadly comments “But shields are not, by their very design, meant to be a permanent thing. It will break down eventually, and we will need to be ready to replenish it, replace it with a new one. That must be what they are waiting for.”

“That’s not your only problem. You now have a very small standing army, besides the Vampaire. They know this. When they attack, it would take little effort to destroy you.” Ray nods his head. “He’s right. We are in trouble from all sides, here like sitting ducks.”

Damian, who has been closely watching Kensi this entire time, asks him “So, can you help our cause? Or did you visit to impart us with new information?” Kensi smirks. “I bet you already know the answer, Dam. I’m here to help.”

Adam scoffs “How do we know that we can trust him? He shows up out of the blue with what may be false information! What if he is on their side?”

For the first time, Kensi’s mask of good tidings slips. He snarls back at Adam with “I know that you have every right to be skeptical, but I am here to help! I want to destroy Andre for imprisoning me and Damian, and I want nothing more than to see that bastard and his whore destroyed! If I tell you how I can help, and you refuse to take my help, that is up to you. But you can’t say I haven’t tried.”

Silence once again takes over the room. Tommy, her voice soft, asks “How can you help, Kensi?”

Kensi shoots Tommy a look of appreciation and gratitude. “You see, I am a mercenary and trader for hire. I trade with realms all over the cosmos and have developed a good relationship with most of them. I have managed to put together my own standing army. I will turn that army over to you, for you to use to protect yourselves. I also have connections in the mines of Tardus, as well as with slave colonies on other realms. I’m sure I can get the necessary materials and slaves that you will need to keep the realm functioning while the war is going on. With my help, we will get you as ready as possible for war. There is only one thing that I require from you.”

“NO!”

“ADAM!” Damian yells, frustrated. “Just hear him out. Go ahead, Kensi.”

“I ask respectfully that I be allowed to live on this realm, in close contact with all of you. Andre would still love to destroy me if he could get his hands on me. Instead of hiding, I would rather help you prepare for the inevitable.”

Ray, without hesitation, comments “You are welcome to stay here with us.”

“GODDAMN IT, NO!”

Ray turns to Adam, a stern look on his face. “We need all the help we can get, Adam. It will be easier if we were all in the same place. If he prefers, Kensi may take up residence in the carriage house, but he is welcome to stay here in the house with us.” Adam growls but Damian places his hand on his arm, as if trying to reassure him that everything will be alright. Damian comments “There is an empty suite next to ours. You are welcome to move in there if you wish. On behalf of the family, thank you for all your efforts on our behalf. I am glad that you are still my friend.” Kensi leans over and kisses Damian on the cheek, which causes Adam to yell “Keep your damn hands…and lips…to yourself while you are here!” Kensi looks from Tommy to Damian, a small smile on his lips. “I can see that living here will be fun!”

Ray calls the meeting over, and Damian volunteers to walk Kensi to his room. Adam tries to follow but Tommy grabs his arm. She whispers to him “Take me to our room and ravish me before the children wake up, babe!”

Once Kensi has been given a tour of his suite, he grabs Damian by the hand. “I must admit, I was hoping to find you alone when I arrived. I hoped that you had given up on them when you were rescued by Lela. I guess I got here too late to tell you…” Damian tries to cut off Kensi, but he continues, nonetheless. “…that I still love you, Dam. I have never stopped. It broke my heart when you left me.”

Damian, his expression shocked, blurts out “You knew why I left, Kenny. I never meant to hurt you, but then again, I never knew you felt that way about me. I’m sorry I broke your heart.”

Kensi leans in, his lips taking Damian’s in a searing kiss. Damian, too shocked to move, still manages to jump when the door flies open.

“JUST WHAT THE FUCK IS GOING ON? DAMIAN?”

Kensi ignores Adam, deepening the kiss. Damian finally gathers his wits about him and pulls back. “Babe, I was just going to…”

“…what? Strip out of your clothes and have him take you right there? I thought better of you…”

“…just what the fuck are you doing, barging in on my moment with Dam? You may think your special but you’re not! I can’t see what you see in him, Dam, besides his good looks. Obviously, he has no personality…”

Damian throws his hands in the air and yells “STOP!” The other two look at him as if he’s lost his mind. “Kenny was just confiding something to me and…”
“Oh, now it’s KENNY, is it? The two of you became real chummy, real fast!”

“…AND HE KISSED ME! I DIDN’T ASK HIM TO! IT JUST HAPPENED! I WAS JUST ABOUT TO LEAVE THE ROOM WHEN YOU BARGED IN…”

Adam glares at Damian. “Well, excuse me for barging in on your ‘moment’! I’ll just leave the two of you alone…” Adam stomps his way to the door and slams the door behind him.

Kensi sighs dramatically. “He had to pick that moment to stick his ass in your business! If he is always like this, you do not need his abuse, Dam! You don’t need to stay with someone who treats you like shit. I’m here for you…”

“YOU’RE THE REASON HE’S PISSED! If you would only keep your lips to yourself! The old days of casual sex between us are over! I am a married man, and I am happy for the first time in a long time. I thank you to remember that!” In a huff, Damian strides towards the door, slamming it exactly the way Adam did.

When he returns to his suite, he finds Tommy sitting on Adam in an attempt to keep him seated on the couch, before he can do anymore damage. Damian’s eyes take in the holes in the drywall at the far end of the room and sighs. It won’t be easy to calm him down this time…

To Tommy and Damian’s surprise, Adam stops trying to struggle against Tommy. He ends up pulling Tommy closer to him as he asks in an icy tone “So, how long were the two of you a couple, Dam?”

Damian cautiously moves forward to sit down on the opposite side of the couch from where Tommy and Adam are sitting. “It’s complicated, Adam. We never were a couple. We were more like friends with benefits. We shared a house back in the day but were more roommates than anything else. We simply shared the same friend group, and sometimes the same victims. I had feelings for him, but they certainly weren’t love. Kenny likes to flirt with everyone, he still does. Before you came in, he admitted to me that he still loves me.”

Adam’s voice turns cold as he asks “And do you now regret marrying us, Dam?”

“NO!” Damian, his frustration growing, shakes the hair out of his eyes. “I was just about to tell him that I don’t love him, and I never did. He will always be one of my dearest friends, but I do not love him.”

“But you kissed him!”

“I WAS IN SHOCK! HE MAKES THIS DECLARATION OF LOVE AND THEN KISSES ME; I THINK I HAD THE RIGHT TO BE SHOCKED!”

Tommy raises a hand so she can stop the two of them from further arguing. “If Dam says he doesn’t love Kensi, then he doesn’t. He loves us, he is faithful to us. Adam, you need to calm down, or you are going to push Dam away with your accusations. Dam honey, I’m glad that Kensi got the chance to share his feelings with you. Hopefully, going forward, the two of you can rebuild your friendship on a much deeper level.” Tommy turns to Adam, brushing his hair off his forehead. “And you. You should go easy on Dam. He loves us as much as we love him. Have a little faith! He belongs to us…”

Adam grunts. “It’s not Damian that I’m worried about! It’s that slimy bastard! He flirts with my wife and kisses my husband and I’m supposed to sit back and take it? No, I’m not going to stand for it! He better back off the two vamps I love more than life itself or I will find a way to destroy him!” Tommy hushes Adam by saying “Let’s forget all that for now and continue our honeymoon! I’ll go ask Gee if they can watch the children for a little while, so we can be alone.” With a kiss to Adam’s cheek, Tommy stands up and leaves the room with one last look of love towards Damian.

“Ad, I’m sorry that you walked in at that moment. I swear I was about to tell him that he doesn’t have a chance in hell at getting together with me. I love you and TJ, and I would never do anything to put us in jeopardy. Please believe me.”

Adam sighs and then stands up, walking over to Damian. “I believe you, honey. I’m sorry that I allowed my rage to get out of control, but there is something about him that I don’t trust. I have this feeling that he will continue to try and take the two of you away from me.” Damian stands, placing both his hands on Adam’s shoulders.

“Babes, that’s not going to happen. We love you too much for that to happen. Now please, can we just put all of this away for a while and spend time together?”

Adam kisses Damian before leading him over to the bed. “Let’s undress and give Tommy a show when she returns…”

The next evening, Ray sends a search party to the location that Kensi gives him. They return a few hours later to corroborate Kensi’s story. They find a gathering of at least 420,000 soldiers awaiting orders. Randolph, a close friend of Ray’s even sights Andre amongst his men.

Ray calls a meeting with the family. He shares the update that he was given, thanking Kensi for coming to them with that information. Kensi smiles and thanks the family for it’s warm welcome, staring the entire time at Adam. Tommy takes Adam’s hand in hers, squeezing tightly. The last thing they need is another outburst from Adam.

When Sonny asks how Kensi managed to travel through the forcefield to visit them, he shrugs and comments “It was all Luna. I went to visit her for help, and she told me of her close connections to your family. When she realized I could help you, she gave me a spell which allowed me to pass through the forcefield. With your permission, I will use the same spell to transport my soldiers here.” Ray nods his head in acknowledgement, and Kensi nods in return, saying “Then I will send for them immediately. I will follow instructions on where you wish to lodge them when they arrive. I will then travel to those realms that will be the most help to us and will secure for us the materials and slaves needed for war.” When Ray offers Kensi money to do so, Kensi refuses. “Your family has been through enough. Let this be a gift from me. I also plan to be at the front lines with you when the war starts. I have extensive experience in battle, as Damian can attest.”

Everyone turns to Damian, who nods. “Kenny has always been the best warrior I’ve ever known. We are blessed to have him with us in this upcoming war.” Adam gives a quiet grunt, which brings a smirk to Kensi’s face. He snarks out “Don’t worry, Adam! I’ll show you the ropes…”

Mikey slowly enters the room, her hand on her stomach. Her eyes grow wide when she sees Kensi. “How are you here…” Kensi immediately stands, moving out of the way to offer his seat to Mikey. “Hello, love. Yes, it’s me.” When Mikey walks over to Kensi, he reaches out and wraps his arms gently around her. Kensi and Ray accidently make eye contact, and Ray sees only respect and admiration for Mikey. “You are beautiful as always, love. It is good to see you!” Kensi helps Mikey sit down, then takes the seat next to her. Mikey reaches out her hand, taking Kensi’s in hers, squeezing tightly, then smiles at Ray, who returns her smile with one of his own.

Lela takes Sonny’s hand and says “We checked the forcefield this morning. It is down less than one percent. Sonny and I are going to work on strengthening it today. We want to fix it before it gets out of hand.” Tommy, from his place on the couch, asks “Should we be concerned?” Sonny shakes his head. “I don’t think so. We put a temporary patch on it. There is no reason why we cannot fix it. We will just have to pay even more attention to it now that war is on the horizon.” Tommy nods and thanks the two of them for their work, which is echoed by everyone else, even Kensi.

After the meeting, Kensi and Tommy find themselves together in the kitchen. Kensi smiles as he moves closer to Tommy, who is clad in a tank top and pajama pants. She opens the refrigerator door and leans in to grab a handful of bags. Kensi wraps his arm around Tommy as he reaches for a bag for himself. Tommy stiffens, moving as far out of Kensi’s reach as possible. Kensi follows Tommy’s movements until the two of them are touching from shoulder to hip.

“So sorry, love. But I have to say, you skin is so soft! I bet Damian spends hours running his hands over your skin. How lucky he is to have you as a mate.” Tommy blushes, backing as far away from Kensi as she can but encountering the refrigerator door. Kensi follows, dropping the blood bag and placing a hand on either side of Tommy’s head, leaning forward until Tommy’s breath brushes his face. Tommy gives out a stressed whine, her eyes darting around trying to find a way out of the situation. Tommy nervously licks her lips, which Kensi takes as an invitation. He moves his head and places his lips to Tommy’s, adding gentle pressure. Tommy whines again, raising both hands and placing them against Kensi’s chest, pushing with all her might. Kensi puts more pressure into the kiss, moaning out in pleasure as he begins to move his lips against Tommy’s.

When the kiss naturally ends, Tommy gasps loudly, a tear escaping one of her eyes. Kensi smiles down at Tommy as if nothing happened. Tommy says in a broken voice “Please, no more. I have to get back to Adam. Please let me go.” Kensi leans back in and places a kiss to Tommy’s cheek. “You are the sweetest, love. Thank you for the kiss. I’ll see you later.” With a wink, Kensi grabs a blood bag and leaves the room without looking back at Tommy.

Tommy starts to shake as she reaches back into the fridge for the blood bags. She walks on shaking legs back to her suite.

Adam immediately notices that something is wrong the second that Tommy enters the room. He sees his mate shake, notices the tears flowing down her face as she gets closer to him. Adam growls out “What happened?” as he reaches out his arms to Tommy, who instantly moves into them, wrapping her arms tightly around Adam. She mumbles “Kensi kissed me” and stiffens when she feels Adam’s entire body tighten.

“THAT BASTARD!” Tommy grabs Adam’s arms, trying to hold him in place. Adam gently pushes Tommy backwards, screaming “I’LL KILL HIM FOR TOUCHING YOU!” Ignoring Tommy’s plea to stay with her, Adam steps around Tommy and storms out of the room, heading for the suite next door. Adam slams open the door, stomping into Kensi’s suite without bothering to announce his presence.

He finds Kensi sitting on the couch watching football. Adam rushes him, yanking Kensi off the couch and swinging wildly, just missing him. Kensi laughs and flips their positions around so that Adam is now sitting on the couch with Kensi straddling his thighs.

“Thought kissing Tommy would get your attention, Adam. Glad it brought you to me, baby. Now I can have what I truly want…” Kensi leans forward until his lips meet Adam’s, putting instant pressure into the kiss. Adam gasps and struggles but somehow cannot break Kensi’s grip on his arms. Kensi leans over and sucks a hickey on Adam’s neck, pulling back to watch a bruise instantly form on Adam’s neck. Adam swears as Kensi returns to Adam’s lips and kisses him again, licking Adam’s bottom lip until he manages to gain entry to Adam’s mouth. Adam tries to bite Kensi’s tongue but ends up gasping for air again as Kensi rubs his erection against Adam’s cock. Against his will, Adam feels himself growing hard, feels Kensi let go of his arms and begin to rub his hands all over Adam’s body, focusing on his chest. Kensi slides his hands under Adam’s shirt and plays with his nipples, pulling on them until Adam gasps again.

Kensi takes one hand and cradles Adam’s head, while the other hand slowly makes its way down Adam’s body until he is cupping Adam’s cock. Pulling back his head, Kensi chuckles. “I thought you would be responsive once I got my hands on you! All that rage is misplaced passion. You just needed a chance to constructively let it all go…” Kensi leans in again for another kiss, rubbing his hand up and down Adam’s hard on before unbuttoning Adam’s pants and sticking his hand inside. Adam moans into Kensi’s mouth as he feels Kensi pick up the pace, stroking with a tight grip. It only takes a few minutes before Adam lets loose, cum covering his cock and Kensi’s hand.

Kensi sits back, a look of satisfaction on his face. “You feel so good, Adam, and you kiss so well. It’s a wonder your spouses ever let you out of their sight! I’m glad that I got to spend a little time with you, even though I wish I could’ve fucked you.” Adam, his face red, yells “YOU TOOK ADVANTAGE OF ME! I WOULD NEVER CHEAT ON MY MATES! THIS IS ALL YOUR DOING!” Kensi laughs. “I stopped holding you down when I started sucking on your tongue! You could’ve left anytime you wanted! Instead, you allowed me to get you off! It was not all me, Adam!” Adam’s jaw drops when he realizes that Kensi is right, he could’ve left at any time.

“Next time, let’s do this in front of Tommy and Dam! I’m sure they would love to join in. I know by experience that Dam’s down for group sex…” Adam stands on shaking legs, closing his pants. “Stay away from me and my mates! This will never happen again…” Kensi laughs as he moves out of the way so Adam can leave. “I hope you can come up with a creative explanation for the hickey on your neck, Adam.” Looking panicked, Adam quickly heads for the door, Kensi’s laughter following him as he leaves.

When Adam returns to his suite, he sees Tommy’s eyes widen when they take in Adam’s hickey. Before Adam can open his mouth, Tommy snidely comments “Is that how you take care of situations, Ad? By getting hickeys? And here I was upset because of a kiss…”

“TOMMY! I…” Adam trips over his own tongue for a moment as Damian arrives in the room. He stops next to Tommy and stares at Adam’s neck, a questioning look on his face. He knows that Tommy does not like giving hickeys, so where in the hell did that mark come from? Suddenly it hits him…Kensi.

Damian asks Adam “Did Kensi give you that?” Adam nods his head, his face red with embarrassment. “He came on to me, cornered me on the couch and…touched me. I tried to fight him but…”

The door to the suite opens and Kensi walks into the room, a smirk on his face.

“Dam, I just wanted to…”

Tommy storms over to Kensi and punches him in the face, breaking his nose. Blood spurts onto the floor and all over Kensi’s shirt. Instead of becoming upset, Kensi laughs. “Nice shot, little one! I take it you’re not happy about the hickey…” Tommy swings again but Kensi grabs her hand, gently placing a kiss to the back of it. “The three of you are possessive as hell! I’m getting quite the kick out of it!” Kensi turns to Tommy and comments “If I were you, I’d be more upset with Adam than me. He held still for me to place that little love bite on his neck! As a matter of fact, he held still while I made him cum. Seems our big alpha werepire wanted a little forbidden love on the side! Tommy, I only got to kiss you. Want me to make it up to you? It won’t take long…”

Damian grabs Kensi by the arm, muscling him out the door and back to his suite. They can hear Tommy’s shrill voice yelling at Adam before the door shuts behind them.

Kensi sits in the middle of the couch, his hand patting the seat next to him. “Hey baby. Wanna make out?”

Damian growls at Kensi. “How dare you kiss my mates? And taking it even further with Adam? What the fuck are you trying to do, break us up?” Kensi finally looks a little taken aback. “What? No! I think it is amazing that the three of you are together! I would never try to break you up! But you must admit, you have two very sexy mates, Dam! I was just trying to have a little fun…”

“FUN? This is not the old days when we would fuck around with whomever we wanted! I have a commitment with those two beautiful vamps in the other room, and you are on the verge of destroying everything that I worked so hard for! The time for fucking around is over, Kenny! Please leave my two mates alone!”

Kensi is quiet for a few minutes before softly asking “You really love them, don’t you?”

Damian sits down on the couch next to Kensi and takes one of his hands, squeezing tightly. “I really do, Kenny. This is not a game. Besides my children, they mean more to me than anything else in the world. I have fought long and hard to make them mine, and I will do anything to keep them in my life. I’m so sorry, Kenny that I do not love you the way you want me to. I love you as a friend, but nothing more. But you will lose me forever if you continue to hit on my mates the way you have been doing.”

Kensi sighs. “I love you, I do, Dam. But I make no promises. I cannot change how I am, no matter how hard I try. What if they decide they want more? Adam seemed interested enough. What if he is willing to experiment? Would you still say no?”

Damian looks into Kensi’s eyes for a few moments before responding with “That would have to be a decision that will be made between the three of us, no one else. I know how much you enjoy group sex, but the three of us have never invited anyone to join us before. Our lives are complicated enough just taking care of the children. If you want group sex, you are going to have to learn to ask for what you want, instead of simply assuming…” Kensi stands up and pulls Damian to his feet. “Then let’s go ask, shall we?”

Before Damian can say a word, Kensi storms into his suite where Adam and Tommy are in the middle of a fight. They turn astonished faces towards Kensi and Damian, Tommy yelling “Just what the FUCK do you want now?”

Kensi looks from Adam to Tommy, a smirk on his face. “I just came over to ask the two of you if you will have sex with Damian and I…”

Chapter Text

How can I put this in a way
So as not to offend or unnerve
There’s a rumor goin’ all ‘round
That you aint’ been getting’ served
They say that you aint’ you know what
In baby who knows how long
It’s hard for me to say what’s right
When all I wanna do is wrong
Gett off, 23 positions in a one-night stand
Gett off, I’ll only call you later if you say I can
Gett off, let a woman be a woman and a man be a man
Gett off, if you want to baby here I am
Here I am
Gett off—Prince and the New Power Generation

“What?”

“You heard me! Do the three of you want to have sex with me?”

Tommy looks at Kensi as if he has two heads. Damian looks closely at Adam, who ducks his head, his cheeks turning red. Damian cannot believe his eyes, since his mate seems to actually be interested in a foursome!

Damian breaks the silence by saying “I told Kenny that the three of us have never invited anyone to sleep with us before.” Kensi nods enthusiastically. “So, I’m wondering if you want to have some fun!” Looking from one to the other, he continues with “I don’t expect an answer right away. The three of you talk it over and let me know. I must go deal with the troops and the other realms, so I may be gone for a bit. I look forward to your decision.” And with that, he kisses each of them on the cheek and heads out the door.

After a few moments of silence, Tommy asks “Just what in blue hell was that?”

Dam shrugs. “Just another day in life with Kenny. He always keeps things interesting.” Tommy grunts. “Well, the last thing I want is to do is sleep with him! What about you, Dam?”

Damian shrugs again. “I’ve already slept with him. I must admit, the sex was amazing.” Tommy grunts in answer, which makes Damian smile. Damian then asks “What about you, Ad? What do you think?”

Adam glances at Tommy before shrugging. “I…” Tommy’s eyebrows furrow, as if she is expecting an argument. “…don’t know.”

Silence takes over the three of them. Adam refuses to make eye contact with his mates, instead concentrating on the wall across from him. When Tommy opens her mouth to speak, Adam cuts her off by saying “I’ll go get us blood bags.” He then circles around Damian and heads out of the room, the door clicking shut behind him.

Tommy starts to rant. “What the FUCK? Ad WANTS to fuck that dickhead? Where did THAT come from? The last thing I want is for Kensi to touch him! When that bastard comes back, I’m telling him to stay the fuck away from us!” When Damian does not react right away, Tommy slugs him in the stomach. “I expect you to back me up, Dam! The last thing we need is that asshole in our lives!” Damian rubs his stomach while trying to calm Tommy down. “Babes, I’m up for whatever you and Ad want. But I think you are being a bit unfair. You don’t know Kensi. If you did, you would see that he is really a sweet and amazing vamp. I know that his approach was wrong, he should’ve been upfront from the very beginning with the two of you. But there is nothing evil about him, he simply does not know another way to get someone’s attention…”

“YOU…HOW CAN YOU DEFEND HIM?” Tommy yells. “He took advantage of Ad and you are trying to spin it into something normal, something benign. He kissed me against my will, Dam. Does he just go around raping people he’s interested in?” Dam shakes his head. “He doesn’t mean it in a bad way, it’s just his way to…get to know you, if he is interested in you…”

Tommy places her hands on her hips. “When he returns, I’m going to tell him no, to keep his fucking hands off my mates. I DON’T SHARE! I refuse to have any interactions with him, much less sex! If you and Ad want to have sex with him, I don’t want to know about it. But don’t expect me to be here when you get back.”

Damian opens his mouth to say something, but Tommy turns on her heel and heads out the door, slamming it behind her.

When Adam returns, he does not inquire after Tommy. Instead, he asks “Did you really have a long-standing affair with Kensi?”

Damian rubs his hand over his face. “It really wasn’t an affair, sweetheart. It was more like casual sex. We had multiple partners and would meet up every so often to play around. We were young vampires and life was exciting. We had a lot of fun and became close friends. I wouldn’t give up my past for anything honey. I’m sorry that Kenny started off on the wrong foot with you, but if you would only take the time to get to know him, you will see that he is an amazing individual…”

“I...don’t know. I don’t want to piss off Tommy, but I want to make you happy if you want to have sex with him. I feel as if I’m trapped in the middle and I don’t know what to do.” Damian asks “But do YOU want to have sex with Kenny?” Adam blushes and shrugs his shoulders, his eyes wide.

Damian sighs and throws his hands up in the air. “Why do I try? You won’t be honest with yourself, so we will never learn the truth of how you feel. Man up, Ad. I’m going to go see Draven.” With an exasperated sigh Damian storms out of the room, frustrated.

Kensi walks into a darkened bar in the Tauras realm. He quickly orders a drink and heads to the back corner of the bar, sitting in a booth with his back to the wall near the exit. He scans the other patrons before shifting his eyes towards the door in time to see the Orch that he is meeting enter the bar.

Darius nods at Kensi and heads to the bar to get his own drink. Kensi returns Darius’s greeting with a nod of his own. When Darius approaches Kensi he calls out “Good to see you, Darius. Thanks for meeting me here.”

The Orch gives a nod in return. “It’s been a while, Kensi. I was beginning to think that we would never see you again.” Kensi gives Darius a sly grin. “You know me, Dar. I’m full of surprises. What say we get down to business, before small talk?”

The two of them spend the next two hours haggling over merchandise and prices before Kensi reaches into his bag and pulls out a large silk purse. “Ten million parcecs, as promised. I hope I can take possession of my merchandise as soon as possible? We are in a bit of a hurry.”

“Yes, I heard how Andre has managed to pull together another army. When I heard that you were with the Toros I was surprised. What makes you take the losing side?”

Kensi takes a sip of his drink before answering. “Who says it’s the losing side? They have me with them this time, they will win. You know I’m the best at what I do.”

Darius shrugs. “I thought you decided to join the Toros so you can be back together with your blonde. You still in love with him, Kensi?”

Kensi avoids looking into Darius’ eye as he starts to pick the paint off the wall behind him. “Life isn’t that easy, friend. The vamp does not return my affections. He’s managed to get himself hitched to two more vamps.”

Darius winces as he takes a sip of his drink. “Sorry, mate. I know you’ve been in love with Damian for a long time now. It’s a shame you were too late.”

“Yeah, Andre will pay for that, too” Kensi comments, a sneer on his handsome face. Darius then says “I heard that it was Michael that held you captive. Is that true? Because he and Andre had a falling out. Michael hasn’t been seen in a while, which is leading people to think that Andre killed him.” Kensi laughs. “Either by Andre’s hand or my own, that bastard will get his, never fear. I have a lot to pay him back for.”

Just then two armed guards enter the bar. Kensi points them out to Darius and the two of them stand and quietly head out the back door.

“Stop by tomorrow afternoon around three. I will have your merchandise then.” With a wave goodbye, Darius heads quickly to a spaceship parked in the back of the parking lot. Kensi waves as well, heading for his vehicle. Better to leave now before he is pursued…

Mikey laughs when their baby tries to escape Ray’s hand. She calls out “Come in” when there is a knock at the door. Kensi enters, immediately calling out “If I came at a bad time, I’ll leave…”

“Nonsense! Come in, Kenny.” Kensi walks up to the couple on the couch, his eyes locking on Mikey’s exposed belly. “I’m sorry to interrupt. I thought you would like an update on the proceedings.” Ray smiles at Kensi. “Of course. Please, go ahead.”

Kensi fills them in on the progress he has made thus far. “The army is settled in; they await your orders. I have purchased half of the goods and slaves that we need to fight this war. I have a few more meetings tomorrow, hopefully I will be able to report that I was able to secure all that we need. I just need your permission for one more thing.” Ray, his eyes still focused on Mikey’s stomach, nods. “What is it, Kensi?”

Kensi clears his throat. “I have some…friends…mercenaries such as myself. They wish to fight for us. They will have to be stationed here in the Light realm. The problem? They…” Kensi waves his hands in the air, in a temporary loss for words. “They are not exactly the kind of…individuals…that you would normally find here.”

Ray and Mikey give him blank looks, so he goes on with “Most are criminals from other realms, some with death sentences over their heads. There are 56,873 altogether.” Ray gasps at the high number. “If we weren’t on the brink of war, I could see you denying their existence here. But all are excellent fighters, all willing to live and die for the Toro clan. They promise that, after the war is over, those that survive will head out to other realms, looking to start their lives over. They just need your assurance that you will not prosecute them for their crimes while they are here in your realm.”

Mikey takes Ray’s hand in hers. “We are in dire straits, sweetheart. The more experienced fighters we have on our side, the better.” Ray looks deep into Mikey’s eyes. The two seem to be having a private conversation between them. Finally, Ray comments “Since these crimes took place on other realms, I am not obligated to bring them to justice. That is for the leaders of the other realms to deal with. Bring your friends, Kensi. Find them lodgings outside the city limits. Give them all necessary food and health care, see to it they are safe. I will meet with them after they are settled. Please thank them for us that they are willing to fight.” Kensi nods his head, a smirk on his face. “I knew you would be happy that I have found a large group of mercenaries to be at your disposal, Ray. I will see to their lodgings as soon as they arrive.” Kensi looks from Mikey to Ray. “I hope you are happy with the progress that I have made so far. I bid you both goodnight.” Ray and Mikey both smile at Kensi. “We both thank you for all you have done, Kensi. Have a good night.” With a nod, Kensi leaves the room.

Ray sighs. “So far, he is all you have said and more. I just hope that he doesn’t change his mind, now that he knows that Damian is taken.” Mikey shakes her head. “Nah. Before you know it, he will have all three of those boys under his spell. I have never met anyone with as much charm and charisma as Kenny.” Ray laughs at this comment. “Well, he better be wearing armor the next time he runs into Tommy! She’s pissed as all get out! He will have his hands full!”

Kensi enters the kitchen and finds Draven standing by the door. “Let’s see—you must be Damian’s son! I heard how beautiful you are, but obviously they weren’t quite right. You are gorgeous! Just like your father…” Draven gives a cautious look, not sure what to make of the new housemate. “Yes, I’m Damian’s son. I heard a lot about you from him. Turns out he was right; you DO flirt right from the gate! It’s a pleasure to meet you, Kensi.” Kensi shakes Draven’s hand, noticing the engagement ring Draven is wearing. “That’s one lucky man! I hope I may attend the wedding…” Just then the kitchen door opens and Tommy stops in her tracks as she takes in Kensi holding her son’s hand. “LET GO OF HIM! DRAVEN, PLEASE HEAD TO YOUR ROOM!” Draven gives a nod to his mother and pulls his hand away from Kensi, muttering his goodbyes as he quickly leaves the room.

“Now Tommy…that was not how it seemed! I was simply making his acquaintance! I was NOT flirting…”

Blood spurts from Kensi’s nose as Tommy connects with a right hook, followed by a left shot to the ribs. Kensi grunts as he grabs for a kitchen towel with one hand, his other hand grabbing his bleeding nose. Once it is covered with the towel, Kensi raises a hand to fend off more blows from Tommy. “You are so beautiful when you are angry…”

“SHUT UP!” Tommy takes another swing at Kensi, this one directed at his stomach. “CAN’T YOU GO TWO SECONDS WITHOUT FLIRTING? You are the most AGGRAVATING BASTARD ALIVE!” Kensi laughs. “The truth is the truth, Tommy. You are beautiful. If that bothers you to hear, I am sorry…”

“I’ll give you my answer right now! You will NEVER sleep with me or my mates! If you so much as come on to them or lay a hand on them again, I will leave them for good. DO YOU HEAR ME? I will LEAVE, and it will be YOUR FAULT! You will keep your hands to yourself and your mouth SHUT…”

Kensi gives Tommy a shocked look. “Tommy, you have me all wrong! I was not flirting with your son! I’m sorry that I come across all flirty, but underneath I’m just a lonely guy looking for companionship. I’m sorry that I have gotten off on the wrong foot with you! I simply asked if the three of you would have sex with me because I like you all so much. There was no malice there at all! I did not intend to break the three of you up! I just thought that the four of us could have some fun…”

Tommy places her hands on her hips, huffing out “The last thing that I want is to have sex with you! You repulse me in every way possible! You took advantage of my husband; you kissed me and Damian against our wills. The three of us were happy before you arrived here, and we will be happy once you are gone! I wish you would just disappear…”

A sad and disappointed look crosses Kensi’s face. “Look Tommy, I’m sorry that I have upset you so much. That was never my intention. I was very happy to see Damian again, and I’m pleased that he is with the two of you. Adam responded to me, so I took things to the next level. I’m sorry about that. I kissed Damian, I wanted him to know that I still love him. But that love is one sided, he belongs to the two of you now. I was instantly drawn to you; you seem like a sweet and special individual. I’m sorry that I have upset you so much. You see, I’m used to being a top, so much so that I end up having to make all the moves all the time. I wanted to have fun with the three of you, I had no idea that it would upset you so badly. Really, Tommy…” Kensi takes the towel off his nose, throwing it on the table. “…I just want to be friends with the three of you. Can we manage that? Friendship?”

Tommy laughs. “Friendship? Can you manage that? Without flirting every two seconds? I don’t trust you.” Kensi nods sincerely. “Just give me a chance, Tommy. The last thing I would like to do is to lose someone like the three of you from my life. Just give me some grace, honey.”

Tommy stares at Kensi as is he’s lost his mind. “I must be crazy to even consider this!” She pauses for a few moments before replying “I will give you a chance. ONE chance! That’s it…”

“Only one thing, Tommy. It is natural for me to call people honey, sweetie…the like. That doesn’t count in your one try! Okay?” Tommy grunts. “FINE! But watch yourself…” Kensi takes Tommy’s hand and shakes it. “You will see, I will be SO well behaved, you won’t recognize me!” Tommy shrugs “As I said, we shall see…” as she makes her way to her suite.

Draven stands in the bathroom, staring at the mirror. His red eyes glare back at him, the black stains on his hands standing out against his pale skin. Sighing, he runs a brush through his long hair with a shaking hand. How can he be nervous? He’s marrying the love of his life today! Just a simple ceremony…

Thomas tucks his shirt into his pants in a spare bedroom in the mansion. Tommy had stopped by a few minutes’ prior, just to make sure that he was on time and had everything he needs. Thomas can hear a band playing in the yard by the fountain where he will shortly be hitched to the love of his life.

Thomas never thought that he would find true happiness. He had spent so many years alone, praying for someone to make his dreams come true. He’s truly grateful to have Draven in his life.

There is a knock at the door. When Thomas yells “come in” Mikey waddles into the room, dressed in a beautiful light grey dress of velvet. “It’s time, love.” Thomas smiles at Mikey. “Thank you for coming to get me. I lost track of time! Don’t want to be late for my big day!” Mikey returns his smile. “Thomas, we are so glad that today you will truly become one of us. We love you very much. Come, let me walk you to your spot in the garden.” Thomas links his arm through Mikey’s and they slowly head towards the door together.

Once in his place at the front of the altar, Mikey kisses his cheek and moves to sit with Ray in the front row. Members of Thomas’s family wave to him, smiles on their faces. Thomas returns their smiles with a nervous one of his own. The bride’s march begins and everyone stands up, turning to look for Draven.

At the house, Damian and Draven hear the first strains of music, signaling their cue to head to the altar. Damian pats Draven’s arm and links their arms together, saying “I love you, son.”

Draven turns to look at his father. “I love you too, dad. Thank you for walking me down the aisle.” Damian kisses the side of Draven’s head, and the two head out the door to make their way to Thomas.

Everyone gasps when they see what Draven is wearing. Playing up the role of the bride, he decided to get married in a white corset top covered with beading, and a white pencil skirt that comes down to the back of his knees. Four-inch white heels complete the ensemble, Draven’s long hair blowing in the breeze. The black tattoos on his hands show vividly against his white ensemble. His red eyes catch on Thomas, who is grinning from ear to ear. Draven blushes and hides his head for a moment, until Damian pinches his side, causing him to raise his head once more.

The ceremony is short. When Thomas slips the ring on Draven’s finger, he mumbles “I can’t wait to take that amazing outfit off you, love.” Draven blushes again, a smirk on his face.

The party afterwards lasts the rest of the night. Around four in the morning the happy couple finally makes their way back to the mansion, heading to Draven’s room. When they arrive, the world starts to spin for a moment, and the two of them are transported to Paulo’s castle, Draven lying on the bed and Thomas chained to the wall.

“Well, congratulations to you both! Finally married, even though Draven is still married to Paulo! Seems our little Draven is quite the bigamist!” Andre laughs. “See son! I told you that he wouldn’t be faithful to you! But since you married him first, I think it’s only fair that you take him first.”

Thomas fights the chains holding him to the wall. “Leave him alone! He doesn’t belong to you! He’s MY fucking husband!” Andre laughs. “By the way he’s dressed, I’d say he’s the blushing bride! Paulo, take him so I can have a turn at him.” Paulo smirks. “Of course, my pleasure, father.” Paulo fights Draven down on the bed, stripping him and pinning him down under his bigger frame. Draven refuses to look at Thomas, who screams out obscenities as he watches Paulo take his beautiful bride.

“I’ve missed you, darling. I dream of the day when the two of us will be together forever. You are in my dreams, I long for you each moment of the day. Like it or not, Draven, you belong to ME!” Draven shakes his head, his unsteady breathing taking his breath away. “Yes, you do! You will spend eternity under me…” Paulo leans down and sucks a hickey into the side of Draven’s neck, which causes Draven to gasp out “Get OFF OF ME!” Andre finding this amusing, laughs at the thought of Draven trying to give orders to either one of them.

When Paulo finally comes deep inside Draven, he pulls out and moves until he is draping Draven’s top half, holding him down so his father can take his place between Draven’s legs. Tears flow down Draven’s beautiful face as Andre takes him over and over again. Andre whispers “It’s good to have you back where you belong beautiful…which is under me.” He finally grunts loudly for the last time, filling Draven up to capacity.

Andre stands and walks over to Thomas, who spits in Andre’s face. “You’re just jealous, bitch, because we took your wedding night from you. I just wanted to let you experience just a bit of what your “husband” endures when he is with us! I’m sure the entire time he is thinking of you, but that doesn’t matter. What matters is the fact that he knows deep down inside that he belongs here with us.” Thomas growls and tries again to fight the chains to no avail. Andre steps back into the middle of the room and claps his hands together. “Son, I believe we have done enough damage for the night! It’s time to send them back to their honeymoon suite. I’m sure there won’t be any sex going on after our time with your spouse. We can take him again any time we want him.” Paulo leans down and places his lips on Draven’s, instantly deepening the kiss. Draven tries to shake Paulo off him but fails, waiting until the kiss is finally over to shift his body away from Paulo’s.

Andre waves his hand in the air. Seconds later, Thomas and Draven, who is still naked, arrive back in their suite.

Thomas reaches out for Draven, who pulls away from him, his face bright red. He brushes past Thomas and locks himself in the bathroom, immediately turning on the shower. He spends the next half hour scrubbing the feeling of Andre and Paulo from his skin, trying hard to feel normal again.

When he finally leaves the bathroom, Draven walks past Thomas with his head down and crawls into bed without a word. He lays with his back to the center of the bed, his body curled into itself. Thomas sighs and turns out the lights, striping off his clothes and crawling into the bed. He makes sure to keep plenty of space between them.

Laying in the dark, Thomas softly says “It doesn't change how I look at you, sweetheart. It doesn’t make you less in my eyes. I’m sorry that they put you through that.” Thomas hears Draven break down, hears him sobbing on the other side of the bed. Thomas longs to touch, but he is afraid to, so he keeps talking instead. He tells Draven how much he means to him, how much he loves him. How what happened will never change how he thinks of Draven, no matter what happens in the future.

When it is finally silent, Draven slowly turns over and places his head on Thomas’s chest. Moving slowly, Thomas wraps his arms around Draven, pulling him closer, rubbing his hand up and down Draven’s back to calm him. The two end up falling asleep like this, curled around each other as if trying to keep the nightmares away.

The next day, Thomas awakes to the sensation of lips wrapped tightly around his erection. Wiping the sleep from his eyes, he reaches one hand down and strokes the side of Draven’s cheek. “Baby! You don’t need to…” Draven takes a deep breath through his nose and lowers himself on Thomas’s dick until his nose bumps Thomas’s stomach. Thomas gives out a loud gasp as Draven swallows a few times before pulling back until just the head is in his mouth. He repeats the motion over and over until Thomas yells out “Baby I’m coming!”

Draven takes another deep breath and swallows everything his husband has to give him. Swirling his tongue over the head, Draven then pulls back, satisfied with the glassy look in Thomas’s eyes.

“Baby! Thank you, but you didn’t…” Draven takes two fingers and presses them to Thomas’s lips. “I wanted to. I woke up to you poking my backside, I couldn’t resist making you feel good.” Thomas reaches out and wraps his arms around Draven, pulling him close. “I thank you, my love. But how are you feeling?” Draven shrugs, his eyes hooded. “I’m as well as I can be. I didn’t sleep much, too many nightmares. But it was nice to wake to your arms around me. I can get through anything, as long as I have you by my side.” Thomas growls “You are MINE, Drave! No matter what happens, you are always going to be mine!” Draven sighs out “I love that idea, darling. And you are always mine, no matter what. We will find a way to navigate this nightmare, until the two of them are finally dead.”

Kensi quickly completes his mission of supplying the family for the coming war. He reacquaints himself with some of his past ‘clients’ who have missed working with him while he was away. After yet another informational meeting with Ray, Kensi finds that he has a lot of free time on his hands. He uses it pondering how to go about becoming friends with Tommy and Adam, without coming on to them. He feels he’s not up to the task. He is sure he will fail somewhere along the way.

He starts out by watching movies with Damian. The two sit with a bowl of popcorn between them (this after finding out that popcorn is something that the two of them have been craving, so they tried it. They were delighted to find out that they could eat it!)

Tommy would wander in from time to time, which Kensi took to be her keeping tabs on them, to see if Kensi can behave himself. She appears surprised each time she enters the room, expecting to have to separate the two of them. Each time, Kensi gives Tommy a soft smile, making her blush when she finally realized she was caught in the act. Surprisingly, it’s Damian who is caught leaning towards Kensi, his hand on Kensi’s knee. Tommy clears her throat but Damian does not back off, instead giving a devious look to his wife. Tommy thinks to herself that she is going to have to have a conversation with her husband when the movie marathon is over…

Kensi ends up playing pool with Adam the next day, who wins every game. This is shocking, considering how much time Kensi has played pool in bars across the cosmos. He thought he was the best pool player around. Adam seems comfortable in Kensi’s presence, even though he blushes a lot for no reason.

One day Tommy walks into her suite from the bathroom to find Kensi playing with her children. She is taken aback as she watches him tickle her daughter, causing peals of laughter to escape the little girl. Her son crawls his way over to Kensi, pulling himself up and standing with his hands on Kensi’s side. Kensi wraps his arm around the boy in time to catch him from falling on the floor.

“Oh…hello Tommy! Hope you don’t mind my spending some time with your children. I find them enchanting! Makes me wish I was a father.” Tommy places her hands on her hips and, after a few moments of silence, says “It’s fine with me that you spend time with the children. They seem to like you. Since you are here, I’ll go take a shower if that’s alright with you.”

“Go ahead! I promise they will be fine. I like babysitting.” Tommy gives the three of them one last look, then heads towards the bathroom, shaking her head.

The four adults spend more and more time together, until it becomes a habit for one of the three to invite Kensi to be a part of whatever they are planning to do. Tommy slowly begins to warm up to Kensi, against her better judgment. Damian and Adam are shocked that she trusts him with the children, who adore Kensi.

One night the four of them decide to go see a play. When they arrive, they find that there are only three seats available in the small balcony. Without a word, Kensi wraps his arms around Tommy, pulling her down on his knees. When she starts to protest, he places his lips to her ear and whispers “Shhhh darling! You won’t be able to see if you sit on Damian’s or Adam’s laps, their chairs are behind us. I promise I won’t take advantage. Just get comfy and enjoy the play.” Tommy’s face flames, her eyes searching out her husbands, who give her smiles in return. Throughout the play, Kensi doesn’t move his hands from her hips, even though he occasionally whispers comments in her ears to make her smile. At the end of the play, he stands her up on her feet, holding steady until she regains her footing, then removes his hands. “Thank you for sitting with me, Tommy. What say the four of us head to a bar down the street? I’m sure the four of us are due for a little dancing!”

Once they get to the bar, Kensi asks Tommy’s permission to dirty dance with Damian. “I wouldn’t want to overstep, honey. Is it okay? I don’t want to make you mad.” Tommy looks from Damian to Kensi, a look as if she wishes to protest on her face, even as she chokes out “Uhhhh, sure, if Damian wants to dance.” Kensi takes Damian’s hand in his and leads the two of them to the dancefloor.

Adam carefully watches Tommy watching the other two grinding on the dancefloor. If Adam is correct, he thinks he sees a look of jealousy on his wife’s face. Whom she is jealous of, he has no idea.

Adam takes Tommy’s hand in his, pulling her with him to the dancefloor. The two of them dance while they watch the other couple have fun together.

As morning approaches the four of them head back to the mansion, exhausted. When they arrive, Kensi kisses each of them goodnight on the cheek. “I had an amazing evening! Good night to the three of you.” With his head held high, Kensi heads off to his suite.

When they arrive at their suite, Damian says “that was fun! Tommy, you should dance with Kensi someday. He is an amazing dancer.” Tommy gives a slight shrug and heads off for their bedroom.

Pete sighs as he takes his newborn in his arms for the first time. Trick’s labor was long and bloody. At one point, Pete thought that he was going to lose the love of his life. Luckily Frankie and Lela are there to help bring the baby into the world.

Pete looks down at his daughter, a smile on his face. “Babes, what do you and Damian plan to name this one?” Trick, her voice tired, replies “Damian and I decided that you are the one to name the baby. It’s only fair, since you are the father.” Pete goes to protest, but Trick cuts him off. “You always said that you wanted to name a baby after your mother. So why not do so? I think Alicia is a lovely name.” Pete’s eyes tear up as he chokes out “Then Alicia she will be! Thank you to both of you.” Pete says “I wish Damian was here with us. I’m sorry that he got hurt by Andre’s men. That’s what he gets for trying to go back to the Dark realm all by himself. If he had asked, I would’ve gone with him.”

It's Trick’s turn to sigh. “Damian tried to sneak in to access the realm, but he got caught. He’s lucky he escaped after they beat him senseless. Frankie said he might be able to come see us soon; he should be healed enough for a visit in the next couple of days. So, we have our baby girl all to ourselves tonight.”

In his suite, Damian painfully shifts on his bed. The door opens and Kensi walks in, a frown on his face and hands on his hips. He takes in Damian’s swollen purple face, the bruises coming together to form one large bruise. He notices the cast on his arm, sees the painful way he is holding himself on the bed as he grabs his wrapped chest. The beating must have been horrific, if Damian’s natural ability to heal isn’t working on his injuries. “Just what in the fuck did you think you were doing, going by yourself? I should’ve gone with you! I should kick your ass for your stupidity!” Damian gasps out “I thought I could sneak in, assess the situation and leave. Little did I know that there would be so many guards. I was lucky they didn’t kill me.”

Tommy enters the room with a handful of icepacks. “It’s useless, Kensi. Ad and I have been bitching him out all day, and he brushes off our comments. I’m sure he won’t listen to you…”

Damian hisses as Tommy places an icepack on his shoulder. “If I must go back, I will take soldiers with me. The two of you need to calm down…” Tommy tweaks Damian’s arm, making him hiss out “Okay, I’m sorry!” He sighs as he goes on to say “Mikey was devastated by my news. There is no way right now for us to fix things on the Dark realm. That’s a separate war that we are not equipped to fight.”

Kensi places his hand gently on Damian’s arm, saying “One thing at a time. Let’s just hope that we are prepared to fight this one, once it starts. I’m sorry you got hurt, honey. If there is anything you need, you only need to ask.” Damian and Tommy thank Kensi as he makes his way out the door.

Tommy turns to Damian, her hands on her hips. She says in a tone filled with awe “He really cares for you, Dam. Maybe I misjudged him. I thought he couldn’t care for anyone besides himself.” Dam gasps out “You have him all wrong, honey. Kensi is one of the most caring, loving vamps I’ve ever known. I told you; he’s always trying to cover it up with a smart assed attitude, but it’s there. Never doubt it.” Tommy thinks to herself for a moment before adjusting the bed covers. “I’m still not sleeping with him!”

Ray bursts into the room. “Where is Adam?” Tommy, shocked, answers “He said he’d be right back, he went into town for a few things. Why?” Ray gasps out “The war has begun! We must leave for the front lines. I just told Kensi…”

Damian struggles to pull back the covers and stand. “I’m coming with you…” Both Ray and Tommy protest, pushing Damian back into bed. “We can do without you until you heal, Dam. Stay in bed, that’s an order. We will be fine…” Ray leans down and kisses Tommy on the forehead. “Some of the Vampaire are staying here to guard the mansion. Please check in on my Mikey, make sure she is okay. If something happens, have Damian bring me back to the mansion. I love you.” Ray then turns and heads out the door.

A few minutes go by and Adam bursts into the room, his arms filled with groceries that he places on the couch. Walking to the bed, he asks “You’ve heard the news?”

Both Tommy and Damian nod. Adam then calls out “I’m headed to the front lines. Both of you kiss me, quick.” Tommy leans up and wraps her arms around Adam, squeezing him tight. Adam kisses her, returning her hug. He then leans down and kisses Damian, who whines in the back of his throat. He manages to croak out as they separate “Be careful for us, Ad. We love you.” Adam tells each of them he loves them and then heads out the door.

Once they all arrive at the front lines, Ray yells to Draven “You take the first wave on the left. Thomas will take the wave on the right and meet you in the middle. Kensi and his mercenaries will be right behind you. Good luck, grandson.”

The battle wages on for hours. Adam suffers a bad cut from a jackal which Frankie immediately manages to heal. Andre and Paulo are nowhere to be found.

Just as things are beginning to calm down at the front, Andre and Paulo transport themselves into the mansion with a large contingency of jackals. They make short work of the Vampaire guards scattered throughout the mansion, then head through the mansion gathering family members. They ignore Damian in his bed, thinking that they can have him anytime they wish. When they manage to collect the rest of family in the main hallway, Andre says a spell and they are all are transported to Paulo’s castle.

Chapter Text

When they arrive at the castle, guards immediately surround the women and children in the living room. As he enters the room, Andre waves his arms wide and calls out “Welcome to our home! Settle in, because you are going to be with us for a long time. Your poor husbands will arrive home to find you gone. I’m quite sure that they will be missing you! You will find that there is plenty of room and plenty of food for all of you. Trick, you will be sleeping in my room. Paulo can choose whom he’d like to sleep with.” Andre then crosses the room and grabs Trick by the arm, saying “Gather your children. You are coming with me.”

Tommy, Lela, and Gee stand in unison, all three attempting to block Andre’s path. “Leave her alone! She doesn’t want to go with you! You’ve done enough damage!” Tommy cries out. Andre sneers at the group, then smirks. “Little hens stick together! Paulo, maybe you should take on all three of them! Teach them a lesson!” Andre shoves the three females aside and then drags Trick and her children down the hall to his room.

“Please, Andre…not again! I don’t want sleep with you, and I don’t want to carry any more of your children! Please let us go.” Andre waves his hand in the air and a nanny arrives to take Trick’s children into the next room. “I couldn’t care less what you want, Trick! Since my Damian isn’t here to keep me warm, you will have to do. Now take off your clothes and get into bed, or else your children will suffer the consequences.” With tears in her eyes, Trick slowly removes her clothes and pulling back the covers, slips into bed, her back to the center of the bed. Andre strips and climbs into bed laughing. “That won’t save you, dear. Now obey me and roll over.” With a sigh, Trick rolls over onto her back “Now, pretend I’m Pete and spread your legs. I want to fuck your brains out.”

In the living room, nannies appear to take Tommy’s children. Tommy comments “It’s a good thing that Alondra isn’t here. I’m glad that she is being tutored by Luna instead of here with us.”

Paulo stands over Gee, Lela and Tommy, leering. “Which little bitch shall I take to bed with me tonight?” Gee spits at Paulo, which enrages him. “I see you have quite a lot of fire in you this evening, Gee. Let’s see how good you are in bed…” Paulo grabs Gee by the hair and drags them down the hall, Tommy hanging on for dear life as she tries to pull Gee away. Lela blocks Paulo’s path, so he knocks her unconscious. Paulo then shoves Gee through the door and punches Tommy in the face, causing her to hit the floor. Paulo slams the door shut in her face, locking it before turning his wrath on Gee.

“What a pretty little bitch you are, Gee.” Paulo roughly runs his hand down the side of Gee’s face. Gee turns their head and bites Paulo’s fingers, causing Paulo to backhand Gee with his other hand. “Fucking bitch! I’ll make you pay for that!” Paulo rips off Gee’s clothes, slamming them onto their back on the bed. “Spread them, whore. Let me see what I’ve made mine.” Gee squeezes their legs together, causing Paulo to curse. He grabs both knees and yanks harshly, a loud popping sound echoing through the room as he wrenches open Gee’s legs. Gee howls in pain, swinging both arms wildly, fists connecting with Paulo’s face and chest.

Moments later, the only sound in the room is Paulo’s grunting and Gee’s crying. Paulo takes Gee over and over, until he collapses on the bed, trying to catch his breath. Gee finally pushes Paulo’s body off them, tears continuing to course down their face. As Gee tries to bolt off the bed, Paulo reaches to the top of the bed and pulls down a weighted collar and chain, wrapping it tightly around Gee’s throat. “There, little bitch! Just where I need you, in case I want more. Stop blubbering and go to sleep!” Gee stutters out “I…want my hhhusband! Let me go! I want to go hhhome!” Paulo sneers at Gee before punching them upside the head, effectively knocking them out. Paulo looks down at an unconscious Gee and shrugs. “Might as well take the bitch a few times more before falling asleep! At least there’ll be no fighting back…”

Ray opens the front door of the mansion. Eerie silence greets him, setting his teeth on edge. The mansion is never quiet—sounds of arguments, playing and screaming children, sounds of laughter echo through the halls. “Hello?” As Ray calls out, silence continuing to fill his ears. He turns towards Adam, Draven, Kensi, Thomas, Pete, Sonny and Frankie, a panicked look on his face. They head off in different directions, looking for loved ones.

Adam and Kensi find Damian in their bed, sound asleep. They wake him, helping him from the bed and down the hall. Ray finds Mikey unconscious on the floor next to his bed. Ray gently runs his hands over her body, trying to ascertain if she is hurt. The baby kicks against his hand a few times, making Ray sigh in relief. He gently picks Mikey up and lays her down on the bed.

The others arrive at Ray’s room, completely hysterical. “Where are our wives, our children?” Adam asks, his voice cracking with emotion. “Is Mikey okay?” Just then, Mikey opens her eyes. She slowly looks around before grunting in pain. “Why aren’t you at the front lines? What happened?”

Ray fills Mikey in on what is going on, while Frankie quickly examines Mikey. “All the females and children are missing. How is it, sweetheart, that you are still here?”

Mikey squeezes Ray’s hand as a contraction takes over her. “I went into town to see the midwife. I knew that Frankie was too busy to see me. She was sixty miles away delivering a baby, so I came back here to the mansion. When I entered the bedroom, my intention was to lie down on the bed. I didn’t make it that far.”

Frankie moves to the top of the bed, his hand searching out Mikey’s. “Honey, as you know, you are in labor. I am going to have to do a c-section. The baby is too big, there is no way that you can deliver it without breaking your pelvic bone. Sonny can help me.” Mikey squeezes Frankie’s hand. “But the baby! He’s early! Will he survive?” Frankie leans down and kisses Mikey on the cheek. “Have faith in us, sweetheart. All will go well.”

The others leave Mikey, Ray, Sonny and Frankie in Ray’s room to deliver the baby. They meet in the library. Damian, clearly frustrated, says “If they took them to Paulo’s castle, there is no way to get them back! The only magick that works there is Andre’s and Paulo’s. Take it from one who knows, the second you arrive there you are drained of power. Even Draven’s evil is ineffective.” Adam asks “Do you have any idea where the castle is?” Damian and Draven both shake their heads. “The castle is obscured in clouds. There is no way to tell where it is. He has us totally under a barrel this time.”

Draven suggests “What about Luna? She pulled dad and I out of the castle once before! Maybe she can help…” Suddenly there is a flash of light, blinding them all. When they can see again, Luna is standing in the middle of the room. “I heard you, my boy. I have tried multiple times to break through the forcefield on the castle, to no avail. Andre’s getting smarter, if that is at all possible.”

Kensi stands “I think I know someone who might be able to help. I’ll be back as soon as I can.” With a smile to Damian and Adam, he heads out of the room and out of the mansion.

Ray brushes the hair off Mikey’s forehead, a smile plastered on his face. He can tell that Mikey is nervous. He whispers to her “I love you, sweetheart. Our baby will be with us shortly! I cannot wait to hold it in my arms…” Mikey grunts, sweat breaking out on her face. “I…love you…” A searing pain takes her breath away. Ray shifts forward, watching Frankie make the incision. Ray replies “I love you, babes.”

“Deep, slow breaths, Mikey. Just a few more minutes…” Sonny steps closer with a towel across both arms, waiting to take the baby from Frankie, who slides his hands into Mikey’s abdomen. Suddenly a small head pops out of the incision, covered in blood. Frankie slowly pulls upright, and the rest of the baby can be seen as he shifts it into Sonny’s arms. After Ray cuts the cord, Frankie looks at Mikey and Ray and, with a huge smile on his face, proclaims “It’s a boy!”

Sonny quickly wipes off the baby before laying him down on Mikey’s chest. Tears pour down both Ray and Mikey’s face, they are so happy and relieved that their baby is finally with them.

Sonny takes over, reciting a spell as he slowly sews Mikey’s incision closed. Frankie walks to the side of the bed, saying “He’s perfect! Just a little underweight, but that shouldn’t cause a problem.” Just then the baby starts to cry, experiencing hunger for the first time. When Mikey places him on her breast, the baby screams louder and pulls his little head away from her nipple. Mikey gives Frankie a startled glance, which causes Frankie to shake his head. “I was expecting this. He may prefer blood to milk.” Frankie heads to the kitchen and returns with a few blood bags, pouring the contents of one into a baby bottle. When Mikey offers the bottle to the baby, he takes a sip and then starts sucking enthusiastically, his eyes locking on Mikey’s.

“Draven went through the same thing when he was born. Eventually he ended up eating human food, but this little one may decide he wants nothing but blood. Either way, he will grow up just fine.” Ray asks “Wait! If he’s just like Draven, does that mean he’s…evil?”

Frankie shrugs. “That’s a question for Luna.” Sonny wipes Mikey’s stomach off, and with a brush of his hand the sheets under Mikey are changed. Covering her with blankets, he softly says “We should leave to give you time with your new baby. Congratulations, both of you!” Frankie echoes Sonny’s words and the two of them head out to join the others.

Mikey gives Ray a tired smile. “Are you happy, sweetheart? Is he everything you wanted?” Ray leans over the baby, a huge grin on his face. “All that and more, my love. All that and more.” Ray places a gentle kiss to Mikey’s lips before pulling back to take in his wife and son.

Kensi knocks on the ancient door in front of him. The wood splinters under his hand, making him briefly wonder if the occupant had long ago moved from this abandoned corner of the Eros realm. A soft “Who’s there?” can be heard as if the occupant is scared to answer the door.

“It’s Kensi. Remember me? It’s been many years…” Soft footfalls make their way to the door before the sound of locks shifting echoes through the surrounding area.

When the door opens, Kensi expects to see an old, grizzled woman. Instead, he sees a tall, youthful, gorgeous blonde, and her eyes widen in recognition. “Kenny!” She takes a few steps backwards, gesturing to Kensi to enter her home. “It has been…two hundred years or more! Please, come in!” As Kensi passes the blonde, heading into the sunken living room, he hears an inquisitive “I wonder why…” behind him.

“Talia, I need your help. I’m sorry that I have been away for so long. But you are the only one that can help me. Please, I beg of you, help me…” Talia passes Kensi and moves to sit on the couch, her arms spread out across the back. “I’d offer you blood, but I do not have any. Anka drank the last of it when he was here…”

“I’m fine, Talia. Please, I need your help. I will do whatever you say, just help me. Andre…” Talia raises a hand in the air to stop Kensi’s words. “Save your breath, darling. I refuse to get involved with anything that has to do with that bastard…”

Kensi takes a few steps forward; his arms open wide. “I thought you would like a chance at revenge, after what he did…” Talia once again raises a hand. “You will not mention that name to me! The door to that part of my life is closed and will remain so. Andre will suffer by the cosmos’ hand, not mine. You may leave, Kensi.”

Kensi stands still for a moment. “You refuse to help me, one who has done so much for you and yours? Who saved Alexia from those Orcks? Who kept your entire family fed during that ten-year drought? Who paid the fines on your parent’s homestead…”

“ALL RIGHT! I admit that you have done much for us over the years! But that doesn't mean I have to engage Andre of all people! My life is quiet and perfect, and you want to wreck it!” Kensi makes his way over to the couch that Talia is sitting on, sitting down next to her. “If it wasn’t so important, I wouldn’t ask, Talia. Please help me.” Talia gives Kensi a leveled look. “What is his name?”

Kensi gives Talia a leveled look. “This has nothing to do with my loving someone…” Talia cuts him off by saying “BULLSHIT! DON’T LIE TO ME, KENNY! YOU LOVE SOMEONE AND THEY ARE IN DANGER, AND YOU WANT ME TO PUT MY LIFE ON THE LINE FOR THEM! AT LEAST HAVE THE DECENCY TO TELL ME THE TRUTH!”

Kensi sits in silence for a moment. “The Toros…the women and children have all been taken by Andre and Paulo. I…love a vamp whose mate has been taken. I have been taken in by this family, they trust me. I don’t want to let them down…” Talia cocks her head to the side, silently taking in the situation until she says “You love this female, too. Otherwise, you wouldn’t be here. What have you gotten yourself into this time, Kenny?” Kensi sighs. Obviously he’s not going to get away with avoiding the subject…”Do you remember Damian?” Talia nods. “Beautiful vamp, long blonde hair. Troublemaker. What about him?” Kensi sighs. “He’s the one I’m in love with. He has two mates that, and if I’m being completely honest, I’m falling for them as well. The one is a female named Tommy Joe; the other is a male named Adam. Andre has separated them, others as well. I can’t bear to see them hurting. I can’t save them on my own, I need your help, Talia. Please say that you will help me rescue them.”

Talia takes a few moments to think, staring deep into Kensi’s eyes. In a quiet voice she asks, “What’s in it for me, Kenny?”

Kensi carefully replies, “What is it you want, Tally?”

Talia stands and paces the room, her eyes locked on Kensi. After a few minutes she practically whispers “I have been alone for a long time, Kenny. There are so few that I trust, much less tolerate. You have always been one of those for me. So, I must ask you to make the ultimate sacrifice, if I am going to help you.” The two stare down each other for a few more minutes, each waiting for the other to give in. Finally, Talia continues. “I want you to marry me, spend the rest of your life with me.”

When Kensi does not immediately respond, Talia continues with “I want you to give up your lovers, Kenny. Put me before them, leave them behind. Make me the only one that matters in your life. Marry me or leave the others to suffer. It’s your choice.”

Kensi immediately thinks of Damian, of Adam and poor Tommy and those adorable children who were suffering this very minute. How can he let them continue to suffer? Could he ever forget Damian, his one true love? And what of the other Toro’s, who have grown to mean so much to him?

“What is your answer, Kenny? Freedom for the Toro’s by marrying me, or let them suffer under Andre’s wrath?” Kensi feels as if his heart had shrunk three sizes as he replies, “I’ll marry you, Tally.”

Talia claps her hands together in glee. “Then take me to the Toro’s so I can get started, Kenny.”

The two return to the mansion. Kensi introduces Talia to everyone. Sonny steps forward to shake Talia’s hand. “I will be happy to be your assistant, Talia. This way to my suite.” The two of them leave, and Damian walks up to Kensi. He looks Kensi over carefully, picking up on his silence. “What did you do, Kenny?”

Kensi shrugs, his eyes locked on the floor in front of him. “I don’t know what you mean, Dam. Everything is fine.” Damian grabs Kensi’s shoulders, shaking him. Adam joins the two of them, having picked up on the vibe between them. “What’s wrong with the two of you? Isn’t this good news?”

Kensi nods, still not making eye contact with either of them. “It is. I’m sure that, with a little time, Talia and Sonny will be able to find the others.” Damian shakes Kensi again, his voice showing his frustration. “Kenny, I’ve known you for a long, long time. You never hold back when you are upset. Please, tell us what is wrong.”

Kensi gives both vamps a leveled look. “I had to make a deal to get Tally to do this. In exchange for rescuing everyone, I…” Kensi suddenly looks nauseous “…have to marry her.”

Damian and Adam stand still in shock for a moment, the two of them struggling to register the news. Adam chokes out “MARRY?” while Damian struggles to hold back laughter.

Rage takes over Kensi, who punches Damian in the stomach. “BASTARD! HOW DARE YOU LAUGH! When you are the one that I love the most!” Damian immediately stops laughing, a look of shock covering his face. “Kenny, I know you love me, but…” Kensi cuts Damian off, shoving him backwards as he continues with “NO, you have NO idea how much I love you! I have loved you for as long as I have known you, and you have been my only love.” Kensi turns to Adam, saying “I’ve fallen for you and Tommy as well. But I must do what I must to save everyone, regardless of what that means for me. For once let me be the unselfish one and let me do what needs to be done!” Turning on his heel, Kensi heads to his suite, tears in his eyes.

Adam turns to Damian, shock still covering his features. “I knew that he loves you, Dam, but I didn’t know how much or for how long. And to say that he loves me and Tommy! How can we let him give up his life for us? It’s not fair that Talia is asking this of him! Especially knowing that he loves us.” Damian nods in agreement, searching for the right words. “Kenny has always said he loves me, but for the longest time I thought he meant as a friend only. I had no idea that he was in love with me for so long! And I had an idea that he was falling for the two of you, but I wasn’t sure how serious he was with all of this. How can he allow himself to be put into this type of torture? Marrying someone that he doesn’t love, to save those that he does?” Adam replies “It’s his way of showing us how much he loves us. The ultimate sacrifice.” Damian gives Adam a hug. “I’m going to talk to him some more, see if there is another way out of this.” Damian gives Adam a broken smile and heads out of the room.

He finds Kensi’s suite door locked. Damian knocks for a long time, but Kensi does not answer the door. So, he does the next best thing…

…he heads to Sonny’s suite to speak to Talia.

When he arrives, he finds the two of them sitting on the floor, surrounded with grimoires. After greeting them, Damian asks Sonny if he could give them a few minutes alone so they may talk.

Talia gives Damian a sharp look, one of her hands raised to stop his flow of words. “I know what you are going to say, and you can save it. I know that Kensi is in love with you and your mates, and you want me to change my mind and set him free. Save your breath. I am not going to change my mind, Damian. Kenny will marry me after this rescue is complete, and he will live with me for the rest of eternity. And there is nothing you can do about it."

Damian’s anger rises into full blown rage. “How can you take advantage of him, use him that way? Kenny is the most honest, caring individual I’ve ever known! To trap him that way…”

“…Why do you think I want to marry him? I agree with you; he is quite a catch. And I have been in love with him for a long, long time. I have waited for him longer than you can imagine, and I finally have what I want. So, you and the other two can fuck off and leave him alone! The moment the others are back in this house we are getting married, and there is nothing you can do to stop us! So why don’t you leave Sonny and I alone, so we can find the right spell to give you what you want?” Talia returns her gaze on the book in front of her, freezing Damian out.

Damian tries once again to get Kensi to answer his door, to no avail, so he returns to his own suite. He finds Adam already in bed. Yanking off his clothes, his voice showing his rage, he comments “That fucking bitch! How dare she trap Kenny like that? He doesn’t deserve to be with that conniving bitch! We must find a way to get him to see the light…”

Adam pats the bed next to him. “We don’t even know if she will be able to help us find the others, Dam. I’m just as upset as you, but at the moment there is nothing we can do. We can’t make Kensi talk to us if he doesn’t want to. Let’s just try to sleep and hopefully tomorrow, he will be open to speak to us.” Damian lays down next to Adam, wrapping his arms around him and squeezing him tightly. “I love you, baby” Damian says, kissing Adam on the cheek. “Sweet dreams…”

Almost three months goes by with no luck. The family is getting more and more frustrated as time goes by, especially since they still must contend with fighting at the front lines every day. Finally, after a long day of battle, the men head to the house to find Sonny and Talia waiting for them. “We found them! We have worked on a spell to gain us access to the castle, where you can rescue and return them here. We just have to wait for the right moment, when both Andre and Paulo are at the front lines.” Frankie snarls “Andre hasn’t been to the battlefield since the beginning of the war! How are we going to lure him out of the castle?” Damian immediately says “That’s easy. I’ll lure him in. He'll be too busy fucking me to pay attention to what is going on at home.” The others do not like the idea, and they voice their opinions, but Damian stands firm. “It’s the least I can do to get them back. Sonny, I’m going to trust that you can bring me home when I call for you.” Sonny nods in agreement. “Of course, father.”

The next evening, Talia sets a forcefield around the mansion. Damian heads to the Dark realm, standing in what used to be his bedroom. He calls out to Andre by saying “Andre? Can you hear me? I want to talk to you.”

Andre appears in a flash of light, a smirk on his face. “Well, well, well! If it isn’t my former sex slave turned husband! You have a lot of nerve calling me to you, as if I were your servant!” Andre walks up to Damian, taking a handful of his hair and pulling sharply. “So, what is it you want, my little bitch?”

Damian swallows, allowing a little of the fear that he feels to show through. “I want to make a trade, Andre. Me for all the women and children.” Andre throws back his head and laughs. “You think mighty high of yourself, Damian! You think you are worth the lot of them? An even exchange? Your ego is as enduring as it is tedious, bitch.” Damian, afraid that Andre will turn and leave, reaches out with both hands, running them over Andre’s body. “Please, master. Please listen to me. Give me a chance to change your mind.” Andre grunts out loud, obviously enjoying the attention he is getting. Damian takes a deep breath and steps forward, staring into Andre’s eyes seconds before he lowers his lips onto Andre’s. Andre is still for a few seconds before wrapping a hand in Damian’s hair, pulling him closer. Damian opens his mouth, his tongue snaking out to entangle with Andre’s in a deep kiss. Andre snakes his other arm around Damian’s middle, ensuring that he cannot pull away from the kiss.

When Andre finally pulls back, he laughs at the blush covering Damian’s cheeks. “Awww, suddenly feeling shy, Dam? After one kiss?” Andre waves his hand in the air, and Damian’s clothes disappear. “On your knees for me, baby. Take out my cock and show me how much you’ve missed me.”

Damian fights to keep his mind blank, to give nothing away. When Andre enters him, he grunts in pain. Andre quickens his pace, taking Damian as brutally as he always has. After three orgasms, Andre gasps out “What makes you think I won’t keep you for myself, regardless of the others? You can take Trick’s place in my bed. It’s been lonely without you…” Damian begins to beg. “Please, Andre, send them home. Keep me. I will be so good for you…” Just then Damian disappears.

When he arrives back at the mansion, he finds everyone has gathered in the large living room. Tommy is sitting between Adam and Mikey, getting petted by both. Children run through the room laughing and chasing each other, adding to the chaos. Trick, Lela and Gee are sitting quietly with their significant others, whispering words of love to each other.

Adam calls out to Damian “Are you alright, love?” Damian nods, his eyes locking on Kensi. “I’m fine. Are we all here? And what about Paulo?” Adam answers “Paulo is dead, Ray killed him. His ashes are scattered on the wind. We were lucky we didn’t encounter Justine. No one knows where that bitch is.” Damian nods once again. “Thank you to Sonny and Talia for everything. We are all together again, and it is because of you.” Talia stands and moves next to Kensi. “I am glad to help. Since you are all together again, I think it's time to fill you in our news, right, Kenny?” Kensi does not make a noise, instead he simply stares at Tommy as if he’s never seen her before. “Kenny and I are getting married, and you are all invited.” Tommy gasps out loud, her hand covering her mouth. Talia smiles at her. “I know this is a shock to some of you, but it’s been a long time coming, right darling?”

Once again, Kensi doesn’t make a noise, he continues to stare at Tommy for a few more seconds before he stands, stepping around Talia and silently heading to his suite. Tommy stands, following in Kensi’s footsteps until she is standing a few inches from him in his suite.

“What…what was that?” Tommy asks, confused. Kensi explains the bargain that he made with Talia for their release. “I saw no other way to rescue you, sweetheart. I will wed…”

“NO!” Tommy bellows out, her bangs falling in her face as she shakes with rage. “I won’t have you sacrifice for me, for us! Tell the bitch you changed your mind, that you want to be with us…”

Kensi steps forward until the two of them are only millimeters apart. He wraps his arms around Tommy, staring into her eyes for a moment before gently kissing her. With a gasp, Tommy wraps her arms around Kensi, pulling him closer. Kensi sinks a hand into Tommy’s hair, his other hand cupping Tommy’s chin. The kiss goes on and on, growing more passionate as they begin to run their hands all over each other’s bodies.

Tommy pulls back long enough to command “YOU CAN’T MARRY HER! YOU BELONG TO US!” Kensi gives a sigh as he once again takes Tommy’s lips, savoring the moment between them.

When they finally part, Tommy places shaking hands on her hips. “I’ll take care of that bitch. I’m make sure she understands where you belong!” Tommy then turns on her heel and storms out of the room.

Talia is speaking with Lela when Tommy finds her. Giving Lela a look that clearly says “Leave!” Tommy barks out “You will marry Kensi over MY DEAD BODY, BITCH!”

Lela, taking the hint, quietly leaves the room. Talia glares at Tommy. “So, you are the one who managed to ensnare my fiancé! I can see the attraction, but you are shit outta luck, sister! A deal is a deal, and I’ve never known Kenny to back out on a deal. We will wed, and you and your mates will simply have to suffer the consequences!”

Tommy takes a few steps closer. “How can you want a vamp that doesn’t want you!? He has always belonged to Damian, and Ad and I are lucky that he wants us, too! How can you lay in bed next to him, knowing that it is us he wants? HE WILL NEVER WANT YOU! HE IS DESTINED TO BE OURS!”

Talia shakes her head. “It doesn't matter who he thinks of. I will have him next to me, and that is good enough. I have always loved him, and this is my chance to have him for my very own! Kenny is a stand-up guy, he will go through with the wedding, so face it, you will simply have to spend the rest of your lives without him.” Pushing Tommy out of the way, she heads to the kitchen in search of something to eat.

Two days later, Kenny hears a knock on his door. Sighing, he stands and goes to unlock the door. He expects to find Talia but instead is greeted by the three individuals he’s longing most to see.

“Can we come in, Kenny?” Damian asks, his voice imploring. The two lock eyes for a moment, Kenny seeing the longing in Damian’s eyes. He nods as he steps back to let the three of them enter.

Once in the suite, Tommy takes control. “The three of us want to spend the night with you, before you marry tomorrow. We are hoping that, after having us, you will change your mind. Please, Kenny? Can we stay with you?”

Kensi’s eyes fill with tears. Adam steps forward and takes his hand, pulling him in for a kiss.

The rest of the evening passes by quickly, with the four of them taking turns pleasuring each other. When at last the only two left to experience each other are Kensi and Damian, who both suddenly appear shy.

“I’ve always loved you, Dam. I thought you would never want me the way I want you. I was afraid I would lose you forever…” Kensi leans forward, his lips seeking Damian’s. The two tumble on the bed, the other two watching from their perch on the edges of the bed. Kensi pulls away from Damian far enough to whisper “Please, Dam…take me.”

As Damian enters Kensi, he whispers words of love. “I love you, my precious. We all love you. Please do not leave us, please stay forever.” Kensi gives a gasp as Damian bottoms out inside of him, kisses raining down upon his body. He comes in Damian’s arms, tears returning to seal the memory in place forever.

The next morning the door to Kensi’s suite flies open. Talia walks in to find the two vamps and two werepires in a pile on the bed, cuddling and laughing. Without missing a beat, she puts her hands on her hips and growls out “ENOUGH, KENNY! GET OUT OF THAT BED AND GET READY FOR OUR WEDDING! TODAY IS THE DAY THAT I MAKE YOU MINE FOREVER…”

Chapter Text

There’s another world inside of me
That you may never see
There’re secrets in this life I just can’t hide
Somewhere in the darkness there’s a light I just can’t find
Maybe it’s too far away…
Or maybe I’m just blind…
Or maybe I’m just blind
So hold me when I’m here
Right me when I’m wrong
Hold me when I’m scared
And love me when I’m gone
Everything I am
And everything in me
Wants to be the one
You wanted me to be
I’ll never let you down
Even if I could
I’d give up everything
If only for your good
So hold me when I’m here
Right me when I’m wrong
You can hold me when I’m scared
You won’t always be there
So love me when I’m gone
Love me when I’m gone…

Three Doors Down—When I’m Gone

The garden of the mansion becomes the place for all family members to wed. On this morning, chairs are set up in rows that lead to the central aisle covered with a velvet runner leading to the altar. Friends of Kensi and the family are seated, in attendance to see what they believe will be the wedding of the century…

White roses in beautiful silver and black vases surround the center aisle. Soft music plays from a stringed orchestra behind the altar.

Everyone is pulled from their conversations to stare at Kensi, who slowly walks to the right side of the altar. He is dressed in a snug black suit, the collar of his dress shirt starched. Immediately he begins to search the crowd for those that he knows, looking for strength. At last, his deer in the headlights gaze lands on the front row, where his three lovers from the night before are seated.

Tommy is sitting between Adam and Damian, tears flowing down her beautiful face. Adam is trying to quietly calm her down to no avail. Tommy has a handkerchief in her hand, which she uses to wipe the tears away from her eyes. Damian is squeezing one of her hands tightly, giving her a lifeline to hang onto.

Adam’s expression shows his deep sadness. He pulls Tommy into his arms and cradles her head against his shoulder, whispering to her as his eyes implore Kensi to change his mind.

Lastly, Kensi turns his attention to Damian. The look of love that shines through Damian’s eyes takes Kensi’s breath away. Damian mouths the words “I love you,” a sad smile on his face. Kensi slowly nods in return, tears filling his eyes.

The orchestra begins to play the bridal march. From the house Talia slowly heads towards the altar, red roses clutched in her hands and a veil covering her face. Her wedding gown glows with beads that shine in the lights surrounding the garden.

When she finally arrives at the altar, she hands her roses into Mikey’s gentle hands before turning her attention on Kensi.

Kensi’s face becomes pale, as if until this very moment, the reality of what is about to happen hadn’t really crossed his mind. He shoots another look at his three lovers, each whom silently continue to implore him to change his mind. As if suddenly interpreting the side bar expressions marring her moment, Talia flings her veil back, her expression fixed on Kensi as if to reiterate to him his vow to her. Kensi refuses to meet her eyes, a blush taking over his face.

The preacher looks from Talia to Kensi, a look of concern on his face. Talia waves a hand in his direction, as if insisting that he start the ceremony. The preacher immediately starts his part of the ceremony, welcoming everyone to the nuptials. He notices that many in audience either look bored, or are sitting on the edge of their seats, waiting to see what drama will emerge in the next few minutes.

When the preacher gets to the part where he asks if there is anyone in attendance who wishes to speak out against the joining of the couple in front of him, the crowd tenses. The family knows what has transpired with Kensi and the three seated down front, and they hold their collective breaths.

Talia shoots a look that says “SPEAK AND I’ll KILL YOU” at the three mates. Tommy takes this as a direct challenge, jumping to her feet and screaming out “HE CAN’T MARRY YOU! HE LOVES THE THREE OF US! IF YOU MARRY HIM, IT’S THE SAME AS PUTTING HIM IN PRISON!” Damian tries to pull Tommy back down into her chair, but Tommy wrenches her dress out of Damian’s grip. “KENSI HAS ALWAYS LOVED DAMIAN! ASK HIM! KENNY, TELL THE TRUTH! TELL THIS BITCH WHO YOU REALLY LOVE…” The preacher, taken aback by the change of program, turns towards Kensi. “Son, is this true? Do you love one of the young men in the front row?” Kensi raises his head and stares at the preacher as if he’d never seen him before. More gently this time, the preacher says “Tell the truth, Kensi. Would you rather be with any of them?”

Kensi glances at his three lovers before returning his gaze to Talia, who is standing there with barely controlled rage.

Memories of the night before float through Kensi’s mind—finally being able to touch and taste each of them, of feeling each of their bodies sink into his. How can he live without them? He will spend every waking moment longing for them, wanting to be with them.

The preacher reaches out his hand to prompt Kensi, who gives Talia one last long look before opening his mouth and…disappearing.

Justine laughs at Kensi’s expression of shock and surprise when he arrives in front of them. She stands to the side of Andre, who is perched on a throne at the far end of the room.

Andre claps his hands together in glee. “Kensi! We meet at last! Forgive me for removing you from your current predicament. You looked as if you could use a little saving.” Andre stands and makes his way to stand in front of Kensi, who visibly tenses. “Tell the truth, boy. You were going to back out on your promise, weren’t you?” Kensi starts to protest but Andre raises his hand to stop his words. “Justine and I were watching the four of you last night. Very intriguing! You make quite the group! There is no end to the fun that could be had with all of you!” Kensi stares into Andre’s eyes, looking for…something. He says “I would’ve gone through with my vow, Andre. Some of us hold ourselves to a higher standard.”

Andre throws back his head and laughs. “You’re full of shit, Kensi! You would’ve backed out and run back to your lovers in a heartbeat! Those three are damn good in bed, especially Damian. I should know because he is my husband! I’ll tell you something, brat…” Andre steps closer, until their noses brush each other. “…if you had decided to choose Damian, you would’ve gone up against me. You will NEVER have Damian! He’s mine, body and soul. So, if I were you, I’d think again about taking my vamp from me.” Kensi’s back stiffens at the threat, his face turning red with rage. “You treat him like shit, Andre! He deserves someone who loves him with all their heart, not someone who thinks they own him!”

Justine yawns loudly. “As exciting as this bitchfest is, I’m falling asleep here! I thought you said that we were going to use him to get even with the Toros…” Andre waves a hand in frustration at Justine. “Patience, bitch! One step at a time. Right now, the entire family is freaking out over his disappearance. Let the shock wear off before we make the next move.” Andre looks Kensi up and down, as if assessing him for purchase. “In the meantime, the two of us can play with him. He’s handsome, I’m sure he’s decent in bed. Let’s try him out, shall we?”

Back in the garden, everyone is seated in shock at Kensi’s disappearance. Talia sweeps the long train of her dress aside and stomps up to Damian. “YOU RETURN HIM! I KNOW YOU DID THIS! RETURN HIM IMMEDIATELY!” Damian stands, his hands on his hips. “I DID NOT send him away, Talia! Maybe he found another way to leave you, but I had nothing to do with it! I’m sure Andre is behind this!” Mikey steps forward and tries to calm Talia down to no avail. Talia screams “THE THREE OF YOU ARE BEHIND THIS! I WILL MAKE ALL OF YOU PAY FOR WHAT YOU’VE DONE!” Turning on her heel, she stomps back towards the house, the whispers of the guests following her all the way.

Tommy gasps out “What can we do? How are we going to rescue him? Andre will never let him go.” Damian, his face set, says “I’ve got an idea.” He kisses Tommy and Adam before heading back to the house alone. Once in his bedroom he calls out “ANDRE! I want to see you! Please bring me to you!” There is a few second of quiet before Damian is transported to a dim room. Andre and Justine are standing in front of Kensi, who is chained naked to a St. Andrew’s cross.

“Kenny!” Damian calls out in shock. Kensi locks eyes with Damian, who rushes forward to try and unchain him.

“Torestem” Andre barks, causing Damian to stop frozen in his tracks. “Now, is that polite, Damian? Interrupting our good time with your silliness! What is it you want this time, husband?”

Kensi calls out a tense “Don’t, Damian” before Damian softly says “Let me touch him, let me set him free, Andre. He belongs home with all of us. He’s loved by all; we miss him already. Please let me unchain him, please send him home. For me.”

Andre and Justine laugh at Damian. “Oh, dear loving husband! Now why in the fuck would I do that? You know I like to play with pretty boys, and he’s special. It means even more to me to destroy him, since you are so fond of him. I’m glad you are here, Damian. You get a ringside seat to all the fun!”

Justine and Andre spend the rest of the day torturing poor Kensi, who takes it all without a sound. Damian tries multiple times to entice Andre away from his task and fails, tears constantly running down his face as he watches his beloved destroyed. Finally, Justine unchains Kensi and says to Andre “You promised I’d have first dibs at him, Andre! I want him now…” Andre opens his mouth to yell, but instead his gaze focuses on Damian where he is kneeling on the floor. “You get him for tonight, Justine. I’d rather spend the rest of the night with my loving husband…” Andre grabs Damian by the arm and drags him down the hall to his bedroom, throwing him on the floor when they enter. “Kneel up, bitch. My dick needs attention. Show your husband how much you love him…”

“Are you sure?” Gee asks Frank, worried. Frank shakes his head, a grin on his face. “You’re not pregnant, Gee. Something has gone right for us for once!” Gee gives a sigh of relief. “So…” Gee’s expression changes to a begging one, trying hard to keep her excitement in check. “…does this mean that we can try for our own baby?”

Frank stands still for a moment, contemplating Gee’s words. He knows how much Gee would love to have another baby, but he is secretly afraid to lose them both. “Baby, I know you want to be a momma, but I’m still scared to lose you.” Gee gives Frankie a pleading look. “I promise I will take the best care of myself, honey. Can we try, one more time? I promise this will be the last time I ask.” Frank kisses Gee passionately then pulls back, sighing. “Just when have I ever not given you what you ask for, love? Let’s work on getting you pregnant…” Gee jumps for joy, tears filling her eyes. “Oh sweetheart! Thank you so much! I promise you will not regret this…” Frank gives Gee an evil grin. “I will love creating one, that’s for sure!”

Lela doesn’t get off so easily. “What do you mean I’m pregnant, Sonny? I was only with Paulo once, and he didn’t even complete the act! We got interrupted; he got called to the battle front. I can’t be pregnant…” Sonny interrupts “I’m sorry, honey, but you are. You are due in seven months…”

“Kill it.”

Sonny stares at Lela, stunned. He couldn’t have heard what he just did…

“You heard me, Sonny. Kill it. If you don’t, I’ll find a way to kill it myself.” Lela takes a few steps forward so she can wrap her arms around Sonny. “I CAN’T carry this…NO! I need you to kill it for me, please. If you love me, you will do it.” Sonny freezes in Lela’s arms. How could he kill an innocent? No matter what, the baby inside of Lela is pure, he’s sure of it. If he can only make her see…

Noticing that Sonny isn’t budging on her request, she tries once again. “I can’t carry to term! I will hate every second of it, knowing that it is not yours. Please, Sonny…” Lela places a gentle kiss on Sonny’s lips. “…please do this for me.” Once again, Sonny hesitates, so she drops her arms from around him and heads to the door. “If you won’t help me, I’ll find someone who will…”

Walking through the house, Lela spots Frankie walking into his suite. She knocks on the door, entering when he calls out to her.

“I’m sorry to bother you, but do you have a moment, Frank?” Frank nods and waves Lela into the suite. Lela cuts to the chase by saying “I have a problem, and I need your help. I’m pregnant by Paulo.” Frank gives Lela a shocked look. “I spoke to Sonny about his aborting the baby for me, but he is hesitant to. Can you please do it? The last thing I want is to be pregnant by that monster.”

Frank takes a few minutes to think things over. He finally answers “Lela, I’d love to help you, but I can’t. Not in good conscious. There is a chance that Sonny may want to be father to this baby. The last thing I want to do is take that chance away from him. Why don’t you go back and speak with him further?”

A slow simmering rage takes over Lela. “What about ME? What about what I want? It’s MY BODY, I would have to carry a baby I DON’T WANT, just to make HIM happy? Must I ALWAYS make everyone else happy?” Gee, hearing the commotion, enters the room. “Lela, honey…are you alright?” Lela grunts before answering “Never mind, Gee. I see I won’t get any help here…” She turns on her heel and storms out of the room, leaving a bewildered Gee and an upset Frank behind.

Lela tries Draven next but gets the same answer. Everyone seems to be more concerned about Sonny than her situation. She straightens her dress in frustration. Just as she is about to leave the mansion in search of the midwife in town, there is a blinding light which fills the room, startling her. When she can once again see, Luna is standing in front of her.

“I wouldn’t leave the mansion alone, daughter. Not with the war going on. Now, suppose you tell old Luna why you would risk your life…” Lela fills Luna in on her situation, tears flowing down her face. In response, Luna stares deep into Lela’s eyes for a moment before placing her hand on Lela’s stomach, her fingers spreading wide. Lela bends over for a moment in pain, feeling something pass through her. When she looks at her feet, she sees what looks like a blob on the floor, which disappears when Luna waves her hand in the air. “There, child. No more problem. I’m sorry that Paulo hurt you, but you are all better now.” Lela steps forward and wraps her arms around Luna, giving her a big hug. “Thank you, mother, for listening to me. The males in the house all wanted to stick together against me. It’s nice to know I have you on my side.” Luna places a gentle kiss to Lela’s cheek. “I’m always here for you, child. Remember that.” With one more hug, Luna disappears.

Lela returns to her room and tells Sonny what happened. A look of deep disappointment colors Sonny’s face, causing Lela’s heart to drop. She quickly reaches out and places her hand on his arm. “Sonny, I’m sorry to take away your chance to be a father. But I’m sure that the two of us can have a baby of our own, when we are ready for it. I want it to be OUR baby, not that monster’s! Who knows how it might’ve turned out! Every second I carried that…thing…memories of how it got there kept running through my mind. I couldn’t handle it. I want OUR baby to be a joy for both of us, no nightmares or bad memories ruining it for us. I hope you understand…”

Sonny blinks back tears and gives Lela a sad smile. “I understand, honey. I just never realized just how much I want to be a father until I found out you were pregnant! I know that we will have our chance, but…” Lela nods, encouraging Sonny to finish his thought “…do you think we can try soon for a baby?”

A huge smile makes its way across Lela’s face as she reaches out her hand to cup Sonny’s dick through his pants. “Why don’t we start now, love?”

Blood runs down Kensi’s face from a large cut on his scalp. Damian blinks back more tears as he stands in front of his love, whip in hand. Andre sits in a chair across the room, looking totally bored. “I haven’t got all day, Damian. Whip him. Make his front match his back, all broken open and bleeding. Do it, or I’ll unchain him from the cross and do it myself. I won’t heal him, and you won’t like what he ends up looking like…”

Damian gives Kensi a look begging forgiveness, which Kensi shakes off with a shake of his head. “Go ahead, Dam. Give me all you got. Make this bastard happy…” Continuing to stare into Kensi’s eyes Damian says “I’m sorry. I love you…” before his arm swings back and he lets the whip fly. The first slash carves a deep path down Kensi’s chest and arm. Damian gasps when he sees the blood well up in the cuts, shocked that it was really him that caused his love so much pain. Kensi, ever stoic, merely stares deep into Dam’s eyes, the love that he feels showing through the pain. Damian lets the whip fly again and again, until a satisfied sigh is heard from Andre. “That’s enough, bitch. Why don’t you kiss him all better? I’m sure he is dying for your lips…” Damian drops the whip and rushes forward. In his excitement to take Kensi’s lips with his own, he accidently slams his body into Kensi’s, causing a loud whine of pain. Damian feels blood soak his skin as he licks Kensi’s lips before kissing him. The kiss seems to go on and on, Damian enjoying himself so much that for a moment he forgets the predicament that his love is in. Finally, he hears Andre growl out “That’s enough, husband. Save that passion for me!” When Damian finally pulls back, Kensi unwisely barks out “What’s wrong, Andre? Afraid that he prefers my lips to yours?”

Andre quickly stands up, crossing the room to take Damian’s hand in his, his blazing eyes staring deep into Kensi’s. “I was going to heal you for his sake, Kensi. Now I think I’d rather let you bleed out. Goodnight. I’m sure you will enjoy your last moments hanging there before your death as you hear me fuck the love of your life…” Andre then grabs Damian by the arm and drags him out of the room over Damian’s pleading with him to please heal his love.

Once they arrive in Andre’s room, Andre throws Damian to the floor. Towering over him with rage etched on his face, Damian knows that it will not end well for him. “Look at you! Covered in that bastard’s blood!” Andre waves a hand and Damian’s skin is clean again. “Lusting after him, wanting him! You should be wanting to kiss ME like that, NOT HIM! I’M YOUR HUSBAND! You save all your passion FOR ME! I COME FIRST, NO ONE ELSE!” Damian stares up at Andre, scared into silence. When he doesn’t respond to Andre’s tirade, Andre sneers down at him. “Well, since you refuse to speak to me, I’ll just have to make sure that you understand by beating it into you!”

Kensi feels the blood slowly leaving his body from his many wounds. From way off he hears Damian screaming and begging for Andre to leave him alone, to stop hurting him. His heart goes out to his love, knowing that this is the life Damian is forced to live on a regular basis. He knows that he provoked Andre on purpose to get a response, but he is now regretting that Damian is the one on the receiving end of Andre’s rage.

His last thoughts before he dies are of Damian, Tommy and Adam, as the last of his blood is spilled out onto the floor…

Damian lays in bed next to Andre, staring at the ceiling. He knows that he should get some rest. Andre can wake at any moment, demanding more of Damian’s attention…and body. But sleep will not come. He can’t help thinking about his love in the next room. Is Kenny dead? Is he still dying? Will he ever look into Kenny’s eyes again, see life and love and warmth?

Frustrated, Damian holds his breath and slowly crawls out of bed. He hears Andre’s slight snore, knowing that he succeeded in sneaking out of bed. Too anxious to put clothes on, he sneaks out of the room naked, heading into the torture room next door.

Spotlights shine circles of light throughout the room. Damian slowly makes his way through them, until he is standing in front of Kensi. A spotlight shines down on his perfect body which is covered in deep cuts and bruises. Blood is covering him from head to toe, a large puddle under him had stained the floor crimson. Kensi’s head is hanging down, his chin touching his chest.

Damian, suddenly fearful, steps forward until he is mere inches from his love. He reaches out a hand and places it on Kensi’s shoulder, attempting to wake him from his slumber.

All he feels is cold skin.

Damian gently shakes Kensi’s shoulder, whispering “Wake up, love. Please, for me, wake up.” Nothing. He tries harder, shaking Kensi’s arms, pushing his palms against his shoulders.

Louder, he says “PLEASE BABY…WAKE UP!”

Nothing.

Damian lifts Kensi’s chin and a cold chill runs down his spine as he stares into dead eyes that stare through him as if he were not there. No love, no light…nothing.

Damian screams.

Andre storms into the room, pulling back his arm and slapping Damian across the face. Damian falls to his knees, his screams still echoing through the room. Andre pulls back his head by the hair and slaps his face a few times until Damian gains his bearings. From his place on the floor, he looks up into Andre’s face, sees the rage in his eyes. Standing under a spotlight, his hair hanging around his shoulders, Andre looks like an avenging angel, full of righteous indignation. In a voice laced with hurt and bitter resentment, Andre stares down at Damian.

“I’ve been nothing but good to you, Damian. I’ve given you just what you deserve to keep you in line. I’ve given you my time, my patience and even my heart, but nothing is good enough for you. No, you squander your love on others, on Tommy, on Adam, even this bastard hanging dead in front of you. You never thought to give your love to me, you never appreciate all I do for you, all the love I carry in my heart for you. I’m tired of your rejection. I’m tired of your hatred, your fear, your disgust. I’m tired of offering you the cosmos, only for you to throw it back in my face that you do not love me. Fine. You will not give me the love I desire; you will not be my husband; I will simply take from you what I want, no love, no concern for your welfare. I will treat you like any whore out in the street. I will take from you until there is nothing to take and then throw you away like the piece of shit that you are.”

Damian opens his mouth to speak, but Andre continues. “I gave Mikey a son. Tonight, I was going to lay claim that child as my very own. I’ve changed my mind. Let that cunt and her husband keep that little shit. I have a better plan.”

From his place on the floor, Damian gives a loud scream as he suddenly feels, between his legs, that he is being slowly torn apart. There’s no blood running down his legs, but he feels a…hole…being torn open. In his abdomen, he feels…something growing on either side of his dick, feels…lips? growing between his legs around the hole. His chest swells into large boobs. Confusion takes over the fear he’s feeling. Just what the fuck is going on?

Andre smirks down at Damian, his eyes shining with delight. “I’ve called you my bitch so many times in the past, Damian. Now you really are my bitch! I’ve given you the body of a bitch. YOU will carry my baby; YOU will learn what it means to truly be subservient to me! YOU are less than me, YOU mean NOTHING but WHAT I GIVE YOU! YOU are NOTHING but a fucking SLUT who begs at my feet for my cock! You are no better than any other bitch in heat. It’s time I put you where you belong…”

Andre grabs Damian by the arm and hauls him to his feet. His new body aches as warmth from a rush of hormones floods his system. For a moment he is standing toe to toe with Andre, and he sees the maniac in Andre’s eyes.

Damian has never been so scared. Andre drags him back to bed, throwing him down on his back in the middle. Damian tries to rise, tries to push himself off the bed but his limbs suddenly won’t work. He presses his legs together as Andre tries to climb on top of him, trying to keep him from achieving his goal.

Andre laughs. “It will take a lot more than that to keep me out, bitch!” Grabbing each leg, Andre gives Damian a twisted smile as he yanks Damian’s legs apart, crawling between them. A loud crack fills the room as one of Damian’s legs breaks, his scream bouncing off the walls.

Andre grabs both of Damian’s wrists in one hand, yanking his arms over his head and holding them down. Looking first into Damian’s terrified eyes, then slowly down his new body, Andre whistles his approval. “Fuck, baby! You are so fucking HOT! I can’t wait to try out that sweet little cunt of yours…” He takes Damian’s lips in a searing kiss, parting his lips to sink his tongue into Damian’s mouth. Taking his time, he runs his free hand downward, cupping a breast.

Damian gasps when teeth graze then bite his nipple, feeling the flesh pulled away from his chest to snap back in agony. Andre repeats the process on the other side, biting until blood wells up at the cuts. Andre bites over and over until both breasts are covered in stinging bites.

Andre pulls back and sinks his fangs into Damian’s neck, letting Damian’s blood trickle down his throat. He never tasted anything sweeter, Damian’s blood a special mix that Andre can’t get enough of. If he didn’t have plans for him, he’d simply drain him dry, loving every drop he swallowed.

Damian mumbles nonsense words, his mind a jumble of fear and revulsion. Andre pulls back just far enough to litter Damian’s body with stinging bites, just enough to bruise. He pulls back in time to see tears start to flow down Damian’s face. With a grin, Andre leans down and licks the tears from his face.

Damian knows what comes next. He’d been with countless women, his precious love Tommy coming to his mind. He knows what Andre intends to do. He starts struggling against Andre’s grasp, causing Andre to laugh out loud again. “Finally realize I’m going to fuck that sweet little hole, bitch? That little hole is mine, all mine, and I intend to take it…” Damian feels Andre tighten his grip on his wrists again before ramming a finger deep inside him. It’s tight, too tight. It feels as if his flesh is ripping just from the initial push. Damian knows he’s in for major pain…

Andre teases Damian, slowly thrusting his finger in and out before shoving a second finger in besides the first. Damian stares at the ceiling as he whimpers against the pain. How in the hell can he take Andre’s cock? It won’t fit…

Andre adds a third finger, laughing as Damian tries again to escape from the situation, kicking his good leg and trying to pull his arms out of his grip. Andre leans over Damian until they are inches apart, hissing “STAY STILL, BITCH!” in Damian’s face.

Once Andre has four fingers in Damian, he pauses, leaving Damian to imagine the nightmare that he has yet to endure. Andre yanks his fingers out harshly, trying to cause Damian as much pain as possible. By now, the flesh between Damian’s legs feels as if it’s on fire, with very little moisture easing the way.

Over the years, Damian had experienced horrific torture by Andre’s hand. He spent unending hours begging and screaming for the pain to stop, for sanity, to be left alone. More than once, he felt his mind break under Andre’s torture, felt his body break as he was taken repeatedly. Andre had taken everything from him in the years that he spent as his sex slave. But this was different. In all the years of pain and torture, Andre never broke his soul. He feels Andre place his dick against his hole, looking into bottomless black eyes as he feels Andre lunge forward, sinking into him in one go. Flesh tears around Andre, causing Damian to give out a garbled, broken cry. As Andre bottoms out inside him, he feels his soul crack, feels as if he’s lost something that he will never regain. He feels like a shadow of himself, feels as if he will never be himself again.

Andre sighs in delight. “You’re so fucking tight, bitch! I won’t last long at this rate…” He pulls back and slams forward, the tip of his dick slamming into Damian’s cervix. He picks up the pace, letting go of Damian’s arms so he can place both hands on Damian’s hips. Suddenly Damian feels a new pain. He lets out a broken “NO, PLEASE!” as he feels Andre break through his cervix, fucking his very womb.

Minutes go by in agony. Sweat drops down on his body. Andre begins to lose his rhythm, making short, jerky movements that show that he is close to completion. Damian feels no pleasure, only pain. With a growl, Andre comes deep inside of Damian, who screams out in pain as what is left of his soul shatters around him.
Andre drops down on Damian, making him take his full weight. He places a kiss to Damian’s cheek then says “Excellent fuck, bitch. You’re in for a long night. I’m not going to stop until I know for a fact that you are carrying my brat…”

Time crawls by. Andre takes Damian over and over, until his stomach begins to swell with all the come deep inside of him. Suddenly, Andre sniffs Damian’s neck, growling with happiness. “There! Your scent has changed! You are knocked up, bitch.” Tears begin to flow down Damian’s face again. Andre pulls out of Damian, sitting up on the side of the bed. “I’ve decided to speed up your pregnancy. You will barely be able to keep up with changes your body will go through. I want that brat sooner than later…” Damian wipes his face, his breath stuttering as he asks “Please, can you let my family know that I’m safe? I know that they are worrying about me…” Andre grabs Damian’s chin in a tight grip. “YOU NEVER LEARN, DO YOU, BITCH? I COME FIRST, NOT THEM! Your family doesn’t exist, only I DO! YOU WILL FOCUS ON ME AND ME ONLY! That body of yours was meant for ME…” Andre stares towards the doorway for a moment, an evil grin on his face. “I’m sending the body of your lover home to your family. Let them bury him. I’m through dealing with your lovers.” He reaches out, rubbing Damian’s stomach. “You have other things to focus on, like keeping me happy. Like our child. Like being a good little bitch…now move over, make room for me. It’s almost morning. You need all the rest you can get; you’re growing a little one inside of you.” Andre lies down next to Damian, pulling up the blankets and wrapping his arm around Damian’s middle, pulling him back until their bodies touch. “Good night, bitch.”

Damian lies staring at the opposite wall, tears still streaming into the pillow below him. He feels cold, feels a hole where his soul used to be. He rubs his stomach slowly, trying to wrap his head around the idea that he is going to have a baby. A baby. He’s pregnant…

Thoughts of his lovers fill his mind. Will he ever see them again? If he does, how will they ever accept his body this way? Shame makes Damian blush. They would never want a half man, half woman like the creature he’d been turned into…his thoughts once again turn to Tommy. Is this how she and Trick felt, once Andre changed them? Did they feel like freaks as he does? Did they wish they were dead instead of enduring the shame?

A huge yawn threatens to split Damian’s face in half. “Better to go to sleep and worry about it all later” he thinks to himself. Now if he can only keep Andre from beating him while he carries the baby…

Lela screams when Kensi’s bloody, broken body appears at her feet in the library. Members of the family run to her side, gasping in shock when they take in the scene in front of them. Adam and Tommy arrive last; they push through the group until their eyes take in the sight in front of them. Tommy gives a broken cry, turning into Adam’s body for comfort. Adam wraps his arms around Tommy, his face showing sadness and sorrow. Lela finds a blanket on the back of the couch and covers Kensi’s body, blocking the horror from their eyes. Ray steps forward towards Tommy and Adam, wrapping his arms around the two of them. They lean into his arms in grief, looking for support.

Ray whispers “I’ll take him to the garden, bury him next to the children.” Tommy screams and sinks to her knees, pulling the blanket back until Kensi’s face is visible. “NO! We need to bring him back to life! Get Sonny! He can do it…” Adam hauls her to her feet, wrapping his arms around her tightly. “No, sweetheart. Not everyone can be saved. We should just let him find peace…” “NO! NO, HE WANTS TO BE WITH US! HE FINALLY FOUND US; WE CAN’T LOSE HIM! PLEASE, PLEASE HELP ME!” Ray looks around the room and says “Let’s give them time to say goodbye.” Everyone slowly drifts out of the room, giving Tommy and Adam sad looks on their way out the door.

Tommy breaks out in sobs, her head collapsing onto Adam’s broad chest. “We just found him! How can we let him go? How…Damian! Damian isn’t here to say goodbye! We can’t bury him without Damian…”

Adam pulls Tommy back until the two of them stare into each other’s eyes. “Baby, you know I love him too. We must let him go. He must find peace. He’ll have us in the next life…” Tommy shakes her head. “No, let’s take him to his room, then ask Lela to bring him back to life, the way she did with Thomas. Heal his body. I will wash him; we will tuck him into bed until Lela can resurrect him. Please, Adam! Damian will never forgive us if we bury his love without him being here! I beg of you…”< /p> Tommy begs for the better part of an hour, until finally Adam relents. He leaves Tommy with Kensi, going in search of Lela. When he finds Sonny, he relates the tale to him. “Do you know where Lela is? We need her to resurrect Kenny.” Sonny replies “She’s on a mission with Luna, she will be gone for quite a while. If it would help, I can preserve his body until Lela can heal him.” Adam thanks Sonny, then leads him to Kenny’s body. An hour later, Kensi’s body is cleaned, healed and preserved, lying in his bed in his suite. When Adam suggests that he and Tommy retire to their room to have some blood, Tommy, sitting on the side of the bed, takes Kensi’s hand in hers and refuses to leave his side. Adam patiently says “Baby, you need to come with me. You can visit him later. I’m worried about you. Please let me take care of you.” With tears flowing down her face, Tommy slowly nods then stands, blindly reaching out for Adam’s hand. Adam takes it in his larger one, gently pulling Tommy back to their suite.

“Four months. I’m reducing your pregnancy to just four months, bitch. Get ready.”

So far, Andre has refrained from hitting him, no matter how obstinate Damian becomes. He’s now three months pregnant, his stomach large and round. The baby kicks at this statement from Andre, as if agreeing that it wants to be born sooner than later. Andre steps towards Damian and he jumps involuntarily, afraid of what comes next. Andre places his hand on Damian’s stomach, teasing the baby into a frenzy of motion. Damian relaxes a bit under Andre’s touch.

A guard comes into the room. He whispers something into Andre’s ear that causes him to tense, pulling his hand back from Damian. He abruptly leaves with the guard, making Damian wonder what is going on.

He returns a few hours later, his face a mask of rage. Damian wraps his arms around the baby, suddenly scared of what will happen next. He is surprised when Andre abruptly growls out “I’m sending you home, Damian. It is not safe for the two of you here. I have placed a spell on the baby; nothing can happen to it. I will bring you back here to deliver it when the time is right. Take care of it and yourself, Damian.” When Damian opens his mouth to speak, Andre raises a hand and Damian is whisked home.

He arrives in Mikey’s bed next to Mikey, who is breast feeding her son. Mikey jumps at Damian’s arrival, a little squeal filling the air as she shows her surprise. Taking in Damian’s large stomach, she turns inquisitive eyes towards him. “Dam! I’m SO glad you are home! And PREGNANT!”

Damian bursts out in tears. He tells Mikey the tale of his rape and his time being pregnant. “Mikey, how the fuck can I face Tommy and Adam? How will they accept me like this? I’m a freak…”

Mikey leans down and takes Damian’s lips in a gentle kiss. “Baby, Andre has changed us, Tommy, myself, Trick…we are all part women now. We all have had to adapt to our new bodies, and our mates have all accepted us as we are, because they love us! You are no different, my love. We love you for who you are, sweetheart. They will understand and accept you, never fear. Hell, Ray loves my new body! It gives him options he never had before!” Damian laughs at that. “Trust me, love. You are not alone in this new life. We are all here for you.” Mikey lays the baby down in his bassinet next to the bed and wraps her arms around Damian, pulling him in close, holding him for a while until he calms down.

After a few hours, Damian gets the courage up to face his mates. He kisses Mikey’s lips and thanks her for understanding. “I love you forever, Mikes. Thank you for always being there. You mean the world to me.” Mikey gives Damian one more kiss and then watches him go, a slight smile on her lips.

Damian heads to his suite, his stomach doing nervous flipflops. He opens the door to find Tommy and Adam on the couch cuddling. In a soft voice, Damian asks “Got room for one more?”

The two of them turn as one, immediately taking in Damian’s large stomach. They both gasp in surprise, making Damian want to run from the room in a panic.

Adam is the first to stand up, to approach Damian slowly, as if he were a wild animal. Damian stands rooted in one spot, cringing as Adam reaches out to gently run his hand over his stomach, a look of wonder on his face. Damian blushes, his head dropping until his hair covers his face, hiding his shame. Adam plays with the baby for a moment more before taking Damian into his arms, pulling him in for a long hug. Tears begin to flow down Damian’s face, at last his emotions finding a home in his lover’s arms. Adam clings tighter, whispering words of love into Damian’s ear between kisses on his cheek and neck.

They stay like this for a while, until at last Tommy wants a turn holding Damian. She wraps her arms around Damian, tears beginning to flow down her own face as the two of them share a moment. They can silently relate to each other; each having had similar experiences by Andre’s hand. Each were turned into half women; each carried or carry his children. Tommy gives Damian the acceptance that he is craving, and he is grateful to her.

They pull Damian down on the couch between them, tucking themselves around him. Damian’s tears finally begin to dry, feeling the acceptance that he craved from the moment he conceived. Without words, they show their acceptance, show their love for him that will never, ever end.

At last, Damian feels as if he is home.

Chapter Text

The next evening, Adam and Tommy accompany Damian to Kensi’s suite. They told him in advance what to expect, but it doesn’t stop the tears that flow down Damian’s face when his eyes take in Kensi’s prone body from the bedroom doorway. Damian stays locked in place for a few minutes before slowly walking over towards the bed, sitting down on the edge next to Kensi. Tommy and Adam flank Damian, their own tears returning. After a few quiet minutes, Damian grabs Kensi’s hand and begins to wail “IT’S MY FAULT! I DID THIS TO HIM! I KILLED HIM! IT’S MY FAULT!!!” The baby begins to kick wildly, reacting to Damian’s anxiety.

Tommy reaches out and tries to take Damian into her arms, but he pushes back, staring first at Tommy, then at Adam. “YOU DON’T UNDERSTAND! ANDRE MADE ME WHIP KENNY UNTIL HE BLED TO DEATH! IT’S MY FAULT HE’S DEAD!!!” Adam scoots next to Damian, wrapping his arms tightly around him. “Baby, don’t, please! Andre is to blame, not you! You just did what you were told! We all know how Andre has the power to make people do whatever he wants! Dam, you are NOT to blame! Please calm down! You are upsetting the baby.” Damian lays his head down on Adam’s shoulder and wails. “I see it over and over in my mind, me whipping him, his blood flowing down his body. I tried to stop; I tried but I couldn't! Andre just kept staring at me, happy to see I was in such agony hurting Kenny like that! He got off on Kenny’s punishment, then dragged me from the room to beat and fuck me while poor Kenny lay dying!” Tommy takes Damian’s hands in hers. “Baby, Ad’s right. You are NOT to blame! Andre is the bastard that needs to pay for Kenny’s death…”

Just then there is a knock on the door, startling all three of them. Lela enters, calling out “Anyone here?”

Tommy walks to the doorway, calling Lela into the room. When she sees how hysterical Damian has become, she calls out “Mama?” There is a bright flash of light and Luna appears in the room, leaning heavily on her cane. She slowly walks over to Damian, giving him a sweet smile as she gently rubs her hand over his stomach. “What is it, daughter? What do you need?”

Lela moves to stand next to Luna. “I…feel something…smell something…” Luna nods her head in agreement. “I feel it, too. Have you noticed it before?” Lela shakes her head. “No. I have no clue what it means. Do you?”

Adam, always with the short temper, barks out “WHAT? What are you talking about?”

Lela approaches on the opposite side of the bed. “Where was Kensi born?”

Looking confused, Damian stutters out “Ttthe Silver rrrrealm…” Lela turns back to Luna, excitement in her voice. “Do you think?”

Luna nods. She steps around Lela and places her hand on Kensi’s forehead. “Why didn’t we see it before? Why has no one told him?”

Exasperated, Adam growls out “TELL HIM WHAT?” making both Tommy and Damian jump. Luna stares at each of them in turn before saying, “Have you heard the prophecy of the Black Knight?”

Damian nods his head. “But I thought the Knight was just a myth I’ve heard about since my childhood!” Luna nods her head. “He’s real, dear heart. He’s laying right here in front of you!” Lela nods her head in agreement. “The tale goes that the Knight was born of the Bright Ones, in the far away Silver realm. The scent of myrrh and honey is said to follow him wherever he goes. He’s an enigma, that’s for sure. He carries the tattoo of the Bright Ones.” Luna raises Kensi’s arm. There, on the inside of his forearm, lies a small tattoo. The tattoo shines with bright light when Luna moves Kensi’s arm forward. The pattern is intricate, interlocking patterns of different shapes and sizes.

Damian shrugs. “I’ve seen the tattoo every time we’ve had sex, but I never thought anything about it. What does it mean?”

Lela smiles at Damian. “It means that he is the leader of his people. He is sacred to them. The tales say that he will be reborn from a horrific death. He will come into his power shortly if the tales are correct. When he does, he will be invincible. He will lead his people out of bondage into a place of peace and prosperity.” Luna cuts in to say, “He will help Draven create a new cosmos.”

Lela and Luna place a hand on Kensi’s forehead. They begin to chant in unison, their voices loud in the quiet room. Ten minutes goes by before Kensi slowly opens his eyes.

Damian leans down and wraps himself around Kensi the best he can, his pregnant stomach getting in the way. Kensi looks deep into Damian’s eyes, a growing smile on his face. “Is that a baby bump I feel?” he asks quietly. Damian can only nod, his eyes refilling with tears. “Thank the Goddess you are alive! We all missed you so!” Damian moves out the way so Tommy and Adam can take turns hugging Kensi, telling him how much they love him.

Luna breaks in to say “I’m glad you’re alive, youngster. You and I have a lot to talk about, when you are feeling stronger. A new chapter has started in your life, young man. Enjoy it. You are coming into your own.” She gently kisses Kensi’s cheek before disappearing into the night.

Lela says to Kensi “I’m so glad you are alive! I’ll leave the four of you to get reacquainted.” Blowing Kensi a kiss, she smiles at the group and heads towards the door to their collective thank you.

Damian takes Kensi’s hand in his and says “I’m SO sorry that I killed you honey! Please forgive me!” Kensi laughs at that. “Babes, you were only doing what Andre demanded of you. It didn’t help that I egged him on. Never think of it again, love. I’m here, that’s all that counts.”

Later that next day, Tommy and Adam had curled up in their huge bed, sound asleep. Kensi is sitting on the couch, Damian perched on his lap. Kensi slowly rubs his hand back and forth on Damian’s stomach, trying to get the baby to play with him. “I love your stomach! It’s so pretty and round! I can’t wait to see the baby…”< /p> Damian bursts out in tears.

Kensi asks “What, did I say the wrong thing? I’m sorry, babes.” Damian shakes his head, placing one hand on top of Kensi’s. “No love, you didn’t. I just cannot help but think of the birth. Andre has promised me that he will bring me to him when I go into labor. I’m so scared that he will take the baby from me! I would hate to think of him raising it to turn out just like him…”

Kensi shushes Damian, pulling him in for a passionate kiss. “Baby, try not to think on it. Instead focus on watching the baby grow, feeling it under your hand. I’m the father, not that bastard! Everything will work out…”

Damian looks towards the bedroom where his other mates are sleeping. “Would you take me to your suite and make love to me, Kenny? I’ve wanted nothing else for so long…”

Two hours later, Damian turns into Kensi’s arms, exhausted. Damian sighs, his hand brushing the hair off Kensi’s forehead. “That was amazing love, thank you.” Kensi smiles down at Damian. “I’m so glad that I can love you again, sweetheart. It was so horrible to hang there on that cross and hear you beg not to be hurt, not to be raped. It broke my heart. All I wanted was another chance with you to show you how much I love you. You mean the world to me, Dam. From now on, I will take every chance I can get to tell you how much you are loved…” Damian smiles, moving in for another lingering kiss. “And I you, my love. Never again will I let an opportunity go by to express my heart to you. I love you so much…”

The next evening, Kensi searches out Talia. He finds her sitting in the rose garden. Slowly approaching her, Kensi says in a soft voice “I’m glad I found you, Talia. I want to have a talk…”

“WHERE have you BEEN?” Talia snarls out, her expression one of distrust and pain. “I’ve been looking EVERYWHERE for you! How could you just up and leave me like that? Embarrassing me in front of our friends, my family? You better have a good excuse…”

“…TALIA! If you would only let me explain!” Kensi gestures towards the swing, but Talia shakes her head “NO” emphatically. Sighing, Kensi places his hands on his hips. “I was kidnapped by Andre and Justine. They tortured and raped me. Finally, Andre made Damian whip me so badly that I eventually died. Andre then sent my body back here to be buried, but Lela and Luna saved me.”

Talia’s expression says that she doesn’t believe him. “And how do I know that you are telling the truth? I know that you want those three freaks more than you want me! Maybe you just sneaked off so you can be alone with them…”

“TALIA!!! I’m telling you the truth! I have suffered more than you can imagine! Why would I lie to you?”

Talia takes a few steps forward, until the two are practically touching noses. “BECAUSE YOU WANTED AWAY FROM ME! YOU WANTED TO BREAK YOUR VOW! YOU WOULD GO TO ANY LENGTH TO GET WHAT YOU WANT!”

Kensi sighs, rubbing his hand across his face in frustration. “I can see that you will NEVER believe me! Fine, I was going to go through with my vow, but now you can forget it! The two of us are through! You can go home with a clear conscious, knowing that you never have to worry if I am lying to you! Goodbye, Talia…” Kensi turns on his heels and storms back towards the house. Behind him he can hear Talia call out “But WAIT!” Kensi walks into the mansion, slamming the front door with a relieved sigh. At least that is over…

When he arrives in his suite, he is surprised to find Luna waiting for him. When he approaches her, she reaches out a hand, caressing Kensi’s cheek. “My dear heart, we have much to discuss. Sit with an old woman, won’t you?” Kensi gives a saucy smile and comments “I don’t see an old woman anywhere, but I will sit with you, love.” As the two of them move towards the couch, Luna warmly responds “Flatterer!”

Once seated, Luna asks “You were born in the Silver realm, were you not, Kensi?”

With a lopsided, sad smile, Kensi replies “Yes, ma’am.” Luna continues with “Then you personally know the struggles of your people in bondage?”

Kensi shifts nervously in his chair. It is easy to see that the current conversation is causing him stress and pain. “I am very familiar with the conditions that my brethren have and continue to suffer, Luna. I suffered those same conditions until I escaped. For years I smuggled goods into the realm so many would not go hungry. Unfortunately, to do so I had to leave my family behind. I have not spoken to them in…” tears fill Kensi’s eyes “…I can’t even tell you how long.” Luna grips one of Kensi’s hands to give him a lifeline. “Then you are familiar with the prophecy of the Black Knight?”

Kensi sighs, his hand tightening on Luna’s. “That’s just an old myth, Luna. He does not exist. There is no one…man…who will rescue my people from their plight. It’s impossible. The Bright Ones will simply go through eternity as slaves.”

Luna leans forward, her eyes blazing into Kensi’s. “What if I told you that the Knight has existed all this time? That it is his time to rise and put an end to all the horrific acts being carried out in the name of Titan? That he is to lead his people into the very heart of the cosmos, to find peace and prosperity? Would you believe me?”

Kensi nervously laughs. “Sounds like an impossible task, to say the least! I’m glad it isn’t me that has to take on this burden.” Luna is quiet for a moment before sharply saying “I’M NOT LAUGHING, Kensi!” Realization finally colors Kensi’s cheeks bright red. “What…” surprise and shock color his expression “…are you saying to me?”

Luna squeezes Kensi’s hand. “YOU are the chosen one, Kensi. YOU are the Black Knight. You were born to fulfill the prophecy, to set your people free, to start them back on the road to freedom. It’s time to become the man…Bright One…that you were born to be.”

Kensi throws back his head and laughs. “And just how the fuck am I supposed to do that?”

Luna places a hand on Kensi’s forehead. Slow, bright colors begin to move throughout the room. Luna chants for a few minutes, her voice filled with serious intent. Suddenly, a pattern begins to appear on Kensi’s forehead, one that mirrors the tattoo on his arm. The delicate lines interlock within themselves until what appears to be a mandala is scorched into his skin.

Luna stops chanting. Kensi feels…power…filling his being from his very core. The power scares him while giving him hope at the same time. A hope that he has never felt before, that he didn’t know existed until this moment.

Luna leans down and kisses the mark on his forehead. “A beautiful mandala for a beautiful soul, Kensi. You have much to learn, and I am willing to teach you. I know you are overwhelmed right now; no one would blame you for that! Take some time, let it sink in, and then the two of us will begin your training. You will find out that you have more inside, more to you than you thought. I look forward to watching you grow, young Kensi.” She then kisses him one more time, wrapping him up in a motherly hug. “I will see you soon, sweetheart.” With one more motherly smile, Luna disappears.

A few hours later, Damian and his mates find Kensi curled up on the swing in the garden, lost in thought. It is Damian who first notices the tattoo on his forehead. “Wow, Kenny! How beautiful your tattoo is! It makes you more gorgeous than ever!” Kensi swings his legs around until Damian has room to sit next to him on the swing. Tommy comments “It’s just like the one on your arm! Damian is right, it is beautiful!” Kensi thanks the two of them. Adam asks “But where did the tattoo come from?”

Kensi sighs. “It was Luna. She told me something that I was unprepared to hear.” Damian leans towards Kensi, concerned. “What’s that, love?”

Kensi tells them about his conversation with Luna. “I still think that she is mistaken. There is no way that I’m the Black Knight! How in the hell could I possibly take on Titan? You have no idea the control that those robots have over my people. It is impossible to think that I can make a difference! Besides…” Adam quietly asks “…what, honey?” Kensi continues with “I vowed to help you win the war and save YOUR family! How can I do that if I am at home, taking on another war?”

Adam quietly answers “Kenny! First off, you are a natural born leader. I’ve seen you firsthand on the battlefield. I watched you lead vamps into impossible situations and survive unscathed. You have a talent for bringing out the best in others. I’m sure that Luna can teach you anything else that you need to learn to take on any challenge.” Kensi gives Adam a shy smile, so very much out of character for him. Tommy continues with “If you must leave us to fight the war for your people, we will understand, sweetheart. And when our war is over, we shall come and help you in any way we can. You are one of us, Kenny. We will always find a way to be together.”

Kensi, for the first time in his life, is speechless. How the fuck did he get so lucky? To not only have one lover but three, each one special in their own way, who love him so completely. Kensi has never thought of himself as a lucky man, but deep down in his heart he knows just how lucky he really is. Quietly, he looks from Adam to Tommy, then on to Damian. “Thank you” he says, tears filling his eyes. “I love all three of you.” Damian takes Kensi’s hand, answering for the three of them when he says “We love you too, babes.”

Justine breaks through the realm’s forcefield, appearing in Sonny’s bedroom. She smirks when she stares down at Sonny and Lela in the dim light of the room. As she takes in the sleeping couple, thoughts of murder take over her twisted mind. Andre would be so happy, she thinks, if she were to kill both lovers in their sleep.< /p> She holds her breath when Lela turns in Sonny’s arms. Jealousy rushes through Justine, who immediately thinks of Ray, down the hall sleeping with Mikey. One couple at a time…

Lela’s eyes burst open as she gasps for breath, her hands flying to her throat. She stares at Justine, who gives her a terrifying smile. Lela kicks Sonny a few times, trying to wake him up. When he finally opens his eyes, he gasps for breath himself.

Precious seconds fly by as Justine dances around the room, a cackling laugh leaving her lungs. Delighted, she calls out “Poor, poor darlings! Dying together! What a way to go! How romantic!”

Suddenly there is a flash of white light, blinding all three of them. When they can see again, a tall, long-haired blonde is standing in the middle of room. She is wearing a white leather mini skirt and tank top, high heeled white boots that end at mid-thigh. On her hip is a sword in a scabbard, a quiver of arrows hangs over her other shoulder, a bow in her left hand. Her eyes briefly take in the couple on the bed before turning towards Justine, hatred coloring her features. “Bitch, I’ve already killed you once. It’s time to finish the job once and for all.”

Justine laughs shrilly. “Athena, you stupid bitch! Coming back from the dead to take me on again? How boring! What makes you think you can succeed this time?”

Athena smirks at Justine. “This time, I have Luna on my side.” Reaching back, she takes an arrow from her quiver and places it against her bow. In quick succession, she shoots five arrows into Justine’s chest. Justine, in shock, stumbles backwards and screams out “Poisoned arrows?” In response Athena screams “LUNA!” then reaches for her sword.

Lightning and thunder shake the mansion. Athena lunges at Justine, who manages to step to the side just in time. Athena rushes her again, swinging wildly. This time she connects with Justine’s neck, a wide gap almost cleaving Justine’s head from her body. Athena throws Justine on the floor, crawling over her until they are nose to nose.

“You killed me in childbirth, bitch. You kept me in that cold, hard ground, unable to be with my son. This is for all you have taken from me, Justine. You will NEVER be resurrected; you will suffer the same fate that I did. You will lay in the dark, alone except for the worms that will slowly eat you until you no longer exist. You will spend the rest of eternity in silence, alone. Enjoy your punishment, whore.” Athena finishes the job, her sword severing Justine’s head from her body, then stabbing Justine in the chest repeatedly until no more blood flows from her wounds and into the floor. She watches the light slowly fade from Justine’s eyes and watches as her body sinks through the floor, knowing that her final act of vengeance is finally complete. Athena mumbles a few words and Justine’s body disappears.

Standing, she quickly makes her way over to Sonny and Lela. Both are unconscious. Once again, Athena calls out “LUNA! Please help me!”

Gasping for air, Sonny and Lela open their eyes in unison and bolt upright in their bed. Their hands reach out towards each other and connect, looking for a lifeline to convince themselves that they are alive. Their eyes take in the blonde standing at the end of their bed, wonder showing through their expressions.

Athena lays down her bow and sword on the floor at the foot of the bed. Reaching out to the two of them, palms upright, she softly says “Sonny? I’m your mother, Athena. I know that the two of you have just had a close call, but it’s alright now. Justine will never come back to bother anyone ever again. She really is dead this time.”

Sonny sits in silence, staring in shock at his mother. Lela decides to break the silence by reaching out her hand to Athena. “Hello. My name is Lela. I am Sonny’s girlfriend. Thank you for saving us. It’s a pleasure to meet you.” Athena takes Luna’s hand and squeezes it tightly. “I’m glad Sonny has found someone! I look forward to getting to know you!”

Sonny pulls back the covers and slowly stands. He looks like a nervous little boy as he makes his way over to Athena’s side. He whispers “Momma?” as he reaches out his arms towards her.

Athena wraps her arms around Sonny, who gives a heaving sigh. “I’m here, sweetheart. Momma loves you and has missed you each day we were apart.” Sonny wraps his arms around Athena before gently kissing her cheek, tears streaming down his face.

The three of them talk for about an hour before Athena sighs. “It’s late. I need to go find a place to stay. I promise to visit you soon…”

Sonny places his hand on Athena’s arm. “You can stay here! We have plenty of room. There is an open suite across from father’s suite. I’ll show you the way…” Athena pulls Lela into her arms for a hug goodbye. “I look forward to spending more time getting to know you, Lela. Goodnight.” Lela kisses Athena on the cheek then says “Goodnight, Athena. I’m so glad that you are going to stay with us.”

Sonny shows Athena where the kitchen is before taking her to her suite. As they arrive, the door across from them opens. Damian, dressed only in a long nightshirt, steps out into the hallway. He stops in his tracks, his mouth wide open in shock as he takes in Athena standing in front of him. Athena looks Damian over slowly, a huge smile growing on her own face. “Dam! My Goddess, look at you! Big with child! I never thought I’d see the day…”

Damian stutters out “Aaaathenaaa? But you’re DEAD! You died in front of me…” Athena walks up to Damian, wrapping her arms around him for a hug. “Luna brought me back, sweetheart. I’m back for good. C’mon, come join me in my room. We have much to talk about.” Athena turns to Sonny and gives him a hug and a kiss on the cheek. “Thank you, Sonny. I love you. I will see you tomorrow.” Sonny returns the hug and, saying goodnight and I love you to both, heads back to his room.

Athena pats the couch next to her. “It seems we have a lot to catch up on, love.” Damian sits down next to her, and the two of them end up talking for the rest of the night.

Damian comments “I was so sorry to hear about your father’s passing, Athena. King Andros was an amazing man. He was quite close with Sonny. I wish you could’ve seen him one more time before he passed away.” Athena gives Damian a sad smile. “Thank you, Dam. I know he loved you very much. I miss him every day.” With a brighter smile, Athena excitedly says “I’m very impressed with Lela! I’m glad that Sonny has found someone.” Damian nods his head. “She is amazing. She has helped the family so much since she arrived. She even rescued me from Andre. They are perfect for each other.” With a wistful smile, Damian admits “I’ve missed you very much, Athena. I’ve thought about you countless times over the years. I wish you could’ve been here to see Sonny grow up. He has turned out to be quite a wonderful young man.” Athena replies “That’s because of you and Mikey. I owe the two of you so much for taking care of our boy.” Looking at Damian’s stomach, Athena asks “So, have you chosen baby names yet, Dam?” as she reaches out to rub Damian’s stomach. “No, not yet, Athena. If Andre has his way, I’ll never see this baby…”

Athena leans closer to Dam, wrapping her arm around his shoulders. “Baby, you have more to worry about than just Andre. I have heard rumors that Andre has had someone working behind the scenes this entire time, someone who knows you better than you know yourself. Someone who knows all of your deepest, darkest secrets. Someone whom Andre gained all his powers from. I did a lot of digging with Luna’s help, and we confirmed the rumors.” Damian gives Athena a blank look.

“Who could you mean, Athena?”

“Narissa.”

Face suddenly pale, Damian looks as if he had just been punched in the stomach. “But how…”

“Mikey” Athena simply replies. “You thought that Narissa disappeared in the night because of the argument the two of you had. But it was Mikey that ran her off. She felt threatened by Narissa, since you were spending so much time together. As you know, in the past, Mikey was jealous of any man…or woman…that spent time with you or had feelings for you…me included. I thought that was insane, since she acted most of the time as if she didn’t want to be with you. Surprisingly, Narissa left without much of a fight. I think back then she was afraid of Mikey.” Damian shakes his head, asking “But why would she want to hurt me? I didn’t do anything to her! Why would she try and destroy my family?” Athena shakes her head. “I do not know the answer to that question, Dam. All I know is that she is egging Andre on in his desire to destroy all of you. Who knows? Maybe she thinks that, if Andre eliminates all of you, she can have you to herself.”

The baby sharply kicks Athena’s hand, reminding them both that it is still there between them. Damian abruptly stands, heading towards the door. “It seems I need to have a conversation with Mikey then, Athena. Thank you for spending the evening with me. I’m so very glad that you are alive and with us again! I’m sure I will see you tomorrow.” Athena stands and pulls Damian into a hug, holding on tightly. “I love you, Dam. I’m glad to be with you once again.” Damian replies “I love you too, honey” and then heads out the door to Mikey’s suite.

Once there, he knocks once and then enters. Ray continues to sleep as Mikey shoots up in bed, startled by Damian walking in on her. With a look at her sleeping baby in the crib next to the bed, she whispers “What the fuck, Dam? Walking in on us in the middle of the night? What couldn’t wait until we woke up?”

Damian silently reaches out and takes Mikey by the hand, yanking her out of bed. Mikey throws a robe on and follows Damian into the next room. Damian pulls Mikey down to sit on the couch next to him.

Without wasting any time, Damian asks “Do you remember Narissa?” Mikey makes a face and nods. “Yes, I remember that bitch. She was always following you around, hanging on your every word. Problem was she was as insincere as the day is long. Why do you ask?”

Damian fills Mikey in on Athena’s return, then tells her of the rumors that Athena informed him about. “She heard rumors that Narissa was behind Andre all this time. She managed to confirm the rumors with Luna’s help. It turns out that Narissa is the one pulling the strings in the background all this time.”

“But that doesn’t make any sense! If she has anyone to hold a grudge against, it’s me. I’m the one that forced her to leave you alone after that huge fight you two had. I realized just how toxic her feelings towards you had become. I couldn’t stand by and watch her destroy you. I loved you too much to let that happen. Still do.”

Damian stands up and paces the room. “But why would she try to take down the whole family? And Andre. The two of us married, as much as I hate to admit it. What could she possibly gain by allowing Andre to marry me, if she wanted me for herself? And why did she allow Justine to be a part of the whole mess? None of this makes any sense to me!”

Mikey thinks for a moment and then shrugs. “She’s as unstable as Andre is, that much is obvious. Who knows why she’s doing what she’s doing? We may never find out the real reasons why. The question is, how do we go forward, knowing what we know now?”

Damian places his hands on his hips. “I need to poke the bear. I need to confront Andre with these rumors, see what his reaction is. The family needs details, and Andre is the only one to give them to us.” Mikey jumps up out of her seat and walks over to Damian, stopping his pacing. “NO, DAM! You can’t, not in your condition! What if he tries to hurt you and the baby out of anger? Or worse, what if he decides to keep you? No, it's a chance you cannot take! There must be another way to handle this…”

“…No, Mikey! Narissa has done an amazing job hiding from us so far. We must flush her out one way or another. The fastest way is through Andre, and I’m the only one who can get the answers we need. Trust me, sweetie. I will be fine.” Mikey opens her mouth to protest once again, but Damian kisses her cheek then heads towards the door. “I’ll let you know what I find out, honey.”

Damian heads towards the library. It’s very quiet in the house at this time of day. Once there, Damian calls out “Andre? Please, may I see you?”

A few moments later, there is a flash of light in the room. Andre materializes, quickly looking around the room as if looking for an ambush. When his eyes take in Damian, he smirks. “Well, well! Look at you, little momma! All nice and big!” He steps forward and reaches out to rub Damian’s stomach, laughing when the baby kicks his hand. “And to think I have missed all this!” When his loving gaze meets Damian’s questioning eyes, he asks “Just what is it that you called me for, wifey?”

Damian swallows sharply before asking “Are the rumors true, Andre? Is Narissa behind all your schemes, behind all your cruelty? And if she is, WHY?”

Andre freezes in place for a moment, his vision dropping to the floor in shock. It takes a few moments for him to respond, as if he’s doing his best to regain his composure. “And why would you think that? Listening to nasty gossip again?”

Damian places his hand on Andre’s arm. “C’mon, Andre! Tell the truth! Is Narissa the mastermind behind all your plots and plans?”

As a deception, Andre wraps his arms around Damian. He pulls him in for a short, passionate kiss, avoiding Damian’s eyes. “All this time apart and all you can think about is a couple of rumors! You should be focusing on us! Our baby will be here soon. Then the three of us can be the family that we always wanted to be!”

“Andre…”

“NO!” Andre yells, rage taking over. “I’m tired of you always treating me like shit! I am the father of your child! I deserve to be treated WITH RESPECT!” Damian tries to take a step backwards, but Andre isn’t having it. He once again kisses Damian, who finally gives in out of fear for the baby. When the kiss is over, Damian swears that he hears feminine laughter float through the room.

Andre runs the back of his hand down Damian’s cheek. “I must go, beautiful. Take good care of the two of you. I will be seeing you soon.” Damian tries to stop Andre by grabbing his arm but growls out in frustration when all he grabs is air.

“FUCK!” Damian swears at the top of his lungs. He heads back to Mikey’s room. This time, Mikey is in the front room of her suite, rocking her son. “Well, what did you learn, Dam?”

Damian brushes the hair off his forehead. “He almost gave himself away. Of course, he wouldn’t admit it outright. But I’m now positive that Narissa is behind everything. The question is, how to flush her out?”

Mikey thinks for a moment, then offers “I can do it. I can challenge her, see if she takes the bait. She hates me more than anyone else. She should respond to me.” Damian shakes his head. “Absolutely not, Mikey! The family cannot lose you! Think of your son. There has to be another way…”

Narissa lifts her head when Andre walks into the room. “What did Damian want, Andre?”

Andre’s eyes narrow as he replies “That little bitch wanted me to confirm rumors that you are behind my attacks, Narissa. I’m not sure how the word got out, but he is suspicious. Next thing you know that entire asshole family will know the truth! Then our plans will be ruined!”

Narissa laughs at Andre’s concerns. “Let them find out about me! There’s nothing that can stop us now. It won’t be much longer and the war will be over, and we will crush them under our feet!” Andre sneers at Narissa. “As if that were easy! Now that Justine is gone, it will take a miracle, even with our combined powers. The Toros are a lot more powerful than we imagined.”

Narissa once again laughs at Andre. “Relax, Andre! The only thing we need to do is to take the power that Luna gave Damian away from him and turn it on the entire family. After all this time that you have spent with Damian, you still haven’t managed to steal it from him! It looks as if it’s up to me to deal with Damian…”

“DAMIAN’S MINE! HE’S MY HUSBAND! YOU KEEP YOUR HANDS OFF OF HIM! YOU SAID I COULD KEEP HIM!” Narissa shakes her head, a smirk on her lips. “I said you could keep him for yourself until the end of the war. Once we win, you get your son, and I get Damian. That was the bargain we made in the beginning, Andre. Don’t try to back out on me now…”

Andre sneers at Narissa. “It seems we are at an impasse then. We both want Damian. I guess we will just have to wait to see who has the balls to step up and take him…”

Damian can’t sleep. He wanders the mansion, hands pushing against the middle of his back. He feels the baby kick in response to the pressure of his hands. Damn but his back hurts! It is keeping him awake. He doesn’t want to wake his mates for a back rub, so he simply tries to rub his back as he walks.
When he arrives at the kitchen, his water breaks.

Panicked and startled, he quickly heads back towards his suite. When he arrives there, he shakes Tommy awake. As Tommy’s groggy eyes try to focus on Damian, she hears “TJ, my water broke. I’m gonna…”

Damian disappears.

Damian finds himself in a room empty except for a large four poster bed in the center of the room. The bed looks so comfortable, and Damian wants nothing more than to lay down, but he’s unexplainably scared to. He walks over to the window, grabbing onto the frame as he feels the first contraction hit him full force.

“Hurts, doesn’t it, Damian?” a female voice says from behind him. Slowly, Damian turns, knowing whom he will make eye contact with before he does. “Bet you thought that you could bat your eyes at Andre and he would take your pain away. No such luck, bitch. You’re stuck with me.”

“Narissa? Where’s Andre? The baby’s coming!” The panic that Damian feels seeps through his voice. How can she stand there with a smirk on her face? Why isn’t she doing something to help him? Doesn’t she understand that he’s alone with a baby on the way? How the hell can he do this all by himself?

Damian crosses over to the end of the bed. Another wave of pain brings Damian to his knees. Panting, he cringes when he hears “Andre is busy right now. I thought I’d fill in for him. You might as well stay down there, Damian. From what I hear, you’re used to being on your knees.” Damian’s clothes disappear as tears of pain and fright begin to pour down his cheeks as he clings to the corner post. “What will happen to me now?” floats through his mind as he tries to breathe through the pain.

“I’m not going to help you. You will deliver all on your own, Damian. If the two of you survive, I’ll take the baby to Andre. If not, I will throw your dead bodies at his feet. It really doesn’t matter to me either way, Damian.”

Hours of agony go by. Damian remains on his knees, doing his best to push the baby out on his own. He begs Narissa to help him, but she simply shakes her head in response. She stands in the corner of the room laughing at his efforts to give birth.

“Bet you never thought anything like this would happen to you, right, Damian? Bet you thought that you had Andre wrapped around your little finger and that would get you out of any trouble you’d find yourself in. Andre is not your savior, Damian—I am. I will take you and change your life for the better. I will own you, make all your dreams come true. I will take you away from here, just the two of us. You will learn to love me; you will never leave me. You will spend the rest of your life worshiping ME and ONLY ME! My days of worshiping you are OVER! You will give me the respect that I earned…”

Gasping for air, with the baby hanging halfway out of Damian, he asks “Why do you…hate me? What did I do…OWWW!...to make you hate me…”

Narissa walks up to Damian’s kneeling form, watching as the baby dangles between his legs. “You really don’t remember, do you, Damian? How I worshiped you, how I left my FAMILY, my CHILD for YOU? You promised me the moon and didn’t deliver! Instead, you focused all your time and attention on MIKEY instead of on me! You were so blindly in love with her that you failed to see what was in front of you! Someone who loved you, who gave up their entire life just for you! But no, you never saw me that way, did you? You only saw me as a pupil, someone to pass knowledge to! You never looked below the surface to find the real me! THEN you got me PREGNANT!” Damian opens his mouth to comment but another contraction takes away the very words he’s trying to say. “I bet you were going to say it was just another night of drunken fun, right? Nothing important. But when I told you that I was carrying your baby, you went and told MIKEY and MY BABY DISAPPEARED! As if it never happened! I never got the chance to become a mother to your child, I never was given the option to make the decision for myself! The two of you thought it was funny that my baby was killed!” Narissa raises Damian’s head by the chin until their eyes meet. “Well, tonight I make us even, Damian. You took my baby, and tonight I take yours.” Narissa leans down and yanks the baby the rest of the way out of Damian, who screams in pain. Picking up the baby by its feet, she slaps the baby’s bottom, making it stutter out its first cry. Damian, dripping sweat, reaches out shaking arms for the baby, but Narissa steps just out of reach. She says a few words and the baby is not only cleaned but dressed and wrapped in a baby blanket.

“Bet you wanna know what you gave birth to, huh, Damian? Well TOUGH SHIT! You’ll never know the sex of your child. I’m taking it to Andre. He will raise it, and you will never see it. When I return, I’ll heal you, take you some place far from here. Some place where you will belong only to ME…” Damian reaches out towards his child again, giving a cry of despair as Narissa disappears with the baby.

Narissa arrives in Andre’s bedroom. Andre jumps off his bed the second he sees the baby in Narissa’s arms.

“Here, Andre. Here is your son. Damian managed the birth all by himself. I will heal him and take him some place where I can try to access the power that Luna gave him.”

Andre takes the baby from Narissa, a look of rage on his face. “Where the hell are you taking MY Damian, Narissa? HE BELONGS TO ME! I wanted the two of us to raise this child together! BRING HIM HERE…” Narissa laughs at Andre’s frustration. “My goal is to take that power from him, Andre. By whatever means necessary! If there is anything left of him, MAYBE I’ll bring him back to you! Don’t get your hopes up…” Before Andre can reply, Narissa disappears.

Chapter Text

Summer has come and passed
The innocent can never last
Wake me up when September ends
Like my father’s come to pass
Seven years has gone so fast
Wake me up when September ends
Here comes the rain again
Falling from the stars
Drenched in my pain again
Becoming who we are
As my memory rests
But never forgets what I lost
Wake me up when September ends

Green Day—Wake me up when September ends

The next thing he knows, Damian is cleaned up and dressed as if nothing happened. It’s as if he didn’t just spend the last God knows how long giving birth to his child. He suddenly realizes that, not only has his body healed from the rigors of childbirth, but his ‘lady parts’ have disappeared, leaving him with his original male anatomy.

His body is still riding high from an overload of hormones, making him highly emotional. He misses his baby, wants it with him to hold in his arms. Must he go through the rest of his life like this, longing for his child, not knowing if he or she is healthy and safe?

Damian slowly looks around the hilltop he is standing on. The setting sun has turned the sky a variety of pinks and purples over the small town laid out in front of him. He can’t help but pause at the array of colors surrounding him, completely in awe. When was the last time he saw a sky so beautiful? He has no idea…

“It is beautiful. Just like you are.” Damian turns his head and sees Narissa smiling at him, as if she were his best friend. “You’ve always been beautiful, Dam. The key is that you never really realized just how gorgeous you really are, inside and outside. You have always tried to cover up that beauty with evil, thinking that it would make the world see you as a hideous creature. That is impossible, darling. Your inner beauty always shines through.”

“Where’s my child? What did I give birth to? I want to see my baby!” Damian yells at Narissa, tears filling his eyes. “I want my baby, and I want to go home to my mates.” Narissa shakes her head. “The baby is with Andre. He will share it with you when he feels like it. Until then, you are here with me. This is a beautiful place for us to start over, Dam—just the two of us in this small town.”

Damian shakes his head. “Please, send me home. I…” the tears he has been trying to hold back suddenly pour down his cheeks. “…want to go home! Please, I’ve been through more than enough! Please, Narissa…”

Narissa takes Damian by the arm and his powers fade away, the same way they do when he is with Andre. She leads him down a path to a building on a quiet side street. Silence fills the air as they walk, making Damian feel nervous. The colors of the night sky are quickly fading, leaving darkness in their wake. She walks him into a building with shuttered front windows. From the quick look that Damian makes through his tears as they enter, he is shocked to see that they have entered a brothel.

Scantily dressed ladies of the evening stand on the stairs against the wall, running their hands all over Damian as he and Narissa climb past them. Comments of “What’s your hurry, handsome?” and “Fancy a fuck, darlin?” fill his ears as Narissa continues to yank him up to the second floor.

Once in a room in the back of the building, Narissa pushes Damian down onto the couch in the corner of the room. “Have a seat, sweetie. I’m sure you are starving from your…exercise…earlier this evening. Here…” A pile of blood bags appear on the table in front of Damian, and he suddenly realizes he really is starving. Reaching out, he grabs a bag and tears it open with his teeth, guzzling the contents immediately. Before they both know it, Damian has drained all the bags, color slowly returning to his skin.

“There, darling! Now you look much better! Stop crying…” Damian sniffles but the tears won’t stop. “PLEASE, PLEASE tell me…” With an exaggerated sigh, Narissa cuts Damian off, her voice harsh. “What good will it do to find out the sex of the baby, Dam? Will that knowledge fill your arms, the same way the baby would? Why not forget about it and…”

“…FORGET ABOUT IT? A HUGE PART OF ME WAS JUST RIPPED AWAY FROM ME, AND YOU WANT ME TO JUST ‘GET OVER IT?!” I CARRIED THAT BABY TO TERM, FELT IT UNDER MY HAND EACH DAY AND NIGHT, WORRIED ABOUT IT AND PRAYED FOR IT! IT IS A PART OF ME AND ALWAYS WILL BE! I’M SORRY THAT YOU CANNOT UNDERSTAND THAT!” Damian tries to stand to storm out of the room, but finds he cannot move, which raises his anxiety even higher. “NOW, IF YOU WILL PLEASE TELL ME…”

“IT’S A FUCKING BOY! THERE, DOES THAT MAKE YOU FEEL BETTER? WILL THAT BRING YOUR SON BACK TO YOU???” Narissa stands, pacing the room as she stares down Damian. “Andre is very proud of him. I’m sure he will get only the best nannies to raise your son.” Damian hiccups loudly a few times, trying to calm down. “He should be here with ME! I am his mother…”

“WERE! You WERE his mother! Now you are just another male. A male that holds a special power that I wish to possess!” When Damian gives Narissa a shocked look, she bursts out laughing. “Did you think I brought you here because I wished to fuck your brains out, Dam?” When Damian fails to reply, she continues with “Sure, that would be fun, but you are here for a more important reason. That power that Luna gave you, the one she told you to hold onto at all cost? That’s what I REALLY want! And you are going to give it to me…” Narissa stops pacing, walking forward until she is straddling Damian’s lap. Looking deep into his eyes, Narissa places her hands on either side of Damian’s head, pressing until her fingers start to feel numb. She then stares deep into Damian’s scared eyes.

Minutes go by, then hours. Damian tries a few times to get Narissa to let go of him, but she stubbornly continues, her face twisted with rage. “Give in, Damian! Give me what I want, and I will send you home! I will even send your baby to you! Just give in…”

Damian growls out “I HAVE NO CONTROL OVER IT, NARISSA! I CAN ONLY USE IT WHEN THE TIME IS RIGHT! I HAVE NO IDEA WHEN THAT WILL BE, I CANNOT GIVE YOU SOMETHING I CANNOT CONTROL! PLEASE, LET ME GO…” Narissa presses her fingers even harder against Damian’s head and he howls in pain. “If you won’t hand it over, I’ll torture it out of you!” Narissa stands and grabs one of Damian’s arms, yanking him upright. She leads him to a room across the hall filled with torture devices. Damian shudders when he sees an iron maiden in the corner…

Narissa leads Damian to the maiden, stopping long enough to fling open both doors. Damian whimpers and begins to beg Narissa at the top of his lungs. “Please, PLEASE don’t! You can’t! I’ll…” Narissa shoves Damian in face first, laughing when he screams as the spikes enter his body. “Enjoy your time in the maiden, Damian! When I take you out, maybe you’ll be more cooperative!” Narissa slams the doors shut and walks out of the room.

Narissa finds Andre holding his son, feeding him a bottle. “Well? Did you manage to get the power from him?”

Narissa grunts. “It seems that Damian has no control over the power. It will only work, according to him, when the ‘time is right.’ No, I couldn’t gain it from him, so I put him in a maiden for a while.” The blood drains from Andre’s face at the news. “But Damian fears small spaces! He must be terrified…” Narissa laughs at Andre, which startles the baby. “Look at you, like a lovesick fool, worrying about his sweetheart! You make me sick! Wuss out much, Andre? What happened to your ‘big and bad’ side, huh?” Andre growls at Narissa, cradling the baby closer to his chest. “Shut the fuck up, bitch! Spend your time focusing on the task at hand and get my boy back to me! I’m in the mood to take him…”

“Again, Kensi!”

Kensi sighs, shaking the hair out of his eyes. He had no idea that Luna was such a taskmaster! The two of them have been at it since way before dawn. Sweat pours off his body, getting in his eyes.

“Luna! Can’t we PLEASE have a break? I’m STARVING…”

Luna fires a firebolt at Kensi, who manages to jump out of the way just in time. “Do you think I’m doing this for shits and giggles, boy? Will the robots allow you time to stop and eat when you are in the middle of a battle with them? Remember, we’re doing this to help you, so you can lead your people to freedom! Did you think it would be easy? You’re going up against the most intelligent and physically advanced robots in the cosmos! They won’t be easy to defeat. You must be ready for anything, boy. And if you can’t manage to beat an old woman, what chance do you got?” Luna slams her cane against the floor and yells “I said AGAIN, boy!”

Frustrated and angry, Kensi runs the pattern that Luna had set out for him while shooting lasers at her. This time, he manages to hit her two times as he runs. He cringes as Luna’s body jolts from the hits, even though he knows that he really hasn’t hurt her.

It has been hell for the last three weeks. Between fighting with the Toro’s at the front lines, Kensi has trained with Luna. She gave him agility trials, tested his intelligence with a variety of tests, as well as made him work out at least twice a day. So far, Kensi has lost 40 pounds, his vampire body protesting the weight loss. His muscles are all toned, causing Tommy and Adam’s eyes to crawl over Kensi’s body in lust the few times he manages to see them.

The thing he enjoys most is his study time with Luna. She is teaching him how to use his powers. Kensi was nervous in the beginning, worried that he somehow was…deficient. But over time, he learned that his powers rivaled Luna’s, which is a surprise. His main worry is exactly HOW he will know what spells to use and when. Will it become second nature over time?

Alondra often joins them in their sessions. Kensi enjoys her company. The two of them get on well together. One evening Luna looks from one to the other with a sad smile on her face. “If only you were straight, Kensi! You two would make a perfect match!” Kensi glances at Alondra and blushes bright red. “I…uhhhh…” Alondra pats Kensi on the arm, saying “It’s okay, Kenny. I know you are in love with three of my favorite people in this cosmos. I’m glad you love them, and they love you. You’re family to me.” Kensi wraps his arm around Alondra and gives her a side hug, a huge smile on his lips. “I’m glad to be your family, honey.”

Two months later…

Narissa slowly opens the doors on the maiden. She watches as Damian takes in a shuddering breath, hears him softly beg “Please, please get me off of here…”

Narissa reaches in and yanks Damian backwards. She spins Damian around and licks her lips when she sees blood slowly begin to drip down Damian’s face. Narissa leans forward and licks the blood off, moaning loudly. “You always taste delicious, Damian. Makes me want more…” She leads Damian over to a St. Andrews cross at the other end of the room, pushing him back until his back touches the wood of the cross. She blinks and Damian is tied to the cross.

Damian tries to move his body but finds that he is tightly tied down. Narissa walks up to him, a smirk on her lips. “I see that you refuse to cooperate with me, Dam. So, the only option that you give me is to hurt someone that you love, until you give me what I want. So, who will it be? Tommy? Adam? Or Draven?”

Damian immediately begins to beg. “Please, PLEASE don’t! Leave them where they are! Don’t hurt my family!” Narissa leans forward, pressing her lips to Damian’s in a hungry kiss that seems to go on forever. When she finally pulls back, there are tears in her eyes. “You were once my family, remember, Dam? You were my one and only, the other half of me. I gave you everything I had, and it was never enough for you. I was a joke to you. You never took me seriously. You were so blinded in your love for Mikey. So…why don’t we bring her here with us? I’m sure we can find some use for her…”

Before Damian can beg Narissa not to do it, Mikey appears next to Damian. Reacting quickly, she charges at Narissa, who waves her hand in the air. Mikey halts in her tracks, frustration showing on her face as she tries to use her magick against her enemy. “Don’t even try it! Like Damian here, I’ve wiped your powers. It’s a little trick I taught Andre. You’re useless now.”

Mikey sneers at Narissa. “I’m still better than you, powers or not. You were too scared to come out against our family, you had to hide behind Andre. What makes you think that you will win against us? Andre’s been fighting us for years and he hasn’t managed to defeat us!”

Narissa walks over to Mikey and grabs a handful of her hair, yanking sharply. “I’m not Andre, Michael. I’m more powerful than he is, and twice as smart. I just used him and his stupid son as a cover to buy myself a little time. Eventually I was going to reveal myself as the mastermind behind this war. You just brought me into the limelight sooner than I would have liked.” Narissa grabs Mikey by the back of her neck and pulls her forward, their lips connecting. Narissa puts passion behind the kiss, which Mikey tries to wiggle out of. Narissa wraps her arms around Mikey, holding her close to her body. When she finally lets go, Mikey leans back far enough to spit in Narissa’s face.

Wiping the back of her hand across her face, Narissa then snaps her fingers, another smirk covering her lips. Damian’s skin begins to smoke, electricity flowing throughout his body causing him to shake uncontrollably. Mikey stares at Damian, appalled at what she caused. In a broken voice she begs “Please, stop it! It’s not his fault! Don’t hurt him!”

Narissa waits another full minute before stopping. Blisters begin to form all over Damian’s skin, showing how severe the damage to him really is. Mikey tries to reach out to him but fails, frustration showing on her face. “What do you want from us? Why play games? Why not end this now?”

Narissa walks back over to Damian, carefully observing him before healing him. “What fun would that be, Mikey? You know what I want. At the end of the day, I want Damian for my own. But in the meantime, I’ll take that power away from him that Luna gave him. It is the only way to truly destroy your family, to ensure that no one will be able to return for revenge later. But Damian here says that he cannot give that power to me, that he cannot control it. Let’s see how readily he finds a way when I slowly destroy his only real and lasting love…”

Narissa blinks and the three of them are sent to Andre’s torture chamber, this time Mikey is tied to the cross in the middle of the room. Narissa whispers a spell, and Mikey’s clothes disappear. Damian finds himself kneeling in the corner of the room, unable to move. Without thinking he calls out “Mikey! I love you!”

Narissa sneers at this declaration. She stands in front of Mikey, hands on her hips and a sneer on her face. “Of COURSE he would yell that to you! He’s ALWAYS loved you! I tried so hard to win his love, but he never even looked at me. Even when we had sex. When the two of you had that huge fight, I found him drunk on wine, mumbling about you. He kissed me and I thought he finally saw me for me, that I finally got through to him how much I loved him. But the next morning he immediately dressed and went off to find you to apologize, to beg you to take him back. THAT is when I realized that I needed to do something drastic to show my feelings for him, how much he means to me. You see, you cheated on him constantly, you took his love for granted. I would NEVER do that to him! I would cherish him the way he deserves! With me, he can truly be who he is meant to be! I would NEVER hurt him…”

Mikey sneers at Narissa as she says “YOU’VE ALREADY HURT HIM! You have given Andre full reign to cause him unspeakable pain, have yourself caused him pain since he’s been with you! You have stripped him of everything that makes him who he is, especially his dignity! You are keeping him away from those that he truly loves, especially his children, the last of which you personally took away from him. How in the fuck can you say that you love him? Love is the furthest thing you’ve showed him since this war began!”

Narissa reaches out and, using her razor-like nails, slices a path across Mikey’s chest. Blood begins to slowly leak from the cuts, which are just deep enough to trickle. She watches the blood run its slow way down Mikey’s body before making another swipe at her, this time across her torso. “Just enough to sting, huh Mikey? It would take a long time for you to bleed out at this rate.” Narissa turns to Damian. “You better come up with that spell soon, Dam…or your Mikey here will have a slow, painful death.”

Tears begin to flow down Damian’s face. “Narissa, I told you the truth. I have no control over this power! Luna said that it will appear when the time is right. I couldn’t even tell you the wording, I don’t know it! Please, please believe me! She did it this way so I couldn’t accidentally blurt it out in a fit of rage. I swear to you I don’t know it!” Narissa gives an unhinged look to Damian, one that says that she is enjoying the events of the moment. “Good! Because I have SO much that this bitch must pay for! For taking you away from me, for KILLING MY BABY! For making me leave you after our big fight. She deserves to DIE for what she has done, and I’m not going to waste this opportunity!” Narissa takes a few steps back from Mikey. Muttering a few words out loud, her body begins to morph, her skin slowly melting away until what stands in front of Mikey and Damian is a robot made of titanium and other metals.

The other two gasp out loud at what stands in front of them. Mikey’s eyes turn towards Damian’s, seeing shock and disbelief in his eyes. Narissa’s a robot? How is this possible?

Narissa gives out a deep, guttural laugh. “Surprised, my pretties? See, all this time you thought you were dealing with a weak version of a vampire! Little did you know that you were actually dealing with Titan, leader of the most advanced robot society in history!”

“Narissa…”

“CALL ME BY MY PROPER NAME, PEASANT! From now on, YOU WILL CALL ME TITAN!” Titan crosses the room to stand in front of Damian. She reaches out and gently runs her hand over and over through Damian’s hair, enjoying the fear in his eyes. “I was created by my maker eons ago. I was given a brain and a human heart. Everyone knew that I was special, a robot with magick running through her very being. It wasn’t long before I fought my way to the very top, defeating other robots until I led the robot world, then conquering the humans on our planet. I had power, position…but I was lonely. So, I had a baby created in my likeness, but motherhood didn’t fulfill me the way I thought it would. Eventually I gave up my baby so I could be with you, Dam.”

“I watched you be born, Dam. I sat back and watched you grow into the gorgeous young man that you became. I was jealous of Justine because she changed you into what you are today. I wanted you for myself. But then Mikey came along, and you gave your heart to her. I covered myself in this human disguise so I could get close to you, hoping that I could find a place in your heart. But no matter what I did, you never noticed me. You focused all your time and attention on Mikey, who didn’t want you. She wanted to play with you, to keep you like a puppet on a string in case she needed you to do her dirty work. And you stood by and took it. The harder I tried, the more you ran to her. She’s never appreciated you the way I do, she’s never loved you like I have. She took advantage of you, and you let her.”

“I set you up so I would get pregnant by you. But Mikey found out what I was up to, and she found a warlock stronger than me to cause me to miscarry your child. I ended up killing that warlock later in revenge for what I lost—you and our baby. When Mikey sent me away, I vowed vengeance on her and those she loves, for taking everything away from me that I loved. I vowed to make her pay, and to make you mine once and for all. Your family is just collateral damage.”

“Titan…” Damian begins softly, as if frightened to send her into a rage. “…I have never been yours! It’s true, I’ve always loved Mikey. But I now have others that I love as well…”

Titan throws back her head and laughs. “Ah, yes! Your mates! And Kensi…” Titan yanks Damian’s head back, until he is staring into cold, calculated black eyes. “…the savior of the Bright Ones! What a joke!” Titan moves even closer to Damian, until they are practically touching noses. “You think that he can defeat me? That carbon based weakling? I’ve seen many of his kind come and go, all insisting that they can destroy me. I’m eternal, bitch! I will stand the test of time while I defeat that loser and his followers. Your time with your lover is over, Dam. Oh, I’m letting him train with Luna, letting him build up his confidence so that his defeat will be even sweeter for me. Black Knight indeed! I will crush him, the same way that I will crush your family, until there is only you left, Dam. Then I will take you to the Silver realm where we will live out eternity together, just the two of us.”

Mikey laughs. “You’re delusional, Titan. You think that, if I were to die, Dam would love you! He’s NEVER loved you, nor will he ever. You’re just an obsessed fan of his. Killing me and the family will only cause him to despise you. Dam may be evil, but he’s a family man at heart. He loves his family; he loves his children. Even if he is the only one left, you still will be alone, even with him by your side. Face it…” Titan lets go of Damian’s hair and returns to face down Mikey. “…you’ve lost.”

Titan blinks and a long, sharp blade is suddenly in her right hand. Swinging her arm back, she says in a calm voice “Goodbye, Michael” as Damian screams. The blade slices clean through Mikey’s throat, causing her head to bounce on the floor at Titan’s feet.

Titan picks up Mikey’s head by the hair and walks over to where Damian is still screaming, blood dripping all over the floor. She swings it in Damian’s direction, enjoying the look of sheer terror that has transformed Damian’s face into a death mask. “That was fun, Dam. Your sweet Mikey is dead! I know just what to do with this! I will send it to her husband! I’m sure that Ray will enjoy waking up this evening to his wife’s head on their dresser! Say goodbye, Dam.” With a wave of her hand, Mikey’s head is sent to the bedroom she shared with Ray.

When he can finally speak, Damian squeaks out in disbelief “You’re sick, Titan! How could you possibly do that? She has a husband and child! Have you no heart? How could you be so cruel?” Titan throws back her head and laughs. “You forget whom you’re dealing with, Dam. I’m a robot. I may have a human heart, but it holds no compassion. The bitch had it coming for a long, long time, and I’m GLAD she’s finally dead! Now I can have you all to myself…”

Damian begins to lose his temper. “I have my own loves, and you’re not one of them!” Titan gives Dam a smirk. “Oh, don’t worry, Dam! I’ll get to them too! They will each have a turn dying at my own hand, if you do not give me that spell! And maybe I’ll simply wave my hand and all your children will drop dead! The only children that will ever count will be the ones that we make together. On that note…” The next thing that Damian knows, he’s naked and tied to a bed in the corner of the room. Then Titan waves her hand. Skin begins to slowly recover her robot body until she looks fully human again. “I figured it would be easier for you to deal with, fucking a human instead of a robot.” She climbs onto the bed, moving forward until she is covering Damian’s body completely with her own. Reaching between their bodies, Titan grabs hold of Damian’s cock. “Why don’t we make a baby, Dam…”

Ray awakens completely disoriented. It’s not like Mikey to let the baby cry so long without seeing to his needs. Throwing back the covers, his feet touch the floor seconds before he stands, facing the dresser.

Ray’s screams echo throughout the house, waking everyone, sending them hurrying to Ray’s suite.

Baby forgotten, Ray reaches out a shaking hand towards Mikey’s severed head as if to see if it is real. His fingers curl around Mikey’s long hair, pulling gently. Mikey’s dead glazed over eyes stare into Ray’s, as if trying to convey a message.

The door to the suite bursts open, many voices bouncing off the walls at once. Tommy is the first to reach Ray, her own scream echoing Ray’s when she takes in her mother. She immediately reaches out to wrap her arms around Ray’s middle, holding on for dear life.

The baby’s cries begin to grow louder, oblivious to the chaos around him. Gee picks him up and gives him a bottle, pacing the room the best she can with the entire family in attendance.

Ray chokes out through his tears “Myyyy Mikeyyy” as he wraps his arms around Tommy, squeezing tightly. Adam wraps his arms around the two of them, trying to show support to his father and mate.

There isn’t a dry eye in the house. Lela and Sonny step forward, both not sure if they should speak up or not. “Uhhh, Ray? Lela can get Luna. Maybe the two of them…” Ray nods his head emphatically, whispering “Please, kids.” Lela calls to Luna, who arrives instantly. She nods to Lela and pushes her way through the crowd, giving Ray a look of sympathy. She places her hands on either side of Mikey’s head, lowering her own head in concentration.

Ten minutes goes by before Luna raises her head again. With a voice filled with sorrow, she says to Ray “I’m so sorry, Ray. The magick that preformed this act is such as I’ve never seen before. Andre is not talented enough to do such a thing, to keep me from resurrecting her. I wish I could help you…”

Adam cuts Luna off by asking in a harsh voice “Then who in the fuck did this?”

Luna shakes her head. Athena steps forward. “I told Damian that there was a rumor going around that Narissa is the one hiding in the shadows, the one controlling Andre and the war. He went off to speak to Mikey, trying to find out if the rumors were true. That was the last I saw of him.”

Kensi asks “Just who in fuck is this Narissa? And how did she become so powerful as to mastermind the entire war?” Ray clears his throat and mumbles through his tears “Mikey told me once that she had a run-in with her years ago. It had something to do with Damian. She told me that she considered Mikey to be her enemy. Could this be what the real reason is, her wanting revenge on Mikey? But attacking the entire family doesn’t make sense.”

Kensi says “I just heard a rumor that Titan has left the Silver realm. Could there be some connection there?”

Luna shrugs. “Damned if I know, Kensi. Anything is possible. We can only assume that Damian is with Andre, and Narissa is running the show.” Luna pushes Tommy and Adam out of the way and gives Ray her own hug. “I will have Lela preserve her head, so you may spend time with her before…you know.” Ray mumbles a quick thank you then collapses back on the bed, his strength gone. Looking at Frankie, he asks “Would you mind taking our boy to your suite for a while, watch him for me? I just need some time alone…” Frankie nods his head and leaves to join Gee in the next room, where they pack up what the baby needs and take him to their suite.

Everyone tells Ray they love him then leave him alone, against their better judgment. Once they return to their suite, Tommy asks Adam “So, do you think Andre has Dam? Or do you think this Narissa has anything to do with his disappearance?” Adam shakes his head. “By now, it’s impossible to tell, sweetheart. All I know is I miss him like crazy, and I wish he was here with us.”

Gee lays the baby down in the bassinet that they borrowed from Ray’s suite. Staring down, Gee says “Poor thing! To grow up without a mother!” Frankie kisses Gee’s cheek, whispering “He has all of us. We will keep her memory alive for him. He will know her through us.”

There is a knock at the door. Frankie opens the door and Lela stands in front of him, shuffling her feet. “Frankie, Sonny and I need you. We are having trouble preserving Mikey. We were hoping that you can help us chant.” Without a word, Frankie turns back and kisses Gee, following Lela back to Ray’s suite.

It takes the three of them almost two hours of chanting before the spell is cast. Ray, laying on his bed, stares at the wall through his tears, mutters his thanks. He appears to be in shock. Lela calls out “We are here for you, Ray” as the three of them quietly leave the suite.

The next evening members of the family stop by Ray’s suite to see how he is, but they are greeted with silence behind a locked door. They all gather in the library to discuss what to do next, but Adam tells them “Tommy is in there with Ray, has been since sunup. She has always had a special connection to Ray and Mikey, ever since they took her in when she became a newborn vampire. If anyone knows the right things to say to Ray at a time like this, it’s Tommy Joe.”

Tommy sits on the bed facing Ray, who is leaning against the backboard of the bed. He hasn’t stopped crying since the night before. Ray clutches Tommy’s hand as if afraid that she might disappear.

“Papa, you really must drink. The last thing that Mama would want is for you to wither away to nothing. She loves you too much for that. Here, let me go to the kitchen…”

“No.”

“Please, Papa! For me? Please let me go get you some blood bags. I promise I’ll be right back. Please?” Tommy gives Ray what Adam calls her “angel eyes.” Lord above knows that it works on Adam every single time when she wants something…

Ray sighs deeply enough to shake the bed. “Alright, daughter…but only if you promise to come right back. I don’t want to be alone right now.” Tommy leans forward and places a gentle kiss on Ray’s cheek. “I promise. I will be right back.”

Tommy stops in the library on her way back from the kitchen. She quickly gives an update to everyone regarding Ray’s state of mind. “I’m really worried about him. I will stay with him until I know that he has snapped out of the funk he is in. I would hate to have him all alone suffering like that.” She leans up to place a kiss to Adam’s lips. “I will see you later, love.” Adam nods, giving Tommy a ghost of a smile. Frankie calls out “If the two of you need anything, we are here for you.” Tommy blows Frankie a kiss and heads back to Ray’s room.

Tommy manages to make Ray drink three bags of blood before he begins to protest. “No more, Tommy. Really, I’m fine…” Tommy squeezes Ray’s hands. “That’s bullshit! You are NOT fine! How can you be? I feel as if my heart is tearing from my chest, what you are going through is a million times worse! The two of you spent many thousands of years together. Learning to live without Mama will take a long time to achieve, but the family is here for you. We all love you. Please, lean on us. We want to be there for you.” Tears fill Ray’s eyes. “I know that my family loves me. I just feel so alone, in ways that I could never explain to anyone else. I keep expecting her to walk through the door at any moment, with that sweet little crooked smile on her face that she always gave me when she saw me. She will never sing me to sleep again, will never talk to me until the sun goes down. The bed will always be cold without her here by my side.” Tommy leans forward and wraps her arms around her papa. For a while, no words are spoken between them. They both stare at Mikey’s head on the dresser and wish that she were there with them.

“Luna! Please help me!” Damian thinks to himself. He repeats his plea a few more times before he hears Luna whisper in his ear. “My child, I know you are in pain. I know that you are worried that Titan will destroy another family member. But I gave you that power because I knew that you alone could carry it. You are the strength of the Toros, they need you to be strong. It won’t be much longer before the power will find the perfect moment to strike. You must be brave a while longer…”

“Luna! Titan wants to destroy family member after family member until everyone I love is dead! I have already lost my Mikey; how can I sit back and watch her hurt others? Please, help me fight her!”

“That’s Kensi’s job, and he is not yet ready for the task. Please, Damian…just hang in there a while longer! I must go inform Kensi that Narissa is really Titan, make him understand that his time will shortly be at hand. I love you, my son.”

Titan walks into the room, laughing out loud at the condition she finds Damian in. Whip marks, cigarette burns, scratches, deep cuts and huge bruises cover his body. The only thing that she left untouched was Damian’s face, saying that “even she could not damage a thing of such beauty.”

Looking Damian over, she walks up to where she left him, hanging on the cross. “Oh, my sweet Dam! It’s such a shame that you make me hurt you this way. If only you would just give in, your agony would be over. But since you insist on being stubborn…” an evil grin creeps across Titan’s face. “…what say we have another family member come join us?” Damian immediately starts to beg. “Please, PLEASE don’t! Don’t bring another loved one to suffer! Hurt me all you want to; I will submit to your wishes. Just don’t do this…”

Titan taps her fingers against her chin as she stares off into space, pretending to be lost in thought. “Let’s see…” Her eyes dart back to Damian, as if gaging his level of anxiety. “…whom to bring to us for some fun? I know you love Adam, but you do not love him as much as you do others. There’s Tommy Joe…” Damian immediately begins to whine and beg, even as Titan goes on with “…but there’s also your son Draven! He’s suffered at the hands of Andre and Paulo; I wonder how long it would take before he would break into a million tiny pieces…” Titan claps her hands together. “Let’s save Tommy for later, shall we? I think I’d rather play with Draven…” Titan waves her hand, and Draven appears between her and his father.

“Draven! I’m so sorry, son…” Draven’s eyes calmly take in Titan while he waits for her to address him. Titan slowly walks around Draven, looking him over. “My Goddess, Dam! He looks so much like you! And that hair…” Titan reaches out and runs her fingers through Draven’s long locks, even as he tries to pull away. “My name is Titan, Draven. You are here so your father will give something to me, something that I desire very much. But I think, in this case, it’s only fair to bring in some help…” Titan blinks and Andre arrives, surprise covering his features. “What a shock! I didn’t expect to see you for a long, long time, knowing Damian.” Titan smirks at Andre. “I killed Mikey and Dam still refuses to turn the power over to me. So, I brought Draven here for extra incentive. Care to help me, Andre?”

Andre walks over to Damian. “Damn, Damian! I LOVE to see you in this condition! Makes me horny. And speaking of horny…” Andre then walks over to Draven, who sneers at him. Andre slaps Draven across the face. “Pleased to see you too, Drave. I’ll be even more pleased to tear that body up.” Andre waves a hand, and Damian ends up kneeling on the floor, long hair hanging in his face. Draven ends up on the cross.

Andre walks over to a closet in the corner of the room, returning with his favorite whip. “I’ve never had the opportunity to truly mark you up the way I do your father, Drave. It’s time you find out what it’s like to be your father, to suffer the way he does. Welcome to hell, son.”

Luna calls a meeting with the entire family, Ray included. When everyone is in the library, she begins. “I have news. Narissa is indeed behind the war. She controls Andre, even as he believes that he is in charge. But Narissa is not her real name…it’s Titan.” A shocked gasp shoots through the room at this news. “You were right, Kensi. There is a connection. That means that your true enemy controls the largest army of robots in the cosmos and beyond.”

Adam asks “But what is the REAL cause for all of this? Mikey may have been a part of it, but that can’t be the whole story…”

Luna quickly tells the story of Mikey, Titan, and Damian. “Titan believes that Damian belongs to her. She got her revenge on Mikey, and now she has taken Draven.” The family looks around the room quickly, fear on their faces. Frankie says “I just thought he was out of the mansion on an errand.” Tommy bursts out in tears, clinging to Adam as he wraps his arms around her. Thomas wipes tears from his eyes.

Luna turns to Kensi. “You must come with me. I have a few more important things to teach you, before you face off with Titan. You are not quite ready yet.” Adam barks out “But what about our son? Is he just going to sit there and be destroyed?” Luna walks over to Adam, giving him a stern look. “I know this is hard on the two of you, you too, Thomas. But if Kensi goes in unprepared, we will all die slow and painful deaths. Let me have some more time with him, I promise that I will be quick about it. We all want this war to come to a speedy conclusion.”

Kensi walks over to Tommy and Adam. He kisses both of them then says “I promise to learn all I can, as fast as I can. I love the two of you.” Kensi then walks over to Luna’s side, and the two of them disappear.

Chapter Text

Call you up in the middle of the night
Like a firefly without a light
You were there like a blow torch burning
I was a key that could use a little turning
So tired that I couldn’t even sleep
So many secrets I couldn’t keep
Promised myself I wouldn’t weep
One more promise I couldn’t keep
It seems no one can help me now
I’m in too deep there’s no way out
This time I have really led myself astray
Runaway train never going back
One way on a one-way track
Seems like I should be getting somewhere
Somehow, I’m neither here or there
Can you help me remember how to smile?
Make it all seem worth while
How on earth did I get so jaded?
Life’s mysteries seem so faded
I can go where no one else can go
I know what no one else can know
Here I am just a drownin’ in the rain
With a ticket for a runaway train
Everything seems cut and dry
Day and night, earth and sky
Somehow I just don’t believe it

Bought a ticket for a runaway train
Like a madman laughin’ at the rain
Little out of touch, little insane
Just easier than dealing with the pain

Soul Asylum—Runaway Train

Damian holds Draven tightly in his arms as they lay together on the hardwood floor. Their naked bodies shiver in the chill of the room. Over the last hours, Damian has felt every hit, every lash of Draven’s pain, as if he were experiencing it himself. The abuse has finally ended for the moment, leaving the two tired and sore. For the first time in a long time, Titan and Andre have left them alone together. They cling to each other in companionship and comfort, fearful of what will happen next.

Draven opens his eyes and stares into Damian’s, tears forming. In a raspy voice he softly states “I miss Thomas, Father.”

His body giving a large shiver, Damian pulls Draven closer to him. “I know, son. I miss my loves, all three of them. I wish I knew how they are, since two of them are constantly fighting on the battlefield. I also worry about Kenny. He is planning to go up against Titan. What if he fails? What if she kills him?” Damian gives Draven a sad smile. “Lately I have been scared to see my mates after I have been with Andre. There’s always too much pain, the way Andre likes to take me. He sets out to hurt me as much as possible each time. The only way I can deal is to shut my mind off completely. Mikey was right—I’m not the same vampire that I was before the war. Andre has changed me; he’s warped who I was. There are times when I have absolutely no idea who the fuck I am. And every time I miraculously arrive home, I’m terrified that the others will see, and no longer want me. I’ll never be able to return to my old self.” Draven gives Damian a hug. “I’m sorry, Father, that you have suffered the most for the family. We all love you so much! You have willingly given your body and mind over and over so others would not suffer. You mean the world to us, and we will do everything in our power to help you find yourself when this is over.” Damian gives Draven a sweet smile, one that had not graced his lips for a long while. “You’ll get to be with Thomas soon, Drave. I love you beyond words. You mean the world to me…”

The door to the dungeon slowly opens. Damian holds his breath when both Andre and Titan walk into the room.

“Aww, look, Titan! Daddy cuddling his little boy, trying to keep him warm! How sweet!” Titan gives a deep, metallic laugh. “Such adorable little slaves! Waiting for their masters to destroy them some more…”

Damian begs the duo. “Please, Drave’s had more than enough! Please send him home! You have me to serve you; you don’t need him! Please…” Andre kneels next to Damian, his hand carding through and then yanking Damian’s hair. “My little bitch, Drave is here so you will divulge the secret to your power. What he has suffered is only a taste of what is to come! We’ve only been playing with him. It’s high time we get serious. You’ve been playing around long enough, Damian. Now, give us your power, or your little boy will surely die.”

A chill that has nothing to do with the cold in the room runs down Damian’s back. “Please, I told you! I can’t control it! It’s a part of me that I cannot access! Why won’t you believe me?”

Titan walks over and pulls Andre to his feet. “What if Damian is telling the truth? What if we can’t access it?” Andre thinks for a second then gives Titan a look of dread. “You can’t be thinking about killing him! He’s mine!” Titan looks from Damian to Andre. “Killing him will surely save us a lot of time. There may be no other option, Andre, If we can't find another way.” They both turn and look at Damian, contemplating their next move.

Chaining Damian to a chair, Andre and Titan take turns trying to open up Damian’s mind. Damian feels as if their fingers are digging into his brain, the pain unbearable. Draven begs and pleads with the two of them, to no avail. Tears flow non-stop down Damian’s face, until the pressure becomes too much, and he passes out.

Suddenly Luna appears in the room. She pounds her cane on the floor, trying to get Andre and Titan’s attention.

“Leave my son alone Titan! If you want someone who has access to the power, then you should be talking to me. I gave the power to Damian to hold onto, knowing that he would be strong enough to carry it. He can't tell you what he doesn't know. You both believe that you own him, but he’s mine. I created him. I gave him life. At the end of the day, he belongs to me.” Luna walks over to Damian’s prone body. She whispers, “Awaken boy” and Damian’s eyes open, a gasp escaping him. He chokes out “Mama?” and Luna smiles down at him. “Take Draven by the hand, we're leaving this horrid place.”

Andre laughs. “You think you’re strong enough to take these two bitches from us? Think again, Luna. They belong to us.” Its Luna’s turn to laugh. “I didn’t say I was alone, asshole. Kensi! Open!”

A portal opens in the wall across from them, and Kensi steps through it. He waves his hand and neither Andre or Titan can move. He makes his way over to Damian and Draven, helping them up off the floor and pushing them through the room towards the portal. Titan screams out a succession of spells, angry that none of them are working. With one final push, Damian and Draven are through the portal, with Luna right behind them. Kensi turns to face Titan.

“Our battle has only begun, bitch. I will see you soon, and when I do, I will destroy you! Prepare yourself.” Kensi turns and throws himself through the portal, which closes behind him.

The four of them arrive at Luna’s ice mansion. Luna immediately sets out to heal Draven and Damian, then dresses them in warm clothing. It is only then that Kensi takes Damian in his arms, holding him close and kissing him deeply for a few minutes. When the two of them pull away from each other, Kensi turns to Draven. “I’m so glad you are alright! Thomas has been close to hysterical worrying about you! Luna, can you please send him home, so he can have his own reunion?” Luna leans forward and places a kiss to Draven’s cheek. “Be well, youngster. This war is far from over.” With a wave of her hand, Draven arrives in his suite in the mansion. He finds Thomas sound asleep in their bed. Smiling, Draven removes his clothes and, as silently as he can, slips into bed behind him. Thomas sighs when Draven wraps his arms around Thomas’s middle, cuddling him from behind. With a satisfied sigh of his own, Draven closes his eyes and drifts off to sleep.

Kensi wraps his arms around Damian before saying to Luna “I’m so glad the portal worked! It’s my first spell! I was a bit worried…” Luna smiles at him. “You did quite well, Kensi. I’m proud of you! But Titan will really be itching for a fight next time around. You tweaked her nose, and her ego is smarting because of it. It won’t be long before she is searching for you to start a battle.” Luna moves forward to take Damian in her arms, pushing Kensi’s arms aside for a moment. She kisses Damian’s cheek, whispering words of comfort in his ear. “I love you, son. You are my shining star. You will always be the center of my universe. You take all the pain for those you love. You have no idea just how much you are loved in return. Hold on, my love. You will survive this war, will be able to find yourself again. Just be patient.” Luna pulls back and smiles at both Damian and Kensi. “The two of you spend as much time together as you wish. I will leave you in peace. But Kensi, remember…” Luna gives Kensi a serious look “…you have more training to do! I love you both.” With that, Luna slowly turns on her heel and leaves the two of them as they call out goodnight and their love for her.

When they are alone, Kensi kisses Damian once again. It is as if he is trying to show all the love he has in his heart for Damian. When they part, Kensi sees unshed tears in Damian’s eyes. “Are you alright, my love? Tell me what is bringing tears to those beautiful eyes…”

Damian shakes his head, suddenly overwhelmed and searching for words. Kensi pulls Damian onto his lap, pulling him until Damian is laying against Kensi’s chest. “I’m here, sweetheart. I know you have gone through hell. Just let me hold you…”

After ten minutes spent this way, Damian finally finds his voice, which shakes as he softly says “I’m…not myself, Kenny. I’m so lost. I don’t…know who I am…”< /p> Kensi slowly kisses the side of Damian’s face. “Baby, you are the vamp we all love. You are still you, deep down inside. You just have layers of pain blocking your vision. They will fade over time. Just hang in there with me, love. Tommy, Ad and I will get you through.” Damian shakes his head. “But…” there is silence for a moment before he continues with “…what if…I never recognize ME? Could you love me, if I…were different? Not the Dam I was? What if I’m too…broken?”

Kensi shrugs. “Baby, all of us have deep scars from this war…some deeper than others. We, the entire family, love you…the REAL you! When I look at you, I see the vamp I fell in love with. He is right there, shining through your eyes. He has never left.” Kensi pulls on Damian once again, turning Damian until he is facing Kensi. “I don’t know about you, but I have spent way too much time away from you, love. Kiss me, touch me, take me…whatever you want. I just want your body on mine…”

Damian makes love to Kensi on the couch, under thick fur blankets. He knows what Kensi is doing, having him top. Kensi wants to give Damian control, wants to make him feel in charge. Damian thanks his love as he falls apart, coming deep inside Kensi, who responds by kissing him deeply. The moment is special, one that Titan and Andre can never destroy.

After another hour of cuddling goes by, Kensi whispers “Please, baby, take us to your suite. I miss the others as well.” Damian nods and when they arrive, the suite is filled with Tommy’s surprised yelp and Adam’s happy greeting. They step forward to wrap their arms around Kensi and Damian. “We’ve missed you SO much! We are SO glad you are here!” Adam says, wrapping his arms around Damian.

The four of them climb onto the bed. Kensi takes Tommy in his arms, sighing as their bodies melt into one another. Clothes disappear, hands caress skin, lips entwined.

Adam moves behind Damian, pressing against his backside. Damian gives out a scared scream, bolts off the bed and heads for the corner of the room. He sits on the floor, knees bent, arms around himself and his head lowered, hair covering his face as tears flow down his cheeks. “NO! PLEASE! I’LL BE SO GOOD FOR YOU, PLEASE DON’T RAPE ME AGAIN! I CAN’T STAND IT! PLEASE, PLEASE STOP…” Tommy gets off the bed and slowly approaches Damian, who screams even louder. “PLEASE! DON’T TOUCH ME! I CAN’T STAND IT! PLEASE, LEAVE ME ALONE! I…NOT AGAIN! DON’T RAPE ME! I CAN’T…” Tommy softly calls out “Dam, it’s Tommy, Ad and Kenny! We love you! We would NEVER hurt you! Please, just let me…” Damian’s head shoots upward. His eyes wide, he doesn’t recognize his love kneeling in front of him. In his mind, it’s Andre who is trying to approach him. In a panic, he turns his upper body and tries to drag himself up the wall by his nails to escape. “I…PLEASE LEAVE ME! I CAN’T GIVE YOU THE POWER, I…LEAVE MY MIND ALONE! NO MORE…” Kensi climbs off the bed and kneels down next to Tommy. He wraps his arms around Tommy’s middle, attempting to pull her away. “He is locked in his own mind, Tommy. Let me call for Luna…”

Luna arrives in the middle of the room. She takes in Adam, Tommy and Kensi’s concerned looks before turning to Tommy and Kensi. “Please, on the bed, you two. Let me deal with him…” Tommy, Adam and Kensi redress, gathering together on the bed, clinging to each other as they watch the love of their lives fall apart.

Damian turns back towards the room after failing to climb the wall. He covers his ears and screams, shaking his head from side to side. “LEAVE ME ALONE! I CAN’T…NO! PLEASE, KILL ME! ANYTHING BUT THIS TORTURE…” Luna walks up to Damian and sinks to her knees in front of him. She reaches out and takes both of his hands in hers, squeezing tightly. “Son, it’s Mama. Please…” Damian screams “You’re a shade! A dream! Andre, STOP! IT HURTS…”

It takes two hours of attempts before Luna finally manages to get through to Damian. He glances from Tommy, Adam and Kensi, all huddled close to each other in terror to Luna. “Mama? Where…am I?”

Luna reaches forward and wraps her arms around Damian. “You are in your suite, Dam. Look! Your three loves are on the bed, waiting for you! You are in the mansion, you are safe. You are with people who love you.” Damian begins to cry harder. “For how long? How long until they try to destroy me with their attempts? They talked about killing me. They want the power. I don’t want to fail, I want to save the family, but I’m weak. I’m not me. I can’t…Mama, take the power from me! PLEASE! I can’t anymore…I’ve tried but I’m…please, there has to be another way! I’m not strong…” Luna hushes Damian, rocking him in her arms. “He…they keep raping me! Hurting those I love! I watched them tear Draven apart, I’ve watched Titan kill Mikey, Andre made me kill Kenny…I can’t…please, help me! Help me find ME! I’m so lost and alone, I hate what I’ve become. I’m weak—I want to be strong for the family! I want to save those I love! But I can’t, I can’t…”

Luna shushes Damian, tears in her eyes. “My love, you are the only one in the family strong enough to carry the power. I wish I could give it to someone else, but I cannot. You are stronger than you realize. I know that you have been through hell, my love. You have every right to break down. You’ve reached rock bottom.”

Adam calls out “Why don’t YOU carry the power, Luna?” Luna responds “Even I am not strong enough, not to carry it for an extended period. At the time of Damian’s creation I had a husband, a God named Philippe. He came from beyond the cosmos. From him Damian gained his strength, his resilience. He knew someday that he wouldn’t be around to meet his son, so he prepared him to handle anything that comes his way.” Luna runs her fingers through Damian’s hair, pulling his hair out of his face. “Dam, you ARE stronger than you know! But I have been expecting you to have a breakdown eventually. Frankly, I’m surprised that it took this long, considering all they have been doing to you. Every hero has a moment of weakness. You have found yours. It is alright, my son. Everything will be alright.” Squeezing Damian tightly around the middle, Luna calls out “Adam and Kensi! Help me get him into bed!” The two rush over to Luna, each reaching out to take one of Damian’s arms. Together they lift Damian, slowly walking him towards the bed. Tommy pulls back the blankets and they all manage to place him into the middle of the bed.< /p> Once he is covered, Damian closes his eyes with a sigh and drifts off to sleep. The four of them wait until he is deeply asleep before Luna whispers “I know that the three of you are deeply concerned, but he’s been needing to get this out for a long time. I don’t think anyone has realized just how much abuse he has taken recently. Andre and Titan have doubled down in their efforts to not only gain the power, but to destroy him in the process. I’m glad the three of you were with him when he broke down. He needs you so much, it will take a lot for him to repair the damage they have done to him. Stay with him, cuddle him—love him. I will be back tomorrow night to check on all four of you again. I love you.” With that, Luna disappears.

Tommy’s eyes fill with tears. “Poor Dam! His emotions are so raw. I’ve never seen him like this! I hope he can find himself again.” Kensi wraps his arms around Tommy, squeezing tightly. “He has us to help him, love. Now, let’s get to sleep, it’s late. He will need us when we wake up.”

Damian is the first to wake the next evening. He stares at the ceiling, his body sinking into the luxurious bed beneath him. Every inch of him hurts, his head most of all. He can’t remember a time when he has felt so wiped out, so exhausted. Two arms are encircling him, Tommy’s from the left, Kensi’s from the right. He feels warmth from their cold bodies touching, hears Adam snore on the other side of the bed.

Damian feels useless and worn out. He wonders what these other three in bed see in him. Just as another round of tears threaten to start in his eyes, he looks up into the face of a man that he’s never met before.

Green glowing eyes matching his own stare into his, long blonde hair surrounding a strongly featured face. Damian feels as if he’s staring into a mirror.

“Hello, son. My name is Philippe. I am your father.” Damian whispers “Hello, father.” His father’s eyes twinkle as he says “Luna created the Toro’s, but she did so on her own. You are the only one that the two of us created together, before my demise.” Philippe gives Damian a smile. “I’m here because you need me. I know what happened last night. Son, you should feel no shame at what happened. As Luna says, every hero has their moment of weakness. Yours was a hella long time coming! I’m proud of you for holding out so long, for being strong—even as your soul shattered into a million pieces.”

Damian says “I’m not strong. I’m barely holding on.”

Philippe smiles once again. “My son, you are the strongest of the Toros. The family wouldn’t exist without you! There is more to you than you realize, Damian. Mikey’s proud of you, too.” The mention of Mikey causes the trapped tears to flow. “I miss her so much! She was my rock. I could always rely on her to be there for me. Since she has died…”

Philippe cuts in with “…but how do you know she is dead, Damian?”

Damian gives Philippe a confused look. “I saw her die in front of me!” Philippe laughs. “If there is one thing that your magick training should have taught you by now, son, is that death, REAL death, is temporary. Unless of course, the practitioner ensures that the body cannot be resurrected in some way. Titan failed to do so, so your Mikey is somewhere, very much alive. It will only take the proper spell to bring her back to you.”

Damian wipes the tears from his eyes. “Father, why is it that I haven’t met you before?” Philippe laughs. “Your mama called for me last night. She told me that you needed me. When I died, I made a vow to her that I would stay out of your life, let you blaze your own path without my interfering. But she told me that it was imperative that I see you, that you believed that you had somehow failed everyone by having a moment of weakness. But weakness is not the end. It is merely a chance to take a deep breath, a pause and a chance to start again.” Philippe closes his eyes and sighs softly. Damian feels…something…happen to him that he doesn’t understand. A surge of…electricity?...rushes from the bottom of his feet to the very top of his head, causing him to gasp. Flexing his fingers, fears and concerns disappear as if he’d never felt them. In their place there is hope.

Philippe opens his eyes again, staring at Damian. “You are reborn, my son. Your soul has been healed. Your strength has returned, your fears and concerns have been erased. You are in top fighting form. You will thrive and fulfil your duties, and you will win this war for the Toros. Your children will grow strong just like their father.”

Philippe’s smile turns sad. “I’m just sorry that I cannot take you in my arms and show you exactly how much I love you.” Damian reaches upward, but all he touches is air. “One last gift for you, my boy.” Damian feels the words of a spell fill his mind. “To bring back your love. She needs to be with you, Ray and her son. Protect her. She is the other half of you.” Damian watches as the face above him moves closer to him, until he feels the pressure of a kiss on his forehead. “Goodbye, my son. I love you, and I always will. Who knows? Maybe someday I’ll be resurrected as well…” The face above him fades away, leaving Damian feeling a bit hollow inside.

“Did you say something, Dam?” Kensi asks, his voice rough with sleep. Damian turns to his side, his hand capturing Kensi’s chin and pulling him in for a kiss. “I met my father.” Kensi gives Damian a confused look. “But…”

Tommy opens her eyes. “Good evening, loves. Ohhh…!” Adam had turned on his side, rubbing his hard on against Tommy’s ass. He mumbles a deep, sexy “Good evening, loves.” Kensi smirks. “Not now, you two! Dam was just about to tell us something important!”

Damian explains about his encounter with his father. “He not only reenergized me, but he gave me a spell to resurrect Mikey. Even in death, he is powerful beyond measure. I wish he was still alive.” Kensi kisses Damian’s cheek. “Maybe Sonny and Lela can help you find a way to do so, honey. But we are so glad that you are doing better! We all were worried about you…” Tommy leans forward and whispers “Since you are feeling better, Dam…can we make love? I think the four of us need it more than we can admit…”

Three hours later, the four of them search out Ray. They find him in his suite, sadly staring at the wall, deep in thought. Damian walks up to him and hugs him, saying “We’ve come to see you, Ray. I have something very important…” Ray turns into Damian’s arms, holding tightly. “I’m glad you’re here. Mikey has been whispering to me all night. I have no idea what she is trying to say, but I have a feeling it has to do with you, Dam.”

Damian quickly tells Ray about his encounter with his father. “He gave me a spell. I’d like to try it, if it is okay with you.” Ray nods, a look of excitement on his face. “Please, bring my sweetheart back to me!”

Damian walks over to the dresser that Mikey’s head is on. He reaches out and places his hands on either side of her head, his head down and eyes closed. Damian begins to chant loudly as everyone holds their breath in anticipation.

After a few minutes, Mikey’s head begins to glow. It slowly raises off the dresser and moves forward towards Damian. The faint outline of a body begins to show in the dim light of the room. Damian chants louder, and a skeleton appears. After a few more minutes, skin begins to cover the bones, the neck connecting to the head.

Ray gasps as Mikey’s eyes pop open. She stares at Damian as he chants even louder, brushing the hair out of her eyes. Suddenly, Mikey’s entire body begins to glow brightly, the light blinding everyone in the room.

When Damian stops chanting, he moves forward and takes Mikey into his arms. Mikey whispers “Thank you, my love” as she returns his hug, squeezing tightly. The two cling to each other for a moment, reconnecting. The others in the room give them their space, recognizing the long history and deep connection between them. Tears of happiness fill both their eyes as they pull apart, staring deeply into each other’s eyes for a moment. Their connection goes way beyond soul mates—a connection such as theirs only comes along once in a millennium.

After kissing Mikey on the cheek, Damian steps aside so Mikey can have her reunion with Ray. The two kiss, clinging to each other as if they will disappear if they let go. Tommy calls out “Momma? I’m so glad…” Mikey kisses Ray once more before moving to hug and kiss the others in the room. Once they have all had their reunion, Mikey asks “Where’s my boy? I miss him.” Ray explains that Gee is currently watching him. Adam suggests “Why don’t we stop at Gee’s room on our way to our own? We will let them know that you are alive, and ask if they can watch your son for a while longer, so you may have some private time together?” Ray nods. “I think that’s a good idea. Please let Gee know that we will be over to pick up the baby in a little while.” The others agree, calling out their goodbyes as they leave their parents.

Once they return to their suite, the boys are saddened when Kensi tells them that he must return to Luna. “I’m so sorry, but I must go. I have so much more to learn before I take on Titan. I promise to keep in touch with all of you. Dam, I’m SO glad that you are well! I was really worried about you!” Kensi kisses each of them in turn, saving Damian for last. As he stares into Damian’s eyes, he softly says “I have a feeling that I will be seeing you first, love. Please take care of yourself.” Damian gives Kensi a fierce kiss before replying “I will see you there, love. Be safe. We are always with you.” Kensi glances at each of them and then disappears.

Adam asks Damian “What did that mean, Dam? Does he figure you will be there when he takes on Titan?” Damian wraps an arm around Adam and Tommy. “I’m sure of it. Hopefully I will be able to help him defeat her. Either way, we either survive together or…” Tommy stands on tiptoes and kisses Damian, effectively cutting off the end of his sentence. When they part, Tommy smiles and says “Babes, I’d rather live in ignorance a while longer. The thought of you two facing that bitch does nothing but raise my anxiety. Please let me have my fantasy that everything is well for a while longer.”

There is a lull in the war. The family spends their time with each other, enjoying each other’s company, not sure when the fighting will begin again.

One evening, Damian and Mikey are curled up together on the couch in Mikey’s suite, the baby on Mikey’s lap. Damian offers a finger to the boy then asks “I never had the opportunity to ask what you named him, Mikes.” Mikey watches her son wrap his little fingers around Dam’s finger, holding tightly. “We decided to name him Joshua Toro, after Ray’s grandfather. I missed him so much while I was dead! He has grown so much…” Mikey lays her head on Damian’s shoulder, sighing as she continues with “…and I am so grateful to you for rescuing me! Being dead was lonely…”

Damian wraps his arm around Mikey and pulls her closer. “I wouldn’t have given up on you, love. I would’ve found a way to resurrect you, no matter what. You know…” Damian kisses the side of Mikey’s face “…you were my first love. I love my mates, but I can never love them as much as I love you. Still do. You’ve become a huge part of me, I can’t live without you!” Mikey sighs. “Hopefully neither of us will ever have to live without each other, sweetheart. I…” Mikey leans down and picks up a bottle of blood for Joshua, offering it to him. “…have something to tell you, Dam…and I’m not sure if I can.”

Damian, a concerned look on his face, prods Mikey with “What is it, love? C’mon, I can take it. I need to know…”

Mikey gives Damian a searching look then sighs. “While I was in limbo, I accidentally accessed Luna’s thoughts. Don’t ask me how it happened, I have no idea—I just knew that those thoughts belonged to her. What I saw terrified me.”

Once again, Damian prods Mikey. “Babes, just tell me. I said I can take it, and I can. Please let me know my future.”

Mikey’s voice fills with tears as she softly says “Luna had a premonition. I saw the family in the Silver realm, chained to the ceiling of a stage which took up one end of a large hall. Even the children were there, together in a cage.

“There was an audience of robots in attendance. They spoke different languages, and the room was loud as they tried to talk excitedly over each other. At the other end of the room, Titan and Andre stand staring at you, who were in front and center of the family.”

“Suddenly Kensi appears. He looks confident, calling out to you as he stares down the two in front of him. You call out a warning, but he doesn't seem to heed it, throwing back his head and laughing. “So, you want to continue this on home turf, Titan? Think your robots are on your side? They are as much slaves as my people are. They just aren’t aware of it.”

“Titan sends out a series of lightning bolts, but Kensi manages to miss each one. His body twists and turns in the air. Titan laughs “Not bad for a vamp! Pay attention to the door, Kensi.” Kensi turns towards the door, and it opens. An array of human slaves enters the room, their heads down as they walk. They are filthy, as if they never had a bath in their lives. Their hair is uncombed, sticking up in places. They are wearing dirty rags, some barely covering their near naked bodies.”

Horror covers Kensi’s features when he recognizes these slaves as members of his own family. One woman around the age of forty raises her head and stares at Kensi, anger and sadness easily shown across her face.”

“These are just some of your family members. Am I correct, Kensi? There’s a whole new generation that you haven’t met yet. Of course, that’s because you escaped. You left them behind. My robots ground them into the dirt every day for fun.” Kensi’s rage shows on his face. It looks as if he is losing focus. Dam, you call out to him over and over, but he doesn’t respond, doesn’t appear to hear you at all. He’s too blinded by guilt and rage. That will be his downfall.”

Mikey stops there, tears in her eyes. After a few minutes of silence, Damian says “Please, Mikey, please. I need to know the rest.”

Mikey swallows loudly. “Kensi tries his best, but his attention is split, since his family is in attendance, and we are on the stage behind him. He is worried that we will be caught in the crossfire. Titan and Kensi have a firefight, which both survive. The robots scream louder, begging Titan to kill Kensi.”

“Spell after spell is hurled by both sides. Andre gets involved in the battle, but you join in on Kensi’s side, helping him. It is the first time that you remember that you were kidnapped and allowed to keep your powers.”

“Both sides fight to a standstill. Titan sends a series of clicks and squeaks to the robots, who lunge at Kensi’s family. They tear the slaves apart limb by limb. Kensi screams in disbelief and rage, your voice echoing his emotions. Blood and body parts cover the walls and floor.”

“I’ve just been playing up to now, Kensi. This is more about humiliating you than it was killing you. I can do that anytime. No, this is about destroying your self-worth, reducing you to nothing much beyond the trash that you really are. See Damian up there on the stage? He’s next. I want you both mentally and physically devastated before I remove the two of you forever from my sight.”

“You call out to the room “Andre, Titan? You want the power? Here you go…” Dam, you throw back your head and scream a spell at the top of your lungs. Smoke starts to erupt from your chest. Flames surround you, the chains holding the family to the ceiling melt in puddles at everyone’s feet. The cage surrounding the children melts, and they run into everyone’s arms. You continue to chant the spell, even as the first shockwave of power leaves your body and moves through the room towards our enemies. The robots in the room begin to melt, their voices finally silenced.”

“Wave after wave of power encompasses the entire realm. The sky turns black, and the windows begin to shake. You see Kensi hit by a direct hit of power, watch as he collapses to the floor. You want to go over to him, to help him, but you find you cannot move from the spot you are standing in.”

“You watch as Titan begins to melt, you see Andre reach for his throat as he tries to breathe. The two of them slowly sink to the floor, their bodies disintegrating. You say another spell and the two of them disappear.”

“You hear the cries of robots around the realm as they too melt into oblivion. Finally, the waves of power begin to subside, reabsorbing into your chest. The skies lighten, a sense of peace settles across the realm. You finally can move, so you run over to Kensi’s side, calling out his name. He doesn’t move. You place a hand on his arm, try to shake him awake—but he still doesn’t move. His skin is cold, his eyes open. You beg him to wake, then you lean down and kiss his lips. When he doesn’t respond you realize that you accidentally killed your love, since he was standing between you and your enemies. You saved the realm, you defeated the robots, Titan and Andre, but you killed one of the loves of your life in the process.”

“You watch as the mandala on Kensi’s forehead begins to fade. You touch your hand to your own forehead just as the mandala is permanently tattooed into your own skin. Kensi’s body begins to melt, the same way Titan and Andre’s did. You scream out “I love you!” as the liquid puddle that was once Kensi sinks through the floor and disappears.”

Mikey is silent for a few minutes, while Damian absorbs all that he was just told. Finally, he breaks the silence by saying “I understand that you managed to access this information from Luna. You believe that what she saw in her premonition is carved in stone. Mikey, I’ve had plenty of conversations with Luna, some of them on the topic of premonitions. She told me over and over that they are more of a guess than fact, that the details can change at any time, up to the actual event happening. What you said may never happen, Mikes. I’m not worrying about the details.” Mikey lifts her head from Damian’s shoulder and huffs, moving slightly away from him. “You don’t believe me? When the events unfurled like ribbons in my mind? You don’t want to believe the truth, that’s all! You don’t want to hear about Kensi dying…”

Damian tries to pull Mikey back into his arms but fails. Damian softly says “C’mon, Mikes. You know that I would normally take you at your word about a thing such as this. But this time, I’m betting on the universe.”

Chapter Text

I’m standin’ on the bridge
I’m waiting in the dark
I thought you’d be here by now
There’s nothing but the rain
No footsteps on the ground
I’m listening but there’s no sound
Isn’t anyone tryna find me?
Won’t somebody come take me home?
It’s a damn cold night
Tryna figure out this life
Won’t you take me by the hand
Take me someplace new?
I don’t know who you are but I,
I’m with you
I’m lookin’ for a place
I’m searchin’ for a face
Is anybody here? I know
Cause nothing going right
And everything’s a mess
And no one likes to be alone
Isn’t anyone tryna find me?
Won’t somebody come take me home?
It’s a damn cold night tryna figure out this life
Won’t you take me by the hand
Take me someplace new?
I don’t know who you are, but I
I’m with you, yeah, yeah
Oh, why is everything so confusing?
Maybe I’m just out of my mind
Avril Lavigne—I’m With You

“What the FUCK Dam?” Kensi calls out, struggling to pull himself out from under Damian. Damian suddenly seems to snap out of whatever reverie he’s in, his eyes connecting with Kensi’s. “I’m so sorry, baby. I lost my train of thought…”

Kensi huffs, reaching for the sheet at the foot of the bed. “I was supposed to be your train of thought! Is it really so easy to forget me while you’re fucking my brains out?”

Damian reaches for Kensi, pulling him into his arms. “I really am sorry, love. I just…” Kensi lifts Damian’s chin so their eyes connect once again. “What, baby? Where did your thoughts take you to this time?”

Damian gives a shudder then says “My mind wandered back to Luna’s premonition, Kenny. I can’t help but worry about it. I know it’s not set in stone, but what if I do end up killing you by accident? I’d never forgive myself…” Kenny gives a quiet chuckle. “It’s just like you to worry about things you cannot control, Dam. You’ve always been this way. Listen, sweetheart…” Kensi turns and lays his head down on Damian’s chest. “…we all knew going into this war that any of us can die at any time. Hell, you and Adam have died over and over, so many times I lost count! I’m just grateful that we have so many healers in this family!” Damian laughs then says “Yeah, if it wasn’t for Frankie, Lela and Sonny, we’d be short way too many family members!” Kensi nods in agreement. “Like I said, any of us can die at any time. I may not make it to that moment Luna saw, I may live for eternity. No one knows. We are just going to have to find out when we get there.”

The two of them exchange “I love you’s” before settling down for sleep. Just as Damian is about to doze off, Kensi asks in a soft voice “Sweetheart, have you ever heard of Selena, Angel of the East?” Damian thinks for a moment and responds “I’ve heard tales of her since I was turned, Kenny. Why do you ask?” Kenny waits a few minutes before replying with “The other day, I was meeting with a member of Talonian royalty at a dive bar in the Atlas realm. I wanted to purchase humans from him for the army. I overheard an Orek in the back of the room boasting that he used to work for Selene. His partners laughed at him, so he continued with “She lives in the Narcene Cluster! My brother and I worked for her for ten years! She is related to Andre, you know.”

Damian, in shock, comments “Andre? How can such a thing be true?”

Kensi continues with “That’s what his friends asked. The Orek responded “Ask Luna, if you can find her! She knows all about it. Selene told me…”

Damian pauses before saying “How can you believe anything that you hear in a dive bar? I’m sure it’s nothing but drunk bragging. And bringing Luna into it? That’s a sure way to get yourself killed! That is, if she would stoop so low as to respond to such a…” Kensi cuts Damian off with “…But what if it is true! What if Luna knows about this? Selene is said to be all powerful! Maybe she can help us…” Damian cuts in with “What? Kill her father? Have you lost your mind? Look what happened when we had to deal with Paulo! Do we really want to try to fuck with another insane situation like that?”

Kensi sits up in bed. “Well, there’s only one thing to do…” Kensi calls out to Luna, and she appears at the bottom of the bed. “Why is it that every time I see the two of you, you’re naked?” Damian laughs and nods his head and then he and Kensi are clothed. “Sorry, Mama.”

Kensi wastes no time going for the jugular. “I have a question for you, Luna. Are you related to Selene, Angel of the East?”

Luna’s face pales for a moment. “Yes, I am related to her. She is my daughter. I had her a long, long time ago.” Luna turns her attention on Damian. “Do you remember the favor that I said I would ask of you, when the war is over?” Damian nods his head. Luna continues with “I was going to ask you to find her for me. We had an argument. She, in anger, placed a spell on me. The spell forbids me from finding her. The last thing I heard was that she is in the Narcene Cluster. I was going to ask you to find her for me, Dam. I miss my daughter.”

Kensi, always the direct one, asks “I’m sorry to ask this, Luna…but is Andre her father?”

There is silence in the room for a few minutes. Damian opens his mouth to yell at Kensi, but Luna raises a hand to stop him. “I…” Luna’s face once again goes pale. “…had an affair with Andre a long time ago. I found out that Phillipe was cheating on me. I lashed out, wanting to repay hurt for hurt. Andre was different back then. He was pleasant to be around, he was funny. We got along very well. I found out that I was pregnant. I told Andre, and he was very happy in the beginning. Then I told Phillipe. He attacked Andre, throwing not only his fists but spell after spell at him. It broke something in Andre, turned him into what we know today.

Phillipe and I got back together. We raised Selene together, Phillipe loving her as if she were his own. When Selene was thirty, she had a fight with Phillipe. She had somehow found out that she was Andre’s daughter, and what Phillipe did to him. The next thing I knew, Phillipe was dead. Selene was still in a rage, and in my grief, I lashed out, accusing her of killing my husband. Selene threw her spells at me, and the next thing I knew she was gone.”

Kensi and Damian take a few moments to digest what Luna has told them. In a shaky voice, Damian says “She’s my…sister?”

Luna shakes her head. “Yes, sweetheart. Selene is your sister.”

Kensi sighs. “If she is Andre’s daughter, there is no way that she will help us fight against him. So much for that thought…” Damian cuts in with “We won’t know until we try, Kenny. I’ll just have to go and speak to her myself. The least she can do is talk with her brother.” Damian gets out of bed and walks over to Luna, taking her hand. “I will carry out your favor, Mama. I will leave tomorrow night, as soon as the sun goes down. But where is this supposed Cluster? I have only been out of the cosmos twice, both times for short distances.”

Luna places her hand on Damian’s forehead. “Here is a map of the lands beyond the cosmos, Damian. The Narcene Cluster is very large, so it may take some time to find her. You will need not only a protection spell, but you will need an incognito spell as well. No telling what creatures you will find out there.”

Kensi places his hand on Damian’s arm. “Maybe I should come with you, Dam? As backup?” Damian shakes his head. “No, Kenny. I think she might feel less…” Damian looks from one to the other “…ganged up on if I go alone. If you come along, she may clam up and not speak.” Kensi goes to try again but Luna says “You may be needed here, young man. Who knows when Titan will decide to attack? With Damian gone, the power goes with him. We will need all the help we can get if the war escalates.” Kensi begrudgingly agrees, though Luna knows that it won’t be the last time he tries to change Damian’s mind before he goes.

Luna wraps her arms around Damian, pulling him in for a tight hug. “Thank you, my love. I’m not sure how successful you will be, but I thank you for trying. I’m not sure if she can ever forgive me.” Luna once again places her hand on Damian’s forehead, saying a few spells. When she pulls her hand away, she says “Please be careful, Dam. I look forward to your return. I love you.” Luna smiles at both and disappears.

Damian walks over to the side of the bed and climbs in. “Let me hold you, love, while we fall asleep. I wish Adam and Tommy hadn’t gone into the city for a night of fun. Now I can’t fill them in on everything until tomorrow night.” Damian kisses Kensi’s lips passionately, then pulls back to say “But I’m glad I have you with me, my love. I have a feeling it will be a while before I see you again.” Kensi pulls Damian in for another kiss. “Then maybe we should make love again before we fall asleep? I want my last memory of you to be of you coming deep inside of me, love…”

As predicted by Damian, Tommy bursts out in tears and Adam curses when they hear that Damian is leaving. “Why do you always take on such dangerous tasks, Dam?” Tommy asks through her tears. “Baby, I’ll be fine. I’m just going to look for my sister. I’m sure I will be back before you know it…” Adam growls out “Bullshit! You know you will be gone forever, and all of us will worry ourselves sick over you! Why don’t you let me go in your place…”

Damian steps forward and embraces Adam. “You know I can’t do that. You are needed at the front, and here to protect Tommy and the babies. I will be back before you know it! And hopefully Selene will help us fight against Andre…”

Tommy steps forward and wraps her arms around both of them. “Don’t leave me out! I’m gonna miss you like hell, Dam! The children will, too!” Damian wraps an arm around Tommy, holding his loves close to his chest. “I’m going to miss all of you, but I have to do this. Take care of each other while I’m gone…” The door to the room opens and Mikey enters, looking lost and lonely. “Don’t leave me out of this hugfest! I want to say goodbye, too…”

Damian drops his arms and walks over to Mikey. “Eavesdropping again, Mikes?” Damian says with a laugh. Mikey shrugs. “You know me, Dam. Anything to do with you, I must stick my ass into it! You can’t leave without saying goodbye to your old Mikes…”

Damian laughs again, wrapping his arms tightly around Mikey. “Beware, Dam. I’ve met Selene a time or two. She has a vicious side to her. Don’t step out of line or you will know it for sure. But then again, with that charming attitude of yours, I’m sure you will do fine!” She squeezes Damian around the waist before kissing him on the lips. “Just don’t bring up Phillipe until she accepts you, Dam. That’s a hella sore spot with her to this day. Tread carefully.” Damian kisses Mikey again and then backs away to find that she has tears in her eyes. “I’ll do my best to behave, Mikes. Thanks for coming to say goodbye. I’ll miss you.” Damian goes to leave just as Kensi rushes into the room. “One last kiss, Dam? Please?”

Damian laughs as Kensi wraps his arms around him. Damian leans forward and gives Kensi a passionate kiss before pulling back. Looking at each of them, he chokes out “I’ll miss you all. Love you” and then disappears.

Damian ends up standing in a vast forest. The air is moist, the ground soft beneath his feet. Looking around himself, he sees multiple types of flowering bushes and tall trees as far the eye can see. The daylight isn’t as bright as it is in the Light realm, the sunlight isn’t hurting his eyes as he expects it to.

Looking around him, he sees a young girl in pigtails and a blue floral dress picking flowers. There seems to be something…honest?...about her. Damian pushes back the incognito spell and walks up to the young lady.

“Excuse me?” He sees the girl jump in surprise. “I’m sorry to bother or scare you. Can you please help me? I’m looking for Selene, Angel of the East?”

The girl looks Damian over with a suspicious eye. Looking around her to make sure she isn’t being watched, she asks “What would you want her for, may I ask?”

Damian gives the girl his sweetest smile. “I’m her brother. I was hoping you could help me locate her. The Nacene Cluster is so big…” The girl still seems not to trust him, but she finally says “Take the road out of town, follow it to the right. It is a long journey. You will know when you are there when you encounter her Alerks. Be careful of them, they are trained to protect her. Their skin and even their blood is poisonous. They will try to spit at you before trying to rip your body parts off. If you can defeat them, her castle is carved on the side of the Blue Mountain. The Tocks are her slaves. Beware of them as well.”

Damian bows to the girl, who giggles at his antics. “Thank you, sweetheart. Have a nice day.” The girl nods then returns to picking flowers. Damian raises his incognito spell again and heads towards town.

Once there, he finds all manners of creatures bartering at the market in the center of town. Damian recognizes a few species, but most are strange to him. He is grateful for the spell that covers his body.

Once on the other side of town, Damian is confused by the number of roads leading out of town. He’s not sure which road to take. Just as he is about to give up, he hears a voice in his head say, “The jewel covered road!” Not knowing if he should follow the instruction he was given or not, in the end Damian decides to throw precaution to the wind and follow that road.

Damian is intrigued by the different types of plants and trees that he passes. One plant has incandescent leaves and tall, purple flowers. Damian longs to touch but is afraid that many of the types he encounters could be poisonous.

He encounters animals of every type as he wanders along the road. He walks as fast as he can, though it feels as if time…and himself…are barely moving.

Damian stumbles into a small patch of bushes that have…unbelievably…bags of blood hanging from their branches. Incredibly thirsty but cautious, Damian takes one of the bags from a branch. He breaks the top open and smells the blood. All seems normal. He takes a small sip. His tastebuds dance in delight at the rich flavor that they taste. Damian waits for a half hour, resting on the ground before judging if the blood is safe to drink. He decides to go ahead and drink the rest of the bag. In the end, he takes a few more bags off the tree, just in case they are needed for later.

Damian’s powers are wonky at best. He tries to picture his sister, tries to time walk to her, to no avail. Frustrated, he decides to simply continue his journey on foot.

A soft rain begins to fall. When he reaches a clearing in the forest, a tall, muscular young man walks up to him. “I see you there, sexy. You can’t hide from me! I’m used to your tricks.” Damian stands still, hoping that the male will leave him alone. Instead, he reaches out and grabs Damian’s arm. “I said I see you, sexy! No escape from me! You’re mine now!”

Damian tries to pull away, but the young male tightens his grip. Frustrated, Damian lowers the incognito spell so the two of them are face to face. “Ohhhh! I knew you were sexy but seeing you in the flesh is SO much better! I’d love to just…”

Damian wrenches his arm away from the male. “Hands off! I don’t belong to you!”

The male laughs. “Well, you could if you wanted to, sexy! What’s your name? I can tell you’re not from around here…”

Damian huffs out “Why don’t you tell me your name first? I’m not sure I’m ready to share with the likes of you!”

The male throws back his head and laughs. “Feisty! I like that! My name is Janus. Are you Damian, the one who’s coming was foretold? I have been waiting for him for so long. I heard he’s blonde with green eyes, just like you.”

Damian, surprised by this news, shakes his head. “Yes, I am Damian. How do you know about me?” Janus laughs. “Oh, your visit has been written in the Cluster long before I was conceived. That was well over eight hundred years ago! You’re much more popular than you know!” Janus looks Damian up and down slowly before asking “So, are you looking for a guide for your adventure to meet your sister? Because I’d love to help you! Getting to know Selene’s brother sounds like tons of fun!”

Damian continues to stare at the young male as if he’s lost his mind. How did Janus manage to have information about him? Should he be trusted? Or is this another trick set by Andre?

In the end, Damian decides to begrudgingly accept Janus’s company. “Well, at least the trip will be interesting…” Janus smirks at Damian. “Then come with me. It will be dark soon, and the last thing the two of us want to do is encounter any Alerks who maybe out hunting for food. Nasty creatures. It’s best that we seek shelter before dark.” Once again Damian hesitates. Does he really think it’s a good idea to spend the night with this stranger?

It starts to rain harder. Janus leads Damian down a small side path which leads to a small home. “Please, come in!” Janus says, his smile wide. “It may not be much, but it’s my home.”

Damian looks around the room he is standing in while Janus leaves to get towels for them from the bathroom. The room is brightly decorated with comfortable looking chairs and a couch at one end of the room. A roaring fire is burning in the fireplace, the heat it radiates reaching Damian, whose bones are creaking with weariness. Book shelves line one wall, each bulging with different genres of reading material. Photos sit on top of the bookshelves.

Janus hands Damian a towel. “Don’t worry, Damian—the house has multiple bedrooms. I of course would LOVE to share with you, but I’m sure you will be happy in the main guest room.” Janus then walks into the brightly lit kitchen, returning with a few blood bags. When he meets Damian’s raised eyebrows, Janus supplies “I always have a supply of blood around, in case my older brothers stop by. They are both vampires. I myself was never turned, much to my chagrin. I would LOVE to be a vamp! But instead, I’m destined to be just a simple Balock.” Damian continues to dry off with his towel as he asks “Balock? I thought all of you went extinct two millennium ago.”

Janus laughs. “Not all of us! My family goes back in time over a hundred million years. There are a few families left in the outer sections of the Nacene Cluster. But my family was rejected by the clans over six thousand years ago, when my grandfather refused to fight in the Anestro Wars.” Janus motions to Damian sit on the couch. “Eat. You must be very hungry! I’m sure you have walked a long way today.”

Damian takes a sip of blood then asks “What’s with the “no fly” zone around the Cluster? I tried to fly to my sister’s, but found I was grounded.” Janus nods. “A precaution put in place by Selene. It’s to keep enemies out. But truly, I just think that she uses it to keep us all in line. Can’t leave if you can’t fly. She prefers to know where all the creatures here are at all times. She has some very strange rules that we all must follow.”

The fireplace begins to lull Damian into a relaxed state. He feels tired for the first time on this trip. Janus, always observant, notices and says “Why don’t you head off to bed, Damian? Your room is the first one on the right side of the hall.” Nodding his thanks, Damian stands. “Thank you for bringing me to your home, Janus. You’ve been very kind and attentive. I appreciate it.” Janus responds “You are very welcome, sexy. Sweet dreams.”

The following morning the two set out on another leg of their journey. Janus keeps up a steady stream of conversation, asking Damian a million and one questions about his home and his life there.

“So, you have three mates? Wow! They must keep you busy!” Damian laughs at this comment. “I wish I had just one!” Tell me about them, Damian…”

“Well, there’s Adam. He’s a werepire, tall, well-built and handsome. My other mate is a female named Tommy Joe. She’s a werepire as well. She’s had a whole slew of children, some by Adam, some by me…and some by Andre.” Janus hushes Damian. “That name is not welcomed here, Damian! He’s nothing but evil! But tell me about the last one…”

Damian brushes a branch out of his way. “The last’s name is Kensi. I’ve known him longer than the other two. He is the Black Knight from the Silver realm.”

Janus stops walking. “THE BLACK KNIGHT? But he’s nothing but legend! Even we have heard about him here in the Cluster! Rumor is that he will defeat Narissa and Andre and bring peace to his people!” Damian nods. “That’s what we are trying to do, bring peace to the cosmos. Those two have done more than enough damage. It’s time that order and peace is restored.” A green fairy startles Damian by landing on his shoulder. She whispers in his ear “You are brave to come here. Others shy away from this place. Here, I have some of my fairy dust. It will keep you safe.” The fairy says a few words in a language that Damian does not understand seconds before fairy dust lands on his head and shoulders. In a solemn, soft voice Damian says “I thank you for the protection, Kind One. I appreciate your blessing.” The fairy kisses his cheek and then flies away.

“Wow, Damian! Fairies never come out in the daytime! You must be special indeed to attract the attention of one this time of day!” Damian laughs. “Or maybe my sister is that scary, that I need extra mojo just to be near her!” Janus shushes Damian. “Quit, she’ll hear you!”

Damian asks Janus “Please, tell me about my sister. What is she like?”

Janus is quiet for a while, as if lost in thought. “She rules the Cluster with an iron fist. There are always rumors that she has a co-ruler, but we have never heard or seen one. She lives in a huge castle which was carved into the side of Blue Mountain. She is all-powerful. She sends her Alerks into the countryside to keep the peace. Beyond that, I cannot say.” Janus then asks “Is it true that the Toro’s are royalty? Some say they rule the cosmos. Does that make you royalty, too?”

Damian shakes his head. “I really am not a Toro. My last name is Lavelli. But I live with the Toros. Ray and Mikey are from royal bloodlines. They made Tommy Joe and Gee, so they have royal blood as well. But at the same time, Luna made all of us…”

Janus reaches out and places his hand across Damian’s mouth. “Hush, Damian! That name will bring the law down on us! It is banned here in the Cluster…”

Suddenly, growling can be heard in front of them. Janus grabs Damian by his wrist and pulls him into a full run, pushing tree branches out of their way as they go. The growling grows louder. Janus hears running water in front of them, so he pulls Damian in that direction. When the two of them come to a fast-running stream, Janus hisses “I hope you can swim!” as he shoves Damian into the water. “Dunk under the water! Make sure to cover your scent!” The two are pulled downstream by the current as a handful of Alerks bursts into the clearing. Janus laughs. “They hate water! They won’t follow us! Hopefully there’s no…” the two of them notice the upcoming waterfalls at the same moment. They try to swim to the shore, but the current is too strong. Before either of them can take a deep breath, they are propelled over the falls.

The drop seems to go on forever. Damian struggles to breathe as he is brought under the water time and time again. Just as he is beginning to panic, he hits the bottom of the falls where the water begins to slow its frantic pace. Janus calls out “Here! Swim to me!” Damian swims over to Janus, who is pulling himself up and out of the water and onto the shore. As Damian climbs out, Janus says in a shaky voice “Damian! PLEASE do not say that name ever again! The less trouble we are in the better!”

As the sun goes down, Janus finds the two of them shelter in a deep, dark cave. They build a small fire within the cave, Damian going out to search for firewood.

As the two of them lie down to get some rest, Janus asks “So, what’s it like to be a vampire, Damian? My brothers always brush off the question when I ask the same to them.”

Damian places both his hands under his head. “It depends. If you can manage to find a family, such as I was lucky enough to do with the Toros, life can be an ongoing adventure—fun, even. Sure, we laugh and joke around, cry on each other’s shoulders, and some of us even sleep together. But life as a lonely vampire? Tedious. Boring. Sad even. I spent many years on my own, and while I like my own company, after a while I found myself searching out for companionship. Humans only live so long, their lives are fleeting. It’s better to find other vamps to live and spend time with. That’s how I met Kensi.”

“Tell me more about him, Damian. Is he handsome?”

Damian’s voice begins to sound far away, as if he is thinking of his love. “He’s tall and fit, with long black hair framing a model’s face. He is the kindest soul I’ve ever met. He told me not too long ago that he loved me since the moment he met me. It took me a long time to see the real him and to fall in love with him. I’m very lucky to have three such amazing loves.”

Janus sounds sad as he comments “I wish I was that lucky, Damian. I’ve spent my entire life alone. I’ve never had a lover. Hell, I wouldn’t know what to do if someone even paid attention to me!” Damian reaches over and pats Janus’s shoulder. “I’m sure you will find someone, Janus. Maybe, after I see my sister, she will let me take you to the Light realm with me. I’m sure that you will meet someone there! There might even be some Balocks there!” Damian hears Janus sniffle as he says, “I’m not sure if there are any of us anywhere else in the cosmos, but I guess it’s worth a try.”

The next day the two leave the safety of the cave behind and return to the path through the forest. The temperature becomes unbearable. Damian feels the sweat run down his back as he calls out “Can we take a dunk in the river, Janus? I’m sick of being so sweaty and gross…” Janus turns around and shakes his head no. “There are too many Olicks in the river around here. The last thing we need is to encounter one of them…”

In the path in front of them, a tall slim blonde appears. She is dressed in a short sleeved translucent dress of blues, purples and pinks. There are tattoos all over her body, the ink serving to bring out the beauty of her face. Damian and Janus stop in their tracks, suddenly leery of interacting with this young woman.

“Damian Lavelli?” Her voice is as beautiful as she is, lilting within a soprano pitch. Damian responds with “Yes, my lady?”

The woman looks Damian up and down, a smirk on her face. “Quite handsome you are! I’ve heard tales about your many escapades over the years! You live up to your reputation, that’s for sure!” Damian gives the woman a smile in return. “May I ask whom you may be? Are you a vampire? I’m sure you are not human…”

The woman laughs. “Oh, no, Damian. I am not a human. I am a Ellance. We live as long as vampires, but we do not drink blood. My name is Jade.”

Damian takes a few steps closer, even though Janus tries to give Damian a warning. “Hello, Jade. May I ask, do you know my sister Selene?”

Jade nods her head. “Oh yes, I’m well acquainted with her. As a matter of fact, I am her co-ruler and long-time lover. You look so much like her! I’m sure she will be as shocked of the fact as I am when you see her.” Jade places her hands on her hips. “She is aware that you are on your way to see her. She is quite intrigued. But I came to warn you—your sisters in a foul mood. It appears that your mother has been trying to contact her again. If I were you, I would do anything not to bring her up in conversation! The last thing you need is to make an enemy out of your all-powerful sister. Even though I know that it the main reason that you are here to visit her.”

Damian answers “I won’t lie, it’s one of the reasons that I am here to visit. But first and foremost, I’m here to meet my sister. I had no idea that she existed until recently. I am so looking forward to meeting family.”

Jade nods. “I understand. Just be careful. I would hate for your visit to end even before it begins.” Jade looks over at Janus. “I see you have found a most unique traveling companion. It is indeed brave of him to accompany you, especially since he has a bounty on his head.” Damian shoots Janus a shocked look. “I had no idea! Janus, please head back home. I’m sure that I can find the castle from here.”

Janus shakes his head. “No, Damian. My family has been in disgrace since my grandfather refused to fight in the war. The least I can do is show my bravery by taking you all the way to the castle. If your sister decides to imprison me, I will deal with the fallout.” Jade smiles. “What a brave one, Damian! Worthy of the sidekick of royalty…”

“Royalty?” Damian asks, confused. Jade claps her hands. “Yes, Damian. You and your sister are directly related to Luna and Phillipe. They are the first royal couple in the history of the cosmos. You outrank the Toros and any other royal family that has existed in history. You and your children are the next generations. This is why it was foretold that your son Draven will one day rule the cosmos. It is his direct inheritance.” Damian cannot believe his ears. Royalty?

Janus catches his attention and bows low before him. “I’m sorry, I did not realize…” Damian places a hand on Janus’s arm and pulls him upright. “None of that, Janus. I don’t deserve that type of accolade.” Jade shakes her head. “But you do, Damian! You deserve that and more. Now, what say I let you get back to your little trip through the forest? You are only a few days away from the castle. I promise that your next few nights’ rest will be much more comfortable. I must go back to the throne room. Maybe I can manage to get your sister in a better mood before you get there…”

Damian asks, “So she knows we are on the way?” and Jade nods again. “She looks forward to your visit. I think she misses family. I hope your visit goes well, Damian.” Jade blows Damian a kiss and disappears.

“Royalty! Higher than even the Toros! Just think of that, Damian!” The two continue walking. “I feel honored just to walk with you!” Damian laughs. “Trust me, Janus…” Janus gives Damian a confused look “…I’m no different than the vamp that you met at the beginning of this journey.”

The next few nights they find luxurious empty cabins along their journey. Each cabin is filled with amenities, including firewood and blood bags. There also is meals set aside for Janus, as well as comfy beds for them to sleep in. Each cabin has a sweet smell that the two recognize as Jade’s perfume.

Janus becomes increasingly nervous as the days go by. When Damian mentions this, Janus laughs it off as if it were no big deal. Finally, Damian harshly calls out “Stop it! If you are nervous, say so! It’s understandable that you would be. But I do not understand what you could’ve done to get yourself into such a mess…”

Janus is quiet for a while. He then says “I set a group of the Queen’s slaves free. They were in a wagon, set to make their way to the castle. I waited until they stopped for the night, then I attacked. I killed five guards and then set the slaves free. One was my best friend Franz. I haven’t seen him since I set him free. I hope he is alright.”

Damian gives Janus a long, leveled look. “I will do everything that I can when we get to the castle to see to it that you escape punishment. You were only helping your friend. But of course, you can escape and head back to your home before we even get close to the castle. I meant what I said when I told you that I can manage. I wouldn’t think less of you if you did so.” Janus gives Damian a smile. “Thank you. But every member of royalty needs servants. Let me be yours. I can be quite helpful in many ways, Damian. Please let me stay. I promise that…” Damian cuts Janus off with “ALRIGHT! You can stay! Just don’t blame me if my sister decides to cut your head off…”

Five mornings later they come to a large clearing in the forest. The first thing they notice is Blue Mountain off in the distance. They can barely make out the castle carved into the side of the mountain from where they are standing. “So close, yet so far away” Damian mumbles.

Suddenly Jade is standing in front of them again. She has with her an entourage of slaves and soldiers. “Good morning! I’ve come to tell you that your sister has been called away on Cluster business. I spoke to her about your visit. She is thrilled that you are here, and she said to make you comfortable in the castle until her return.

Come, if we hurry, we should just make it in time for sunset.” Damian, surprised, asks “You will accompany us, Jade?” Jade throws back her head and laughs. “How else will you make it through the Alerks? With me by your side, they will let us pass without a problem. Come, we have a bit of a way to travel in front of us.”

The group stops by the river for lunch. When Damian tells Jade that he has decided to make Janus a servant, she nods in agreement. “Quite frankly, I’m surprised that you came alone. Selene and I rarely go anywhere without a large group accompanying us. It’s the downside of being a ruler.” Damian nods. “I was the King of the Dark realm for thousands of years. I understand what you mean. It got to the point that I could barely move without someone asking, “What do you need, highness?” It drove me insane sometimes. There were days I would just head to a different realm just for some privacy.” Jade smiles. “It bothers me, but Selene seems to thrive on it. She is rarely alone. It’s hard to find private time with her sometimes.”

They regroup and continue their journey. When they reach the clearing at the foot of the Blue Mountain, they see an encampment of Alerks blocking their way to the base of the mountain. Jade leads the way, waving her hand in the air as she walks past the Alerks. They recognize her and bow low before her. When Damian and Janus pass them, many growl under their breaths. It’s easy to see that, without Jade’s intercession, they would be torn apart by now.

Jade smiles when she looks back at Damian. Janus has practically climbed him in fear as he stares at the Alerks. Damian puts his arm around him and pulls him close. “It’s alright, Janus. You’re safe with us. No harm will come to you as long as Jade and I are here.” Damian smiles down at Janus when he realizes that the young male is shaking. “Besides, we are almost there. It won’t be much longer now.”

When they finally pass through the encampments, Jade directs them to a small cave-like structure at the base of the mountain. Once they are all inside, she presses a hidden lever, and a moss-covered door opens to reveal a very large elevator. They enter and ride the elevator to the castle.

The door opens to a large chamber. The walls are painted deep purple with silver trim. Huge chandeliers hang from the ceiling. Jade once again smiles at Damian and says, “Follow me, please.”

The hallways are brightly lit. Damian and Janus are led down a series of hallways, until they come to a large blue door. Jade enters and says “Come in. This is your suite.”

Different shades of green color the walls. A large marble fireplace stands against one wall. Overstuffed furniture fills every corner of the room, giving a comfortable vibe. Jade says “I hope the two of you will be comfortable in here. There is a bathroom down the hall. I’m sure the two of you would like to freshen up before you meet Selene. There are two bedrooms and a kitchenette as well. There is plenty of food and blood bags for the two of you. If there is anything you require, all you need to do is ask.” Jade turns to go, saying over her shoulder “I’ll be back later. I’m going to go see if Selene is back yet.”

She returns within a few hours. With a wide grin on her face, she says “Selene has returned. She will see you now. Come, I’ll take you to her.” Damian bows to Jade. “I thank you for all the help you have given us along the way, Jade.” Jade bows her head to him. “You are most welcome, Damian.”

The three of them slowly make their way through the crowded hallways towards the throne room. Once there, Damian and Janus are awed by the stunning room. The walls are covered in gold with black accents. The throne at the end of the room is also made of solid gold.

As they approach, a tall, stunning blonde woman stands up from the throne. She is flanked by a brunette and a red head. Her green eyes immediately fixate on Damian with a questioning gaze. Selene’s long, curly hair gleams in the lights of the room. A thin golden tiara rests on her head, her symbol of power. There is something about her that reminds Damian of Mikey. Selene is wearing a long-sleeved flowing dress of purple which is cinched at her waist with a long train which is fanned out behind her. She steeples her fingers in front of her as she gives a hesitant but welcoming smile to all three of them.

The three of them stop a few feet in front of the throne. Janus kneels and then bows low before Selene. In a bright, happy but deep voice she calls out “Welcome, brother, to my home.”

Chapter Text

And the summer became the fall
I was not ready for winter
It makes no difference at all
Cause I wear boots all summer long
My eye makeup is dark and careless
Some circles around my eyes
Sometimes the real colour of my skin
Is my eyes without any shadow
And when I call
Will you walk gently through my shadow
The ones who sing at night
The ones who sing at night
The ones you dream of
The ones that walk away
Capes around them tight
Cryin’ for the night
Cry for the nightbird…tonight
And so the winter is really here now
And the blankets that I love
I am surrounded sometimes by too much love

Nightbird—Stevie Nicks

Mikey wanders aimlessly through the quiet mansion, squinting at the low lighting in the hallway. She drags her fingers along the walls, pausing every so often to stare at a picture or painting.

She awoke next to Ray an hour ago. He was sleeping deeply, a smile on his face. “How young he looks when he’s asleep” Mikey thinks, a smile lighting up her own face. After a few minutes Mikey rolled over and tried to go back to sleep but ended up getting out of bed instead. Checking on her sleeping son, she felt restless, so she headed to the hallways for a walk.

Her recent death experience has left her shaken. From the moment that she came back to life, she had the feeling that something was…missing. Wrong. That she lost something along the way in her journey in the dark. The feeling left her unsettled and scared.

When everyone left her and Ray alone after her resurrection, Ray immediately burst into tears. Holding Mikey to his chest, he thanked every God and Goddess that he has ever heard of, happy to have his beloved with him once again. Mikey rubbed her hands over his back and hushed him, declaring her love for him repeatedly until he calmed down. Then the two of them made love until dawn, Ray whispering his love for his darling wife until his voice was hoarse. But even after hours of lovemaking and verbal affirmations, Mikey still felt a bit detached and lost.

Entering the library, Mikey’s mind turns to Damian as she runs her fingers over the book spines as she paces. The longer she lives, the more she realizes how much Damian truly means to her. She felt his relief and happiness when he held her after she returned to the land of the living. She and Damian always had an unspoken connection…they manage to say so much with only a look or a touch. Mikey knows how much Damian loves her, she has never doubted it, even when the two of them have had their problems in the past. Mikey has never addressed the topic of whom she loves more, Damian or Ray. That wouldn’t be unfair to either of them. She knows that the men in her life know how much each other loves Mikey, and they have never spoken about the subject. There’s no need to—they both own an equal part of Mikey’s heart.

The time spent before Damian left to visit his sister was spent with Damian asking Mikey repeatedly what was wrong with her. For once Mikey refused to share her thoughts with him, blaming it on the weirdness of being alive again. Damian did not believe her but decided to give her the space she obviously needed to feel whole again. So, the time they had together they held each other and talked of anything else to fill the time.

Mikey knows that dying has become second nature to at least half of the members of the household and is taken casually. Those at the front fighting had died multiple times, to the point that death became second nature to them, something to be tolerated until someone resurrected them. The entire family takes death in stride, as if it has become mundane and predictable. Which is why everyone’s response to death is muted, as if it’s just part of another day. Mikey had not experienced death on such a vast scale as those around her, not since her youth when she fought for the King. The entire experience has thrown her for a loop. “The rest of the family can take dying in stride” Mikey thinks “But I’ll never get used to it!”

“Can’t sleep? Neither can we” was softly stated behind her. Turning, her eyes land first on Trick then Tommy, both cradling children in their arms. “These little rascals won’t let us sleep.”

Mikey gives the two a lopsided smile, moving forward to each of them, giving a hug and a kiss as a welcome. “Yeah, I can’t sleep either. I didn’t want to wake Ray, so I thought I’d…” Mikey shrugs, suddenly at a loss for words.

Trick and Tommy sit down on the couch, motioning for Mikey to take the recliner across from them. “What’s wrong, Momma? Are you okay? You seem lost…” Tommy comments, looking concerned. Trick joins in with “You appear to be rudderless, Momma, since the first moment I saw you after you rejoined us. Is it a problem with Papa?”

Mikey throws back her head and laughs. “No, darling. Everything between Ray and I is fine. He’s happy to have me back by his side. I…just can’t seem to put my finger on how I feel, except to say that it feels as if I left something important behind. I thought it was missing Joshua growing up those months without me, but that’s not it. I thought it was just the distance between Ray and Damian and I, but that’s not it either. I’m totally lost trying to find an answer.”

Tommy thinks for a few moments then says “Why don’t you speak to Luna? She’s here in the house, I’m sure she would talk to you if you wish, Momma.” Mikey nods and Tommy stands, saying “I’ll go get her.” When she reaches the door, she turns around. “Momma? I want you to know that we all mourned your passing, every one of us. We missed you so, so very much.” Tears fill Tommy’s eyes. “We are all glad that you are with us again.” Mikey smiles at Tommy and thanks her, watching her then turn and walk away.

She returns a few minutes later with Luna, who walks up to Mikey and takes her in her arms. “Darling Mikey! I’m so glad that you are with us again. My heart has been heavy without you.” Mikey thanks Luna, returning her hug. They hang onto each out for another moment or two before Luna pulls back, looking deep into Mikey’s eyes. “You’re grieving, daughter.”

Mikey and Luna sit next to each other on the love seat, Mikey shooting Luna a confused look. “I…what do you mean, Momma?”

Luna gives Mikey a serious look in return. “My child, everyone who dies, even temporarily, sheds a layer of themselves in the process. Some of us have many, many layers, some only a few. Damian, Adam and Kensi have many layers to them, so when they die, it’s like a butterfly shedding a cocoon. It’s quick, virtually painless. Maybe some regrets, some temporary loss of emotion or a feeling of needing more love than usual, but overall, they are fine. You, my love, lost many, many layers when you were young. You were a fighting youth, then a fighting Queen. Death was so temporary to you, you hardly noticed it. The difference? You are now getting close to your core; you feel things differently. You have more regrets; you are closer to those you love. You feel a hole in your soul that will take time to close. Not only that, but you also went to another level of the afterlife, one that is harder to come back from. That’s the distance you feel.”

Mikey takes a moment to absorb what Luna told her. “So, this is normal?” Luna nods. “The feeling will fade eventually, to be replaced with a feeling of normality. But each time you die in the future, it will take you longer and longer to come back, until you cannot come back at all. That will be your final death.”

Tommy asks “But I thought vampires were eternal. Are you saying that we all will die eventually, Luna?” Luna nods. “Every creature in the cosmos and beyond will die eventually. Some by accident, others by fate. But most live a long, long time dearie. No need worrying about that now. You will be around for a long time. You have babies to raise.” Luna turns back to Mikey. “The family was lost without you, Mikey. I do not think you understand just how much you are loved or needed by the family. Everyone mourned you, especially Ray and Damian. You have brought sunshine back to the family, dearie.” Mikey reaches out and takes Luna’s hand, squeezing tightly. “I missed everyone. It was dark and lonely where I was. I never thought I would be able to return to those I love.”

Trick clears her throat, an embarrassed look on her face. “I hate to change the topic, considering how much Momma means to us, but Luna…” Luna nods to encourage Trick to go on “…do you have any more news about the war? Is the end coming soon?”

Luna sighs. “My children, I wish I could give you better news. I spoke to Phillippe earlier today. He told me to prepare for the end of the war. He predicts that Titan will attack the Narcene Cluster where my daughter and Damian are now, and that it will start the beginning of the end for the family. No one has a clear view of the end, though. There is too much open that is left to chance…”

Damian looks up at Selene standing on the dais and smiles. He instantly sees physical similarities between them. Selene could be his twin.

The two hold eye contact for a few beats more. Janus, not sure if he should stand or not, stays on his knees.

“Damian! I have heard so much about you from those that we have interacted with over the years. I was hoping that someday the two of us would meet.” Selene glances from Janus to Jade back to Damian. “Even though I have the idea that it will be a trying visit overall.”

Janus makes a whining sound. Selene’s eyes turn on him, staring him down as she barks out “So you’ve brought the troublemaker with you, brother. I hope he is finally ready to take his place in the dungeon where he belongs.”

First glancing at Jade, Damian then returns his vision back to his sister. He bows low before her as he responds “Janus is now my servant, Selene. He helped me find safe passage here, until the two of us were fortunate to meet Jade. She helped us the rest of the way.” Selene shoots a surprised look at her lover. Until this moment, Damian had no idea the Jade was helping them behind her lover’s back.

Jade softly offers “Selene, I simply helped your brother to ensure that he arrived safely. I’m sure you would’ve been upset if he was attacked by a horde of Alerks.” Selene gives out an unsophisticated grunt in answer, which Damian took to mean “We’ll discuss this later. In private.”

Damian decides it’s time to bite the bullet. He takes a few steps towards his sister as he asks “I humbly ask for his pardon, Selene. The Balock has come to mean a great deal to me. Please spare him.”

Selene looks from Jade to Damian, deep in thought. After a few minutes, Selene nods. “Think of it as a welcome present, Damian. But don’t think that I plan to give in on the other subjects that I know you will present while you are here. I’m not a pushover.” Damian asks, “Permission to say hello properly, sister?” Selene looks confused for a moment, so Damian throws precautions to the wind and walks up the dais to his sister. When the two of them are nose to nose, Damian wraps his arms around Selene. She stands still for a moment, as if not sure exactly what is going on. But with a sigh, she gently wraps her arms around Damian, returning his hug. Damian takes things a step further by placing a gentle kiss on Selene’s cheek, which brings a smile to her lips.

Pulling back, Selene gives Damian a pleased smile, saying “Come, brother. We have much to discuss. I want to hear all about your life in the Light realm, as well as your years ruling the Dark realm. Let’s retire to our suite. Jade?” Jade calls out “Coming, Selene” as she places a hand on Janus’s arm to help him stand. The four of them leave the throne room and head down the main hallway until they reach two large, golden doors. A guard steps forward and opens the door for them.

Damian is overwhelmed with the room decorations. From the silver and gold chandeliers to the marble fireplace to the dark purple and black walls, everything is opulent and elegant.

Selene takes a seat on the couch, Jade sitting close to her side. Damian sits in a large recliner across from them, Janus kneeling at his feet. When Damian tries to get him to sit in a chair, Janus refuses. “Servants sit on the floor, master.”

A maid dressed in deep purple serves all of them wine, even Janus. The evening passes swiftly, with Damian telling tales of his life from his birth through his turning and up to the current war. This is where Selene cuts him off with “You’ve had quite a life, Damian! THREE mates! And so many children! I’m an aunt! That’s amazing!” Damian takes a sip of wine and nods. “It hasn’t been boring, that’s for sure! Especially living with the Toros…”

Selene wraps her arm around Jade, pulling her closer. “Ah, yes! I’ve never met Ray, but he has a reputation for being kind and honest in all his dealings with the cosmos. He seems to really care for everyone. And of course, there’s Mikey.” Selene says this last line with a slightly bitter tone. “I have met her a few times. When she was queen of the dark realm, her reputation for evil was unmatched. She was cold and calculating.” Damian nods. “Both of us are evil Selene, but considering what the entire family has been going through since the war began, we’ve had, in some ways, to put our evil side away. We had to. It was the only way we managed to feel ANYTHING at all! Oh sure, we’re still evil and will be till we die. But life and family have changed some things.”

“Mikey, kindhearted? I’m sorry, but that’s a stretch if there ever was one! I guess I would have to see it to believe it.”

Damian smiles down at Janus. The young male has fallen asleep, his body leaning over until it is held up by the side of Damian’s leg. Damian shakes him awake. “Janus!” Janus raises sleepy eyes, trying to focus on his master. “I want you to go to our suite and go to bed. Now.” Janus opens his mouth to protest but Damian squeezes his arm. “I said now, I mean now. I will see you tomorrow.” Janus clumsily stands and bows low to all three before stumbling his way out of the room.

Selene shakes her head in amusement. “Quite the servant you acquired, Damian! It says a lot about you, the way you took pity on him and helped him.” Damian smiles. “I have a soft spot for him. He reminds me of me before I was corrupted by the cosmos.” Damian takes a refill of wine before he carefully says “Earlier you said that you know why I am here. Would it be better if I left? The last thing that I want is for these issues to come between us, but I have so much riding on your answers. My family. My future, if I have one. The last thing I want to do is make an enemy of my sister.”

Selene gives Jade a long, searching look. Jade quietly says “I know the last thing you want is for Damian to leave, to lose him forever when you’ve just found him. Love, at least hear him out. It’s the least you can do. Just listen to him.”

Selene sighs loudly then places a soft kiss on Jade’s cheek. “My sweet lady speaks truth. But I’m not ready to hear anything regarding our mother this evening, not yet. So, tell me about the war, and what you now need of me.”

It takes Damian another two hours to describe the years of war that the family has suffered through. Damian watches Selene flinch a few times when he talks about the escapades that Andre has carried out, especially the constant rapes that Damian and Draven have survived. Damian leaves no detail unspoken, wanting his sister to get the big picture. He wants her to see Andre as evil, although he is Selene’s father.

“We, the family, ask for your help in defeating Andre and Titan. I carry a power that our mo…” Damian swallows quickly and backtracks. “That was given to me. My love Kensi is destined to take on Titan, but I’m afraid that just the two of us will not be enough to win this war. I realize what I am asking for, since Andre is your father. But we need your help Selene. Your reputation as an all-powerful being proceeds you, sister. The Toros, especially myself and Kensi, beg you to help us in our hour of need.”

When Selene is silent for a few minutes, Damian continues with “I do realize that this information is a lot to take in all at once. I’m sure that you will have to take some time to think about everything. I’m sorry to arrive and dump this in your lap like this. I want you to know, first and foremost, that meeting you is the main reason that I came to the Cluster. I always knew that there was a missing part of me, but I had no idea that that part was you.” Damian sees tears enter Selene’s eyes at this statement. Jade, ever sensitive to the needs of her love, whispers a few words in Selene's ear as she rubs her hand up and down Selene’s arm. Damian says “I’m mostly sorry to make you cry, honey. Should I retire for the night?” Taking a few seconds to think, Selene finally nods her head. “You’ve given me a lot to digest, brother. I need some time to think. I’m so very glad you are here. I, like you, knew something was missing. I don’t want you to leave. Please, stay. I want to get to know you better. Tomorrow, I’ll give you a tour of the castle and the surrounding towns. And I promise you that I will think about what you said here tonight. But I think it’s best that we call it a night.”

All three stand. Damian hugs and kisses first Selene and then Jade, thanking them both for everything. Selene reaches over to the side table by the couch and hands a large tablet to Damian. “It’s magick, hon. Jade and I use these to communicate with each other when we are forced to be apart. Just turn it on and think of your love, and you will be able to speak to that person. One day you are going to have to call your mates so that Jade and I can meet them. Enjoy.” Damian thanks Selene and heads out of the room, a smile on his face.

Once in his room, he lies down on his bed and turns the tablet on. Damian thinks of Kensi and the screen brightens before Kensi’s beautiful face fills the screen.

“Damian! Oh my…you’ll never guess what happened! This tablet appeared on my lap and turned on, and there you were!” The picture swings wildly and Tommy’s face fills the screen. “Hiya, baby! We miss you so fucking much! I’m glad you are here…” Damian replies “I’m so glad to see the two of you! Where’s Adam?”

“Downstairs in a closed-door strategy meeting with papa. Things have…” Tommy’s eyes fill with tears. “Draven is missing again. Thomas is beside himself in worry. When he disappeared, new creatures suddenly joined the jackals on the battlefield. They are nearly impossible to kill, since they are part robot.”

Damian watches as Kensi wraps his arm around Tommy and pulls her closer. She places her head on Kensi’s shoulder. “Andre’s anger has turned to rage with you gone. We are scared at what he will do next.”

The three talk for a while. Damian tells them tales of his adventure to the castle and his conversation with Selene. “Let’s just say she was more receptive that I believed she would be, which is a surprise. I hope she concludes soon on whether she will help us or not. We haven’t even gotten to the topic of Luna yet…”

Two hours later, the three of them begrudgingly say goodbye to each other. “I’m going to miss you so much; you have no idea. I hope to be home soon. Please give my love to Adam and tell him that I’m sorry I missed speaking to him. Please take care of each other for me.” Tommy lifts her head and softly says “We all three love and miss you, babes. Please come home soon.” Kensi gives Damian a look full of love and sadness. “I’ll miss you too, love. Please be careful. We will be waiting for you.” Damian tells them he loves them and then says goodnight, turning off the screen.

The next morning Selene sends a servant to Damian’s room to fetch him and Janus for breakfast. As he approaches the large table laden with food and a pitcher of blood, the brunette and red head from the night before stand in unison from their places flanking Selene. “They must be some kind of security detail” Damian thinks to himself. Selene introduces them as Isabella and Jacqueline, then tells them to have a seat. “He’s my brother, after all” she says with a smile. Janus bows and sits next to Damian at the table. After a few pleasantries, Selene asks “Did you have an enjoyable conversation last night, Damian?”

Damian nods. “The best part was I was able to see Kensi and Tommy. I miss being able to see all three of them so much! But the worst part of the conversation focused on the new atrocities that Andre and Titan have carried out. My son Draven is once again missing. Tommy is hysterical, she wants her baby back home where he belongs. Andre has a sick obsession with him. I wish I could go take his place…”

A page approaches Selene and bows. “Emergency Council meeting has just been called, your Highness. They are meeting in the blue room. Your attendance is expected.” With that, he bows once again and leaves the room.

“Damn! And I wanted to show you around today!” Selene turns her attention on Jade. “Jade, sweetheart?” Jade lifts her head and nods, waiting to hear what her love will say. “Could you please go with Damian in my place? I must go attend this fucking meeting…” Jade agrees. Selene kisses Jade first then Damian on the cheek. “I wish I was going with the two of you! I’m sick of meetings! Damian, I hope my nephew will be released soon.” With that said, Selene leaves the room, another page and her security detail leading the way.

Jade gives Damian a sad look. “I’m sorry that you are stuck with me today, Damian. I will do everything in my power to make sure you have an enjoyable time.” Damian shakes his head. “Nothing to be sorry about, sweetheart. I’d love to spend the day with you.”

Damian, Janus and Jade tour the castle. Damian asks many questions, which seems to please Jade. When they are finished, they head to a neighboring town for lunch.

As they sit down to eat, Jade says “I’m sorry to hear about your son, Damian. I hope that he comes home soon. I hope that Andre doesn’t hurt him.” Damian gives Jade a sad look. “I’m sure he will, Jade. He has a sick obsession regarding my boy and me. I wish he were dead.” Jade gives Damian a look of surprise. “I’m sorry, sweetheart. But we have all suffered so much at his hand. I wish there was a chance for everything to end. I don’t want my family to suffer any longer.”

Jade is silent for a moment before she says “My sister was taken by one of Andre’s partners. His name was Alex. She was held captive for a year. This was before I met Selene. When we first got together, she showed her love for me by tracking down and killing Alex. But by then it was too late. Alex had gotten my sister pregnant, and she and the baby died in childbirth.” Damian reaches out a hand and takes one of Jade’s in his, squeezing tightly. “I’m so sorry for your loss, sweetie. So far, everyone in the family that has died in battle or by Andre’s hand has been resurrected, except for my friend Bob. He died early in the war. I wish there was a way to bring him back to life.”

The three return to the castle in time to see Selene emerge from her meeting. Janus sinks to his knees the second he sees her. The strained look on Selene’s face causes Jade instant concern, but the two of them immediately try to hide their expressions.

“Hello, sister! I’m sorry that you couldn’t join us today. Jade was a wonderful guide. We had a delightful time…” Selene steps forward and takes Damian’s arm. “I’m glad, brother. Come, we must speak…”

On the way to Selene and Jade’s suite, Janus asks if he could be excused. “I have a headache, master. May I lay down? I apologize…” Damian instantly gives his approval. “I hope you feel better soon, Janus.” Janus thanks Damian and heads to their rooms.

When the three arrive at the suite, Selene motions her maid for wine. “We must talk. I have found out something that needs to be shared with you, Damian.” Once they have their wine, Selene dismisses her maid. “Only the three of us need know of this.”

Damian’s forehead wrinkles in concern. “What is wrong, Selene?”

“Draven isn’t the only one kidnapped by Andre yesterday. He also has mother.” Jade gives a gasp, and Damian gives a long exhale. “Now, you know how I feel about her, but that is not my concern at this moment. Being logical, the last thing we can do is allow Andre and Titan to tap into her endless supply of energy. If they can do so, their capacity for spell work will be endless. They will wipe out the cosmos with little effort.”

Damian takes a second to focus on his sister’s words. So, she has no concern for their mother, only her powers? How can this be so? No concern at all?

Selene looks at Damian as if she is reading his mind. “I’m not as heartless as you think I am, Damian. I don’t want her to die. But if we do not rescue her, we may all die. I want so much to rescue Draven as well. I want to meet my nephew. So, I’m returning with you to the Light realm, as soon as possible.”

Damian and Jade sat in stunned silence for a moment. Selene coming back with him to the Light realm? Neither thought that would ever be possible. Jade blurts out “Not without me, you’re not! I’m coming, too!”

Selene turns towards Jade and takes her in her arms. She whispers, “My love, you must stay here. Someone needs to be in charge while I am gone. I will miss you horribly, but I must do this alone. I will leave Isabella and Jacqueline for your protection. I will be fine.” Selene looks at Damian, a broad smile on her face. “Besides, I have my strong brother to take care of me!”

Tears fill Jade’s eyes. “If you leave, I will never see you again! I’ve seen it! I will be left all alone to die…” Damian says “I will see to it that she returns to you, Jade. I promise the two of you will be fine.” Jade suddenly stands and storms out of the room, a sob being heard as she leaves.

Selene turns to Damian and softly says “You need to know the real reason that she is upset with me, Damian. You see, many years ago, long before I met Jade, I had a longstanding relationship with Titan.” Damian gasps in surprise. “She came to me in human form; I had no idea that she really was a robot until it was way too far into our union. Our relationship ended badly. You see, I had already met Jade and had fallen in love with her. Titan found out and attacked the Cluster. The war dragged out for almost fifty years before I managed to defeat her and her armies of robots. But before the war was over, Jade…well, it’s complicated. She wanted a baby so badly. She wanted us to raise a baby together, so she found a male to get her pregnant. Jade was about five months along when Titan found out about the baby and attacked the castle. I wasn’t home, I was fighting on the battlefront. Titan found Jade and beat the baby out of her, breaking just about every bone in her body. I came home to find her bleeding here in this very room. It took ten of our best healers to save her, but they couldn’t heal the baby. I held our bloody child in my arms as Jade screamed into the night as they reattached her bones.”

Silence fills the room for a moment. Damian, tears in his eyes, chokes out as he grabs Selene’s arm “Sweetheart, I’m SO sorry for your pain and loss! I’m sorry that I will never get to know my nephew or niece.” Selene nods her head. “Thank you, Damian. That means a lot.” Selene takes a sip of her wine and continues with “Last night Jade woke me. You see, she’s clairvoyant. She begged me to stay here, she begged me not to engage Titan in battle. She told me that she fears being here all alone. She knows that, if I leave, she is a sitting duck. Jade told me that Titan will know she is alone and attack. The goal will be to weaken me by killing my love. I must admit, she may be right. But what shall I do? Someone will have to stay here to rule in our places, if I take her with me. But as I see it, she may become a bigger target if she stays by my side. When Titan was defeated, she vowed vengeance, vowed to finish the job she started by attempting to kill Jade.” Damian asks, “Are you sure that there isn’t anyone trained to take over the Cluster in the event of your absence?” Selene nods. “There is Layla. But she isn’t a wartime leader. I fear what will happen if Titan attacks.”

Damian stops to think for a moment. “I have a question. Do you have another one of those tablets handy?” Selene nods, handing it to Damian with a look of curiosity on her face. “Thank you, Selene. Please, give me a moment…”

The screen brightens and Lela and Sonny appear, both looking surprised. “Hello, father! What a shock to hear from you!” Lela waves her hand, a huge smile on her face. “Hello, father! We miss you!”

Damian takes the time to talk to the kids, as well as introducing them to Selene. Then he asks “I have a favor to ask of the two of you. Do you remember Bobby, who passed away at Andre’s hands?” Sonny nods. “I know that it has been a long time since his death, but do you think that you can resurrect him? I have a specific need that only he can handle…” The two kids look at each other for a minute or two, deep in thought. Lela then asks “Do you have something that belonged to him, something personal? That would help me…” Damian sends the kids to his room. They find an amulet that Bobby gave Damian in the top drawer of his dresser. Returning to their rooms, Lela says “Just give us a bit, father. We will try our best.” Damian thanks them and then turns off the tablet.

Two hours later, the tablet turns back on. Bobby’s voice can be heard in the background yelling “…the FUCK is going on?” Damian laughs. “Sonny, can you send him to me? I will send you the coordinates.” Sonny says over the swearing “Just a moment, father.” Damian thanks the two of them and turns off the tablet, turning to Selene with a look of satisfaction on his face. “The answer to your problem will be here in a second…”

There is a bright flash followed by more cussing. Damian cannot help but laugh as he stands and makes his way to Bobby’s side. He wraps his arms around his friend and says “Welcome back to the undead, Bobbert! We’ve all missed you!”

Bobby, still looking confused, returns Damian’s hug. “It would be fucking NICE to know where I am, Dam! I’m fucking CONFUSED!” Damian pulls Bobby over to Selene. “Bob, I want you to meet my sister Selene. She is the queen here in the Narcene Cluster.” Selene nods at Bobby. “It’s a pleasure, Bob. But you are not the only one confused as to what is going on here!” The three of them sit down after Selene brings Bobby a pitcher of blood, which he drinks greedily. “Being dead sure made me thirsty!” The other two laugh at this statement.

After quickly catching Bobby up on what he missed, Damian explains “Selene has a conundrum. She needs to come to the Light realm with me to help rescue Luna and defeat Andre, but if she leaves her lover in charge, Titan will surely attack and kill her. So…” Bobby shakes the hair out of his eyes, an expectant look focused on Damian. “…would you rule the Cluster in their place?”

Selene gives Damian a shocked look. “But Damian! To throw this on Bobby, who has just returned from the dead? That’s a lot to ask…”

Damian gives Bobby a fond look. “Selene, I’ve known Bobby for a long time now. His reputation proceeds him. I have never known anyone who is better on the battlefield than him. He led large armies, presided over councils and led a vampire clan for centuries. Honestly, there is no one better I can think of to take your place while you are away. That is, if he is willing to serve…”

Bobby looks from Damian to Selene. “Well, how soon will it be till you leave? I’m going to need a crash course on this place if I’m to lead.” Selene supplies “I will give you an overview, but Layla will be here to fill you in on any information that you need. And of course, you will be able to reach out to us through the tablets if you have questions. I can’t believe that we are even considering this as an option! This is way too much to ask of you, Bob…”

Bob takes another large gulp of blood then answers “As long as I can bring my mate here, I’m willing to help you. Anything to get even with that fucker that killed me!” Damian smiles. “Of course, Robbie can join you here, Bob. We’ve all missed her since she decided to leave us to live with your children. We’ll have her sent here right away.” Bob nods. “I’m gonna need some clothes, too. Scared that young thing when I appeared naked in front of her!” Damian, picturing Lela’s shocked face, bursts out laughing.

Selene stands, folding her hands together in front of her. “Then I thank you with all my heart, Bob, for standing in for me while I’m gone. If the two of you excuse me for a moment, I’m going to go tell my love that she can come with us. I shall return shortly.” Selene nods and leaves the room.

Selene finds Jade curled up crying on their bed. She gently sits down on the side of the bed, her hand reaching out to brush the hair out of Jade’s eyes. “Love, I have good news! You can come with me to the Light realm. Damian has found us a replacement for the throne.” Jade raises shocked eyes, a hiccup escaping her. “You mmmean it? I can come with you?” Selene leans down and takes Jade’s lips in a passionate kiss. “Yes, my love. We will meet Damian’s family, just as I know you are longing to do. I cannot wait to meet them myself.” Selene kisses Jade again then says “I must return and speak of plans, love. Get some sleep. I’m sure that we are in for some long days ahead of us.” With a final kiss, Selene returns to the others.

They speak for hours, making plans. Selene sighs. “I must admit, I cannot wait to face Titan again. I want her to suffer, I want revenge for my Jade. I want her destroyed at my hand, Damian.” Damian nods in understanding. “And I want to be the one to destroy Andre for all he has done to the family. We will prevail, I know it, Selene.”

Bobby slaps his hands on his thighs. “Well, if I’m gonna learn everything needed to run this Cluster, I better get some rest. I can’t wait to see Robbie, but my eyes won’t stay open a moment longer!” Selene and Bobby stand at the same time. Selene takes this as an opportunity to hug Bobby. “I thank you from the bottom of my heart, Bob. I know Jade thanks you as well. I will have someone take you to your suite.” Damian hugs Bobby and says “As soon as you are awake tomorrow, I will send for Robbie. You will have the reunion you have been waiting for. Good night, Bobbert.” Selene calls for her maid and Bob smiles at both before following the maid out of the room.

Selene turns towards Damian. “I’m sure Bobby will make a fine replacement on the throne, Damian. Thank you so much for finding a solution to our problem! Now, I wish you goodnight. I love you, brother.” Damian smiles at Selene. “I love you, Selene. Sweet dreams. Send my good night wishes to Jade, please.” Leaving the room, Selene calls over her shoulder “Of course, love.”

The next morning Bobby arrives at breakfast to find Robbie sitting at the main table with Damian, Jade and Selene. Robbie stares at Bobby as if she’s never seen him before, tears in her wide eyes. Bobby rushes forward and pulls Robbie from her seat, wrapping his large arms around her and kissing her deeply. The kiss seems to go on forever, until Jade says “Ah, true love! It’s wonderful!”

Bobby pulls back just far enough to grab Robbie around the waist and pull her down onto his lap, almost missing a chair in his excitement to hold his love. The two of them smile from ear to ear, happy at finally being reunited with each other.

The rest of the day is spent with Selene tutoring Bobby on details of the Cluster, Robbie still sitting on Bobby’s lap. After dinner, the two excuse themselves to spend some private time alone.

“I’m jealous” Damian pouts. “Makes me miss my loves even more than before. I cannot wait to see them in person.” Jade comments “We cannot wait to meet them, Damian. So, we are leaving on Friday? That’s not a lot of time to accomplish everything…” Damian nods. “It will be okay, Jade. Just have faith…”

Friday morning soon arrives. Layla, Robbie, and Bobby stand in a small group in the throne room. Damian, Janus, Jade and Selene join them. The air is filled with apprehension as well as excitement. Selene states, “You are as prepared as we can make you, Bobby. Please let Layla here be your guide. If you have any problems or questions, reach out to us. We appreciate the two of you being here.” Robbie holds onto Bobby’s hand tightly. “Thank you for trusting my love and I, Selene. We will both do our best in your place. Hopefully this mess can be resolved quickly, so you can come home.” Bobby nods then grunts loudly. “Focus on killing those bastards, Selene. We’ll be here when you get back.” They all hug each other and then Selene closes her eyes and says “Omboya Allestry Salmstory Electra” and the four of them disappear.

They arrive at the library in the mansion. Their arrival interrupts a family meeting. Tommy squeals out “DAM!” and launches herself into his arms, causing the entire room to break out in laughter, Selene and Jade included.

Adam and Kensi stand, making their way over to Damian’s side, waiting for their turn for a hug. When the greetings have all been called out, Damian turns to Selene and Jade. “Family, I want you to meet my sister Selene and her partner Jade. Selene is the queen of the Narcene Cluster, Jade is her co-leader and lover. And the young man standing to the side is my servant Janus.” Tommy rushes forward to stand in front of Selene and Jade. She bows to one, then the other. “I’m pleased to meet the two of you! Welcome to the family!” Selene laughs as Tommy moves forward and wraps her arms around first Selene, then Jade.

Kensi and Adam, after hugging Damian, move to take Tommy’s place in front of Selene. “Welcome, sister-in-laws!” they both say in unison, causing more laughter. After they hug, Damian introduces each family member. Each member of the family go out of their way to make Janus feel at home by including him in their welcome.

When he gets to Mikey, there is a momentary tenseness in the room. Knowing that she must do something to relieve the tension, Mikey stands and walks up to Selene and Jade, her hand extended. “I’m so glad that you both are here with us! Welcome.” Selene stares at Mikey for a moment and then returns her greeting with “I thank you, Mikey. You are gracious as always. I’m sure Jade and I will be quite comfortable here.” Mikey shakes her hand and then turns to Jade, saying “I hope you both will feel welcomed here with us.” Jade gladly shakes Mikey’s hand.

The meeting then continues. Ray fills Damian, Selene and Jade in on details that they spoke about, catching them up to speed. Suddenly an earthquake shakes the house. “That’s Andre. He has been doing this bullshit for the last couple of days. Sonny had to shore up the mansion or it would be reduced to boulders by now.” Ray turns his attention on Damian. “He sent a dove with a demand for you to return to him. When you didn’t immediately call to him, he started the quakes.” Kensi takes Damian’s hand in his, knowing what his love is thinking. “If you leave now, there is no guarantee that his anger will cease. Better stay with us, Dam. You’re disappearing will not bring Draven home.” Damian lowers his head, tears in his eyes. “No, but it might take some of the punishment onto my shoulders, instead of Drave’s. I hate that my boy is hurting, Kenny.” Kensi gives Damian a kiss, even though he knows that he cannot take his love’s pain away.

The meeting ends. Everyone says goodnight. Mikey says to Selene and Jade “Let me take you to your suite. Are you hungry?” Selene shakes her head. “Thank you, but no. Thanks for your kindness, Mikey.” Mikey smiles and leads them from the room.

“Master?” Janus says, shyly. “Where will I reside?” Tommy smiles at Janus. “Come, Janus. We will get you settled. We will make you feel at home.”

“That BASTARD!” Titan screams. “I TOLD you that leaving Damian alive was a HUGE mistake!” Draven’s cry of pain is drowned out by Andre’s moans of ecstasy. Andre finishes deep inside of him then looks at Titan. “I TOLD YOU I have PLANS for him! Just be patient! Who cares that he brought his sister back with him? We will defeat all of them…”

“THAT’S WHAT YOU SAID LAST TIME! MUST I DO EVERYTHING MYSELF?” Titan screams. Andre laughs at her. “You forget, bitch, that we have Luna. The game is far from over. Now shut up and leave me with this sexy young man, I’m not finished with him yet.” Andre turns his attention back to Draven and Titan storms out of the castle.

Chapter Text

Pay the toll to the angels
Drawin’ circles in the clouds
Keep your mind on the distance
When the devil turns around
Hold me in your heart tonight
In the magic of the dark moonlight
Save me from this empty fight
In the game of life
Like a poem said by a lady in red
You hear the last few words of your life
With a haunting dance, now you’re both in a trance
It’s time to cast your spell on the night
Abracadabra, amor-oo-na-na
Abracadabra, morta-oo-ga-ga
Abracadabra, amor-oo-na-na
In her tongue she said, “Death or love tonight”
Lady Gaga—Abracadabra

The bed finally feels like the haven it’s meant to be. The scent of sex in the room proves the recent passion felt by all four vamps. Damian lays on Adam’s chest, their legs intertwined. Tommy is cuddled next to them, her back against Adam’s side, her head firmly entrenched on Kensi’s chest. Kensi tightens his arms around Tommy as she sighs, feeling almost complete for the first time in a long time. The only thing threatening to ruin the moment is thoughts of Draven. They all miss him very much and wish he was back home with them.

There is a soft knock at the door. Adam calls out “Welcome” and the faces of the four on the bed break out in smiles.

Janus stands frozen just inside the door, his eyes wide. Damian realizes that it’s probably the first time that the young man had seen so much naked flesh at one time.

Adam notices that the young man’s hands are shaking as he tries to hold a tray of glasses filled with blood. Smiling a gentle smile, Adam gestures to the table next to the bed. “Please, Janus. Place the glasses on the table. Thank you very much for bringing them to us.” Janus gives Adam a nervous smile as he follows directions, trying hard not to stare at the four bodies entwined on the bed.

Damian gives his best smile to the male. “You better get used to it, sweetie. The four of us have a hard time keeping clothes on when we are together.” Janus blushes but nods. Tommy says in her best mommy voice “It’s okay, sweetie. It just means we love each other.” Janus makes eye contact with Tommy, saying “Thank you, all, for making me feel at home. Is there anything else you need from me this evening?” Adam replies “No, love. You are free for the evening.” Janus nods in response. “Then I will say goodnight.” He turns and heads to the door but hesitates when he gets there. Noticing, Damian calls out “Is there anything on your mind, Janus?”

Janus turns back towards the bed. “I just wanted to say that…” The four notice him take a deep breath, as if looking to gather his nerves “…if there is anything that I can do to help bring your son home, please let me know. I’ll gladly do whatever is necessary to help you.” Damian swallows back his emotions and calls out “That means more than you know, honey. Thank you.” Janus gives each of them a sincere look before calling out his good nights.

Tommy reaches out, entwining her hand with Damian’s. “That is one sweet boy, Dam. It’s easy to see that he loves you. I’m glad he is here with us.” Damian nods in response. “He seems to be bonding with all four of us. I’m glad he feels safe with us, feels at home.”

Damian disappears.

When he looks around, his eyes land on Draven curled up in a corner. His beloved son looks as if he’d been recently destroyed by Andre. Both eyes are blackened, and his nose is obviously broken. Swollen, bloodied lips tremble as he tries to speak to his father and fails. His naked body is covered in cuts and deep bruises, a vivid bite mark showing on his neck near his shoulder. His left arm hangs limply at his side, obviously broken. A rough rope is tied tightly around Draven’s cock and balls, the skin turned a dark purple.

Damian tries to cross the room to be with his son, but there is a wall of glass separating them. He starts slamming his fists against the glass, cursing when it doesn’t break.

From behind him Damian hears “Did you think that it would be that simple, bitch?” Damian turns around to face his son’s abuser. “Did you really think I wouldn’t try, Andre? Did you think I’d just stand here and watch my son suffer alone? Then you don’t know me at all, Andre.”

Andre walks up to Damian, reaching out to run his hand through Damian’s long hair. “Of course, I know how much he means to you. I count on that. Your love for your son is how I control you. All I need to do is to threaten him and you fall in line. It’s nice to know that I have that kind of power over you, bitch.” Damian gives a grunt when Andre yanks on his hair. “So, you brought me here so you can let him go, so I can take his place?”

Andre laughs. “Now, why would I wish to let go of either of your perfect bodies? No, Damian. You both belong to me. I’ll keep you here with me for the rest of eternity. My very own boys to amuse me…” Damian whimpers. “Please, Andre. Let me go to my boy. I want to hold him…” Andre smirks at Damian, a dirty thought crossing his mind. “Sure, Damian…” Damian feels a moment of relief before he hears “…but first, suck my dick. Show me how much you love me, husband…”

Damian glances once again at Draven, locking eyes with his son. Out of the corner of his eye, Damian sees Andre smirk again as Draven tries to tell Damian not to do it with his eyes.

Damian slowly sinks to his knees, reaching out to undo Andre’s pants. Andre continues to play with Damian’s hair, yanking every so often as Damian tries to take a deep breath. The room is suddenly filled with the sounds of moaning and slurping.

Draven closes his eyes, trying to close out the scene in front of him. The last thing he wants is to watch his father suffer the way he’s suffered. His heart goes out to him. When Andre finally comes down Damian’s throat, he pulls back, a moan of completion filling the air. Damian wipes his mouth with the back of his hand, trying to remove all traces of Andre from his skin. To his side, he notices that the wall of glass is missing. With a keen look on his face, Andre says “Go on, bitch. Cuddle your son. Just know that the two of you are far from finished. I’ll take you when I want you. Just know that while you play the proud papa…” Damian pulls himself to his feet, quickly making his way to Draven’s side.

“Father” Draven croaks, his voice broken and barely above a whisper. Damian reaches out and pulls Draven gently into his arms. “I’m here, love. Rest in my arms. I’m sorry that I cannot do anything to heal you. We both know that Andre will do so in his own time…” Draven nods, tears in his eyes. “I…love you…” Damian gently runs his hand down the side of Draven’s face, saying “Close your eyes, honey. I love you, too. Daddy’s here…” Draven closes his eyes with a sigh.

Frustration takes over the three left behind. Tommy barks out “Why can’t the four of us ever have time together? Why must we always be apart? I’m sick of this…” Adam curls around Tommy’s body, his hand reaching out to take Kensi’s. “I know, love. We all feel the same way. But we all knew that it was only a matter of time before Damian disappeared again. The only good thing about all this is he is with our son. Draven doesn’t have to be alone now.” The three of them snuggle up together, trying to make each other feel better.

Later that evening, the three have the unenviable task of telling Selene and Jade that Damian has disappeared. Selene doesn’t seem surprised. Her floor length cinched red dress billows around her as she swings her arms wide. “I felt Andre’s power while Damian was with us. He was trying his best to take him away. I had my best magick practitioners working around the clock to keep him at bay. I never said anything to Damian, I didn’t want to upset him. It was my first clue just how evil my father has become. I’m sorry he has a sick obsession with Damian and Draven. I hope the two of them are alright.” Jade takes Selene’s hand, making eye contact with Tommy. “Let’s hope for an end to this war, sooner than later. But the real question is…” Jade glances at Selene as if hesitant to broach the subject “…what do we do about Luna? How do we rescue her?”

Selene shrugs her shoulders as if the answer is easy. “I’ll simply challenge Andre and take mother back. It’s time that the two of us have a ‘reunion’ of sorts.” Jade gives Adam a terrified look, appealing for help from him. Adam softly replies “But face him alone, Selene? Especially since he has Titan with him! That would be suicide! At least take Kensi with you!” Selene looks at Kensi, a concerned look on her face. “But it isn’t time for you to confront Titan, Kensi! I will try my best to persuade father to let Luna go, to finally see the light. And if he refuses? Then I’m just going to have to use force to let her go. Don’t worry, I’ll be fine.” Selene mumbles a few words and six werepires appear, covered in leather from head to toe. A few carry swords, some maces, some flails. The two closest to Selene hold long bows in their hands. Their leather-like skin gleams in the light of the room, their bared teeth shining. They make a tight phalanx around Selene and Jade, awaiting orders. Selene gives Jade a look full of love and then takes her in her arms, holding her close. “I love you, sweetheart. Stay here with the family. They will take care of you.” Tears fill Jade’s eyes, but she nods, knowing that fighting with her love when she has made up her mind is useless. The two of them kiss deeply then Selene calls out “Father! I want to speak to you!” A few seconds tick by and then Selene and the werepires disappear.

When Selene arrives at Andre’s castle, her eyes take in the sight of her father raping Damian. Draven, lying next to the two, makes eye contact with Selene, a look of hope in his eyes as blood drips steadily on the floor around him from his wounds.

Andre grunts out, his motions never ceasing “What do you want, daughter? Can’t you see I’m busy?” He shoves forward harshly, and Damian gives out a cry of pain. Damian refuses to make eye contact with Selene, a look of shame on his face.

“Hurry up, father. I’ve come to speak to you.” Two of the werepires closest to Selene growl in frustration, wanting nothing more than to tear Andre apart.
Andre grunts out in completion, a satisfied look on his face. “Well, daughter, you now have my attention.” Andre pulls out and stands, leather clothes suddenly covering his bare body. He kicks Damian onto his side and steps around him, moving forward to stand opposite his daughter. “Nice accomplishment you have there, Selene. Harnessing werepires. You take after your old man after all…”

Selene lifts her head, her eyes never leaving Andre’s. “There is nothing that I have in common with you. You just happen to have had the DNA needed to create me. Our resemblance stops there. I am not a monster like you are…”

“…yet you treat your poor mother like shit, daughter. You blame her for everything when I am really to blame. You believed that Luna and Phillippe conspired to keep you from me. Farthest thing from the truth! I am the one that removed myself from the situation. Phillippe loved you with all his heart, and you treated him like shit, when it’s me that you should hate. I never wanted anything to do with you, Selene. I gave you to them to raise, creating the story that they basically took you away. All these years you’ve hated the wrong people, you stupid bitch! No one took you from me, I gave you away. Luna wanted to try to keep the truth from hurting you, instead you hated her in my place. It’s given me quite a lot to laugh about over the years, daughter. And now you come to me, trying to rescue the mother that you vowed to hate for all time! Priceless!” Selene throws a lightning bolt at Andre, who sidesteps it and laughs. “It’s going to take a lot more than cheap magician’s tricks to defeat me, daughter. Ask Damian over there. Here I rule. Your powers are useless against me.”

As Selene pulls back her hand to throw another bolt, Andre smirks. “And what about your childhood, Selene? The dark man that would visit you in the night, the one who touched you in forbidden places?” Selene turns pale, her eyes shifting until they are on the floor in front of her. “How many rapes did you survive, Selene? How many times did you cry in the night, wanting your mommy and daddy to rescue you? You kept the tales of rape to yourself, even as those around you asked what was wrong, concern for your welfare on their faces. Little did you know that the dark man was me…”

There is a flash of light in the room, startling everyone. An unknown man suddenly stands next to Selene. His long flowing blonde hair is disheveled, hanging bedraggled halfway down his back, his glowing green eyes quickly taking in the scene around him as if he’s in a panic. The clothes he wears are full of holes, the material old and tattered. The young man seems both lost and confident at the same time. He calls out in a sing song voice “Did you forget about me, father?”

Andre claps his hands together in delight. “Rayne!” Selene turns shocked eyes towards the stranger, who returns her gaze with a wild-eyed look of his own. “I heard rumors that you finally broke free from the Hell caves! I never thought you would escape someday!” Andre continues to smirk as he calls out “Selene! Meet your twin! I secretly stole him from Luna’s body before she had a chance to go into labor. She never even knew that there were two of you! Your twin grew up out of sight in the Hell caves, where I spent as much time destroying his mind as I did his body. You aren’t the only one who suffered rape by your father, dear Selene.”

Selene waves a hand in the air and Draven is sent back to the mansion. She smirks at Andre. Selene then turns to Rayne, a sad look on her face. “I’m sorry, brother, that I didn’t know you existed. I’m sorry you suffered at the hands of this bastard. But why did you come here? Why now?”

Rayne, his eyes wide, states in broken English “Time to meet my siblings. Brother!” Damian looks up from his place on the floor, startled. Rayne stares into Damian’s eyes as he waves his hand in the air and Damian’s body is healed and covered in leather clothing. Damian slowly stands and makes his way across the room, pushing through the werepires to stand between Rayne and Selene. Damian gives Rayne a smile of thanks.

“What a fine group you all make. My husband and his brother and sister. Too bad Titan isn’t here to witness this reunion. Alas, she is attacking the Narcene Cluster as we speak.” Selene gives a sharp breath, a look of fear covering her face. “Aren’t you glad you didn’t leave that piece of shit you call a partner behind to be destroyed, Selene? At least not yet. Titan plans to slowly destroy her to make you suffer.”

Rayne begins to chant under his breath. The werepires form a tighter circle around the siblings, on full alert. As he chants, Rayne’s skin becomes bright purple, as if under duress. His chants become louder and louder, his voice raising in pitch as he repeats each line while staring at the heavens.

Luna’s body appears at Selene’s feet. Her skin is alabaster; her body obviously drained of blood. Every vein and artery shows through her paper-thin skin, adding to the grotesque pallor. The skin around her eyes is sunken and black. Damian’s stomach turns over just looking at their mother, who looks as if in a deep sleep.

Andre begins to chant. Over his words, Selene turns towards Rayne, locking eyes with him. “Please, brother…come with us. You have a home now.” Rayne continues to stare into Selene’s eyes, as if searching for something. A few moments go by before Rayne nods slowly in agreement.

Selene leans down and picks up Luna, holding her close to her chest as if Luna is weightless. Selene begins to chant “Belladagrad Yandress Omerta Alpha” at the top of her lungs. Rayne and Damian join in. A whirlwind surrounds Andre, slowly inching up his body to cover him completely. Suddenly Selene screams ”Go to hell, father!” then nods her head. The four of them and their werepire guards then disappear, heading for the mansion.

The next few hours feel as if they are standing still. The siblings take turns giving Luna their blood while Sonny, Frankie and Lela chant. Rayne starts to mumble his own chant, one that sounds foreign and out of place in the guest room they are in. Selene walks up to Rayne and slowly wraps her arms around him, as if afraid to scare him. Rayne stands still for a few moments before he slowly returns her hug, clinging to Selene as if she were a lifeline.

Luna’s eyes open.

Her eyes dart around the room as if expecting to see Andre in the shadows. Everyone stops chanting, coming closer to Luna who lies quietly under the comforter. Her voice so soft they can barely hear her, Luna says “Children. Thank you for saving me. I thought it was over this time.” Selene smiles. “You’re too ornery to die, mother.” Sonny, Lela and Frankie quietly leave the room, allowing the siblings to spend time with their mother.

Damian hugs and kisses Luna. “I thought you were gone for good, mother. I was scared.” Luna responds “So was I. Andre used werewolves to drain me, attempting to steal my powers. I’m sure he’s mad that he failed. He is under the incorrect assumption that I also hold the same power that you possess.” Damian squeezes Luna’s hand and gives her a bright smile. “I’m glad that you survived to have the reunion that you so longed for. Selene?”

Damian stands and moves away. Selene moves from where she was standing to slowly sit on the side of the bed next to Luna, in the spot that Damian has just vacated. Tears fill her eyes as she softly says “Hello, momma.” Luna’s eyes are also filled with tears, happiness beaming from her face. This is the moment that she had dreamed of for so long, a chance to reconcile with her daughter.

Tears flow down Selene’s face as she takes Luna’s hand in her own. “Momma? I…” tears threaten to drown out her words, so she tries again. “I…am so, so sorry for all the wasted years. I’m sorry I blamed you and Papa when it clearly was Andre’s fault. He’s to blame for everything, but I was too stubborn and young and stupid to realize it. I don’t know if you can forgive me, but…” Luna squeezes Selene’s hand, cutting off her words. “Nothing to forgive, love. Just know that Phillippe and I have always loved you, will always love you. The two of us are so proud of you! It’s never too late for us to rebuild our relationship.” Selene leans down and places a gentle kiss to Luna’s cheek, a look of happiness on her face. “But why are you here? Shouldn’t you be at home, fighting Titan?” Selene shakes her head. “I’ve sent reinforcements from other realms and clusters. They can hold on for a while longer. Right now, I’d rather be here with my mother.” Luna gives Selene a bright smile, which Selene returns.

Rayne stands alone on the other side of the room, looking like a lost, scared little boy. He turns wild eyes on each of his siblings, as if looking for a way to escape.< /p> Selene softly explains to Luna who Rayne is, as well as his time growing up in the Hell caves. “He’s been badly abused, momma. Andre raped the two of us repeatedly as we were growing up. The difference is that I had you and papa, Rayne was all alone.”

Luna raises a hand towards Rayne. “Son, please come here.” While Rayne’s panic is evident in every line of his being, Damian quietly but slowly walks over to him, a gentle smile on his lips. He locks eyes on Rayne and whispers “It’s okay, brother. Mother would never hurt you. She’s kind, you will grow to love her. Here, let me walk you over…” Damian gently places a hand at the small of Rayne’s back, steering him forward until they come to a stop opposite Selene on the side of the bed.

“Hello, Rayne. I’m your mother, Luna. I’m so happy to meet you.” Rayne shoots Damian a look, who returns the look with a cock of his head towards Luna. Rayne slowly lowers himself until he is seated next to Luna, his body refusing to relax. Luna slowly moves her hand until she places it on Rayne’s arm in a steadying gesture. “I’m not going to hurt you, son. I’m so glad to meet you. I’m sorry that we have been apart for all these years.” Rayne gives a short nod, his eyes locked on Luna’s. He speaks in that strange language that he used earlier, but Luna seems to understand his words.

“No, love. This is not my home. This is Damian’s home. Selene and I are just visiting.” Rayne turns towards Damian with a quizzical look on his face. “I live far away, in an ice castle. You are welcome to come and stay with me, if you wish. But for right now, while things are so unsettled, I think it’s best that we stay here with Selene and Damian.” Rayne continues to speak, his eyes darting between the four of them. Luna nods her head. “Yes, you may stay with me. Damian and Selene have their own rooms.”

Rayne sighs and slowly makes his way to the other bed in the corner, lowering himself down on the quilt. The moment his head hits the pillow, his eyes close and his breathing levels out. For the first time since they met him, he seems relaxed.

“Mother, what is that strange language he is using? I’ve never heard it before.” Damian asks, confused. Luna smiles. “It is a version of an Ork dialect. I bet someone else who was in the Caves taught him to speak in their own language. He then converted it to English, which he seems hesitant to use. Here.” Luna reaches out both hands, placing them on Damian’s and Selene’s arms. She chants a few sentences in Vampirese and then smiles. “There. Now you are both fluent in Ork. You will also be able to speak to him as well. That should make him feel more comfortable.” Damian thinks for a moment and then says “I’m glad, mother. But for now, I’m going to stop by Draven’s room to check on him before going to my suite. I will send Janus in with blood bags. That way, the two of you can have a chance to catch up.” Damian circles the bed, kissing both his mother and sister. “Goodnight to the two of you.” They reply in kind as Damian makes his way to the door.

After searching out and giving directions to Janus, Damian knocks on Draven’s door. Thomas opens the door, relieved to see Damian standing there. He whispers “Please, come in, Damian.”

Once in the outer chamber of the suite, Thomas turns sad eyes to his father-in-law. “I’m glad you stopped by. Draven has been in bed shaking and crying since he arrived. He won’t let me near him. Maybe you can calm him down?”

Damian gives Thomas a hug. “I’ll do my best, Thomas. I know how much you love him. Don’t take it personally. I know my mates have a hard time with me when I have a heavy session with Andre.” Thomas nods and thanks Damian again. “I’ll just be out here, sleeping on the couch. Please keep me updated.” Damian nods and heads to the bedroom.

He finds Draven curled up in a ball, crying. He softly calls out “Drave? It’s your father.” Draven makes a croaking sound as he reaches out his hand to Damian, who takes that as a sign that he wants his company. Damian crawls into bed with Draven, pulling him close. Draven’s tears speed up, his red eyes searching out Damian’s.< /p> “Ffffather? I…” Draven wails, the sound breaking Damian’s heart. “I…can’t. I ttttried but IIIII…” Damian places a kiss to Draven’s forehead, shushing him. “It’s okay, Drave. It’s all going to be okay…”

“NO! No…” Drave shakes his head, tears falling faster. “I tried to let him near, butttttt…” Draven wails again, burying his head in Damian’s neck. “…I can’t let him, he can’t…” Damian begins to rock Draven, trying his hardest to get him to calm down. In the end, he just hangs on to his son, absorbing his anguish.

An hour goes by, then two. Draven’s sobs slow to a steady stream of shuddering sighs, as if he is struggling to catch his breath. Damian continues to whisper words of encouragement and love to Draven, still rocking his boy. Suddenly Draven calls out “I CAN’T take it ANYMORE! I don’t want Thomas to touch me! I don’t want ANYONE to touch me, except…YOU…”

A sudden awkward silence takes over the room. Finally, Damian softly says “Drave…”

“I KNOW!” Draven pulls back enough to look deep into Damian’s eyes. “I…know it’s WRONG! But you…” Draven shakes his head and tries again. “YOU make me feel safe and loved! YOU are the one that I want holding me, touching me! I DREAM about you touching me! I know it’s sick and wrong, but I can’t help myself! I WANT YOU INSIDE OF ME!!!”

Silence once again takes over the room. Stunned to his core, Damian again tries to speak. “Baby, I know that our relationship has changed over time. Andre has warped us, turning us into something closer than a typical father/son relationship. But baby, at the end of the day, I’m still your father, and I’ll always be. You see me and you think of safety, of a safe harbor to hide in. But in the end, that is all I can ever be. Thomas…”

Draven shakes his head. “He’s become a stranger to me. He touches me and cold chills run through me. I long for you, for your touch. I want to be in YOUR arms! I want you loving me!”

At a loss for what to do, Damian pulls away from Draven, throwing back the covers. “Come with me, Drave. It will be alright…”

The two of them pass by a sleeping Thomas and end up in Damian’s suite. His mates are overjoyed to see them, but they look confused when Damian tucks Draven into their large bed. Once again wrapping his arms around Draven, he says to him “Go to sleep, love. We will talk tomorrow.” Draven lays his head down on Damian’s chest and sighs, quickly falling to sleep.

“The three of you need to help me. I have no idea what to do with our boy.” After explaining to the three of them what happened, Adam shrugs his shoulders. “I’m not surprised that he no longer sees you as his father, Dam. He sees you as a lover, someone whom he can hide from the horrors that Andre has inflicted on him. Andre has forced you to take Drave on more than one occasion. When he thinks of that, all he sees is a loving partner, not his father forced to rape him. He’s trying his best to justify everything by making things normal, when they truly are not. I feel sorry for Thomas. It’s going to take a long time to change that boy’s mind.”

Tommy looks at Damian and sighs. “I know that this is a unique situation, Dam, but I’m glad that, at the end of the day, you are there for him. Our boy needs so much right now. He needs to know he is loved by the people closest to him. We will all make him understand tomorrow.”

Kensi nods. “Ever since this war began, ever since Drave was old enough, Andre has forced the two of you to experience things that no other father/son pairing should ever have to face. It became normal for Drave to feel certain things that he feels guilty for. You and the poor boy have been through hell together. I’d worry about him if he DIDN’T develop feelings for you! It’s the one way that he has to hold onto his sanity.”

Damian thanks the three of them. “I knew you three would understand and not judge him. The poor boy needs all the love he can get right now. I just wish he were reaching out to Thomas for it instead of me.”

Tommy places a kiss on Drave’s cheek, then Damian’s. “All will be well, sweetheart. Why don’t we all try to get some sleep? It will be a long evening tomorrow.” They all kiss each other then lay down together, the bed finally feeling like home with all of them in it.

The next day, the four of them have a long talk with Draven. They finally get him to understand that he needs to do his best to see Damian as his father, instead of his lover. When the topic of Thomas comes up, Draven balks. “I CAN’T go on pretending that nothing has changed! I DON’T want him to touch me! I want a divorce!” The four try to calm him, try to get him to see things from Thomas’s point of view, but Draven digs in his heels. “It’s OVER! I want to pretend I never got married! I want no one to touch me, except for father, and now you tell me that’s not possible! So, I’ll go off by myself and be alone…” Draven stands and storms out of the room, leaving his parents upset and confused over what to do next.

Draven stomps into his suite and, seeing Thomas at his desk, ignores him and heads to his closet. Pulling down a suitcase, he proceeds to fill the case with his clothes.

Thomas walks into the room, fear on his face. “Where are you going, Drave?” Draven shakes his head, refusing to answer. When he has filled a few cases, he drags them to the door. “We are through, Thomas. Never speak to me again. I will speak to my grandfather about a divorce; he will give you all the details you need to have. Goodbye, Thomas.” Thomas trails after Draven, stepping in front of him to cut off his exit. “Drave, why? What have I done? Have you stopped loving me? Why are you doing this to us?”

Drave reaches out and pushes Thomas away. “The very thought of you touching me makes me want to throw up! Stay away from me! I can’t…NO! STOP FOLLOWING ME! I’m leaving…” Draven drags the bags out of the room, slamming the door behind him.

He finds himself making a wrong turn and accidentally walks into Luna’s suite. Luna laughs when she sees him. “I knew you would stop by today, son. I see you have left your love. Care to tell an old lady why you are running away?”

The next thing Draven knows, he’s crying in Luna’s arms. “…and father doesn’t want me like that! He says I’m just his son. And the very thought of Thomas touching me makes me sick…” Luna places a hand on Draven’s forehead and suddenly his tears stop. Clarity fills his mind, not wild thoughts. Luna smiles. “Feel a bit better, son?” Draven nods. “I have an idea. How about you go to my ice castle for a few days, get away from it all. I will be staying here with my children. You will be alone, except for my security team, to think and gain wisdom and clarity. What do you say?” Draven thinks a second and nods. “I thank you, Luna. It will be a pleasure to get away.” Luna then nods, and Draven finds himself in the living room of the castle, warm clothing covering his body.

Luna sends out a message to Damian, Adam, Tommy, Kensi and Thomas, letting them know where Draven is, and that he is using the time away to think. They all give relieved expressions of thanks to Luna, who sends them her love. To Thomas she sends “Be patient, my boy. In the end, he will come home to you.”
A week goes by swiftly. Draven spent the majority of his time sleeping, curled up under thick fur blankets. When awake, he was deep in thought, trying to come to terms with his relationship with his father. How can he go back to seeing his father as ONLY his parent, when Andre has forced him to see his father as ‘Damian the lover’ that is always there for him?

Draven is in the middle of fantasying about his father when Ray suddenly appears in the room, scaring Draven. “Grandfather! What are you doing here?”

Ray runs his hand through his curls in frustration. “I know that you are going through a lot right now, son, but you’re needed at home.” When Draven starts to interrupt, Ray raises his voice and speaks over him. “You took on a position of importance in this family, Draven. I need you to step up and fulfill your destiny.” Ray sees the look of frustration brewing in Draven’s eyes, but he doesn’t give his grandson a chance to articulate it out loud. “Everyone is doing their part, and I’m still overloaded. I’m sure you would rather hide here in Luna’s castle, content to go on pretending that everything is alright. It’s not. You need to put your issues behind you and step up…”

Draven sits up, interrupting with “I’ve been meaning to talk to you about Thomas. I want a divorce…”

Ray, at a loss for patience, throws back his head and screams “DRAVEN!”

Silence fills the room. Ray, his tone icy continues. “I don’t care about your personal life right now, Draven. YOU WILL return to the mansion, and YOU WILL fulfill your duties to the very best of your ability, DO YOU HEAR ME?”

Draven, thoroughly chastised by his grandfather, stutters quietly, his body shaking “I…I will, grandfather.”

Ray, his eyes narrowed and his hands on his hips, yells “MIKEY!” and the two of them are sent to Draven’s office, along with Draven’s packed suitcases. The two stare at each other for a long moment before Draven lowers himself slowly into a seat and picks up a handful of papers, starting to work. Mikey suddenly appears in the doorway. She nods her head towards the hallway, and Ray follows her when she turns to leave.

Once they arrive in the library, Mikey whispers “I heard that! You snarled at the boy! I know you are stressed, Ray, but…” Ray places his hand gently on Mikey’s arm, shaking his head. “I had to snap him out of it, sweetheart. You didn’t see him. He looked so lost lying there in that bed, like his life was over. I know it was cruel of me, but it would’ve been crueler to let him just lie there and waste away. Somebody had to be the heavy, I’m happy for once that it was me.” Mikey gives Ray a lopsided fond smile and shakes her head. “Always looking out for all of us, that’s my big strong man!” Ray smirks back at her, winking one eye. “Yep, that’s me! Always the one in charge.” Ray then reaches around Mikey and lays his hand down on her ass cheek, the smacking sound loud in the room. “So, what say the two of us go upstairs and let me ‘save’ you, hum?” Mikey winks at Ray and then turns, running out of the room, causing Ray to chase her all the way to their suite…

THREE MONTHS LATER…

Please come now I think I’m falling
I’m holding to all I think is safe
It seems I found the road to nowhere
And I’m trying to escape
I yelled back when I heard thunder
But I’m down to one last breath
And with it let me say, let me say
Hold me down, I’m six feet from the edge and I thinking
Maybe six feet ain’t so far down
Creed—One Last Breath

Tommy feels like the heroine of a Hollywood ‘B’ horror movie as she runs through the first floor of the mansion, a cold sweat running down the back of her neck. From behind her she hears the clang of a robot as it runs down the stairs from the second floor.

“Run, rabbit, run.”

Tommy runs into the library. Pulling back a rug in front of the fireplace, she tries to pull up the metal latch on the old trap door.

All the lights in the mansion go out.

Once again, she tries to grab hold of the slippery handle in the dark. Her hands are shaking so badly they slide off, causing her to swear under her breath. After a few fumbling tries in the dark, she finally manages to pull the handle upward, the creaking door protesting as it is pulled upright.

Tommy feels for the old wooden ladder just inside the trap door, a relic that survived the mansion fire so many years ago. She takes a few steps downward before reaching back up to shut the door.

She finds it stuck in the open position.

Tommy tries a few times and then decides it’s not worth the hassle, too much time wasted. She just needs to outrun Titan through the passageway and out the door leading to the garden.

Outrun a robot. Easy, huh? Bullshit…

“Run, rabbit, run!” Splinters fill Tommy’s bare feet as she finally steps on the bottom rung of the ladder. She lurches and fumbles to her right, her hands searching for the light switch in the dark.

She finds a flashlight hanging on a chain instead. Grabbing it, she turns it on as she turns and bolts forward through the boxes and wine crates, past closed doors on either side of her in the narrow dirt passageway.

The smell of mold fills her nostrils as loose dirt clings to her feet. She hears rats squeaking, feels a few of them scurrying against her feet as she runs. The air feels thin, causing her to gasp for air as the walls feel as if they are closing in around her.

The ladder clangs, metal on wood behind her. A bolt of plasma shoots past her, a wild miss. Tommy gathers her courage and runs faster, desperate to put more space between herself and Titan.

“Tommy Joe? Why are you so scared? Just because you are the last member of the Toros to be captured? Come quietly and I’ll be nice to you...”

Tears fill Tommy’s eyes as her hands shake even harder, the flashlight making wavey lines on the debris around her. Titan’s correct—she is the last to be captured. Everyone, even Damian, has been captured by Titan and her hoard of robots. Her children, Adam…Tommy blinks back her tears. She prays that she will get to see them again…

Suddenly Tommy sees the exit a few yards away. She fumbles with a few boxes that are in front of the exit, kicking and pulling them out of her path. If she could just get to the door…

“I’m ready for rabbit stew!”

Her hand touches the handle.

Locked.

Tommy reaches the wall and fumbling, finds a light switch. Flipping it upright, the lights in the narrow corridor spring to life, the light blinding Tommy for a moment. If she can only…

The spare key.

Hanging on the wall.

Tommy grabs it and pushes it into the lock, turning it until the old door groans as it slowly opens. Tommy pulls out the key and runs through the door, turning to lock it behind her.

Titan grabs the handle on the other side.

Tommy yanks with all her might and hears the lock finally click into place, locking Titan in the tunnel. She turns and runs up a few stairs until she is suddenly in the rose garden at the back of the mansion.

The door behind her shatters into a million pieces.

Tommy, her breath almost gone, runs towards the woods at the back of the property. Her heart skips a beat as she passes the graves of her children, long ago interred in the garden.

“I see you, rabbit. You’ve led me on a wild chase so far. Too bad you’re about to be caught…”

Plasma bolts fly past Tommy, one bouncing off her arm, a trail of blood running down to her fingers as pain radiates from the injury to her body. She dodges to the right, her feet slipping on the wet grass. Tommy is within feet of lunging into the woods when three robots suddenly appear out of the brush, coming to a stop in front of her. Tommy tries to dodge to the left when she hears Titan give out a series of loud squeaks and clicks. Out of the corner of her eye she sees one of the robots shoot something into the air. The next thing she knows, a heavy net brings her skidding to her knees, a horrified wail leaving her lungs.

Titan stops in front of Tommy, a shriek of glee filling the air as she takes in the scene in front of her. Two of the robots approach Tommy from the sides, tightening the net before she can manage to climb out from under it.

Titan turns back into her humanoid form, her hands on her hips as she surveys her prey. “You were a worthy adversary, Tommy Joe, but your time has come to join the rest of your family. Don’t you want to see your children? They are all fine, living in cages. All of you will meet your end soon. Come.” She makes more clicks and squeaks, and a robot picks Tommy up, even as she tries to struggle out of his hold. Titan says a few words and the five of them head for the Silver realm.